AspenIcarusV8 0 Ref

Aspen Icarus
Reference Guide
I carus Evaluation Engine ( I EE) V8.0
Version V8.0
December 2012
Generation No: 14 (G14)
Chapters with G13 in the footer are new for this edition. Chapter generation numbers are also
indicated in the Table of Contents.
Copyright (c) 2001-2012 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
AspenTech, and the aspen leaf logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology,
Inc., Burlington, MA.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
This manual is intended as a guide to using AspenTechs software. This documentation contains
AspenTech proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without
the prior consent of AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely
responsible for the proper use of the software and the application of the results obtained.
Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the
software may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user.
ASPENTECH MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION, ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Aspen Technology, Inc.
Burlington, MA 02141-2201
USA
Phone: 781-221-6400
Toll Free: (888) 996-7100
Website http://www.aspentech.com
2 iii
Preface
Aspen Technologys Icarus Office develops and provides knowledge-based
process evaluation technology, software, and services.
Icarus systems are based on a core design, estimating, scheduling, and expert
systems technology. They automatically develop preliminary design-based
economic results - early from minimal scope, and refined designs and
economics later in the project. Icarus systems are strategically located and
linked into the project knowledge stream of concurrent design 0 after process
simulation and before detailed design, CAD/CAE, detailed scheduling and
project control. This unique technology provides:
Key answers quickly
Dramatic reductions in evaluation time and resources
The best, most economical process and plant design for funding/
bidding decisions and project evaluation.
Aspen economic evaluation systems (including Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, and Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator) are in
daily use. These systems have become industry-standard tools and are used
by discerning project evaluators in owner companies and engineering design
and construction firms in more than 1,000 locations in over 30 countries.
The Technology Behind
Icarus Systems
Icarus systems are based on mathematical modeling technology which has
been developed, refined and used since Icarus Corporation was founded in
1969. Aspen Technology purchased Icarus Corporation in 2000.
Stored in Icarus systems are design and cost models for:
Over 250 kinds of liquid, gas and solids handling and
processing equipment
More than 60 kinds of plant bulk items
Approximately 70 kinds of site preparation work
Nearly a dozen types of buildings.
Installation bulk models, used to develop installation quantities and field
manpower and costs to install equipment and plant bulks, round out the
bank of design and cost models. To support these design and cost models,
Icarus systems contain design procedures and costs data for hundreds of
types of materials of construction for general process equipment, vessel shells
and internals, tubing, castings, linings, packings, clad plates, piping, steel and
electrical bulks.
iv 2
Scope of Document
This document is designed as a reference tool for Icarus project evaluation
systems. The document is best referenced when you have a question about
system input.
How to Use This Document
This document uses generation numbers to track the history of updated
information within each chapter. New versions of this document are assigned a
new generation number, which increments by 1 (for example, G12).
The purpose of these numbers is to ensure you are looking at the latest
information. If you have a previous version of this document, you can compare
the numbers to confirm you have the most up-to-date information available.
Generation numbers are located on every page in the lower-inside corner as
well as in the Table of Contents. The generation number assigned to the latest
version of this document is located in the Copyright page.
A Note to Icarus System Users
Like Icarus systems, this document was designed using your ideas and
suggestions. Please contact the Aspen Technology Icarus Office if you have any
questions or comments regarding this document.
Related Documentation
In addition to this reference manual, AspenTech provides the following
documentation for Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.0.
Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.0 Release Notes (Whats New, Whats Fixed,
and Known Issues)
Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.0 Installation Guide
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer V8.0 User Guide
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator V8.0 User Guide
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator V8.0 User Guide
Icarus Technology Application Programming Interface
Manpower Productivity Expert User Guide
2 v
Online Technical Support
Center
AspenTech customers with a valid license and software maintenance
agreement can register to access the Online Technical Support Center at:
http://support.aspentech.com
You use the Online Technical Support Center to:
Access current product documentation.
Search for technical tips, solutions, and frequently asked questions (FAQs).
Search for and download application examples.
Search for and download service packs and product updates.
Submit and track technical issues.
Search for and review known limitations.
Send suggestions.
Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support e-Bulletins. These
e-Bulletins proactively alert you to important technical support information
such as:
Technical advisories.
Product updates.
Service Pack announcements.
Product release announcements.
Phone and E-mail
Customer support is also available by phone, fax, and e-mail for customers
who have a current support contract for their product(s). Toll-free charges are
listed where available; otherwise local and international rates apply.
For the most up-to-date phone listings; please see the Online Technical
Support Center at:
http://support.aspentech.com/
Support Centers Hours of Operation
North America 8:00 - 20:00 Eastern time
South America 9:00 - 17:00 Local time
Europe 8:30 - 18:00 Central europe time
Asia and Pacific Region 9:00 - 17:30 Local time
vi 2
Contents (G11) iii
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
The Technology Behind
Icarus Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Scope of Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
How to Use This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
A Note to Icarus System Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Online Technical Support Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Phone and E-mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Introduction to Process Equipment (G6) 5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Process Equipment Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
List of Process Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Agitators (G6) 1
Agitators (AG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Agitated Tanks (AT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Blenders (BL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Kneaders (K). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Mixers (MX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Compressors (G6) 1
Air Compressors (AC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Gas Compressors (GC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fans, Blowers (FN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Drivers (G11) 1
Electrical Motors (MOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Turbines (TUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Heat Transfer (G10) 1
Heat Exchangers (HE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Reboilers (RB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Icarus Supported TEMA Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Packing, Linings (G6) 1
Introduction to Packing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction to Lining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Suggested Lining Difficulty Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Contents (G11)
iv Contents (G11)
Pumps (G10) 1
Centrifugal Pumps (CP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Gear Pumps (GP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Piston, Other Positive Displacement Pumps (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Pump Efficiencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Towers, Columns (G6) 1
Introduction to Towers and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Double Diameter Towers (DDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Single Diameter Towers (TW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Vacuum Systems (G6) 1
Condensers (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ejectors (EJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Vacuum Pumps (VP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vessels (G10) 1
Horizontal Tanks (HT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Vertical Tanks (VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Crushers, Mills and Stock Treatment (G6) 1
Crushers (CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Flakers (FL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mills (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Stock Treatments (ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Drying Systems (G6) 1
Crystallizers (CRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Evaporators (E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Wiped Film Evaporators (WFE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Air Dryers (AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Dryers (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Drum Dryers (DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rotary Dryers (RD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Tray Drying Systems (TDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Solids Conveying (G10) 1
Conveyors (CO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Cranes (CE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Elevators, Lifts (EL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Feeders (FE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Hoists (HO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Scales (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Separation Equipment (G7) 1
Centrifuges (CT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Dust Collectors (DC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Filters (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Separation Equipment (SE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Thickeners (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Contents (G11) v
Screens (VS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Utility Service Systems (G6) 1
Cooling Towers (CTW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Steam Boilers (STB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Heating Units (HU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Refrigeration Units (RU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Electrical Generators (EG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Water Treatment Systems (WTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Flares and Stacks (G6) 1
Flares (FLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Stacks (STK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Introduction to Plant Bulks (G6) 1
Introduction to Plant Bulks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
List of Plant Bulks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Piping (G10) 1
Piping Plant Bulks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter (Old) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter (New). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Utility Piping Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Utility Station Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Default Piping Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Pipe Materials - Ferrous Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Pipe Materials - Non-Ferrous Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Plastic and Resin Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Lined Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Icarus Pipe Fabrication, Erection and Testing Procedures . . . . . . . . 65
Valve and Fitting Options for Installation Bulk Piping . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Valve Trim Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Civil (G8) 1
Civil Plant Bulks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Foundation Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Typical Structure Live Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Soil Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Specifying Seismic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Specifying Wind Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
How Icarus Calculates Wind Load and Seismic Shear . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Example of Equipment Foundation Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Example of Pile Foundation for an Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Steel (G6) 1
Steel Plant Bulks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Instrumentation (G10) 1
Instrumentation Plant Bulks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
vi Contents (G11)
Sensor Loop Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Remote Control Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Transmitter Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Electrical (G13) 1
Electrical Plant Bulks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Schematic of Transmission Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Substation Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Electrical & Control Hook-Ups for Electric Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Power Distribution Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Wire Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
UK, EU, and JP Country Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Electrical Class/Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
International Electrical Code (IEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Insulation and Fireproofing (G8) 1
Insulation Plant Bulks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Insulation Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Fireproofing Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Insulation Schedules - System Default Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Customizing Insulation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Paint (G6) 1
Introduction to Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Paint Plant Bulks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
How Icarus Systems Paint Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Site Development (G6) 1
Introduction to Site Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Demolition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Drainage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Earthwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Landscaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Roads - Slabs - Paving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Piling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Railroads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Buildings (G6) 1
Introduction to Buildings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Adding a Building. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Building Types and Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Default floor Heights/Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Building Construction Range Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Calculating Building Costs and Labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Quoted Equipment and Libraries (G6) 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Quoted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Contents (G11) vii
User Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Material Selections (G10) 1
ASME Design Code - Plate Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ASME Design Code - Clad Plate Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
ASME Design Code - Tube Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ASME Non-Ferrous Tube Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
BS Design Code - Plate Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
BS Design Code - Clad Plate Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
BS Design Code - Tube Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
JIS Design Code - Plate Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
JIS Design Code - Tube Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
DIN Design Code - Plate Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DIN Design Code - Tube Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
EN 13445 Design Code - Plate Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
EN 13445 Design Code - Tube Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
GB 150 Design Code - Plate Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
GB 150 Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
GB150 Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
GB150 Design Code - Tube Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
GB150 Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Lining Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Casting Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Packing Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Units of Measure (G6) 1
Introduction to Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Project Specifications and their Use of Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . 8
Field Manpower Titles and Wage Rates (G13) 1
US Country Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
UK Country Base *** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
JP Country Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
EU Country Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ME Country Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Engineering (G13) 1
Design and Construction Engineering Disciplines and Wage Rates . . 2
Engineering Expenses and Indirects (Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Standard Engineering Drawing Types (Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Construction Equipment(G4) 1
Introduction to Construction Equipment Rental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Construction Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
viii Contents (G11)
Base Indices (G13) 1
Base Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Code Accounts (G10) 1
Introduction to Code Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Indirect Codes and Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Direct Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Database Relations (G10) 1
Sequence Numbers of Attributes in Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Relationship of Database Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
DETAILS Relation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DESIGN Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
REMARKS Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PROJDATA Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
NEWCOA Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
EQRENT Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CRWSCH Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CSTCTRL Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
REPGRP Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CNTRCT Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
COMPONENT Relation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
INDIRECTS Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
K (CUSSPC)-TABLE Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
R-TABLE Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
QSUM Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
STORED REPORTS Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
STORED QUERIES Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CERATE Relation (F-Table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
T-Table Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
U-Table Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
V-Table Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
W-Table Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
X-Table Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Y-Table Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Z-Table Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Indirect Codes and Descriptions. . . . . 27
Attribute Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Icarus Technology (G10) 1
Introduction to Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Project Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Equipment Fabricate/Ship Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Barchart Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Process Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Notes for Defining the Standard Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Notes for Defining the PLC Control Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Contents (G11) ix
Overview of System Input Specifications for Power Distribution. . . . 27
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Usage Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Reporting of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Cost Reporting: Currency and System Base Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Construction Overhead - Prime Contractor Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Contracts: Description/Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Reserved (G7) 1
Glossary (G5) 1
x Contents (G11)
1 Introduction to Process Equipment (G6) 1-5
This chapter contains information on the following topics:
Introduction
Process Equipment Categories
List of Process Equipment
1 Introduction to Process
Equipment (G6)
1-6 1 Introduction to Process Equipment (G6)
Introduction
Chapters 2 through 16 describe the process equipment available in
Icarus systems. The chapters are organized as the equipment appears in
the systems.
Liquid and gas equipment
Solids handling equipment
Off-site and packaged equipment
Process Equipment Categories
Icarus process equipment is divided into the following categories. Each
category is assigned an item symbol for identification purposes.
Item
Symbol Description
Item
Symbol Description
AC Air Compressor HE Heat Exchanger
AD Air Dryer HO Hoist
AG Agitator HT Horizontal Tank
AT Agitated Tanks HU Heating Unit
BL Blender K Kneader
C Condenser LIN Lining
CE Crane M Mill
CO Conveyor MOT Motor/Motor Reducer
CP Centrifugal Pump MX Mixer
CR Crusher P Pump
CRY Crystallizer PAK Packing
CT Centrifuge R Reactor
CTW Cooling Tower RB Reboiler
D Dryer RD Rotary Drum
DC Dust Collector RU Refrigeration Unit
DD Drum Dryer S Scale
DDT Double Diameter Tower SE Separation Equipment
E Evaporator ST Stock Treatment
EG Electric Generator STB Steam Boiler
EJ Ejector STK Stack
EL Elevator T Thickener
F Filter TDS Tray Drying System
FE Feeder TUR Turbine
FL Flaker TW Single Diameter Tower
FLR Flare VP Vacuum Pump
FN Fan VS Screen
FU Furnace VT Vertical Tank
List of Process Equipment
The following is a list of process equipment by chapter and category. The
process equipment descriptions in chapters 2 through 16 include some of the
entry fields for defining process equipment. The descriptions include the
minimum and maximum values and the defaults. Default values appear
between asterisks (*).
Chapter 2: Agitators
Agitators (AG)
Agitated Tanks (AT)
GC Gas Compressor WFE Wiped Film Evaporator
GP Gear Pump WTS Water Treatment System
Item Type Description
FIXED PROP Fixed propeller gear motor type agitator
PORT PROP Portable propeller agitator
DIRECT Portable direct drive agitator
GEAR DRIVE Portable gear drive agitator
MECH SEAL Agitator, mechanical seal, variable diameter
ANCHOR Fixed mount, gear drive, anchor, stuffing box
PULP STOCK Pulp stock agitator
ANCHOR REV Sanitary reversing anchor agitator
COUNT ROT Sanitary counter-rotating agitator
HIGH SHEAR Sanitary highshear homogenizing agitator
SAN FIXED Sanitary fixed propeller/turbine mixer
SAN PORT Sanitary port. propeller/turbine mixer
MIXER Agitated tank - enclosed
REACTOR Agitated tank - enclosed, jacketed
OPEN TOP Agitated tank - open top
FLOAT CELL Floatation machine
COND CELL Floatation conditioning cell
MACH PULP On machine pulper
OFF MACH Off machine pulper
Item
Symbol Description
Item
Symbol Description
Blenders (BL)
Kneaders (K)
Mixers (MX)
Chapter 3: Compressors
Air Compressors (AC)
BLENDER Rotary drum blender
ROTARY Rotary double-cone blender
KETTLE Sanitary kettle blender without agitator
ROTARYBOWL Sanitary rotary bowl blender
MSHELSTAG Sanitary multi-shell staggered blender
STATIONARY Stationary upright double-arm kneader
TILTING Tilting double-arm kneader
VAC TILTING Vacuum tilting double-arm kneader
EXTRUDER Cylinder type extruder with variable drive
MULLER EXT Muller type extruder mixer
PAN Pan mixer
PORT PROP Portable propeller mixer
FIXED PROP Fixed propeller gear motor type mixer
SIGMA Double-arm sigma blade mixer
SPIRAL RIB Spiral ribbon mixer
STATIC Static mixer
TWO ROLL Two-roll mixer
HIGH SPEED Sanitary high-speed Norman-type mixer
RIBBON Sanitary ribbon blender
PISTON HOM Sanitary piston-type homogenizer
SHEAR HOM Sanitary shear pump homogenizer
CENTRIF M Centrifugal air compressor with motor
CENTRIF T Centrifugal air compressor with turbine
RECIP GAS Reciprocating air compressor with gas engine
RECIP MOTR Reciprocating air compressor with motor
SINGLE 1 S Single reciprocating air compressor - 1 stage
SINGLE 2 S Single reciprocating air compressor - 2 stage
Gas Compressors (GC)
Fans, Blowers (FN)
Chapter 4: Drivers
Electrical Motors (MOT)
Turbines (TUR)
Chapter 5: Heat Transfer
Heat Exchangers (HE)
CENTRIF Centrifugal compressor - horizontal
CENTRIF IG Centrifugal - integrated gear
RECIP GAS Reciprocating compressor - integral gas engine
RECIP MOTR Reciprocating compressor
PROPELLER Propeller fan
VANEAXIAL Vaneaxial fan
CENTRIF Centrifugal fan
ROT BLOWER General purpose blower
CENT TURBO Heavy duty, low noise blower
OPEN Open drip-proof induction motor
SYNCHRON Synchronous motor
ENCLOSED Totally enclosed induction motor
EXP PROOF Explosion-proof (Class I Division I, hazardous)
VARY SPEED TEFC motor with variable speed drive
GAS Gas turbine with combustion chamber
CONDENSING Steam turbine driver, condensing type
NON COND Steam turbine driver, non-condensing
FLOAT HEAD Floating head shell and tube exchanger
FIXED T S Fixed tube sheet shell and tube exchanger
AIR COOLER Air cooling, free standing or rack-mounted
U TUBE U-tube shell and tube exchanger
Reboilers (RB)
Furnaces, Project Heaters (FU)
Chapter 6: Packing, Linings
TEMA EXCH Fixed tube, float. head, or u-tube exchanger
PRE ENGR Pre-engineered (standard) U-tube exchanger
CROSS BORE Cross-bore (all graphite) heat exchanger
SHELL TUBE Graphite tube/CS shell heat exchanger
FIN TUBE Finned double pipe heat exchanger
HEATER STM Bare pipe immersion coil-heating/cooling
SUC HEATER Tank suction
HEATER ELC Electric immersion tank heater
JACKETED Double pipe heat exchanger
SPIRAL PLT Spiral plate heat exchanger
ONE SCREW Thermascrew (Reitz) single screw conveyor
TWO SCREW Twin screw agitated/jacketed heat exchanger
WASTE HEAT Waste heat boiler
PLAT FRAM Plate and frame heat exchanger
CORRUGATED Sanitary double pipe exchanger
HOT WATER Water heater (shell+tube - hot water set)
MULTI P F Sanitary multizone plate+frame exchanger
STM HE MOD Sanitary direct steam heat module
KETTLE Kettle type reboiler with floating head
U TUBE U-tube kettle type reboiler
THERMOSIPH Thermosiphon type reboiler
HEATER A-frame type process furnace
BOX Box type process furnace
PYROLYSIS Pyrolysis unit
REFORMER Box type reformer, without catalyst
VERTICAL Vertical cylindrical process furnace
Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN)
Chapter 7: Pumps
Centrifugal Pumps (CP)
Gear Pumps (GP)
Piston, Other Positive Displacement Pumps (P)
PACKING Packing, variety of vessel packings
ACID BRICK Acid brick lining
MONOLITHIC Castable, refractory or gunned mix
OTHER Lining - other than acid brick, monolithic
API 610 API 610 pump (single or multi-stage)
ANSI Standard ANSI single stage pump
ANSI PLAST Plastic ANSI single stage pump
GEN SERV General service pump
CENTRIF Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
AXIAL FLOW Axial flow vertical pump
TURBINE Vertical sump pump - turbine impeller
API 610 IL API 610 in line pump
IN LINE General service in line pump
PULP STOCK Low consistency stock pump
MAG DRIVE Standard ANSI magnetic drive pump
CANNED Canned motor pump
- SAN PUMP Sanitary centrifugal pump
- FLUME PUMP Sanitary fluming pump with feeder hopper
GEAR Standard external gear rotary pump
CANNED RTR Canned rotary gear pump
MECH SEAL Mechanical seal gear pump
SIMPLEX Reciprocating simplex pump - steam driver
DUPLEX Reciprocating duplex pump - steam driver
TRIPLEX Triplex (plunger) pump - motor driver
DIAPHRAGM Diaphragm pump - TFE type
SLURRY Slurry pump
ROTARY Rotary (sliding vanes) pump
Chapter 8: Towers, Columns
Double Diameter Towers (DDT)
Single Diameter Towers (TW)
Chapter 9: Vacuum Systems
Condensers (C)
Ejectors (EJ)
RECIP MOTR Reciprocating positive displacement plunger pump
HD STOCK High density stock pump
ROTARYLOBE Sanitary rotary lobe pump
AIR DIAPH Sanitary air diaphragm pump
PACKED Packed double-diameter tower
TRAYED Trayed double-diameter tower
PACKED Packed tower
TRAYED Trayed tower
TRAY STACK Tray stack for tray tower
DC HE TW Direct contact heat exchanger tower
TS ADSORB Dual vessel temperature swing adsorber
BAROMETRIC Barometric condenser
SINGLE STG One stage ejector non-condensing
TWO STAGE Two stage ejector with one condenser
2 STAGE Two stage ejector non-condensing
4 STAGE B Four stage ejector with two condensers
4 STAGE Four stage ejector with one condenser
5 STAGE B Five stage ejector with one condense
Vacuum Pumps (VP)
Chapter 10: Vessels
Horizontal Tanks (HT)
Vertical Tanks (VT)
Chapter 11: Crushers, Mills and Stock
Treatment
WATER SEALS Water-sealed vacuum pump
MECHANICA Mechanical oil-sealed vacuum pump
MECH BOOST Mechanical booster vacuum pump
MULTI WALL Multi-wall horizontal drum
HORIZ DRUM Horizontal drum
JACKETED Jacketed horizontal drum
SAN TANK Sanitary horizontal drum
CYLINDER Vertical process vessel
MULTI WALL Multi-wall vertical process vessel
JACKETED Jacketed vertical process vessel
SPHERE Sphere - pressure or vacuum storage
SPHEROID Spheroid - pressure or vacuum storage
STORAGE Flat bottom storage tank, optional roof
CRYOGENIC Cryogenic storage tank
PLAST TANK Plastic storage tank (FRP or Haveg)
WOOD TANK Wooden storage tank
GAS HOLDER Low pressure gas storage vessel
CONE BTM Cone bottom storage bin
LIVE BTM Live bottom storage bin
CHEST REC Rectangular concrete tile chest
CHEST CYL Cylindrical concrete tile chest
CHEST MTL Metal tile chest
SAN TANK Sanitary vertical cylindrical vessel
SAN HOPPER Sanitary hopper assembly
Crushers (CR)
Flakers (FL)
Mills (M)
Stock Treatment (ST)
Chapter 12: Drying Systems
CONES Cone crusher - secondary crushing
GYRATORY Gyratory - primary and secondary crushing
ECCENTRIC Overhead eccentric jaw crusher
JAW Swing jaw crusher
ROTARY Rotary crusher
S ROLL LT Single roll crusher - light duty
S ROLL MED Single roll crusher - medium duty
S ROLL HVY Single roll crusher - heavy duty
SAWTOOTH Sawtooth roller crusher
REV HAMR Reversible hammermill
HAMMER MED Non-reversible hammermill, medium hard material
SWING HAMR Non-reversible hammermill, hard material
BRADFORD Bradford (rotary) breaker
S IMPACT Single rotor impact breaker
PULVERIZER Pulverizer - crushing soft material
ROLL RING Ring granulator
DRUM Rotary drum flaker
ATTRITION Attrition mill
AUTOGENOUS Autogenous mill
BALL MILL Ball mill with initial ball charge
ROD MILL Rod mill with initial rod charge
MIKRO PULV Mikro-pulverizer
ROLLER Roller mill
ROD CHARGR Rod charger for rod mill
REFINER Double disk refiner
DEFLAKE DK Plate or tackle type deflaker
DEFLAKE CN Conical type deflaker
Crystallizers (CRY)
Evaporators (E)
Wiped Film Evaporators (WFE)
Air Dryers (AD)
Dryers (D)
Drum Dryers (DD)
BATCH VAC Batch vacuum crystallizer
MECHANICAL Mechanical scraped-surface crystallizer
OSLO Oslo growth type crystallizer
FALL FILM Agitated falling film evaporator
FORCED CIR Forced circulation evaporator
LONG TUBE Long tube rising film evaporator
LONG VERT Long tube vertical evaporator
STAND VERT Standard vertical tube evaporator
STAND HOR Standard horizontal tube evaporator
THIN FILM Agitated thin film evaporator
WFE SYSTEM Agitated thin film evaporator - package system
AIR DRYER Dual tower desiccant air dryer
ATMOS TRAY Atmospheric tray batch dryer
VAC TRAY Vacuum tray batch dryer
PAN Agitated pan batch dryer
SPRAY Continuous spray drying system
SINGLE ATM Single atmospheric drum dryer
DOUBLE ATM Double atmospheric drum dryer
SINGLE VAC Single vacuum rotary drum dryer
S COOKCOOL Rotary drum cooker-cooler
Rotary Dryers (RD)
Tray Drying Systems (TDS)
Chapter 13: Solids Conveying
Conveyors (CO)
Cranes (CE)
Elevators, Lifts (EL)
DIRECT Direct rotary dryer
INDIRECT Indirect rotary dryer
JAC VACUUM Jacketed rotary vacuum dryer
VACUUM Conical rotary vacuum dryer
ATM SYSTEM Atmospheric tray dryer
VACUUM Vacuum tray dryer
TURBO Turbo tray drying system
VAC SYSTEM Vacuum tray dryer with condenser
OPEN BELT Belt conveyor - open
CLOSED BLT Belt conveyor - covered
APRON Apron conveyor - pans on endless chain
PNEUMATIC Pneumatic conveying system
ROLLER Roller conveyor (non-motorized)
SCREW Screw conveyor in a U-shaped trough
VIBRATING Vibrating conveyor with inclined trough
CENT BKT L Elevator-spaced bucket
CONT BKT L Elevator-continuous bucket
BRIDGE CRN Traveling bridge crane
HOIST Hoist with track beam
FREIGHT Freight elevator
PASSENGER Passenger elevator
Feeders (FE)
Hoists (HO)
Scales (S)
Chapter 14: Separation Equipment
Centrifuges (CT)
BELT Volumetric belt feeder
BIN ACTVTR Bin activator
ROTARY Rotary feeder
VIBRATING Vibrating feeder
WT LOSS Loss-in-weight feeder
DUMPER Sanitary dumper
SACK DUMP Sanitary bulk bag unloader
SAN SCREW Sanitary screw feeder
SAN BELT Sanitary weigh belt feeder
HOIST 5-speed electric hoist - motorized trolley
1 SPEED 1-speed electric hoist - no trolley
5 SPEED 5-speed electric hoist - no trolley
HAND GT Hand hoist - manual pull chain trolley
HAND PT Hand hoist - manual trolley
HAND NT Hand hoist - no trolley
BEAM SCALE Beam scale
BELT Conveyor belt scale
BENCH Bench scale - dial and beam
FULL FRAME Full floor scale - dial and beam
SEMI FRAME Semi frame floor scale - dial and beam
TANK SCALE Tank scale - weigh bridge and saddles
TRACK Track scale for rail cars
TRUCK Truck (lorry) scale
SAN FLOOR Sanitary floor scale - flush mounted
ATM SUSPEN Atmospheric suspended basket centrifuge
BATCH AUTO Auto batch filtering centrifuge
BATCH BOTM Batch bottom - suspended centrifuge
Dust Collectors (DC)
Filters (F)
TOP UNLOAD Batch top unload centrifuge
BOT UNLOAD Batch bottom unload centrifuge
BATCH TOP Batch top-suspended centrifuge
DISK High-speed disk centrifuge
RECIP CONV Reciprocating conveyor centrifuge
SCROLL CON Scroll conveyor centrifuge
SOLID BOWL Solid bowl centrifuge
SCREEN BWL Screen bowl centrifuge
TUBULAR High-speed tubular centrifuge
VIBRATORY Vibrating screen centrifuge
INVERTING Inverting filter centrifuge
CENTRF PRE Centrifugal precipitator
CLOTH BAY Baghouse with motor shakers
CYCLONE Cyclone dust collector
MULT CYCLO Multiple cyclone dust collector
ELC H VOLT High voltage electrical precipitator
ELC L VOLT Low voltage electrical precipitator
WASHERS Washer dust collector
PULSE SHKR Baghouse with injected pulsed air
CARTRIDGE Cartridge filter (5 micron cotton)
LEAF DRY Pressure leaf-dry filter
LEAF WET Pressure leaf-wet filter
PLATE FRAM Plate and frame filter
ROTY DISK Rotary disk filter
ROTY DRUM Rotary drum filter
SEWAGE Sewage filter
SPARKLER Sparkler filter
TUBULAR Tubular fabric filter (bank of 3)
SCROLL Scroll discharge centrifugal filter
WHITEWATER White water filter - centrifugal screen
METAL TRAP Sanitary in-line metal trap
RECL REEL Sanitary fluming reclaim reel
SAN AIR Culinary (sterile) air filter
SAN PIPE Sanitary pipe filter
SAN PRESS Sanitary filter press
SAN STEAM Culinary (sterile) steam filter
Separation Equipment (SE)
Thickeners (T)
Screens (VS)
Chapter 15: Utility Service Systems
Cooling Towers (CTW)
SAN STRAIN Sanitary pipe strainer
SEDIMENT
REMOVAL
Sediment Removal
WATER CYCL Water-only cyclone - mineral separation
OIL WATER Oil-water separator - API type
PULP STOCK Pulp stock centrifugal cleaner
THICKENER Thickener/clarifier
ONE DECK Single deck rectangular vibrating screen
TWO DECK Double deck rectangular vibrating screen
THREE DECK Triple deck rectangular vibrating screen
HUMMER Hummer type screen for fine separation
SIFTER 1 Single deck circular vibrating screen
SIFTER 2 Double deck circular vibrating screen
SIFTER 3 Triple deck circular vibrating screen
PRESSURE Pressure screen
LD STOCK Low consistency stock pump
BAR Mechanical bar screen
COOLING Cooling tower, less pumps, field assembly
COOLING WP Cooling tower, complete, field assembly
Item Description
PACKAGED Packaged cooling tower, factory assembly
Steam Boilers (STB)
Heating Units (HU)
Refrigeration Units (RU)
Electrical Generators (EG)
Water Treatment Systems (WTS)
Chapter 16: Flares and Stacks
Flares (FLR)
BOILER Packaged boiler unit
STM BOILER Field erected boiler unit
CYLINDER Process heater type dowtherm unit
CENT COMPR Centrifugal compression refrigeration unit
MECHANICAL Mechanical compression refrigeration unit
PORTABLE Portable electrical generator - diesel
TURBO GEN Electrical generator - steam turbine drive
DEMINERAL Two stage ion exchange water treatment
SOFTENING Hot lime, zeolite water treatment system
AERATOR Surface aerator
DERRICK Derrick-supported flare stack
GUYED Guyed flare stack
SELF SUPP Self-supported flare stack
HORIZONTAL Horizontal ground flare
Stacks (STK)
THRM OX LC Recuperative thermal oxidizer
STORAGE Vapor control flare for storage/loading
STACK Stack without flare tip
2 Agitators (G6) 2-1
Agitators (AG)
Agitated Tanks (AT)
Description of Agitated Tanks
Impeller Types - General Range of Basic Data**
Impeller Type References
Impeller Materials
Blenders (BL)
Kneaders (K)
Mixers (MX)
2 Agitators (G6)
2-2 2 Agitators (G6)
Agitators (AG)
Description Type
Portable, clamp-on, direct drive with explosion-proof
motor. Typically used for rapid disperation or fast
reactions.
Material:
*CS*, SS304, SS316, MONEL, RUBCV
Driver Power:
0.25 - 3 HP [0.75 - 2.22 KW]
DIRECT
Portable, clamp-on, gear drive with explosion-proof
motor. Typically used to keep solids in suspension,
medium viscosity blending and dissolving.
Material:
Driver Power:
0.25 - 5 HP; [0.75 - 3 KW]
GEAR DRIVE
Agitators (AG) - continued
Description Type
Fixed mount, top-entering, gear drive, mechanical
seal, explosion-proof motor. Typically used for low
speed mixing on closed tanks. Shaft enters tank
through a mechanical seal.
Material:
Impeller diameter:
Max: 10 FEET [3.00 M]
Driver power:
Min: 2.00 HP [1.5 KW];
Max: 200 HP [140 KW]
Impeller Speed:
Min: 1,200 RPM [1,000 RPM];
Max: 1,800 RPM [1,500 RPM]
Driver type:
*STD*- Standard motor
VFD- Variable frequency drive
Impeller type:
*MP3B5*
MECH SEAL
Fixed mount, top-entering, gear drive, anchor, stuffing
box, explosion-proof motor. Typically used for low
speed mixing on closed tanks.
Material:
Driver power:
0.75 - 5 HP [0.75 - 3 KW]
ANCHOR
Portable propeller mixer with motor to 7.5 HP
[5.5 KW].
Material:
*CS*, SS
Driver power:
0.33 - 7.5 HP [0.75 - 5.5 KW]
PORT PROP
Fixed propeller mixer with motor and gear drive to 100
HP [75 KW].
Includes motor, gear drive, shaft and impeller.
Material:
*CS*, SS
Driver power:
2 - 100 HP [1.5 - 75 KW]
FIXED PROP
Description Type
Top entry (for Open or Closed tanks) and Side entry
type. Includes motor driver, baseplate, bearings,
speed reducer, seals and a variety of shaft and
impeller configurations.
Material:
*CS*, SS403, SS316, SS321, SS347, 304L, 316L, NI,
INCNL, MONEL, HAST, TI
Driver type:
DRCT - Direct drive, no speed reduction
BELT- Belt driven speed reduction
VFD - Variable frequency drive
GEAR - Gear drive speed reduction
Liquid volume:
Enter Capacity or Impeller Diameter
Impeller diameter:
Enter Capacity or Impeller Diameter
Agitator orientation:
Default: *VTOP*
VTOP - Top entry agitator for open tanks
VTCL - Top entry agitator for closed tanks
SIDE - Side entry agitator
Driver speed:
Max: 3,600 RPM [3,000 RPM, metric units];
Default: *1,800* RPM: [*1,800* RPM, metric units]
Consistency - Air Dried%:
Max: 10.0; Default: *4.0*
Fluid density:
*62.4* PCF [*1000* KG/M3]
Seal type:
Default: *PACK*
PACK - Packing
MECH - Mechanical seal
PULP STOCK
Sanitary reversing anchor agitator
With large paddle, reversing motor, and proximity
sensors. Stainless steel material for sanitation.
If you require a foundation for this item, it must be
added.
Liquid volume:
MIN: 50 GALLONS [0.19 M3],
MAX: 1,000 GALLONS [3.78 M3]
Agitator diameter:
MIN: 32 INCHES [813 MM],
MAX: 72 INCHES [1,825 MM]
Agitator height:
ANCHOR REV
Description Type
Sanitary counter-rotating agitator
Two-piece agitator with center armed shaft and outer
frame parallel wall rotating opposite each other.
Stainless steel material for sanitation.
added.
Liquid volume:
MIN: 50 GALLONS [0.19 M3];
MAX: 1,000 GALLONS [3.78 M3].
Required to enter capacity.
Agitator diameter:
MIN: 32 INCHES [813
MM], MAX: 72 INCHES [1,825 MM]
Agitator height:
COUNT ROT
Sanitary highshear homogenizing agitator
Agitators perforated disk rotates to create shear for
homogenizing immiscible liquids. Used in the sanitary
industry.
added.
Liquid volume:
MAX: 1,500 GALLONS [5.67 M3].
Required: Enter either liquid volume or driver power.
Seal for shaft:
*NO*- Shaft seal not required
YES- Shaft seal is required
Driver power:
MIN: 0.33 HP [0.25 KW], 40 HP [30 KW].
Required: Enter either liquid volume or driver power.
Driver type:
*WXXDC*- Washdown, direct drive, CS
WVRDC - Washdown, VFD rated, direct drive, CS
WVCDC- Washdown, VFD controlled, direct dive,
CS
WXXDS - Washdown, direct drive, SS
WVRDS - Washdown, VFD rated, direct drive, SS
WVCDS - Washdown, VFD controlled, direct
drive, SS
TXXDC - TEFC, direct drive, CS
TVRDC - TEFC, VFD rated, direct drive, CS
TVCDC - TEFC, VFD controlled, direct drive, CS
- Continued on next page -
HIGH SHEAR
Description Type
HIGH SHEAR - continued
Impeller type:
*INTGH*- Integral head
RSDIH- Rotator stator w/ slotted disintegr. head
RSSQR- Rotator stator w/ high shear screen RSGEN-
Rotator stator w/ GP disintegrating head
Sanitary fixed propeller/turbine mixer.
Stainless steel material for total washdown capability
and no risk of open container contamination from
paint chips.
added.
Driver power:
MIN: 0.5 HP [0.375 KW], 25 HP [18.5]
Driver type:
*WVRGP*- Washdown, VFD rated, gear drive
WVCGP - Washdown, VFD controlled, gear drive
WXXGP- Washdown, gear drive
Impeller type:
*PROP*- propeller type impeller (not available
above 3 HP [2.22 KW])
TURB- turbine type impeller
No. of impellers:
*1*, MIN: 1, MAX: 2
Angle riser:
*NO*- Angle riser not required
YES- Angle riser is required
Mounting type:
*UNSLF*- Unsealed flange mounting
SLF- Sealed flange mounting
FLWB- Flange with bridge
SAN FIXED
Description Type
Sanitary port. propeller/turbine mixer

Stainless steel material for total washdown capability
and no risk of open container contamination from
paint chips. Quick-disconnect prop allows for easy
inspection.
Driver type selections allow you to choose between
gear or direct drives. Gear drives feature removable
shafts retained by a positive fit internal shaft coupling.
Direct drives have fixed, non-removable shafts with a
sealed entry at the mounting flange face for superior
sanitation.
added.
Driver power:
MIN: 0.33 HP [0.25 KW],
MAX: 0.75 HP [0.55 KW]
Driver type:
*WVRDN*- Washdown, VFD rated, direct
drive, NI plate
WVRGN- Washdown, VFD rated, gear drive, NI
plate
WVCDN- Washdown, VFD contr, direct drive,
NI plate
WVCGN- Washdown, VFD contr, gear drive, NI
plate
SAN PORT
Agitated Tanks (AT)
Small to large, pressure/vacuum, jacket, driver, motor-reducer, agitator and
supports.
For MIXER, REACTOR and OPEN TOP:
Liquid Volume: To secure desired vessel size, specify the diameter and height
directly. A value must be specified if diameter and height are not both
specified. Otherwise, calculated from diameter and height. If both vessel
dimensions and capacity are specified, the system-calculated capacity must
agree with the specified capacity to within +/- 10%.
Skirt or Leg Height: If the capacity is 1000 GAL. [37 M3] or less, the vessel
is designed with 4 FEET [1.25 M] pipe legs. For a capacity greater than 1000
GAL. [37 M3], the vessel is designed with a skirt. The skirt height is calculated
as 1.5 x (vessel diameter) with minimum and maximum heights of 4 and 32
FEET [1.25 and 9.5 M] respectively. Enter 0.0 if hung in open structure.
Manhole Diameter: If no value is specified, a value is calculated as a function
of vessel diameter and height with a maximum manhole diameter of 48
INCHES [1200 MM].
Corrosion Allowance: For CS alloys, the default is 0.125 INCHES [3 MM];
0.0 for all other materials.
Weld Efficiency%: 5- - 100 (For ASME and JIS codes only).
Product Density: *62.4* PCF [*1,000*KG/M3]
Viscosity: *1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S]
Description Type
Pressure/vacuum vessel, optional jacket
Includes top entering impeller and geared motor-
reducer, tank designed for 15 PSIG
[100 KPA].
Application:
Defines vessel function and related pipe/instrum.
model.
CONT- Standard continuous process
BATCH- Batch process
Shell Material:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material.
(Cladding is defined below.) Default: *A285C*.
Liquid Volume:
Enter either Capacity or Diameter and Height.
Vessel Diameter:
Vessel Tangent to Tangent Height:
MIXER
Agitated Tanks (AT) - continued
Description Type
MIXER - continued
Design Gauge Pressure:
Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA]
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for worst
case. Default: Pressure.
Vacuum Design Gauge Pressure:
case. Default: Pressure.
Design Temperature:
*250* DEG F [*120* DEG C]
Operating Temperature:
Default: Design temperature.
Jacket Design Gauge Pressure:
Pressure must be specified to obtain a jacket.
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL - Full jacket
PIPE - Half-pipe jacket
Jacket Thickness:
Jacket pressure or thickness required to obtain jacket.
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
A 515 - A 515
A 204C - C - .5Mo
A 387B - 1Cr - .5Mo
A 387D - 2.25Cr - 1Mo
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
SS321 - SS321
SS347 - SS347
SS410 - SS410
SS430 - SS430
304L - 304L
316L - 316L
NI - Nickel
INCNL - Inconel
MONEL - Monel
HAST - Hastelloy

Description Type
MIXER - continued
SEE CARBON STEEL
- Select from types of Carbon Steel
SEE HEAT-TREATED STEEL
- Select from types of Heat Treated Steel
SEE LOW ALLOY STEEL
- Select from types of Low Alloy Steel
SEE HIGH ALLOY STEEL
- Select from types of High Alloy Steel
SEE NON-FERROUS
- Select from types of Non-Ferrous Steel
Driver Type:
Default: *STD*
STD - Standard motor
Cladding Material:
Default: None.
Skirt or Leg Height:
Enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN structure, legs provided if
capacity < 10,000 GAL [37 M3].
Manhole Diameter:
If no value is specified, a value is calculated as a
function of vessel diameter and height with a
maximum manhole diameter of 48 INCHES [1200
MM].
Base Material Thickness:
Base material thickness including corrosion allowance.
Corrosion Allowance:
For CS alloys, the default is 0.125 INCHES [3 MM]; 0.0
for all other materials.
Weld Efficiency%:
5 - 100 (For ASME and JIS codes only).
Stress Relief:
CODE - Provide stress relief if code requires
YES - Provide stress relief
NO - No stress relief required
Cladding Thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material is
specified; otherwise 0.0.
Fluid Depth:
Maximum fluid depth: vessel height less 12 INCHES
[300 MM]
Description Type
MIXER - continued
Fluid Density:
*62.4* PCF [*1,000* KG/M3]
Fluid Viscosity:
*1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S]
Impeller Type:
See Impeller Types table later in this chapter.
Stiffening Ring Spacing:
Default stiffeners designed for vacuum only, enter 0.0
if not required.
Number of Body Flange Sets:
Number of sets (pairs) of body flanges of same
diameter as vessel.
Diameter Option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD.
Default: See Area Design Basis.
OD- Outside Diameter
ID- Inside Diameter
Open with loose-fitting cover, optional jacket. Includes
impeller and geared motor reducer, supported by
structural steel spanning tank top, tank without head.
Shell Material:
Liquid Volume:
Enter either capacity or diameter and height.
Vessel Diameter:
Design Temperature:
Default: *68* DEG F [*20* DEG C]
Default: Design Temperature.
Default: no jacket.
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL- Full jacket
PIPE- Half-pipe jacket
OPEN TOP
Description Type
OPEN TOP - continued
Jacket Thickness:
Default: no jacket.
Jacket Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
A 515- A 515
A 204C- C - .5Mo
A 387B- 1Cr - .5Mo
A 387D- 2.25Cr - 1Mo
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
SS321- SS321
SS347- SS347
SS410- SS410
SS430- SS430
304L- 304L
316L- 316L
NI- Nickel
INCNL- Inconel
MONEL- Monel
HAST- Hastelloy
SEE CARBON STEEL
SEE LOW ALLOY STEEL
SEE NON-FERROUS
Driver Type:
Default: *STD*
STD- Standard Motor
Cladding Material:
Default *none*.
Enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN structure, legs provides if
capacity < 10,000 GAL. [37 M3].
Description Type
OPEN TOP - continued
Manhole Diameter:
Max: 48 INCHES [1200 MM].
Default 0.125 INCHES [3.0 MM] for CS; 0.0 for other
material; double if jacketed.
Weld Efficiency:
ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed for thin wall
vessels; Default: Area Basis 50 - 100.
Stress Relief:
Default: See Area Basis
CODE- Provide stress relief if code requires
YES- Provide stress relief
NO- No stress relief required
Cladding Thickness:
specified; otherwise: 0.0.
Fluid Depth:
Maximum fluid depth: vessel height less 12 INCHES
[300 MM].
Fluid Density:
Default: *62.40* PCF.
Fluid Viscosity:
Default: *1.00* CPOISE.
Impeller Type:
See Impellor Types table.
if not required.
diameter as vessel.
Diameter Option:
Defines desired diameters as ID or OD;
OD- Outside diameter
ID- Inside diameter
Description Type
Pressure/vacuum vessel, jacketed.
Includes jacket motor gear drive and shaft seal,
agitator, shaft, thermometer well, blow-pipe,
insulation and safety valves. Rating of full vacuum and
design pressure.
Application symbol:
Defines vessel function and related pipe/instrum.
model.
<blank>- Standard continuous process
BATCH- Batch process
Shell Material:
Liquid Volume:
Vessel Diameter:
case.
Default: Pressure.
If pressure and vacuum entered,
design is for worst case. Default: Pressure.
Design Temperature:
Ferrous matl: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C];
Other matl: 250 DEG F [120 DEG C].
*90* PSIG [*620* KPA]
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL- Full jacket
REACTOR
Description Type
REACTOR - continued
Jacket Material: Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
A 515 - A 515
A 204C - C - .5Mo
A 387B - 1Cr - .5Mo
A 387D - 2.25Cr - 1Mo
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
SS321 - SS321
SS347 - SS347
SS410 - SS410
SS430 - SS430
304L - 304L
316L - 316L
NI - Nickel
INCNL - Inconel
MONEL - Monel
HAST - Hastelloy
SEE CARBON STEEL
SEE LOW ALLOY STEEL
SEE NON-FERROUS
Driver Type:
Default: *STD*
STD - Standard motor
Cladding Material:
Default: None.
Enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN structure, legs provided if
capacity < 10,000 GAL [37 M3].
Manhole Diameter:
maximum manhole diameter of 48 INCHES
[1200 MM].
Description Type
REACTOR - continued
Weld Efficiency:
5 - 100 (For ASME and JIS codes only).
Stress Relief:
CODE- Provide stress relief if code
requires
Cladding Thickness:
Fluid Depth:
Maximum fluid depth: vessel height less
12 INCHES [300 MM]
Fluid Density:
*62.4* PCF [*1,000* KG/M3]
Fluid Viscosity:
*1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S]
Impeller Type:
See Impeller Types table later in this chapter.
if not required.
diameter as vessel.
Diameter Option:
OD- Outside Diameter
ID- Inside Diameter
Description Type
Pulpers are used for pulping the waste generated by
mill operation or in a paper recycling process. Hence
the two types: on-machine and off-machine pulpers.
Both include a pulping tank with support legs, nozzles
(feed, drain and level control). The pulper itself
consists of an extraction plate, extraction chamber
with flanged outlet, rotor blade, hub, shaft with gear
or V-belt drive, drive motor, motor coupling and an
adapter plate. Multiple rotors can be selected.
MACH PUMP
Application Symbol:
Default: *CONT*
BATCH - Batch pulper
CONT- Continuous pulper
Tank or Vat Material:
CS, SS304, *SS316*, SS321, SS347, 304L, 316L, NI,
Configuration:
Default: *RECT*
CYLIN- Cylindrical tank
RECT- Rectangular tank
Hydraulic Volume:
Enter pulping rate or hydraulic capacity.
Pulping Rate Air Dried:
Enter pulping rate or hydraulic capacity.
Tank Length or Diameter:
Enter length for rectangular tank or diameter for
cylindrical tank.
Vessel Width:
Rectangular tanks only.
Number of Rotors or Drives:
1-2; Default: *1*.
Consistency Air Dried:
Max: 18; Default: *4.00*
Impeller Type:
Default: *STD*
STD - Standard rotor shaft length
EXTD - Extended rotor shaft length
MACH PULP
OFF MACH
Description Type
MACH PULP - continued
Impeller Material:
CS, SS304, *SS316*, SS321, SS347, 304L,
316L, NI, INCNL, MONEL, HAST, TI
Driver Type:
Default: *GEAR*
BELT - Belt driven speed reduction
Design Temperature:
*68.0* DEG F [*20.0* DEG C]
Seal for Shaft:
Default: *PACK*
PACK - Packing
Driver Speed:
Max: 3,000 RPM [2,600 RPM];
Default: *1,500* RPM [*1,800 RPM]
Vessel Leg Height:
*10.0* FEET [*3.00* M]
Number of Manholes: Default: *1*.
Manhole Diameter:
maximum manhole diameter of 48 INCHES
[1200 MM].
Default: *18* INCHES [*450* MM]
Application Symbol: Default: *BATCH*
BATCH - Batch pulper
CONT - Continuous pulper
Tank or Vat Material: CS, SS304, *SS316*, SS321,
SS347, 304L, S16L, NI, INCNL, MONEL, HAST, TI.
Configuration: Default: *CYLIN*
CYLIN - Cylindrical tank
RECT - Rectangular tank
Hydraulic Volume: Enter tank capacity or tank
dimensions.
Tank Length or Diameter: Enter tank capacity or
dimensions, diameter for cylindrical, length for
rectangular.
Vessel Height: Enter tank capacity or tank
dimensions.
OFF MACH
Description Type
OFF MATCH - continued
Vessel Width:
Enter tank capacity or dimensions, width is for
rectangular tanks only.
Number of Rotors or Drives:
1-2, Default: *1*.
Max: 18; Default: *4.0*.
Impeller Type:
Default: *EXTD*.
STD - Standard rotor shaft length
EXTD - Extended rotor shaft length
Impeller Material:
CS, SS304, *SS316*, SS321, SS347, 304L, S16L, NI,
Driver Type: Default: *GEAR*
BELT - Belt driven speed reduction
Design Temperature:
Default: *68.0* DEG F [*20.0* DEG C].
Seal for Shaft:
Default: *PACK*.
PACK - Packing
For CS alloys, the default is 0.125 INCHES [3.0 MM];
0.0 for all other materials.
Driver Speed:
Max: 3,000 RPM [2,600 RPM];
Default: *1,500 RPM [*1,800* RPM].
Vessel Leg Height:
Default *10* FEET [*3.0* M].
Number of Manholes:
Default: *1*.
Manhole Diameter:
If no values is specified, a value is calculated as a
maximum diameter of 48 INCHES [1,200 MM].
Default: *18* INCHES [*450* MM].
Description Type
Conditioning cell for floatation machine.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Cell Volume:
10.0 - 1,500.0 CF [0.3 - 40 M3]
COND CELL
Floatation machine, minerals separation, multi-cell.
Floatation machine for selectively separating
minerals by agitation, air dissemination and
chemical adhesion. Includes one row of cells
connected in series with one feed box, one
discharge box and one connection box for each
group of four cells.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Volume Per Cell:
10 - 1,500 CF [0.3
- 40 M3]
Number of Cells: Refers to number per row
connected in series.
Number of Cells Per Motor:
1 - 2; Default: *1*
FLOAT CELL
Description of Agitated Tanks
1 Reynolds Number (RN), dimensionless: RN = (D2N) (FD/FV)
2 Froude Number (FN), dimensionless: FN = g/N2D
3 Power Number (PN), dimensionless: PN = (Pgc/FD) (N3D5)
4 Power Function (PF), dimensionless:
For RN > 300 and for unbaffled tanks,
log PF = log PN - (a-log RN) (log FN) /b
For RN < or = 300 for tanks with or without baffles,
FP = PN
5 Relationships between PF, PN, FN, RN for each impeller listed in the
Impeller Types table are contained in the AT agitated tank model. Power is
derived from PN.
6 General Nomenclature
Variable Description Value
a impeller contant See Impeller Types table
b impeller contant See Impeller Types table
D impeller diameter
FN Froude Number
g local acceleration due to gravity
g
c
gravitational constant See Chapter 29: Units of
Measure
N rotational speed of impeller
P power to shaft of impeller
PN Power number
RN Reynolds number
FD fluid density
FV fluid viscosity
Impeller Types - General Range of Basic
Data**
Impeller Reynolds Number Baffles
No.
Type
Symbol Type D/d L/d E/d
Low -
High No. B/D Ref
1 T6FB Turbine with six
flat blades.
B=0.25d;
Blade Height =
0.2d
3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
1-10
6
4 0.17 1
2 T6FB2 Same as No.1 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
1-10
6
4 0.10 1
3 T6FB3 Same as No.1 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
1-10
6
4 0.04 1
4* T6FB4 Same as
No.1;a=1,
b=40
3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
1-10
6
0 - 1
5 T6CB Turbine with six
curved blades.
Blade sizes
same as No.1
3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
1.8-10
6
4 0.10 1
6 T6AB Turbine with six
arrowhead
blades. Blade
size same as
No.1
3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
3-10
6
4 0.10 1
7 STDR Shrouded
turbine with six
blades. 20
blade deflector
ring.
2.4 0.74 0.9 20,000-
90,000
0 - 2
8 STDR2 Similar to No.7,
but not
identical.
3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
2.5-10
6
0 - 1
9 ST Same as No.8,
but no deflector
ring.
3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
10-10
6
4 0.10 1
10 AT8B45 Axial turbine
with eight
blades at a 45
degree angle.
See No.11.
3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
1.8-10
6
4 0.10 1
with four
blades at a 60
degree angle.
B=0.25d.
3 3 0.50 15-
60,000
- - 3
Impeller Types - General Range of Basic Data** - continued
* Surface effects are important. Froude number is included for Reynolds
Numbers great than 300.
**System will permit extension beyond these ranges. Please check your
results.
Impeller Reynolds Number Baffles
No.
Type
Symbol Type D/d L/d E/d
Low -
High No. B/D Ref
with four
blades at a 45
degree angle.
See No. 11
5.2 5.2 0.87 600-
40,000
0 - 3
13 P4B Paddle with
four blades.
3 3 0.50 200 -
70,000
0 - 3
14 P2B3 Paddle with two
blades. See
No.13.
3 2.7-3.9 0.70-1.3
2-10
6
4 0.10 1
15 MP3B2 Marine
propeller with
three blades.
Pitch-2d;
a=1.7; b=18.
3.3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
2.5-10
6
0 - 1
16 MP3B5 Same as
No.15, but
pitch=1.05d;
a-2.3; b=18.
4.5 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
2.5-10
6
0 - 1
17* MP3B6 Same as
No.15, but
pitch=1.04d;
a=0; b=18.
4.5 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
2.5-10
6
0 - 1
18 MP3B7 Same as
No.15, but
pitch=d
3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
2.3-10
6
4 0.10 1
19* MP3B8 Same as
No.15, but
pitch=d;
a=2.1; b=18.
3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3
2.5-10
6
0 - 1
20 MP3B9 Same as
No.15, but
pitch=d
3.8 3.5 1.0 300-
500,000
0 - 4
21 HRA Helical ribbon.
Ribbon
width=d/
8.5;helical
screw=D/30.
1.05 1.5 - 0.7-23 0 - 5
Impeller Materials
Impeller Type References
If Component Impeller Material
CLAD Match cladding
GLSCS SS316 blades/shaft
Other Match steel
Ref Reference for Impeller Type
1 Rushton, J. H., E. Costich, and H. J. Everett, Presented at Annual Meeting of
the American Institute of Chemical Engineers, Detroit, 1947.
2 Olney, R. B., and G. J. Carlson, Chemical Engineering Progress, 43, 473, 1947.
3 Hixson, S. Q., and S. J. Baum, Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, 34, 194,
1942.
4 Stoops, C. E., and C. L. Lovell, Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, 35, 845,
1943.
5 Gray, J. B., Chemical Engineering Progress, 59, 55, 1963.
Legend for Impellers
B - Baffle width
D - Tank diameter
d - Impeller diameter
E - Impeller elevation
above tank bottom.
H - Tangent-to-tangent
height of tank.
L - Liquid level in tank.
Motor/Reducer

12
INCH
Min.
H L
E
B
d
D
Blenders (BL)
Rotary, batch, dry or semi-dry solids, motor and speed reducer.
Description Type
Rotary drum.
For batch blending of dry or semi-dry solids. Includes
motor and drive.
Material:
*CS*, SS
Blender Volume:
1 - 450 CF [0.03 - 12 M3]
Product Density:
MAX: 200 PCF [3,200 KG/M3];
Default: *50* PCF [*800* KG/M3]
Driver Speed:
Default: *1,800* RPM
BLENDER
Rotary double-cone.
For batch blending of dry solids. Includes motor and
drive.
Material:
*CS*, SS316
Blender Volume:
5 - 350 CF [0.02 - 9 M3]
Driver Speed:
30 x Hz RPM
Material:
GSLCS
Blender Volume:
2 - 165 CF [0.06 - 2.5 M3]
Driver Speed:
30 x Hz RPM
.ROTARY
Sanitary kettle blender without agitator.
Used for gentle blending or folding of viscous
mixtures. Add agitator separately.
added.
Liquid Volume:
MIN: 50 GALLONS [0.19 M3], MAX: 600 GALLONS
[0.19 M3]
KETTLE
Blenders (BL) - continued
Description Type
KETTLE - continued
*68 DEG F
[20 DEG C]
Cover Type:
*LFTHG*- Lift-off or hinged cover
NONE- No cover required
Lift off cover to 80 GAL [0.3 M3], else hinged cover.
Jacket option:
*NO*- Jacket not required
YES- Jacket is required
Mounting type:
*RIM*- Rim mounting
LEGS- Leg type mounting
Sanitary rotary bowl blender.
Consists of a stainless steel drum with motor
drive mounted on a frame. Used for wet or dry
mixtures.
If you require a foundation for this item, it must
be added.
Material:
SS304, *SS316*
Liquid Volume:
MAX: 160 GALLONS [0.6 M3]
Mounting type:
*FIXD*- Fixed type blender
PORT- Portable type blender on casters
ROTARY-
BOWL
Blenders (BL) - continued
Description Type
Sanitary, multi-shell, staggered blender
Continuous, zig-zag type blender combines the
action of a rotating, eccentric drum with multiple
recycling. Used for either uniform solids-solids
blending (e.g., blending vitamins into cereals) or, if
SOL-LIQ is selected in the Application field, solids-
liquids blending (e.g., coating food particles with
sweeteners). Solids are fed through an inlet chute. If
SOL-LIQ is selected, a dispersion head is included for
liquid injection.
Although not included on the inputs, this piece of
equipment either operates at 50% (recommended) or
at 100% of its capacity. When the capacity is specified,
the system selects a model that can provide the
capacity while operating at 50% of the model's rated
capacity. However, if a diameter is specified, the
system provides the rated capacity in the results.
be added.
Material: SS304, *SS316*
Flow rate:
MIN: 250.0 LB/H [115.0 KG/H],
MAX: 500,000.0 LB/H [227,000.0 KG/H]. Enter
diameter or capacity. Capacity limits are at default
density and residence time.
Blender diameter:
MIN: 8 INCHES [200 MM], 40 INCHES
[1,000 MM].
Blender type:
*SOL-SOL*- Solids-solids blending
SOL-LIQ- Solids-liquids blending
Driver type:
*WVRDC*- Washdown, VFD rated, direct
drive, CS
WVCDC- Washdown, VFD controlled, direct
drive, CS
Product residence time:
MIN: 1.00 MINUTES,
MAX: 3.00 MINUTES, Default: *1.50 MINUTES*
Product density:
MIN: 30.0 PCF [480.0 KG/M3],
MAX: 300.0 PCF [4,800.0 KG/M3}; Default: *40 PCF
[640 KG/M3].*
MSHELSTAG
Kneaders (K)
Jacket, motor, motor reducer, cover, nozzles and agitator.
Description Type
Stationary, upright double-arm.
Material:
*CS*, SS304, SS316, MONEL
Liquid Volume:
100 - 750 GALLONS [0.4 to 2.8 M3]

STATIONARY
Tilting, double-arm.
Material:
Liquid Volume:
10 - 500 GALLONS [0.5 to 1.8 M3]
TILTING
Vacuum, tilting, double-arm.
Material:
Liquid Volume:
10 - 500 GALLONS [0.5 to 1.8 M3]
VAC TILTNG
Mixers (MX)
Typically used for keeping solids in suspension, for dissolving solids and for
mixing and/or reacting two or more feed streams.
Description Type
Cylinder type extruder with variable drive.
Material:
*CS*
Driver power:
5 - 40 HP [4 - 30 KW]
Driver speed:
Max: 60 x HZ; Default: *30 x HZ*
EXTRUDER
Extruder muller type with open motor.
Material:
*CS*
Driver Power:
3 - 75 HP [2.22 - 55 KW]
Driver Speed:
MULLER EXT
Pan includes motor and drive.
Material:
*CS*
Mixer Volume:
4 - 40 CF [0.2 - 1.1 M3]
Driver speed:
PAN
Portable propeller mixer with motor to 7.5 HP
[5.5 KW].
Includes motor driver.
Material:
*CS*, SS
Driver power:
0.33 - 7.5 HP [0.75 - 5.5 KW]
PORT PROP
Fixed propeller mixer with motor and gear drive to 100
HP [75 KW].
This item is a top entering mixer including a gear
drive, TEFC motor, shaft and impeller.
Material:
*CS*, SS
Driver power:
2 - 100 HP [1.5 - 75 KW]
FIXED PROP
Mixers (MX) - continued
Description Type
Sigma double-arm non-vacuum mixer with motor and
drive.
Material:
*CS*
Driver power:
3 - 100 HP [2.22 - 6.0 KW]
Mixer Volume:
1 - 70 CF [0.05 - 1.9 M3]
Driver speed:
SIGMA
Spiral ribbon includes motor and drive.
Material:
*CS*
Driver power:
5 - 50 HP [4 - 37.5 KW]
Mixer Volume:
10 - 395 CF [0.3 - 11 M3]
Driver speed:
SPIRAL RIB
Static mixer used for instantaneous mixing of
two fluid streams.
The unit includes the main pipe housing, the
mixer elements and the flanges at both ends.
Pipe material:
A 53, A 106, *304P*, 304LP, 316P, 316LP, 316PS
(SS316 sanitary pipe, MAX: 8 INCHES [200 MM]),
321P, NI, MONEL, INCNL, TI
Flow type:
*TRNS*, TURB, LAMN, PLUG (default for sanitary
material)
Pipe diameter:
0.5 - 12.0 IN DIAM [12 - 300 MM DIAM]
STATIC
Description Type
STATIC - continued
Note: For non-sanitary material, use any pipe
diameter in the above range; for sanitary
material, use only the following:
INCHES MM
0.50 15
0.75 20
1.00 25
1.50 40
2.00 50
2.50 65
3.00 80
4.00 100
Enter liquid flow rate or diameter and length.
Number of elements:
Default varies with flow type.
Element material:
CS, SS, NI, MONEL, TI, HAST, HASTC, PD; Default:
*SS304*
Design temperature Inlet:
*68.0* DEG F [*20.0* DEG C]
Fluid density:
*62.4* PCF [*300* KG/M3]
Fluid viscosity:
*1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S]
Design gauge pressure Inlet:
15.0 PSIG [100 KPA]
Description Type
Two roll includes motor and drive.
Material:
*CS*
Driver power:
50 - 300 HP [37.5 - 224 KW]
Driver speed:
TWO ROLL
Sanitary high-speed Norman-type mixer
For dissolving solids or semi-solids. Pulls product from
the top center of the square tank (shape ensures
complete hydration) down to the high-speed impeller,
which forces it out to the side of the tank and back up
to the surface.
added.
Material:
SS304, *SS316*
Liquid Volume:
MAX: 300 GALLONS [1.13 M3]
Impeller type:
FRZN- Frozen food mixing
*NFRZ*- Non-frozen food mixing
Driver type:
*WXXBC*- Washdown, belt drive, CS
WVRBC- Washdown, VFD rated, belt drive,
CS
WVCBC- Washdown, VFD controlled, belt
drive, CS
HIGH SPEED
Sanitary ribbon blender
Provides means for mixing, homogenizing, and
drying a wide variety of products. Includes base
unit, direct drive motor, jacket, and stainless
steel legs. Cover has four safety interlock
sensors, as well as a manual control ball valve
for air supply. For sanitary reasons, material of
construction is stainless steel (carbon steel may
be specified for legs).
added.
RIBBON
Description Type
RIBBON - continued
Material:
SS304, *SS316*
Blender type:
*1SHAFT* - Single shaft blender
2SHAFT - Twin shaft blender (available only for
capacities of 500 - 750 GALLONS [1.9 - 2.85 M3]
Liquid volume:
MAX: 3,800 GALLONS [14.3 M3]
Driver power per shaft:
MIN: 1 HP [0.75 KW],
MAX: 150 HP [112 KW]
For twin shaft type, this is the driver power for each
shaft.
Driver type:
*WXXDC*- Washdown, direct drive, CS
WVCDC- Washdown, VFD controlled,
direct drive, CS
WXXIC- Washdown, indirect drive, CS
WVCIC- Washdown, VFD control, indirect
drive, CS
HXXCZ- Hydraulic drive with hydraulic
system (available for twin shaft
only)
No indirect drivers < 180 GALLONS [0.68 M3] or < 7.5
HP [5.5KW]
Cover type:
NONE- Cover not required
STD- Standard cover is required
LCHTS- Load chute for twin shaft blender only
Default: STD for twin shaft, NONE for single shaft
Jacket option:
NO- Jacket not required
*YES* - Jacket required
Not applicable for twin shaft blender type.
Leg material:
CS- Carbon steel
*SS*- Stainless steel
Not applicable for twin shaft blender type.
Seal for shaft:
*STD*- Standard shaft seal
MECO- Clean-In-Place steam proof seal
Applicable for twin shaft only
Description Type
RIBBON - continued
Operating temperature:
MIN: 68 DEG F [20 DEG C]
Sanitary piston-type homogenizer
Homogenizing valve employs cavitation, shear,
and impingement forces to reduce gobule/
particle size as the product passes through it.
Material is SS316 for sanitary reasons.
be added.
Liquid flow rate per hour:
MIN: 15 GPH [0.057 M3/H],
MAX: 9,900 GPH [37.4 M3/H] @ 2000 PSIG
[13800 KPA], 2000 GPH (7.5 M3/H) @ 10, 000
PSIG [68,900 KPA]
Driver power:
MIN: 3 HP [2.22 KW],
MAX: 250 HP [180 KW]
Plunger diameter:
MIN: 0.625 INCHES [16 MM],
MAX: 3.5 INCHES [90 KW]. Maximum is
influenced by capacity and gauge pressure (see
table below). Required: enter either plunger
diameter or gauge pressure.
1
Maximum capacity at highest maximum operating pressure
2
Maximum diameter
3
Maximum capacity at lowest maximum operating pressure
Operating gauge pressure:
MIN: 2,000 PSIG [13,800 KPA], 10,000 PSIG
[68,900 KPA]
Required: enter either plunger diameter or
gauge pressure.
PISTON HOM
Plunger Diameter
Capacity
@ 2000 PSIG
[13800 KPA]
Gauge
Pressure
@ 10000 PSIG
[68900 KPA]
Gauge
Pressure
GPH M3/H INCHES MM INCHES MM
15 .057 0.625 16 0.625 16
2000 7.5 ---- ----
1.5
1
40
1
6000 22.7
3.5
2
90
2
---- ----
9000 37.4
3.125
3
80
3
---- ----
Description Item
Sanitary shear pump homogenizer.
For continuous, in-line and controlled batch
course processing. Material of construction is
SS316 for sanitary reasons.
Liquid flow rate:
MIN: 10 GPM [0.64 L/S],
MAX: 575 GPM [36.0 L/S]
Cooler option:
*NONE*- No cooler is required
COOL- Cooler is required
Driver power:
MIN: 7.5 HP [4.0 KW],
MAX: 100 HP [75 KW]
Driver type:
TVRZC- TEFC, VFD rated, CS
*TVCZC*- TEFC, VFD controlled, CS
Number of stages:
*1*, MIN: 1, MAX: 3
The shear pump homogenizer is provided with 3
stages; however, if only 1 or 2 stages are required,
then the other stages are blocked.
SHEAR HOM
3 Compressors (G6) 3-1
Fans, Blowers (FN)
3 Compressors (G6)
3-2 3 Compressors (G6)
For plant or instrument air.
For all air compressors, capacity is at inlet temperature and pressure.
Description Type
Packaged unit including motor driver.
Includes inlet air filter, inlet throttle valve, bypass
throttle valve, bypass silencer, compressor*,
intercoolers**, aftercooler, automatic condensate
removal system with condensate bypass valve, lube oil
system, continuous baseplate, spacer coupling and
guard, induction motor, vibration shutdown system,
protection and regulation system, compressor
mechanical test run and check valve.
*The nominal 110 PSIG discharge machines have four
stages of compression. The nominal 325 PSIG
discharge machines have five stages of compression.
**The four stage machines have three intercoolers.
The five stage machines have four intercoolers.
Material:
*CS*, CI (Cast iron)
Actual gas flow rate:
1,000 - 25,000 CFM [1,700 - 42,400 M3/H]
Design gauge pressure Outlet:
15 - 325 PSIG [104 - 2,258 KPA]
CENTRIF M

Air Compressors (AC) - continued
Description Type
CENTRIF M - continued
-50 - 200 DEG F [-45 - 90 DEG C];
Default:
*68* DEG F [*20* DEG C]
Packaged unit including turbine driver.
Includes the same items as CENTRIF M except
the compressor driver is a steam turbine instead
of AC induction motor.
Material:
*CS*, CI (Cast iron)
1000 - 25000 CFM [1,700 - 42,400 M3/H]
15 - 325 PSIG [105 - 2,240 KPA]
-50 - 200 DEG F [-45 - 90 DEG C];
CENTRIF T
Integral gasoline engine driver, base plate, coupling,
reciprocating gas compressor for compression of large
volumes of air to high pressure, less coolers, filters,
condensate removal (not a packaged unit).
Material: *CS*
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,300 KPA]
Driver power:
100 - 10000 HP [75 - 7100 KW]
RECIP GAS
Air Compressors (AC) - continued
Description Type
Motor driven reciprocating gas compressor, with
speed reducer, pulsation dampers for
compression of large volumes of air to high
pressure, less coolers, filters, condensate
removal (not a packaged unit).
Material: *CS*
Design gauge Pressure Outlet:
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,300 KPA]
Min: >0 PSIG
Driver Power:
Max: 15,000 HP [11,000 KW]
RECIP MOTR
Single stage, non-lubricated, packaged
reciprocating compressor for oil-free air; includes
motor and drive, coupling, base plate, cooler.
Material:
*CS*
75 - 1,100 CFM [130 - 1,850 M3/H]
90 - 150 PSIG [620 - 1,000 KPA]
-50 - 200 DEG F [-45 - 90 DEG C];
Default:*0* PSIG [*0* KPA]
SINGLE 1 S
Two stage, non-lubricated, packaged
reciprocating air compressor for oil-free air;
includes motor and drive, coupling, base plate,
and cooler.
Material:
*CS*
80 - 700 CFM [140 - 1,150 M3/H]
150 - 500 PSIG [1,040 - 3,400 KPA]
-50 - 200 DEC F [-45 - 90 DEG C];
Default: *68* DEG F [*20* KPA]
SINGLE 2 S
For process gas streams:
Centrifugal (motor, turbine, gasoline engine, no driver)
Reciprocating (motor, turbine, no driver) - with gear reducer, couplings,
guards, base plate, compressor unit, fittings, interconnecting piping,
vendo-supplied instruments, lube/seal system; less intercoolers and
interstage knock-out drums.
For all gas compressors, capacity is at inlet temperature and pressure.
Description Type
Axial (inline) centrifugal gas compressor with driver
(motor, turbine or gasoline driven engine); excluding
intercoolers and knock-out drums.
Casing material:
See Casting Materials in Chapter 28 for
a complete list of materials. Default: *CS*.
Actual gas flow rate Inlet:
60 - 200000 CFM [102 - 339000 M3/H]
-200 - 200 DEG F [-125 - 90 DEG C];
Default - *68* DEG F [*20* DEG C]
Max: 3050 PSIG [21130 KPA]
Molecular weight:
Default: *29*
Specific heat ratio:
Default: *1.4*
Compressibility factor Inlet:
Default: *1*
Compressibility factor Outlet:
Default: *1*
Maximum interstage temperature:
Specify the maximum temperature reached during
compression before inter-cooling.
Max: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C]; Default: *350* DEG F
[*175* DEG C]
Intercooler outlet Temperature:
Specify the interstage inlet temperature after cooling.
-50 - 150 DEG F [-45 - 65 DEG C]; Default: *90* DEG
F [*30* DEG C]
CENTRIF
Gas Compressors (GC) - continued
Description Type
CENTRIF - continued
Driver type:
Default: *MOTOR*
NONE - No driver
GAS ENGINE - Gas engine driver
MOTOR - Motor driver
TURBINE - Turbine driver
Turbine gauge pressure:
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Default:
*300* PSIG [*2050 KPA]
Gear reducer type:
Default: gear reducer included if driver type specified;
otherwise none.
YES - Gear reducer required
NO - No gear reducer
Lube oil system:
Default: *YES*
YES - Lube system required
NO - No lube oil system
Integral gear centrifugal gas compressor with
driver (motor, turbine or gasoline engine), scrolls
(inter-stage piping), bull gear, coupling, guard;
may include lube oil system, intercoolers,
aftercooler: excludes filter and silencers.
Casing material:
See Casting Materials in Chapter 28 for a
complete list of materials. Default: *CS*.
500 - 70,000 CFM [850 - 118,900 M3/H]
-0.4 -100 PSIG [-2.7 - 689 KPA];
Default: *0.0* PSIG [*0.0* KPA]
32 - 200 DEG F [0 - 90 DEG C];
Max: 200 PSIG [1480 KPA]
Design temperature Outlet:
-200 - 200 DEG F [-125 - 90 DEG C]
Number of impellers:
2 - 4
CENTRIF IG
Description Type
CENTRIF IG - continued
Gas type option:
Sets default gas properties and makes adjustments for
explosive gases.
Default: *AIR*.
AIR - Air
O2GAS - Oxygen
N2GAS - Nitrogen
ARGAS - Argon
FLGAS - Flammable gas
NONFL - Non-flammable gas
Molecular weight:
Default based on chosen gas type.
Default based on chosen gas type.
Default: *1.0*.
Compressibility factor Outlet:
Default: *1.0*.
Intercooler required:
Default: *YES*
YES - Cooler required
NO - None required
After cooler Required:
Default: *NO*.
YES - Cooler required
NO - None required
Specify the maximum temperature reached during
compression before inter-cooling.
Max: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C].
Intercooler outlet temperature:
The interstage inlet temperature after intercooling.
- 5- - 150 DEG F [-45 - 65 DEG C];
Default: *90* DEG F [*30* DEG C].
Driver type:
Default: *MOTOR*
NONE - No driver
MOTOR- Motor driver
TURBINE- Turbine driver
Description Item
CENTRIF IG - continued
Turbine gauge pressure:
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Default: *300* PSIG [*2,050* KPA].
Lube oil system:
Default: *YES*
YES- Lube system required
NO- No lube oil system
Shop assembly option:
Partial assembly denotes multiple
skids field connected wither intercoolers.
Default:
*FULL*.
FULL- Full shop assembly
PART- Part shop assembly
NONE- No shop assembly
Motor or turbine-driven reciprocating process gas
compressor. Includes motor, gear reducer and
pulsation dampers. Does not include intercoolers or
aftercoolers.
Max: 200,000 CFM [339,000 M3/H]
Inlet Temperature:
-200 - 200 DEG F [-125 - 90 DEG C];
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA]
Molecular weight:
Default: *30*
Default: *1.22*
Specify the maximum temperature
reached during compression before inter-cooling.
Max: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C];
Default: *270* DEG F
[135 DEG C].
RECIP MOTR
Description Type
RECIP MOTR - continued
Intercooler outlet temperature:
The interstage inlet temperature after
intercooling. -50 - 150 DEG F
[-45 - 65 DEG C];
Default:
*95* DEG F [*35* DEG C].
Driver Type:
Default: *MOTOR*
NONE- No driver
MOTOR- Motor driver
Turbine Press. - Gauge:
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Default: *300* PSIG [*2,050* KPA]
Gear Reducer Symbol:
Default: gear reducer included if driver type specified,
otherwise none.
YES- Gear reducer required
NO- No gear reducer
Lube Oil System:
Default: *YES*
YES- Lube system required
NO- No lube oil system
Reciprocating gasoline engine drive includes integral
gas engine driver, gear reducer, baseplate, coupling,
interstage pots and coolers.
Material:
*CS*
Max: 6,000 PSIG [4,100 KPA]
Driver power:
Min: 100 HP;
Max: 10,000 HP
Design temperature inlet:
Default: *68* DEC F [*20* DEG C]
RECIP GAS
Fans, Blowers (FN)
The distinction between the terms fan, blower and compressor is confusing;
however, a distinction may be made based upon the mechanical construction
of the machine and the pressure rise from inlet to outlet produced by the
machine.
The Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Incorporated (AMCA) has made
12.25 INCHES of water pressure rise the cut-off between fans and blowers.
Assuming an inlet pressure of 0 PSIG, a 12.25 INCHES of water pressure rise
corresponds to a compression ratio of 1.3. Machinery used for compression
ratios greater than 1.03 are called blowers or compressors. A pressure of
12.25 INCHES of water corresponds to 0.44 PSIG. It is common practice,
however, to call any centrifugal gas-moving machine a fan if its construction is
of sheet metal and the rotating element is wheel rather than an impeller.
Single-stage fans are made with pressure rises of 50 INCHES of water, and
two-stage fans with pressure rises up to 100 INCHES of water. Centrifugal
blowers (or turbo-blowers) are primarily of cast iron construction and the
rotating element is an impeller. Centrifugal blowers normally produce pressure
rises in the range of 1 to 40 PSI. Centrifugal blowers may be single- (one
impeller) or multi-stage (two or more impellers). A gas-moving machine that
produces a pressure rise of more than 40 PSI is called a compressor. Another
difference between compressors and blowers is that the
design pressure of a blower is never more than 100 PSIG, while compressors
are frequently designed for more than 100 PSIG. It should be noted, however,
that in the range of 1 to 40 PSI pressure rise with a design pressure less than
100 PSIG, the terms are used interchangeably.
With driver, listed in ascending capacity.
Description Type
Single or multi-stage centrifugal turbo blower.
Heavy duty, low noise blower. For moving up to
150,000 CFM of air or other gas through a
system with a pressure drop from 1 to 10 PSI.
Typical applications include: supplying air to
wastewater treatment plant aeration basins;
supplying air to blast furnaces, cupolas and
converters; pneumatic conveying and supplying
combustion air. This item is a centrifugal turbo
blower.
Material:
*CS*
100 - 40,000 CFM [170 - 67,950 M3/H]
0.5 - 30.0 PSIG [3.5 - 205 KPA]
Speed:
900 - 3,600 RPM
CENT TURBO
Fans, Blowers (FN) - continued
Description Type
Centrifugal fan.
Applications include: pulling a gas stream through a
baghouse, supplying combustion air to boilers and
furnaces, boosting the pressure of the combustion
gases from a boiler to push the gasses up the boiler
stack, pneumatic conveying, solids drying and
classifying and ventilation.
Centrifugal fans are used to move gas through a low
pressure drop system. The maximum pressure rise
across a centrifugal fan is about 2 PSI. The most
typical materials of construction are carbon steel sheet
or plate casing, aluminum or carbon steel wheel (or
impeller) and carbon steel shaft. Fans may be
fabricated from a variety of other materials such as
stainless steel and FRP. Centrifugal fans are classified
according to the design of the wheel. The different
wheels are: radial blade type, forward-curved,
backward-curved, backward-inclined and airfoil.
Centrifugal fans are manufactured in sizes that range
from less than 100 CFM to 1,000,000 CFM.
Material:
*CS*
700 - 900,000 CFM [1,200 - 1,529,000 M3/H]
Note: Max flowrate for Standard duty = 150,000 CFM
[254,850 M3/H]
Min flowrate for Heavy duty = 50,000 CFM [84,950
M3/H]
Fan outlet gauge pressure:
0 - 15 IN H2O [0 - 3,700 PA];
Default:
*6* IN H2O [*1,500* PA]
Application:
*STD - Max flowrate 150,000 CFM [254,850 M3/H]
HVY - Min flowrate 50,000 CFM [84,950 M3/H]
Note: If you leave the Application field blank:
If the input flow rate is < 150,000 CFM, the system
estimates a standard duty fan.
If the input flow rate is => 150,000 CFM, the
system estimates a heavy duty fan.
Driver type:
*MOTOR
VFD
TURBINE
NONE
Note: For MOTOR or VFD, electrical bulks for the
motor hookup are generated. For TURBINE, additional
lines and loops for the turbine are generated. For
NONE, Driver cost = 0 and no electrical bulks for
hookup are generated.
CENTRIF
Description Type
Propeller fan.
Material:
*CS*
1,000 - 15,000 CFM [1,700 - 25,400 M3/H]
PROPELLER
Rotary blower.
This general purpose blower includes inlet and
discharge silencers. Applications include: pneumatic
conveying, combustion air, exhausting vapors,
instrument air and aeration of fluids.
A rotary blower is a positive displacement machine.
That is, a constant volume of inlet air (or other gas) is
compressed regardless of any changes in the
discharge pressure required by the system. The rotary
blower moves air in the following manner. Two figure
eight shaped impellers are mounted on parallel shafts
inside a casing and rotate in opposite directions. As
each impeller passes the blower inlet a volume of gas
is trapped, carried through to the blower discharge
and expelled against the discharge pressure. The
casing of the rotary blower is cast iron and the
impellers are ductile iron. Rotary blowers are
manufactured in standard sizes.
Material:
*CS*
100 - 4,000 CFM [170 - 6,700 M3/H]
2 - 15 PSIG [15 - 100 KPA];
Speed: 900 - 3,600 RPM
ROT BLOWER
Description Type
Vaneaxial fan.
Material:
*CS*
2,300 - 45,000 CFM [3.950 - 76,450 M3/H]
VANEAXIAL
4 Drivers (G11) 4-1
Power Level
Standard Motor Sizes
Synchronous Motor Speeds (RPM)
Turbines (TUR)
4 Drivers (G11)
4-2 4 Drivers (G11)
Electrical motors serve as the primary means of driving the rotating
equipment, for example, pumps, compressors and fans.
Motors are built in a wide range of enclosure types, rotating speeds and
horsepowers. Selection of a particular motor warrants careful consideration of
the motors application. The considerations at the site (temperature, air-borne
particles, moisture, oil vapor, dust, abrasive or conducting particles, corrosive
fumes or explosive gases), and the specific use of a motor (e.g., pump,
compressor or crusher driver) determine the hazards involved and the
protective measures required for safe operation. These considerations led to
motor classification by enclosure types.
Description Type
Standard open drip-proof motors with vent openings
for indoor service:
Driver Power:
0.75 - 50,000 HP [0.75 - 37,000 KW]
Enclosure Type:
Default: *STD*
STD- Standard indoor service (open drip- proof with
vent openings)
WPI- Normal outdoor service (weather-
protected (rain, snow, air-borne particles)
WPII- Severe outdoor service (outside
weather-protected service)
OPEN
4 Drivers (G11) 4-3
Electrical Motors (MOT) - continued
Description Type
OPEN - continued
Driver Type:
Default: *STD*
STD- Standard motor
Speed:
Range: (15 x HZ) - (60 x HZ) RPM; Default: *
(30 x HZ)* RPM
Synchronous motors with high efficiency at low speed
for large HP [KW] requirements, reciprocating
compressors, pump compressors, pumps,
crushers and mixers.
Driver Power:
200 - 20,000 HP [150 - 15,000 KW]
Enclosure Type:
Default: Water cooled if greater than 8,000 HP
[6,000], else standard.
STD- Standard outdoor service
WPI- Normal outdoor service
WPII- Severe outdoor service
TEWAC- Water cooled
Speed:
Range: (3.7 x HZ) - (30 x HZ) RPM; Default: *
(30 x HZ)* RPM
SYNCHRON
Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motors (TEFC)
The TEFC motor is especially suitable for outdoor use
involving severe environmental conditions. It can also
withstand severe operating conditions (heat, lint and
dirt) when used indoors.
The TEFC is a totally enclosed machine constructed to
prohibit the exchange of air between the inside and
outside of the casing. It is cooled by means of a fan
integral with the machine but external to the electric
parts. TEFC motors are available from 1 - 500 HP. For
severe service conditions requiring up to 200 HP, TEFC
motors are less costly and provide better protection
than weather-protected motors. Except for some
specially designed enclosures, the TEFC motor
provides the best protection against moisture,
corrosive vapors, dust and dirt.
ENCLOSED
4-4 4 Drivers (G11)
Description Type
ENCLOSED - continued
Driver Power:
0.75 - 10,000 HP [0.75 - 7,100 KW]
Driver Type:
Default: Water cooled (TEWAC) if greater than
300 HP [224 KW], else fan cooled (TEFC).
STD- Standard motor
Speed:
Range: (20 x HZ) - (60 x HZ) RPM; Default: *(30 x
HZ)* RPM.
Explosion-proof motors for Class I Division 1
hazardous use.
Explosion-proof motors are required when the location
of the motor is classified according to the NEC
(National Electrical Code) as a Class I, Division 1,
Hazardous Area. Class I represents an area containing
flammable gases or vapors and Division 1 specifies
that hazardous atmospheres can occur under normal
operation conditions. The source of a hazardous
atmosphere is generally leakage from process
equipment (e.g., pumps or compressors) handling
combustible volatile liquids or combustible gases.
An explosion-proof motor is basically a TEFC motor
with heavier construction and more careful machining.
An explosion-proof motor has an enclosure designed
to withstand the explosion of a gas or vapor occurring
within it and to prevent the ignition of the atmosphere
surrounding the machine by sparks, flashes or
explosions from within. Explosion proof motors are
available up to 3,000 HP at 3,600 RPM.
Driver Power:
0.75 - 4,000 HP [0.75 - 2,800 KW]
Driver Type:
Default: *STD*
STD- Standard motor
Speed:
Range: (20 x HZ) - (30 x HZ) RPM; Default: *(30 x
HZ)* RPM.
EXP PROOF
4 Drivers (G11) 4-5
Description Type
TEFC motor integral with variable speed drive.
Includes handwheel control of sheaves with a built-in
indicator and TEFC motor as an integral part of the
unit.
This component is used when there is an optimum
speed at which to run a process machine (e.g., pumps,
fans, mixers, dryers and crushers).
A mechanical speed drive permits the adjustment of
output speed by mechanical means (manually
adjusted). The motor speed (input speed) is geared
down by a system of pulleys to supply lower shaft
speeds (output speed) to process equipment. Available
output speeds range from approximately 5 - 4,000
RPM. Pulley ratios of input to output speeds range
from 2:1 through 10:1. Mechanical variable speed
drives typically range from 0.5 to 50 HP. Speed
adjustment can be either manual, by turning a
handle, or automatic. Although the mechanical
variable speed motor provides high efficiency
over the entire speed range, it does not supply a
high degree of accuracy in speed regulation.
(Variable frequency driver available with OPEN,
ENCLOSED, EXP PROOF.)
Low Speed:
(.09 x HZ) - (9.6 x HZ) RPM
High Speed:
(1.4 x HZ) - (58 x HZ) RPM
Driver Power:
0.5 - 400 HP [0.75 - 300 KW]
VARY SPEED
4-6 4 Drivers (G11)
Power Level
Power is supplied to a motor at a voltage level as follows.
Voltage Level (3 Phase Service)
Motor Size US Country Base UK Country Base
Less than 1 HP [0.75 KW]
1 HP to under MDP (*200* HP)
[.75 KW to under MDP (*150* KW)]
MDP (*200* HP) to 4,000 HP
[MDP (*150* KW) to 3,000 KW]
Greater than 4,000 HP [3,000 KW]
110 V
Low Voltage
*230/480* V
4,160 V
13,800 V
240v
Low Voltage
*415* V
3,300 V
11,000 V
Frequency 60 Hertz 50 Hertz
10000 - 37000 KW: Increments of
1000 KW

4 Drivers (G11) 4-7
Standard Motor Sizes
HP KW
0.125
0.25
0.333
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
200 - 500 HP:increments of 50
0.75
1.11
1.50
2.22
3.0
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
30.0
37.5
45.0
55.0
75.0
80
80
85
95
100
106
112

118
125
132
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
212
224
236
250
265
280
300
315
335
375
400
425
450
475

500
530
560
560
600
630
670
710
750
800
900
1000
1120
1250
1400
1600
1800
2000
2240
2500
2500
2800
3150
3550
4000
4500
5000
5600
6300
7100
8000
9000
10000
4-8 4 Drivers (G11)
Synchronous Motor Speeds (RPM)
60 Hertz Service 50 Hertz Service
1800
1200
900
720
600
514
450
400
360
327
300
277
257
240
225
1500
1000
750
600
500
428
375
333
300
272
250
231
214
200
187
4 Drivers (G11) 4-9
Turbines (TUR)
Description Type
Steam turbine driver includes condenser and
accessories.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Power Output:
10 - 30,000 HP [8 - 22,300 KW]
Steam Gauge Pressure:
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Speed:
Max: 3,600 RPM; Default: *3,600* RPM
CONDENSING
Non-condensing type steam turbine driver includes
accessories.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Power Output:
10 - 30,000 HP [8 - 22,300 KW]
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Speed:
Max: 3,600 RPM;
NON COND
4-10 4 Drivers (G11)
Gas turbine includes fuel gas combustion chamber and
multi-stage turbine expander.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Power Output:
1,000 - 500,000 HP [750 - 375,000 KW]
GAS
Turbo expander includes only the expander (turbine)
part and any spare cartridges. It does not include
compressor (booster) part. So, all input/output
variables in the model refer to an expansion process,
and the resulting cost and weight data belong only to
the expander part.
Note: The material used by the system is A3003
(aluminum).
Range: 5 - 200,000 CFM [8.5 - 339,800 m3/hr]
Required field
Range: (>0) - 3000 PSIG [(>0) - 20,684 kPag]
Required field
Range: -450 to 600 DEG F [-267 to 315 DEG C]
Range: 0 - 1 ,000 PSIG [0 - 6,894 kPag]
Required field
Power output:
Range: (>0) - 2,000 HP [(>0) - 1,500 kW]
Molecular weight:
Range: 1 - 500
Default: *29*
Default molecular weight is that of air
Range: 1.04 - 2
Default: *1.4*
Default specific heat ratio is that of air
Range: 0.05 - 3
Default: *1*
Default compressibility factor assumes an ideal gas
Isentropic efficiency:
Range: 30 - 100 PERCENT
Default: *85* PERCENT
Number of spare cartridges:
Min: 0
Default: *0*
TURBOEXP
Description Type
5 Heat Transfer (G10) 5-1

Reboilers (RB)
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU)
TEMA Exchanger Construction Nomenclature
Icarus Supported TEMA Types
5 Heat Transfer (G10)
5-2 5 Heat Transfer (G10)
Heat exchangers are used to transfer heat from one fluid to another fluid. In
the terminology of chemical engineering, a fluid may be either a gas or a
liquid. Therefore, when we say we are transferring heat from one fluid to
another, we can mean either a gas-gas exchanger, a liquid-liquid exchanger or
a gas-liquid exchanger.
Heat exchangers may be called by other names depending upon their specific
purpose. If a process fluid is being cooled with water, the term cooler is often
used. If a gaseous process fluid is cooled with water until it becomes a liquid,
the term condenser is used. If a liquid process fluid is heated (usually with
steam) until it turns into a gas, the term vaporizer is used. If a process fluid
is heated (usually with steam) the term economizer is used. If two process
fluids exchange heat, the term heat exchanger is used.
The most common type of heat exchanger, and therefore, the kind described
here, is the shell and tube heat exchanger. The shell and tube heat exchanger
consists of a bundle of tubes. Each tube is usually 3/4 or INCH in outside
diameter and 20 to 40 FEET long. The tube bundle is held in a cylindrical shape
by plates at either end called tube sheets. The tube bundle is placed inside a
cylindrical shell. The design of the shell and tube heat exchanger is such that
one fluid flows inside the tubes, while the other fluid flows over the outside of
the tubes. Heat is transferred through the tube walls. The size of a heat
exchanger is defined as the total outside surface area of the tube bundle.
Wide variety of materials: floating head, fixed tube sheet, U-tube exchangers,
multiple shells/passes, TEMA Class B and other types.
Heat Exchangers (HE) - continued
Description Type
Air cooler with variety of plenum chambers, louver
arrangements, fin types (or bare tubes), sizes,
materials, freestanding or rack- mounted, multiple
bays and multiple services within a single bay.
Bare tube area 1st service:
Primary or single service. Total bare tube surface area
for primary service. If the exchanger is a single
service, then this is the total bare tube surface area.
The surface area is for all bays.
Tube material 1st service:
Primary or single service; Default: *A 179*. See
Chapter 28 for tube materials.
Design gauge pressure 1st serv.:
Inlet temperature 1st service:
Tube outside diameter 1st serv.:
Default: *1.0* INCHES [*25.0* MM]
Tube wall thickness 1st service:
The wall thickness of tubing used for primary or single
services, in inches or BWG rating. For grooved tubes,
specify the thickness under the groove. Thickness may
be entered as a positive signed value in decimal
INCHES [MM] or as a negative signed integer value of
BWG (-1 to -24 BWG). If no value is specified, the
system calculates a value based on tube material,
temperature and pressure of service, with minimum of
0.1080 INCHES [2.74 MM] per API 661 code.
Corrosion allowance 1st service:
Default: 0.0, except CS: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM]
Tube length:
Range: 4 - 60 FEET [1.25 - 18.0 M]
Bay width:
Max: 30.0 [9.0 M]
Height: This is the leg height for air coolers at grade.
Default: *0.0* (rack mounted)
Number of walkways:
Default: *2*. Does not apply to Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator.
Plenum type symbol:
Default: *TRNS*
PANL- Panel shaped plenum
TRNS- Transition shaped
NONE- No plenum
AIR COOLER
Description Type
AIR COOLER - continued
Louver type symbol:
Default: *FACE*
FACE- Face louvers only
SIDE- Side louvers only
BOTH- Face + side louvers
NONE- No louvers
Fin type symbol:
Default: L-footed if temperature below
400 DEG F [205 DEG C], esle embedded.
E - Embedded
L - L-foot tension wound
W - Wheel
X - Extracted
NONE - Bare tubes
Fin pitch:
Number of fin tubes per INCH [per 25 MM],
ignore if bar tube specified. Range: 6.0 - 20.0;
Default: *10.0*
Fin material symbol:
Ignore this field for bare tubes. Default: *AL*.
AL - Aluminum fins
CS - Carbon steel fins
CU - Copper fins
SS - Stainless steel fins
Tube fin height:
Ignore this field for bare tubes;
Range: 0.250 - 2.50 INCHES [10.0 - 65.0 MM];
Default: *0.625* INCHES [*15* MM]
Number of tube rows:
Max: 13
Tube pitch:
Default: *2.25* INCHES [55.0 MM]
Number of fans per bay:
Range: 1-3
Fixed tube sheet shell and tube exchangers.
TEMA type BEM fixed tube sheet
The fixed tube sheet shell and tube heat exchanger is
applicable to trim cooler and other low temperature
applications, as well as services where the shell side
fluid is non-fouling, such as steam, dowtherm and
gasses. A fixed tube sheet heat exchanger has its tube
sheets fixed to both ends of the shell, with or without a
shell expansion joint.
FIXED T S
Description Type
FIXED T S - continued
Fixed tube sheet heat exchangers are more
economical to fabricate than floating head heat
exchangers, but unless an expansion joint is placed in
the shell the difference in temperature between the
shell and tubes must be small or the unequal thermal
expansion of the shell and tube bundle will cause
unacceptable mechanical stresses. The fixed tube
sheet design also does not allow the tube bundle to be
removed. Therefore, fixed tube sheet heat exchangers
are limited to clean services and services where the
dirt and scale on the outside surface of the tubes is
easily cleaned by chemical means.
Heat transfer area:
Enter either heat transfer area or number of
shells, tubes/shell and tube data.
Number of shells:
Tube material:
Default: A 214 to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C],
304S for higher temperatures. See Chapter 28 for
tube materials.
Tube design gauge pressure:
Tube design temperature:
Default: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C] for copper alloys;
other material: 640 DEG F [340 DEG C]
Tube operating temperature:
Default: design temperature
Tube outside diameter:
0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];
Shell material:
Default: A285C to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], SS304 for
higher temperatures. See Chapter 28 for materials.
Shell design gauge pressure:
Shell design temperature: Default: 400 DEG F [200
DEG C] for copper alloys; *650* DEG F [*340* DEG C]
for other materials.
Description Type
Shell operating temperature:
Tube side pipe material:
See Chapter 18 for pipe materials.
Shell side pipe material:
Number of tubes per shell:
Enter either heat transfer area or number of shells,
tubes/shell and tube data.
Tube length extended:
8 - 60 FEET [2.5 - 18 M];
Default: *20* FEET [*6* M]
Tube gauge:
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both,
including corrosion allowance; 1 - 24 BWG
Tube wall thickness:
including corrosion allowance; 0.02 - 0.34 INCHES
[0.6 - 8.6 MM]
Tube corrosion allowance:
Default: 0.0025 INCHES [0.06 MM] for CS, 0.0 for
other materials
Tube seal type:
Default: *SEALW*
EXPND- Expanded tube-to-tubesheet joints
SEALW- Seal welded tube joints
STRNW- Strength welded tube joints
Tube pitch:
1.25 x tube outside diameter
Tube pitch symbol:
Default: *TRIANGLE*
DIAMOND- Diamond tube pitch
SQUARE- Square tube pitch
TRIANGULAR- Triangular tube pitch
Shell diameter:
Max: 192.0 INCHES [4,875.0 MM]
Shell wall thickness:
Shell thickness including corrosion allowance.
Shell corrosion allowance:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS,
0.0 for other materials.
Description Type
Expansion joint:
Default: *NO*
NO- No expansion joint in shell
YES- Expansion joint required in shell
Tube sheet material:
See Chapter 28 for tube materials.
Tube sheet corrosion allowance:
Default: lesser of 50 x tube corrosion
allowance or 0.25 INCHES [6 MM].
Channel material:
Default: tubesheet material. See Chapter
28 for materials.
Cladding thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material
specified, otherwise 0.0.
Cladding material:
See Chapter 28 for material selection.
Cladding location:
Default: *SHELL*
SHELL- Cladding on shell side only
TUBE- Cladding on tube side only
BOTH- Cladding on both shell and tube sides
Number of tube passes:
Default: *1*
Number of shell passes:
Default: *1*
Stress relief:
Weld X-ray:
Max: 100; Default: *20*
TEMA type:
Default: BEM for 1 shell pass, BFM for 2 shell passes.
Vendor grade:
Default: *HIGH*
STAND - Standard vender
HIGH - Specialty vender - high grade/custom work
Regulation type:
Japanese country base only. Required government
regulation and testing; Default: *NONE*
NONE - No special regulations
PV - Pressure vessel regulations
HPG - High pressure gas regulations
Description Type
Floating head shell of 48 INCHES [1200 MM]
maximum and exchanger.
Applicable to any heat exchange application, but not
normally used for clean and/or low temperature
services where the fixed tube sheet exchanger is
usually the more economic choice.
The floating head heat exchanger accommodates the
differential thermal expansion of tube bundle and
shell, and also allows the tube bundle to be completely
removed from the shell. The floating head heat
exchanger is consequentially specified for services
where the shell size of the tube bundle is subject to
fouling and services which involve large temperature
differentials between shell side and tube side fluids.
Heat transfer area:
Number of shells:
tube/shell and tube data.
Tube material:
Default: A 214 to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C],
304S for higher temperatures. See chapter 28 for tube
materials.
650 DEG F [340 DEG C] other material
0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];
Shell material:
Default: A285C to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], SS304 for
higher temperatures
Default: 150 PSIG [1,000 KPA]
FLOAT HEAD
Description Type
FLOAT HEAD - continued
Shell design temperature:
Default: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C] for cooper alloys;
650 DEG F [340 DEG C] for other material
See Pipe Materials in Chapter 18.
See Pipe Materials in Chapter 18.
Enter either heat transfer area or number
of shells, tubes/shell and tube data.
8 - 60 FEET [2.5 - 18 M];
Tube gauge:
including corrosion allowance; 1-24 BWG
including corrosion allowance; 0.02 - 0.34 INCHES
[0.6 - 8.6 MM]
Default: 0.0025 INCHES [0.06 MM]
for CS, 0.0 for other materials
Tube seal type:
Default: *SEALW*
SEALW- Seal welded tube joints
Tube pitch:
Default: 1.25 x tube outside diameter
Tube pitch symbol:
Default: *TRIANGULAR*
TRIANGLE- Triangular tube pitch
Shell diameter:
Max: 192.0 INCHES [4,875.0 MM]
Description Type
FLOAT HEAD - continued
Expansion joint:
Default: *NO*
NO - No expansion joint in shell
YES - Expansion required in shell
See Tube Materials in Chapter 28.
Default: Lesser of 50 x tube corrosion allowance, or
0.25 INCHES [6 MM].
Channel material:
Default: tubesheet material. See Tube Materials in
Chapter 28.
Cladding thickness:
Cladding material:
See cladding material in Chapter 28.
Cladding location:
Default: *SHELL*
SHELL - Cladding on shell side only
TUBE - Cladding on tube side only
BOTH - Cladding on both shell and tube sides
Default: *2*
Default: *1*
Stress relief:
CODE - Provide stress relief if code required
Weld X-ray:
Max 100; Default: *20*
TEMA type:
Default: BES for 1 shell pass, BFS for 2 shell passes.
Vendor grade:
Default: *HIGH*
STAND - Standard vendor
HIGH - Specialty vendor - high grade/custom work
Regulation type:
For Japanese country base only. Required
government regulation and testing. Default: *NONE*
PV - Pressure vessel regulations
HPG - High pressure gas regulations
Description Type
U-tube shell and tube exchangers. TEMA type BEU U-
Tube.
U-tube shell and tube exchangers are normally used in
those services where the tubeside fluid is non-fouling
or where the deposits formed are easily removed with
chemical cleaning. Since the tube bundle is
removable, the fluid in the shell side can be fouling.
Since the U-tube design eliminates one tube sheet,
these exchangers are often used for high pressure
applications.
As the name indicates, all the tubes are U-shaped.
Consequentially, there is only one tube sheet. The
tube side fluid enters one leg of the U-tube and exits
from the other leg. The U-tubes are free to expand
inside the exchanger shell; thus, a large temperature
differences between shell side and tube side fluids can
be handled. The U-tube bundle is usually removable
for inspection and cleaning. The inside of the U-tubes
are hard to clean because of the U-bend. U-tube heat
exchangers are unsuitable for handling erosive fluids
because the U-bends rapidly wear out.
Heat transfer area:
Number of shells:
Tube material:
Default: *A 214* to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], *304S*
for higher temperatures. See Chapter 28 for tube
data.
Default: *400* DEG F [*200* DEG C] for copper
alloys; other material: *650* DEG F [*340* DEG C]
Range: 0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];
Shell material:
Default: *A285C* to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C],
SS304 for higher temperatures
U TUBE
Description Type
U TUBE - continued
Default: *400* DEG F [*200* DEG C] for
copper alloys; *650* DEG F [*340* DEG C] other
materials
Range: 8 - 12 FEET [2.5 - 36 M];
Default: *40*Feet [*12* M]
Tube gauge:
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including
corrosion allowance. Range: 1-24 BWG
corrosion allowance. Range:0.02 - 0.34 INCHES
[0.6 - 8.6 MM]
Default: *0.0025* INCHES [*0.06* MM] for CS, *0.0*
for other materials.
Tube seal type:
Default: *SEALW*
EXPD - Expanded tube-to tubesheet joints
SEALW - Seal welded tube joints
STRNW - Strength welded tube joints
Tube pitch:
Tube pitch symbol:
Shell diameter:
Max: 192 INCHES [4,875 MM]
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] for
CS, *0.0* for other materials
Description Type
U TUBE - continued
Expansion joint:
Default: *NO*
NO - No expansion joint in shell
YES - Expansion joint required in shell
*0.25* INCHES [*6* MM]
Channel material:
See Chapter 28 for materials.
Cladding thickness:
Default: *0.125* INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material
is specified; otherwise *0.0*
Cladding material:
See Chapter 28 for cladding materials.
Cladding location:
Default: *SHELL*
Default: *2*
Default: *1*
Stress relief:
Default: See Project Design Basis.
Weld X-ray:
TEMA type:
*BEU* for 1 shell pass, *BFU* for 2 shell passes.
Vendor grade:
Default: *HIGH*
STAND - Standard vendor
HIGH - Specialty vendor - high grade/custom work
Regulation type:
Japanese country base only. Required government
regulations and testing.
Default: *NONE*.
PV- Pressure vessel regulations
HPG- High pressure gas regulations
Description Type
Fixed tube, float. head, u-tube exchanger
This model merges the three TEMA heat exchangers,
which are retained for compatibility purposes (in
earlier system versions, changing the type of TEMA
heat exchanger required that one delete the entry and
specify another heat exchanger).
Heat transfer area: Enter either heat transfer area
or no. of shells, tubes/shell and tube data.
Number of shells: Enter either heat transfer area or
no. of shells, tubes/shell and tube data.
Front end head type: Use front head type, shell type
and rear head type to construct TEMA type symbol.
Front head type options:
A- Channel and removable cover
B- Bonnet integral cover
C- Tubesheet channel integral, remov. cover
N- Tubesheet channel integral, remov. cover
Shell TEMA symbol: Use front head type, shell type
and rear head type to construct TEMA type symbol.
Shell type options:
E- One pass shell
F- Two pass shell with longitudinal baffle
G- Split flow
H- Double split flow
J- Divided flow
X- Cross flow
Rear end head type:
Use front head type, shell type and rear head type to
construct TEMA type symbol. Rear head type options:
L - Fixed tubesheet, channel removable cover
M - Fixed tubesheet, bonnet integral cover
N - Fixed tubesheet, channel integral, remov.
P - Outside packed floating head
S - Floating head with backing device
T- Pull through floating head
U - U-tube bundle
W - Externally sealed floating tubesheet
Heat exchanger design option:
*<BLANK>*- Standard exchanger design
TBWNB- Tube bundle design only, w/o system bulks
Design/cost option for TBWNB only
TEMA EXCH
Description Type
TEMA EXCH - continued
Tube material: Default: CS to 900 DEGF [482 DEGC],
or else SS; see Proj Basis spec for welded/smls.
CS- Carbon steel
A 179- Seamless CS
A 214- Welded carbon steel
A 209- C - .5Mo
A213C- 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
A213F- 5Cr - .5Mo
304LW- 304L welded
316LW- 316L welded
321S- SS321 seamless
347S- SS347 seamless
C 20- Carpenter 20
TI50A- Titanium
NI200- Nickel
INCNL- Inconel
MONEL- Monel
*150 PSIG [1,000 KPA]*
Default: 400 DEGF [200 DEGC] for copper alloys;
other matl: 650 DEGF [340 DEGC
*1.0 INCHES [25 MM]*, MIN: 0.25 INCHES [6 MM],
MAX: 6.0 INCHES [150 MM]
Shell material:
Default: A285C to 900 DEGF [482 DEGC], SS304 for
higher temperatures.
CS- Carbon steel
A 515- A 515
A204C- C - .5Mo
A387B- 1Cr - .5Mo
A387D- 2.25Cr - 1Mo
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
SS321- SS321
SS347- SS347
SS410- SS410
SS430- SS430
304L- 304L
316L- 316L
NI- Nickel
Description Type
INCNL- Inconel
*150 PSIG [1,000 KPA]*
Default: 400 DEGF [200 DEGC] for copper alloys; 650
DEGF [340 DEGC] other matl
A 53- A 53
A 106- A 106
A333C- 3.5Ni
A335C- A.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
304P- SS304
304LP- 304L
316P- SS316
316LP- 316L
321P- SS321
AL- Aluminum
NI- Nickel
MONEL- Monel
INCNL- Inconel
TI- Titanium
HAST- Hastelloy
See materials listed above for Tube side pipe material
Enter either heat transfer area or no. of shells, tubes/
shell and tube data.
For U-tube: MIN: 8 FEET [2.5M], MAX: 120 FEET
[36M], else
MIN: 4 FEET [1.25M], MAX: 60 FEET [18M]
Tube gage:
MIN: 1 BWG,
MAX: 24 BWG
corrosion allowance.
MIN: 0.02 INCHES [0.6 MM],
MAX 0.34 INCHES [8.6 MM]
Description Type
Default: 0.0025 INCHES [0.06 MM] for CS, 0.0 for
other materials.
Tube seal type:
*SEALW*- Seal welded tube joints
Tube pitch:
Default: 1.25 x tube outside diameter.
Tube pitch symbol:
Shell diameter:
Shell thickness including corrosion all.
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS, 0.0 for other
materials.
Expansion joint:
*NO*- No expansion joint in shell
YES- Expansion joint required in shell
CS- Carbon steel
A 515- A 515
A204C- C - .5Mo
A387B- 1Cr - .5Mo
A387D- 2.25Cr - 1Mo
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
SS321- SS321
SS347- SS347
SS410- SS410
SS430- SS430
304L- 304L
316L- 316L
NI- Nickel
INCNL- Inconel
Default: lesser of 50 x tube corr. all., or 0.25
INCHES [6 MM].
Channel material:
Default: tubesheet material
Description Type
Cladding thickness:
specified; otherwise: 0.0
Cladding material:
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS321
SS347- SS347
SS410- SS410
SS430- SS430
304L- 304L
316L- 316L
NI200- Ni 200
NI201- Ni 201
MONEL- Monel
INCNL- Inconel
I800- Ni-Fe-Cr
I825- Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu
C 20- Carpenter 20
TI- Titanium
HASTB- Hastelloy B
HASTC- Hastelloy C
Cladding location:
*SHELL*- Cladding on shell side only
Number of tube passes: * 1*
Number of shell passes: * 1*
Stress relief:
Default: see Area Design Basis.
Weld X-ray:
* 20*, MAX: 100
Vendor grade:
STAND- Standard vendor
*HIGH*- Specialty vendor for high grade or
custom work
Regulation type:
only for Japanese country base, which requires
government regulation and testing.
*NONE*- No special regulations
PV- Pressure vessel regulations (Japan)
HPG- High pressure gas regulations (Japan)
- Continued next page -
Description Type
The following three options can be found under "Heat exchanger design option".
Blank Standard exchanger design
TBWNB Tube bundle design only, w/o system bulks
STABN Stabbed-in tube bundle design only, w/o system bulks
The third option (STABN) is available in the 2004 release. The "Standard exchanger
design" option would cost a regular heat exchanger (shell, tubes, baffles, etc.) and its
bulks, while TBWNB would cost a "tube bundle design only without any system bulks."
TBWNB would not generate any shell and heads, but it will include tubes, internals/
baffles, and tube sheet.
The STABN option is a variation of TBWNB with the following major differences from
TBWNB.
In STABN:
The tube bundle is horizontally installed (stabbed) into the vertical vessel (tower),
in a way that the tube-side flow inlet/outlet headers stay outside the vessel beyond
the tubesheet.
The front head is also included to act as a cap of the inlet/outlet headers for the
tube-side flow.
STABN also costs a reboiler tub and support arrangement for the tube bundle. The
reboiler tub inside the vessel is designed to bear the liquid held-up in the tub
around the tube bundle to avoid the dry-out. The tub is designed to
contain and bear the hydrostatic load of the liquid held-up. The overall hydrostatic
load on the tub bottom is eventually supported by an I-beam design running in the
middle of the vessel along its diameter.
Description Type
Pre-engineered (standard) U-tube exchanger for use
as a sample cooler or other miscellaneous application.
Heat transfer area:
tubes and tube data. Range: 3.50 - 120.0 SF
[0.33 - 11.0 M2]
Tube material:
Default: *CA443*
A 179- Seamless CS 304LW- 304L welded
A 192- Seamless CS 316W- 316 welded
A 214- Welded carbon 316LW- 316L welded
steel CA122- Cu seamless
304S- 304 seamless CA706- Cu-Ni seamless
304LS- 304L seamless CA715- Cu-Ni seamless
316S- 316 seamless CA443- Admiralty brass
316LS- 316L seamless CA444- Admiralty brass
304W- 304 welded CA445- Admiralty brass
Range: 0.5 - 1.5 INCHES
[12.0 - 38.0 MM]; Default: *0.75* INCHES [*19* MM]
Shell material:
Default: *A285C*
A285C- Carbon steel
A 516- A-516
SS304- SS304
304L- 304L
SS316- SS316
316L- 316L
PRE ENGR
Description Type
PRE ENGR - continued
Number of tubes:
Enter either heat transfer area or number of tubes and
tube data.
Enter either heat transfer area or number of tubes and
tube data. Range: 4.00 - 16.0 FEET [1.20 - 4.80 M]
Tube gage:
including corrosion allowance. Range: 16 - 20 BWG
corrosion allowance; Range: 0.035 - 0.065 INCHES
[0.900 - 1.65 MM]
for CS, *0.0* for other materials
Tube pitch:
Default: *.25 x tube outside diameter*
Tube pitch symbol:
Shell diameter:
Range: 4.00 - 10.00 INCHES
[102.0 - 254.0 MM]
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] for CS, *0.0* for
other materials
Description Type
Electric immersion tank heater.
Material:
Default: *CU*
CU- Copper
SS304- SS304
Power output:
Range: 6 -200 KW
HEATER ELC
Heating/cooling coil with spiral or serpentine coil of
bare pipe, use as tank heater or column tray cooler to
keep the contents of a tank from solidifying or
becoming too viscous to pump.
This item is a steam coil. A steam coil is a long length
of pipe that covers the bottom of a tank usually in a
spiral or serpentine pattern. Steam is passed through
the coil to heat the contents of the tank. If cooling
water was passed through the coil instead of steam,
this item would be a cooling coil.
This is normally a field fabricated item.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel316LP- 316L
SS- Stainless steel321P- SS321
A333C- 3.5 NiCU- Copper
A335C- 1.25 Cr - .5 Mo - SiNI- Nickel
A335F- 5 Cr - .5 MoMONEL- Monel
304LP- 304LINCNL- Inconel
316P- SS316
Heat transfer area:
Range: 1 - 25,000 SF [0.1 - 2,300 M2]
Pipe diameter:
Range: 1 - 6 IN DIAM [25 - 150 MM DIAM]
HEATER STM
Bare-tube double-pipe heat exchanger.
Applicable to any heat transfer application where only
a small amount of heat transfer surface area is
required.
This item is a hairpin heat exchanger. One or more
finned or bare U-shaped tubes are supported
concentrically inside a U-shaped
shell.
JACKETED
Heat Exchangers (HE) - continued.
Description Type
JACKETED - continued
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Heat transfer area:
10 - 1,000 SF [1 - 90 M2]
Tube length:
Range: 8 - 25 FEET [2.5 - 7.5 M];
Default: *1*
1- 1 tube per shell
7- 7 tubes per shell
Design gauge pressure:
Max: 6,000 PSIG [40,000 KPA]
Design temperature:
Max: 1,200 DEG F [645 DEG C]
Longitudinal finned double-pipe heat exchanger.
Hairpin sections are connected in series or parallel.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Heat transfer area:
Enter total heat transfer area (i.e., total extended
surface or finned tubes).
Range:
70 - 10,000 SF [7 - 920 M2]
Tube length:
Range: 8 - 25 FEET [2.5 - 7.5 M];
Number of fins:
Range: 12 - 48; Default: *24*
Max: 6,000 PSIG [40,000 KPA]
Default: *1*
1- 1 tube per shell
7- 7 tubes per shell
FIN TUBE
Description Type
All-graphite heat exchanger.
Material:
Default: *GRAPH*
Heat transfer area:
Range: 8 - 150 SF [1.0 - 13.5 M2]
CROSS BORE
Rietz type thermascrew conveyor with motor
and drive.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS304- SS304
Heat transfer area:
10 - 400 SF [1 - 37 M2]
ONE SCREW
Twin screw thermascrew conveyor with motor
and drive.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS304- SS304
Heat transfer area:
10 - 400 SF [1 - 37 M2]
TWO SCREW
Graphite tube with carbon steel shell exchanger.
Heat transfer area:
Range: 80 - 9,730 SF [7.5 - 870 M2]
Tube length:
Range: 6 - 20 FEET [2 - 6 M]
SHELL TUBE
Description Type
Spiral plate heat exchanger.
Material:
Default:*SS304*
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
TI- Titanium
HAST- Hastelloy
Heat transfer area:
Range: 40 - 1,330 SF [4 - 123 M2]
Range: 150 - 300 PSIG [1,000 - 2,000 KPA];
Default: 150 PSIG [1,000 KPA]
SPIRAL PLT
Tank suction heater without tank.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Heat transfer area:
Range: 135 - 4,000 SF [13 - 370 M2]
SUC HEATER
Waste heat boiler for generation of steam, hot
gas or liquid heating medium.
A waste heat boiler is used to generate steam
from heat that would otherwise be wasted. A
waste heat boiler is essentially the convection
section only of a normal water-tube gas or
liquid boiler. The heating medium is a hot gas
or liquid produced by exothermic chemical
reactions, regeneration of cracking catalyst,
etc. The flow rate is used only to calculate
piping diameters for the P&ID.
A steam production rate can be entered in this
field. If other flow types are needed, piping
diameters may need to be revised. The
equipment cost is determined solely by the
heat transfer area.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Flow Rate:
Steam production rate (lb/hr or kg/hr)
Heat transfer area:
Range: 1,300 - 10,000 SF [125 - 925 M2]
WASTE HEAT
Description Type
Plate and frame heat exchanger.
Plate material:
Default: *SS304*
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
S04L- 304L
S16L- 316L
HAST- Hastelloy
Heat transfer area:
Range: 10 - 2,000 SF [1.0 - 185 M2]
Number of plates:
Max: 500
Max: 350 PSIG [2,410 KPA];
Design temperature:
PLAT FRAM
Sanitary corrugated double pipe exchanger
Used to heat, cool, and pasteurize a variety of food
products, like concentrates and dairy by-products.
Tube material:
*SS316*- SS316
AL6XN- High Cr, Mo+Ni. Super-austentic
stainless steel.
Total tube area:
Required: any two must be entered: total area, tube
length/pass, number of passes.
Tube length per pass:
Any two must be entered: total area, tube length/
pass, number of passes.
CORRUGATED
(Close-up of piping)
Double pipe size:
Inch-Pound Metric
Symbol Outer
Tube
Inner
Tube
Outer
Tube
Inner
Tube
3x20 3 Inches 2 Inches 75 MM 50 MM
4x25 4 Inches 2.5 Inches 100 MM 60 MM
4x30 4 Inches 3 Inches 100MM 75 MM
Description Type
CORRUGATED - continued
Any two must be entered: total area, tube length/
pass, number of passes.
Frame option:
*INCL*- Frame is included
HUNG- Frame is not included
Water heater (shell+tube - hot water set)
Used mainly with a plate heat exchanger to
provide hot water for heating various process
liquids. Steam is supplied to the shell side. Since
this is a sanitary item, material of construction is
SS316.
Water flow rate:
MAX: 400 GPM [25 L/S]
Temperature rise:
MAX: 50 DEG F [27 DEG C]
SS skid water pipe required:
*NONE*- Not included
INCL- Included
Expansion tank:
INCL- Included
Condensate return pump:
INCL- Included
HOT WATER
Sanitary multi-zone plate+frame exchanger
Plates are of the vertical flow type. Alternate plates
can be inverted to obtain desired flow arrangement.
Frame consists of a head and end support connected
by a top carrying bar and a bottom guide bar to form a
rigid unit supporting the plates.
Plate material:
*SS*- SS304
TI- Titanium
MULTI P F
Description Type
MULTI P F - continued
Frame material:
Default: SS for plate areas equal to or less than 1.87
SF [0.174 M2], else SSCLD.
SS- Stainless steel. Only available for plate areas
equal to or less than 1.87 SF [0.174 M2]
SSCLD- SS clad carbon steel. Only available for plate
areas greater than 1.87 SF [0.1737 M2].
CS- Carbon steel. Available for all plate areas.
Area per plate:
MIN: 0.27 SF [0.025 M2], MAX: 6.0 SF [0.557 M2].
The maximum number of plates will depend upon the
area per plate. There are seven standard plate areas:
Plate area Zone 1:
Required: enter the total area or no. of plates for zone
1, other zones optional.
Number of plates Zone 1:
Required: enter the total area or no. of plates for zone
1, other zones optional.
Plate area Zone 2:
Enter either total area or no. of plates for Zone 2.
Plate area Zone 3:
Plate Area
SF M2
Max. No. of Plates
In All Zones
0.27 0.025 152
0.92 0.085 200
1.81 0.168 150
1.87 0.173 200
3.75 0.348 420
5.6 0.520 600
6.0 0.557 550
Description Type
Sanitary direct steam heat module
A custom-built skid that injects steam directly
into a product. The skid includes a steam filter
and separator, as well as instrumentation for
temperature and flow control. Local temperature
and pressure indication is provided. The module
also includes a regulator for the steam pressure,
automatic isolation values, and piping on the
skid.
Material of construction is SS316.
Liquid flow rate:
Input required. GPM [L/S].
Temperature rise:
Input required. DEG F [DEG C].
Specific heat:
Default: *0.85* BTU/LB/F [*3.56* KJ/KG/K]
STM HE MOD
Reboilers (RB)
Reboilers are a special kind of shell and tube heat exchanger specifically
designed to add heat to distillation columns.
Liquid from the bottom of the distillation column flows over the reboiler tubes
picking up heat from a hot fluid, such as steam, which is flowing inside the
reboiler tubes. The liquid from the column is vaporized and returned to the
column.
These are similar to the shell and tube heat exchanger, except that the shell is
considerably larger than the tube inside. The design provides space for vapor-
liquid disengagement so that only vapor is returned to the distillation column,
not a vapor-liquid mixture.
Description Type
Kettle reboilers with floating head.
Kettle reboilers are used when the hydrostatic head
above the reboiler varies, when the operating pressure
is in the high vacuum range or when there is a low
percentage of volatiles (e.g., less than 5%) in the feed
to the reboiler.
A Kettle reboiler is a shell and tube heat exchanger
used to supply heat to a distillation column. Liquid
from the bottom of the column enters the shell of the
reboiler through nozzles in the underside of the shell.
In order for liquid entering the shell side of the reboiler
to get out it must overflow a weir at the end of the
tube bundle. The weir is slightly taller than the tube
bundle, thus, the reboiler tubes are always
submerged. Part of the tower bottoms entering the
reboiler vaporizes and returns to the tower via a vapor
line called the riser. A large vapor space is provided
above the tube bundle to allow for vapor liquid
disengagement. The portion of entering liquid which is
not vaporized overflows the weir and is removed from
the reboiler. The Kettle reboiler is a floating head
type exchanger.
Heat transfer area:
Number of shells:
Tube material:
for higher temperatures
KETTLE
Reboilers (RB) - continued
Description Type
KETTLE - continued
*<BLANK>*- Standard exchanger design
TBWNB- Tube bundle design only, w/o system bulks
Default: *400* DEG F [*200 DEG C] for copper alloys;
other material: *650* DEG F [*340* DEG C]
Default: 0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];
Shell material:
*SS304* for higher temperatures
alloys; *650* DEG F [*340* DEG C] other material
Range: 8 - 60 FEET [2.5 - 18 M];
Tube gage:
corrosion allowance. Range: 1 - 24 BWG
corrosion allowance. Range: 0.02 - 0.34 INCHES
[0.6 - 8.6 MM]
Default: *0.0025* INCHES [0.06 MM] for CS, *0.0*
for other materials
Description Type
KETTLE - continued
Tube pitch:
Tube pitch symbol:
Shell diameter:
Max: 192 INCHES [4,875 MM];
Default: *1.5 x port diameter*
Shell wall thickness including corrosion allowance.
other materials.
Default: Lessor of 50 x tube corrosion allowance or
0.25 INCHES [6 MM].
Cladding thickness:
Cladding material: See Chapter 28 for cladding
materials.
Cladding location:
Default: *SHELL*
SHELL- Cladding on shell side only
Number of tube passes: Default: *2*
Duty:
Default: 0.004 x surface area (SF); 0.01262 x surface
area (M2).
Vaporization:
Specific gravity tower bottoms:
Default: *0.50*
Molecular weight bottoms:
Default: *100*
Heat of vaporization:
Default: *150* BTU/LB [*350* KJ/KG]
Description Type
KETTLE - continued
Stress relief:
Default: See Area Design Basis
TEMA type: Default: *BKT*
Horizontal or vertical thermosiphon reboilers.
If a shell diameter is not specified, a value is
calculated from the surface area, number of shells,
tubes per shell, tube diameter, tube pitch, etc.
The thermosiphon reboiler is the most common
reboiler used. However, the thermosiphon reboiler can
not be used when the hydrostatic head above the
reboiler varies, when the operating pressure is in the
high vacuum range or when there is a low percentage
of volatiles (for example, less than 5%) in the feed to
the reboiler.
The vertical thermosiphon reboiler, like the kettle
reboiler, is a shell and tube heat exchanger used to
supply heat to a distillation column. The thermosiphon
reboiler operates in the following manner. Liquid from
the bottom of the column or from a trapout tray flows
into the bottom of the reboiler through a pipe called
the downcomer.
The column bottoms are partially vaporized in the
reboiler and a two phase mixture is returned to the
column through a pipe called the riser. The difference
in density between the liquid in the downcomer and
the two phase mixture in the reboiler and riser causes
the tower bottoms to flow through the reboiler by
natural circulation. Usually about 25% of the tower
bottoms are vaporized in the thermosiphon reboiler.
Thermosiphon reboilers are classified as either vertical
or horizontal according to their erected position.
The tower bottom enter the bottom head of the
vertical thermosiphon, flow upward through the tubes
and leave the top head. The heating fluid, usually
steam, passes through the shell side. Vertical
thermosiphons are available only as fixed tube-sheet
exchangers.
The horizontal, fixed tube-sheet, thermosiphon
reboiler differs from the vertical thermosiphon in that
it is erected horizontally and the bottoms liquid from
the distillation column flows through the shell side of
the reboiler and the heat transfer fluid flows through
the tubes.
Thermosiphon type: Default: *V-FXD*
H-FLOT - Horizontal: float head
H-FXD - Horizontal: fixed tubesheet
H-UTUB - Horizontal: u-tube
V-FXD - Vertical: fixed tubesheet
THERMOSIPH
Description Type
Thermosiphon - continued
V-COLM a tube bundle that is designed to be installed
into a Column (Tower) to hold catalyst or function as
an exchanger within a Column. There are no bulks
associated with this item. If fluid is desired on the
shell side of the tubes, then the additional piping lines
must be added via Pipe-Item Details entries.
Heat transfer area: Enter either heat transfer area
or number of
Number of shells: Enter either heat transfer area or
number of
Tube material: See Chapter 28 for materials.
Default: *A 214* to 900 DEG F [*482* DEG C],
*304S* for higher temperatures
*<BLANK>* - Standard exchanger design
TBWNB - Tube bundle design only, w/o system bulks
Tube design temperature: Default: *400* DEG F
[*200* DEG C] for copper alloys; other material:
*650* DEG F [*350* DEG C].
Tube operating temperature: Default: design
temperature
Tube outside diameter: Range: 0.25 - 6.0 INCHES
[6 - 150 MM];
Shell material: See Chapter 28 for materials.
*SS304* for higher temperature
Shell design gauge pressure: Default: *150* PSIG
[*1,000* KPA]
Shell design temperature: Default: *400* DEG F
[*200* DEG C] for copper alloys; *650* DEG F
[*340* DEG C] other material.
Shell operating temperature: Default: design
temperature
Tube side pipe material: See Chapter 18 for pipe
materials.
Shell side pipe material: See Chapter 18 for pipe
materials.
Description Type
Thermosiphon - continued
Tube Wall Thickness: Enter tube gauge or thickness,
not both, including corrosion allowance. Range: 0.02
to 0.34 INCHES
[0.6 - 8.6 MM].
Tube corrosion allowance: Default: 0.0025 INCHES
[0.06 MM] for CS, 0.0 for other materials.
Tube pitch: Default: *1.25 x tube outside diameter*
Tube pitch symbol: Default: *TRIANGULAR*
DIAMOND - Diamond tube pitch
SQUARE - Square tube pitch
TRIANGULAR - Triangular tube pitch
Shell diameter: Max: 192.0 INCHES [4,875.0 MM]
Shell wall thickness: Shell thickness including
Shell corrosion allowance: Default: 0.125 INCHES
[3 MM] for CS,
Tube sheet material: See Chapter 28 for tube
materials.
Tube sheet corrosion allowance: Default: Lesser of
50 x tube corrosion allowance, or 0.25 INCHES [6
MM].
Cladding thickness: Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM]
if cladding material is specified, otherwise 0.0
Cladding material: See Chapter 28 for materials.
Cladding location: Default: *SHELL*
Number of tube passes: Default: 1 pass per vertical
fixed tube sheet type, 2 passes for all others.
Duty: Default: 0.004 x surface area (SF); 0.01262 x
surface area (M2).
Vaporization: Max: 100; Default: *20*
Specific gravity tower bottoms: Default: *0.50*
Molecular weight bottoms: Default: *100*
Heat of vaporization: Default: *150*
Stress relief: Default: See Area Design Basis
TEMA type: Default: Based on the specified
thermosiphon design symbol.
Reboilers - continued
Description Type
The u-tube reboiler is identical to the kettle
type reboiler except that there is a U-tube bundle in
it instead of a floating head type tube bundle. The
term kettle reboiler is derived from the fact that the
bottoms from the distillation column accumulate in
a pool (the height of the weir) in the reboiler and
boil like liquid in a kettle. Therefore, both the .u-
tube. and .kettle. reboilers are kettle type reboilers
in the nomenclature of the chemical process
industry.
Heat transfer area:
Number of shells:
Tube material:
for higher temperatures. See Chapter 28 for tube
data.
alloys; other material: *650* DEG F [*340* DEG C]
Range: 0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];
Shell material:
SS304 for higher temperatures
Shell design gauge pressure: Default: *150* PSIG
[*1,000* KPA]
Shell design temperature: Default: *400* DEG F
[*200* DEG C] for copper alloys; *650* DEG F
[*340* DEG C] other material.
Shell operating temperature: Default: design
temperature
Tube side pipe material: See Chapter 18 for pipe
materials.
Shell side pipe material: See Chapter 18 for pipe
materials.
Number of tubes per shell: Enter either heat
transfer area or number of shells, tubes/shell and tube
data.
U TUBE
U Tube continued
Description Type
Tube length extended: Range: 8 - 120 FEET [2.5 -
36 M]; Default: *40* FEET [*12 M]
Tube gage: Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both,
including corrosion allowance. Range: 1 - 24 BWG
Tube wall thickness: Enter tube gauge or thickness,
not both, including corrosion allowance. Range: 0.02 -
0.34 INCHES [0.6 - 8.6 MM].
Tube corrosion allowance: Default: *0.0025*
INCHES [*0.06* MM] for CS, *0.0* for other
materials.
Tube pitch: Default: *1.25 x tube outside diameter*
Tube pitch symbol: Default: *TRIANGULAR*
DIAMOND - Diamond tube pitch
SQUARE - Square tube pitch
TRIANGULAR - Triangular tube pitch
Shell diameter: Max: 192 INCHES [4,875 MM];
Default: *1.5 x port diameter*
Shell wall thickness: Shell thickness including
Shell corrosion allowance: Default: *0.125*
INCHES [*3* MM] for CS, *0.0* for other materials.
Tube sheet corrosion allowance: See Chapter 28
for materials.
0.25 INCHES [6 MM].
Cladding thickness: See Chapter 28 for materials.
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] if cladding
material is specified; otherwise: *0.0*
Cladding location: Default: *SHELL*
Number of tube passes: *2*
Duty: Default: 0.004 x surface area (SF)
[0.01262 x surface are (M2)]
Vaporization: Max: 100; Default: *90*
Specific gravity tower bottoms: *0.5*
Molecular weight bottoms: *100*
Heat of vaporization: *150* BTU/LB [*350* KJ/KG]
Stress relief: Default: See Area Design Basis
TEMA type: Default: *BKU*

U TUBE
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU)
Furnaces are commonly used to heat a process fluid to a high temperature
(600 - 1200 DEG F). Furnaces are also called fired heaters or direct fired
heaters because the source of heat is oil or gas fueled burners.
Furnaces are usually cylindrical (vertical heater) or rectangular (box heater) in
shape. The burners may be located in the sides or floor of the furnace. The
walls of the furnace are refractory (an insulating heat resistant material) lined.
The furnace will have one or more smoke stacks. The process fluid being
heated flows through horizontal tubes in a box furnace or vertical tubes in a
box furnace or vertical tubes in a vertical furnace. The amount of heat
absorbed by the process fluid defines the size of the furnace. Use absorbed
duty for calculations.
Description Type
Gas or oil fired for preheating, cracking; bridge walls
separate radiant and convection sections; horizontal
burners
Box furnaces are the choice when a large amount of
heat must be transferred to a process stream. Some
specific applications are:
Pre-heating crude before it goes to the atmospheric
or vacuum
topping units
Heating for catalytic cracking
Providing heat for hydrocarbon cracking for
ethylene
Providing heat for viscosity breaking.
A box furnace is so named because the combustion
chamber is box shaped. The radiant and convection
sections of the box type furnace are separated by one
or more walls called bridge walls. The box furnace is
normally fired from end wall mounted burners; that is,
the burners are mounted parallel to the floor and
perpendicular to the tubes of the furnace. Box type
furnaces are usually designed for large heat duty,
typically above 170 MMBTU/HR. The burners may be
fired with oil or gas. The box furnace can be used to
provide heat input to several different process streams
simultaneously.
Material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *CS*
Duty:
Max: 500 MMBTU/H [145 MEGAW]
Standard gas flow rate:
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer only. For liquid process fluid, enter
liquid flow in GPM [L/S] in place of gas flow.
Process type:
GAS- Gas process fluid
LIQ- Liquid process fluid
BOX
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU) - continued
Description Type
BOX - continued
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA];
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
A-frame process heater with sloping walls, radiant
section along sides and roof of cabin, convection
section in duct above roof of radiant section and
vertical floor-mounted burners. For use as hot oil
heater, pre-heater or cracking. Includes integral
stacks.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Duty:
liquid flow GPM [L/S] in place of gas flow.
Process type:
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA];
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
HEATER
Pyrolysis.
Material:
Duty:
Process type:
PYROLYSIS
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU) - continued
Description Type
PYROLYSIS - continued
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA];
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
Box-type reformer without catalyst.
Material:
Duty:
Process type:
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA];
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
REFORMER
Gas or oil fired vertical cylindrical type for low heat
duty range moderate temperature with long contact
time.
Material:
Duty:
For liquid process fluid, enter liquid flow in GPM [L/S]
in place of gas flow.
Process type:
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA];
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
VERTICAL
TEMA Exchanger Construction
Nomenclature
Icarus Supported TEMA Types
Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers
U - TUBE FLOAT HEAD FIXED-T-S
Front End
Stationary Head
Types
Shell Types
Rear End Head
Types
A, B, C
E, F, G, H, J, X
U
A, B, C
E, F, G, H, J, X
P, S, T, W
A, B, N
E, F, G, H, J, X
L, M, N
Reboilers
Front End Stationary
Head Types
U-TUBE THERMOSIPH KETTLE
Front End
Stationary Head
Types
Shell Types
Rear End Head
Types
A, B, C
K,
U
A, B, C, N
E**, J*
L, M, N, P*, S*, T*, U*
A, B, N
K
T
TEMA CLASS B: Equipment cost includes shell, tube bundle, nozzles and saddles.
* Horizontal only **Vertical only
6 Packing, Linings (G6) 6-1
Introduction to Packing
Introduction to Lining
Acid Brick
Castable Refractories and Gunning Mixes
Fluorocarbon Linings
Glass Linings
Refractory Brick
Resin Linings
Rubber Linings
Lead Linings
Zinc Linings
Suggested Lining Difficulty Adjustments
6 Packing, Linings (G6)
6-2 6 Packing, Linings (G6)
Introduction to Packing
There are two types of packing used in packed tower:
Packing that is chemically suitable to perform a mass transfer operation (e.g.,
activated alumina for desulfurization or desiccation.
Packing constructed of inert material to provide surface area for mass transfer.
Inert packing is most commonly used since it can be utilized repeatedly without
significant deterioration. The majority of inert packings used are of the ring or
saddle type.
Ring packings are commonly made of metal or plastic except for Raschig rings, which
are generally ceramic. Ring packings are used mostly in distillation because of their
excellent turndown properties and availability in press-formed metals of all types.
Usually ring-type packings are used in handling organic materials when there are no
major corrosion problems. Unfortunately rings do not promote most redistribution of
liquids, and the Raschig ring occasionally promote liquid maldistribution.
Saddle type packings are commonly made from ceramic or plastic, seldom from metal.
Saddles are used largely in absorption and regeneration operations because they
provide good liquid redistribution and are available in ceramic and plastic, which yield
good corrosion resistance at very low cost. Saddles are usually used for aqueous
systems when corrosion is a major factor.
Qualities that are desirable in the selection of tower packings are:
High percentage of void space.
Irregularity of shape to prevent pattern packing.
Low resistance to material flow (low pressure drop).
Large active surface exposed per unit volume (high surface area per
cubic foot/meter).
Complete utilization of surface for mass transfer.
Suitably shaped to produce turbulent contact between phases.
Large number of interstitial transfer points per unit volume.
Good internal liquid distribution characteristics.
Wide operating range with little efficiency variation.
Mechanically strong to withstand normal loads in service and
physical handling.
Minimum weight and low side thrust on the tower shell.
Available in a wide variety of materials.
Minimum investment per year of service life.
Clean design to minimize stagnant area and fouling.
Capable of easy removal from tower and cleaning.
The packing factor, F, is a standard parameter that provides a capacity rating
for packings, by correlation of pressure drop versus gas flow rate through the
packing. It represents a ratio of a specific packing surface to the bed voidage
space in the packed bed. Low packing factors are desirable.
Size 3:1.0CPR, 0.5PPR, 1.0PPR, 1.5PPR, 2.0PPR
0.5SPR, 1.0SPR, 1.5SPR, 2.0SPR
The Pall ring is especially useful for distillation operations at any pressure. The
Pall ring is also used in absorption and stripping operations, particularly in high
pressure absorbers with small diameter shells where the ability to handle high
liquid and gas rates allow for major cost savings.
Pall rings are Raschig rings that have their wall opened with the projections
bent inward, permitting complete access to the interior for both gas and liquid
flow. This design makes possible greater capacity, lower pressure drop, high
gas and liquid rates, greater efficiency, better maintenance of distribution,
lower liquid hold-up and less entrainment than the conventional Raschig ring.
Pall rings are available in carbon steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloys,
copper, monel, nickel and inconel. Plastic Pall rings are available in
polypropylene, glass reinforced polypropylene and halar. Diameter sizes range
from 0.5 to 2.0 INCHES.
Size 3:1.0CRR, 1.5CRR, 2.0CRR, 3.0CRR
1.0PRR, 1.5PRR, 2.0PRR, 3,0PRR
1.0SRR, 1.5SRR, 2.0SRR, 3.0SRR
1.0KRR, 1.5KRR, 2.0KRR, 2.0KRR
Raschig rings, perhaps the most commonly used packing, are useful in distillation,
absorption and stripping operations. They provide increasing efficiency as loading
increases to the point of incipient flooding, beyond which their operation becomes
unstable. They are not suggested for use when high efficiencies are required or when
liquid loading approaches flooding.
Raschig rings are small hallow cylinders. They are the least efficient inert
packing available because their construction does not promote much liquid
distribution, occasionally may promote liquid maldistribution, lends itself to
pattern packing, and does not provide much turbulent contact between
phases. They are available in carbon steel, stainless steels, stoneware,
porcelain, karbate and plastics. Diameter sizes range from 1.0 to 3.0 INCHES.
Size 3:0.5CIS, 1.0CIS, 1.5CIS, 2.0CIS
0.5PIS, 1.0PIS, 1.5PIS, 2.0PIS
There are widely used in the manufacturing of sulfuric acid, CO
2
absorption in the pulp
and paper industry, cooling and drying of chlorine and removal of noxious fumes in may
industries.
The Intalox saddle is a packing that offers large total surface area per cubic
foot, minimum resistance to liquid and gas flow, high percentage of void
space, a low packing factor, excellent liquid distribution, maximum
randomness and high efficiency with a large capacity in mass transfer
operations. These qualities make Intalox saddles especially effective in
distribution and absorption operations. Saddles are available in ceramics and
plastics. Ceramics are chemical stoneware and chemical porcelain, of which
chemical porcelain is preferred since it is mechanically stronger, non-porous,
iron-free and inert to chemical attack. Plastic saddles are available in
polypropylene, linear polyethylene, rigid PVC, CPVC, glass reinforced
polypropylene, kynar and halar. Diameter sizes range from 0.25 to 3.0
INCHES.
Size 3:0.5CBS,.75CBS, 1.0CBS, 1.5CBS
0.5PBS,.75PBS, 1.0PBS, 1.5PBS
0.5FBS,.75FBS, 1.0FBS, 1.5FBS
0.5SBS,.75SBS, 1.0SBS, 1.5SBS
0.5KBS,.75KBS, 1.0KBS, 1.5KBS
These items are used with slightly less efficiency than Intalox saddles for
distillation, stripping and absorption operations.
A Berl saddle is a negatively warped surface resembling a saddle. Berl saddles
have one shortcoming. Their efficiency changes with changes in loading. As
loading approaches flooding, mass transfer becomes unstable and
unpredictable. However, they do promote good liquid distribution, have a high
percentage of void space and provide a large surface area for mass transfer.
They are available in stoneware, porcelain, ceramics, plastics, stainless steel,
carbon steel and in karbate. Diameter sizes range from 0.5 to 1.5 INCHES.
Size 3:ALMNA
Activated aluminas are used for desiccation of liquids and gasses, desulfurization,
catalytic applications and as scavengers for various contaminants such as fluorides.
Activated aluminas are manufactured in granular and ball forms as crystals
and gels. They are highly porous and inert.
Size 3:ACT-C
Activated carbon is effectively and economically utilized in decolorization, odor
removal, solvent recovery, refining gasses and liquids, catalysts and
adsorption. Its major uses are in solution purification, such as the clean-up of
cane, beet and corn sugar solutions, and for the removal of tastes and odors
from water supplies, vegetable and animal fats and oils, alcoholic beverages,
chemicals and pharmaceuticals. Also commonly used in the recovery of
gasoline from natural gas, recovery of benzol from manufactured gas and the
recovery of solvents vaporized in industrial processes such as the manufacture
of rayon, rubber products, film and plastics. Other common uses are removing
impurities from gases such as hydrogen, nitrogen, helium, ammonia, and CO2
and removing organic sulfur compounds, H2S, and other impurities (Fe, Cu)
from manufactured and synthesis gases.
Activated carbons can be divided into two main classes:
Those used for adsorption of gases and vapors, for which a granular material,
providing great surface area and pore volume is generally employed.
Those used in purification of liquid, for which a powdered material is desired.
Many carbonaceous materials treated with oxidizing gases (e.g., coal, lignite,
sawdust) may be used for the manufacture of activated carbon depending on
its desired application. Activation is a physical change where the surface of the
carbon is greatly increased by the removal of hydrocarbons.
Size 3: M107YA, M107YB, M107YC, M76YA, M76YB, M76YC,
M76XA, M76XB, M76XC, M62YA, M62YB, M62YC,
M35YA, M35YB, M35YC, M35XA, M35XB, M35XC
Structured packing consists of layers of corrugated (crimped) steel sheets
stacked parallel to each other in sections that are typically 8 to 12 inches high.
The sheets are typically grooved and perforated and are arranged at a fixed
angle with respect to the vertical axis. For a given packing type, changing this
angle of orientation will alter the packing factor while maintaining the surface
area per unit volume and weight per unit volume. When installed in a column,
these sections, or "elements", are placed at a predetermined angle to each
other (horizontal rotation). This angle is typically 90.
At low liquid rates, structured packing is typically more efficient than random
packing due to greater surface area per unit volume. Although the actual
packing cost is significantly greater for structured packing, the increased
efficiency allows for a smaller, less expensive column. Structured packing is
also more desirable because it is less prone to distribution problems and it
gives a lower pressure drop per theoretical stage. As the liquid rate increases
(beyond 20 gpm/ft2), the advantage of structured packing diminishes
significantly.
Introduction to Lining
A lining is material that lines the inside surface of a tank, tower, furnace, or
other piece of process equipment and protects that piece of equipment from
destruction by high temperature, corrosion or abrasion. Some of the common
lining types follow.
Acid Brick
These linings are used in Acid Service (pH less than 4.5) to protect a
membrane coating from deterioration due to abrasion or high temperature (T
greater than 150 DEG F). Red Shale Brick (RSB) is the cheapest and can be
used in low temperature service. When a more refractory material is desired,
acid resistant fireclay (30% alumina) is used.
Acid brick can be installed with two different mortars. Silica mortar is more
economical but can not be used in all applications. Furfural based mortar is
more expensive but is resistant to a wider range of materials.
Castable Refractories and Gunning Mixes
These materials can be installed in varying thicknesses. For thicknesses
greater than 4 INCHES, it is necessary to use anchors to hold the refractory to
the metal surface. Gunning mixes have higher material costs and lower labor
cost than castables; thus, installed costs of the two are approximately equal.
Fifty percent alumina gunning mix is useful in services involving severe
abrasion, reducing atmospheres and moderate temperatures. Typical
applications are cyclones, fluid catalytic cracking, naphtha reforming and
coking.
Ninety percent alumina castable and 90% alumina gunning mix are useful for
applications with temperatures higher than 50% alumina gunning mixes.
Fluorocarbon Linings
Fluorocarbon linings are resistant to a wide variety of corrosive chemicals at
temperatures up to 180 DEG F. The most common fluorocarbon linings are Teflon
TM
and
Kynar
TM
.
Glass Linings
Glass linings are shop installed and are all satisfactory for a wide range of
corrosive services at temperatures up to 450 DEG F.
Refractory Brick
These linings are used in high temperature service. Selection of the type brick
to be used is a function of the process temperature, expected degree of
chemical attack and expected degree of abrasion.
Insulating firebrick has lower thermal conductivity and heat capacity than
refractory firebrick. It is generally used as a backing for refractory firebrick.
Since it is relatively non-resistant to chemical attack and abrasion, it is used as
the inner lining only when no erosion or abrasion is expected. Insulating
firebrick is ASTM Group 26 material (good to 2,600 DEG F).
Sixty percent alumina firebrick is a high alumina refractory useful for operating
conditions involving thermal cycling and chemical attack. Sulfuric acid
processing and spent acid regeneration are two applications for this material.
Ninety percent alumina firebrick is a high alumina refractory useful in
operating conditions involving thermal shock, slagging, corrosion and high
temperatures. Typical applications for this material are hydrotreating and
sulfur burners.
Resin Linings
Resin linings are used in a variety of corrosive services at operating
temperatures up to 250 DEG F. These linings offer good solvent resistance.
Some common resis linings are asphaltic resin, epoxy resin and phenolic resin.
Resin linings may be applied by spray gun, brush or roller.
Rubber Linings
These linings are satisfactory in a wide range of corrosive services at
temperatures less than 150 DEG F. Rubber linings are almost always applied in
the vendors shop. The most common rubber linings are butyl rubber, natural
rubber and neoprene.
Lead Linings
Lead sheet was used extensively in the manufacture of sulfuric acid. Today,
new process technology has nearly eliminated the use of lead as a lining
material.
Zinc Linings
Zinc is frequently applied to water tanks for cathodic protection. The zinc can be flame
sprayed (also called metallizing) or painted onto the carbon steel base material. Flame
spraying is the process whereby metallic zinc is vaporized in a flame and sprayed onto
the steel base material. The hot zinc does not merely coat the carbon steel, it forms an
alloy with the steel several mils deep.
Zinc can also be supported in an epoxy base paint and brushed, rolled or sprayed onto
the steel.
See Material Selections chapter for a complete list.
Description Type
Variety of vessel packing materials including rings,
saddles and other formed shapes, crushed materials,
adsorbents, resins, etc.
Packing type:
See Chapter 28 for packing materials.
PACKING
Brick and mortar for acid service applied to protect a
membrane coating from deterioration under
abrasive or high pressure service.
Lining material:
Default: *25RSB*
25RSB- 2.5 INCHES [62 MM] red shale
45RSB- 4.5 FINCHES [112 MM] red shale
80RSB- 8.0 INCHES [200 MM] red shale
25AFC- 2.5 INCHES [62 MM] Al f-clay
45AFC- 4.5 INCHES [112 MM] Al fclay
90AFC- 9.0 INCHES [225 MM] Al fclay
Mortar type:
Default: *FUR*
FUR- Furfural base motar
SIL- Silicone base motar
Lining adjustment:
See Suggested Lining Difficulty Adjustment.
Range:
1 - 10; Default: *4*

ACID BRICK
Castable refractory or gunned mixes.
Lining material:
Default: *GUNIT*
GUNIT- Gunite on wire mesh
GUNA5- Gunn. 50% Al anchored
GUNA9- Gunn. 90% Al anchored
CASA9- Cast. 90% Al anchored
GUN50- Gunn. 50% Al no anchor
GUN90- Gunn. 90% Al no anchor
CAS90- Cast. 90% Al no anchor
Lining thickness:
Max: 9 INCHES [225 MM];
Default: 4 INCHES [100 MM]
MONOLITHIC
Description Type
Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN) - continued
Suggested Lining Difficulty
Adjustments
Description Item
MONOLITHIC - continued
Lining adjustment:
See Suggested Lining Difficulty
Adjustment. Range: 1 - 10; Default: *4*
Brick: 60%, 90% alumina firebrick, insulating
firebrick; abrasion resistant, replaceable linings:
ceramic, rubber, steel, alloy; coatings: organic, glass
and metallic.
Lining material:
See Chapter 28 for lining materials.
Default:
*EPLCS*
Lining adjustment:
See Suggested Lining Difficulty
Adjustment. Range: 1 - 10; Default: *4*
OTHER
Work Item Difficulty Adjustment
Lining a straight tank 1
Typical lining 4
Lining a large horizontal vessel
(<5000 GALLON [19 M3] capacity)
6
Lining a small horizontal vessel
(<5000 GALLON [19 M3] capacity)
8
Small, obstructed area 10
7 Pumps (G10) 7-1
Gear Pumps (GP)
Piston, Other Positive Displacement Pumps (P)
Pump Efficiencies
7 Pumps (G10)
7-2 7 Pumps (G10)
Includes pump, baseplate, driver; general types:

API-610 type: High (60xHZ), low (30xHZ) speed.
ANSI type: ANSI B123.1 or American Voluntary Standard, single stage
centrifugal, process and general service; horizontal, end
suction, centerline discharge; high (60xHZ), medium (30xHZ),
low (20xHZ) speed.
CENTRIF type: Single and multiple stage centrifugal pumps, horizontal, split
casing (not barrel or cartridge type), for process or general
service when flow, head and pressure conditions exceed
general service; electric, turbine, gasoline engine drives.
General Service: Cast iron pumps for general service; high (60xHZ), medium
(30xHZ) speed.
IN LINE type: Mounted for service on the line; high (60xHZ), medium
(30xHZ), low speed (20xHZ).
Description Type
Available in a wide variety of alloys and exotic
materials including carbon steel casings with stainless
steel impellers (SF = stainless fitted) for flows to 2000
GPM [125 L/S], and additionally in FRP for flows to 500
GPM [31 L/S].
Casing material:
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 2,000 GPM [125 L/S]
ANSI
7 Pumps (G10) 7-3
Centrifugal Pumps (CP) - continued
Description Type
ANSI - continued
Fluid head:
MAX: 75 FEET [25 M] at 20 x HZ; 200 FEET
[60 M] at 30 x HZ; 575 FEET [175 M] at
60 x HZ.
Speed:
Range: 1,200 - 3,600 RPM;
Speed varies with pump head
Fluid specific gravity:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default *1.0*
Driver type:
NONE- No driver
*MOTOR*- Standard motor driver
VFD- Variable frequency motor driver
TURBINE, - Turbine driver
GAS ENGINE- Gas engine driver
Seal type:
PACK- Packing
*SNGL*- Single mechanical seal
TNDM- Tandem mechanical seal
DBLE- Double mechanical seal
Design temperature:
MAX: 500 DEG F [260 DEG C];
Fluid viscosity:
Default: *1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S]
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
Steam gauge pressure:
Steam pressure for turbine drivers only.
Default: *400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
Primary seal pipe plan:
*11*- API primary seal piping plan number 11
12- API primary seal piping plan number 12
7-4 7 Pumps (G10)
Description Type
ANSI - continued
Secondary seal pipe plan:
Default: *NONE*
51- API secondary seal piping plan number 51
Cooling water pipe plan:
Default: *NONE*
A- API cooling water piping plan A
B- API cooling water piping plan B
C- API cooling water piping plan C
D- API cooling water piping plan D
E- API cooling water piping plan E
F- API cooling water piping plan F
G- API cooling water piping plan G
H- API cooling water piping plan H
J- API cooling water piping plan J
K- API cooling water piping plan K
L- API cooling water piping plan L
Pipe plan pipe type:
Default: *WELD*
TUBE- Tubing
THRD- Threaded pipe/fittings
*WELD*- Welded pipe/fittings
WFLG- Welded/flanged pipe fittings
Pipe plan material type:
Default: Based on casing material.
A 106- A 106
304P- SS304
316P- SS316
Plastic ANSI single stage pump.
Liquid flow rate:
Capacity limit: 250 GPM [15 L/S] at 30 x HZ; 500 GPM
[31 L/S] at 60 x HZ.
Fluid head:
MAX: 90 FEET [27 M] at 30 x HZ, 575 FEET [175 M] at
60 x HZ]; Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM; Speed varies with pump
head
Range: 0.2 - 50; Default: 1.0
ANSI PLAST
7 Pumps (G10) 7-5
Description Type
ANSI PLAST - continued
Driver type:
Default: *MOTOR*
NONE- No driver
MOTOR- Standard motor driver
Seal type:
Default: *SNGL*
PACK- Packing
SNGL- Single mechanical seal
Design temperature:
Default *120* DEG F [*50* DEG C]
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 1 - 100
Steam pressure for turbine drivers only. Default:
*400* PSIG [2,800 KPA].
API 610 type available in a variety of casing materials.
Casing material:
Fluid head:
MAX: 200 FEET [60 M] at 30 x HZ; 700 FEET [210 M]
at 60 x HZ RPM. Default: *225* FEET [*25* M] RPM
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM;
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver power:
MIN: >0
If you specify a driver power greater than 300 HP with
a MOTOR driver type, Icarus generates a Totally
Enclosed Water Cooled (TEWAC) motor. In Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer and Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, Icarus also generates additional piping lines
for cooling water and an additional temperature
control loop.
API 610
7-6 7 Pumps (G10)
Description Type
API 610 - continued
Driver type:
Default: MOTOR
NONE- No driver
Seal type:
Default: *SNGL*
PACK- Packing
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
Steam pressure for tubine drivers only. Default:
*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
*11*- API primary seal piping plan number 11
Secondary seal pipe plan: Default: *NONE*
7 Pumps (G10) 7-7
Description Type
API 610 - continued
Default: *NONE*
Default: *WELD*
TUBE- Tubing
THRD- Threaded pipe/fittings
*WELD*- Welded pipe/fittings
WFLG- Welded/flanged pipe fittings
Pipe plan material Type:
A 106- A 106
304P- SS304
316P- SS316
API 610 in-line pump
Casing material:
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 450 GPM [38 M] at 30 x HZ,
900 GPM [56 L/S] at 60 x HZ.
Fluid head:
MAX: 125 FEET [38 M] at 30 x HZ, 500 FEET [152 M]
at 60 x HZ; Default: *225* FEET [*25* M]
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM; Default: *1,800* RPM.
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver type:
NONE- No driver
API 610 IL
7-8 7 Pumps (G10)
Description Type
API 610 IL - continued
Seal type:
PACK- Packing
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Default: *1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S].
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
Default: *11*
2- No primary seal piping plan
Default: *NONE*
51- API second seal piping plan number 51
Default: *NONE*
7 Pumps (G10) 7-9
Description Type
High speed vertical in-line API 610 centrifugal pump
with a single impeller stage, integral speed-increasing
gearbox, with a vertical motor mount, for use in high
head/low flow applications.
Casing material:
Default: *CS*
See Chapter 28 of the Icarus Reference Guide for
materials.
Fluid head:
MAX: 2,000 FEET [600 M]
MIN: 500 FEET [150 M]
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM; Default: *3,600*
Note: Applies to motor speed, not impeller speed.
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver power:
MIN: >0
Note: If you specify a driver power greater than 300
HP with a MOTOR driver type, Aspen Economic
Evaluation generates a Totally Enclosed Water Cooled
(TEWAC) motor. In Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen Economic
Evaluation also generates additional piping lines for
cooling water and an additional temperature control
loop.
Driver type:
Default: MOTOR
NONE - No driver
*MOTOR* - Standard motor driver
VFD - Variable frequency motor driver
Seal type:
Default: *SNGL*
PACK - Packing
*SNGL* - Single mechanical seal
TNDM - Tandem mechanical seal
DBLE - Double mechanical seal
Design temperature:
MAX: 850 DEG F [450 DEG C]
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
HIGH SPEED
7-10 7 Pumps (G10)
*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
*11* - API primary seal piping plan number 11
12 - API primary seal piping plan number 12
Default: *NONE*
51 - API secondary seal piping plan number 51
Default: *NONE*
A - API cooling water piping plan A
B - API cooling water piping plan B
C - API cooling water piping plan C
D - API cooling water piping plan D
E - API cooling water piping plan E
F - API cooling water piping plan F
G - API cooling water piping plan G
H - API cooling water piping plan H
J - API cooling water piping plan J
K - API cooling water piping plan K
L - API cooling water piping plan L
Default: *WELD*
TUBE - Tubing
THRD - Threaded pipe/fittings
*WELD* - Welded pipe/fittings
WFLG - Welded/flanged pipe fittings
Pipe plan material type:
A 106 - A 106
304P - SS304
316P - SS316
Description Type
7 Pumps (G10) 7-11
Vertical axial flow pump for flows greater than
1600 GPM [100 L/S].
Includes pumping unit and motor driver.
Material:
Liquid flow rate:
Max GPM <1,300,000/head [FT],
Max L/S <25,000/head [M].
Fluid head:
MAX: 75 FEET [25 M]; Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
AXIAL FLOW
Horizontal pump with canned motor.
Casing material:
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 400 GPM [25 L/S]
Fluid head:
MAX: 200 FEET [60 M]; Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
CANNED
Single and multistage centrifugal pumps available in a
variety of casing materials.
For process or general service when flow/head
conditions exceed general service; horizontally split
casing not a cartridge or barrel pump.
Casing material:
Default: *CS*
Fluid head:
Speed:
Varies with pump head
CENTRIF
Description Type
7-12 7 Pumps (G10)
Description Type
CENTRIF - continued
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: 1.0
Driver type:
Default: MOTOR
NONE- No driver
Seal type:
PACK- Packing
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
General service, cast iron for flows to 2000 GPM
[125 L/S].
Casing material:
Default: *CI*
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 2,000 GPM [125 L/S]
Fluid head:
MAX: 200 FEET [60 M] at 30 x HZ, 275 FEET [80 M] at
60 x HZ; Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM
0.2 - 5.0; Default: *5.0*
Driver type:
NONE- No driver
GEN SERV
7 Pumps (G10) 7-13
Description Type
GEN SERV - continued
Seal type:
PACK- Packing
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
General service in-line pump.
Includes pump and motor driver.
Casing material:
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: GPM x head [FEET] < 43,000, L/S x head
[M] < 825.
Fluid head:
Speed:
Range: 1,200 - 3,600 RPM; Default: *1,800* RPM.
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver type:
NONE- No driver
Seal type:
PACK- Packing
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
IN LINE
7-14 7 Pumps (G10)
Description Type
Vertical motor with turbine impeller for wet pits,
tanks and sumps.
Includes pumping unit and motor driver.
Material:
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: Flow (GPM) x Head (FT) < 990,000 [Flow (L/S) x
Head (M) < 8250]
Fluid head:
Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]; MAX: Flow (GPM) x
Head (FT) < 990,000 [Flow (L/S) x Head (M) < 8250]
Temperature:
Default: *120* DEG F [*50* DEG C]; MAX: 500 DEG F
[260 DEG C]
Fluid Specific Gravity:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
TURBINE
Low consistency stock pump.
Casing material:
*CI*- Cast iron
SS316- SS316
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 100 - 28,000 GPM [6.4 - 1,765 L/S]
Fluid Head:
Range: 15 - 350 FEET [4.6 - 106 M]
Speed:
Fluid specific gravity.:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: 1.0
Driver type:
NONE- No driver
VFD- Variable frequency driver
Design temperature:
Consistency Air Dried: Percent by weight of air dried
(AD)
solids in fluid. Range: 0.0 - 6.0; Default: *1.0*
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
*400*PSGI [*2,800 KPA].
PULP STOCK
7 Pumps (G10) 7-15
Description Type
Standard ANSI magnetic drive pump.
Casing material:
C 20- Carpenter 20
HASTC- Hasteloy C
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 300 GPM [18.9 L/S] at 30 x HZ, 600 GPM
[37.8 L/S] at 60 x HZ
Fluid head:
MAX: 200 FEET [60 M] at 30 x HZ, 400 FEET [120 M]
at 60 x HZ; Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM; Speed varies with pump
head
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1*
Driver type:
VFD- Variable frequency driver
NONE- No driver
MAX: 275 PSIG [1,895 KPA]
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Default: *1* CPOISE [*1* MPA-S]
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
MAG DRIVE
Sanitary centrifugal pump
For use as a product mover in a wide range of
sanitary and industrial applications. Material of
construction is SS316.
SAN PUMP
Pump size selection:
Symbol Inlet
Inch-
Pound Metric
Outlet
Inch-
Pound Metric
25x20 2.5 INCHES 65 MM 2 INCHES 50 MM
30x20 3 INCHES 75 MM 2 INCHES 50 MM
30X25 3 INCHES 75 MM 2.5 INCHES 65 MM
40X30 4 INCHES 100 MM 3 INCHES 75 MM
40X40 4 INCHES 100 MM 4 INCHES 100 MM
7-16 7 Pumps (G10)
Description Type
SAN PUMP - continued
Required: select pump size or enter capacity and head.
Fluid head: MAX: 365 FEET [109 M] (at maximum
speed)
Required: enter capacity and head or select pump size.
Liquid flow rate: MAX: 1,000 GPM [62.5 GPM] (at
maximum
speed)
Required: enter capacity and head or select pump
size.
*45 PSIG [310 KPA]*, MAX: 45 PSIG [310 KPA]
Design temperature:
*68 DEG F [20 DEG C]*, MAX: 120 DEG F [50 DEG C]
*1.0*, MIN: 0.25, MAX: 5.0
Pump efficiency:
MIN: 10, MAX: 100
Driver type:
*TXXDC*- Standard TEFC motor
WXXDC- Washdown TEFC motor
WVRDC- VFD rated motor only (no controller)
WVCDC- VFD rated motor with controller
Seal type:
SNGW- Single mechanical seal w/ water cooling
DBLW- Double mechanical seal w/ water cooling
SAN PUMP
Speed Maximum Head
Inch- Pound Metric
*30xHZ* 92 FEET 28 M
60XHZ 365 FEET 63 M
Speed Maximum Head
Inch- Pound Metric
*30xHZ* 610 GPM 38.4 L/S
60XHZ 1,000 GPM 63 L/S
Speed
Inch- Pound Metric
Default 1,800 RPM 1,500RPM
MIN: 1,800 RPM 1,500RPM
MAX: 3,600 RPM 3,000 RPM
7 Pumps (G10) 7-17
Description Type
Sanitary fluming pump with feeder hopper
For transferring delicate food products, like
mushrooms and cranberries. Uses water as a
protective cushion. Material of construction is
SS304.
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 4,150 GPM [260 L/S]. Includes water and
product.
Required: enter either diameter; head and
capacity; or head and product rate.
Maximum head decreases as capacity increases.
At the maximum capacity of 4,150 GPM [260 L/
S], the maximum head is 45 FEET [13.7 M].
Product rate:
MAX: based on maximum capacity (4,150 GPM
[260 L/S]), specific gravity, and H20/product
ratio. Required: enter either diameter; head and
capacity; or head and product rate.
Inlet and outlet diameter:
MIN: 4 INCHES [100 MM], MAX: 10 INCHES [250 MM]
Fluid head:
*35* FEET [*10.7* M], MAX: 110 FEET [33.5 M]
Maximum head decreases as capacity increases.
The pump is dead-headed at 110 FEET [35.5 M].
At the maximum capacity of 4,150 GPM [260 L/
S], the maximum head is 45 FEET [13.7 M].
Water to product weight ratio: *10*
Design pressure gauge:
*45 PSIG [310 KPA]*, MAX: 45 PSIG [310 KPA]
Design temperature:
*68 DEG F [20 DEG C]*, MAX: 120 DEG F [50 DEG C]
*1.0*, MIN: 0.2, MAX: 5.0 (of water-product mixture).
Pump efficiency:
MIN: 10, MAX: 100
FLUME PUMP
7-18 7 Pumps (G10)
Centrifugal Pumps (CP) - continued.
Description Type
FLUME PUMP - continued.
Enclosure type:
OPEN- Closed frame unit
*CLOSE*- Open frame unit
Hopper length: Minimum hopper length depends on
diameter:
Diameter Minimum Hopper Length
4 INCHES [100 MM] 2.0 FEET [0.610 M]
6 INCHES [150 MM] 3.5 FEET [1.067 MM]
8 INCHES [200 MM] 5.0 FEET [1.524 M]
10 INCHES [250 MM] 6.0 FEET [1.829 M]
7 Pumps (G10) 7-19
Gear Pumps (GP)
For the pumping of viscous fluids, such as polymers and resins. Standard
rotary pumps can pump fluids with viscosities as great as 250,000 CP and
special designs are available to handle viscosities up to 1,000,000 CP.
The principal of operation is that as two rotors rotate, projections on the rotors
mesh and unmesh. They unmesh on the suction side of the pump creating a
cavity which is filled with liquid. As the rotors continue to turn, the liquid is
trapped between the projections of the rotors and the pump casing. The liquid
is carried to the discharge side of the pump in these pockets. At the discharge
side, the rotors mesh and the liquid is squeezed out of the pump.
Includes pump, baseplate, driver (optional).
Description Type
Standard external gear rotary pump
For pumping of viscous fluids to 300 GPM [18 L/
S], such as polymers and resins; standard type
external gear rotary pump.
Includes motor driver.
Material:
*CS*- Carbon steel
CI- Cast iron
SS- Stainless steel
BRONZ- Bronz
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 300 GPM [18 L/S].
Viscosity:
MAX: 30,000 CSTOKE [30,000 MM2/S];
Default: *32* CSTOKE [*32* MM2/S].
Speed:
MAX: 600 RPM; Default: *90* RPM.
GEAR
Canned rotor gear pump
Explosion-proof motor, to 570 GPM [35 L/S].
Material:
*SS316*
Liquid flow rate:
40 - 570 GPM [3 - 35 L/S]
Speed:
MAX: 1,800 RPM; Default: *1,800* RPM
Viscosity:
Default: *32* CSTOKE [*32* MM2/S]
CANNED RTR
7-20 7 Pumps (G10)
Gear Pumps (GP) - continued
Description Type
Mechanical seal gear pump
With mechanical seal, to 480 GPM [30 L/S]. Includes
motor driver.
Material:
*GSLCS* (Glass-lined CS)
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 35 - 480 GPM [3 - 30 L/S].
Speed:
MAX: 1,800 RPM; Default: *1,800* RPM.
MECH SEAL
7 Pumps (G10) 7-21
Piston, Other Positive
Displacement Pumps (P)
Description Type
Reciprocating simplex with steam driver.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 5.5 - 910 GPM [0.4 - 56 L/S]
Fluid head:
MAX: 1,000 FEET [300 M]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver power:
Range: 3 - 10 HP [2.22 - 7.5 KW]
SIMPLEX
Reciprocating duplex with steam driver.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 1,000 GPM [62 L/S]
Fluid head:
MAX: 1,000 FEET [300 M]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver power:
Range: 2 - 100 HP [1.5 - 7.5 KW]
DUPLEX
Triplex (plunger) with pump-motor driver.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 1,000 GPM [62 L/S]
Fluid head:
MAX: 1,000 FEET [300 M]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default *1.0*
Driver power:
Range: 2 -100 HP [1.5 - 75 KW]
TRIPLEX
7-22 7 Pumps (G10)
Piston, Other Positive Displacement Pumps (P) - continued
Description Type
Diaphragm pump - TFE type.
Includes motor driver. For the low capacity
pumping of hazardous, toxic or abrasive
liquids. Although diaphragm pumps are made
with capacities of 100 GPM, generally they
handle 25 GPM or less. Diaphragm pumps are
also frequently used as metering pumps.
A diaphragm pump is a type of reciprocating
pump. A reciprocating rod flexes a diaphragm
fabricated of metal, rubber or plastic. The
flexing of the diaphragm produces the
pumping action.
The advantage of the diaphragm pump is that
no packing or seals are exposed to the liquid
being pumped.
Material:
*CS*- Carbon steel
SS316- SS316
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 0.012 - 600 GPM [1.3 - 37.5 L/S]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
DIAPHRAGM
Slurry pump.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 1.5 - 25 GPM [0.1 - 1.5 L/S]
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Temperature:
SLURRY
7 Pumps (G10) 7-23
Description Type
Rotary (sliding vanes) pump. Includes motor driver.
Material:
Defaults*
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 10 - 750 GPM [0.7 - 47 L/S]
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Temperature:
Material:
BRONZ
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 25 - 450 GPM [1.6 - 28 L/S]
Temperature:
ROTARY
Reciprocating plunger pump.
Includes motor driver. Plunger pumps are used for
pumping hydraulic fluid, hydraulic de-scaling of steel,
water flooding of oil fields, salt water disposal,
pumping of propane, butane and other volatile liquids,
and for process pumping requiring high pressures.
This item is an electric motor driven plunger, power
pump. A power pump is a reciprocating pump driven
through a crankshaft. Although the RECIP-MOTR pump
is driven by an electric motor, a power pump may be
driven by a steam or gas turbine, a gas engine, or a
diesel engine as well. A plunger pump is a
reciprocating pump that displaces liquid from a
cylinder by the reciprocating motion of a long, slender,
solid rod called a plunger. On the back-stroke of the
plunger, the cylinder fills with liquid and on the
forward-stroke, the liquid is expelled. The capacity of a
plunger pump is determined by the diameter, stroke
and number of plungers. Plunger pumps are made
from two to nine plungers and in two basic
configurations, horizontal and vertical depending on
whether the plungers are arranged horizontally or
vertically in the machine. Typically, discharge
pressures of plunger pumps fall in the range from
1,500 to 6,000 PSIG, although pressure as high as
20,000 PSIG can be handled in some.
RECIP MOTR
7-24 7 Pumps (G10)
Description Type
RECIP MOTR - continued
Material:
Liquid flow rate:
Min: 0.01 GPM [0.4 L/S]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver power:
MAX: 1,000 HP [750 KW]
High density stock pump with twin intermeshing
screws.
Casing material:
*SS316*, SS317
Stock flow rate air dried:
Flow rate of air dried (AD) solids in pumped fluid.
MAX: 1,500 TPD [56 TON/H]
MAX: 160 PSIG [1,100 KPA] to 550 TPD [20 TON/H],
else 100 PSIG [688 KPA].
Design temperature:
Consistency air dried:
Percent by weight of air dried (AD) solids in fluid.
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
Driver type:
NONE- No driver
Speed:
Default: *1,800* RPM [*1,500* RPM]
*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
HD STOCK
7 Pumps (G10) 7-25
Description Type
Sanitary rotary lobe pump
Used for a wide range of fluids (low or high viscosity,
non-lubricating or abrasive), this pump forwards
fluids, yet has a low impact on solids and a relatively
constant discharge pressure.
Required: select pump size or enter capacity and exit
pressure.
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 520 GPM [32.8 L/S]
pressure.
MAX: 200 PSIG [1,375 KPA]
pressure.
Impeller speed:
MAX: 10 x Hz RPM
*1.0*, MIN: 0.2, MAX: 5.0
Fluid viscosity:
*1.0 CPOISE [1.0 MPA-S]*
Design temperature:
*68 DEG F [20 DEG C]*
Seal type:
*MECH*- Single mechanical seal
ORNG- O-ring seal
Relief cover type:
*STD*- Standard cover
MAN- Manual relief cover
ROTARYLOBE
Pump size selection:
Symbol Nominal Flow Rate / Diameter
GPM/INCHES L/S MM
06- 15 6 / 1.5 0.37 / 40
15 - 15 15 / 1.5 0.9 / 40
18 - 15 18 / 1.5 1.1 / 40
30 - 15 30 / 1.5 1.8 / 40
60 - 25 60 / 2.5 3.7 / 65
130 - 3 130 / 3 8.2 / 80
220 - 4 220 / 4 13.8 / 100
320 - 6 320 / 6 20.2 / 150
420 - 8 420 / 8 26.5 / 200
520 - 8 520 / 8 32.8 / 200
7-26 7 Pumps (G10)
Piston, Other Positive Displacement Pumps (P) - continued.
Pump Efficiencies
Description Type
Sanitary air diaphragm pump
added.
Inlet and outlet diameter:
MIN: 1 INCHES [25 MM DIAM], MAX: 3 INCHES DIAM
[75 MM DIAM]
Enter either inlet/outlet diameter or capacity
and head.
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 220 GPM [13.7 L/S] at 20 FEET [6 M]
Enter either inlet/outlet diameter or capacity and
head.
Fluid head:
MAX: 210 FEET [64 M] at 60 GPM [3.7 L/S]
MAX: 110 PSIG [750 KPA]
Design temperature:
MIN: 68 DEG F [20 DEG C], MAX: 300 DEG F [148
DEG C]
*1.0*, MIN: 0.2, MAX: 5.0
AIR DIAPH
Pump Type Default Efficiency
Centrifugal Pumps < 50 GPM = 60%
All Other Pumps 82%
Hi-Density Stock Pump Calculated using an empirical correlation.
7 Pumps (G10) 7-27
7-28 7 Pumps (G10)
8 Towers, Columns (G6) 8-1
Introduction to Towers and Columns
Tower/Column Applications
Tower/Column Internals
Description of Towers/Columns
Materials of Construction
Shell and Head Design
8 Towers, Columns (G6)
8-2 8 Towers, Columns (G6)
Introduction to Towers and
Columns
Towers are classified according to the type of internals in the tower, and
according to the function performed by the tower.
Towers may contain trays. If the tower contains trays, the vessel is called a
tray tower, or, synonymously, a tray column.
Tower may contain packing. If the tower contains a packing, the vessel is called a
packed tower, or packed column.
If the feed to the tower is a hydrocarbon mixture and the tower separates this
mixture into two factions or streams, one stream containing the more volatile
components of the feed and the other stream the less volatile components of the
feed, the tower is called a fractionation tower. Other names for a fractionation
tower are: fractionation column, fractionator, distillation tower and
distillation column.
If the feed to the tower is liquid, and the tower removes an undesirable gas which is
dissolved in the feed, the tower is called a stripping tower. Other names for a
stripping tower are stripping column and stripper.
If the feed to the tower is a gas mixture containing one or more undesirable
components which are removed within the tower by absorbing them with a suitable
solvent, the tower is called an absorption tower. Other names for an absorption
tower are: absorption column and absorber.
If the feed to the tower is a gas or liquid mixture containing one or more
undesirable components, which are removed within the tower by adsorbing them
onto solid catalyst pellets, the tower is called an adsorption tower. Other names for
an adsorption tower are: adsorption column and adsorber.
If the feed to the tower is a liquid mixture containing one or more undesirable
components which are removed by absorbing them with another liquid, the tower is
called an extraction tower or extraction column.
Towers are similar to vertical process vessels in that they are erected vertically
and they are cylindrical in shape with heads at each end of the cylinder.
Towers are, however, normally much taller then vertical process vessels.
Typically the length to diameter ratio of a tower ranges from 3:1 to 20:1.
Towers typically range in diameter from 3 to 20 FEET and in height from 20 to
150 FEET.
Tower/Column Applications
Towers are commonly used for the following purposes:
Distillation
Stripping
Absorption
Adsorption
Extraction.
A description of these items follows.
Distillation a process which separates a mixture of materials into two or
more desired parts. The device which performs this operation may be called a
distillation tower, distillation column or fractionator. The operation of a
distillation column depends on the fact that different materials boil at different
temperatures. For example, water boils at 212 DEG F and ethyl alcohol (the
active ingredient in liquor) boils at 173 DEG F. Distillation is not a new
concept. The material which boils at the lower temperature is called the light
or more volatile component. The material with the higher boiling point is called
the heavy or less volatile component. In the case of ethyl alcohol and water,
we are dealing with a two component or binary mixture. This is not the usual
case. More commonly, the feed to a distillation column is a multi-component
mixture. For example, crude oil contains hundreds of different components.
The purpose of distilling crude oil is to separate it into what are called fractions
or cuts. Each fraction or cut is not a pure component, but a mixture of
components which may be used as is or refined further. Crude distillation
normally is used to produce these fractions: raw gasoline, raw kerosene, gas
oil and reduced crude.
Stripping The process of extracting a material dissolved in a liquid phase
and transferring it into a gas phase is called stripping or desorption. The
stripping process is carried out in a device called a stripping tower or stripping
column. The removal of ammonia from water is an example of the stripping
process. Water with ammonia dissolved in it passes down the stripping tower.
Air passing upward through the tower strips the ammonia from the water and
the ammonia - air mixture exits from the top of the tower.
Absorption The process of transferring a material from the gas phase to
the liquid phase is called absorption. The liquid into which the gaseous
component dissolves is called the absorbent. The device in which the
absorption process takes place is called an absorption tower, absorption
column or absorber. The removal of carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulfide from
the natural gas with deithanolamine (DEA) is an example of the absorption
process. Natural gas, CO2 and H2S pass upward through the tower. DEA
passing downwards absorbs the CO2 and H2S.
Adsorption The process of transferring a material from either the gas or
liquid phase to the solid phase is called adsorption. The solid to which the
liquid or gaseous component attached itself is called the adsorbent. The device
in which the adsorption process takes place is usually called an adsorption
tower, adsorption column or adsorber. If the purpose of the adsorber is to
remove water, the term drying tower or dryer is often used.
Extraction The process of transferring material from one liquid phase to
another immiscible liquid phase is called liquid - liquid extraction, solvent
extraction or simply extraction. Immiscible liquids are liquids which do not
dissolve in each other, for example, oil and water. If the two immiscible liquids
are contacted counter currently, the contacting device is called an extraction
column, extraction tower or extractor.
Tower/Column Internals
Trays May be divided into two major categories; crossflow trays and
counter flow trays. Crossflow trays get their name because liquid flows across
the tray to a downcomer while vapor rises through perforations in the tray
deck. There are three types of crossflow trays in common use today. They are
the bubble cap, sieve tray, and valve tray. The bubble cap trays were used
almost exclusively until about 1950. Since then, the use of bubble cap trays
has almost disappeared because their complicated construction makes them
heavy (resulting in heavier and more expensive tray supports) and expensive
to fabricate.
Bubble cap trays get their name because vapor rises through holes in the tray
and is collected underneath bubble caps. Each cap has slots in it through which
the vapor from the tray below bubbles into the liquid on the tray.
Sieve trays are the cheapest trays to fabricate because of their simple design.
They consist of a perforated plate through which vapor rises from the tray
below, a weir to hold a liquid level on the tray, and a downcomer which acts as
a downspout to direct the liquid to the tray below. The operation of the sieve
tray depends on the vapor velocity through the perforations being high enough
to keep the liquid flowing across the tray and not down through the same
perforations the vapor is rising through. The drawback to the sieve tray is that
it has a narrow operating range compared to the bubble cap tray and the valve
tray. Too low a vapor velocity and the liquid falls through the holes to the plate
below - a condition called dumping. Too high a velocity and vapor doesnt
bubble through the liquid on the tray. Instead, the vapor pushes the liquid
away from the hole so that there is no liquid-vapor contact. This condition is
called coning.
Valve trays have liftable caps which operate like check valves. These caps
make valve trays more expensive than sieve trays but they also increase the
operating range of the tray. At low vapor velocities, the caps close and prevent
dumping.
The other major category of trays is the counterflow type. These trays have no
downcomers. The liquid falls through the same openings in the tray that the
vapor from the tray below rises through. This type of tray is not widely used.
The most popular of the counterflow type tray is the Turbogrid tray.
Packings The second major category of tower internals is packings.
Packings serve the same purpose as trays; they bring a gas or vapor stream
into intimate contact with a liquid stream. Trays accomplish this by providing a
very large wetted surface area for the gas or vapor to flow by. Packed towers
would normally be selected instead of tray towers in the following instances:
1 For columns less than 2 FEET in diameter, packing is generally cheaper.
2 If highly corrosive fluids are being handled, packings are often
advantageous because they can be made of ceramic, carbon, plastic or
other highly resistant metallic or non-metallic material.
3 Packed towers are low pressure drop devices, therefore, they are often used for
vacuum distillations.
The major disadvantages of packed towers are:
1 They have a narrower operating range than tray towers.
2 A packed tower must have a larger diameter than a tray tower to handle
the same feed rate.
The most common types of packings are: Raschig rings, Berl saddles, Intalox
saddles and Pall rings.
Adsorption towers are packed towers; however, their function is to transfer a
material from the liquid or gas phase onto the surface of the solid adsorbent.
Adsorbents are not packing types. Adsorbents are generally either a granular
material or else spherical or cylindrical shaped pellets. Some common
adsorbents are: Fullers earthes (natural clays), activated clay, alumina,
activated carbon and silica gel.
Description of Towers/Columns
Towers and columns are interchangeable name for the same device. These
devices have one of two functions. One is to separate a mixture into two or
more desired parts. The other function is to transfer a material from one phase
to another phase.
Towers are classified according to the function performed. Examples are
distillation, stripping or extraction. Towers are also classified by the type of
device installed inside (internals) so the tower can perform its desired
function. Tower internals consist of either trays or packings.
Towers are always erected vertically. They are usually tall and cylindrical in
shape. Sometimes they are designed with the top of the tower one diameter
and the bottom a different (usually larger) diameter. This gives the tower a
Coke bottle shape and is called a double diameter tower.
The cylindrically shaped body of the tower is called the shell. The shell is
closed at both ends with dome-shaped covers called heads. There are three
head designs in common use:
Torispherical, the most common of which is the ASME flanged and dished
head
Ellipsoidal, also called elliptical, elliptical dished or 2:1 ellipsoidal (because
the ratio of the length of the major to the minor axis of this head is 2:1)
Hemispherical.
Which kind of head to use is an economic decision. The torispherical head is
the cheapest to fabricate, but is the thickest for a given pressure. The
ellipsoidal head is more expensive to fabricate than the torispherical, but is
thinner at the same pressure. The hemispherical head is the most costly to
fabricate, but is the thinnest for a given pressure. Thus, the material cost
decreases from the torispherical to hemispherical because the head gets
thinner, but the fabricating costs increase. At pressures below 150 PSIG the
torispherical head is generally the cheapest. From 150 PSIG to 500 PSIG, the
ellipsoidal is usually selected. Above 150 PSIG, the hemispherical head
becomes an economically viable alternative.
Openings are provided in the shell and heads of a tower so that process fluids
can enter and leave. Other openings in the tower are provided for drains,
purge connections and sample connections. These openings into the tower are
called nozzles.
Nozzles range in diameter from 1 INCH for small drains, vents and sample
connections to 24 INCHES [609.6 MM] or more for large process connections.
The small (1 INCH) connections are usually made with pipe couplings, not with
welding necks and flanges.
Workers must be able to enter the tower after it is erected to install and
maintain the internals. Openings in the tower provided for this purpose are
called manholes or manways. Manholes are just nozzles large enough for a
man to pass through. Manholes range in diameter from 18 - 48 INCHES [1219
MM].
A tower is normally supported by a steel cylinder the same diameter as the
tower called a skirt. The skirt is welded to the tower at one end and bolted to
the foundation at the other.
In addition to nozzles, manholes and skirts, other appurtenances may be
attached to the tower. These other externals may include insulation clips for
the support of insulation, lifting lugs which are eyelets to which rigging is
attached so that the tower can be lifted and placed on its foundation, and
various structural steel members for the support of platforms and ladders.
Materials of Construction
The tower shell and heads are usually fabricated out of carbon or low alloy
steel plate.
As the name implies, the primary alloying element in carbon steel is carbon.
All the other alloying elements in carbon steel are limited to concentrations
less than 0.5%. The most common materials of construction for towers are the
carbon steels A515 and A516.
Low alloy steel contain one or more alloying elements besides carbon in
concentrations from 0.5% to 10%. Alloying elements in concentrations greater
than 10% make the steel a high alloy steel.
When extremely corrosive materials are to be handled, the tower may be
fabricated out of a high alloy steel such as one of the stainless steels, a non-
ferrous metal such as titanium or monel, or a non-metal such as FRP
(fiberglass reinforced polyester). However, because these materials are either
very expensive or else have design limitations such as low strength, claddings
and linings are commonly used for corrosion resistance. Clad plate consists of
a thin layer of corrosion resistant metal permanently bonded to an inexpensive
carbon or low alloy steel backing. Linings differ from claddings in that there is
not a permanent continuous bond between the corrosion resistant material
and the backing material, and the corrosion resistant material is usually not a
metal. Common lining materials are brick, cement, rubber and glass.
Shell and Head Design
Typically, many companies normally require that tower shells and heads be
designed according to the latest edition of Section VIII Division 1 of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Towers manufactured in the United States
will carry the ASME code stamp certifying that the vessel has been designed
and fabricated to code standards. Towers manufactured outside the United
States are to be designed and fabricated according to code standards as well,
but need not carry the code stamp.
Towers which are unusually large, or towers which are required to operate at a
very high pressure may be designed according to Section VIII Division 2 of the
ASME Code. Division 2 requires complete stress analysis of the process vessel.
This complete analysis allows the vessel to be designed with much smaller
safety factors. This results in a vessel which has a thinner shell and head and
is therefore cheaper to fabricate than the same vessel designed according to
the rules of Division 1. Since a Division 2 design results in a cheaper vessel,
why arent all process vessels designed according to the rules of Division 2?
Again it is a question of economics. A Division 2 design is so complex that the
money spent in extra engineering time for the vessel can easily exceed the
savings realized in the fabrication of the vessel. Only in very large or thick
walled vessels is the economic advantage of a Division 2 clear-cut.
Pressure/vacuum,
includes vessel
shell, heads,
transition section,
single base
material, lined or
clad, nozzles,
manholes (one
manhole below and
above tray stack or
packed section and
one manhole every
tenth tray or 25
FEET [7.6 M] of
packed height),
stiffening rings if
desired, base ring,
lugs, skirt or legs;
tray clips, tray
supports (if
designated),
distributor piping,
plates, packing (if packing designated); variety of applications for plate and
packed towers: absorption, desorption, distillation or stripping (via kettle or
thermosiphon reboiler defined separately), extraction; applications for packed
towers: gas and liquid adsorption; sections can be trayed, packed, empty.
Systems with automatic installation bulks (Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer ) generate platforms for towers. A tower
begins with one 360 DEGREE platform for the first 25 FEET [7.6 M], or fraction
thereof, of exposed height, plus one 90 DEGREE platform for every additional
25 FEET [7.6 M], or fraction thereof, of exposed height. If the tower is in a
structure, the system subtracts the height of the structure from the total tower
height (Bottom T-T height + Skirt height) to calculate the total exposed
height. To place a tower in a structure, make the area type OPEN or EX-OPEN
(see Chapter 36 for area type descriptions), or else use the Structure tag
number to assign the tower to the open steel structure (OPN-STL-ST)
available under steel plant bulks.
(See Single Diameter Towers for tray stacks.)
Description Type
Packed double diameter tower.
Application:
Defines vessel function and related
pipe/instrumentation model.
Default: *ABSORB*
ABSORB- Absorption
DESORB- Desorption
DISTIL- Distillation with thermosiphon reboiler
(not included)
PACKED
Double Diameter Towers (DDT) - continued
Description Type
PACKED - continued
DIS-RB- Distillation with kettler reboiler (not included)
EXTRAC- Extraction
GAS-AD- Gas adsorption
LIQ-AD- Liquid adsorption
STRIPP- Stripping with thermosiphone reboiler (not
included)
STR-RB- Stripping with kettle reboiler (not included)
Base material Bottom:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material
(cladding is defined below). See Chapter 28
for materials.
Design gauge pressure Bottom.:
Default: Specified top section pressure, or 50 PSIG
[350 KPA]: negative for vacuum.
Design temperature Bottom:
Default: Specified top section temp or 250 DEG F [120
DEG C].
Packing material Bottom:
Default: *NONE*
Packing height Bottom:
Default: *0.0* FEET [*0.0* M]
Cladding material Bottom:
Default: *NONE*
Skirt height:
Default: 1.5 x bottom diameter; enter 0.0 if vessel
hung in OPEN structure.
Manhole diameter Bottom:
Thickness Bottom section:
Corrosion allowance Bottom:
Cladding thickness Bottom:
Stiffening ring spacing Bottom:
if not required.
Description Type
PACKED - continued
Base material Top:
(cladding is defined below). See Chapter 28 for
materials. Default: *A 515*
Design gauge pressure Top:
Default: Specified bottom section pressure or 50 PSIG
[350 KPA]; negative for vacuum.
Design temperature Top:
Default: Specified bottom section temperature or 250
DEG F [120 DEG C].
Packing material Top:
Default: *NONE*
Packing height Top:
Default: *0.0* FEET [*0.0* M]
Cladding material Top:
Default: *NONE*
Pipe material Top:
Manhole diameter Top:
Thickness Top section:
Corrosion allowance Top:
Default 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS, 0.0 for other
materials.
Cladding thickness Top:
Stiffening ring spacing Top:
if not required.
Wind or seismic design:
Default: Vessel designed for wind and seismic loads
defined in project basis.
W+S- Wind and seismic design required
WIND- Wind design only
SEIS- Wind/seismic design
NONE- Delete wind and seismic design
Description Type
PACKED - continued
Fluid volume:
Max: 100; Default: *20*; For seismic design, fluid
volume as a% of vessel volume (water assumed).
Vacuum design gauge pressure:
case. Default: pressure.
Weld efficiency:
50 - 100; ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed for thin
wall vessels; Default: Area Design Basis.
Stress relief:
Molecular weight Overhead prod:
Default: 50 for distillation and stripping applications;
otherwise 30.
Number body flange sets Bottom:
diameter as vessel.
Number body flange sets Top:
diameter as vessel.
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD;
ID- Inside diameter
ASME design basis:
Default: *D1NF*, applicable only for
ASME code design.
D1NF- ASME Division 1 - no fatigue analysis
D1F- ASME Division 1 - with fatigue analysis
Description Type
Trayed double diameter tower.
Available tray types include: bubble cap, sieve, turbo
grid, valve and clips and supports without trays.
Tray type:
Default: *VALVE*
VALVE- Valve trays
BUBBL- Bubble cap trays
TURBO- Turbo grid trays
SIEVE- Sieve trays
NONE.- No trays
Application:
Defines vessel function and related pipe/
instrumentation model; Default: *DISTIL*
ABSORB- Absorption
DESORB- Desorption
(not included)
DIS-RB- Distillation with kettle reboiler
(not included)
EXTRAC- Extraction
STRIPP- Stripping with thermosiphon reboiler
(not included)
STR-RB.- Stripping with kettle reboiler (not included)
materials. Default: *A 515*.
Design gauge pressure Bottom:
Default: Specified top section pressure, or 50 PSIG
[350 KPA]; negative for vacuum.
Default: Specified top section temperature or 250 DEG
F [120 DEG C].
Bottom tray material or packing:
Specify tray material for trays or packing material for
packed sections. See Chapter 28 for materials.
Default: *A 515*.
No. trays/Packed height Bottom:
Enter number of trays for trayed sections or packing
height for packed sections. Default: *0.0*
TRAYED

Description Type
TRAYED - continued
Corrosion allowance Top:
materials.
Cladding thickness Top:
Stiffening ring spacing Top:
if not required.
Default: vessel design for wind and seismic loads
defined in Project Basis.
SEIS- Seismic design only
Fluid volume:
For seismic design; fluid volume as a% of vessel
volume (water assumed); Max: 100; Default: *20*.
Weld efficiency:
Range: 50 - 100; ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed
for thin wall vessels; Default: Area Basis.
Stress relief:
Molecular weight Overhead prod:
Default: 50 for distillation and stripping applications;
otherwise - 30.
Number body flange sets Bottom:
diameter as vessel.
Number body flange sets Top:
diameter as vessel.
Description Type
TRAYED - continued
Diameter option:
ID- Inside diameter
ASME design basis:
Applicable only for ASME code design.
See following entries for fatigue data.
D2F- ASME Division 2 with fatigue analysis
Start Stop cycles x 1000:
ASME fatige only. Thousands of start-up cycles during
the full equipment life; Min: 0.02;
Default: *1.0*.
Pressure cycles x 1000:
ASME fatigue only. Thousands of deviations from
design pressure during equipment life.
Default: *0*.
Pressure amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of pressure deviation as
percent of design pressure. Default: *0*.
Number of hydrostatic tests:
ASME fatigue only. Number of hydrostatic tests during
the full equipment life. Default: *20*.
Temperature cycles x 1000:
design temperature in equipment life. Default: *0*.
Temperature amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of temperature deviation
as a percent of design temperature.
Tray thickness:
Default: 0.1875 INCH [4.5 MM].
Multiple Diameter Trayed or Packed
Double-diameter tower with multiple sections. Each
section can be trayed or packed.
Trayed double diameter tower.
For Trayed Sections:
Tray type:
Default: *VALVE*
VALVE - Valve trays
BUBBL - Bubble cap trays
TURBO - Turbo grid trays
SIEVE - Sieve trays
NONE. - No trays
Application:
pipe/instrumentation model; Default: *DISTIL*
ABSORB - Absorption
DESORB - Desorption
DISTIL - Distillation with thermosiphon reboiler
(not included)
DIS-RB - Distillation with kettle reboiler
not included)
EXTRAC - Extraction
GAS-AD - Gas adsorption
LIQ-AD - Liquid adsorption
STRIPP - Stripping with thermosiphon reboiler
(not included)
STR-RB. - Stripping with kettle reboiler
(not included)
For Bottom section:
for materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Description Type
Multiple Diameter Trayed or Packed - continued-
Diameter Bottom section:
Diameter of Bottom section
Bottom tangent to tangent height:
Enter either Capacity or Diameter and Height
Base material thickness including corrosion
allowance
Design gauge pressure Bottom:
Default: Specified top section pressure, or
50 PSIG [350 KPA]; negative for vacuum.
Default: Specified top section temperature or
250 DEG F [120 DEG C].
For Middle section:
Base material Middle:
(cladding is defined below). See
Chapter 28 for materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Design gauge pressure Middle:
Default: Specified middle section pressure, or
Design temperature Middle:
Default: Specified middle section temperature or
250 DEG F [120 DEG C].
For Top section:
Base material Top:
for materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Design gauge pressure Top:
Design temperature Top:
Default: Specified top section temperature or
250 DEG F [120 DEG C].
Diameter option:
OD - Outside diameter
ID - Inside diameter
Description Type
Head Type:
ELLIP - 2:1 Ellipsoidal
HEMI - Hemispherical
TORI - Torispherical (ASME)
Skirt height:
Default: 1.5 x bottom diameter; enter 0.0 if
vessel hung in OPEN structure.
Skirt thickness:
Default: System calculated
Demister thickness:
SS304 mist pad 12 PCF [192 KG/M3] with top
and bottom support grids. Def. 0
Transition height-Bottom-Middle:
Transition height between bottom and
middle sections.
Transition height-Middle-Top:
Transition height between middle and top sections.
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for
worst case. Default: pressure design.
Jacket design gauge pressure:
Jacket pressure or thickness required to
obtain jacket.
Default: no jacket.
Jacket type:
FULL - full jacket
PIPE - half-pipe jacket
Default: FULL
Jacket thickness:
Jacket pressure or thickness required to obtain
jacket.
Default: no jacket.
Jacket material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *CS*.
Default: vessel design for wind and seismic loads
W+S - Wind and seismic design required
WIND - Wind design only
SEIS - Seismic design only
NONE - Delete wind and seismic design
Description Type
Fluid volume:
For seismic design; fluid volume as a percent
of vessel volume (water assumed)
Max: 100
Default: *20*.
Tower Section Details:
Note: Clicking the red arrow in the Tower Section
Details field opens the Tower internal data form, on
which to enter details about the bottom, middle and
top sections of the tower.
For each section:
Name:
The name of the section.
Base material:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate
material (cladding is defined below). See
Chapter 28 for materials.
Diameter:
Enter the diameter of the vessel.
Vessel tangent to tangent height:
Thickness:
allowance.
50 PSIG [350 KPA]: negative for vacuum.
Design temperature:
Default: Specified top section temp or
250 DEG F [120 DEG C].
Corrosion allowance:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS, 0.0 for
other materials.
Cladding material:
Default: *NONE*.
Cladding thickness:
is specified; otherwise: 0.0.
Description Type
SECTION - TRAYS
Number of trays:
Enter number of trays. Min 2.
Tray type:
Default: *VALVE*
VALVE- Valve tray
SIEVE- Sieve trays
NONE- No trays
Tray material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *A285C*.
Tray spacing:
Range: 12 - 30 INCHES [305 -760 MM];
Tray thickness:
Default: *0.187* INCHES [*4.50*]
Max: 0.375 INCHES [9.00 MM].
SECTION - PACKINGS
Packing height Section 1:
Max: Tangent to tangent height less 1.0 FEET
[0.3 M].
Packing material(1):
Packing height Section 2:
Max: Tangent to tangent height less height
of packing No. 1.
Packing material(2):
Jacket option:
*NO*- Jacket not required
YES- Jacket is required
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Manhole diameter:
Default: *18* INCHES[*450* MM].
Stiffening ring thickness:
Default stiffeners designed for vacuum only;
enter 0.0 if not required.
Number of body flange sets:
Number of sets (pairs) of body flanges of the
same diameter as the vessel.
Pipe material:
See a list of piping materials.
Description Type
Pressure/vacuum includes vessel shell, heads, single base material (lined or
clad), nozzles, manholes, jacket and nozzles for heating or cooling medium,
base ring, lugs, skirt or legs; tray clips, tray supports (if designated),
distributor piping, plates, packing (if packing designated); variety of
applications for plate and packed towers: absorption, desorption, distillation or
stripping (via kettle or thermosiphon reboiler defined separately), extraction;
applications for packed towers: gas and liquid adsorption; trayed, packed,
empty.
Systems with
automatic installation
bulks (Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator and
Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer )
generate platforms for
towers. A tower begins
with one 360 DEGREE
platform for the first 25
FEET [7.6 M], or
fraction thereof, of
exposed height, plus
one 90 DEGREE
platform for every
additional 25 FEET [7.6
M], or fraction thereof,
of exposed height. If
the tower is in a
structure, the system
subtracts the height of
the structure from the
total tower height (Bottom T-T height + Skirt height) to calculate the total
exposed height. To place a tower in a structure, make the area type OPEN or
EX-OPEN (see Chapter 36 for area type descriptions), or else use the
Structure tag number to assign the tower to the open steel structure (OPN-
STL-ST) available under steel plant bulks.
If the number of platforms is greater than or equal to six, then the number of
manholes is equal to one plus the number of platforms. If the number of
platforms is less than six, the number of manholes is equal to one plus
approximately one for every 18 trays (for small towers, tray spacing is about
12 INCHES, so there would be one manhole for about every 18 FEET).
Description Type
Packed single diameter tower.
If a packing type is not specified, a packed column is
designed and costed with distributor and support
plates for average density packing.
Application:
instrumentation model; Default: *ABSORB*
ABSORB- Absorption
DESORB- Desorption
DISTIL - Distillation with thermosiphon reboiler
(not included)
(not included)
EXTRAC- Extraction
(not included)
Shell Material:
for materials.
Default: *A 515*.
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is
for worst case. Default: pressure *15* PSIG
[*100* KPA].
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is
for worst case. Default: pressure.
Design Temperature:
otherwise material: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C].
Packing Type:
If packing type is not specified, no packing will
be provided. See Chapter 28 for packing materials.
Total Packing Height:
Max: tangent to tangent height less 1.0 FEET
[0.3 M].
Demister Thickness:
Max: 12.0 INCHES [300 MM].
SS304 mist pad 12 PCF [192 KG/M3] with top
and bottom support grids.
PACKED
Single Diameter Towers (TW) - continued
Description Type
PACKED - continued
Cladding Material:
Default: *NONE*.
Skirt Height: Enter 0.0 skirt height if tower hung in
OPEN structure; Default: 1.5 x diameter.
Wind or Seismic Design: Default: Vessel designed
for wind and seismic loads defined in Project Basis.
Fluid Volume:
volume (water assumed). Max: 100; Default: *20*.
Manhole Diameter:
Max: 48 INCHES [1,200 MM].
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS; 0.0 for other
material. Double if jacketed.
diameter as vessel.
Weld Efficiency:
ASME/JIS Codes only, where allowed for thin wall
vessels; Default: Area Basis; Range: 50 - 100.
Stress Relief:
Cladding Thickness:
specified, otherwise - 0.0.
if not required.
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*.
FULL- Full jacket
PIPE.- Half-pipe jacket
Description Type
PACKED - continued
Jacket Thickness:
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Material:
Head Type:
ELLIP- 2:1 ellipsoidal
HEMI- Hemispherical
TORI- Torispherical (ASME)
Molecular Weight Overhead Prod:
Default: 50 for distillation and stripping applications,
otherwise 30.
Diameter Option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD; Default: See
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
ASME Design Basis:
Start Stop Cycles x 1000:
the full equipment life; Min: 0.02; Default: *1.0*.
Pressure Cycles x 1000:
design pressure during equipment life. Default: *0*.
Pressure Amplitude:
Number of Hydrostatic Tests:
Temperature Cycles x 1000:
Temperature Amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of temperature
deviation as a percent of design temperature.
Description Type
Trayed single diameter tower.
Tray Type:
Default: *VALVE*
VALVE- Valve tray
SIEVE- Sieve trays
NONE- No trays
Application:
instrumentation model; Default: *DISTIL*.
ABSORB- Absorption
DESORB- Desorption
(not included)
(not included)
EXTRAC- Extraction
(not included)
Shell Material:
(cladding is defined below). Default: *A 515*.
Default: 15 FEET [4.5 M] plus tray stack height.
case. Default: pressure *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
Design Temperature:
otherwise material: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C].
Tray Material:
Number of Trays:
Min: 2
TRAYED
Description Type
TRAYED - continued
Tray Spacing:
Range: 12 - 30 INCHES [305 -760 MM]; Default: *24*
INCHES [*600* MM].
Demister Thickness:
Max: 12 INCHES [300 MM]
Cladding Material:
Default: *NONE*.
Skirt Height:
Enter 0.0 skirt height if tower hung in OPEN structure;
Default: 1.5 x diameter.
Wind or Seismic Design:
Fluid Volume:
Manhole Diameter:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS; 0.0 for other
material. Double if jacketed.
diameter as vessel.
Weld Efficiency:
ASME/JIS Codes only, where allowed for thin wall
vessels; Range: 50 - 100; Default: Area Basis.
Stress Relief:
CODE, YES, NO; Default: See Area Design Basis.
Cladding Thickness:
if not required.
Jacket Design Gauge Pressure: Jacket pressure or
thickness required to obtain jacket. Default: No
jacket.
Description Type
TRAYED - continued
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL- Full jacket
Jacket Thickness:
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Material:
Head Type:
HEMI- Hemispherical
TORI- Torishpherical (ASME)
Molecular Weight Overhead Prod:
Default: 50 for distillation and stripping applications,
otherwise 30.
Diameter Option:
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
Tray Thickness:
Default: *0.187* INCHES [*4.50* MM];
Max: 0.375 INCHES [9.00 MM]
ASME Design Basis:
Start Stop Cycles x 1000:
the full equipment life; Min: 0.02; Default: *1.0*.
Pressure Amplitude:
Description Type
TRAYED - continued
Temperature Cycles x 1000:
Temperature Amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of temperature
deviation as a percent of design temperature.
Tray stack only, for single- and double-diameter
towers.
Optional tray types include: bubble-cap, turbo
grid, seive and valve.
Tray Material:
Number of Trays: Min: 1.
Tray Type:
SIEVE- Sieve trays
VALVE- Valve trays
Tray Thickness:
Default: *0.187* INCHES [*4.50* MM];
Max: 0.375 INCHES [9.00 MM]
Tray Spacing:
Range: 12 - 30 INCHES [305 - 750 MM];
Default: 24 INCHES [600 MM].
TRAY STACK

Direct contact heat exchanger tower includes
distributors, packing supports, nozzles; may include
packing.
Shell Material:
materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Gas Flow Rate Inlet:
Range: 30,000 - 300,000 LB/H
[13,610 - 136,000 KG/H]; Enter either flowrate or
diameter and height.
Vessel Diameter:
Enter either flowrate or diameter and height.
DC HE TW
Description Type
DC HE TW - continued
case. Default: pressure 15 PSIG [100 KPA].
Design Temperature:
other material: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C].
Enter maximum gas temperature.
Packing Type Section 1:
Default: *68PVC*. See Chapter 28 for packing
materials.
Packing Height Section 1:
Max: Tangent to tangent height less 1.0 FEET [0.3 M].
Default: None for OPEN top, else 68PVC.
Max: Tangent to tangent height less height of packing
No. 1.
Cladding Material:
Default: *NONE*.
Skirt Height:
Enter 0.0 skirt height if tower hung in OPEN
structure; Default: 1.5 x diameter.
WIND- Wind display only
Fluid Volume:
For seismic design, fluid volume as a% of vessel
Manhole Diameter:
Description Type
DC HE TW - continued
material, double if jacketed.
diameter as vessel.
Weld Efficiency:
vessels; Default: See Area Basis; Range: 50 - 100%.
Stress Relief:
Cladding Thickness:
if not required.
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL- Full jacket
Jacket Thickness:
Jacket pressure or thickness required to obtain
jacket. Default: No jacket.
Jacket Material:
Head Type:
HEMI- Hemispherical
OPEN- Open top/TORI bottom
Diameter Option:
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
Description Type
Temperature swing adsorption unit includes vessel
pair(s), distributors, packing supports, and valve skid;
may include heater (steam or electric), packing.
Shell Material:
materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Gas Flow Rate Inlet:
Enter either flowrate or diameter and height; Range:
30,000 - 300,000 LB/H [13,610 - 136,000 KG/H].
Vessel Diameter:
Number of Vessel Pairs:
Number of vessel pairs in configuration, one vessel per
pair absorbing at a time.
case. Default: pressure 15 PSIG [100 KPA].
Design Temperature:
other material: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C].
See Chapter 28 for packing materials; Default:
*13XMS*.
Max: Tangent to tangent height less 1.0 FEET [0.3 M].
Default: *ALMNA* (Alumina).
Max: Tangent to tangent height less height of packing
No. 1.
Cladding Material:
Default: *NONE*.
Skirt Height:
Enter 0.0 skirt height if tower hung in OPEN structure;
Default: 1.5 x diameter.
TS ADSORB
Description Type
TS ADSORB - continued
WIND- Wind design only`
Fluid Volume:
Manhole Diameter:
diameter as vessel.
Weld Efficiency:
vessels; Range: 50 - 100%; Default: See Area Basis.
Stress Relief:
Cladding Thickness:
if not required.
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Type: Default: *FULL*
FULL- Full jacket
Jacket Thickness:
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Material:
Description Type
TS ADSORB - continued
Head Type:
HEMI- Hemispherical
OPEN- Open top/TORI bottom
Heater Type:
*ELEC*- Electric heater
STEAM- Steam heater
NONE- No heater
Applies to steam gas heater only
Diameter Option:
ID- Inside diameter
9 Vacuum Systems (G6) 9-1
Condensers (C)
Ejectors (EJ)
Vacuum Pumps (VP)
9 Vacuum Systems (G6)
9-2 9 Vacuum Systems (G6)
Condensers (C)
Barometric condenser
Description Type
Barometric for condensing of motive steam between
ejector stages.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Water flow rate:
Range: 200 - 5,000 GPM [15 - 315 L/S]
BAROMETRIC
Material:
CI
Water flow rate:
Range: 40 - 5,000 GPM [3 - 315 L/S]
Material:
RBLCS (rubber lined carbon steel)
Water flow rate:
Range: 200 - 3,000 GPM [12 - 180 L/S]
Ejectors (EJ)
100 PSIG [690 KPA] steam
Description Type
One stage of non-condensing ejection.
Single stage ejectors may be used to produce
pressures as low as 2 INCHES Hg ABS, but are
normally used in the pressure range from atmospheric
to 3 INCHES Hg ABS. Ejectors are used to generate
low pressure for vacuum distillation, vacuum
crystallization and evaporation and to produce chilled
water.
Ejectors use a high pressure motivating fluid, usually
steam, to produce a vacuum. The single stage ejector
consists of three basic parts: nozzle, mixing chamber
or suction head, and diffuser. Although ejectors can be
fabricated from a variety of material, usually the
nozzle is stainless steel and the mixing chamber and
diffuser are cast iron or steel. Ejectors are easily
recognized by the long thin hour-glass shape of the
diffuser.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
HAST- Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 10,000 LB/H [4.6 - 4,530 KG/H]
Suction absolute pressure:
Range: 20 - 400 MM HG [2,670 - 53,300 PA]
SINGLE STG
Two ejection stages with barometric intercondenser
Two stage ejectors are used to produce suction
pressures from 4 to 0.5 INCHES Hg ABS. Two stage
ejectors have the same process applications as single
stage ejectors.
This item is a two stage ejector with a barometric type
intercondenser. A two stage ejector is simply two
single stage ejectors arranged in series. Two stages
can produce a higher vacuum than a single stage
ejector. The first stage evacuates the equipment item
to which it is attached and compresses these gases
and vapors to an intermediate pressure.
The motive steam and condensable vapors ejected by
the first stage are condensed in the barometric
condenser to reduce the load on the second stage. The
second stage ejector takes the non-condensable
gasses from the first stage and compresses them to
atmospheric pressure so that they may be released to
the atmosphere.
.TWO STAGE
Ejectors (EJ) - continued
Description Type
TWO STAGE - continued
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
HAST- Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 150 LB/H [4.6 -68 KG/H]
Range: 10 - 200 MM HG [1,340 - 26,600 PA]
Non-condensing two single stage ejectors without
intercondenser. A two stage non-condensing ejector is
less expensive than a two stage condensing ejector on
an installed basis. The non-condensing ejector may be
used for an application where the condensing ejector
is used. Therefore, the non-condensing ejector is
preferred where the lower initial capital investment
out-weighs the higher operating cost due to the higher
steam consumption.
This item is a two stage non-condensing ejector. Two
single stage ejectors are arranged in series without an
intercondenser. Hence, the second stage condenser
must handle the motive steam from the first stage
ejector and the gases evacuated from the process
vessel. This results in a larger second stage ejector
and increased steam consumption over a two stage
condensing unit.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
HAST- Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 120 LB/H [4.6 - 50 KG/H]
Range: 5 - 100 MM HG [670 - 13,3000 PA]
2 STAGE
Description Type
Four stages of ejection with barometric condenser
between third and fourth ejector.
Four stage ejectors are used to produce suction
pressures from 4 to 0.2 MM Hg ABS. Four stage
ejectors are used to produce suction for vacuum
distillation, vacuum crystallizers and vacuum
evaporators.
This item is a four stage ejector with one barometric
condenser between the third and fourth ejectors. The
condenser is used only between those stages where
the condensing temperature of the steam is greater
than the temperature of the cooling water available.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
HAST- Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 110 LB/H [4.6 - 48 KG/H]
Range: 0.5 - 10 MM HG [67 - 1,330 PA]
4 STAGE B
Four stages of ejection with barometric condensers,
between second and third and between third and
fourth ejector. Four stage ejectors are used to produce
suction pressure from 4 to 0.2 MM Hg ABS. Four stage
distillation, vacuum crystallizers, and vacuum
evaporators.
This item is a four stage ejector with two barometric
condensers. Four ejectors are arranged in series with
one condenser between the second and third ejectors
and the other between the third and four ejectors.
Condensers are used only between those ejectors
where the condensing temperature of the steam is
greater than the temperature of the cooling water
available.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
HAST- Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 110 LB/H [4.6 - 48 KG/H]
Range: 0.25 - 5.0 MM HG [33 - 660 PA]
4 STAGE
Description Type
Five stages of ejection with barometric condenser
between fourth and fifth ejector.
Five stage ejectors are used to produce suction
pressures from 0.4 to 0.02 MM Hg ABS. Five stage
distillation, vacuum crystallizers and vacuum
evaporators.
This item is a five stage ejector with one barometric
condenser between the fourth and fifth ejectors.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
HAST- Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 110 LB/H [4.6 - 48 KG/H]
Range: 0.5 - 1.0 MM HG [7 - 130 PA]
5 STAGE B
Vacuum Pumps (VP)
Includes pump, motor and drive unit.
Description Type
Water-sealed vacuum pump.
Ultimate pressure: 500 MM HG [66,660 PA].
Water-sealed 500 MM HG [PA] vacuum, explosion
proof motor.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS316- SS316
Range: 30 - 4,000 CFM [55 - 6,750 M3/H]
WATER SEAL

Mechanical oil-sealed vacuum pump.
First stage: 0.01 MM HG [1.35 PA]
Second stage: 0.0003 MM HG [0.04 PA].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Range: 30 - 700 CFM [55 - 1,150 M3/H]
Number of stages:
MECHANICAL
Mechanical booster includes motor and drive.
Ultimate pressure 0.0001 MM HG [0.0135 PA].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
Range: 120 - 2,000 CFW [205 - 3,375 M3/H]
MECH BOOST
10 Vessels (G10) 10-1
Vertical Tanks (VT)
10 Vessels (G10)
10-2 10 Vessels (G10)
Horizontal vessels are commonly used as settling drums, surge tanks, reactors
and distillate drums. A settling drum is used for phase separation between two
immiscible liquids. The L/D ratio of a settling drum is normally four. A surge
tank or surge drum is used to maintain a constant flowrate of liquid to a
downstream piece of equipment when the flowrate of liquid from the upstream
piece of equipment is fluctuating. The fluctuations in flow rate are absorbed by
the surge drum by allowing the liquid level in this drum to rise and fall.
Horizontal drums are frequently filled with catalyst and used as reactors.
Placing catalyst in horizontal vessels allows shallow bed depths and large
cross-sectional areas. A typical example of horizontal vessels being used as
reactors is the Claus reactor. A distillate or reflux drum provides space for
overhead condensables from a distillation column to separate from vapors.
Surge drums and distillate drums are normally vertical. If there is settleable
water in the feed to these vessels, however, the vessel is erected with a
water pot.
The horizontal vessel is a pressure vessel fabricated according to the rules of
the specified code (i.e., Section VIII Division 1 of the ASME Code) and erected
in the horizontal position. Although the horizontal vessel may be supported by
lugs in an open steel structure, the more usual arrangement is for the vessel
to be erected at grade and supported by a pair of saddles.
Cylindrical, pressure/vacuum, code design and construction, includes heads,
single wall (base material, clad/lined), saddles/lugs, nozzles and manholes.
Description Type
Horizontal pressure/vacuum drum.
Use minus pressure for vacuum design.
The capacity excludes the volume of the heads. If
both the vessel dimensions and capacity are specified,
the system-calculated capacity must agree with the
specified capacity to within plus or minus 10% to
avoid an error condition.
HORIZ DRUM
10 Vessels (G10) 10-3
Horizontal Tanks (HT) - continued
Description Type
HORIZ DRUM - continued
To secure desired vessel size, specify the diameter and
height directly. A value must be specified if vessel
diameter and/or vessel height (or length) are not
specified. If vessel diameter and height (or length) are
specified, the vessel volume is calculated from these
dimensions. If only vessel capacity is specified, a
straight side length-to-diameter ratio is chosen by the
system, considering cost and practicability.
(Default ratio is 2:1.)
Application:
piping/instrumentation model. Default: *blank*blank-
Standard continuous process vessel BATCH- Batch
process vessel
STORAGE- Storage vessel
RECVR- Receiver
KO- Knock-out drum
Shell material:
(Cladding is defined below.) See Chapter 28 for
materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Enter either capacity or diameter and length. The
capacity excludes the volume of the heads.
If both the vessel dimensions and capacity are
specified, the system-calculated capacity must agree
with the specified capacity to within plus or minus
10% to avoid an error condition.
height directly.
A value must be specified if vessel diameter and/or
vessel height (or length) are not specified. If vessel
diameter and height (or length) are specified, the
vessel volume is calculated from these dimensions.
If only vessel capacity is specified, a straight side
length-to-diameter ratio is chosen by the system,
considering cost and practicability.
10-4 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
Vessel diameter:
Enter either capacity or diameter and length. A value
must be specified if vessel capacity is not specified. If
both capacity and height (or length) are specified, the
diameter is calculated from these values.
Vessel tangent to tangent length:
Enter either capacity or diameter and length. A value
both vessel capacity and diameter are specified, the
height (or length) is calculated from these values.
case; Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA] pressure.
Design temperature:
Default: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C] ferrous material; 250
DEG F [120 DEG C] other material.
Default: design temperature. The operating
temperature is used in the calculation of piping and
insulation thickness.
Cladding material:
Manhole diameter:
Max: 48 INCHES [1,200 MM]; Default: *18* INCHES
[*450* MM].
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Allowance for internals:
Specify an allowance for internals as a percent of basic
vessel weight. Default: *0.0*. This value adjusts
vessel weight and cost accordingly.
Diameter of drip leg:
Drip leg (boot) diameter and height must be specified
if required.
Height of drip leg:
Drip leg (boot) diameter and height must be specified
if required.
Base material thickness:
materials.
10 Vessels (G10) 10-5
Description Type
Weld efficiency:
vessel; Default: Area Basis. Range: 50 - 100.
Stress relief:
Cladding thickness:
specified, otherwise: 0.0.
Stiffening ring spacing:
if not required.
Head type:
If no value is specified, the system selects the tori
spherical type and calculates its thickness. If the head
is thicker than the vessel shell, the system selects the
2:1 ellipsoidal type head thickness. If the head is still
thicker than the shell, the system selects the
hemispherical type head.
HEMI- Hemispherical
diameter as vessel.
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD; Default - see
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
Multi-wall design for high pressure service with total
wall thickness of individual, thin, heat-shrunk cylinders
(maximum 2 INCHES [50 MM] thick) heat shrunk,
pressure vacuum design and construction according to
user-designated design code standard.
This item is a horizontal process vessel, the total wall
thickness of which is made up of individual cylinders.
Each individual cylinder is no more than two inches
thick. The composite is made as follows. A cylinder is
fabricated with a diameter slightly larger than the
innermost cylinder.
MULTI WALL
10-6 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
MULTI WALL - continued
This cylinder is expanded thermally, slipped over the
inner cylinder and as it cools, a tight shrink fit is
obtained. This procedure is repeated until the total
wall thickness is built up.
Application:
Defines vessel function and related piping/
instrumentation model. Default: *blank*blank-
Standard continuous process vessel
BATCH- Batch process vessel
RECVR- Receiver
KO- Knock-out drum
Shell material:
materials. Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Enter either capacity or diameter and length.
Vessel diameter:
case. Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
Design temperature:
Default: design temperature.
Cladding material:
See Chapter 28; for cladding materials.
Manhole diameter:
Default: *18* INCHES [450 MM];
Max: 48 INCHES [1,200];
Number of manholes: Default: *1*.
Specify an allowance for internals as a percent of
basic vessel weight. Default: *0.0*.
Drip leg (boot) diameter and length must be specified
if required.
10 Vessels (G10) 10-7
Description Type
Height of drip leg:
if required.
material.
Weld efficiency:
vessels; Default: Area Basis. Range: 50 - 100.
Stress relief: Default: See Area Design Basis.
Cladding thickness:
if not required.
Head type:
HEMI- Hemispherical
diameter as vessel.
Diameter option:
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
Jacketed horizontal pressure/vacuum drum.
Application:
instrumentation model.
Default: *blank*
blank- Standard continuous process vessel
RECVR- Receiver
KO- Knock-out drum
JACKETED
10-8 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
Shell material:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material. See
Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Vessel diameter:
case; Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
case; Default: pressure.
Design temperature:
DEG F [120 DEG C] other materials.
Cladding material:
Default: *90* PSIG [*620* KPA].
Jacket type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL- Full jacket
Jacket material:
Manhole diameter:
Default: *18* INCHES [450 MM]; Max: 48 INCHES
[1,200];
vessel weight. Default: *0.0*.
if required.
Height of drip leg:
if required.
10 Vessels (G10) 10-9
Description Type
Weld efficiency:
vessels; Default: Area Basis. Range: 50 - 100.
Stress relief: Default: See Area Design Basis.
Cladding thickness:
if not required.
Head type:
HEMI- Hemispherical
diameter as vessel.
Diameter option:
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
Sanitary horizontal drum
Stainless steel material for sanitary storage. As a
sanitary tank, it is built to sanitary standards,
including polished stainless steel. The tank is not
a pressure vessel.
Shell material: SS304,*SS316*
Liquid volume:
MAX: 9,000 GALLONS [34 M3]
Vessel diameter:
MAX: 10 FEET [3 M]
SAN TANK
10-10 10 Vessels (G10)
10 Vessels (G10) 10-11
Description Type
SAN TANK - continued
Vessel length:
MAX: 15 FEET [4.5 M]
*68 DEG F [20 DEG C]*
Head type:
*TORI*- Torispherical (ASME)
CON15- 15 degree cone head
Jacket type:
*NONE*- No jacket
DMPLE- 90 PSIG [620 KPA] dimple jacket
Crude Oil Desalter
Horizontal pressure/vacuum drum.
The capacity excludes the volume of the heads. If both
the vessel dimensions and capacity are specified, the
system-calculated capacity must agree with the
specified capacity to within plus or minus 10% to avoid
an error condition.
height directly. A value must be specified if vessel
diameter and/or vessel height (or length) are not
specified. If vessel diameter and height (or length) are
specified, the vessel volume is calculated from these
dimensions. If only vessel capacity is specified, a
Default ratio is 2:1.)
Shell material:
materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Vessel diameter:
A value must be specified if vessel capacity is not
specified. If both capacity and height (or length) are
specified, the diameter is calculated from these
values.
10-12 10 Vessels (G10)
Crude Oil Desalter - continued
Vessel diameter:
A value must be specified if vessel capacity is not
specified. If both capacity and height (or length) are
values.
Enter either capacity or diameter and length. A
value must be specified if vessel capacity is not
specified. If both vessel capacity and diameter are
specified, the height (or length) is calculated from
these values.
case;
Default: *15* PSIG [*100*KPA] pressure.
case.
Default: pressure.
Design temperature:
Default: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C] ferrous material;
250 DEG F [120 DEG C] other material.
Default: design temperature. The operating
temperature is used in the calculation of piping
and insulation thickness.
allowance.
materials.
Cladding material:
CLAD MATLS See Chapter 28 for cladding materials.
SS304
SS316
SS321
SS347
SS410
SS430
304L
316L
NI200
NI201
MONEL
INCNL
-continued-
Description Type
10 Vessels (G10) 10-13
Crude Oil Desalter - continued
Cladding thickness:
is specified; otherwise: 0.0
Vessel Internals
basic vessel weight.
Default:*0.0*. This value adjusts vessel weight
and cost accordingly.
Number of electrostatic plates:
Min > 0
Transition Sectn (Middle-Top)
Head type:
If no value is specified, the system selects the
torispherical type and calculates its thickness.
If the head is thicker than the vessel shell, the
system selects the 2:1 ellipsoidal type head
thickness. If the head is still thicker than the
shell,the system selects the hemispherical type
head.
ELLIP - 2:1 ellipsoidal
Weld efficiency:
vessel; Default: Area Basis. Range: 50 - 100.
Stress relief:
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD; Default - see
Area Design Basis.
Manhole diameter:
Max: 48 INCHES [1,200 MM]; Default: *18*
INCHES [*450* MM].
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Description Type
10-14 10 Vessels (G10)
Vertical Tanks (VT)
Vertical process vessels are typically used as either surge drums or knock out
drums. When used as surge drums, they act like shock absorbers, maintaining
a constant flowrate of liquid out of the vessel regardless of the flowrate into it.
If liquid flows in faster than the constant rate it flows out, the vessel fills with
liquid. If liquid flows in slower than the constant rate it is removed, then the
liquid level drops. The liquid level is constantly fluctuating in order to absorb
these variations in flow and maintain a constant flowrate out. When a vertical
process vessel is used as a knock out drum, a mixture of gas and liquid flows
into the vessel and this mixture is separated into its gas and liquid components
within the vessel. The gas then flows out the top of the vessel and the liquid
flows out the bottom.
Vertical process vessels, as their name indicates, are erected in the vertical
position. They are cylindrical in shape with each end capped by a domed cover
called a head. The length to diameter ratio of a vertical vessel is typically 3:1.
Typically, vertical process vessels hold less than 5000 GALLONS.
Vertical tanks include: process, storage applications liquid, gas, solid
processing and storage; pressure/vacuum code design for process and certain
storage vessel types; includes heads, single wall, saddles, lugs, nozzles,
manholes, legs or skirt, base ring, davits where applicable.
Description Type
Pressure/Vacuum Service
Cylindrical vertical pressure/vacuum vessel.
Application:
instrumentation model. Default: *blank*
RECVR- Receiver
KO- Knock-out drum
Shell material:
Default: *A 515*.
CYLINDER
10 Vessels (G10) 10-15
Vertical Tanks (VT) - continued
Description Type
CYLINDER - continued
Liquid volume: Enter either capacity or diameter and
height. The capacity excludes the volume of the
heads. If both the vessel dimensions and capacity are
specified, the system calculated capacity must agree
with the specified capacity to within plus or minus
10% to avoid an error condition. To secure desired
vessel size, specify the diameter and height directly. A
value must be specified if vessel diameter and/or
vessel height (or length) are not specified. If vessel
diameter and height (or length) are specified, the
vessel volume is calculated from these dimensions.
(Default is 2:1.) If only vessel capacity is specified, a
Vessel diameter:
Enter either capacity or diameter and height. A value
both vessel capacity and height (or length) are
values. If both vessel capacity and diameter are
specified, the height (or length) is calculated from
these values.
See Diameter.
case; Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
case; Default: pressure.
Design temperature:
Default: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C] ferrous material, 250
10-16 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
Skirt height:
Skip if legs required, enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN
structure; Default: 1.5 x diameter. If the capacity is
10,000 GALLONS [37 M3] or less, the vessel is
designed with 4-feet [1.25 M] pipe legs. For a capacity
greater than 10,000 GALLONS [37 M3], the vessel is
designed with a skirt. The skirt height is calculated as
1.5 x vessel diameter, with minimum and maximum
calculated heights of 4 - 32 FEET [1.25 - 9.5 M].
Vessel leg height:
Skip if skirt required, enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN
structure; Default: *4* FEET [1.25 M].
See Skirt Height.
Fluid volume:
Manhole diameter: Max: 48 INCHES [1,200 MM];
Default: 18 INCHES [450 MM].
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Default: *0.0*; Specify an allowance for internals as a
percent of basic vessel weight.
Demister thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM for CS, 0.0 for other
materials.
diameter as vessel.
Weld efficiency:
vessels; Defaults: Area Basis. Range: 50 - 100.
10 Vessels (G10) 10-17
Description Type
Stress relief:
Cladding material:
If no cladding material is specified, the system
assumes that the vessel is not clad regardless of any
input for cladding thickness.
Cladding thickness:
specified, otherwise 0.0. See Cladding Material.
if not required.
Head type:
If no value is specified, the system selects the
torispherical type head and calculates the thickness. If
the head is thicker than the vessel shell, the system
selects the 2:1 ellipsoidal type head and recalculates
the head thickness. If the head is still thicker than the
shell, the system selects the hemispherical type head.
HEMI- Hemispherical
Head thickness Top:
Head thickness Bottom:
Diameter option:
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
ASME design basis:
Applicable only for ASME code design. See following
entries for fatigue data. Default: *D1NF*.
Start stop cycles x 1000:
ASME fatigue only. Thousands of start-up cycles
during the full equipment life. Range: 5.00 - 0.02.
10-18 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
Pressure amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of process deviation as
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of temperature as a
percent of design temperature. Default: *0*.
Multi-wall design for high pressure service. Total wall
thickness of individual thin heat shrunk cylinders
(maximum 2 INCH [50 MM] thick each).
Application:
RECVR- Receiver
KO- Knock-out drum
Shell material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Vessel diameter:
worst case.
MULTI WALL
10 Vessels (G10) 10-19
Description Type
Design temperature:
Skirt height:
structure; Default: 1.5 x diameter.
Vessel leg height:
Skip if skirt required, enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN
structure; Default: *4* FEET [*1.25* M].
Fluid volume:
Max: 100; Default: *20*; For seismic design; fluid
volume as a% of volume (water assumed).
Manhole diameter:
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Demister thickness:
materials.
diameter as vessel.
Weld efficiency:
10-20 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
Stress relief:
Default: see Area Design Basis.
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
if not required.
Head type:
HEMI- Hemispherical
Head thickness Top:
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD; Default: see
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
ASME design basis:
Default: *D1NF*.
during the full equipment life.
Range: 5.00 - 0.02.
Default: *0*.
10 Vessels (G10) 10-21
Description Type
Pressure amplitude:
Jacketed, cylindrical, vertical pressure/vacuum vessel.
Application:
RECVR- Receiver
KO- Knock-out drum
Shell material:
(Cladding is specified below.) Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Vessel diameter:
Design temperature:
JACKETED
10-22 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
Jacket type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL- Full jacket
Jacket material:
Skirt height:
structure; Default: *1.5 x diameter*.
Vessel leg height:
Skip if skirt required. Enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN
structure; Default: *4* FEET [*1.25* M].
Fluid volume:
Max: 100; Default: *20*; For seismic design; fluid
volume as a% of vessel volume (water assumed).
Manhole diameter:
Demister thickness:
diameter as vessel.
Weld efficiency:
10 Vessels (G10) 10-23

Description Type
Stress relief:
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
if not required.
Head type:
HEMI- Hemispherical
Head thickness Top:
Diameter option:
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
ASME design basis:
Default: *D1NF*.
Range: 5.00 - 0.02.
10-24 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
Default: *0*.
Pressure amplitude:
Number of hydrostatic Tests:
High Pressure Gas/Liquid Storage
Sphere pressure/vacuum design to 3000 PSIG [20500
KPA].
This item is used by chemical, rubber, petroleum and
paper industries for storing large volumes of
anhydrous ammonia, betana, butane and other gases
at high temperature.
A spherical tank is elevated and supported by legs
fabricated from structural steel columns or pipe.
Sphere sizes range as high as 90 FEET in diameter and
are typically constructed of high strength steel. These
tanks are commonly used for high pressure storage of
gases and volatile liquids, typically in the range of 5 -
250 PSIG. Storing volatile liquids at high pressures
raises the boiling point of the liquid and therefore
minimizes or eliminates that need for costly
refrigeration equipment to liquify the material being
stored.
Uses Type 16 foundation (Individual Column Footing).
Shell material:
SPHERE
10 Vessels (G10) 10-25
Description Type
SPHERE - continued
Liquid volume:
Enter either capacity or diameter.
Vessel diameter:
Enter either capacity or diameter.
-15 - 3,000 PSIG [-100 - 20,5000];
Default: 15 PSIG [100 KPA].
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
Manhole diameter:
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
materials.
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Diameter option:
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
ASME design basis:
Default: *D1NF*.
10-26 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
SPHERE - continued
Range: 5.00 - 0.02.
Pressure amplitude:
Spheroid to 750000 GALLONS [2840 M3]. Field
erected.
This item is commonly used for storage of gasolines
and other volatile liquids.
Spheroids vary in shape and size, but generally fall
into one of the following categories:
Hemispheriod: Spherical segments comprising the
roof and bottom of the tank are joined to a
cylindrical middle section. Hemispheriods are used
for pressures up to 5 PSI and capacities to 25,000
barrels. For capacities to 50,000 barrels the roof
and bottom are noded.
Hortonspheriod: Spherical segments are joined
together in a somewhat elliptical shape.
Hortonspheroids are capable of handling storage at
pressure from 5 to 30 PSIG.
Hortonspheroids and hemispheroids are designed to
rest on a prepared grade conforming to the shape of
the bottom (usually sand).
SPHEROID
10 Vessels (G10) 10-27
Description Type
SPHEROID - continued
Spheroidal shaped tanks are often more economical
than cylindrical pressure vessels for storage at
pressures greater than 0.5 PSI.
Uses Type 16 foundation (Individual Column
Footing).
Shell material:
Liquid volume:
Range: 60,000 - 750,000 GALLONS [230 - 2,840 M3];
Vessel diameter:
Vessel height:
Range: 0.0 - 15 PSIG [0.0 - 100 KPA];
Design temperature:
Manhole diameter:
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Default: Specify an allowance for internals as a
percent of basic vessel weight. Default: *0.0*.
materials.
Cladding material:
10-28 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
SPHEROID - continued
Cladding thickness:
Diameter option:
Default - see Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
Near-Atmospheric Liquid Storage
Field erected storage tank.
Note on Painting: The system assumes that once the
tank is assembled in the field it will be sandblasted
and primed inside and out, and a finish coat applied
on the outside only. Use Bulk Adjustments to override
these values.
The available roof types are FLAT, FLOAT, CONE, LIFT,
OPEN, INFLT, and INCN.
Use minus pressure for vacuum design. Field erected.
Floating roof tanks are frequently used in the storage
of kerosene and jet fuels. Floating roofs may be
installed inside a tank with a fixed roof or used as a
tanks only
cover. Typically constructed from polyurethane foam
blocks or nylon cloth impregnated with rubber or
plastic, floating roofs are designed to completely
contact the surface of the storage products and
thereby eliminate the vapor space between the
product level and the fixed roof.
This feature makes floating roofs desirable for the
following reasons:
1. Reduction of evaporation and breathing
losses.
2. Reduction of tank corrosion.
3. Increased safety from fire or explosion.
STORAGE
Flat roof tank

Floating roof tank
10 Vessels (G10) 10-29
Description Type
STORAGE - continued
Floating root tanks are suitable for storage of products
having vapor pressures from 2 to 15 PSIA. Products
that boil at temperatures under the normal range of
atmospheric conditions should not be stored in floating
roof tanks.
Cone roof tanks are used for storage of low pressure
products (e.g., oil, diesel and asphalt.) Cone roof
tanks are usually field fabricated out of carbon steel.
Roofs are sloped upward to the center at a slight
angle. Typically, ranging from 50,000 - 1,000,000
GALLONS capacities, they are used for storage of low
vapor pressure products (less than 2 PSIA) when
evaporation looses and breathing losses are not
considered important.
Lifter roof tanks are generally field fabricated. They
have a minimum capacity of 40,000 GALLONS [152
M3]. Lifter roof tanks can be specified with pressure
from 0 - 0.05 PSIG
[0 - 0.3 KPA] and a maximum temperature of 250
DEG F [120 DEC C]. The default temperature is *68*
DEG F [*20* DEG C].
Open top tanks are designed and constructed
according to user-generated design code standards.
Open top tanks have a maximum temperature of 250
DEG F [120 DEC C]. The default temperature is *68*
DEG F [*20* DEG C].
Shell material: For clad plate, specify the backing
plate material (cladding is defined below). See
Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *A285C*.
Liquid volume : Enter either liquid volume or
diameter and height.
Vessel diameter: Enter either capacity or diameter
and height.
Vessel height: Enter either capacity or diameter and
height.
Roof type:
Default: *FLAT*
FLAT- Flat roof tank
CONE- Cone roof tank
Cone roof tank
Lifter roof tank
Open top tank
10-30 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
STORAGE - continued
FLOAT- Floating roof tank
LIFT- Lifter
OPEN- Open roof tank
INFLT- Internal floater with flat roof
INCN- Internal floater with cone roof
Bottom type:
Default: *FLAT*
FLAT- Single flat bottom
DBL- Double bottom
0.0 - 2.5 PSIG [0.0 - 17 KPA];
Default: *0.05* PSIG [*0.35* KPA].
Design temperature:
Manhole diameter:
basic vessel weight. Default: *0.0*.
other materials.
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] if cladding
material is specified; otherwise: *0.0*.
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*.
Diameter option:
Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
Flame arrestor diameter:
Range: 1.0 - 8.0 IN DIAM [25.0 - 200.0 MM DIAM].
Conservation vent diameter:
Range: 1.0- 8.0 IN DIAM [25.0 - 200.0 MM DIAM].
10 Vessels (G10) 10-31
Description Type
Cryogenic storage tank - double wall, superinsulated.
Shell material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *SS304*.
Liquid volume:
Range: 300.0 - 60,000.0 GALLONS
[1.20 - 227.00 M3].
Vessel diameter:
If both pressure and vacuum are entered, design is for
worst case. Default: 250.0 PSIG [1,720 KPA].
If both pressure and vacuum are entered, design is for
worst case. Default: pressure.
Design temperature:
Default: -320.0 DEG F [-195 DEG C].
Min: -14.70 PSIG [-100.0 KPA];
Default: -14.70 PSIG [-100.0 KPA]
Jacket material:
Skirt height:
Skip if legs are required. Enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN
structure. Default: 1.5 x diameter.
Vessel leg height:
Skip if legs are required. Enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN
structure. Default: 1.5 x diameter.
Fluid volume:
volume (water assumed).
Manhole diameter:
Max: 48.0 INCHES [1,200.0 MM];
Default: 18.0 INCHES [450.0 MM]
CRYOGENIC
10-32 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
CRYOGENIC - continued
vessel height.
materials.
Weld efficiency:
vessels. Range: 50 - 100; Default: Area Basis.
Stress relief:
NO- No stress relief
Default stiffeners designed for vacuum only, enter
0.0 if not required.Head type:
HEMI- Hemispherical
Diameter option:
ID- Inside diameter
Flat bottom dome top. FRP to 30000 GALLONS [113
M3], HAVEG to 7000 GALLONS [26 M3].
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Storage Tank: Filament-
wound with a biosphere - a polyester resin (e.g., Atlac
282). Flat bottom and dome top under 2.5 PSIG [16.7
KPA], otherwise dished heads.
Haveg Storage Tank.
Material:
Default: *FRP*
FRP- FRP
HAVEG- Haveg
Liquid volume:
Volume or diameter + height required input Range:
1,000 - 30,000 GALLONS [3.8 - 113 M3]
PLAST TANK
10 Vessels (G10) 10-33
Description Type
PLAST TANK - continued
Vessel diameter:
Volume or diameter + height input.
Max: 12.0 FEET [93.6 M].
Vessel height:
Volume or diameter + height required input.
Range: 0.00 - 15.00 PSIG [0 - 100 KPA];
Temperature:
Wooden storage tanks to 50000 GALLONS [1890 M3].
Material: Default: *CYPRS*
CYPRS- Cypress
REDWD- Redwood
PINE- Pine
FIR- Fir
Liquid volume:
Range: 800 - 50,000 GALLONS [3.1 - 189 M3].
Vessel diameter:
Range: 0.0 - 0.05 PSIG [0.0 - 0.3 KPA].
Temperature:
WOOD TANK
Near-Atmospheric Gas Storage
Telescoping gas holder.
Low pressure gas vessel.
Shell material:
Gas volume:
Vessel diameter:
Vessel height:
GAS HOLDER
10-34 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
GAS HOLDER - continued
Range: 0.0 - 2.5 PSIG [0.0 - 17 KPA];
Design temperature:
Manhole diameter:
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Cladding material: See Chapter 28 for materials.
Cladding thickness:
Diameter option:
Default: - See Area Design Basis.
ID- Inside diameter
Atmospheric Solid/Liquid Storage
Cone bottom, flat top storage bin.
Shell material:
Liquid volume:
Vessel diameter:
Vessel height:
CONE BTM
10 Vessels (G10) 10-35
Description Type
CONE BTM - continued
Min: 0.0 PSIG [0.0 KPA];
Default: 0.05 PSIG [0.35 KPA].
Design temperature:
Default: 68 DEG F [20 DEG C] to 0.05 PSI [0.35 KPA];
else 650 DEG F [340 DEG C] ferrous, 250 DEG F [120
DEG C] other.
Vessel leg height:
Enter 0.0 if bin hung in OPEN structure;
Default: *4* FEET [*1.25* M].
Manhole diameter:
other materials.
diameter as vessel.
Stress relief:
Default: See Area Design Basis
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Default *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] if cladding material
is specified; otherwise: *0.0*.
Head thickness Top:
10-36 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
CONE BTM - continued
Diameter option:
ID- Inside diameter
ASME design basis:
Default: *D1NF*.
Start Stop cycles x 1000:
Range: 5.00 - 0.02.
Default: *0*.
Pressure amplitude:
design temperature in equipment life.
Default: *0*.
Live bottom storage bin.
Shell material:
Solid volume:
LIVE BTM
10 Vessels (G10) 10-37
Description Type
LIVE BTM - continued
Vessel diameter:
MAX: 15 FEET [4.69 M]
Vessel height:
Design temperature:
Vessel leg height:
Enter 0.0 if bin hung in OPEN structure;
Manhole diameter:
other materials.
diameter as vessel.
Stress relief:
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Default *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] if cladding material
is specified; otherwise: *0.0*.
Diameter option:
ID- Inside diameter
10-38 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
Tile Chests
Tile chests provide tile lined tanks for storage of
liquids, suspensions or slurries. Although tile chests
are used in the chemical industry, they
are predominantly used in pulp and paper mills for
storing fiber suspensions at various stages of
processing. Chests can be rectangular or cylindrical
and may be concrete or metallic. Various designs are
available depending on the nature of the fluid high
density, low density.
Tile Chests, rectangular concrete include the following
options:
Single tile chest
Group of tile chests
One chest in a group of chests.
Grouping option: PARTGRP is used for one chest in
assemblage, WHLGRP to define an entire assemblage.
Default: *PARTGRP*.
SINGLE- Tile chest is a single stand-alone item
PARTGRP- One chest of a multi-group assemblage
WHLGRP- Entire multi-group assemblage
Inside length:
Enter either chest dimensions or capacity.
Vessel height:
Inside width:
Chest volume:
Enter either chest dimensions (length height, width) or
capacity; Min: 30000 GALLONS (114M3);
Max: 1300000 GALLONS (4921 M3). If Grouping
Option is WHLGRP, enter capacity of entire group;
otherwise enter capacity of this chest.
Tile or lining type:
Default: *25RSB*
25RSB- 2.5 INCHES [62 MM] red shale brick
CHEST REC
10 Vessels (G10) 10-39
Description Type
CHEST REC - continued
Tile or lining:
Percent of chest surface to be lined,
100% = one side; 200% = inside + outside. Max:
200; Default: 100.
Configuration:
Default: *OPEN*
OPEN- Open top chest
CLOSED- Chest has a roof
Installation option:
Default: *GRADE*
GRADE- Tile chest is constructed on grade
STRUCT- Tile chest is within a structure
Capacity of group:
For PARTGRP chest only, capacity of entire group;
Default: 4x chest capacity.
Number of chests in group:
For WHLGRP chest only, enter number of chests in
entire assemblage. Default: *4*.
Number of partitions lengthwise:
Number of full length partitions parallel to length
dimension (may be fraction).
Number of partitions widthwise:
Number of width wide partitions parallel to width
dimension (may be fraction).
Soil type:
SOFT CLAY- Bearing: 2000 PSF [100 KN/M2]
FIRM CLAY- Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
WET SAND- Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
SAND+CLAY- Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
DRY SAND- Bearing: 600 PSF [300 KN/M2]
SAND- Bearing: 8000 PSF [400 KN/M2]
GRAVEL- Bearing: 12000 PSF [600 KN/M2]
SOFT ROCK- Bearing: 16000 PSF [800 KN/M2]
HARDPAN- Bearing: 20000 PSF [1000 KN/M2]
MED-ROCK- Bearing: 30000 PSF [1400 KN/M2]
HARD ROCK.- Bearing: 80000 PSF [3800 KN/M2]
Product density:
Default: *62.4* PCF.
Exclude excavation:
Exclude portion of calculated quantity if not required
or common with other items. Max: 100; Default:
*0.0*.
10-40 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
CHEST REC - continued
Footings exclusion:
Exclude portion of calculated quantity if not required or
common with other items. Max: 100; Default: *0.0*.
Floor exclusion:
Wall length exclusion:
Wall width exclusion:
Tile Chests, Cylindrical
Low density tile chest with a capacity range of 3000 to
300000 GALLONS [12 to 1135 M3]. Chest is available
in concrete or metallic materials of construction. If the
user enters no dimensions (diameter, height, width,
length), the capacity range is 3000 to 300000
GALLONS [12 to 1135 M3].
High density tile chest with a capacity range of 30000
to 1300000 GALLONS [114 to 4921 M3]. Chest is
available in concrete or metallic materials of
construction.
Shape symbol:
Default: *CYLLD*
CYLLD- Cylindrical chest, low density stock
CYLHD- Cylindrical chest, high density stock
Inside diameter:
Chest dimensions or capacity required.
Vessel height:
Chest dimensions or capacity required.
Chest volume:
Enter either dimensions (diameter, height) or
capacity; Min: 3000 GALLONS [12 M3]; Max: 300000
GALLONS [1135 M3]
CHEST CYL
10 Vessels (G10) 10-41

Description Type
CHEST CYL - continued
Default: *25RSB*
25RBS- 2.5 INCH [62 MM] red shale brick
45RSB- 4.5 INCH [112 MM] red shale brick
Tile or lining:
Percent of chest to be lined. 100% = one side; 200%
= inside + outside. Max: 200; Default: *100*.
Configuration:
Default: *OPEN*
OPEN- Open top chest
CLOSED- Chest has a roof
Installation option:
Default: *GRADE*
GRADE- Tile chest is constructed on grade
STRUCT- Tile chest is within a structure
Soil type:
SOFT CLAY- Bearing: 2000 PSF [100 KN/M2]
FIRM CLAY- Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
WET SAND- Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
SAND+CLAY- Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
DRY SAND- Bearing: 600 PSF [300 KN/M2]
SAND- Bearing: 8000 PSF [400 KN/M2]
GRAVEL- Bearing: 12000 PSF [600 KN/M2]
SOFT ROCK- Bearing: 16000 PSF [800 KN/M2]
HARDPAN- Bearing: 20000 PSF [1000 KN/M2]
MED-ROCK- Bearing: 30000 PSF [1400 KN/M2]
HARD ROCK.- Bearing: 80000 PSF [3800 KN/M2]
Product density:
Default: *62.4* PCF [1,000 KG/M3].
Exclude excavation:
or common with other items. Max: 100;
Default: *0.0*.
Footings exclusion:
or common with other items. Max: 100;
Default: *0.0*.
Floor exclusion:
or common with other items. Max: 100; Default:
*0.0*.
10-42 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
Shell material:
Liquid volume:
Vessel diameter:
Vessel height:
Default: *25RSB*
Tile or lining:
Percent of chest surface to be lined. 100% = one side;
200% = inside + outside. Max: 200;
Default: *100*.
Roof type:
Default: *FLAT*
FLAT- Flat roof tank
CONE- Cone roof tank
FLOAT- Floating roof tank
LIFT- Lifter
OPEN- Open top tank
INFLT- Internal floater with flat roof
INCN- Internal floater with cone roof
Range: 0 - 2.5 PSIG [0 - 17.0 KPA];
Ignore this field for open top tanks.
Design temperature:
Manhole diameter:
Default: *18* INCHES [450.0 MM].
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
CHEST MTL
10 Vessels (G10) 10-43
Description Type
other materials.
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] for cladding
material, otherwise *0.0*.
Specific gravity:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*.
Diameter option:
Bottom type:
Default: *FLAT*
FLAT- Single flat bottom
DBL- Double bottom
CHEST MTL
Sanitary vertical cylindrical vessel
Since this is a sanitary item, the tank is built to
sanitary standards, including polished stainless steel.
This is not a pressure vessel.
Shell Material:
SS304,*SS316*
Application:
The application symbol defines vessel function and
related pipe/instrum. model.
*SURGE*- Surge tank
MIX- Mixing tank
Liquid Volume:
MAX: 5,000 GALLONS [18.9 M3]
Vessel Diameter:
MAX: 9.25 FEET [2.8 M]
Vessel Height:
MAX: 10 FEET [3 M]
MIN: 68 DEG F [20 DEG C]
Cover type:
*OPEN*- Open top
FLAT- Loose flat top
FIXED- Fixed flat top with bridge
DISH- Dished top with manway and agitator nozzle
SAN TANK
10-44 10 Vessels (G10)
Description Type
SAN TANK - continued
Bottom type:
WELL- Well bottom
SLOPE- Sloped bottom
TORI- Torispherical bottom
*CON15*- 15 degree cone bottom
CON30- 30 degree cone bottom
Jacket type:
*NONE*- No jacket
DMPLE- 90 PSIG [620 KPA] dimple jacket
LNG Tank
A Full Containment Double Walled Tank implies that
both the inner steel tank and the outer prestressed
concrete shell with reinforced concrete spherical dome
are independently capable of resisting the Design Load
Conditions and allow for their special characteristics,
since failure of either can lead to leakage of LNG
gaseous fumes which are both toxic and highly
flammable.
DESIGN LOADS
Wind force adjustment:
Additional adjustment for wind force specified in
project civil design specs. roject civil design specs.
Min: 0
Max: 2
Default: 1
Seismic force adjustment:
project civil design specs. roject civil design specs.
Min: 0
Max: 2
Default: 1
Min: >0
Default: 4.21 PSIG
Design blast pressure:
Min: 0
Default: 2.18 PSIG
Roof live load:
Min: 0
Default: 50 PSF
-continued-
10 Vessels (G10) 10-45
LNG Tank -continued
INNER STEEL TANK
LNG tank volume:
Minimum Volume = 1,320,500 Gallons [5,000 M^3]
Maximum Volume = 52,835,000 Gallons [200,000
M^3]
Min: >0 Gallons
Tank diameter:
Enter either volume or diameter and height
Min: >0 FEET
Tank height:
Min: >0 FEET
Shell Material:
9% Ni steel is typically used in cryogenic storage
applications
Default: A 553
Min: >0 INCHES
Max: 2 INCHES
Min: 0.2
Max: 5
Default: .0476
Design temperature:
Default: -274 F
Default: Design operating temperature
OUTER CONCRETE TANK
Tank diameter (ID):
Min: >0 FEET
Tank height):
Min: >0 FEET
Wall thickness:
Prestressed concrete wall thickness, inches [mm]
Min: 6 INCHES
Concrete type:
B - Standard concrete
C - Higher grade concrete
D - Chemical resistant concrete
Default - as specified in unit area civil specs or
project civil specs.
-continued-
Description Type
10-46 10 Vessels (G10)
LNG Tank - continued
SUBMERGED PUMPS
Number of pumps:
Min: >0
Default: 1.
Casing material:
I-1: Case: CI; impeller/wear parts: CI
I-2: Case: CI; impeller/wear parts: Bronze
S-1: Case: CS; impeller/wear parts: CI
S-3: Case: CS; impeller/wear parts: A436
S-4: Case: CS; impeller: CS; wear parts: CI
S-5: Case: CS; impeller.: CS; wear parts: 12%Cr
S-6: Case: CS; impeller/wear parts: 12% Cr
S-8: Case: CS; impeller/wear parts: SS316
S-9: Case: Monel-lined CS; impeller/wear:Monel
C-6: All parts: 12% Cr
A-7: All parts: SS304
A-8: All parts: SS316
D-1: All parts: Duplex
CAST MATLS...: See a list of casting materials.
Default: A-7
Liquid flow rate:
Min: >0 GPM
Default: 1,300 GPM
Fluid head:
Min: >0 FEET
Maximum head: 1000 FT [ 300 M] at 30xHZ;
3800 FT [1150 M] at 60xHZ.
Default: 800 FEET
Speed:
Min: 1800 RPM
Max: 3600 RPM
Additional Notes:
1. The civil and steel volumetric bulks are included in
the equipment cost.
2. A pile foundation will automatically be designed if
required. The soil type, pile type, and pile
parameters are specified in the unit area civil specs or
project civil specs.
3. The inner steel tank freeboard is calculated based
on the inner tank height, diameter, and seismic
horizontal acceleration. The seismic horizontal
acceleration is specified in the project civil specs.
-continued-
Description Type
10 Vessels (G10) 10-47
LNG Tank continued
4. The inner steel tank is checked for overturning
stability.
5. The foundation concrete type is based on the unit
area civil specs or project civil specs.
6. The following steel plates are assumed as thick:
Primary bottom, secondary bottom, secondary corner
protection, and vapor barrier.
7. The bottom foam insulation is assumed as 3-6
thick.
8. The tank lid foam insulation is assumed as 2-0
thick.
9. If an external civil data file is specified, adjustments
may be made to the labor hours as follows:
Concrete dome roof = Foundation type 4 (Mass
pour)
Prestressed concrete roof ring beam =
Foundation type 12 (Columns and beams)
Prestressed concrete walls = Foundation type 13
(Walls)
Inner tank concrete ring foundation = Foundation
type 9 (Circular ring foundation for large tanks)
Outer tank foundation = Foundation type 4 (Mass
pour)
Description Type
10-48 10 Vessels (G10)
11 Crushers, Mills and Stock Treatment (G6) 11-1
Crushers (CR)
Flakers (FL)
Mills (M)
11 Crushers, Mills and Stock
Treatment (G6)
11-2 11 Crushers, Mills and Stock Treatment (G6)
Crushers (CR)
Includes motor and drive unit.
Description Type
Cone crusher for secondary and fine crushing for hard
and medium hard materials such as limestone, stone
and rock.
The cone crusher is a type of gyratory crusher. A
conical head is gyrated by means of an eccentric
driven through gears and a countershaft. The gyratory
motion causes the conical head to approach and
recede from the walls of the crushing chamber. The
material receives a series of rapid blows as it passes
through the crushing cavity.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Mantle diameter:
Range: 20 - 84 INCHES [510 - 2,130 MM].
Crusher type:
Default: *STAND*
STAND- Standard head
SHORT- Short head
CONE
Crushers (CR) - continued
Description Type
Primary and secondary crushing of hard and medium
hard materials such as limestone, stone and rock.
A conical head is gyrated by means of an eccentric
driven through gears and a countershaft. The gyratory
motion causes the conical head to approach and
recede from the walls of the crushing chamber. The
material receives a series of rapid blows as it passes
through the crushing cavity.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Mantle diameter:
Range: 20 - 120 INCHES [510 - 3,045 MM].
Crusher type:
Default: *PRIME*
PRIME- Primary crushing
SECOND- Secondary crushing
GYRATORY
Overhead eccentric jaw crusher for primary and
secondary crushing of hard, tough and abrasive
materials, such as quartz, rock, glass and ferroalloys.
Includes hydraulic toggle, motor and motor drive
sheave and V belts.
A moving jaw opens and closes against a vertical or
slightly inclined fixed jaw by means of a toggle to
crush the feed material. In single-toggle machines the
moving jaw has an almost circular motion at the
upper-end of the jaw plate and an elliptical movement
at the lower-end. This motion causes the jaw plates to
wear faster than double-toggle machines but also
assists the flow of material through the crushing
chamber. The trend is towards single-toggle machines
because the increased wear is usually outweighed by
the lower initial cost of the single-toggle machine.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 25 - 1,620 TPH [23 - 1,460 TON/H].
Product size:
Range: 1 - 16 INCHES [25 - 400].
ECCENTRIC
Description Type
Swing jaw crusher for primary and secondary
crushing of hard and/or abrasive materials such
as quartz rock, glass and ferroalloys.
A moving jaw is opened and closed by means of
a pair of toggles against a vertical or slightly
inclined fixed jaw crushing the feed material.
(See ECCENTRIC crusher for additional
information.)
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 70 - 610 TPH [65 - 550 TON/H].
Product size:
Range: 2 - 8 INCHES [50 - 200 MM].
JAW
Rotary crusher for coarse, soft materials, such
as gypsum, phosphate rock, pitch, mica,
cocoanut shells.
A toothed cone rotates inside a toothed shell.
The clearance between the teeth on the cone
and the teeth on the shell determines the
product size.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Driver power:
Range: 2 - 25 HP [1.5 - 18.5 KW].
ROTARY
Single roll crushers are manufactured in light,
medium and heavy duty constructions for the
primary crushing of friable materials such as
coal; medium hard materials such as coal,
phosphate rock and shale; and hard materials
such as cement rock, iron ore and limestone.
Single roll crusher for light duty primary and
secondary crushing for coal and other friable
materials.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 140 - 1,470 TPH
[128 - 1,330 TON/H].
Product size:
Range: 2 - 6 INCHES [50 - 150 MM].
S ROLL LT
Description Type
S ROLL LT - continued
Single roll crusher for medium duty primary and/or
materials.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 105 - 840 TPH [95 - 760 TON/H].
Product size:
Range: 2 - 8 INCHES [50 - 200 MM].
Single roll crusher for heavy duty primary and/or
materials.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 175 - 1,000 TPH [160 - 900 TON/H].
Product size:
Range: 2 - 8 INCHES [50 - 200 MM].
S ROLL MED
S ROLL HVY
Sawtooth crusher. Size reduction in tearing via toothed
rollers for lumpy and friable materials, such as
plastics, shale, charcoal, shells and bark.
The particles are crushed between two rollers with
sawtooth-like projections.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Driver power:
Range: 5 - 40 HP [4 - 30 KW].
SAWTOOTH
Reversible hammermill for secondary reduction of hard
and medium hard minerals, stone, rock, limestone,
low-silica ores/chemicals.
Tertiary reduction of friables materials in closed circuit
crushing.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 20 - 450 TPH [18 - 408 TON/H].
REV-HAMR
Description Type
Non-reversible hammermill for secondary crushing of
bituminous and sub-bituminous coals, lignite, gypsum
and some medium-hard minerals.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 15 - 40 TPH [13 - 36 TON/H].
HAMMER
MED
Non-reversible hammermill for hard materials (cement
rock, limestone).
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 30 - 180 TPH [27 - 160 TON/H].
SWING HAMR
Rotary breaker for simultaneous sizing and cleaning of
run-of-mine coal.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 450 - 1,500 TPH [400 - 1360 TON/H].
BRADFORD
Single rotor impact breaker for primary and secondary
breaking of non-abrasive quarry rock and similar
materials.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 250 - 1,000 TPH [225 - 900 TON/H].
S IMPACT
Fine and medium crushing of soft non-abrasive
materials.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 300 - 8,500 LP/H [140 - 3,855 KW].
Driver power:
Range: 3 - 75 HP [2.22 - 55].
PULVERIZER
Flakers (FL)
Includes motor and drive.
Mills (M)
Includes mill, motor, bearings, gears, lube system and vendor-supplied
instruments.
Description Type
Ring granulator for primary and secondary crushing of
bituminous and sub-bituminous coals, lignite, gypsum
and some medium hard minerals.
Heavy cast steel rings, toothed and/or plain, at the
end of rotating arms crush solid material by a
combination of impact breaking and rolling
compression.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 50 - 2,000 TPH [45 - 1,800 TON/H].
ROLL RING
Description Type
Drum flaker to 200 SF [18 M2] of surface.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Surface area:
Range: 10 - 250 SF [1 - 23 M2].
DRUM
Description Type
Attrition mill to 300 HP [224 KW].
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Driver power:
Range: 5 - 300 HP [4 - 224 KW].
Driver speed:
Max: 3,600 RPM
ATTRITION
Mills (M) - continued.
Description Type
Wet or dry autogenous mills.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Application:
Default: *WET*
WET- Wet grinding
DRY- Dry grinding
AUTOGENOUS
Ball mill includes initial ball charge.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Application:
Default: *WET*
WET- Wet grinding
DRY- Dry grinding
BALL MILL
Rod mill includes initial rod charge.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Application:
Default: *WET*
WET- Wet grinding
DRY- Dry grinding
ROD MILL
Micro-pulverizer to 30 HP [22 KW].
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Driver power:
Range: 7.5 - 30 HP [5.5 - 22 KW].
Driver speed:
Max: 3,600 RPM
MIKRO PULV
Roller mill to 400 HP [300 KW].
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Application:
Default: *WET*
WET- Wet grinding
DRY- Dry grinding
ROLLER
Rod charger for rod mill. ROD CHARGR
Stock Treatments (ST)
Description Type
Refiners are used for the refining of fibers either from
Kraft pulping or secondary fiber operations.
The refiner is a double-disk type with rotor and stator
in a quick opening hinged housing. The shaft is
supported on anti-friction grease-lubricated bearings,
packing box, electro-mechanical plate positioning. Also
included is the drive consisting of the gear box, electric
motor, coupling and guard.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316- SS316
SS304- SS304
Stock flow rate:
Enter stock flow rate (bone dry) or plate diameter.
Range: 5 - 2000 TPD [.20 - 75 TON/H].
Plate diameter:
Enter stock flow rate (bone dry) or plate diameter.
Range: 12 - 60 INCHES [305 - 1,520 MM].
CSF - ml of water:
CSF = Canadian Standard Freeness.
Default: *120*.
REFINER
Deflakers reduce and disperse flakes into finer size,
and are mainly used in pulp mill operations.
The unit can be designed for a wide range of capacities
and solids concentration. Due to the intermeshing
stator and rotor design, the unit can also be used in
high shear mixing operations. Two designs are
available:
Plate type includes stator and rotor plate tackles
housed in a body with quick hinged door opening
for easy maintenance, electric motor driver,
coupling, packing seal, external rotor/stator
adjustment mechanism, built in junk trap.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316- SS316
SS304- SS304
Hydraulic capacity:
Enter hydraulic capacity or rotor diameter.
Range: 5.0 - 2000 GPM [0.3 - 125.0 LS].
DEFLAKE DK
Stock Treatments (ST) - continued
Description Type
DEFLAKE DK - continued
Rotor diameter:
Enter hydraulic capacity or rotor diameter.
Range: 4 - 30 INCHES [100 - 750 MM].
Deflaker speed:
Default: *1,800* RPM.
Range: 1 - 10; Default: *4*.
Concentric conical type includes shell and plug
tackles housed in body, electric motor driver,
external rotor/stator adjustment mechanism, built
in junk trap and lube oil system.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316- SS316
SS304- SS304
Hydraulic capacity:
Range: 5 - 2,000 GPM [0.3 - 125.0 L/S].
Deflaker speed:
Default: *1,800* RPM.
Range: 1 - 10; Default: *4*.

DEFLAKE CN
12 Drying Systems (G6) 12-1
Crystallizers (CRY)
Evaporators (E)
Air Dryers (AD)
Dryers (D)
Drum Dryers (DD)
Rotary Dryers (RD)
12 Drying Systems (G6)
12-2 12 Drying Systems (G6)
Crystallizers (CRY)
Description Type
Batch vacuum crystallizer unit for small scale
production of crystals. Includes cone bottom agitated
tank, steam jet ejectors and direct contact condenser
to 8200 GALLONS [25.8 M3].
Energy requirements are lower for a batch vacuum
unit than for a continuous vacuum unit, however, for
the same capacity, batch units must be larger than
continuous units and are therefore more expensive.
A warm saturated solution is fed to a cone bottom
tank. The pressure in the tank is then reduced using
stream-jets. The solution flashes and the flashed
solvent is condensed in a direct contact condenser.
The non-condensables which pass through the direct
contact condenser are vented to the atmosphere by
the steam-jet equipment. While the solution is
flashing, agitators in the crystallizer keep the forming
crystals in the suspension and keep the contents of the
tank at a uniform concentration. When the
supersaturation of the flashed solution has been
removed (by the formation of the crystals), the tank is
emptied.
Material:
*CS*.
CS- Carbon steel
RBLCS- Rubber-lined CS
SS304- SS304
Liquid volume:
Range:
850 - 8,200 GALLONS [2.7 - 25.8 M3].
BATCH VAC
Mechanical scraped-surface crystallizer, jacketed,
spiral ribbon scraper, trough, stacked in lengths of 40
FEET [12 M]. Includes motor and drive.
For the relatively small-scale production of crystals
from a supersaturated solution. The scraped-surface is
used where a slight change in the temperature of a
solution means a large change in its solubility. When
the required rate of heat removal is greater then
200,000 BTU/HR, the scraped surface crystallizer is
usually not economical.
The scraped-surface crystallizer consists of a 24-inch
wide trough with a semi-circular bottom, a cooling
jacket on the outside and a spiral ribbon scraper/mixer
the length of the trough.
MECHANICAL
Crystallizers (CRY) - continued
Description Type
MECHANICAL - continued
Crystals growing on the walls off the trough are
scraped off and suspended in the mother liquor. These
units are manufactured in lengths of 10 to 40 FEET. If
lengths greater than 40 are required, the units are
stacked one on top of another and the solution
cascades from one level to the next.
Material:
*CS*, CI
CS- Carbon steel
CI- Cast iron
Length:
Range: 20 - 1,000 FEET [6.1 - 300 M]
Material:
SS (Stainless steel)
Length:
Range: 20 - 550 FEET [6.1 - 165 M]
Oslo growth type crystallizer to 6,900 TPD [260
TONH]. Large scale crystal production. Includes
interconnecting piping, recirculating pump and
accessories.
This piece of equipment, also called a growth
crystallizer or classified-suspension crystallizer,
operates in the following manner. The feed stream
plus a recycle stream of saturated solution are
pumped through a heat exchanger and heated. The
solution enters a vaporization chamber and a portion
of the solvent is flashed, thus cooling the solution and
raising the concentration of the solute. This
supersaturates the solution. The supersaturated
solution is then fed to the bottom of a suspension or
crystallizing chamber where it contacts already formed
crystals. Through the formation of new crystals and
the growth of existing crystals, the supersaturation of
the solution is removed. Additionally, as the solution
moves upward through the suspension chamber, the
small crystals are carried upward while the large
crystals settle to the bottom, thus classifying the
crystals by size. The large crystals are removed from
the bottom of the suspension chamber while the
solution, no longer saturated, is mixed with fresh feed,
fed to the heat exchanger, and the events described
above are repeated.
Material:
Default: *CS* (Carbon steel)
Crystallizer rate:
Max: 6,900 TPD [260 TON/H]
OSLO
Evaporators (E)
Description Type
Agitated falling film evaporator to 150 SF [13 M2]
includes motor and drive.
Material:
Default: *SS304*
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
Heat transfer area:
Range: 4 - 150 SF [0.4 - 13 M2]
FALL FILM
Forced circulation evaporator to 10000 SF [925 M2]
includes interconnecting piping, circulating pumps and
drivers.
Material:
Heat transfer area:
Range: 100 - 10,000 SF [10 -925 M2]
Tube material:
CS tubes with CS shell, Cu. or Ni tubes with CI shell.
CS- Carbon steel
CU- Copper
NI- Nickel
Material:
CI (Cast iron)
Heat transfer area:
Range: 155 - 8,000 SF [14 - 740 M2]
Tube material:
CS tubes with CS shell, Cu or Ni tubes with CI shell.
CS- Carbon steel
CU- Copper
NI- Nickel
FORCED CIR
Long tube rising film evaporator to 35 SF [3.2 M2]
includes interconnecting piping.
Material:
SS steel tubes with SS shell.
Heat transfer Area:
Range: 18 - 35 SF [1.7 - 3.2 M2]
LONG TUBE
Evaporators (E) - continued
Description Type
Long tube vertical evaporator to 50000 SF [4640 M2]
variety of tube and shell materials.
Karbate tubes with rubber-lined CS shell, CU tubes
with other shell materials.
Material:
Surface area:
Range: 400 - 50,000 SF [38 - 4,640 M2]
Material:
CI (Cast iron)
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 25,000 SF [10 - 2,320 M2]
Material:
CU
Surface area:
Range: 200 - 3,000 [19 - 275 M2]
Material:
RBLCS
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 2,700 SF [10 - 250 M2]
LONG VERT

Standard vertical tube evaporator to 7000 SF
[650 M2]
CS tubes with CS shell, Cu tubes with CI shell, Pb shell
with Pb-lined CS shell.
Material:
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 6,000 SF [10 - 555 M2]
Material: CI (Cast iron)
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 6,000 SF [10 - 555 M2]
Material: PBLCS (Lead-lined CS)
Surface area:
Range: 200 - 7,000 SF [19 - 650 M2]
STAND VERT
Evaporators (E) - continued
Description Type
Standard horizontal tube evaporator to 10000 SF [920
M2].
CS tubes with CS shell, Cu tubes with CI shell.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 10,000 SF [10 - 920 M2]
Material:
CI (Cast iron)
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 6000 SF [10 - 555 M2]
STAND HOR
Description Type
Agitated thin film evaporator with explosion-proof
motor and drive.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
Heat transfer area:
Range: 0.95 - 27 SF [0.1 - 2.5 M2]
THIN
FILM
Packaged system including condenser and stand.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
Heat transfer area:
Range: 0.2 - 12 SF [0.02 - 1.1 M2]
WFE SYSTEM
Air Dryers (AD)
Description Type
Dual tower, desiccant type, for drying of air to -40
DEG F [-40 DEG C] dew point; includes desiccant.
Material:
Gas flow rate:
Max: 50,000 CFM [84,900 M3/H]
AIR DRYER
Dryers (D)
Includes solid materials.
Description Type
Atmospheric tray batch dryer.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Tray area:
Range: 30 - 200 SF [2.8 - 18.5 M2]
Material:
SS
Tray area:
Range: 30 - 250 SF [2.8 - 23 M2]
ATMOS TRAY
Vacuum tray batch dryer.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Tray area:
Range: 40 - 200 SF [3.8 - 18.5 M2]
VAC TRAY
Agitated pan batch dryer for sensitive materials.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
304CD- CS clad with 304 SS
316CD- CS clad with 316 SS
Surface area:
Range: 12 - 180 SF [1.1 - 16.7 M2]
Diameter:
Range: 3 - 10 FEET [0.9 - 3.0 M]
Pan depth:
Range: 18 - 36 INCHES [450 - 900 MM]
Driver power:
Range: 3 - 40 HP [2.22 - 30 KW]
PAN

Dryers (D) - continued
Description Type
Continuous spray drying system. Includes supports,
heater, filter, atomizer, fan, driver, instrumentation,
interconnecting piping, cyclone and accessories to
9000 LB/H [4080 KG/H] evaporative capacity (water).
Material:
Default: *CS*
Evaporation rate:
Range: 700 - 9,000 LB/H [320 - 4,080 KG/H]
SPRAY
Drum Dryers (DD)
Description Type
Single atmospheric drum dryer for drying of solids on
web material.
on steam-heated rotating drum.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Tray area:
Range: 10 - 200 SF [1 - 18 M2]
SINGLE ATM
Double atmospheric drum dryer for drying of solids on
web material on pair of steam heated drums.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Tray area:
Range: 25 - 400 SF [2.4 - 35 M2]
DOUBLE ATM
Single vacuum rotary drum dryer for drying of
sensitive solids under vacuum.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Tray area:
Range: 10 - 200 SF [1 - 18 M2]
SINGLE VAC
Rotary drum cooker-cooler.
Use to blanch foods like pasta or corn, cook foods like
meats or poultry, or cool foods like bagged soup.
Material:
SS304, *SS316*
Dryer drum diameter:
S COOKCOOL
Drum Dryers (DD) - continued
Description Type
S COOKCOOL - continued
Only 60 INCH (1525 MM) and 72 INCH (1825
MM) diameters are available.
Food flow rate: MAX: 303,000 LB/HR (137,437
KG/HR) at default product density 50 LB/CF (800
KG/M3). The maximum capacity any model can
handle depends upon the product density, and is
thus volumetric in nature; densities higher than
the default can realize capacities above 303,000
lb/hr (137,437 KG/HR), while densities lower
than the default realize maximum capacities
below 303,000 lb/hr (137,437 KG/HR).
Cooler length: MIN: 4 FEET [1.2M] for 60 INCH
[1,525 MM] and 8 FEET [2.4 M] for 72 INCH
[1,825 MM] drum dia., MAX: 16 FEET [4.8 M]
Product density: MIN: 50 PCF, MAX: 303,000 LB/
HR [137,437 KG/HR] at product density 50 LB/CF
(800 KG/M3).
Cook time: If drum diameter is specified, default
cooking time is 1 MINUTE, which is the minimum
allowable cooking time, and therefore the
cooking time that results in the maximum
allowable capacity. If capacity is specified, the
default cooking time is computed based on the
capacity, cooker length, and drum diameter.
MIN: 1 MINUTE, MAX: 12 MINUTES.
Driver power:
Default: based on drum diameter, food capacity
and cooker length.
Driver type:
*WVRDC*- Washdown, VFD rated, direct drive,
CS
WVCDC- Washdown, VFD controlled, direct drive,
CS
Rotary Dryers (RD)
Description Type
Direct contact of hot gas with moist solids with
maximum surface area of 2000 SF [185 M2].
Material:
Default: *CS*
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 2,000 SF [10 - 185 M2]
DIRECT
Indirect contact of hot gases with moist solids with
maximum surface area of 2000 SF[185 M2].
Material:
Default: *CS*
Surface area:
100 - 2,000 SF [10 - 185 M2]
INDIRECT
Jacketed rotary vacuum dryer with explosion-proof
motor.
Maximum capacity of 500 CF [14.1 M3].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS316- SS316
Flow rate:
8 - 500 CF [0.25 - 14.1 M3]
JAC VACUUM
Conical rotary vacuum dryer with maximum capacity
of 400 CF.
[11.3 M3].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Flow rate:
3 - 400 CF [0.1 - 11.3 M3]
VACUUM
Description Type
Atmospheric tray dryer with painted steel chamber.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
Tray surface area:
Range: 80 - 300 SF [7.5 - 27.5 M2]
ATM SYSTEM
Batch tray dryer with vacuum and no trays.
Material:
Default: *CI*
Tray surface area:
Range: 20 - 75 SF [1.9 - 6.9 M2]
Material:
SS304
Tray surface area:
Range: 20 - 80 SF [1.9 - 7.0 M2]
VACUUM
Turbo tray drying system with auxiliaries except
heating system.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Tray surface area:
Range: 60 - 20,000 SF [6 - 1,850 M2]
Heating medium:
Default: *blank*
H-AIR- Hot air
STEAM- Steam
blank- Other heating medium
TURBO
Batch tray dryer with vacuum pump and condenser.
Material:
Default: *CI*
Tray Surface Area:
Range: 13 - 70 SF [1.3 - 6.5 M2]
VAC SYSTEM
13 Solids Conveying (G10) 13-1
Conveyors (CO)
Definitions and Samples of Conveyor Section Types
Cranes (CE)
Feeders (FE)
Hoists (HO)
Scales (S)
13 Solids Conveying (G10)
13-2 13 Solids Conveying (G10)
Conveyors (CO)
Description Type
Open belt conveyor for transporting solid materials
over long distances. Because the belt material is
reinforced rubber, materials at temperatures above
150 DEG F are normally not handled.
Includes grade-level support steel, belt tensioning
device, motors and drives.
An endless moving belt is used to transport solids
either horizontally or on an incline. The belt may be
flat, but is typically troughed in order to increase the
carrying capacity of the belt.
Belt Width:
Range: 18 - 120 INCHES [450 - 3,000 MM]
Product Density:
MAX: 20
0 PCF [3,200 KG/M3];
Driver Power per Section:
Driver power per section if conveyor has multiple
sections.
OPEN BELT
Conveyors (CO) - continued
Description Type
OPEN BELT - continued
Conveyer Speed:
MIN: 20 FPM [370 M/H]
Vertical lift (+) or drop (-): Difference in elevation
between feed and discharge: lift (positive), drop
(negative). Default: *0.0* FEET [*0.0* M]
Height Grade Section:
Grade section has this uniform, nominal height for
entire length. Default: *6* FEET [*2* M].
Length Grade Section:
Default length = conveyor length, if length of other
two section type = 0.0.
Height Slope Section:
Slope section varies from grade section height to this
designated height.
Length Slope Section:
two section types = 0.0.
Height Above Grade Section:
Above grade section varies from slope section height
to this designated height.
Length Above Grade Section:
Cantilever Length:
Cantilever length may be specified only for the end of
an elevated section. Default: *0.0* FEET [*0.0* M]
Tower Bent Spacing:
Tower (bent) spacing applies to elevated sections only.
Gallery Enclosure:
Default: *NO GALLERY*
GALLERY- Gallery enclosure for conveyor and walks
NO GALLERY- No gallery enclosure
Number of Motors:
Default: 1 per MILE [1 per 1.6 KM]
Number of Walkways:
Default: 1 if no gallery, 2 if conveyor has gallery
enclosure.
Walkway Width:
Default: 36 INCHES [910 MM] if no gallery, 54 INCHES
[1370 MM] if gallery enclosure.
Description Type
Same as open belt conveyor but enclosed with
corrugated sheet
metal canopy enclosing the belt to protect the belt and
the materials from the elements. Canopy is also used
to control dust when transporting material with fines.
Belt Width:
Range: 18 - 120 INCHES [450 - 3,000 MM]
Product Density:
MAX: 200 PCF [3,200 KG/M3];
Driver Power per Section:
Driver power per section if conveyor has multiple
sections.
Speed:
MIN: 20 FPM [370 M/H]
Vert Lift (+) or drop (-): Difference in elevation
(negative). Default: 0.0 FEET [0.0 M].
Height Grade Section:
Grade section has this uniform, nominal height for
entire length. Default: *6* FEET [*2* M]
Length Grade Section:
Height Slope Section:
Slope section varies from grade section height to this
designated height.
Length Slope Section:
Height Above Grade Section:
Above grade section varies from slope section height
to this designated height.
Length Above Grade Section:
Cantilever Length:
Cantilever length may be specified only for the end of
an elevated section. Default: *0.0* FEET [*0.0* M]
Tower Bent Spacing:
Tower (bent) spacing applies to elevated sections only.
CLOSED
BLT

Description Type
CLOSED BLT - continued
Gallery Enclosure:
Default: *NO GALLERY*
GALLERY- Gallery enclosure for conveyor and walks
NO GALLERY- No gallery enclosure
Number of Motors:
Default: 1 per MILE [1 per 1.6 KM]
Number of Walkways:
Default: 1 if no gallery, 2 if conveyor has gallery
enclosure.
Walkway Width:
Default: 36 INCHES [910 MM] if no gallery, 54 INCHES
[1370 MM] if gallery enclosure.
Definitions and Samples of Conveyor
Section Types
Section 1: A conveyor section at uniform nominal height (H
1
) above grade. The
section on post-type legs and has a total length L
1
.
Section 2: A conveyor section where height varies from the nominal grade height (H
1
)
to some elevation above grade (H
2
). The section is supported on bents or
tower-type supports and has a total length L
2
.
Section 3: A conveyor section where height varies from one elevated height (H
2
) to a
second elevated height (H
3
). The section is supported on bents or tower-type
supports and has a total length L
3
.
Samples of Combined Sections
Sections 1, 2 and 3 Section 1 and 3
Description Type
Apron to 50 FEET [15 M] includes motor and drive,
open pans mounted between endless chains, not
enclosed (open), and floor-mounted support steel.
The apron conveyor is suitable for conveying coarse
solids. The open apron conveyor is limited to material
temperatures less than 600 DEG F.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Conveyer Length:
Range: 7 - 50 FEET [2.2 - 15 M]
Conveyer Width:
Range: 18 - 54 INCHES [450 - 1,350 MM]
Conveyer Flow Rate:
Range: 20 - 200 TPH [18.5 - 142 TON/H]
Driver Power:
Range: 2 - 20 HP [1.5 - 15 KW]
Product Density:
MAX: 200 PCF [3,200 KG/M3];
APRON
Pneumatic conveying system for moving granular
materials horizontally and vertically to areas that are
either far away or otherwise hard to reach
economically with mechanical conveyors. Includes
TEFC motor, blower, base, coupling, check valve,
instrumentation and filter piping.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
AL- Aluminum
Conveyer Length:
Range: 100 - 1,200 FEET [30 - 360 M]
Tube Diameter:
Range: 3 - 4 INCHES [75 - 100 MM]
Conveyer Flow Rate:
Range: 2 - 15 TPH [2 - 13 TON/H]
Product Density:
Range: 20 - 60 PCF [325 - 960 KG/M3];
PNEUMATIC
Description Type
Roller conveyor for moving firm flat-bottomed unit
loads, (e.g., drums, pallets and boxes). Inclines or
declines should not be more than 5o. Especially
suitable for conveying unit loads in a curved path.
Rollers supported in frame.
Material:
Conveyer Length:
Range: 4 - 25 FEET [1.3 - 7.5 M]
Conveyer Width:
Range: 12 - 20 INCHES [300 - 500 MM]
Roller Spacing:
Range: 3 - 4 INCHES [75 - 100 MM]
ROLLER
Screw conveyor for conveying granular or fine solids
horizontally or up an incline. Screw conveyor capacity,
however, decreases rapidly as the angle of incline
increases. Includes motor, drive and helical screw in
U-shaped trough.
The crew conveyor consists of a helical screw inside
an enclosed U-shaped trough. As the screw rotates,
the material is moved forward. Screw conveyors are
inexpensive, easy to maintain and can easily be made
dust-tight.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS305- SS305
SS316- SS316
Conveyer Length:
Range: 10 - 1,000 FEET [3.1 - 300 M]
Screw Diameter:
Range: 6 - 24 INCHES [155 - 600 MM]
Product Density:
MAX: 100 PCF [1,600 KG/M2]
SCREW
Vibrating conveyor for moving granular materials
horizontally or on slight incline. Includes motor and
drive, carrying trough, support base and drive
springs.
The material being transported should have a high
friction factor on steel as well as a high internal
friction factor. Material must be dense so that air
resistance will not retard the flight of the solid particle
as it is thrown forward, and the material should not
aerate.
VIBRATING
Description Type
VIBRATING - continued
Friable materials can be handled because the
movement of the material is gentle. The conveyor can
be made dust-tight and materials of construction may
be used to allow the handling of materials at
temperatures up to 2000 DEG F.
A vibrating conveyor consists of a carrying trough,
supporting base, drive springs and a drive system. The
drive system and springs impart an oscillating motion
to the trough which causes the material to move
forward in a hopping motion.
Material:
Pan Width:
Range: 12- 36 INCHES [300 - 900 MM]
Spaced bucket centrifugal discharge elevator includes
motor, drive and bucket contents discharged by
centrifugal motion.
For the vertical lifting of free-flowing fine or small lump
materials such as coal, sand and dry chemicals. This
elevator should not be used for materials that are
degraded by breakage or for fluffy materials.
This equipment item consists of evenly spaced buckets
attached to an endless belt or chain enclosed in a
supporting casing. This is called a centrifugal
discharge elevator because the contents of the
buckets are thrown into the discharge chute by
centrifugal force as the bucket rounds the head shaft.
Material:
Conveyer Length:
Range: 12 - 120 FEET [4 - 36 M]
Bucket Width:
Range: 6 - 16 INCHES [150 - 400 MM]
Conveyer Flow Rate:
Range: 16 - 156 TPH [14.5 - 141 TON/H]
Product Density:
MAX: 100 PCF [1,600 KG/M3];
CENT BKT L
Description Type
Continuous bucket elevator, buckets closely spaced
with back of preceding bucket serving as gravity
discharge chute for dumping bucket. Includes motor
and drive.
The slower speed and gentler discharge make this
type of elevator more suitable for materials which are
degraded through breakage, and for fluffy materials.
This equipment item is the same as the spaced bucket
centrifugal discharge elevator except buckets are
closely spaced with the back of the preceding bucket
serving as a discharge chute for the bucket with is
dumping as it rounds the head shaft. Close bucket
spacing allows the same capacity to be achieved as
slower elevator speeds.
Thus, bucket discharge is by gravity rather than
centrifugal force.
Material:
Conveyer Length:
Range: 12 - 100 FEET [4 - 36 M]
Bucket Depth:
Range: 8 - 24 INCHES [200 - 600 MM]
Conveyer Flow Rate:
Range: 40 - 216 TPH [36 - 195 TON/H]
Product Density:
MAX: 100 PCF [1,600 KG/M3];
CONT BKT L
Sanitary horizontal conveyor
Material:
*SS304*, SS316
Conveyer length:
Range: 6 - 20 FEET [1.8 - 6 M]
Belt width: Available sizes:
18 INCH [450 MM]
24 INCH [600 MM]
30 INCH [750 MM]
36 INCH [900 MM]
Conveyer type:
*INSPC*- Inspection type conveyor
BIDIR- bi-directional type (reversing belt conveyor)
Driver power: Default *1* HP
Driver type:
*WVRDC*- Washdown, VFD rated, direct drive, CS
WVCDC- Washdown, VFD controlled, direct drive, CS
S BELTCONV
Description Type
Sanitary vertical conveyor
Material:
*SS304*, SS316
Vertical lift (+) or drop (+): MIN: - 40 FEET [-12.2 M];
MAX: 40 FEET [12.2 M] Difference in elevation
(negative)
18 INCH [450 MM]
24 INCH [600 MM]
30 INCH [750 MM]
36 INCH [900 MM]
Length of lead-in section:
Default and MIN: *2* FEET [.6 M]
Length of the conveyor at feed end before lift or drop
Length of lead-out section: Default and MIN: *2* FEET
[.6 M]
Length of the conveyor at discharge end before lift or
drop
Driver power:
Default *1* HP
Driver type:
S VERTICAL
Sanitary vibratory conveyor
Material:
*SS304*, SS316
Conveyer length:
Range: 6 - 40 FEET [1.8 - 12.2M]
18 INCH [450 MM]
24 INCH [600 MM]
30 INCH [750 MM]
36 INCH [900 MM]
Belt support:
*NONE*- No belt support will be provided
BSUP- Belt support will be provided
S VIBRATRY
Description Type
S VIBRATRY - continued
Driver type:
Number of lane dividers: Default *0*; MAX: 2
Dewatering screen:
*NONE*- De-watering screen pair not included
DWAT- De-watering screen pair included
Pneumatic gate:
*NONE*- Full-width pneumatic screen not included
PNUM- Full-width pneumatic screen included
Discharge type:
*NONE*- No discharge exists
DROP- Drop-out type discharge
BIAS- Bias type discharge
Sanitary incline conveyor
Material: *SS304*, SS316
Length of incline section: MIN: 2 FEET [.600 M];
MAX: 40 FEET [12.2 M]
Belt width:
Available sizes:
18 INCH [450 MM]
24 INCH [600 MM]
30 INCH [750 MM]
36 INCH [900 MM]
Length of lead-in section: Default and MIN: *2* FEET
[.6 M]
Length of the conveyor at feed end before lift or drop
Length of lead-out section: Default and MIN: *2* FEET
[.6 M]
Length of the conveyor at discharge end before lift or
drop
Driver type:
S INCLINE
Cranes (CE)
Description Type
Travelling bridge crane includes trolley, hoists,
bridge, bridge rail, end trucks and drivers; not
included are building crane supports or travelling
rails (see Plant Bulk Steel - Mill Building) to
200 TONS [175 TON].
Material:
Crane Capacity:
Range: 5 - 200 TONS [5 - 175 TON]
BRIDGE CRN
Includes hoist trolley and track beam to 30 TONS
[25 TON].
Material:
Crane Capacity:
Range: 0.5 - 30 TONS [0.5 - 25 TON]
HOIST
Description Type
Freight elevator for lifting personnel, equipment and
supplies in process buildings and open steel
structures. Capacity to 10 TONS [10 TON] and 200
FEET [60 M] lift. Includes geared motor drive at 150
FPM [2750 M/H].
Elevator Capacity:
Range: 2 - 10 TONS [2 - 10 TON]
Height:
Range: 20 - 200 FEET [7 - 60 M]
FREIGHT

Elevator for lifting personnel and small tools in process
buildings and open steel structures. Capacity to 5
TONS [5 TON] and 200 FEET [60 M] lift. Includes
geared variable stage drive at 2 00 FPM [3650 M/H].
Elevator Capacity:
Range: 1 - 5 TONS [1 - 5 TON]
Height:
Range: 20 - 200 FEET [7 - 60 M]
PASSENGER
Feeders (FE)
Description Type
Volumetric belt feeder to 4800 CFH [135 M3/H].
Material:
Feeder Rate:
Range: 120 - 4,800 CFH [3.5 - 135 M3/H]
BELT
Bin activator.
Material:
Diameter:
Range: 3 - 15 FEET [1.0 - 4.5 M]
BIN ACTVTR
Rotary vane feeder with diameter to 36 INCHES [900
MM]. Includes motor and drive.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Rotary Feeder Diameter:
Range: 3 - 36 INCHES [80 - 900 MM]
The model assumes 40 LBS/CF for capacity
related calculations.
The model also assumes that each diameter unit
has a maximum volumetric capacity. For
example, a 4 INCH diameter has 0.013 CF/rev
and a 20 INCH diameter has 2.7 CF/rev.
The model calculations handle the following
two cases:
If Rate (LBS/H) and RPM are not specified then:
For Dia <= 20, RPM=45
For Dia > 20, RPM=30
Assume 50% fill, so Rate is:
CF/Rev*RPM*0.5*(40 LBS/CF)*(60 Min/Hr)
If Rate is specified then:
RPM = Rate/(40 LBS/CF)/(CF/rev)/(60 Min/Hr)
Horsepower is estimated from diameter. For
example, a 3 INCH diameter has 0.333 HP and a
30 INCH diameter has 5.0 HP.
ROTARY
Feeders (FE) - continued

Description Type
Vibrating feeder.
(includes hopper)
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Length:
Range: 5 - 14 FEET [1.6 - 4.2 M]
Feeder Width:
Range: 12 - 72 INCHES [3.5 - 1,800 MM]
VIBRATING
Loss-in-weight. Gravimetric weigh belt for free-flowing
feeding/proportioning of solids. Includes motor and
variable speed drive.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Flow Rate:
Range: 5 - 2,400 LB/H [2.3 - 1,085 KG/H]
WT LOSS
Sanitary dumper.
Lifts vats, combos, and tubs. Heavy duty stainless
steel construction is non-corrosive to withstand rigors
of daily washdown. Material of construction is SS316.
Dump height:
MIN: 3 FEET [0.914 M]; MAX: 17 FEET [5.18 M] for
INLIN lift, 14 FEET [4.26 M] for OFF lift.
Container type:
*55GD*- 55 GALLON [0.2 M3] drum
140GD- 140 GALLON [0.5 M3] drum
CTOTE- Corrugated tote
WOODC- Wood crate
3642B- SS bin 36 x 42 INCHES [914 x 1066 MM]
FBOX- Fiber box 18 x 18 x 36 INCHES [457 x 457 x
914 MM]
DUMPER
Description Type
DUMPER - continued
Lift type:
*INLIN*- Inline hydraulic lift
OFF- Offset electric lift
Retainer hold down:
*MAN*- Manual mechanism
AUTO- Automatic mechanism
AUTOB- Automatic mechanism and hydraulic box
retainer
Hydraulic power pack:
*NONE*- External hydraulic power pack
INCL- Self-contained hydraulic power pack
Sanitary bulk bag unloader
Sack size:
*1,500 LBS [681 KG], MAX: 4,000 LBS [1,814 KG]
Discharge type:
*GRAV*- Gravity discharge
SCREW- Flexible screw conveyor
Control type:
*MAN*- Manual control
LIW- Loss-in-weight control
Frame loading type:
*FORK*- Fork lift loading
HOIST- Electric hoist and trolley
SACK DUMP
Sanitary screw feeder
Includes a hopper with a screw feeder to convey dry,
fine, or wet solids. The screw feeder is controlled as
specified by the user. Material of construction is
SS316.
Flow rate:
Enter mass rate/vol. rate
MAX: 5600LB/H [2540KG/H] at 35PCF[560KG/M3] -
DRY-VOL
Volumetric rate:
Enter mass rate or vol. rate; MAX varies with density,
product and control type.
MAX: 160 CFH [4.5 M3/H]
SAN SCREW
Description Type
SAN SCREW - continued
Product density:
*35 |PCF [560 |KG/M3]
Product type:
*FINE*- Fine powders only
DRY- Dry particulates; fine, coarse powders
WET- Wet, dry particulates; fine, coarse
powder
Control type:
*VOL*- Volumetric control
LIW- Loss-in-weight control
Extended auger length:
*12 |INCHES [304 MM]*, MIN: 12 |INCHES
[304 MM]
Enclosure type:
*WASH*- Washdown enclosure
EXPR- Explosion-proof enclosure
Sanitary weigh belt feeder
Provides flow control for food and other solid
materials not requiring total material
containment. Material of construction is SS316.
Flow Rate:
MAX: 90,000 LB/H [40,800 KG/H]
Required: enter rate or width.
Feeder Width:
Two available widths: 12 INCHES [300 MM], 24
INCHES [600 MM]. Required: enter rate or
width.
Enclosure type:
*CLOSE*- Closed frame unit
OPEN- Open frame unit
SAN BELT
Hoists (HO)
Description Type
5-speed electric hoist with motor driven trolley. The
trolley suspends the hoist from an I-beam. The hoist is
propelled along the I-beam by the motor driven
trolley. An electric hoist used for repetitive or
high-speed lifting.
Material:
Hoist Capacity:
Range: 1 - 12 TONS
[1 - 10 TON]
HOIST
Single speed electric hoist, no trolley. Used for
repetitive or high-speed lifting.
Material:
Hoist Capacity:
Range: 1 - 14 TONS
[1 - 12 TON]
1 SPEED
5-speed electric hoist, no trolley. Used for repetitive or
high-speed lifting.
Material:
Hoist Capacity:
Range: 1 - 13 TONS
[1 - 11 TON]
5 SPEED
Hand hoist, geared manual pull-chain driven trolley.
For intermittent service, especially maintenance work.
Material:
Hoist Capacity:
Range: 1 - 12 TONS [1 -10 TON]
HAND GT
Hand hoist, manually-pulled trolley. The hoist is
moved to a new position on the I-beam by manually
pulling the trolley. For intermittent service, especially
for maintenance work.
Material:
Hoist Capacity:
Range: 1 - 12 TONS
[1 - 10 TON]
HAND PT
Hoists (HO) - continued
Description Type
Hand hoist, no trolley. The hand hoist without trolley is
a portable lifting device which is suspended from a
hook and operated by a hand chain. For intermittent
service, especially for erection and maintenance work.
Material:
Capacity:
Range: 1 - 18 TONS [1 - 16 TON]
HAND NT
Beam scale to 2000 LBS [900 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
Range: 300 - 2,000 LBS [135 - 900 KG]
BEAM SCALE
Conveyor belt scale.
Material:
Belt Width:
Range: 18 - 72 INCHES [450 - 1,800 MM]
BELT
Bench, dial, and beam to 3000 LBS [1350 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 3,000 LBS [1,350 KG]
BENCH
Floor, dial, and beam full frame to 8000 LBS [3600
KG].
KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 8,000 LBS [3,600 KG]
FULL FRAME
Floor, dial, and beam semi-frame to 8000 LBS [3600
KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 8,000 LBS [3,600 KG]
SEMI FRAME
Description Type
Tank scale, weigh bridge and saddles 150000 LBS
[68000 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
Range: 10,000 - 150,000 LBS [4,500 - 68,000 KG]
TANK SCALE
Track scale, for weighing rail cars to 300 TONS [265
TON].
Material:
Weight Capacity in Tons:
Range: 150 - 300 TONS [130 - 265 TON]
TRACK
Truck scale, for weighing trucks/lorries to 60 TONS
[54 TON].
Material:
Range: 30 - 60 TONS [25 - 54 TON]
TRUCK
Sanitary floor scale - flush mounted
The sanitary floor scale is a deck provided in a
frame, located inside a small pit so that the top
of the scale is flush with the floor. Weigh cells
and instrumentation in the frame measure the
weight and display it on a nearby local panel.
Material of construction is stainless steel.
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 10,000 LBS [4,500 KG]
Platform Size:
3X3- 3x3 FEET [0.9x0.9 M] platform
4X4- 4X4 FEET [1.2x1.2 M] platform
SAN FLOOR
Description Type
SAN FLOOR - continued
Local digital indicator:
*INCL*- Includes logical digital indicator
NONE- Remote indicator only
Deck surface:
*PLAIN*- Glass bead sandbase
TREAD- Tread plate
Deck lift:
*AUTO*- Automatic deck lift
NONE- No deck lift
Floor installation:
*NEW*- No floor alteration necessary
EXIST- Alter the existing floor

Scales (S)
Description Type
Beam scale to 2000 LBS [900 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
Range: 300 - 2,000 LBS [135 - 900 KG]
BEAM SCALE
Conveyor belt scale.
Material:
Belt Width:
Range: 18 - 72 INCHES [450 - 1,800 MM]
BELT
Bench, dial, and beam to 3000 LBS [1350 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 3,000 LBS [1,350 KG]
BENCH
KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 8,000 LBS [3,600 KG]
FULL FRAME
Floor, dial, and beam semi-frame to 8000 LBS [3600
KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 8,000 LBS [3,600 KG]
SEMI FRAME
Tank scale, weigh bridge and saddles 150000 LBS
[68000 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
Range: 10,000 - 150,000 LBS [4,500 - 68,000 KG]
TANK SCALE
Scales (S) - continued
Description Type
Track scale, for weighing rail cars to 300 TONS [265
TON].
Material:
Range: 150 - 300 TONS [130 - 265 TON]
TRACK
Truck scale, for weighing trucks/lorries to 60 TONS [54
TON].
Material:
Range: 30 - 60 TONS [25 - 54 TON]
TRUCK
Sanitary floor scale - flush mounted
The sanitary floor scale is a deck provided in a frame,
located inside a small pit so that the top of the scale is
flush with the floor. Weigh cells and instrumentation in
the frame measure the weight and display it on a
nearby local panel.
Scale Capacity: MAX: 10,000 LBS [4,500 KG]
Platform Size:
3X3 - 3x3 FEET [0.9x0.9 M] platform
4X4 - 4X4 FEET [1.2x1.2 M] platform
Local digital indicator:
*INCL* - Includes logical digital indicator
NONE - Remote indicator only
Deck surface:
*PLAIN* - Glass bead sandblasted
TREAD - Tread plate
Deck lift:
*AUTO* - Automatic deck lift
NONE - No deck lift
Floor installation:
*NEW* - No floor alteration necessary
EXIST - Alter the existing floor
SAN FLOOR
14 Separation Equipment (G7) 14-1
Centrifuges (CT)
Filters (F)
Thickeners (T)
Screens (VS)
14 Separation Equipment (G7)
14-2 14 Separation Equipment (G7)
Centrifuges (CT)
Description Type
Atmospheric suspended basket.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Driver Power:
Range: 2 - 30 HP [1.5 - 22 KW]
ATM SUSPEN
Automatic batch filtering centrifuge to 60 INCHES
[1520 MM].
Material: Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS316- SS316
HASTC- Hastelloy C
Centrifuge diameter:
Range: 24 - 60 INCHES [610 - 1,520 MM]
Centrifuge capacity:
Range: 3 - 30 CF [0.085 - 0.84 M3]
BATCH AUTO
Centrifuges (CT) - continued.
Description Type
Batch bottom-suspended filtering centrifuge with
diameter to 48 INCHES [1210 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Range: 20 - 48 INCHES [510 - 1,210 MM]
BATCH BOTM

Batch bottom-driven centrifuge, top unloading,
explosion-proof motor with diameter to 56 INCHES
[1420 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
RBLCS- Rubber-lined carbon steel
SS316- SS316
HASTC- Hastelloy C
Centrifuge capacity:
Range: 2 - 20 CF [0.06 - 0.56 M3]
Range: 18 - 56 INCHES [460 - 1,420 MM]
TOP UNLOAD
Batch bottom-driven centrifuge, bottom unloading,
fixed speed hydraulic driver with diameter to 56
INCHES [1420 MM].
Material:
Default: *SS316*
Range: 12 - 56 INCHES [305 - 1,420 MM]
BOT UNLOAD
Batch top-suspended filtering centrifuge with diameter
to 50 INCHES [1260 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
RBLCS- Rubber-lined carbon steel
Range: 20 - 50 INCHES [510 - 1,260 MM]
BATCH TOP
Centrifuges (CT) - continued
Description Type
High speed disk clarifier centrifuge, stack of rotating
conical disks to shorten sedimentation path, batch
removal of solids and diameter to 20 INCHES [500
MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
Range: 10 - 20 INCHES [250 - 500 MM]
DISK
Reciprocating conveyor, with continuous filtering
centrifuge for free-draining granular solids, horizontal
bowl, removal by reciprocating piston and diameter to
50 INCHES [1250 MM].
Material:
Range: 15 - 50 INCHES [375 - 1,250 MM]
Material:
Range: 20 - 50 INCHES [500 - 1,250 MM]
RECIP CONV
Scroll conveyor with continuous filtering centrifuge,
solids removal by scroll conveyor and diameter to 75
INCHES [1875 MM].
Material:
Range: 15 - 75 INCHES [375 - 1,875 MM
Material:
Range: 15 - 50 INCHES [375 - 1,250 MM]
SCROLL CON
Solid bowl with diameter to 54 INCHES [1370 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS316- SS316
Bowl diameter:
Range: 18 - 54 INCHES [460 - 1,370 MM]
Dowl length:
Range: 28 - 132 INCHES [720 - 3,350 MM]
SOLID BOWL

Centrifuges (CT) - continued
Description Type
Screen bowl with diameter to 54 INCHES [1370 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS316- SS316
Bowl diameter:
Range: 18 - 54 INCHES [460 - 1,370 MM]
Bowl length:
Range: 28 - 132 INCHES [720 - 3,350 MM]
SCREEN BWL
High speed tubular sedimentation centrifuge, bottom
entry, batch solids removal and diameter to 6 INCHES
[150 MM].
The following rates are shown to assist in selecting the
proper equipment item, however, rates outside this
range may be input.
TPH = 110-325, TON/H = 91-263.
Material:
Bowl diameter:
Range: 4 - 6 INCHES [105 - 150 MM]
TUBULAR
Continuous filtration vibratory centrifuge with solids
removal by vibratory screen for dewatering of coarse
solids with screen diameter to 56 INCHES [1420 MM].
Material:
Screen diameter:
Range: 48 - 56 INCHES [1,220 - 1,420 MM]
VIBRATORY
Inverting filter centrifuge.
Material: Default: *SS316*
Centrifuge diameter: Range: 12 - 52 INCHES [305 -
1,320 MM]
Centrifuge capacity: Range: 0.2 - 12 CF [0.0056 -
0.34 M3]
INVERTING
Description Type
Centrifugal precipitator includes driver and
interconnecting piping with flow rate to 10,000 CFM
[16,990 M3].
Material:
Default: *CS*
Gas flow rate:
Range: 500 - 10,000 CFM [850 - 16,990 M3/H]
CENTRF PRE
Cloth bay baghouse includes hopper bottom, airlocks
and electrical motor shakers. Cloth area to 12,000 SF
[1,110 M2].
Fabric filters are used for high efficiency 99+%,
cleaning of small particles (less than one micron).
Fabric filters are an excellent choice where feed
conditions may vary because efficiency is unaffected
by varying flowrates, particulate loading, or particle
size distribution. Baghouses are not a good choice if
the gas contains free moisture or if condensation will
occur in the baghouse. Baghouses are limited to a
maximum temperature of 550 DEG F.
Shaker type filters are generally used for:
Low CFM
Low particulate loading
Intermittent operation.
Pulse type units are used for:
Large CFM
High particulate loading
Continuous operation.
The cloth bay dust collector is commonly called a
baghouse or fabric filter. Dust laden gas is ducted into
a rectangular (small units may be cylindrical)
enclosure. The dirty gas must pass through cloth
tubes or bags to get out of the baghouse. Baghouses
are characterized by the method used to clean the
filter bags. Two options are available - shaker and
pulse type cleaning, which are a function of the air-to-
media ratio.
CLOTH BAY
Dust Collectors (DC) - continued
Description Type
CLOTH BAY - continued
The air-to-media ratio, also called the air-to-cloth
ratio, is the CFM of gas passing through one square
foot of filter fabric. Shaker type baghouses are limited
to air-to-media ratios of less than 4:1. Dirty gas flows
from the inside to the outside of the filter bags in a
shaker type unit. In order to remove the collected
dust, the flow of dirty gas is stopped and an electric
motor shakes the bags.
Pulse type units have their filter bags supported over a
cylindrical wire cage and dirty gas flows from the
outside of the bags to the inside. Pulse type units
operate with air-to-cloth ratios from 4:1 to 15:1. Filter
bags are cleaned by injecting a pulse of compressed
air into the bags being cleaned. The pulse of air
expands the bags violently and throws off the dust
collected on the bags outside surface. The pulse type
baghouse does not have to be taken off-line for
cleaning.
With both types of baghouse, the dust is collected in
hopper bottoms and removed through an airlock.
The air-to-media ratio, also called the air-to-cloth
ratio, is the CFM of gas passing through one square
foot of filter fabric. Shaker type baghouses are limited
to air-to-media ratios of less than 4:1. Dirty gas flows
from the inside to the outside of the filter bags in a
shaker type unit. In order to remove the collected
dust, the flow of dirty gas is stopped and an electric
motor shakes the bags.
Pulse type units have their filter bags supported over a
cylindrical wire cage and dirty gas flows from the
outside of the bags to the inside. Pulse type units
operate with air-to-cloth ratios from 4:1 to 15:1. Filter
bags are cleaned by injecting a pulse of compressed
air into the bags being cleaned. The pulse of air
expands the bags violently and throws off the dust
collected on the bags outside surface. The pulse type
baghouse does not have to be taken off-line for
cleaning.
With both types of baghouse, the dust is collected in
hopper bottoms and removed through an airlock.
Description Type
CLOTH BAY - continued
Today, most filter bags are manufactured from
synthetic fibers. The materials in most common use
are acrylics, nylon 6, nylon 66, nomex nylon,
Teflon, polypropylene and polyesters (e.g.,
dacron). The baghouses in the system have
polyester bags. Polyester has moderate all-around
chemical resistance and good strength and abrasion
resistance. Polyester may be used at a minimum
continuous service temperature of 300 DEG F.
Material:
Surface Area:
Range: 100 - 12,000 SF [10 - 1,110 M2]
Flow rate:
Enter surface area, flow rate, or boiler capacity (coal-
fired boiler aplx. only)
Air/media ratio:
Range: 1 - 4 CFM/SF [19 - 70 M2/H/M2]
Air temperature:
Boiler capacity:
Max: 3,400 MMBTU/H [1,000 MEGAW]
Baghouse with injected pulsed air Compressor for air
pulse injection not included.
Material:
Surface Area:
Range: 100 - 6,000 SF [10 - 557 M2]
Flow Rate:
Max: 250,000 CFM [420,000 M3/H]
Air/media ratio:
Range: 5 - 15 CFM/SF [91 - 270 M3/H/M2]
Air temperature:
Boiler capacity:
PULSE SHKR
Description Type
Cyclone for gas/solid separation. Diameter to 60
INCHES [1,500 MM].
Collection efficiency varies with particle size.
From the table above we see that cyclones are a good
choice for medium size particles. Cyclones can be
fabricated from a wide variety of internals and can also
be refractory lined. Therefore cyclones can be used for
the removal of particles from corrosive and/or high
temperature (1,800 DEG F) gas streams.
The cyclone has a cylindrically shaped upper section
and long tapering conical lower section. Dirty gas
enters the top section through a tangential nozzle.
This imparts a swirling motion to the gas. The
entrained particles are thrown to the wall of the
cyclone by centrifugal force. The particles descend by
gravity along the wall to the bottom of the cone where
they are discharged.
The gas spirals downward to the bottom of the cone
then reverses direction and moves upward to the gas
exit at the top center of the cyclone. Increasing the
diameter of a cyclone increases its capacity but
capacity of a single cyclone is limited to about 50,000
CFM. When larger flowrates must be handled several
cyclones are arranged in parallel.
Material Selection:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Diameter:
Range: 3 - 60 INCHES [75 - 1,500 MM]
Flow Rate:
Range: 70 - 40,000 CFM [120 - 67,900 M2/H]
Pressure drop:
Default: *2.5* IN-H20 [*625* PA] to *27,000*
CFM [*45,870* M3/H]; or *6* IN-H20 [*1,500* PA]
Air Temperature:
CYCLONE
Description Type
Multiple cyclone with flow rate to 20,000 CFM [33,980
M3/H].
Material:
Gas flow rate:
Range: 900 - 20,000 CFM [1,530 - 33,980 M2/H]
MULT CYCLO
High voltage electrical precipitator
Gas flow rate:
Min: 600 CFM [1,020 M3/H]
Required: gas flow rate or boiler capacity
(for coal-boiler application only)
Boiler capacity:
Max: 3,400 MMBTU/H [1,000 MEGAW]
Required: gas flow rate or boiler capacity (for coal-
boiler application only)
Removal efficiency:
Min: 80.0%; Max: 99.99%
Required: removal efficiency or particle load (for coal-
boiler application only)
Particle size (microns):
Default: *0.600* microns
Particle resistance x10E10:
Default: *2* OHM-IN [*5* OHM-CM]
SO3 Concentration (ppm): Default: *4.50* ppm
ELC H VOLT
Low voltage electrical precipitator
Material:
Gas flow rate:
Range: 600 - 20,000 CFM [1,020 - 33,980 M3/H]
ELC L VOLT
Washer dust collector
Material:
Default: *CS*
Gas flow rate:
Range: 600 - 20,000 CFM [1,020 -33,980 M3/H]
Air temperature:
WASHERS
Filters (F)
Description Type
Cartridge filter to 1,200 GPM [75 L/S] with 5 micron
cotton filter.
Cartridge filters are generally used as a final filtering
element for the removal of small particles, such as
pipe scale, down to 10 microns
in size from a liquid stream containing a low
concentration of these solids.
A cartridge filter consists of a tank containing one or
more filter elements or cartridges which are tubes of
wound natural or synthetic fibers. Liquid flows through
the cartridges and the suspended solids are trapped
by the fibers. As the filter gets dirtier, pressure drop
builds to a point where the cartridges must be
replaced. The cartridges are disposable. They are not
cleaned and reused.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 30 - 1,200 GPM [1.9 - 75 L/S]
CARTRIDGE
Pressure leaf-dry filter with leaf area to 600 SF [55
M2].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS316- SS316
Surface area:
Range: 50 -600 SF [4.7 - 55 M2]
LEAF DRY

Pressure leaf-wet filter with leaf area to 600 SF [55
M2].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS316- SS316
Surface area:
Range: 50 - 600 SF [4.7 - 55 M2]
LEAF WET
Filters (F) - continued

Description Type
Automatic plate and frame filter with capacity to 50 CF
[1.4 M3].
Material:
Default: *RBLCS*
RBLCS- Rubber-line CS
PPLCS- Polyprop. lined CS
SS316- SS316
Frame capacity:
Range: 10 - 50 CF [0.3 - 1.4 M3]
Plate size:
Range: 36 - 48 INCHES [900 - 1,200 MM];
Default: 48 INCHES [1,2000 MM]
PLATE
FRAM
Disk Filter. General Features: The filter is a vacuum
type (from drop leg), consisting of segmented disks
with polypropylene filter bags, suction valve, vat
(optional) with stiffeners, discharge trough, drive
motor, base plate, rotor and bearing support. The
following variations are available.
Standard Disk Filter (for general chemical industry)
This filter additionally includes a paddle agitator for
the vat, worm and gear reducer for filter drum, air
blow discharge mechanism and cleaning showers.
Thickener (as in pulp and paper mills) includes the
general features and in addition, has repulper, flushing
pipe, hood with mounting flange, inspection and
service doors, knock off and cleaning showers
(including nozzles, header, hoses, valves). The filtrate
valve (double solution type) and the drive reducer is a
helical gear.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS316- SS316
RBLCS- Rubber lined CS
EPLCS- Epoxy lined CS
Application:
Default: *MD RATE*
LO RATE- Low filtration rate
MD RATE- Medium filtration rate
HI RATE- High filtration rate
THCKNR- Used as a thickening device
ROTY DISK
Description Type
ROTY DISK - continued
Solid flow rate:
Enter solid flow rate or surface area.
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 900 SF [10 - 80 M2]
Solids handling rate:
Default: 0.30 TPD/SF [0.12 TPH/lM2]
Number of disks:
Min: 1; Default: *3*.
Liquid flow rate:
Flowrate of feed stream
Percent of solids in the feed stream.
Range: 0.50 - 5.00; Default: *15*.
Tank or vat material:
Default: *NONE*
NONE- No vat will be provided
CS- Carbon steel vat
SS316- Stainless steel vat
Drum Filter. General Features: The filter is a vacuum
type (from drop leg), multi compartment cylinder shell
with internal filtrate piping with polypropylene filter
cloth, feed box with inlet and drain nozzles, suction
valve, rake-agitated vat (optional) with stiffeners,
discharge trough, driver consisting of rotor, drive
motor base plate, worm, gear reducer and two pillow
block bearing with supports. In addition to the
standard filter, the following variations are available.
Thickener (as in pulp and paper mills) includes the
above general features and, in addition, has repulper,
flushing pipe, hood with mounting flange, inspection
and service doors, knock off and cleaning showers
(including nozzles, header, hoses, valves). The
distinguishing features are air-assisted scraper
discharge, filtrate valve (double solution type), steel
filter cloth and the drive reducer is a helical gear.
Brown Stock and Bleach Washers in addition to the
thickener features, the washers have multiple showers
for washing.
Lime Mud Filter and Dregs Washer essentially
includes the same general features as the general
washer, but with pre-coat for easier filtration.
ROTY DRUM
Description Type
ROTY DRUM - continued
Material: Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS316- SS316
EPLCS- Epoxy lined CS
Application: Default: *MD RATE*
LO RATE- Low filtration rate
MD RATE- Medium filtration rate
HI RATE- High filtration rate
THCKNR- Used as a thickening device
Solid flow rate:
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 2,000 SF [10 - 185 M2]
Solids handling rate:
Default: 0.50 TPD/SF [0.20 TPH/lM2]
Number of disks:
Min: 1; Default: *3*.
Liquid flow rate:
Flowrate of feed stream
Range: 0.50 - 5.00; Default: *20*.
Tank or vat material: Default: *NONE*
NONE- No vat will be provided
CS- Carbon steel vat
SS316- Stainless steel vat
Scroll discharge centrifugal filter for dewatering fine
solids (0 to 28 mesh) or medium coarse solids (.375
INCH [10 MM] to 28 mesh).
Material:
Feed size selection:
FINE- Fine solids
MEDIUM- Medium solids
SCROLL
Sewage filter with area to 600 SF [55 M2].
Material:
Default: *CS*
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 600 SF [10 - 55 M2]
SEWAGE
Description Type
Sparkler with area to 110 SF [10 M2].
Material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316- SS316
Surface area:
Range: 8 - 110 SF [
0.75 - 10.2 M2]
Sparkler volume:
Range: 0.5 - 15 CF [0.02 - 0.4 M3]
Sparkler diameter:
Range: 18 - 33 INCHES [450 - 825 MM]
SPARKLER
Tubular fabric filters (bank of three) with automatic or
manual cleaning/backwashing. Flow rate to 3400 GPM
[210 L/S].
For filtering liquid streams such as cooling tower water
and tank car loading lines. The wide selection of filter
media available allows particles from 1 micron to
2,000 microns in size to be removed. Because tubular
filters can be backwashed, liquid streams with high
solids concentrations can be handled.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 100 - 3,400 GPM [6.5 - 210 L/S]
Mesh size:
Range: 60 - 700 MESH
Mode of operation:
Automatic cleaning and backwashing option available.
Default: *NONE*
NONE- No auto operation
AUTO- Auto clan/backwash
TUBULAR
White water filter including centrifugal screening
basket, internal showers and distributors.
Liquid flow rate:
Maximum flow varies: 4750 GPM [300 L/S]
at 0.001 consistency, 2500 GPM [157 L/S] at 0.1.
Range: 0.001 to 0.1; Default: 0.1
WHITEWATER

Description Type
Compressed gas filter
Removes particulates from compressed gas. Supplied
with standard 10 micron filter.
Min: 0.25 PSIG [1.75 KPA]; Max: 720 PSIG [4,965
KPA]
Specified inlet pressure dictates maximum gas flow
rate and pressure drop.
Gas flow rate and Pressure Drop:
Maximum gas flow rate, which varies with inlet
pressure (see chart), is at standard conditions.
*at MAX Pressure Drop
Temperature: Default: *60* DEG F [*15.5* DEG C];
Max: 100 DEG F [37.5
DEG C]. Maximum gas flow rate is achieved at 60 DEG
F.
Pressure drop: Range varies with temperature and
inlet pressure. The following defaults and MIN/MAX
values are applicable only to air at default temperature
of 60 DEG F [15.5 DEG C]. For other gases and/or
other temperatures, appropriate molecular weight and
temperature corrections will be applied to the pressure
drop.
Molecular weight:
Default gas is air with a molecular weight of 28.96.
COMPRSGAS
Design gauge pressure
Inlet
Gas flow rate MAX*
150 PSIG [1,033 KPA] 60,000 CFM [103,000 M3/H]
275 PSIG [1,895 KPA 86,500 CFM [146,900 M3/H]
720 PSIG [4,956 KPA] 155,000 CFM [263,000 M3/H]
Default MIN MAX
Design gauge pressure Inlet range of 0.25 PSIG [1.75 KPA] - 150 PSIG [1,033 KPA]
0.0175 psi
[0.00012 N/mm2]
0.0175 psi
[0.00012 N/mm2]
2.0 psi
[0.01379 N/mm2]
Design gauge pressure Inlet range of 150 PSIG [1,033 KPA] - 275 PSIG [1,895 KPA]
0.25 psi
[0.00172 N/mm2]
0.25 psi
[0.00172 N/mm2]
3.0 psi
[0.02068 N/mm2]
Design gauge pressure Inlet range of 275 PSIG [1,895 KPA] - 720 PSIG [4,956 KPA]
0.50 psi
[0.00345 N/mm2]
0.50 psi
[0.00345 N/mm2]
5.0 psi
[0.03447 N/mm2]
Description Type
Sanitary in-line metal trap
Protects against iron contamination and reduces
abrasive wear to equipment by trapping particles via
gravity and magnetic separating action. Material of
construction is SS316.
added.
Pipe diameter:
MIN: 2 INCH [50 MM], MAX: 4 INCH [100 MM].
Standard sizes:
INCHMM
250
380
4100
METAL TRAP
Sanitary fluming reclaim reel
Sometimes used with a fluming pump and dewatering
shaker. Water from the shaker will be forwarded to the
fluming reclaim reel so that the reclaim reel can
remove solids that werent removed by the shaker.
Fluming rate:
MAX: 1,200 GPM [75 L/S]
Distribution header:
NONE- Not included
*INCL*- Included
Cover option:
INCL- Included
RECL REEL
Culinary (sterile) air filter
Keeps rust and other such matter out of the product.
Air flow rate:
Enter actual flow rate or pipe size; MAX: 4340 CFM
[7373M3/H] at 100 PSIG [689.4KPA].
Pipe diameter:
MIN: 0.5 INCH [15 MM], MAX: 8 INCH [200 MM]
Standard sizes:
INCHMM
0.515
125
SAN AIR
Description Type
SAN AIR - continued
250
380
4100
6150
8200
MIN: 100 PSIG [680 KPA]
Number of stages:
*1*, MIN: 1, MAX: 3
Sanitary pipe filter
Removes fine particles from a given liquid or gas.
Pipe diameter:
MIN: 1 INCHES [25 MM], MAX: 4 INCHES [100 MM].
-For size LONG and type INLIN, range is 1.5 IN
[40MM] - 3 INCHES [75 MM].
-For type BASKT, MIN is 2 INCHES.
Standard sizes:
INCHES MM
1.0 25
1.5 40
2.0 50
2.5 65 (not available for BASKT)
3.0 80
4.0 100 (not available for INLIN)
Style:
*INLIN*- In-line filter
BASKT- Basket filter - for dia. >= 2 INCHES [50 MM]
If pipe diameter is 4 INCHES [100 MM], BASKT is the
only available type. Otherwise, default is INLIN.
Body size:
*SHORT*- Short body
LONG- Long body

SAN PIPE
Description Type
Sanitary filter press
Takes in liquid through internal ports located in every
frame and the two heads, then passes the liquid
through the filter media and into the plates, and finally
releases the liquid through the head.
Any two must be entered: total area, plate size,
number of plates. The third is computed accordingly.
Plate material:
SS304, *SS316*
Total plate area:
The maximum total area, entered in square feet (SF)
or square meters (M2), depends on the plate type and
plate size, and is internally calculated and checked.
Plate size:
Available sizes of round plates:
INCHES MM
12 300
18 450
24 600
Available sizes of square plates:
INCHES MM
12 7/8 300
18 7/8 450
24 600
Note:24 INCH (600 MM) plate size available for
HYDRL (hydraulic) closure type only.
SAN PRESS
Flow Diagram
Description Type
SAN PRESS - continued
Number of plates:
The maximum number of plates depends upon the
plate size:
Plate thickness:
*1 INCH [25 MM]*; MIN: 1 INCH [25 MM]; MAX: 2
INCHES [50 MM]. These (that is, the MIN and the MAX
values) are the only standard plate thicknesses
available.
Head and stand material:
CS- Carbon steel
Plate type:
*ROUND*- Round plates
SQUAR- Square plates
Feed pump type:
*PD *- Positive displacement pump
CNTRF- Centrifugal pump
NONE- No feed pump included
Hydraulic closure:
*HYDRL*-Hydraulic closure
MANUL-Manual closure (not available for 24 INCH
[600 MM] plate size)
Plate Size
Square Round
MAX No.
of Plates
12 INCH [300 MM]
12
7
/8 INCH [300 MM]
15
18 INCH [450 MM]
18
7
/8 INCH [450 MM]
25
24 INCH [600 MM] 24 INCH [600 MM] 40

Description Type
Culinary (sterile) steam filter
Used primarily for cleaning factory or plant steam to
reduce the levels of boiler feed chemicals, rust, pipe
scale, and other contaminates. Material of construction
is SS316.
Flow rate:
MIN: 215.0 LB/H [97.5 KG/H]; MAX: 36,100 LB/H
[16,375 KG/H]. The Minimum/maximum flow rates are
computed and depend upon the steam pressure. Those
given above are at the default steam pressure of 100
PSIG [680 KPA].
Enter either flow rate or pipe diameter.
Pipe diameter:
MIN: 0.75 INCHES [20 MM]; MAX: 8 INCHES [200
MM]. Standard sizes are shown under Filter
diameter.
Enter either flow rate or pipe diameter.
Body Diameter: Determined by Pipe Diameter.
Body length:
If pipe diameter is entered, system selects a filter body
length from the above table. If user enters a length, it
is printed, but the underlying design value is still
provided by the table.
Steam pressure-gauge:
*100 PSIG [680 KPA]*
SAN STEAM
Pipe diameter Filter body diameter
Inch-Pound Metric Inch-Pound Metric
0.75 INCHES
1 INCHES
2 INCHES
3 INCHES
4 INCHES
6 INCHES
8 INCHES
20 MM
25 MM
50 MM
80 MM
100 MM
150 MM
200 MM
1.5 INCHES
2.5 INCHES
4 INCHES
8.6 INCHES
10.7 INCHES
12.8 INCHES
16 INCHES
38.1 MM
63.5 MM
101.6 MM
218.44 MM
271.78 MM
325.12 MM
406.4 MM
Description Type
Sanitary pipe strainer
Removes large particles as a process stream passes
through the strainers perforated plate or screen mesh.
Pipe diameter:
MIN: 1 INCH [25 MM], MAX: 4 INCHES [100 MM], with
the following exceptions:
-For BASKT style, MIN is 2 INCHES [50 MM].
-For size LONG and INLIN style, MAX is 3 INCHES
[80MM].
Standard sizes:
INCHMM
125
1.540
250
2.5*65*
380
4100
*BASKT style is not available in this size
Style:
*INLIN*- In-line filter
BASKT- Basket filter - for dia. >= 2 INCHES [50 MM].
Not available for 2.5 IN [65 MM] pipe diameter.
Note: for pipe diameter of 4 INCHES [100 MM],
BASKT is the only available style; otherwise, the
default style is INLIN.
Body size:
*SHORT*- Short body
LONG - Long body
Configuration:
*SINGL*- Single filter
TWIN- Twin filters
SAN STRAIN
Filter Sediment Removal SEDIMENT REMOVAL
Cartridge filter to 1,200 GPM [75 L/S] with 5 micron
cotton filter.
Cartridge filters are generally used as a final filtering
element for the removal of small particles, such as
pipe scale, down to 10 microns in size from a liquid
stream containing a low concentration of these solids.
A cartridge filter consists of a tank containing one or
more filter elements or cartridges which are tubes of
wound natural or synthetic fibers. Liquid flows through
the cartridges and the suspended solids are trapped by
the fibers. As the filter gets dirtier, pressure drop
builds to a point where the cartridges must be
replaced. The cartridges are disposable. They are not
cleaned and reused.
Shell Material:
Def.: mat'l selection from design temp.(Ref. proj.
equipment design basis). Specify backing plate
mat'l if clad plate
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS - Stainless steel
A516
A515
A204C - C-.5Mo
A387B - 1Cr - .5Mo
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
SS321 - SS321
SS347 - SS347
304L - 304L
316L - 316L
NI - Nickel
INCNL - Inconel
MONEL - Monel
HAST - Hastelloy
TFELS - Teflon lined CS
GSLCS - Glass lined CS
CS... - See list of carbon steel materials
H-T STL... - See list of heat treated steel materials
LOW ALLOY STL... - See list of low alloy steel
materials
HI ALLOY STL... - See list of hi alloy steel materials
NON FERROUS... - See list of non-ferrous materials
LINED CS MATLS... - See list of lined steel materials
-continued on next page-
Description Type
Sediment Removal Filter - continued -
Vessel Diameter:
allowance.
materials.
Default gauge pressure:
worst case.
Default: pressure design.
worst case.
Default: pressure design.
Design temperature:
Default: 650 DEGF[340 DEGC] ferrous mat'l;250
DEGF[120 DEGC] mat'l;
Default: Design temperature
Skirt height:
Min > 0
Skip if legs reqd, enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN
structure; default 1.5 x diameter
Skirt thickness:
Min > 0
Default: system calculated;
Vessel leg height:
Min 0
Skip if skirt reqd, enter 0.0 if hung in OPEN
structure; default 4 FEET [1.25 M]
Fluid volume:
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 20
For seismic design; fluid volume as a % of vessel
volume (water assumed).
Min: 0
Default: 0
Specify an allowance for internals as a percent
of basic vessel weight.
-continued on next page-
Description Type
Sediment Removal Filter - continued -
Weld efficiency:
Min: 50
Max: 100
ASME/JIS/DIN only, where allowed for thin wall
vessels; default: Area Basis.
Stress relief:
Min: 0
Default: 1
diameter as vessel.
Head type:
ELLIP - 2:1 Ellipsoidal
Head thickness Top:
Min: >0
allowance.
Min: >0
allowance.
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD, default - see
Area Design Basis.
Description Type
Description Type
Centrifugal cleaners/wet cyclones used for removal of
contaminants in fluids using centrifugal force. Includes
the body, supporting legs, two reject valves per
cyclone, reject chamber/grit pot, automatic or manual
control of rejected materials and a header for multiple
cyclones. Separate material specifications are allowed
for the top and conical section. Sizing and scaling
features allow contaminants to be separated by size
and density/type. Linear or radial configurations are
available.
Main section material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316- SS316
316L- 316 L
CS- Carbon steel
CERML- Light ceramic liner on CS
CERMM- Medium ceramic liner on CS
CERMH- Heavy ceramic liner on CS
CERMV- Very heavy ceramic liner on CS
ABRPL- Abrasion resistant plate
REPRB- Replaceable rubber liner on CS
LS304- Replaceable SS304 on CS
Cyclone diameter:
Enter diameter or liquid flow rate.
Range: 4 - 30 INCHES [100 - 750 MM]
Liquid flow rate:
Enter diameter or liquid flow rate.
Application:
Default: *AUTO*
AUTO- Automatic cleaner discharge
MANL- Manual cleaner discharge
Configuration:
Default: *LIN*
LIN- Linear manifold
RAD- Radial manifold
Number of cyclones per manifold:
Default: *1*
Cone section material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316- SS316
316L- 316 L
CS- Carbon steel
PULP STOCK
Separation Equipment (SE) - continued
Description Type
PULP STOCK - continued
CERML- Light ceramic liner on CS
CERMM- Medium ceramic liner on CS
CERMH- Heavy ceramic liner on CS
CERMV- Very heavy ceramic liner on CS
CERMC- Ceramic
ABRPL- Abrasion resistant plate
REPRB- Replaceable rubber liner on CS
Containment size:
Default: *MEDIUM*
SMALL- Small debris, less then 40 microns
MEDIUM- Medium debris, 40 - 400 microns
LARGE - Large debris, 400 - 4000 microns
Containment density:
Default: *MEDIUM*
LIGHT - Light weight debris: asphalt, sand, ink
MEDIUM- Medium weight debris: clay, heavy sand
HEAVY- Heavy weight debris: metal clips, foil
VHEAVY- Very heavy debris: nuts, bolts, rock
Water-only cyclones for separation of light and heavy
minerals or particle size separation. Cyclones may be
linear or radial manifold and may be lined with
replaceable liners. Cyclone diameter to 30 INCHES
[760 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
CERML- Light ceramic liner
CERMM- Medium ceramic liner
CERMH- Heavy ceramic liner
CERMV- Very heavy ceramic liner
ABRPL- Abrasive resistant plate
REPRB- Replaceable rubber lining
LS304- Replaceable SS304 lining
LS316- Replaceable SS316 lining
Cyclone diameter:
Diameter is for individual cyclone, group manifolding -
linear or radial. Range: 4 - 30 INCHES [105 - 760 MM]
Configuration:
Default: *LIN*
LIN- Linear manifold
RAD- Radial manifold
WATER CYCL
Separation Equipment (SE) - continued
Description Type
Oil-water separator - API type.
Material:
Liquid flow rate:
Maximum flow (see Configuration) less Specific
Gravity increase. For example, for BOX 135 GPM [8.5
L/S] at 0.965. Min: 25 GPM [16 L/S]
Diameter or width:
Range: 4 - 8 FEET [1.22 - 2.40 M]
Length:
Range: 20 - 40 FEET [6.1 - 12.0 M]
Configuration:
Default: *BOX*
RND- Round- max flow 545 GPM [34 L/S] at 0.85 SG
BOX- Box - max flow 700 GPM [44 L/S] at 0.85 SG
Oil specific gravity: Range 0.85 - 0.97; Default:
*0.92*
OIL WATER
Thickeners (T)
Description Type
Thickeners are used in many solid/liquid separation
processes and consist of a slow-moving rake
mechanism rotating in a tank. The unit includes feed
well, bridge, drive head (with optional overload alarm
system), and a drive consisting of worm, gear and
motor. An optional flocculator mechanism with
flocculation chamber, paddles and flocculator drive
with reduction gear and motor can be included.
Additional storage capacity for the tank can be
specified for special applications such as green liquor
clarification, white liquor clarification or lime mud
washing; as used in paper mill operations. If only a
thickener mechanism is needed, the tank can be
excluded.
Application:
Default: *STANDARD*
STANDARD- Standard thickener/clarifier
PRM-ETP- Primary clarifier usually for effluent
SEC-ETP- Secondary clarifier usually for effluent
GRN-LQ- Green liquor clarifier for pulp/paper
WHITE-LQ- White liquor clarifier for pulp/paper
LIMMUD- Lime mud washer for pulp and paper mills
Rake and mechanism material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
MONEL- Monel
RUBCV- Rubber covered CS
Tank or vat material:
Tank material required to obtain tank cost, leave blank
for thickener mechanism only.
CS- Carbon steel
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
MONEL- Monel
RUBCV- Rubber covered CS
Vessel diameter:
Enter tank capacity or tank dimensions.
Range: 9.5 - 400 FEET [3.0 - 12.0 M]
Vessel height:
Liquid volume:
THICKENER
Thickeners (T) - continued
Description Type
THICKENER - continued
Additional capacity:
Extra storage in addition to basic tank capability.
Default: *0.0* GALLONS [*0.0 M3].
Flocculator required: Default: *NO*
NO- No flocculation required
YES- Flocculator mechanism required
Bridge type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL- Full length bridge 100 FEET [30 M] maximum
SEMI- Semi-bridge for 100 FEET [30 M] diameter
TRCTN- Traction type clarifier on semi-bridge
Drive heat type:
Default: *DH-STD*
DH-STD- Standard drive head to 30 FEET [9 M]
diameter DH-HD- Heavy duty drive - large diameter,
thick sludge DH-HDA- Heavy duty, overload alarm,
lifting device
Design temperature:
Default: 190 DEG F [88 DEG C] for green liquor; else
68 DEG F [20 DEG C].
mechanism weight. Default: *0.0*
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*
Manhole diameter:
Screens (VS)
Rectangular, circular.
Description Type
Rectangular single deck, open or enclosed.
Rectangular double deck, open or enclosed.
Rectangular triple deck, open or enclosed.
Material:
Length:
Range: 6 - 24 FEET [2.0 - 7.25 M]
Width:
Range: 3 - 8 FEET [1.0 - 2.25 M]
Configuration:
Default: *OPEN*
OPEN- No duct enclosure
ONE DECK
TWO DECK
THREE DECK
Circular single deck.
Circular double deck.
Circular triple deck.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
Screen diameter:
Range: 18 - 60 INCHES [450 - 1,5000 MM]
Surface area:
Range: 1.5 - 18 SF [0.2 - 1.7 M2]
SIFTER 1
SIFTER 2
SIFTER 3
Rectangular hummer-type for fine separation; 1, 2 or
3 decks.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Surface area:
Range: 10 - 80 SF [1.0 - 7.4 M2]
Number of decks:
Range: 1 - 3
HUMMER
Screens (VS) - continued
Description Type
Low consistency bow screen is used for fiber
collection in a paper mill.
The unit consists of a screen surface mounted on
a frame curvilinear in shape, with inlet nozzle,
discharge nozzle(s) and a collection chamber.
The automatic feature includes solenoids, timers
and an air cylinder for back-flushing and
cleaning.
Screen material:
Default: *SS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Liquid flow rate:
Enter capacity or screen surface area.
Surface area:
Frame material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
0.60 - 2.00; Default: *0.80*
LD STOCK
Mechanical bar screens are the first stage of screening
used in an effluent treatment system. These are wide
mesh screens made from metal rods/flats welded onto
a frame.
Screen material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Liquid flow rate:
Surface area:
BAR
Pressure screen used for fine screening of
contaminants in a paper mill.
Includes shell for screen basket housing, rotor, foil
blades, water lubricated packing box with packing
seals, V-belt drive with belts, metal guard and motor.
PRESSURE
Description Type
PRESSURE - continued
Basket material:
Default: *SS316*
CS- Carbon steel
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
Shell material:
Default: *SS316*
CS- Carbon steel
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
Hydraulic capacity:
Enter capacity or diameter and length.
Basket diameter:
Min: 60 INCHES [150 MM]
Basket height:
Min: 60 INCHES [150 MM]
Driver power:
Design gauge power:
Default: *15* PSIG [*150* MM]
Seal type:
Default: *MECH*
PACK- Packing
MECH- Mechanical seal
Sanitary fluming dewatering shaker
Vibratory conveyor with screen for dewatering fruits
and vegetables that have been carried by water-
transport up to this point in the food pumping system.
The spreader (which is included by default, but can be
excluded by selecting NONE in the Spreader option
field) reduces the velocity of the water by spreading
the water and product onto the dewatering shaker.
added.
SHAKER
Description Type
SHAKER - continued
Screen size:
24X60- 2x24 INCHES [609 MM] x 30 INCHES [762
MM] screens
36X60- 2x36 INCHES [914 MM] x 30 INCHES [762
MM] screens
Required to enter at least one of the following: size,
fluming rate or solids capacity.
Fluming rate:
MAX: 500 GPM [31 L/S]
Solids capacity:
MAX: 30,000 LB/H [13,500 KG/H]
Spreader option:
NONE- Not included
*INCL*- included
15 Utility Service Systems (G6) 15-1
Steam Boilers (STB)
Heating Units (HU)
Water Treatment Systems (WTS)
15 Utility Service Systems (G6)
15-2 15 Utility Service Systems (G6)
Description Type
Cooling tower includes fans, drivers, concrete basin
and field erection; does not include pumps and piping.
Water flow rate:
Min: 1,000 GPM [65 L/S]
Temperature range:
10 - 50 DEG F [6 - 27 DEG C];
Approach gradient:
Range: 5 - 22 DEG F [3 - 12 DEG C];
Wet bulb temperature:
Range: 60 - 82 DEG F [16 - 28 DEG C];
Length each header:
COOLING
Cooling Towers (CTW) - continued
Description Type
Cooling tower includes fans, drivers, concrete basin,
two cooling water pumps, motor drivers,
instrumentation for tower and inhibition system (less
tanks and inhibition pumps), and field erection of
cooling tower.
Water flow rate:
Min: 1,000 GPM [65 L/S]
Temperature range:
Range: 10 - 50 DEG F [6 - 27 DEG C];
Approach gradient:
Range: 5 - 22 DEG F [3 - 12 DEG C];
Range: 60 - 82 DEG F [16 - 28 DEG C];
Length each header:
COOLING WP
Factory assembled cooling tower including fans,
drivers and basins.
Water flow rate:
Range: 150 - 6,000 GPM [9.5 - 375 L/S]
Temperature range:
Range: 5 - 50 DEG F [3 - 27 DEG C];
Default: *15* DEC F [*8* DEG C]
Approach gradient:
Range: 5 - 22 DEG F [3 - 12 DEC C];
Range: 60 - 82 DEG F [16 - 28 DEG C];
Number of cells:
Default: *1*
PACKAGED
Steam Boilers (STB)
Description Type
Packaged boiler unit includes forced draft fans,
instruments, controls, burners, soot-blowers,
feedwater deaerator, chemical injection system, steam
drum, mud drum and stack. Steam capacity to
800,000 LB/H [362,000 KG/H]. Shop assembled.
Material:
Boiler flow rate:
Range: 10,000 - 800,000 LB/H
[4,540 - 362,000 KG/H]
Range: 250 - 600 PSIG
[1,725 - 4130 KPA]; Default: *250* PSIG [*1,725*
KPA]
Superheat:
For saturated steam enter 0.0 degrees, else, minimum
superheat 100 DEG F [55 DEG C]. Max: 300 DEG F
[165 DEG C]; Default: *100* DEG F [*55* DEG C]
Heating medium:
GAS- Gas fuel
OIL- Oil fuel
BOILER
Field erected boiler unit includes forced draft fans,
instruments, controls, burners, soot-blowers,
feedwater deaerator, chemical injection system,
structural steel platforms, steam drum, mud drum and
stack with steam capacity to 2,220,000 LB/H [997,000
KG/H]. Oil fired. Economizer for large capacities.
Material:
Boiler flow rate:
Range: 40,000 - 2,200,000 LB/H
[18,2000 - 997,000 KG/H]
Max: 1,000 PSIG [6,890 KPA];
Superheat:
STM BOILER
Heating Units (HU)

Description Type
Process heater type dowtherm unit to 40 MMBTU/H
[11.5 MEGAW].
Material:
Default: *CS*
Duty:
Max: 40 MMBTU/H [11.5 MEGAW]
Max: 6,000 PSIG [40,000 KPA];
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
CYLINDER
Description Type
Centrifugal compression refrigeration unit produces
chilled water cooling medium for circulation. Includes
centrifugal compressor, driver, condenser, controls,
interconnecting piping, refrigeration capacity to 3,000
TONS [10,500 KW] and field erection.
Material:
Refrigeration capacity:
Range: 50 - 3,000 TONS-REF
[180 - 10,500 KW]
Evaporator temperature:
Range: -40 - 40 DEG F [-40 - 5 DEG C]
CENT COMPR
Mechanical compression refrigeration unit produces
liquified refrigerant for circulation. Includes
reciprocating compressor, driver, water cooled
condenser, controls, interconnecting piping,
refrigeration capacity to 500 TONS [1,750 KW] and
field erection.
Material:
Refrigeration capacity:
Range: 4 - 500 TONS-REF [15 - 1,750 KW]
Evaporator temperature:
Range: -80 - 40 DEG F [-60 - 5 DEG C]
MECHANICAL
Description Type
Portable stand-by diesel generator, skid-mounted to
800 KW.
Used primarily as a stand-by unit to supply electrical
power in the event of an interruption of the main
power supply. Diesel generator sets can also be
operated continuously.
Includes a voltage regulator3 phase sensing with
volts-per-hertz; auto start-stop module; electric
hourmeter; and voltmeter.
Also used as a standby for continual electrical service
during the interruption of normal power.
Fuel stop power in accordance with ISO 3046/1, DIN
6271, BS 5514, and ISO 8528. Ratings are based on
SAE J1349 standard conditions. These ratings also
apply at ISO 3046/1, DIN 6271 and BS 5514 standard
conditions. No generator set duration required below
55 DEG C (131 DEG F).
Material:
Output KW:
Range: 10 - 800 KW
PORTABLE
Turbo-generator includes condensing steam turbine
and cooled electric generator. Steam at 850 PSIG
[5,860 KPA] and 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], exhaust at
2.5 in HG [8.4 KPA] and capacity to 100,000 KVA.
Used for the continuous generation of electrical
power.
Material:
Output KVA:
Range: for steam, 800 - 100,000 KVA; for gas,
800 - 260,000 KVA.
Driver type:
*Steam*, Gas.
TURBO GEN
Water Treatment Systems
(WTS)
Description Type
Demineralizing system. Two-stage ion exchange unit.
First stage converts metal salts to acid and second
stage anion exchange removes acids. Optional
automatic degasification of oxygen and carbon
dioxide.
Material:
Water flow rate:
Range: 150 - 15,000 GPH [0.6 - 56.5 M3/H]
Mode of operation:
Default: *NONE*
NONE- No auto operation
AUTO- Auto degas CO2 + O2
DEMINERAL
Softening treatment system for boiler feedwater
consists of hot lime process softener, filters, Zeolite
softeners, associated piping and instruments.
Material:
Water flow rate:
10,000 - 50,000 GPH [38 - 189 M3/H]
SOFTENING
Aerators are used in aeration of effluent. The unit
consists of a drive motor, coupling, guard, rotor shaft
and impeller. Other features vary depending upon the
type as given below:
High Speed Floating general aerator with pontoons.
Low Speed Floating in addition to the gear box for
speed reduction, pontoons are included for floating.
Low Speed Fixed speed reduction by means of gear
box.
Material:
*CS*- Carbon steel316L- 316L
SS304- SS304NI- Nickel
SS316- SS316INCNL- Inconel
SS321- SS321MONEL- Monel
SS347- SS347HAST- Hastelloy
304L- 304LTI- Titanium
AERATOR
Water Treatment Systems (WTS) - continued
Description Type
AERATOR - continued
Aerator type:
Default: *LSFIELD*
LSFIXED- Low speed fixed aerator
LSFLOT- Low speed floating type aerator
HSFLOT- High speed floating type aerator
Aeration capacity:
Capacity is mass of O2 per hour. Enter capacity or
impeller diameter and power.
Impeller diameter:
Enter capacity or impeller diameter and driver power.
Driver power:
Enter capacity or impeller and driver power;
Range: 1.0 - 150.0 HP [0.75 - 112 KW]
Driver speed:
Number of pontoons:
Default: 3 for LSFLOT, 1 for HSFLOT, and none for
LSFIXED.
16 Flares and Stacks (G6) 16-1
Flares (FLR)
Stacks (STK)
16 Flares and Stacks (G6)
16-2 16 Flares and Stacks (G6)
Flares (FLR)
A flare system is composed of several parts: a flare tip, a seal, an ignition
system, a knock-out drum and a riser stack.
The flare tip may be either smokeless or non-smokeless. Smokeless flare tips
have nozzles for injecting steam at the exit of the tip. The high velocity steam
inspirates air into the flame resulting in more complete combustion and
therefore no smoke. Non-smokeless flare tips do not have these steam
injection nozzles.
Flares are also classified as continuous and emergency. Continuous flares
handle a continuous and steady flow of flare gas. Emergency flares are
designed to safely burn a sudden large release of combustible gases that are
not normally vented. Continuous flares are normally smokeless and
emergency flares non-smokeless.
The flare seal is a device for preventing air from diffusing down the stack and
creating a combustible mixture with the flare gas inside the stack. Flare gas is
ignited at the exit of the flare tip by one or more pilots. Should any of these
pilots go out, the ignition system would reignite them.
The flare vendor would supply all of the above components for a new
installation. The vendor may also be requested to supply a knock-out drum.
This device disengages entrained liquid from the flare gas. If this liquid is not
removed, it travels up the stack, is ignited and falls flaming to the ground
creating a fire hazard. If the flare is elevated, the final component of the flare
system is the riser stack. The stack is characterized by its method. A ground
flare requires no stack.
The diameter of the flare tip and the height of the stack that supports it (if it is
an elevated flare) is calculated using formulas that take into account process
conditions and safety considerations. The diameter of the flare tip is calculated
using the following formula:
D = sqrt(w/adfv)
where sqrt indicates the square root and:
D = tip diameter of the flare: INCHES [MM]
w = mass flowrate of the flare gas: LB/H [KG/H]
f = exit velocity / sonic velocity of the flare gas
d = density of the flare gas: PFC [KG/M3]
v = sonic velocity of the flare gas, calculated using sqrt(cT/M): FPS [M/S]
M = molecular weight of the flare gas
T = absolute temperature of the flare gas: DEG R [DEG K]
P = absolute pressure of the flare gas: (14.7 + PSIG) [101.3 + KPA]
a = 19.6 in I-P units = 0.0027123 in METRIC units.
R = 10.73 in I-P units = 8.3145 in METRIC units
c = 59682 in I-P units = 107427 in METRIC units
The total height of the stack is calculated using the following formula:
H = Y - 40D
where:
H = stack height, including flare type: FEET [M]
D = flare tip diameter: FEET [M]
and:
Y = sqrt [(EQwk/4 q)-x
2
]
where:
E = emissivity of the flame (see formula on page 16-4)
Q = heat content of the flare gas: BTU/LB [KG/KG]
w = mass flowrate of the flare gas: LB/H [KG/H]
k = 1.0 in I-P units, 0.8306 in METRIC units
q = allowable radiation intensity: BTU/SF/ H [W/M2]
x = radius of allowable radiation intensity (see formula on page 16-4):
FEET [M]
For flare types GUYED and DERRICK, and for self-supported stacks (SELF-
SUPP) 40 FEET [12 M] or less in height, the length of the bottom section (L) is
the total stack height. For self-supported stacks greater than 40 FEET [12 M]
in height, the length of the bottom section is determined from a consideration
of the load requirements.
Emissivity of the flame:
E = (0.048)sqrt (M)
where:
sqrt = square root
E = emmissivity of the flame
M = molecular weight of the flare gas
Radius of allowable radiation intensity:
X = (c)sqrt(QW/10
5
)
where:
X = radius of allowable radiation intensity: FEET [M]
Q = heat content of flare gas: BTU/LB [KJ/KG]
W = mass flowrate of flare gas: LB/H [KG/H]
c = 0.58 in I-P units, 0.5647 in METRIC units
The diameter and thickness of the flare stack is determined by structural considerations
such as loadings and method of support.
Description Type
Derrick-supported flare stack includes stack, support
structure, flare tip, molecular seal and ignition system.
Design based upon process conditions or given sizes.
Derricks are used to support tall stacks. Generally,
derrick supported flare stacks are cheaper than self-
supporting stacks at heights above 200 FEET [60 M].
Derricks are used instead of guyed stacks when land is
limited.
Shell material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Gas mass flow rate:
Enter either mass flow rate or diameter and length
(height) of flare.
For single diameter stacks, enter dimensions in bottom
section data.
Height Bottom section:
section data.
Diameter Middle section:
section data.
Height Middle section:
section data.
Diameter Top section:
section data.
DERRICK
Flares (FLR) - continued
Description Type
DERRICK - continued
Height Top section:
For single diameter stacks, enter
dimensions in bottom section data.
Gas temperature:
Molecular weight:
Default: *40*
For single diameter stacks, enter
dimensions in bottom section data.
Thickness Middle section:
section data.
section data.
Percent sonic velocity at exit:
Enter the gas exit velocity as a percent of sonic
velocity. Default: *20*
Flare type:
Default: *SMOKELESS*
SMOKELESS- Standard smokeless flare
AIR ASSIST- Air assisted smokeless flare
NONSMOKE- Non-smokeless flare
Radius radiation intensity:
Minimum radius at which a person would be exposed
to the allowable radiation.
Allowable radiation intensity:
Allowable radiation intensity at the specified minimum
radius. Default: *1,500* BTU/H/SF [4,500 W/M2]
Gas heat content:
Default: *20,000* BTU/LB [*46,500* KJ/KG]
Guyed flare stack includes stack, supports, flare tip,
molecular seal and ignition system. Design based upon
process conditions or given sizes.
This is generally the least expensive support system
for flare stacks over 50 FEET tall. However, a large
unobstructed area around the stack must be provided
so that there will be no interference with the guy wire.
Shell material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
GUYED
Description Type
GUYED - continued
Gas mass flow rate:
(height) of flare.
section data. Max: 96 INCHES [2,400 MM]
section data.
section data.
Height Top section:
section data.
Gas temperature:
Molecular weight:
Default: *40*
Thickness Bottom section: For single diameter stacks,
enter dimensions in bottom section data.
Thickness Middle section: For single diameter stacks,
Thickness Top section: For single diameter stacks,
Percent sonic velocity at exit: Enter gas exit velocity as
a percent of sonic velocity. Default: *20*.
Flare type:
Allowable radiation intensity: Allowable radiation
intensity at the specified minimum radius. Default:
*1,500* BTU/H/SF [*4,500* W/M2]
Gas heat content:
Description Type
Self-supported flare stack includes stack, flare tip,
molecular seal and ignition system; one, two or three
segments of different length and diameter.
This flare is generally used for stack heights up to 50
FEET and when the availability of land does not permit
guyed stacks, self-supporting stacks are cheaper than
derrick supported stacks for stack heights up to 200
FEET [60 M].
Shell material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Gas mass flow rate:
(height) of flare.
section data.
section data.
Height Top section:
section data.
Gas temperature:
Molecular weight:
Default: *40*
Thickness Bottom section: For single diameter stacks,
Thickness Middle section: For single diameter stacks,
Thickness Top section: For single diameter stacks,
Enter gas exit velocity as a percent of sonic velocity.
Default: *20*.
SELF SUPP
Description Type
SELF SUPP - continued
Flare type:
radius. Default: *1,500* BTU/H/SF [*4,500* W/M2]
Gas heat content:
Horizontal ground flare includes flare tip and horizontal
stack (30 FEET [10 M]) only; burn pit not included.
Design based upon process conditions or sizes.
This is an inexpensive flaring arrangement if land is
plentiful and cheap.
Shell material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Gas mass flow rate:
(height) of flare.
Length Bottom section:
section data.
Length Middle section:
section data.
HORIZONTAL
Description Type
HORIZONTAL - continued
Length Top section:
section data.
Gas temperature:
Molecular weight: Default: *40*
section data.
Thickness Middle section:
section data.
section data.
Enter gas exit velocity as a percent of sonic velocity.
Default: *20*.
Flare type: Default: *SMOKELESS*
radius. Default: *1,500* BTU/H/SF [*4,500* W/M2]
Gas heat content:
Recuperative thermal oxidizer for low concentration
non-chlorinated waste gas.
Material:
Standard gas load rate:
Low concentration non-chlorinated waste gas; burner,
box, stack, exchanger blower. Max: 20,000 CFM
Gas heat content:
Default: *13.00* BTU/CF [*484* KJ/M3]
Gas oxygen content:
Min: 0.0; Default: *14.00*
THRM OX LC
Stacks (STK)
Description Type
Vapor control flare for storage and loading. Includes
stack, burners, seal drum, flare, sensors, etc.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Standard gas load rate:
Max: 12,000 GPM [775 L/S]
Gas heat content:
Min: 50 BTU/CF [1,860 KJ/M3];
Default: *50* BTU/CF [1860 KJ/M3]
STORAGE
Description Type
Stack height to 200 FEET [60 M] and diameter to 60
INCHES [1500 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Height:
Range: 30 - 200 FEET [10 - 60 M]
Diameter:
Range: 24 - 96 INCHES [600 - 2,400 MM]
STACK
17 Introduction to Plant Bulks (G6) 17-1
Introduction to Plant Bulks
List of Plant Bulks
17 Introduction to Plant
Bulks (G6)
17-2 17 Introduction to Plant Bulks (G6)
Introduction to Plant Bulks
Plant bulk items are those materials or non-process equipment items that
provide support or services to process equipment within a unit area, such as
yard pipe and duct, concrete tanks, pipe rack, instrument panels, electrical
cable trays, insulation and paint.
List of Plant Bulks
The following is a list of plant bulks by chapter. The plant bulk descriptions in
Chapters 18 through 24 include some of the entry fields for defining plant
bulks. The descriptions include the minimum and maximum values and the
defaults. Default values appear between asterisks (*).
Chapter 18: Piping
Chapter 19: Civil
- YARD PIPE
- PIPE
- UTIL PIPE
- RCON PIPE
- DUCT RD
- DUCT SQ
- EQPT TRACE
- PIPE TRACE
- LAUNDER SQ
- LAUNDER RD
- COAT WRAP
- HOT TAP
- SCRAPER LR
- WELL HEAD
- HDPE
- SPRNK
- FOAM
- SPHOS
- WSHWR
- FLO PANEL

Above grade or buried yard piping
Above grade or buried piping
Utility pipe and utility stations
Buried concrete pipe
Round duct with hangers
Square duct with hangers
Fluid heat tracing for equipment
Fluid heat tracing for pipe
Square or rectangular launders
Half round launders
Coating and wrapping of buried pipe
Hot tap of production pipe for branch
Permanent scraper launcher and receiver
Pipe, valve and fittings at a well head
High density polyethylene pipe, fusion bonded
Sprinkler system (water / water+foam)
Foam fire systems
Standpipe and hose fire systems
Emergency eyewash and shower units
Sanitary flow diversion panel

- ABVGR TANK
- BELGR TANK
- CONCRETE
- SCAFFOLD
- TRENCH
- CONTAINMNT
- DIKE MEMBR
- YARD PIPE
- PIPE
- HDPE
- RCON PIPE
- BUILDING
- LINING
- PIPE RACK
- PIPE SUPPT
Above grade concrete tank
Below grade concrete tank
Foundations, slabs, other concrete items
Scaffold erection and dismantling
Drainage trench for paved areas
Tank containment - concrete paving, wall
Tank containment - dike and geomembrane
Building
Organic, metallic, abrasion resist. lining
Pipe rack
Tee or bent type pipe sleepers
Chapter 20: Steel
Chapter 21: Instrumentation
- OPN STL ST
- PIPE RACK
- PIPE SUPPT
- MILL BLDG
- PLATFORM
- GALLERY
- TRNS TOWER
- GRATE
- LADDER
- STAIR
- MISC STEEL
- FABR PLATE
- SIDING
- SAN PLATFM
Open steel structure
Pipe rack
Multiple-bay mill building
Elevated access platform - complete
Gallery for pipe, conveyor, personnel
Conveyor transfer tower
Steel grate - less support structure
Steel ladders
Stairs with grate, treads and handrail
Miscellaneous steel items
Fabricated steel plate items
Siding and roofing for steel structures
Sanitary platform
- INST PANEL
- INST TRAY
- INST WIRE
- PNU TUBING
- THCPL WIRE
- JUNC BOX
- MULTI CONT
- HL PIU
- LL PIU
- DATA HIWAY
- OPER CENT
Instrument panel - analog
Instrument cable tray
Instrument electronic transmission wire
Instrument pneumatic tubing runs
Thermocouple wire runs
Instrument junction box
Multifunction controllers
High energy level process interface unit
Low energy level process interface unit
Data highway cable
Operator center
Chapter 22: Electrical

General
- ELEC CABLE
- CONDUIT
- ELEC TRAY
- EQPT TRACE
- PIPE TRACE
- GRND GRID
- AREA LIGHT
- CTRL CABLE
- DEEP ANODE
- GALV ANODE
- SURF ANODE
- POT TEST
- RECTIFIER
- SOLAR PANL
- EMER LIGHT
- CABLE DUCT
Substation
- BUS DUCT
- TRANSFORM
- OIL C BRKR
- DISCNCT SW
- POLE LINE
- SUBSTN STL
- BREAKER
- MCC
- SWITCH BRD
- AC DC TRAN
- PKG TRANSF
- EM PWR SET
- UPS
- PF CORRECT
Electrical power cable run (3 or 4 wire)
Electrical conduit
Electrical cable tray
Electrical tracing for equipment
Electrical tracing for pipe
Ground grid
Area lighting on poles
Electrical control cable runs (600 v)
Group of anodes in deep well
Individual galvanic anode
Group of anodes in shallow surface bed
Potential measurement test station
Transformer/rectifier
Solar panel with storage batteries
Emergency light with battery
Underground cable duct
Bus duct
Electrical transformer: 1 or 2 tap
Oil circuit breakers
Disconnect switch
Power pole lines
Steel for substation structure
Current breaker: main, feeder, tie
Motor control center
Switch board
AC/DC Transformer
Package transformer with panel
Emergency diesel generator
Uninterrupted power supply
Power factor connection capacitor

Chapter 23: Insulation and Firepoofing
Chapter 24: Paint
- INSUL AREA
- INSUL PIPE
- FIREP AREA
- FIREP SSTL
General area insulation
Pipe insulation
General area fireproofing
Structural steel fireproofing
- PAINT AREA
- PAINT PIPE
- PAINT SSTL
General area painting
Pipe painting
Structural steel painting
18 Piping (G10) 1
Piping Plant Bulks
How Icarus Calculates Insulation Length on Piping
Trapping Distances (Steam)
Pipe Temperature Procedure
Pipe Insulation Material Procedure
Pipe Insulation Thickness Procedure
Pipe Paint Procedure
No. of Paint Coats Procedure
Pipe Diameters
Pipe Schedule
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter (Old)
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter (New)
Utility Piping Services
Utility Station Diagram
Default Piping Materials
Pipe Materials - Ferrous Materials
Carbon Steel
API Pipe
High Alloy Steel
Pipe Materials - Non-Ferrous Materials
Non - Ferrous Materials
Plastic and Resin Materials
Lined Steel Pipe
Spool Types
Remote & Field Shop Piping Procedures for Various Materials
Remote Shop Piping Procedures
Small Bore Piping Procedures
Icarus Pipe Fabrication, Erection and Testing Procedures
18 Piping (G10)
2 18 Piping (G10)
Valve and Fitting Options for Installation Bulk Piping
Valve Trim Specifications
18 Piping (G10) 3
Piping Plant Bulks
Piping plant bulks include transfer lines, utility piping, duct and tubed tracing.
Description Type
Transfer lines, yard pipe runs, above/below grade
Insulated and traced pipe runs.
For above-grade piping, hangers are supplied, but
support steel, pipe racks, etc. must be specified
elsewhere.
If buried pipe is specified, trenching, coating,
wrapping, sand bed and backfilling is provided.
Custom pipe spec:
Enter either Custom Pipe Spec (see Design Basis) or
Material, not both.
Pipe material:
Material, not both. See piping materials listed later in
this chapter. Default: *CS*.
Length:
Min: 1.0 FEET [0.35 M]
Pipe diameter:
Range: 0.5 - 72 INCHES DIAM [15 - 1,800 MM DIAM]
Default: determined from Custom Pipe Spec or 150
PSIG [1,000 KPA].
Design temperature:
Default: determined from Custom Pipe Spec or 68 DEG
F [20 DEG C].
Pipe thickness:
Leave blank if schedule is specified.
Pipe schedule or gauge:
Leave blank if thickness is specified.
STD - Standard wall pipe 100 - Pipe schedule
XS - Extra-strong pipe 120 - Pipe schedule
XXS - Double extra-strong 140 - Pipe schedule
5 - Pipe schedule 160 - Pipe schedule

YARD PIPE
4 18 Piping (G10)
Piping Plant Bulks - continued
Description Type
YARD PIPE - continued
10 - Pipe schedule 7G - SS gauge pipe only
20 - Pipe schedule 10G- SS gauge pipe only
30- Pipe schedule 11G - SS gauge pipe only
80- Pipe schedule
Flange class:
Default: determined from custom spec or pipe
material, temperature and pressure.
150- Class 150
300- Class 300
600- Class 600
900- Class 900
1500- Class 1500
2500- Class 2500
125- Class 125 WOG
250- Class 250 WOG
Configuration:
Default: *ABOVE*
ABOVE- Above-grade
BURIED- Buried
Depth buried pipe:
Below grade depth to top of pipe for buried pipe only.
This is the distance from grade level to the top of the
buried pipe. The trench depth is determined by the
below grade depth, the pipe diameter and sand bed (6
INCHES [150 MM] in depth). Range: 24 - 120 INCHES
[600 - 3,000 MM]. The default value will be taken as
36 INCHES [1,000 MM] minimally, or the depth of
footings specified for general civil data.
Buried Depth:
Default: 36 INCHES [1,000 MM]
Special pipe description:
Insulation, tracing, jacketing options. Default:
*NONE*
PPROT- Personnel protection insulation. The system
will generate 1.00 INCH of personnel protection for
100 percent of the pipe. This option can be used in
conjunction with the Personnel protect field, which
allows the user to tell the system how much pipe to
insulate.
For instance, if the user only needs 25 FEET of a 100
FEET run of pipe to be personnel protected, the user
can input the percentage in the Personnel protect
field. The system would generate 25 FEET plus waste.
18 Piping (G10) 5
Description Type
The thickness of the personnel protection insulation
generated will always be 1.00 INCH.
AC-T- Anti-condensation insulation/tube tracer
AC-E- Anti-condensation insulation/elec tracer
FP-T- Freeze protection insulation/tube tracer
FP-E- Freeze protection insulation/elec tracer
FULL- Fully jacketed pipe (see illustration)
EXPD- Exposed-weld jacketed pipe (see illustration)
T-SP- Spiral traced/tube conn./no cement
T-SPC- Spiral traced/tube conn./heat cement
P-SP- Spiral traced/pipe conn./no cement
P-SPC- Spiral traced/pipe conn./heat cement
T-LO- Longit. traced/tube conn./no cement
T-LOC- Longit. traced/tube conn./heat cement
P-LO- Longit. traced/pipe conn./no cement
P-LOC- Longit. traced/pipe conn./heat cement
E-AMB- Electrical traced/ambient temp control
E-PRO- Electrical traced/process temp control
STAND- Standard heat or cold insulation
Steam supply pressure for traced or jacketed pipe
only. Default: *25* PSIG [*175* KPA]
E-Trace maintenance temperature:
For electrical tracing - process maintenance
temperature; Max: 250 DEG F [120 DEG C] over
ambient. Default: 220 DEG F [105 DEG C]
Weld X-ray%:
Min: 100; Default: See Area Design Basis.
Number of elbows: Default: *0*
Number of reducers: Default: *0*
Number of tees: Default: *0*
Number of flanges:
Enter number of flanges in addition to those for valves.
Default: *0*
Number of blinds: Default: *0*
Number of spectacle blinds: Default: *0*
Number of threadless: Default: *0*
Number of gate valves: Default: *0*
Number of globe valves: Default: *0*

6 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
Number of ball valves: Default: *0*
Number of butterfly valves: Default: *0*
Number of check valves: Default: *0*
Number of control valves:
Size: same as pipe size to 4 INCHES [100 MM],
smaller than pipe otherwise. Default: *0*. See
Control Valve Options in Chapter 21 for default size
reductions.
Number of safety valves: Default: *0*
Number of regulating valves: Default: *0*
Number of angle valves: Default: *0*
Number of plug valves: Default: *0*
Number of orifice plates: Default: *0*
No. Knife Gate Valve: Default: *0*
Personnel protect:
Personnel protection percent coverage.
For example, if out of 50 FEET run of pipe, 12.5 FEET
needs personnel protection, enter 25 in this field.
The system will then generate 12.5 FEET of personnel
protection plus waste. The thickness of the personnel
protection insulation generated will always be 1.00
INCH. Default: *100*.
Note: You must select PPROT in the Special Pipe
Descr. field before the system will use the personnel
protection.
Control valve minimum class:
For fluid control valves only. Default: *3*.
3- Minimum 300 class fluid control valve
Control valve reduced size:
Fluid positioning CV only. Default: reduced 0 to 4 line
sizes based on size.
L- Line size control valves
R- Standard size control valves
Pipe material:
Material, not both. Default: from custom spec,
connected equipment or CS.
Pipe length:
Min: 1.0 FEET [0.35 M]
Pipe diameter:
Range: 0.5 - 72 INCHES DIAM [15 - 1,800 MM DIAM]
PIPE
18 Piping (G10) 7
Description Type
PIPE - continued
Fluid phase:
*G*- Gas
L- Liquid
S- Steam
(enter desired flow rate below)
Liquid flow rate:
Enter diameter or liquid flow rate or gas flow rate.
Gas flow rate:
Enter diameter or liquid flow rate or gas flow rate.
Fluid density:
Default based on fluid phase:
Gas Phase:0.0674 PCF [1.08 KCM]
Liquid Phase:62.4 PCF [1000 KCM)
Steam Phase:Calculated as the inverse of specific
volume, which is calculated from design pressure and
temperature as described under Steam Lines in the
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter section.
Fluid viscosity:
Default based on fluid phase:
Gas phase:0.025 CPOISE (0.025 millipascal-second)
Liquid Phase:1.0 CPOISE (1.0 millipascal-second)
Steam Phase:Calculated using an internal function of
design pressure and design temperature in which, for
a design pressure of 150 PSIG (~1000 KPA) and a
design temperature of 250 DEG F (120 DEG C),
default value is calculated to be 0.013 CPOISE.
PSIG [1,000 KPA].
Design temperature:
DEG F [20 DEG C].
Default: same as design temperature.
- Continued on next page-
PIPE
8 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
PIPE - continued
Pipe schedule or gauge:
Enter thickness or schedule/gauge, not both. Default:
calculated from material temperature, pressure.
STD- Standard wall pipe100- Pipe schedule
XS- Extra-strong pipe120- Pipe schedule
XXS- Double extra-strong140- Pipe schedule
5- Pipe schedule160- Pipe schedule
10- Pipe schedule7G- SS gauge pipe only
80- Pipe schedule
Valves and fittings:
Enter type and quantity of each valve and fitting
required for this line.
Pipe type:
CS and SS only. Default: custom/material spec if
entered, or else welded.
W- Welded pipe
S- Seamless pipe
Flange type:
Default: see project design basis
W- Weld-neck
S- Slip-on
B- Lap flanges and stub to 12 INCHES (300 MM), or
else weld-neck
Note: When Flange Type "Lap Flange + Stub" is used,
there is a line item called "FLG BU" in the item
description in the report, which includes the cost for
both the backup flange and the stub.
Flange class:
Default: determined from custom spec or pipe
material, temperature and pressure.
150- Class 150
300- Class 300
600- Class 600
900- Class 900
1500- Class 1500
2500- Class 2500
125- Class 125 WOG
250- Class 250 WOG
18 Piping (G10) 9
Description Type
PIPE - continued
Bend for elbow:
Substitute pipe bends for any specified elbow (up to
12 INCH [300 MM] pipe only).
*E*- Elbow
B- Bend instead of elbowBranch for tee:
Substitute fabricated branch nozzles for any specified
tees.
*T*-Tee
B-Branch
Pipe connector type:
SW- Socket weld connections; max: 2 INCHES (50
MM)
SB- Screw and backweld; max: 2 INCHES (50 MM)
SC- Screw (no backweld); max: 2 INCHES (50 MM)
WF- Weld pipe / flange valves
WW- Weld pipe / weld valves; min: 2 INCHES (50 MM)
VC- DI Victaulic couplings
VS- SS Victaulic couplings
PF- Press fit swage couplings; max: 2 INCHES (50
MM)
TC- Tri-clover sanitary; max: 4 INCHES (100 MM)
CB- Cherry-Burrel sanitary; max: 4 INCHES (100 MM)
Number of welds:
Default: determined from pipe length and combination
of valves and fittings
Control valve reduced size:
Fluid control valve only; default: reduced 0-4 sizes
except BVO and sanitary valves
L- Line size control valves
R- Standard size control valves
Control valve minimum class:
For fluid control valves only. Default: *3*.
Weld X-ray:
Stress relief:
C- Piping stress relief if code requires
Y- Stress relieve all piping
N- No piping stress relief required
Special pipe description:
Default: *NONE*
10 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
PIPE - continued
STAND- Standard heat or cold insulation
PPROT- Personnel protection insulation. The system
will generate 1.00 INCH of personnel protection for
100 percent of the pipe. This option can be used in
conjunction with the Personnel protection field,
which allows the user to tell the system how much
pipe to insulate. For instance, if the user only needs 25
FEET of a 100 FEET run of pipe to be personnel
protected, the user can input the percentage in the
Personnel protection field. The system would
generate 25 FEET plus waste. The thickness of the
personnel protection insulation generated will always
be 1.00 INCH.
AC-T- Anti-condensation insulation/tube tracer
AC-E- Anti-condensation insulation/elec tracer
FP-T- Freeze protection insulation/tube tracer
FP-E- Freeze protection insulation/elec tracer
FULL- Fully jacketed pipe (see illustration)
EXPD- Exposed-weld jacketed pipe (see illustration)
T-SP- Spiral traced/tube conn./no cement
T-SPC- Spiral traced/tube conn./heat cement
P-SP- Spiral traced/pipe conn./no cement
P-SPC- Spiral traced/pipe conn./heat cement
T-LO- Longit. traced/tube conn./no cement
T-LOC- Longit. traced/tube conn./heat cement
P-LO- Longit. traced/pipe conn./no cement
P-LOC- Longit. traced/pipe conn./heat cement
E-AMB- Electrical traced/ambient temp control
E-PRO - Electrical traced/process temp control
E-Trace maintenance temperature:
For electrical tracing - process maintenance
temperature. Default: 392 DEG F [200 DEG C] for M
series cable and 220 DEG F [105 DEG C]
for self-regulating cable. Max: 250 DEG F [120 DEG C]
for self-regulating cable and 1049 DEG F [565 DEG C]
for MI cable over low ambient temperature.
18 Piping (G10) 11
Description Type
PIPE - continued
E-trace cable type: Use A series to 120 DEG F[48
DEG C], P series to 250 DEG F[120 DEG C] and M
series to 1049 DEG F [565 DEG C] over low ambient
temperature.
3A 3 W/FT (10 W/M) Chemelex BTV2-CT cable
10A 10 W/FT(33 W/M) Chemelex BTV2-CT cable
5P 5 W/FT (16 W/M) Chemelex XTV2-CT cable
M2 - 600V, dual conductor MI cable, 9 OHM/FT [29.5
OHM/M]
M4 - 600V, dual conductor MI cable, 4.14 OHM/FT
[13.6 OHM/M]
[3.77 OHM/M]
[1.66 OHM/M]
[0.656 OHM/M]
[0.328 OHM/M]
[0.184 OHM/M]
[0.0922 OHM/M]
[0.042 OHM/M]
[0.016 OHM/M]
E-trace cable category:
Default: *S*, self-regulating cable
Select M for MI tracing cable or S for self-regulating
tracing cable.
Heat trace fluid:
STM- Steam trapped
OTHR- Other fluid / no traps
Valve packing or seal:
*S*- Standard valve packing
E- Environmental (double stem)
B- Bellows seal SV/GL/GA else environmental
packing
12 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
PIPE - continued
Pipe sandblast percent of area:
Default: 100%; see design basis
Pipe insulation thickness:
Default from insulation schedule and unit area specs
(see minimum insulation temperature)
Pipe insulation jacket type:
Default: see project design basis; AL, SS, CS.
Pipe insulation type:
CA- Calcium silicate
MW- Mineral wool
FG- Foam-glass
Personnel protection:
Personnel protection percent coverage.
For example, if out of 50 FEET run of pipe, 12.5 FEET
needs personnel protection, enter 25 in this field.
The system will then generate 12.5 FEET of personnel
protection plus waste. The thickness of the personnel
protection insulation generated will always be 1.00
INCH. Default: see unit area pipe specs.
Note: You must select PPROT in the Special Pipe
Descr. field before the system will use the personnel
protection.
Pipe installation option:
Default: above ground pipe or supports on rack
(specified elsewhere)
*A*- Above ground piping
B - Buried piping
Depth buried pipe:
Min: 24.0 INCHES [600.0 MM]; Max: 120 INCHES
[3000.0 MM]. Below grade depth to top of pipe for
buried pipe only. Default: system calculated.
Steam gauge press:
Max: 25 PSIG [175 KPA]. Steam supply pressure for
traced or jacketed pipe.
18 Piping (G10) 13

Description Type
PIPE - continued
Pipe routing type:
Specify pipe routing type to be used from the external
fitting specs file specified at the design basis level (see
your software users guide for instructions on where to
specify the file name).
AGU- Above ground unit piping
AGR- Above ground rack piping
UGU- Under ground unit piping
MRP- Machine room piping
OTP- Miscellaneous piping
Once a pipe routing type is specified, the system uses
the data in the external fitting specs file for the valve
rules, fitting rules, horizontal allowance, vertical
allowance and the diameter size definition. Pipe
routing type is meant to refer to the location of the
piping. However, the above descriptions are for
reference only; using the fitting specs file, the user
controls the context of the rules and can assign
meaning at his discretion.
The available fitting specs files are listed in the
PIPEDATA.SET file that the user places in the main
PIDS folder: [Icarus software folder]\PIDS. The user
sets up this file by copying the PIPEDATA.SET provided
in the [Icarus software folder]\New Files\dat\pids
folder to the main PIDS folder. The user can edit the
PIPEDATA.SET file in a true text editor, such as
Notepad, adding fitting specs files simply by typing in
the file names.
If the user has not set up this file, then the system
will look for a file called FITSPC.DAT. If available, this
file will be used as the fitting specs file. If not, a set of
default rules will be used. A default FITSPC.DAT file is
available at [Icarus software folder]/New Files/dat/
pids. This file can be copied, edited, and used as a
basis for alternate fitting specs files. Fitting specs files
must be listed in the PIPEDATA.SET file and placed in
the main PIDS folder.
See Figure FITSPC.DAT for an illustration explaining
the data in the FITSPC.DAT file.
14 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
PIPE - continued
Fitting rules application:
Select whether to use the fitting rules.
Y- Use fitting rules for the type of piping
N - Do not use fitting rules
Fitting and valve rules are specified in the external
fitting specs file (see illustration on following page),
selected at the project design basis level. Fitting and
valve codes are available in Valve and Fitting Options
for Installation Bulk Piping in this chapter. You put in
the number of each valve and fitting type per 100 feet
(30 meters). The length used in these calculations is
after the horizontal and vertical adjustments have
been accounted for.
Valve rules application:
Select whether to use the fitting and/or valve rules.
Y- Use valve rules for the type of piping
N - Do not use valve rules
Fitting and valve rules are specified in the external
fitting specs file (see illustration on following page),
selected at the project design basis level. Fitting and
valve codes are available in Valve and Fitting Options
for Installation Bulk Piping in this chapter. Users put in
the number of each valve and fitting type per 100 feet
(30 meters). The length used in these calculations is
after the horizontal and vertical adjustments have
been accounted for.
18 Piping (G10) 15
Figure FITSPC.DAT
16 18 Piping (G10)
Note: The user specifies four sets of diameter sizes, and four sets of fitting/
valve rules for each routing type. The user specifies only one set of allowance
rules per routing type.
Note: THe user is not limited to the first eight columns for fittings or to the
last eight columns for valves; this is just the suggested use of the columns.
The total percentage distribution should equal 100, but does not need to be -
the system will not crash if the distribution is not 100%.
Always edit the FITSPC.DAT file using a true text editor such as Notepad or
EDITPLUS (shareware).
To use a specific fitting specs file, add it to PIPEDATA.SET and move it to the /
PIDS directory. Then, select it at the base level (see softwares user guide). To
use this file with piping, add the above/below grade pipe item (PIPE) and
select one of the piping routing types in the form. Once the routing type is
selected, the system will use the file for this piping item.
The user may select alternative fitting specification files by changing the fitting
specification file name at the design basis level.
18 Piping (G10) 17
Description Type
PIPE - continued
Horizontal allowance:
Select whether to use horizontal allowance.
Y- Use horizontal allowance for the type of piping
N- Do not use horizontal allowance
Horizontal allowance is specified for each piping
routing type in the external fitting specification file. An
entry of 100 means the system will not adjust the
input length, whereas an entry of 150 will increase
the input length by 50 percent.
Vertical allowance:
Select whether to use vertical allowance.
Y- Use vertical allowance for the type of piping
N - Do not use vertical allowance
Vertical allowance is specified for each piping routing
type in the external fitting specification file. An entry of
100 means the system will not adjust the input
length, whereas an entry of 150 will increase the
input length by 50 percent.
Primary equipment user tag:
User tag of the primary (i.e., upstream) equipment to
which this pipe is connected. Default: NONE.
Primary equipment connection:
Connection location of the pipe on the primary (i.e.,
upstream) equipment; Default: not connected
<Blank>.
<Blank>- not connected to any equipment
S- connected to shell of equipment
U- connected to tube side of equipment
J- connected to jacket of equipment
B- connected to bottom of double diameter tower
T- connected to top of double diameter tower
Secondary equipment user tag:
User tag of the secondary (i.e., downstream)
equipment to which this pipe is connected. Default:
NONE.
Secondary equipment connection:
Connection location of the pipe on the secondary (i.e.,
downstream) equipment; Default: not connected
<Blank>.
<Blank>- not connected to any equipment
S- connected to shell of equipment
U- connected to tube side of equipment
J- connected to jacket of equipment
B- connected to bottom of double diameter tower
T- connected to top of double diameter tower
18 18 Piping (G10)
Jacket Pipe Illustrations
You can select jacketing for PIPE and YARD PIPE under Special Pipe
Description.
18 Piping (G10) 19
Description Type
Utility service lines, stations: standard configuration
Utility headers: runs of pipe providing up to 15
different services. Utility station: short runs of small-
bore pipe providing local air, water, steam and
condensate drain services.
Pipe material:
See piping materials listed later in this chapter.
Default: *CS* (Carbon steel).
Number utility stations:
A utility station consists of three 100 FEET [30 M] lines
of 1 INCHES [25 MM] diameter pipe for air, water and
steam service, and one 50 FEET [15 M] condensate
line of 0.75 INCHES [20 MM] diameter.
Default: *1*. Enter 0.0 to exclude all utility stations.
Length parameter:
Pipe lengths = 1 x length parameter, except firewater
loop/lat. = 2 x, hp steam = 0.5 x. Default: 100 FEET
[30 M].
Utility station drop length:
Applies to all utility stations described above.
Default: 100 FEET [30 M] for air, water, and steam
service and 50 FEET [15 M] for condensate return.
Header diameter symbol:
Diameter symbol defines size of any line not specified.
See Utility Piping Services later in this chapter.
L- Low/small diameter
M- Medium diameter
H- High/large diameter
V- Very large diameter
Firewater loop diameter:
Default: determined by diameter symbol, enter 0.0 to
delete if diameter symbol set.
Firewater lateral diameter:
Potable water header diameter:
delete if diameter symbol set. Line will be insulated
based on location:
US - uninsulated,
UK - insulated.
Cooling water supply diameter:
based on location: US - uninsulated, UK - insulated.
UTIL PIPE
20 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
UTIL PIPE - continued
Cool water return diameter:
base on location: US - uninsulated, UK - insulated.
Low Pressure (LP) steam header diameter:
Medium Pressure (MP) steam header diameter:
High Pressure (HP) steam header diameter:
Condensate return diameter:
Plant air header diameter: Default: determined by
diameter symbol, enter 0.0 to delete if diameter
symbol set.
Instrument air header diameter:
Fuel gas header diameter: Default: determined by
diameter symbol, enter 0.0 to delete if diameter
symbol set.
Inert gas header diameter:
Chemical sewer diameter:
Flare header diameter:
Buried concrete pipe, manholes, elbows, tees: trench,
backfill Includes trenching and backfilling.
Diameter:
Range: 12 - 98 INCHES [300 - 2,450 MM]
Number of manholes: Default: *0*
RCON PIPE
18 Piping (G10) 21
Description Type
Process ductwork, round
Stiffeners and support hangers are designed, but
support steel, racks, etc. must be specified elsewhere.
Duct material:
Default: *GALV*
GALV- Galvanized CS
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
AL- Aluminum
Duct diameter:
If the duct capacity is specified, the duct dimension is
determined from the capacity and the gas velocity. The
velocity may be specified, or the system uses a
variable velocity between 2000 and 4000 FPM [36600
- 72100 M/H] depending on the specified pressure.
The calculated duct dimension is rounded to a
standard size.
Duct design pressure:
Should be specified (indicate + or -) for design of duct
thickness and stiffeners; -60 - 60 INCHES H2O
[114,930 - 14,930 PA]. Default: *-20* INCHES H2O
[*-4,980* PA].
Duct gauge:
Leave blank if thickness is entered; enter thickness if
thicker than 8 gauge. Range: 8 - 30.
Duct wall thickness:
Default: determined by size and pressure, leave blank
if duct gauge number entered.
Duct class:
The duct class indicates the quantity and abrasiveness
of particulate material. Default: *1*.
1 - Non-abrasive applied.
2- Mod-abras./lo concern.
3- Hi-abras.lo concern.
4- Hi-abras./hi concern.
Configuration:
Seam configuration; applies to class 1 duct only.
Default: *LONG*
LONG- Longitudinal seam
SPIR- Spiral seam
Duct insulation thickness:
Default: 0.0 INCHES [0.0 MM].
Particle density:
Density of concentrated particulates for duct classes 2,
3 and 4. Default: *25* PCF [*400* KG/M3].
DUCT RD
22 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
DUCT RD - continued
Stiffener size:
Default: size and spacing determined from duct
pressure, dimensions and thickness.
Stiffener spacing:
Support weight:
Hanger weight (each); support steel, racks, etc. must
be specified elsewhere. The system determines the
support weight based on standard spacing
of 12 FEET [3.5 M] and the duct loads. The calculated
weight and spacing may be replaced with an input
weight and spacing.
Support spacing: Default: *12* FEET [*3.5* M].
Number of dampers: Default: *0*
Number of access doors: Default: *0*
Number Flexible connection: Default: *0*
Process ductwork, square
Stiffeners and support hangers are designed,
but support steel, racks, etc. must be specified
elsewhere.
Duct material:
Default: *GALV*
GALV- Galvanized CS
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
AL- Aluminum
Duct width:
If the duct capacity is specified, the duct dimension is
determined from the capacity and the gas velocity.
The velocity may be specified, the system uses a
variable velocity between 2000 and 4000 FPM [36600
- 73100 M/H] depending on the specified pressure.
The calculated duct dimension is rounded to a
standard size.
DUCT SQ
18 Piping (G10) 23
Description Type
DUCT SQ - continued
Duct design pressure:
Should be specified (indicate + or -) for design of duct
thickness and stiffeners. -60 - 60 INCHES H2O [-
14,930 - 14,930 PA].
Default: *-20* INCHES H2O [*-4,980* PA].
Duct gauge:
Leave blank if thickness is entered; enter thickness if
thicker than 8 gauge. Range: 8 - 30.
Duct wall thickness:
Default: determined by size and pressure, leave blank
if duct gauge number entered.
Duct class:
The duct class indicates the quantity and abrasiveness
of particulate material. Default: *1*.
1 - Non-abrasive applied.
2- Mod-abras./lo concern.
3- Hi-abras.lo concern.
4- Hi-abras./hi concern.
Duct insulation thickness: Default: 0.0 INCHES [0.0
MM].
Partical density: Density of concentrated particulates
for duct classes 2, 3 and 4. Default: *25* PCF [*400*
KG/M3].
Stiffener size:
Stiffener spacing:
Support weight:
Hanger weight (each); support steel, racks, etc. must
be specified elsewhere. The system determines the
support weight based on standard spacing of 12 FEET
[3.5 M] and the duct loads. The calculated weight and
spacing may be replaced with an input weight and
spacing.
Support spacing: Default: *12* FEET [*3.5* M].
Number of dampers: Default: *0*
Number of access doors: Default: *0*
Number Flexible connection: Default: *0*
24 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
Fluid heat tracing existing equipment
The item of equipment and its insulation are not
included; these are assumed to be specified elsewhere
in the project.
Material:
Default: *CU*
CU- Copper
SS- Stainless steel
Tracer tube length:
This is the total length of 0.5 INCHES O.D. tubing
required to heat trace an item specified elsewhere in
the estimate. This length does not include the run to
and from supply and return headers, as these lengths
are specified in the Dist./Supply Header and the Dist./
Return Header fields.
Tracing symbol:
T-SP- Traced: tube conn. - spiral tracer - no cement
T-SPC- Traced: tube conn. - spiral tracer - with cement
P-SP- Traced: pipe conn. - spiral tracer - no cement
P-SPC- Traced: pipe conn. - spiral tracer - with cement
Distance to supply header:
Distance specified is from traced equipment item to
supply and return headers. The headers are not
included in this item, but are specified by the user
elsewhere in the estimate for Area Pipe Specifications
or as a separate bulk item description. Min: 5.0 FEET
[1.6 M]; Default: *25* FEET [*7.5* M].
Distance to return header:
Distance specified is from traced equipment item to
supply and return headers. The headers are not
included in this item, but are specified by the user
elsewhere in the estimate for Area Pipe Specifications
or as a separate bulk item description. Min: 5.0 FEET
[1.6 M]; Default: *25* FEET [*7.5* M].
Heating medium:
Default: *STM*
STM- Steam heating medium
OTHR- Other heating medium
EQPT TRACE
18 Piping (G10) 25
Description Type
Fluid heat tracing for existing pipe runs
0.5 INCHES O.D. tubing applied to existing pipe. The
traced pipe and its insulation are not included; these
are assumed to be specified elsewhere in the project.
An insulation adjustment is included to account for
tracers and tracer connections to headers.
Material:
Default: *CU*
CU- Copper
SS- Stainless steel
Traced pipe length:
The pipe being traced is not included, but must be
specified elsewhere.
Traced pipe diameter:
The pipe being traced is not included, but must be
Tracing symbol:
T-SP- Traced: tube conn. - spiral tracer - no cement
T-SPC- Traced: tube conn. - spiral tracer - with cement
P-SP- Traced: pipe conn. - spiral tracer - no cement
P-SPC- Traced: pipe conn. - spiral tracer - with cement
T-LO- Traced: tube conn. - longit. tracer - no cement
T-LOC- Traced: tube conn. - longit tracer - with cement
P-LO- Traced: pipe conn. - longit tracer - no cement
P-LOC- Traced pipe conn. - longit tracer - with cement
Distance to supply header:
Distance specified is from traced pipe to supply or
return header. Min: 5 FEET [1.6 MM]; Default: *25*
FEET [*7.5* M].
Distance to return header:
Distance specified is from traced pipe to supply or
return header. Min: 5 FEET [1.6 MM]; Default: *25*
FEET [*7.5* M].
Heating medium:
Default: *STM*
STM - Steam heating medium
OTHR - Other heating medium
Default *25* PSIG [*175* KPA]. (See Trapping
Distances tables.)
PIPE TRACE
26 18 Piping (G10)
STEAM Tracing - Number of Tracers Per Line
Trapping Distance (Steam)
Traced Process Line
Size
25 PSIG
[175 KPA]
150 PSIG
[1050 KPA]
200 PSIG
[1400
KPA]
No. of 0.5 INCH
[12.7 MM] O.D.
Tracers per Line
0.50 INCHES
[12.7 - 25.4 MM]
150 FEET
[45.72 M]
250 FEET
[76.20 M]
300 FEET
[91.44]
1 OR 2
1.25 -1.50 INCHES
[31.75-38.10 MM]
130 FEET
[39.62 M]
200 FEET
[60.96 M]
230 FEET
[70.10 M]
1 OR 2
2.00 INCHES
50.80 MM]
120 FEET
[36.57 M]
180 FEET
[54.86 M]
200 FEET
[60.96 M]
1
2.50 - 3.00 INCHES
[63.50 - 76.20 MM]
100 FEET
[30.48]
150 FEET
[45.72 M]
190 FEET
[57.91 M]
1
3.50 - 4.00 INCHES
[88.90 - 101.60 MM]
150 FEET
[45.72 M]
-
240 FEET
[73.15 M]
240 FEET
[73.15 M]
-
350 FEET
[106.68 M]
270 FEET
[82.29 M]
-
400 FEET
[121.92 M]
1
-
2
over 4.00 INCHES
[over 101.60 MM]
120 FEET
[36.57 M]
-
200 FEET
[60.96 M]
-
250 FEET
[76.20 M]
200 FEET
[60.96 M]
-
300 FEET
[91.44 M]
-
360 FEET
[109.72 M]
210 FEET
[64.00 M]
-
340 FEET
[103.63 M]
-
420 FEET
[128.01 M]
1
-
2
-
3
Traced Process Line
Size (INCHES)
No. of 0.5 INCH [12.7 MM]
O.D. Tracers per Line
< 3 1
> to < 8 2
> 8 3
18 Piping (G10) 27
Trapping Distance (Steam) - continued
How Icarus Calculates Insulation Length on
Piping
All pipe insulation is calculated and reported as straight run equivalent length.
The final length is calculated by adding the specified length of straight run
pipe, plus straight run equivalent lengths for fittings (4 FEET [1.22 M]/fitting)
and valves (7 FEET [2.13 M]/valve), plus an overall 5% allowance for wastage.
The final equation in l-P is:
[pipe length + (fitting count * 4) + (valve count *7)] * 105%
Example calculations:
Specified
100 FEET [30.5 M] 4 INCH pipe +
Reported Length
FEET M
0 fittings, 0 valves 105 32
1 FL, 0 valves 109 33
0 fittings, 1 GA (this creates 2 matching FL) 121 37
1 FL, 1 GA 125 38
1 FL, 3 EL, 1 GA 138 42
28 18 Piping (G10)
18 Piping (G10) 29
30 18 Piping (G10)
18 Piping (G10) 31
32 18 Piping (G10)
18 Piping (G10) 33
34 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
Launders, half-round, rubber lined
Steel launder lined with 0.25 INCHES [6.0 MM] natural
rubber.
Material is RBLCS (Rubber-lined carbon steel)
Cover Type:
Default: *NONE*
COVRD- Plate cover
NONE- No cover
LAUNDER RD
Launders, square/rectangular, rubber lined
Steel launder lined with 0.25 INCHES [6.0 MM]
natural rubber.
Material is RBLCS (Rubber-lined carbon steel)
Cover Type:
Default: *NONE*
COVRD- Plate cover
NONE- No cover
LAUNDER SQ
Coat and wrap pipe for burial: manual or machine

Application may be by hand or machine.
Application Symbol:
HAND- Manual
MACH- Machine
COAT WRAP
Hot tap: production line to branch line
Split tee or nipple, flange and valve provided; branch
must be specified elsewhere.
Available only in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and
Icarus Process Evaluator.
Material:
Default: *GRBW*
GRBW- API5L and 5LS Gr. B304LP- 304L
X42W- API5LX Grade X42316P- SS316
X52W- API5LX Grade X52316LP- 316L
X60W- API5LX Grade X60321P- SS321
X65W- API5LX Grade X65AL- Aluminum
A 53- A 53CU- Copper
A 106- A 106NI- Nickel
A333C- 3.5 NiMONEL- Monel
A335C- 1.25Cr -.5Mo - SiINCNL- Inconel
304P- SS304
HOT TAP
18 Piping (G10) 35
Description Type
HOT TAP - continued
Flange Class:
Default: *600*
150- Class 150
300- Class 300
600- Class 600
900- Class 900
1500- Class 1500
2500- Class 2500
125- Class 125 WOG
250- Class 250 WOG
Permanent scraper launcher and receiver
A pair (launcher and receiver) is provided for each
item.
Icarus Process Evaluator.
Material:
Default: *X52W*
X52W- API5LLX-X52 welded
X42W- API5LX-X42 welded
GRBW- API5L - gr B/5LS welded
X52S- API5LX-X52 seamless
X42S- APIFLX-X42 seamless
GRBS- API5L - gr B seamless
Flange Class:
Default: *600*
150- Class 150
300- Class 300
600- Class 600
900- Class 900
1500- Class 1500
2500- Class 2500
125- Class 125 WOG
250- Class 250 WOG
SCRAPER LR
36 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
Pipe, valve, and fittings at well head
Standard valve and fitting configuration plus 70 FEET
[20 M] of pipe.
Aspen Process Economic Evaluator.
Material:
Default: *X52W*
X52W- API5LLX-X52 welded
GRBW- API5L - gr B/5LS welded
X42S- APIFLX-X42 seamless
GRBS- API5L - gr B seamless
Pipe diameter:
Default: *8* INCHES DIAM [*200* MM DIAM]
Type of well:
Default: *PROD*
PROD- Production well
INJEC- Injection well
WELL HEAD
Sprinkler fire system (water / water+foam)
Pipe material:
*A 53*, 304P, 316P
Outlet arrangement:
*PLANE*- Outlet devices arranged over planar area
ARRAY- Outlet devices arranged over equipment area
Diameter or length: If outlet arrangement is PLANE,
with devices arranged over planar area, enter the
plane area; if outlet arrangement is ARRAY, with
devices arranged over equipment area, enter the
component length or diameter.
Width: If outlet arrangement is PLANE, with devices
arranged over planar area, enter the width of the
plane area; if outlet arrangement is ARRAY, with
devices arranged over equipment area, enter the
component width. Default: same as Diameter or
length.
Height:
For ARRAY outlet arrangement only, enter height of
outlet configuration. Default: *20* FEET [*6* M].
SPRNK
18 Piping (G10) 37
Description Type
SPRNK - continued
Number of levels:
for PLANE outlet arrangement only, enter number of
levels or floors having the indicated dimensions.
Default: *1*.
Number of sprinklers:
Default based on hazard type and area dimensions.
Sprinkler location:
*OUT*- outdoor installation
IN- indoor installation
Hazard type:
*EFLH*- Extinguished fire - light hazard occupancy
EFOH1- Extinguished fire - ordinary hazard grp 1
EFOH2- Extinguished fire - ordinary hazard grp 2
EFXH1- Extinguished fire - extra hazard grp 1 occup
EFXH2- Extinguished fire - extra hazard grp 2 occup
EPXH2- Exposure prot. - extra hazard grp 2 occup
CBXH2- Control burning - extra hazard grp 2 occup
PFXH2- Fire prevention - extra hazard grp 2 occup
System type:
*WSPNK*- Water sprinkler
WSPRY- Water spray
FSPNK- Foam sprinkler
FSPRY- Foam spray
Pipe system type:
*DRSYS*- Dry pipe system
WTSYS- Wet pipe system
DPPNU- Deluge sys/pilot head/pneumatic actuator
DPHYD- Deluge sys/pilot head/hydraulic actuator
DELEC- Deluge sys/electric actuator
Detector type:
*SPRKR*- Automatic sprinkler detector
FXTMP- Fixed temperature detector
R-O-R- Rate of rise temperature detector
SMKAL- Smoke alarm detector
NONE- No detectors installed

38 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
SPRNK - continued
Application density:
Max: 1.00 GPM/SF [0.650 L/S/M2]
Volume of water/foam required per unit area. Default
based on hazard/class.
Coverage area per sprinkler:
Max: 400 SF [37.0 M2]
Number of hose stations: Default: 0
Number of hydrants: Default: 0
Foam concentration: Default: 3%; Max: 100%; for
foam System type only
Foam tank option:
*NONE*- No foam storage tank required
BALPR- Tank with balanced pressure proportioning
PRTNK- Tank with pressure proportioning
ARPMP- Tank with around the pump proportioning
Tank design gauge pressure:
Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA]; for foam systems
only
Tank temperature:
Default: *68* DEG F [*20* DEG C]; for foam systems
only
Pipe sizing method:
*HYDLC*- Hydraulic pressure drop calculations
PSCHD- Schedule of pipe sizes vs. number of
sprinklers
Foam fire systems
Pipe material:
*A 53*, 304P, 316P.
Outlet arrangement:
*PLANE*- Outlet devices arranged over planar area
ARRAY- Outlet devices arranged over equipment area
Diameter or length:
If outlet arrangement is PLANE, with devices arranged
over planar area, enter the plane area; if outlet
arrangement is ARRAY, with devices arranged over
equipment area, enter the component length or
diameter.
Width:
If outlet arrangement is PLANE, with devices arranged
over planar area, enter the width of the plane area; if
outlet arrangement is ARRAY, with devices arranged
over equipment area, enter the component width.
Default: same as Diameter or length.
FOAM
18 Piping (G10) 39
Description Type
FOAM - continued
Height: For ARRAY outlet arrangement only, enter
height of outlet configuration. Default: *20* FEET
[*6* M].
Number of levels:
Default: 1.00; for PLANE outlet arrangement only,
number of levels or floors having the indicated
dimensions.
Number of foam outlets:
Default based on area size.
System type:
*LOEXP*- Low expansion foam system
MDEXP- Medium expansion foam system
HIEXP- High expansion foam system
Pipe system type:
*DRFXP*- Dry pipe system
WTFXP- Wet pipe system
DLFXP- Deluge system
PORT- Portable system with nozzle
Foam delivery option:
FCHMB- Foam chambers
MONTR- Monitors
*NOZLE*Nozzles
HNDLN- Hand lines
SPRKR- Sprinklers
Application density:
Volume of water/foam required per unit of area.
Default based on hazard/class.
Number of hose stations: Default: 0
Number of hydrants: Default: 0
Foam concentration:
Default: 3.00%; Max: 100%
Foam tank option:
*NONE*- No foam storage tank required
BALPR- Tank with balanced pressure proportioning
PRTNK- Tank with pressure proportioning
ARPMP- Tank with around the pump proportioning
Tank design gauge pressure:
Tank temperature:
40 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
Standpipe and hose fire systems
Pipe material:
*A 53*, 304P, 316P
Length:
Area length for determining number of hoses
Width:
Area width for determining number of hoses; default:
same as length
Number of levels:
Default: 1.00; number of levels or floors having the
indicated dimensions.
System type:
*C-I*- Class I stand pipe and hose system
C-II- Class II stand pipe and hose system
C-III- Class III stand pipe and hose system
Number of hoses:
Default based on class and area dimensions
Pipe system type:
*DRAUT*- Automatic dry system; Class I only
DRSMA- Semi-automatic dry system; Class I only
DRMNL- Manual dry system; Class I only
WTAUT- Automatic wet system
WTMNL- Manual wet system
Minimum flow per hose:
Max: 1,250.0 GPM [78.0 L/S];
Default: for C-I, C-III, 500 GPM [31 L/S]; for C-II,
100 GPM [6.3 L/S]
Number of hydrants:
Default: 0
SPHOS
Emergency eyewash and shower units
Pipe material:
*A 53*, 304P, 316P
Number of wash units:
Default: 0
Enter the number of wash units (type specified below
in Wash unit type field) to be included at the
eyewash station.
Number of shower units:
Default: 0
Enter the number of full-body showers.
Number of combined units:
Default: 0
WSHWR
18 Piping (G10) 41
Description Type
WSHWR - continued
When a quantity is specified, this combination unit
provides a combination full-body shower and wash unit
(type specified below in Wash unit type field).
Number of nozzles per shower:
Default: 1; Max: 12
Enter the number of nozzles per shower unit.
Length supply pipe:
Default: *50.0* FEET [*50.0* M]
Wash unit type:
EYE1- single outlet eyewash unit
*EYE2*- double outlet eyewash unit
FACE- face wash unit
COMB- combination eye and face wash unit
Drain requirement:
*YES*, NO
Pipe length:
Min: 1.0 FEET [0.35 M]
Pipe diameter:
2-54 INCHES DIAM [50-1350 MM DIAM]
Default: based on SDR and temperature
Temperature: Default: 73 DEG F [23 DEG C]
Configuration: *BURIED*, ABOVE
Depth of buried pipe:
24-120 INCHES [600-3000 MM]
Number of Elbows: Default: *0*
Number of Reducers: Default: *0*
Number of Wyes: Default: *0*
Number of Yes: Default: *0*
Number of Blinds: Default: *0*
HDPE PIPE
Panel consists of pipe with swivelling elbow (must be
positioned manually) used to divert flow to one of four
pipes. If included, proximity sensor identifies position of
elbow. Quick disconnects are used to connect elbow with
downstream pipe. Used in the sanitary industry.
Panel enclosures are stainless steel for sanitation.
Custom Pipe Spec: enter either Custom Pipe Spec (see
Design Basis) or material, not both. Default: 304 PS
FLO PANEL
42 18 Piping (G10)
Description Type
FLO PANEL - continued
Material:
*304PS*- SS304, sanitary grade pipe material
316PS- SS316, sanitary grade pipe material
Material selection is for piping (wetted part) only;
enclosure material is SS316.
Pipe diameter:
Standard pipe diameters between1.50 INCHES [40.0
MM] and 4.00 INCHES [100 MM]
Panel type:
*DWALL*- Double wall type panel
SWALL- Single wall type panel
No. stations/panel:
MIN: *2*; MAX: 8
Proximity sensors:
NO- No proximity sensors will be provided
*YES*- Proximity sensors will be provided
Clamp connections:
select clamp connection type for front (U-bend) side
*CB*- Cherry-Burrel couplings
TC- Tri-Clover couplings
No. of extra U-bends:
Default: *0*
Ferrules on outlet:
*NO*- No ferrule will be provided
YES- Ferrules will be provided
Clamp type for back side is the same as front side
when ferrules are provided.
18 Piping (G10) 43
Pipe Diameters
(Inch - Pound diameters are for ANSI B36.19)
INCHES MM
0.5
1
15
1
.75 20
1 25
1.25
1
32
1.51
40
1
2 50
2.5
1
65
1
3 80
3.5
1
90
1
4 100
5
1
125
1
6 150
8 200
10 250
12 300
14 350
16 400
18 450
20 500
24 600
30 750
36 900
42 1050
48 1200
54
2
1350
2
60
2
1500
2
72
2
1800
2
84
2
2100
2
96
2
2400
2
108
2
2700
2
120
2
3000
2
1
Non-standard pipe sizes are not created by models unless specified.
2
Elbows and tees are fabricated from like-diameter pipe. Estimate includes more
welds to fabricate fittings.
Note: Pipe diameters greater than 72
2
(1800 mm) are only available for Plant Bulk
Pipe Items. These larger diameters cannot be specified in pipe item details or yard
pipe forms.
44 18 Piping (G10)
Pipe Schedule
Use ANSI B36.10 for all materials, all country locations.
Exceptions:
Japan - does have schedule 20SS 0.5 - 12 INCHES diameter.
Japan - schedule 40, 60, 80, and 100SS > 20 INCHES diameter is
much thinner.
Standard Equations for Pipe
Diameter (Old)
Liquid Lines Slurry Lines
GPM Range
Velocity GPM Range Velocity
0 - 90 7 0 - 3000 3
91 - 250 8 3001 - 5000 5
251 - 500 9 5001 - 7000 7
501 - 1000 10 > 7000 8
1001 - 2000 11
2001 - 3000 12
3001 - 4000 13
> 4000 14
Diameter = 0.6384*(GPM/Velocity)**0.5
IF (Diameter > 4.0) THEN
Diameter = Diameter - 1.00
ELSE
Diameter = Diameter - 0.25
Gas Lines
Minimum Flowrate = 100000.0
Maximum Flowrate = 1.0E07
Flowrate
LBS/HR
Velocity=Log-Log X1 = 1.0E05
X2 = 1.0E07
for velocity calculations
for velocity calculations
Velocity
FPS
Y1 = 30.0
Y2 = 100.0
Specific Volume = 10.73*(Fahrenheit+460.0)/(Molewt*(Pressure+15.0))
Diameter = 0.226*((Flowrate*Specific Volume)/Velocity)**0.50
IF (Diameter > 18.0) Use one pipe size smaller
18 Piping (G10) 45
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter (Old) - continued
Steam Lines
Minimum Flowrate = 10000.0
Maximum Flowrate = 1.0E06
Flowrate
LBS/HR
Velocity = Log-Log X1 = 1.0E04
X2 = 1.0E06
for velocity equations
for velocity equations
Velocity
FPS
Y1=20.0
Y2=100.0
TempSteam = 100.0*(Pressure+30.0)**0.25
SpecificVolume = 0.596*(TempSteam+460.0)/(Pressure+15.0)
Diameter = 0.226*(Flowrate*SpecificVolume/Velocity)**0.50
IF (Diameter > 18.0) Use one pipe size smaller
Relief Lines
SQ INCHES DIAM INCHES
0.196
1.287
2.853
6.38
16.0
26.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
46 18 Piping (G10)
Standard Equations for Pipe
Diameter (New)
The new line sizing models are characterized by a maximum pipe velocity
criterion and a maximum pressure drop criterion, as listed below:
Parameter Equation Remarks
Pipe Velocity
Pressure Drop (psi
per 100 ft.)

V = flow Velocity;
V
max
= maximum velocity given below;
is the allowable maximum pressure
drop per 100ft, given below
Application Maximum
Velocity
Maximum Pressure Drop Per 100 ft.
V V
max
P 100 P
max
P
max
18 Piping (G10) 47
Liquid Lines
Gas Lines
Steam Lines
Centrifugal Pump
Suction
PD & Gear Pump
Suction
All Pump Discharge
Tower Reboiler
0.5
Where:
Vmax = Maximum
allowable velocity -
liquid (FT/S)
A = Maximum
velocity multiplier -
liquid( FT/S)
Default = 100
B = Maximum
velocity exponent -
liquid
Default = 0.5
Pl = Pressure -
liquid(Psia)
Vmax = A/Pl
B
0.5
0.5
ft/s
ft/s
Table as a function
of Pipe Diameter
ft/s
= 1 psi
= 0.224 + 0.00172 P + 0.0000034 P
2
where P is the operating pressure in psia.

= 1 psi

= 1 psi
= 1 psi

= 3 psi
V
max
100 p
1
=
V
max
100 p
v
=
V
max
100 p
s
=
V
max
5 =
V
max
1.5 =
V
max
3 =
P
max
P
max
P
max
P
max
P
max
P
max
48 18 Piping (G10)
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter (NEW) - continued
Name Equation
Flare Stack inlet header
Pipe Diameter Liquid
Vapor**
Friction Factor
Vapor/Liquid
Frictional pressure drop
(psi per 100 ft)
Vapor/Liquid
Vapor Density
* Sonic Velocity
d=12*(4*gpm/(X*7.481*60*V
max
))
0.5

d=0.226*(flowrate*specificvolume/V
max
)
0.5
Where:
Vmax = Maximum allowable velocity - liquid (FT/S)
A = Maximum velocity multiplier - liquid( FT/S)
Default = 100
B = Maximum velocity exponent - liquid Default = 0.5
Pl = Pressure - liquid(Psia)
Vmax = A/Pl
B
f=2*[(8/N
RE
)
12
+ 1/(C
1
+C
2
)
1.5
]
0.0833
where:
C1={2.457*ln[1/((7N
RE
)
0.9
+(0.27*( /(d/12))))]}
16

C2=(37530/N
RE
)
16
(abs. roughness) = 0.00015ft (Commercial steel/wrought
iron)
v (liquid velocity) = 0.4085*gpm/d
2
v (vapor velocity) = 0.051076* flowrate*specificvolume/d
2
(liquid density) = lb/ft
3
(liquid viscosity) = cP*6.7197*10
-4
d = pipe ID, inches
=((P
i
+14.696)*MW)/(10.73*(T
i
+460))
where:
P
i
=Operating Pressure, psig
T
i
= Operating Temperature,
o
F
MW=Molecular Weight
V
max
0.75 =
N
RE
d 12 ( )v
-------------------------- =
P
100
--------
100 2fv
2
( )
g
c
d
12
-----

144
------------------------ =
18 Piping (G10) 49
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter (NEW) - continued
Name Equation
Vapor Viscosity
Pressure Drop
Steam
Friction Factor, Steam
=K*10-4*EXP(X*
y
)
where:
X=3.5+(986/T
i
+460)+0.01*MW
y=2.4 0.2*X
, Standard density=(MW/28.97)*0.0764*
(520/14.696)*(P
i
+14.696)/T
i
+460)*1/62.428
where:
g

s
K
9.4 0.02MW + ( ) T
i
460 + ( )
1.5
209 19MW T
i
460 + ( ) + +
------------------------------------------------------------------------ =
s
P
100
-------- -
100 3.36
6
10 ( )f flowrate ( )
2
d
5
( )
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- =
f
1
2Log d 12 ( ) ( )
3.7 5.02 N
RE
( )
----------------------------------------------

Log d 12 ( ) ( )
3.7 13 N
RE
( ) +
----------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2
=
N
RE
d 12 ( )v
-------------------------- =
50 18 Piping (G10)
Maximum Flow Velocity as a function of
Pipe Diameter for Pump Discharge (Fluid
Specific Gravity = 1)
Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Velocity (fps)
1 10.5
1.5 11.0
2 11.1
3 11.3
4 11.6
6 12.0
8 12.2
10 12.4
12 12.5
14 12.6
16 12.7
18 13.0
20 13.1
18 Piping (G10) 51
Utility Piping Services
Utility headers are sized based upon the following:
The Utility Header Diameter Symbol (L,M,H,V) as specified for Plant Bulk Utility
Piping will give diameters for each service as tabulated in the following table.
By specifying the desired diameter for that service. If the Utility Header Symbol is
designated, then a run of each service line is provided by the system in default of a
non-specified diameter. The default diameter corresponding to the service type is
listed in the table below.
A user-specified diameter for a service header overrides the diameter
associated with the Utility Header Diameter Symbol. Service headers may be
omitted by:
Specifying 0.0 diameter for the undesired service.
Omitting the Utility Diameter Symbol, whereby only diameter-specified headers are
provided.
These items are cost accounted to the same COAs as process piping.
Service Nominal Pipe Diameter: INCHES [MM]
Diameter Symbol
Symbol Type L M H V -
Water
F (b)
F (b)
P
C
Firewater - loop
Firewater - lateral
Potable water
Cooling water and return line
6[150]
4[100]
2 [50]
6[150]
8[200]
6[150]
2 [50]
8[200]
12[300]
6 [150]
4 [100]
12[300]
16[400]
6 [150]
6 [150]
14[350]
excluded
excluded
excluded
excluded
Steam*
L (i)
M (i)
H (i)
Low pressure steam
Medium pressure steam
High pressure steam
3 [80]
3 [80]
3 [80]
4[100]
4[100]
4[100]
8[200]
8[200]
6[150]
12[300]
12[300]
8 [200]
excluded
excluded
excluded
Air
P
I
Plant air
Instrument air
2 [50]
2 [50]
3 [80]
2 [50]
4[100]
3 [80]
6[150]
[100]
excluded
excluded
Gas
F
I
Fuel gas
Inert gas
2 [50]
2 [50]
2 [50]
2 [50]
4[100]
4[100]
6[150]
6[150]
excluded
excluded
Other
CS (b)
FL
US
Chemical sewer
Flare line
Utility station (see diagram)
8[200]
10[250]
1 [25]
10[250]
14[350]
1 [25]
12[300]
16[400]
1 [25]
14[350]
24[600]
1 [25]
excluded
excluded
*One condensate return line is provided upon selection of any combination of steam
services.
(b) Buried
(i) Insulated
52 18 Piping (G10)
Utility Station Diagram
Note: The drop lines are 1 INCH [25 MM] in diameter for air/water/steam and
0.75 INCH [20 MM] for condensate line. The lengths are 100 FEET [30 M] for
air, water, and steam service and and 50 FEET [15 M] for condensate line by
default. Length can be changed by specifying utility station drop length.
18 Piping (G10) 53
Default Piping Materials
Equipment Fabrication
Materials
Temperature Range*
F C
Piping Material Symbol
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator
All Materials all all A 106 (up to 2 INCHES [50 MM]
A 53 (2 INCHES [50mm] and larger)
Aspen Project Economic Evaluator
All carbon and Low Alloy
Steel
-425 to 051
-50 to -21
-20 to 650
-20 to 650
651 to 1000
1000 to 1200
1201 to 1500
-253 to -46
-45 to -29
-28 to 343
-28 to 343
344 to 537
538 to 648
649 to 815
304P
A333A
A 106 (up to 2 INCHES [50 MM]
A 53 (2 INCHES [50 MM] and larger)
A335C
A335F
304P
Clad Vessels Material corresponding to process-
side cladding material.
Lined Vessels: Brick or
monolithic lined
all all Carbon steel - see above
Lined Vessels: rubber lined all all RBLCS
Lined Vessels: organic
(except rubber), glass, lead
zinc lines
all all TFELS
High Alloy Steel (Stainless) -425 to 650
651 to 1500
-252 to 343
344 to 815
304P
316P
Aluminum -425 to 650
651 to 1500
-253 to 148
-28 to 204
AL
Copper and Copper Alloys;
Except for HE and RB HE
and RB only
-20 to 400 -28 to 204
CU
Carbon Steel - see above
HASTELLOY all all HAST
INCONEL all all INCNL
KARBATE (graphite) all all TFELS
MONEL all all MONEL
Nickel all all N
Titanium all all TI
Epoxy/Polypropylene (PPL) all all TFELS
Wood all all 316P
The maximum temperature for any pipe material will not exceed the maximum temperature for
the corresponding plate material listed in Chapter 28.
54 18 Piping (G10)
Pipe Materials - Ferrous
Materials
Carbon Steel
(COA 310 - 319)
API Pipe
(COA 310-319)
System
Material
Symbol
ASTM BS JIS DIN Composition Recommended
Maximum
Temperature
Degrees*
F C
Length
Type**
A 53 or CS A-53
(B)
3601
ERW410
G3454
STPG
G3452
SGP
17172
StE240.7
1100 593 1
GALV (B) ERW410 STPG
G3452
SGP
StE240.7 Galvanized CS 1100 593 1
A 106 or CS A - 106
(B)
3602
HFS410
G3456
STPT
17175
St45.8
1100 593 1
A333A A-333
(6)
3603
410LT50
G3460
STPL380
SEQW-680
TTSt35N
1100 593 1
* The maximum temperature for any pipe material will not exceed the maximum temperature for
** See Length Types.
System
Material
Symbol
Maximum
Temperature
Degrees*
F C
Length
Type**
GRBW*** 5L/5LS 3601
ERW410
G3454
STPG
17172
StE240.7
1100 593 1
X42W 1100 593 1
X52W 1100 593 1
X60W 1100 593 1
X65W 1100 593 1
X70W 1100 593 1
*** For GRBS (GR.B seamless), select GRBW (GR.B welded) as the system material symbol and
then select Seamless in the Pipe Type Field.
18 Piping (G10) 55
Low and Intermediate Alloy Steel
(All COA 320-329, except A##C COA 310-319)
System
Material
Symbol
Maximum
Temperature
Degrees*
F C
Length
Type**
A-335 3604 G3458 17175
A335B (12) 620-440 STPA22 13CrMo44 1Cr - .5Mo 1200 648 1
A335C (11) 621 STPA23 13CrMo44 I.25CR-.5Mo-Si 1200 648 1
A335D (22) 622 STPA24 10CrMo910 2.25Cr-1Mo 1200 648 1
A335F (5) 625 STPA25 12CrMo195G 1200 648 1
Low Temperature Service Min. Temp
A-333 3603 G3460 SEW680 F C
A333C (3) 503LT100 STPL450 10Ni14 3.5Ni -150 -101 1
56 18 Piping (G10)
High Alloy Steel
(COA 320-329)
System
Material
Symbol
Maximum
Temperature
Degrees*
F C
Length
Type**
304P A-312
TP 304
3605
304S18
G3459
SUS304TP
2462
X5CrNi1810
18Cr-8Ni 1500 815 1
304LP A312
TP 304L
3605
304S14
G3459
SUS304LTP
2462
X2CrNi1911
18Cr-8Ni 1500 815 1
316P A-312
TP 316
3606
316S18
G3459
SUS316TP
2462
X5CrNiMo17122
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 1500 815 1
316LP A-312
TP 316L
3605
316S14
G3459
SUS316LTP
2462
X2CrNiMo17132
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 1500 c 1
317LP A-312
TP 317L
SUS317LTP 18Cr-13Ni-3Mo 1500 1500 1
321P A-312
TP 321
3605
321S18
G3459
SUS321TP
2462
X6CrNiTi1810
18Cr-10Ni-Ti 1500 815 1
6MOP A-312
TP 317L
3605
316S22
G3459
SUS317LTP-A
2463
X2CrNiMo18143
20Cr-18Ni-6Mo 1382 750 1
Gauge Pipe (Very Light Wall)
304PG A-312
TP 304
3605
304S18
G3459
SUS304TP
2462
X5CrNi1810
18Cr-8Ni 1500 815 2
316PG A-312
TP 316
3605
316S18
G3459
SUS316TP
2462
X5CrNiMo17122
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 1500 815 2
Sanitary Pipe (Polished, Quick Disconnects)
304PS*** A-312
TP 304
3605
304S18
G3459
SUS304TP
2462
X5CrNi1810
18Cr-8Ni 1500 815 3
316PS*** A-312
TP 316
3605
316S18
G3459
SUS316TP
2462
X5CrNiMo17122
16Cr-12Ni-Mo 1500 815 3
***Maximum 200 PSIG (1,379 KPAG)
18 Piping (G10) 57
Pipe Materials - Non-Ferrous
Materials
Non-Ferrous Materials
(COA 330-339)
System
Material
Symbol
Maximum
Temperature
Degrees*
F C
Length
Type*
*
AL B-241 1474 H4080 1746 Aluminum
U.S to 10 INCHES [250 MM]
A96961 6061 A6061T
U.S above 10 INCHES [250 MM] and all others
350 176 1
CU B-42
C10200
2871
C103
H3300
C1020T
1754
OF-Cu
Copper 400 204 3
Ni B-161
N02200
3074
NA11
H4552
NNCT
17740
Ni99.2
Nickel
99Ni
600 315 3
MONEL B-165
N04400
3074
NA13
H4552
NCuT
17751
NiCu30Fe
Monel
67Ni-30Cu
800 426 3
INCNL B-167
N06600
Inconel
72Ni-15Cr-8Fe
1200 648 3
TI B-337
R50400
H4630
TTP35
17850 Titanium 600 315 3
HAST B-619
N10276
H4552
NMCr
17751
NiMo16Cr15
Hastelloy
54Ni-16Mo-15Cr
1250 676 3
A 20 B-464
N08020
Alloy 20
35Ni-35Fe-20Cr-Cb
800 426 3
ZR B-658
R60702
Zirconium
99.2Zr
700 371 3
58 18 Piping (G10)
Plastic and Resin Materials
(COA 350-359)
Material Class Pipe Material
System
Material
Symbol
Recommended
Maximum
Temperature
DEG F DEG C
F C
Length
Type*
Plastics and Resins Fiberglass Reinforced **
Epoxy Resin
Polyvinyl Chloride,
Maximum 8 INCHES [200
MM}diameter
Chlorinated Polyvinyl
Chloride, Maximum 8
INCHES [200 MM] diameter
FRP
PVC
CPVC
260
140
200
125
60
93
4
4
* See below for Length Types
** Thickness/schedule not adjustable
Type Length
10 FEET
[3 M]
15 FEET
[4.6 M]
20 FEET
[6.1 M]
30 FEET
[9.1 M]
1 < = 1.5 INCHE > 1.5 INCHE
2 All D
3 All D
4 All D
5 All D
18 Piping (G10) 59
Lined Steel Pipe
(COA 340-349)
Lined piping of the materials in the following table are developed irrespective
of the equipment or pipe temperature. The user must give consideration to
temperature-material selections for these materials, as the system does not
produce a warning or error condition if the recommended maximum
temperature is exceeded.
Spool Types
Lined Steel
System
Material
Symbol
Recommended
Maximum
Temperature
Degrees Degrees
F C
Spool
Type*
Remote shop fabricated carbon steel pipe and
fittings, lined with:
Epoxy
Glass
Natural rubber, (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick
Nitrile rubber (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick
Hypalon rubber (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick
Butyl rubber (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick)
Neoprene rubber (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick
Ebonite (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick
Cement
Polypropylene
Polyvinylidene Fluoride (KYNAR)
Polyvinylidene Chloride (SARAN)
Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (FEP TEFLON)
Polytetrafluoroethylene (TFE TEFLON)
EPLCS
GSLCS
RBLCS
NITRL
HYPLN
BUTYL
NEPNE
EBONT
CMLCS
PPLCS*
PVDF*
PVDC
FEP
TFELS*
260
450
175
175
175
175
175
175
225
275
175
400
450
125
230
80
80
80
80
80
80
110
135
80
200
230
4
2
4
1
1
3
4
1
Remote shop fabricated stainless steel pipe
and fittings, lined with:
Polytetrafluoroethylene (TFE TEFLON)
TFESS* 450 230 1
* Can use bends up to 4 INCHES instead of elbows.
Spool
Type
Spool Diameter Default Spool
Length
Maximum Spool
Length
1 All 20 FEET [6.1 M] 40 FEET [12 M]
2 < = 1 INCH
> 1 and < 2 INCH
> 2 INCH
2 FEET [0.6 M]
6 FEET [1.9M]
10 FEET [3.1M]
2 FEET [0.6 M]
6 FEET [1.9M]
10 FEET [3.1M]
3 All 10 FEET [3.1M] 10 FEET [3.1M]
4 All 20 FEET [6.1 M] 20 FEET [6.1 M]
60 18 Piping (G10)
Icarus systems automatically include two flanges per spool.
For yard pipe (Plant bulks - YARD PIPE), specifying the number of flanges
overrides the default. An error message appears if the number of flanges you
specified causes the spool piece to exceed the maximum length for that
particular spool piece type and diameter.
For installation bulk piping (Component - Pipe Item Details), specifying the
number of flanges overrides the default. If the number of flanges specified
causes the spool piece to exceed the maximum length for that particular spool
piece type and diameter, the default spool length is used. However, the system
will not generate a message that there are too few flanges.
The spool pieces are shipped pre-flanged and ready for bolt-up to valves and
flanged fittings in the field.
The following is a yard pipe example:
Yard Pipe Example:
20 FEET [61 M] Yard Pipe 10 INCHES diameter TFELS (material)
System generates: 10 sections 20 flanges
Spool length = 20 FEET [6.1 M]
200 FEET [61 M] Yard Pipe 10 INCHES diameter TFELS (Material)
User enters: 10 flanges
System generates: 5 Sections 10 flanges
Spool lengths = 40 FEET [12 M}
200 FEET Yard Pipe 10 INCHES diameter TFELS (Material)
User enters: 8 flanges
System generates:
ERROR: Too few flanges on this run of pipe
System cannot generate this run of year pipe. When the user enters 8 flanges, the
system tries to break the yard pipe into 4 sections (Spools):
The Spool Type Chart indicates that TFELS is a Type 1 spool and cannot exceed a
maximum length of 40 FEET [12 M] on a single spool piece; therefore, the system
generates an error message.
18 Piping (G10) 61
Yard Pipe Example - continued
GB 150 Pipe Materials
To determine the minimum number of flanges on a spool piece of yard pipe:
1) Determine the length of the pipe.
2) Determine the Spool Type.
3) Look at the maximum length of spool for the spool type.
Calculate:
Minimum Number of flanges = (Length of Pipe / Maximum Length) x2
Example:
Material = TFELS Spool Type = 1
Length = 200 FEET [61 M] Maximum spool length = 40 FEET [12.2 M]
The minimum number of flanges a user could enter for this run of pipe is:
(200 FEET / 40 FEET) x 2 = (5 ) x 2 = 10 flanges
[61.96 M/ 12.2 M] x 2 = [5.000] x 2 = 10 flanges
Entering fewer than 10 flanges will generate an error in your estimate.
Note: Odd sizes will round up to the next integer.
Material = TFELS Spool Type = 1
Length = 208 FEET [63.4 M] Maximum spool length = 40 FEET [12.2 M]
(208 FEET / 40 FEET) x 2 = (5.2 ) x 2 = 11 flanges
(rounds up to the next integer)
[63.4 M / 12.2 M] x 2 = (6 ) x 2 = 12 flanges
Entering fewer than 12 flanges will generate an error in the estimate.

Icarus
Material
Symbol
GB Material
Standard
GB Material
Designation
Internal
Pressure
Max Temp
(Deg F)
Internal
Pressure
Max Temp
(Deg C)
A 53 GB/T 13793 20 662 350
A 106 GB/T 8163-2008 20 842 450
A333A GB 6479 16Mn 887 475
A335B GB 5310-2008 15CrMo 1022 550
A335C GB 5310-2008 12Cr1MoVG 1067 575
A335D GB 5310-2008 12Cr2Mo 1067 575
A335F GB 6479 1Cr5Mo 1112 600
304P GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr19Ni10 1292 700
304PS GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr19Ni10 1292 700
304LP GB/T 12771-2008 022Cr19Ni10 797 425
304PG GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr19Ni10 1292 700
316P GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr17Ni12Mo2 1292 700
316PS GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr17Ni12Mo2 1292 700
316LP GB/T 12771-2008 022Cr17Ni12Mo2 842 450
316PG GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr17Ni12Mo2 1292 700
317LP GB/T 14976-2008 06Cr19Ni13Mo3 842 450
321P GB/T 12771-2008 O6Cr18Ni11Ti 1292 700
62 18 Piping (G10)
18 Piping (G10) 63
64 18 Piping (G10)
18 Piping (G10) 65
Icarus Pipe Fabrication,
Erection and Testing
Procedures
Code of Account Icarus Operation What is Included
3X2 FIELD SHOP FAB
(312-CS, 322-SS, etc.)
HANDLE AND WELD PREP OPER.
Shop handling for fabrication
Weld prep
Pre-heating
Unload from train/truck
into shop storage procure
material for fabrication;
place completed spools in
temporary storage.
Prepare for welding
(clean, pickle, etc.);
smooth weld (deburr/
grind), and clean-up
For temperatures up to
400F [204C]
CUTTING PIPE
Flame cutting
Machine cutting
Flame cut pipe- plain end
Machine cut pipe - plain
end
BEVELING PIPE
Flame beveling
Machine beveling
Flame bevel pipe for
welding
Machine bevel pipe for
welding
WELDING (shop)
Butt weld
Repair bad x-ray welds
Manual butt weld
Dig out & re-weld bad X-
ray welds
FIELD SHOP X-RAY Radiographic inspection
FIELD SHOP STRESS RELIEF Local stress, relieving
TESTING, MISC. CLEANING
Clean & polish
Other testing
User specified
User specified
3X4 REMOTE SHOP FAB
(3140CS, 324-SS, etc.)
[Operations same as Field Shop] [Cost accounted as
material cost]
66 18 Piping (G10)
Icarus Pipe Fabrication, Erection and Testing Procedures - continued
Code of Account Icarus Operation What is Included
3X7 PIPE ERECTION
(317-CS, 327-SS, etc.)
ERECT SHOP FAB PIPE Handle and erect fabricated
spool pieces; includes handle
and haul from storage yard,
unload and rig in place and
align.
ERECT VALVE Field handle valves, orifice
unions, etc.
BOLT UP CONNECTIONS Field attach flanges and do
bolt-ups
ERECT STRAIGHT RUN PIPE Same item as Erect Shop Fab
Pipe
WELDING (field)
Flame cutting
Machine cutting
Flame beveling
Machine beveling
Butt weld
Repair bad X-ray welds
Same items as Field Shop Fab
FIELD X-RAY Same items as Field Shop Fab
FIELD STRESS RELIEF Same items as Field Shop Fab
307 PREFAB PIPE
REWORK
REPAIR & ADJ PREFAB PIPE 10% of all shop man-hours
(12.5% in UK)
306 PIPING SYSTEM
TESTING
PIPE TESTING (field only)
Hydrostatic testing Prepare for test (place blinds &
blanks, open valves, support
items, air purge, etc.); test
(fill, pressurize and monitor
lines, soap test joints); clean
up after test (drain lines,
remove temporary items,
close valves, etc.)
18 Piping (G10) 67
Valve and Fitting Options for
Installation Bulk Piping
Selections of available valves and fittings on installation bulk piping are listed
alphabetically below, with those available for standard piping materials listed
separately from those available only for sanitary piping materials. These
choices are available only on installation bulk piping (Piping - Line Item Detail)
or when adding installation bulk piping through the use of the P&ID editor on
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator systems.
Description Symbol
For Standard Piping Materials (all available piping materials
except 304PS and 316PS)
Angle valve AN
Ball valve BA
Blind BL
Butterfly valve BU
Check valve CH
DI or SS Victaulic coupling (Vict. Pipe only VS
Elbow EL
Expansion joint ST
Extra drains* DR
Flange (exclude valve flanges, set by system)** FL
Gate valve GA
Globe valve GL
Knife gate valve KN
None
Orifice plate and union OP
Plug valve PL
Reducer RE
Regulating valve RV
Rupture disk RD
Safety/relief valve SV
Spectacle blind SB
Strainer ST
Steam trap TP
Tee TE
Temperature valve TV
Threadolet TL
68 18 Piping (G10)
Transition joint at material change TR
**Drain is defined as a fitting assembly composed of three elbows, one
gate valve, and 10 FEET (3 M) of 0.75 INCH (20 mm) pipe. However,
the user can select the diameter, length, number of fittings, and
type of fittings (a maximum of four different types) at the project
level.
*Flange costs include cost of gaskets and bolts.
Note: Pipe Fittings for sizes greater than 48 OD:
1. The fabricated fitting is assumed to require a length of pipe
equivalent to 2 times the nominal diameter of the pipe. For example,
for a 54 inch diameter pipe, to fabricate 1 elbow (or 1 tee) would
require 2*54 inch = 108 inch or 9 ft of pipe.
2. The material cost of the fabricated elbow would equal that of 9 feet
of straight length pipe.
3. The material cost reported in the line item is multiplied by the
number of elbows (or tees) specified by you. For example, for 2
elbows (54 inch diameter), the material cost = 2*9 ft = 18 feet of
straight length pipe.
4. The weight of each fabricated elbow (or tee) is similarly the weight
of straight pipe of (2 times nominal diameter) length.
Description Symbol
For Sanitary Piping Materials (304PS and 316PS) Only
Butterfly valve - sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] BU
Check valve - sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] CH
Cross - sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] CR
Elbow (45 degree)-sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] 45
Elbow (90 degree)-sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] EL
Flange - sanitary (exclude valve flanges) FL
Hose adapter -sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] HA
Pipe adapter-sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] PA
Quick-joint conn. -sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] QJ
Reducer (concen.)-sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] RE
Reducer (eccen.)-sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] ER
Safety valve - sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] SV
Swivel-joint conn. -sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] SJ
Tee - sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] TE
Threadolet - sanitary TL
**Drain is defined as a fitting assembly composed of three elbows, one gate
valve, and 10 FEET (3 M) of 0.75 INCH (20 mm) pipe. However, the user can
select the diameter, length, number of fittings, and type of fittings (a
maximum of four different types) at the project level.
*Flange costs include cost of gaskets and bolts.
Description Symbol
18 Piping (G10) 69
Valve Trim Specifications
The valve trim specifications in Aspen Icarus custom pipe specifications are
based on the API-600 specification. The API-600 specifications pertain to steel
gate valves only, but Aspen Icarus extends these valve trim specifications to
apply to gate, globe and check valves. Aspen Icarus has implemented a subset
of the specification based on the data available. The table below provides a
summary of the differences between the trim choices. Please refer to the
specification for further information.
Note that selecting a trim that has a lower number than the default trim for
that valve body material will be ignored (e.g., selecting TRIM 01 for a Monel
valve is not valid, you must select TRIM 09,10,12). Also, these specs do not
apply to control valves.
Please contact Aspen Icarus if you are interested in working with us to extend
the list of choices to address your requirements.
Definition of Aspen Icarus Valve Trim Specifications
API-600 Trim Number Trim Definition Comments
TRIM 01 F6 Nominal Trim Default trim for all Carbon Steel
Gate, Globe and Check valves
TRIM 02 SS 304 Trim Default Trim for all SS Gate,
Globe and Check Valves
TRIM 05 Hard Faced Trim Cobalt-chromium alloy seats
TRIM 08 F6 and Hard Faced
TRIM 09 Monel Trim Default for Monel valves
TRIM 10 SS 316 Trim Default for SS 316 Valves
TRIM 12 SS316 Trim + Hard faced
70 18 Piping (G10)
18 Piping (G10) 71
72 18 Piping (G10)
19 Civil (G8) 19-1
Civil Plant Bulks
Foundation Types
Typical Structure Live Loads
Soil Types
Specifying Seismic Data
Specifying Wind Loads
How Icarus Calculates Wind Load and Seismic Shear
Example of Equipment Foundation Design
Example of Pile Foundation for an Equipment
19 Civil (G8)
19-2 19 Civil (G8)
Civil Plant Bulks
Civil plant bulk items include concrete tanks, foundations and structures.
Description Type
Concrete tanks: above grade, circular/rectangular
Shape symbol:
Inside length or diameter:
Enter length for rectangular tanks or diameter for
cylindrical tanks.
Inside width:
Enter length for rectangular tanks, leave blank for
cylindrical tanks.
Fluid density: Default: *62.4* PCF [*1,000* KG/M3]
Foundation thickness: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Wall thickness top: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Wall thickness bottom: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Soil type: See Soil Types later in this chapter.
ABVGR TANK
19 Civil (G8) 19-3
Civil Plant Bulks - continued
Description Type
Concrete tanks: below grade, circular/rectangular
Shape symbol:
Inside length or diameter:
Enter length for rectangular tanks or diameter for
cylindrical tanks.
Inside width:
Enter length for rectangular tanks, leave blank for
cylindrical tanks.
Fluid density:
Default: *62.4* PCF [*1,000* KG/M3]
Foundation thickness: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Wall thickness top: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Wall thickness bottom: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Height above ground:
Enter height that wall projects above grade. Default:
Top flush with grade *0.0*.
Soil type:
See Soil Types later in this chapter. Include
allowance (material and labor) for shoring if soil type
is SAND or poorer; full exposed surface and depth is
shored. No equipment rental included.
BELGR TANK
Concrete foundations, structures: 18 types (see
Foundation Types later in this chapter)
Various types of concrete items. Material quantities
are per item.
If using Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, see Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator Users Guide, Chapter 4,
Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project
Components, for information on customizing
foundation data by using an external file to define
foundation quantities, man-hours, and costs.
Concrete quantity:
Enter design quantity, overpour will be added based
on item type.
Foundation type:
See Foundation Types later in this chapter.
Excavation quantity: Default: Excavation, formwork
and rebar based on concrete quantity and type.
Rebar quantity:
Default: Excavation, formwork and rebar based on
concrete quantity and type.
Formwork quantity:
Default: Excavation, formwork and rebar based on
concrete quantity and type.
CONCRETE
19-4 19 Civil (G8)
How Icarus Calculates the foundation footprint surface area.
Convert to a square of equivalent size.
Excavated footprint = equivalent square + allowance [Width] for formwork.
Depth of footing [to the frostline] in your Project Civil Design Basis = 1
FOOT
Blinding slab covers the footprint of the equivalent-sized square.
Note: You can specify the excavation slope in the project and area level civil
specs. By default, Icarus calculates excavation slope based on soil type.
Description Type
CONCRETE - continued
Grout quantity:
Default: *0.0* CY [*0.0* M3]. Non-shrink grout.
Anchors and embedments:
Default: = 0 if grout = 0; determined from concrete
quantity if external civil file exists, or else determined
from grout quantity.
Sealcoat or liner type:
SC- Sealcoat
GM- Standard geosynthetic membrane
C1- Bentonite clay liner - 1 membrane
C2- Bentonite clay liner - 2 membranes
*NO*- No sealcoat or membrane liner
Sealcoat or liner area:
Default 0.0 SY
Membrane thickness:
Default 0.060 INCHES [1.50 MM]; Min: 0.020 INCHES
[0.500 MM]; Max: 0.120 [3.0 MM]
19 Civil (G8) 19-5
Description Type
Scaffold labor: erect, dismantle
Temporary tubular steel scaffold, rental excluded.
Default plank area = L x W.
SCAFFOLD
Concrete drainage trench, grate cover
Average invert depth:
Trench width:
TRENCH
Tank containment with concrete paving and
surrounding wall with coating
Depth of paving:
Wall height:
Default: *3* FEET [*0.900* M]
Wall thickness:
Number of stairways:
Access stairway over wall. Default: *2*.
Sealcoat option:
Default: *YES*
YES- Concrete sealer coating required
NO- No sealer coating
CONTAINMNT
Tank containment with diked area and geomembrane
Contained length:
Length, width and depth of diked area.
Contained width:
Length, width and depth of diked area.
DIKE MEMBR
19-6 19 Civil (G8)
Description Type
DIKE MEMBR - continued
Contained depth:
Length, width and depth of diked area. Default: *6*
FEET [*1.80* M]
Imported fill depth:
Imported fill for membrane bedding and/or protective
cover. Default: *12* INCHES [*300* MM]
Unit cost of fill:
Imported fill for membrane bedding and/or protective
cover. Default: *0.0* currency/CY [*0.0* currency/
M3]
Membrane thickness:
Range: 0.020 - 0.120 INCHES [0.500 - 300 MM];
Membrane liner type:
*GM*- Standard geosynthetic membrane liner
C1- Bentonite clay liner - 1 membrane
C2- Bentonite clay liner - 2 membrane sandwich
NO- No geosynthetic membrane liner
Width at top of dike:
Default: 6 FT [1.8 M]
Width at bottom of dike:
Default: 18 FT [5.5 M]
19 Civil (G8) 19-7
Description Type
See Chapter 18, Piping
YARD PIPE
PIPE
HDPE
RCON PIPE
Building
See Chapter 26, Buildings
BUILDING
Organic, metallic, abrasion resist. lining
Material:
*EPLCS*- Epoxt resin lining
ASRSN- Asphalt resin lining
PHRSN- Phenolic resin lining
PVDF- Kynar sheet lining
TFELS- Teflon sheet lining
BUTYL - Butyle rubber sheet 1/4 INCH [6 MM]
NATRB- Natural rubber sheet 1/4 INCH [6 MM]
NITRL- Nitrile rubber sheet 1/4 INCH [6 MM]
HYPLN- Hypalon rubber sheet 1/4 INCH [6 MM]
NEPNE- Neoprene sheet 1/4 INCH [6 MM]
CLEAD- Chemical lead 16 PSF [80 KG/M2]
I-ZN- Inorganic zinc coat 3 MIL [0.08 MM]
ZNMZL- Flame sprayed zinc 8 MIL [0.20 MM]
CERML- Ceramic liner, light abrasion and impact
CERMM- Ceramic liner, med. abrasion, light impact
CERMH- Ceramic liner, hvy. abrasion, light impact
CERMV- Ceramic liner, hvy. abrasion, heavy impact
ABRPL- Abrasion resistant plate 1 INCH [25 MM]
REPRB- Replaceable rubber lining 1 INCH [25 MM]
LS304- Replaceable SS304 plate 1 INCH [25 MM]
LS316- Replaceable SS316 plate 1 INCH [25 MM]
Lining adjustment: *4.00*; MIN: 1.00; MAX: 10.0;
Adjustment: 1=large flat area, 4=typical; 10=small
obstructed area, congested space
LINING
19-8 19 Civil (G8)

Description Type
Pipe rack
See Chapter 20, Steel
PIPE RACK
See Chapter 20, Steel
PIPE SUPPT
Open Concrete Structure
Precast or Cast-in-place concrete open structure. The
default structure type is Precast. Structure can have
combination of grating and concrete floor slab. In
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you can load equipment
into an open structure by assigning the structure and
the equipment the same Structure Tag Number. See
chapter 20, "Open Steel Structure".
Concrete structure to support equipments with the
option of cast-in-place or precast structure.
Includes columns, beams, floor slab, grating, siding,
handrail and toeplates, stairways, lighting, electrical
panelboard and supply wiring/conduit.
The number of levels, if not specified is determined
from the total height and a level-to-level spacing of 15
FEET [4.5 M].
The bay span and bay width represent the typical
column spacing and is used to determine the number
of columns and column load.
You can load equipment into an open structure by
assigning the structure and the equipment, the
same User Tage Number (Refer Open steel structure)

Number of Floors:
Default: based on structure height and approximate
floor height of 15 FEET [4.5M]
Distributed Load per Level:
Default: 300 PSF [14 KN/M2]
OPN CON ST
19 Civil (G8) 19-9
Description Type
OPN CON ST - continued
Structure Type:
* PREC * - Precast concrete structure
CONC - Cast-in-place concrete structure
Concrete Type:
Default: as specified in unit area civil specs.
Bay span: Default: 20-25 FEET [6-7.6 M]
Bay width: Default: 20-25 FEET [6-7.6 M]
Default: 1 + 1 per 5000 SF [500 M2] of area per
floor
Floor slab percent of area: Default: 75
Floor slab thickness: Concrete slab thickness.
Default: If not specified, system calculates
based on span and loading.
Floor grate - percent of area: Default: 0
Grating type:
Default: grating type from area steel specs
Siding per wall area: Default: 0
Siding type:
* CORR * - Corrugated siding
NSUL - insulated siding
Wind Force Adjustment:
project civil design specs. Default: 1
Seismic Force Adjustment:
Additional adjustment for seismic force specified
in project civil design specs. Default: 1
19-10 19 Civil (G8)
Foundation Types
Type Symbol Type Description
1 OCT+PROJ Octagon Slabs and Piers with Projection.

Foundation Typical Application
2 OCTAGONL Octagon Slabs and Piers without Projection.

3 PAVING Area Paving.

4 MASSPOUR Mass Pours - Large Mats, Pile Caps, and Other
Shapes - 25 CY [19 M3] minimum.

19 Civil (G8) 19-11
Foundation Types - continued
5 SM BLOCK Small Blocks - Pumps, Compressors, 3 CY [2.3 M3]
or less.

6 LG BLOCK Large Blocks - Large Compressors, Turbines 3-25
CY [2.3-1.9 M3].

7 PILE CAPS Pile Caps - 5 CY [3.8 M3] or less.

8 CONDUIT Conduit Envelope.

9 RING Circular Ring Foundation - For Large Tanks.

19-12 19 Civil (G8)
10 BASIN Basins.

11 EL SLAB Elevated Slab.

12 COLM/BM Columns and Beams.

13 WALL Wall and Wall Footings.

14 GRIND BM Grade Beam.

19 Civil (G8) 19-13
15 PIER Piers.

16 FOOTING Column Footings, Sleepers.

17 BOX Valve Boxes, Manholes etc.

18 SLAB GRB Slab on grade.

19-14 19 Civil (G8)
Typical Structure Live Loads
Soil Types
Typical Distributed
Structure Loads
Remarks
PSF [KB/M2]
50.0 2.5 Minimum possible design loading.
150.0 7.0 Mostly access and platform areas, minor equipment
support and stairways
300.0 14.0 Designed for average elevated equipment supports,
platform areas, and stairways; open construction used for
most of the structure.
450.0 21.0 Designed for heavy equipment supports, crane or catalyst
loading structures, some covered construction (metal
siding for potential wind loads), and outside freight.
600.0 28.0 Elevators (lifts); equipment, cranes, elevators (lifts) not
included.
Soil Type
Soil Type
Symbol Soil Loading Soil Density
PSF KN/M2 PCF KG/M3
Soft dry clay in thick beds SOFT CLAY 2000 100 60 960
Firm dry clay FIRM CLAY 4000 200 70 1120
Wet Sand WET SAND 4000 200 120 1920
Sand mixed with dry clay SAND+CLAY 4000 200 85 1360
Dry compact sand DRY SAND 6000 300 100 1600
Coarse compact sand SAND 8000 400 90 1440
Compact gravel GRAVEL 12000 600 95 1520
Soft friable rock or shale formation SOFT ROCK 16000 800 105 1680
Hardpan or compact sandstone beds HARDPAN 20000 1000 106 1700
Medium rock or granite formation MED-ROCK 30000 1400 108 1730
Hard rock formation HARD ROCK 80000 3800 110 1760
19 Civil (G8) 19-15
Specifying Seismic Data
There are four different ways to specify seismic data. Because the system actually uses
horizontal acceleration (measured in g: 0.17 means 17% of "g") to get the seismic
load, the most accurate way of specifying your seismic design requirements is to
specify the acceleration value to be designed for in the Horizontal acceleration field.
Entering Mercalli Number or UBC Zone is less accurate because it forces the system to
estimate acceleration using the following table.
Using the Ss and S1 parameters provides very accurate seismic data as well, which you
can then tweak if you want using the Horizontal acceleration field.
Important: Because Icarus provides four methods of specifying seismic data,
it is important to note the hierarchy of the methods.
1 Horizontal acceleration (g)
2 UBC zone
3 Mercalli number
4 Ss
5 S1
Thus, for example, the SS and SS1 parameters is used only if the Horizontal
acceleration (g), UBC number and Mercalli zone fields are blank.
Using the Ss and S1 parameters to specify
seismic data
Ss parameter:
definition: the Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCE) ground
motion of 0.2 sec Spectral Response Acceleration (5% of Critical Damping)
the Ss parameter is location specific and is determined from a seismic
ground motion map including in the ASCE 7 Standards
see http://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/designmaps for online resources
that will provide the value for the Ss parameter based on the version of
ASCE 7 and the locations lattitude/longitude.
The Ss parameters default is based on the projects country base as shown
below:
US Country Base, S_s = 0.09
UK Country Base, S_s = 0.29
JP Country Base, S_s = 1.87
UBC Zone Mercalli number Acceleration (g)
0 1,2,3,4 0.017
1 5,6 0.075
2A (A) 0.15
2B (2) 7 0.20
3 8 0.30
4 9,10,11,12 0.40
19-16 19 Civil (G8)
EU Country Base, S_s = 0.14
ME Country Base, S_s = 0.11
S1 parameter:
definition: the Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCE) ground
motion of 1.0 sec Spectral Response Acceleration (5% of Critical Damping)
the S1 parameter is location specific and is determined from a seismic
ground motion map including in the ASCE 7 Standards
see http://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/designmaps for online resources
that will provide the value for the S1 parameter based on the version of
ASCE 7 and the locations lattitude/longitude.
The S1 parameters default is based on the projects country base as shown
below:
US Country Base, S_1 = 0.04
UK Country Base, S_1 = 0.11
JP Country Base, S_1 = 0.75
EU Country Base, S_1 = 0.06
ME Country Base, S_1 = 0.04
In order to determine the seismic ground acceleration for a given location, the
ASCE 7 standards require the following parameters:
Occupancy/Risk Category
Soil Type
Ss
S1
Icarus provides country-based defaults for the Soil Type, Ss and S1
parameters. The Occupancy/Risk Category default is III. But these seismic
parameters can vary significantly with in a given country. Therefore, once the
site location is known, it is very important to update the seismic parameters
for accurate estimation purposes.
To obtain accurate location-specific parameters:
1 Browse to the internet site: http://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/
designmaps/.
2 Use one of the following three tools provided at the site:
Java Ground Motion Parameter Calculator
Use this application to look up Ss and S1 in accordance with ASCE 7-05.
This application is applicable only to U.S. states and territories.
U.S. Seismic DesignMaps Web Application
Use this application to look up Ss and S1 in accordance with ASCE 7-10.
This application is applicable only to U.S. states and territories.
Worldwide Seismic DesignMaps Web Application
19 Civil (G8) 19-17
Use this application to look up Ss and S1 in areas outside the U.S. states
and territories. This data is obtained from the Global Seismic Hazard
Assessment Program (GSHAP). You can use this data with ASCE 7-05 or
ASCE 7-10.
Specifying Wind Loads
The current wind load design complies with ASCE 7-05. It assumes an
importance factor of 1.15, which corresponds with Occupancy Category III,
the default value.
You can choose the Occupancy category at the project and area levels by using
the ASCE 7 Occupancy/Risk Category drop-down list. The Icarus wind
design calculations determine the importance factor based on the selected
category.
Once you have selected the appropriate version of ASCE 7 and the Occupancy/
Risk Category that is suitable for the project, you should specify the wind data
input fields as well, unless you deem the default values are appropriate for
your project.
The Japan location index, the Wind force adjustment, and the Wind exposure
category are not dependent on the version of ASCE 7 selected. However, it is
very important to specify either the Wind velocity or the Wind load according
to either ASCE 7-05 or ASCE 7-10. Both versions of ASCE 7 include wind speed
maps, but the wind velocity and selection criteria vary.
ASCE 7-05 uses wind speed maps that are based on nominal 3-second guest
speeds in miles per hour at 33 feet above ground for Exposure C category. If
you specify an alternative exposure category, Icarus adjusts the wind load
calculations as necessary.
ASCE 7-10 uses wind speed maps tat are also based on nominal 3-second gust
wind speeds in miles per hour at 33 feet above ground for Exposure C
category. However, the appropriate map must be chosen based on the
Occupancy Category. Also, the wind velocities are higher than those found in
the ASCE 7-05 standard. Icarus does NOT adjust the wind velocity based on
the drop-down selection of the ASCE 7 Occupancy/Risk Category. If you
specify an alternative exposure category, Icarus adjusts the wind load
calculations as necessary.
The Applied Technology Council provides a Wind Speed Web Site that
provides site-specific wind speeds based on the sites latitude and longitude at
http://atcouncil.org/windspeed/. However, wind speeds are available
only for U.S. states and territories.
How Icarus Calculates Wind
Load and Seismic Shear
1) Wind Velocity
The Wind Velocity to be entered is the Basic Wind Speed which is the 3-second
gust speed at 33 ft (10m) above ground. Icarus calculates the Wind Load
19-18 19 Civil (G8)
profile along the height based on the ASCE Standard: Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures. Icarus uses a default Wind Exposure C and
a Wind Velocity of 100 MPH [160 KMPH] at 33', which corresponds to a Wind
load (velocity pressure qz) of 30 PSF.
Note: You can enter the Wind load directly in the Wind load field.
qz = 0.00256 Kz Kzt V * V * I (lb/sq ft)
You can select Wind exposure [B, C, D] and Default Wind Exposure is C.
Default Kzt=1.0 and Importance factor I=1.15.
For Exposure "C", Kz=1.0 at 33'
For V = 100 MPH and Exposure "C"
qz=0.00256*1.0*1.0*100*100*1.15 = 29.5 PSF at 33': this is the default
pressure (30 PSF)
Icarus develops the Wind profile along the height as in the code and then
calculate the wind load along the height.
2) Use of Wind Force Adjustment (default=1.0)
If you want to make adjustments to the wind load or Kzt*I, it could be entered
in Wind Force adjustment as a factor.
Icarus also uses:
Gust effect factor (Gf) = 1.0 for exposure C (not 0.85)
Cf = 0.7 for Vertical Vessels and 1.4 for structures
Additional Icarus factor: 1.10
Adjusted Pressure at 33' = qz* Cf* windadj*1.10
3) Seismic acceleration (g) and Seismic Force Adjustment
(default=1.0)
Icarus use the input value of the Horizontal acceleration field (measured in
g: 0.17 means 17% of "g") directly to get the Seismic Shear. In the case of
equipments, Icarus uses an additional factor of 1.1, Icarus does not make any
other adjustments.
Seismic Shear = Operating weight of Equipment * 1.10 * Seismic acceleration
* SeismicForceAdjustment.
Note: When the Japan location index field is specified with a Japanese
country base, a Japanese wind design is performed that is independent of the
ASCE 7 wind design.
Example of Equipment
Foundation Design
Vessel Dia. = 8' Height = 20' Allowable soil pressure = 4000 psf, Wind speed
=100 MPH
System Calculations:
Wt of Vessel = 9300 lbs
Moment due to wind = 124031 lb-ft
19 Civil (G8) 19-19
Top Area reqd. = 0.828*(Dia + 2.0)**2 = 0.828*10*10 = 82.8 sf
frost ht = 4.0 ft
self wt of footing = top area * (frost+1) * 150.0 = 82.8*5.0*150.0 = 62100
lbs
Total Weight = 9300 + 62100 = 71400 lbs
eccentricity = 124031/71400 = 1.737'
For the example above, and soil pressure, we have Type 2 footing, c.s. area =
82.8 is sufficient.
This can be verified if we use the formula for square footing:
71400/(B**2) + 124031/(B**3 /6) = 4000 Area = B*B
Concrete = 82.8* (frost+1)/27 = 15.33 CY
For Type 2 Foundation:
Contact Surface formwork = 15.0 sf/cy * 15.33 cy = 230 sf
Back-up-lumber = 30.0 BF/cy * 15.33 cy = 460 BF
Rebar quantity = 70 #/cy * 15.33 cy /2000 = 0.56 Tons
Manhours:
(need some adjustment based on the quantity unless external file is used)
Formwork Fabrication = 0.08 mh /sf * 230 sf = 18*adj. = 22
Formwork Installation = (0.30*0.83)*230 = 57*adj. = 35
Formwork Strip & Clean = (0.30*0.17)*230 = 12*adj. = 12
Rebar Installation = 16.0/Ton * 0.56 = 9*adj.= 14
Pour & Finish Concrete = 2.0/CY * 15.33 = 30.66*adj = 30
Example of Pile Foundation for
an Equipment
This is a sample calculation:
Process equipment: VT CYLINDER
Vessel Diameter = 12 feet Height = 20 feet
Wind Speed = 100 MPH
From Area Civil Specs for pile design:
Footing depth (frost height) = 4 feet
Pile Design Requirement = PILE; Pile Type = HP; Compressive Capacity=90
tons; Tensile capacity = 45 tons;
Driven Depth = 60 feet; Pile Spacing = 4 feet; shear capacity = 2 tons
19-20 19 Civil (G8)
Equipment Loading from System:
Wt of Vessel = 20800 lbs
Wind Force = 12695 lbs
Moment due to wind = 260237 lb-ft
base Area = 0.828*(Dia + 2.0)**2 = 0.828*14*14 = 162.288 sf
Weight of Concrete = 133888 lbs
D.L. with vessel empty = Weight of Vessel+Weight of Concrete +
Weight of Soil (if there is projection) = 20800+133888+0 = 154688 lbs
Weight of water (we assume 50% full for pile design) = 70573 lbs
Maximum Weight = Empty weight + weight of Water = 154688+70573 =
225261 lbs
Radius of Pile Group = (diameter - 1)/2.0 = 5.5 ft
Minimum number of Piles = 4 (For individual foundations like piperack, open
steel the minimum is 2 per column)
Number of piles based on shear = (12695/2000) tons / 2tons= 4
Max. Number of piles possible based on spacing = 8
Start with 4 piles and then calculate the maximum load per pile based on the
Vertical Load and Moment (for
compression we use the Maximum weight, and for Tension we use the weight
without water, the base moment
here is the moment due to wind).
Checks whether load per pile is less than allowable load. If it requires more
than 8 piles, we try to provide a
inner circle of piles.
Number of piles required in this case = 4
20 Steel (G6) 20-1
Steel Plant Bulks
How ICARUS Generates the Number of Column Struts
20 Steel (G6)
20-2 20 Steel (G6)
Steel Plant Bulks
Steel plant bulks include structures, assemblies and components.
Description Type
Open structure: columns/girders/beams/X-brace,
grate, stairs
Includes columns, girders, beams, cross-bracing,
grating and column footings, handrail and toeplates,
and stairways. Stairways are through-going,
meaning each one extends from the top-most floor
level down to the grate.
The default design is bolted frame, for which bolted
connections are provided. The design is changed to
rigid frame if the user chooses FEM or F as the
Analysis Type, in which case a rigid connection is
provided.
The number of levels, if not specified, is determined
from the total height and a level-to-level spacing of 15
FEET [4.5 M], rounded to the nearest whole number;
minimum of one level.
The bay span and width represent the typical column
spacing and is used to determine the number of
columns and column load. The bay span is used to size
the support beams, and bay width is used to size the
main girders connecting to the columns.
OPN STL ST
20 Steel (G6) 20-3
Steel Plant Bulks - continued
Description Type
OPN STL ST - continued
The maximum number of open steel structures in an
area is 10.
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you can load
equipment into an open steel structure by assigning
the structure and the equipment the same Structure
Tag Number. The structure must be added to the area
before the equipment, or else the system will generate
an error. However, when the structures are evaluated,
they appear at the end of the area's detailed design
datasheet, equipment list, and detailed bulks. The
system evaluates them last because the equipment
that goes in the structures must be evaluated first
before their calculated weights are added to the
structure's loading.
The flow chart on the following page shows the logic
for hanging equipment in steel structures.
Number of floors:
Default: based on structure height and approximate
floor height of 15 FEET [4.5 M].
Distributed load per level:
Default: *300* PSF [*14.0* KN/M2]
Bay span:
Bay dimensions determine column spacing.
Default: 20-25 FEET [6-7.6 M] each way.
Bay width:
Bay dimensions determine column spacing.
Default: 20-25 FEET [6-7.6 M] each way.
Default: 1 + 1 per 5,000 SF [500 M2] of area per floor.
Structural steel analysis:
S- Simplified stress analysis
F- 2D finite element rigid frame analysis (required if a
rigid frame analysis with deflection check is desired)
Column base option:
FIXED- Rigid connection at column base.
*PINNED*- Pinned connection at column base.
Floor grates per area:
Default: *75*
Grating type:
See Grating Types later in this chapter.
Siding per wall area:
Default: 0%; Min.: 0%; Max:100%
20-4 20 Steel (G6)
Description Type
OPN STL ST - continued
Siding type:
*CORR*- corrugated siding
INSUL- insulated siding
Slab thickness: Default: *4* INCHES [*100 MM];
Min: 2 INCHES [50 MM]; Max: 8 INCHES. Concrete
slab thickness over formed shell deck, applicable if
slab% area > 0.
Floor slab percent of area: Default: 0%; Min:0%;
Max: 100%. Total of floor slab% area and floor grate%
area must not be more than 100%.
20 Steel (G6) 20-5
20-6 20 Steel (G6)
Description Type
Steel pipe rack: columns, beams, X-brace, catwalk,
stairs, ladders
Includes columns, lateral and longitudinal members,
cross-bracing, column footings, catwalks, handrail and
toeplates, stairs, and ladders (caged if over 10 FEET [3
M]).
Main bents have rigid connections between beams and
columns at odd numbered levels. Otherwise all joints
are pinned connections. Column base may be rigid or
pinned connection. Piping loads are defined as
distributed load per level. An air cooler load can be
defined above top level if required. Wide racks may
require a third column at the midpoint of the beams in
each bent. The height to the first level is defined
separately since it is usually bigger than the height
between levels which is assumed to be uniform. (A
sketch of a typical pipe rack is located on the following
page.)
Width: *20* FEET [*6.0* M] Max 120 FEET[36M]
Height: *20* FEET [*6.0* M] Max 60 FEET[18M]
Number of levels: *1*
Height to 1st level:
*12.0* FEET; MIN: 8.00 FEET; MAX: 40 FEET[12M]
Pipe rack type:
*STEEL*- All steel piperack
CONC-S- Concrete frame and steel sheets.
CONC-P- Concrete frame and precast conc. struts
PRECAST- All precast concrete piperack
Structural steel analysis:
S- Simplified stress analysis
F- 2D finite element rigid frame analysis
Main bent spacing:
Default: *20.0* FEET
Longitudinal column spacing along rack.
Third column option:
Option is for small racks. Racks wider than 40 FEET
[12 M] get three column rows.
YES- Third column now required (2 bay rack)
NO- No third column (1 bay rack)
Column base option:
FIXED- Rigid connection at column base.
*PINNED*- Pinned connection at column base.
- Continued on next page
-
PIPE RACK
20 Steel (G6) 20-7

Description Type
PIPE RACK - continued
Distributed load per level:
*50* PSF [*2.5* KN/M2]
Air cooler loading: *0.0*
Air cool distributed load above top rack level, if any.
Catwalk width: *4.0* FEET [*1.2* M]
Number of catwalks: *1* per level
Number of ladders:
*1* per 80 FEET [25 M] of length; MIN: 2
Number of stairways: Default: *0*
No. of braced bays: Number of braced bays along rack
length. *2* per 120 FEET [36M]; MIN: 0.
Beam struts per column line:
Number of longitudinal struts per column.
*1* per each two beam levels. See figure on page 30-
7 for explanation.
Beam struts per pipe level:
Number of longitudinal struts/beam per level/bay.
Default: *0* or, if beam length is greater than 24 FEET
[7 M], *1*
Exclude end bent:
Exclude end bents if this is a segment of a rack that is
part of a longer rack.
*NO*- Do not exclude end bents.
ONE- Exclude one end bent.
TWO- Exclude two end bents.
Minimum beam or column width:
*12.0* INCHES [*304* MM]
For concrete pipe rack only, default is calculated by the
system. If not, default is 12.0 INCHES.
Concrete type:
For concrete pipe rack only, default is area civil data
for concrete strength and cost.
2- Standard concrete (Type B)
3- Higher grade concrete (Type C)
4- Chemical resistant concrete (Type D)
Grating type:
See Grating Types later in this chapter
20-8 20 Steel (G6)
Sketch of a Typical Pipe Rack
20 Steel (G6) 20-9
How ICARUS Generates the Number of Column Struts
System Generated Sets:
User-Entered Sets:
Default Number of Column Struts
If a pipe rack has the default number of levels (1), the default number of
column struts is also 1. For each additional two levels, the default number of
column struts grows by 2; therefore, the default number of column struts may
best be understood as 1 per each 2 beam level.
20-10 20 Steel (G6)
* User-entered values override system-generated values.
Description Type
Pipe Truss Bridge
A truss structure with multiple levels which can span
longer areas. Wide Flange shapes are used for main
members.
Includes columns, lateral members, longitudinal chord
members, bracings and column footing.
(A sketch of a typical pipe bridge is located on the
following page)
Truss Width:
Default: 20 FEET [6.0 M]
Truss Height:
Levels between top and bottom chord: Default: 0
Height to bottom chord:
Distrib. Load/Level:
Default: 50 PSF [2.4 KN/M2]
Bay Length:
Truss length determine bay length
Default: Around 8 FEET [2.4 M]
Wind Force Adjustment:
Default: 1
Seismic Force Adjustment:
Default: 1
PIPE TRUSS
20 Steel (G6) 20-11

Description Type
Pipe supports/sleepers: bent or tee, just above grade
Series of individual steel pipe supports for long runs of
pipe just above grade. The TEE type has one post with
concrete footing; the BENT type has two posts with
concrete footings. CONS uses round concrete columns
with a steel wide flange on top connecting the
columns. Round form tubes are used as formwork for
the concrete columns.
Support type:
TEE- 1 steel post with beam
BENT- 2 steel posts with beam
CONT- Concrete tee
CONS - 2 concrete columns with steel beam
PIPE SUPPT
20-12 20 Steel (G6)

Description Type
Multiple-bay steel mill building: structural steel, siding
Structural steel, crane beams and rails, elevated grate floors,
corrugated or insulated exterior if applicable, foundations, lighting and
electrical panelboard and supply wiring/conduit.
The mill building model designs a frame that is specifically suited for a
particular purpose multiple bays where overhead cranes carry
materials along the length of the building. The term Bay in this case
refers to a portion of the building width.
The system assumes a cleared, level site; excavation is provided only
for grade slab and column footings. Other site work must be specified
using Site Development.
Main column spacing:
Column spacing along the length of the building.
Siding per wall area:
Default: 100% roofing and specified% siding provided, except 0.0
input deletes both.
Siding type:
Default: *CORR*
CORR- Corrugated siding
INSUL- Insulated corrugated siding
Slab-on-grade thickness: Default: *12* INCHES [*300* MM]
Distributed load level: Default: *200* PSF [*10* KN/M2]
1st Section bay width: First bay type, describes one or more
identical, adjacent bays.
1st Section bay height: First bay type, describes one or more
Number of bays 1st Section: First bay type, describes one or more
identical, adjacent bays. Default: *1*
MILL BLDG
20 Steel (G6) 20-13
Description Type
MILL BLDG - continued
Number of elevated floors 1st Section:
First bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent bays. Default:
*0*
Crane capacity per bay 1st Section: Bay type 1: Load for struct.,
crane rail, etc.; crane must be specified elsewhere. Default: *0.0*
TONS [*0.0* TON]
Floor grate per area 1st Section: First bay type, describes one or
more identical, adjacent bays. Default: *100*
2nd Section bay width: Second bay type, describes one or more
2nd Section bay height: Second bay type, describes one or more
Number of bays 2nd Section: Second bay type, describes one or
Number elevated floors 2nd Section: Second bay type, describes
one or more identical, adjacent bays. Default: *0*
Crane capacity per bay 2nd Section: Bay type 2: Load for struct.,
crane rail, etc.; crane must be specified elsewhere. Default: *0.0*
TONS [*0.0* TON]
Floor per area 2nd Section: Second bay type, describes one or more
3rd Section bay width: Third bay type, describes one or more
3rd Section bay height: Third bay type, describes one or more
Number of bays 3rd Section: Third bay type, describes one or more
Number of elevated floors 3rd Section: Third bay type, describes
one or more identical, adjacent bays. Default: *0*
Crane capacity per bay 3rd Section: Bay type 3: Load for struct., crane
rail, etc.; crane must be specified elsewhere. Default: *0.0* TONS
[*0.0* TON]
Floor grate per area 3rd Section: Third bay type, describes one or
Elevated access platforms: columns/beams, rail, grate, ladder
Elevated access platform, with handrail, toeplate, grating, columns,
civil foundations, lighting and electrical.
Platform width: *6* FEET [*2* M]
Number of ladders: Default: *1*
Handrail percent: Default: *100*
Floor grate per area: Default: *100*
Grating: See Grating Types later in this chapter.
PLATFORM
20-14 20 Steel (G6)
Description Type
Steel gallery structure for pipe, conveyors, walkways
Gallery for piping, conveyors, elevated walkways, etc., footings,
lighting and electrical included. May be specified in combinations of
three section types or as a single section
type.
Gallery height:
Max: 15 FEET [4.5 M]; Default: *9.0* FEET [*2.75* M]
Distributed load:
Default: *100* PSF [*5.0* KN/M2]
Height grade section:
Grade section has this uniform, nominal height for entire length.
Default: *6.0* FEET [*2.0* M].
GALLERY
20 Steel (G6) 20-15
Description Type
GALLERY - continued
Length grade section:
Total length is sum of grade, slope and above-grade lengths.
At least one is required.
Height slope section:
Slope section varies from grade section height to this designated
height.
Length slope section:
Total length is sum of grade, slope and above-grade lengths. At least
one is required.
Above grade height:
Above ground section varies from slope section height to this
designated height.
Above grade length:
Total length is sum of grade, slope and above-grade lengths. At least
one is required.
Gallery enclosure:
Default: *OPEN*
OPEN- No enclosure
ENCLOSED- Enclosed
Tower bent spacing:
Tower (bent) spacing applies to elevated sections only. Default: *80*
FEET [*25* M].
Cantilever length:
Cantilever length may be specified only for the end of an elevated
section. Default: *0* FEET [*0* M].
Number of walkways: Default: *2*
Walkway width: Default: *54* INCHES [*2,370* MM]
Conveyor transfer tower, square cross-section
Steel tower only; conveyors, hoppers and chutes must be specified
elsewhere.
TRNS
TOWER
Steel grate, less support steel
Grating: Default: *CS*. See Grating Types later in this chapter.
GRATE
Steel ladders
Ladders greater than 10 FEET [3 M] are automatically caged.
Ladder Type:
Default: *CAGED*
CAGED- Caged ladder
NONE- Ladder without cage
LADDER
Steel stairs, with grate treads, handrail STAIR
20-16 20 Steel (G6)
Description Type
Columns, beams, bracing, brackets
The steel member size is designated by its weight per foot of length.
Steel item types are columns, beams, bracing and brackets.
Connections are included; the system increases the cost by about 15%
to account for connections.
Steel type:
COLUM- Column
BEAM- Beam
BRACE- Bracing
BRAKT- Bracket
MISC STEEL
Fabricated, lined, stiffened plate items for chutes, boxes, etc.
Fabricated stiffened steel plate items (e.g., boxes, chutes, hoods,
skirts, etc.). One or more replaceable abrasion resistant lining types
may be specified over portions of the plate area.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
Plate per area item:
Total area of plate excluding stiffeners.
Lining thickness Type 1:
Lining type 1: thickness may not be specified for ceramic linings;
Default: *1.0* INCHES [*25* MM].
Lining per plate area Type 1:
Lining type 1; Default: *100*
Lining material Type 1:
Lining type 1. See Abrasion Resistant Linings; Replaceable in Chapter
28.
Lining per plate area Type 2:
Lining type 2; Default: *0.0*
28.
Lining per plate area Type 3: Lining type 3; Default: *0.0*
28.
FABR PLATE
20 Steel (G6) 20-17
Description Type
Siding and roofing for steel structures
Siding girts and roof purlins are designated based on column spacing.
Corrugated steel siding (18 gauge) is provided with the option of 1
INCH [25 MM] insulation in sandwich panel.
Siding area:
Siding and/or roofing area is required. Default: *0.0* SF [*0.0* M2]
Roofing area:
Siding and/or roofing area is required. Default: *0.0 SF [*0.0* M2]
Main column spacing: Default: *20* FEET [*6* M]
Siding type:
Default: *CORR*
CORR- Corrugated siding
INSUL- Insulated corrugated siding
SIDING
Sanitary platform for equipment access
A polished, stainless steel platform built to sanitary standards, e.g.,
without weld crevices or surfaces that collect standing water.
Platform height:
MAX: 12.0 FEET [3.60 M]
Platform area:
Required to enter total platform or length and width for long
platforms. If area is given, the program calculates length and width as
being the square root of area, and bases its design on this information.
Platform length:
Required to enter total platform or length and width for long platforms.
If area is given, the program calculates length and width as being the
square root of area, and bases its design on this information.
Platform width:
Required to enter total platform or length and width for long platforms.
If area is given, the program calculates length and width as being the
square root of area, and bases its design on this information.
Platform design loading:
*100* PSF [*5.00* KN/M2]
General platform design load for access/walkway areas.
Equipment percent area:
Percent of platform area that supports equipment load.
Equipment weight:
Must be entered for the program to calculate equipment access-sides.
Number of equipment access sides: *2*, MAX: 4.
Number of sides from which equipment accessed on platform.
Grating percent of area: *80.0*
SAN PLATFM
20-18 20 Steel (G6)
Description Type
SAN PLATFM - continued
Grating type:
FIBER- Fibergrate 1.5 X 1.5 IN [40 X 40 MM]
SLIP 2- 1/8 INCH [3 MM] SS304 slipnot plate
SLIP 3- 3/16 INCH [5 MM] SS304 slipnot plate
*SLIP4*- 1/4 INCH [6 MM] SS304 slipnot plate
Number of stairways: *1.00*
Number of ladders: *0*
Number of columns
Length of handrail and toeplate: FEET [M]
Grating Types
FG Fibergrate
S2 1/8 IN [3 MM] SS slipnot plate
CS 1 IN x 3/16 IN [25 MM x 5 MM] CS welded bar
CM 1 1/4 IN x 3/16 IN [32 MM x 5 MM] CS Welded Bar
CH 1 1/2 IN x 3/16 IN [38 MM x 5 MM] CS welded bar
CV 2.0 IN x 3/16 IN [50 MM x 5 MM] CS welded bar
C2 1/8 IN [3 MM] CS checker plate
AS 1 IN x 3/16 IN [25 MM x 5 MM] AL welded bar
AH 1.5 IN X 3/16 IN [38 MM X 5 MM] AL welded bar
AV 2.0 IN x 3/16 IN [50 MM x 5 MM] AL welded bar
21 Instrumentation (G10) 21-1
Instrumentation Plant Bulks
Sensor Loop Descriptions
Pressure (P)
Differential Pressure (DP)
Temperature (T)
Flow (F)
Level (L)
Analyzers (A)
Speed (S)
Motion (X): Axial, Radial, Vibration
Position (PN)
Weight (W)
Electrical Conductivity (C)
Hand (Manual Activation) (H)
Field Mounted Solenoid (SL)
Typical Pressure Instrument Process Hookup
Panel Action Descriptions
Panel Option Descriptions
Fisher Control Valve Information
Control Valve Options
Control Valve Configurations
Air Supply Piping
Remote Control Type
Transmitter Type
Overview of Instrumentation Report Details
Report Details for Analog/Electrical Instrumentation
Report Details for Analog/Electrical Pneumatic Instrumentation
Report Details for Digital/Electrical Instrumentation
Report Details for Digital/Electrical Pneumatic Instrumentation
21 Instrumentation (G10)
21-2 21 Instrumentation (G10)
Instrumentation Plant Bulks
Description Type
Conduit material: Default: *GALV*
GALV- Galvanized rigid steel conduit
EMT- Electrical mechanical tubing
AL- Aluminum
PVC- PVC plastic conduit
PBON- PVC coated rigid steel (plasti-bond)
PVCA- PVC coated aluminum
FRE- Fiberglass
Cable Size:
*14*, 12, 10 AWG; *1.5*, 2.5, 4.0 MM2.
Rigid conduit, galvanized steel, couplings, fittings and seals

Material:
Default: *GALV*
AL- Aluminum
FRE- Fiberglass
Conduit diameter:
Range: 0.5 - 6.0 INCHES [15 - 150 MM]
Number of fittings: Default: *0*
Number of conduit seals: Default: *0*
CONDUIT
Instrument panel, electronic/pneumatic
Panel type:
ELC- Electronic panel
PNU- Pneumatic panel
E/P- Combined electronic/pneumatic
INST PANEL
Instrument cable tray
Tray width:
Range: 6 - 36 INCHES [150 - 910 MM];
Default:
*18* INCHES [*450* MM]
INST TRAY
Electronic signal wire: wire, armored wire, wire in conduit
Material:
Default: *IM*
IM- Insul., standard wire
ARMOR- IM with interlock armor
RIGID- IM in rigid conduit (See Chapter 22, Electrical Plant Bulks,
CONDUIT, for a schematic of the conduit)
PPM- Pluggable Pre-Molded wire (fieldbus only)
Number of conductor sets per cable:
Optional twisted pair or triad in each wire set.
Range: 1 - 50.
Conductor set type:
Default: *PAIR*
PAIR- Pair
TRIAD- Triad
INST WIRE
Instrument pneumatic multi-tube bundle runs
Number of tubes per bundle: Range: 7, 12, or 19
PNU TUBING
Description Type
Instrumentation Plant Bulks - continued
Description Type
Thermocouple wire: wire, armored wire, wire in conduit
Material:
Default: *TM*
TM- Insul., solid wire
ARMOR- TM with interlock armor
RIGID- TM in rigid conduit
Number of conductor sets per cable:
Optional number of twisted pairs per cable.
Range: 1 - 36.
Conductor type:
Default: *JX*
JX- Iron constantan
KX- Chromel alumel
TX- Copper constantan
THCPL WIRE
Instrument junction boxes: electronic, pneumatic,
thermocouple
Junction box type:
EL50- Electronic - 50 conductor
PL4 - 4 Drop pluggable brick (Fieldbus only)
PL4S - 4 Drop pluggable brick with short circuit
protection (Fieldbus only)
JUNC BOX
Description Type
JUNC BOX - continued
PN19- Pneumatic - 19 tubes
TC50- Thermocouple - 50 conductor
SRSC- 3 Drop brick with spring clamp (fieldbus only)
SRST- 3 Drop brick with screw terminal (fieldbus only)
MB4- 4 Drop brick (fieldbus only)
MB4S- Hawke International 4 Drop brick with short-circuit protection
(fieldbus only)
MB8- 8 Drop brick (fieldbus only)
MB8S- Hawke International 8 Drop brick with short-circuit protection
(fieldbus only)
Enclosure type:
Default: *GP*
GP- General purpose
EXPR- Explosion proof

Operator center: Honeywell TDC3000
Operator center type:
Universal operator center or local center for one data
hiway.
Default: *UNIV*
UNIV- Universal center
LOCAL- Local center
Number of operator display units:
Number of operator CRT (Cathode-Ray Tube
Terminals), includes keyboards
Number of Hiway Gateways:
Number of gateways for data hiways.
Number of Indicating CRT:
Number of indicating CRT, no keyboard included.
Number of disk drives:
Number of dual floppy disk drivers.
Number of engineering keyboards:
Engineers keyboard for display.
OPER CENT
Description Type
OPER CENT - continued
Number of LCN cables:
Number of local control network cables.
History module:
History module for trend analysis.
Default: *NONE*
HIST- Add history module
NONE- No history module
Multifunction controllers: analog/digital I, IC, S, A circuits
Multifunction controllers for indicating and control loops, and switch
and alarm circuits.
The Instrumentation Plant Bulk items referred to as Multifunction
controllers, High energy level process interface units, and Low energy
level process interface units are based on elements of a Honeywell
TDC 2000/3000 process control system.
A Multifunction controller consists of a metal cabinet (6 FEET tall [1.83
M] and 19 INCHES [0.48 M] wide, containing 1 or more electronic
controllers with a power supply, analog and digital I/O signal
processing cards mounted in electronic racks as depicted in the
following
drawing.
MULTI CONT
Description Type
MULTI CONT - continued
The multifunction controller is programmed from the engineers station
in the Operator Center over a redundant, coaxial cable (Data-highway
cable). The controller polls the
analog and digital input cards which report to it to collect the signals
transmitted by the field sensors connected to those cards. The
controller either passes the signal up to the Operator Center for
permanent storage in a History Module (computer storage) and/or
compares the measured signal with the programmed set point and
generates a corrective command. This corrective command is sent to
output cards which, in turn, generate
either an analog (4-20mA for positioning control valves) or digital (for
solenoids, on/off valves) control signal which is sent to the appropriate
final control element in the field.
The signals from and to the field interface to the Multifunction
controller through a junction box on the back plane of the unit. Signals
are distributed within the unit over a data bus.
Electric power is required to support all the electronics and a cooling
fan on top of the unit. Battery backup may be specified if it is
important that the controller not lose its
ability to control the processing in the event of a power outage.
Redundant multifunction controllers may be specified to insure
continued control even in the event of a failure in the primary
controller.
High and low energy level PIUs look similar but have no controllers.
The High level PIUs are for analog inputs only (4-20mA) and provide
simple control; the Low level PIUs collect signals from thermocouple
and RTD loops.
There are 3 types of temperature transmitters available:
RTD: resistance temperature detector.
TC: thermocouple; the only time that you can specify a TC
transmitter type is when you specify Temperature (T) as the
Process Variable.
Filled system: liquid-filled.
Description Type
MULTI CONT - continued
The TDC2000/3000 controller handles 16 analog output per controller.
The I/O cards handle the following number of signals:
Number of controllers:
One cabinet and power supply provided per two controllers.
Redundancy:
Redundancy provides 1 backup controller for up to eight primary
controllers.
Default:
*NONE*
RED- Redundancy required
NONE- No redundancy
Number of analog input cards:
Number of I/O cards for analog input (indicating).
Number of analog output cards:
Number of I/O cards for analog output (control).
Number of digital input cards:
Number of I/O cards for digital input (alarm).
Number of digital output cards:
Number of I/O cards for digital output (switch).
Number of battery backups:
Number of backup battery power supplies for multifunction
controllers. Default: *0*
Signal Type No. Input
Signals per Card
No. Output
Signals per Card
Analog 8 4
Digital 16 8
Description Type
High energy level process interface units: Indicator, switch, alarm
circuits
Number of digital input cards:
Enter number of input cards required.
Number of digital output cards:
Enter number of output cards required.
HL PIU
Low energy level process interface units:
Thermocouple and RTD circuits
LL PIU
Data-highway cable, redundant (fiber optic) Coaxial or
fiber optic cables connecting digital controllers to
operator centers.
Material selection:
Default: *COAX*
COAX- Coax cable
FIBER- Fiber optic cable
Number of terminations:
Min: 1; Default: *2*
Enclosure type:
Default: *NONE*
NONE- None
COND- Conduit
DATA
HIWAY
Sensor Loop Descriptions
Pressure (p)
1 For panel action, panel option and control valve option, refer to the
applicable section later in this chapter.
2 Instrument Location:
LC= local, on equipment or piping
LP= local panel
CC= control center (analog or digital).
3 Signal Type: e = electronic, p = pneumatic.
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Loop Description Process
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
1
Pressure Gauge, field mounted:
Sensor element types
(default = ST):
pipe fittings to process (ST),
gauge valves to process (FT)
draft gauge (DG)
P I LC none
3 Pressure Controller: field mounted,
pipe and tubing.
P IC LC P
2 Pressure Transmitter:
field mounted, via pipe and tubing.
Sensor element types:
transmitter without seal (TN)
transmitter with seal (TS)
standard or microprocessor
P I
IC
RC
R1
R2R3
LP
or
CC
e
4 Pressure Switch:
field mounted, via pipe and tubing.
*NS*- No chemical seal
CS- With chemical seal
P A LP
or
CC
e
6 Additional Control Valve:
secondary control valve for adding
to another control loop.
P IC LP
or
CC
P
or
e
Differential Pressure (DP)
LP= local panel
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
1 Differential Pressure Gauge:
connected to process via pipe and
tubing.
DP l LC none
2 Differential Pressure Transmitter:
tubing.
transmitter without seal (TN)
transmitter with seal (TS)
standard or mircoprocessor
DP A LP
or
CC
p
or
e
4 Differential Pressure Switch:
tubing.
*NS*- No chemical seal
CS- With chemical seal
DP A LP
or
CC
e
to another control loop
DP lC LP
or
CC
p
or
e
Temperature (T)
LP= local panel
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
1 Temperature indicator
TM- Dial thermometer with
thermowell
TC- Thermocouple thermowell
T l LC none
3 Temperature Controller:
filled system, with thermowell
T lC LC p
0 Testwell:
thermowell and cap only
T none LC none
2 Temperature transmitter, with
thermowell
Sensor element types (default =
FS):
FS- Filled system
TC- Thermocouple
RT- Resistance temperature
WB- Wet bulb temperature
SM- Surface mounted
T l
lIC
RC
R1
R2
R3
LP
or
CC
p
or
e
4 Temperature Switch: with
thermowell, field-mounted
T A LP
or
CC
e
6 Additional Control Valve
secondary control valve
for adding to another control loop
T lC LP
or
CC
p
or
e
Flow (F)
LP= local panel
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
1 Flow Indicator F l LC none
2 Flow Transmitter:
OP):
OP- Orifice plate and DP transmitter
OS- Orifice plate, DP transmitter
and chemical seals
VX- Vortex meter
MG- Magnetic meter (standard
or microprocessor)
MS- Mass flow meter
NS- No sensing element,
transmitter loop only (NS)
UM- Ultrasonic meter
TM- Turbine meter
MR - Meter run with orifice plate
RS- Meter run with orifice plate
and chemical seals
F l
lC
RC
R1
R2
R3
lP
or
CC
e
or
p
3 Flow Controller: orifice
plate, field-mounted, connected to
process via pipe, valves, tubing
F lC LC p
4 Flow Switch with orifice plate:
Sensor element types (default FS):
FS- Flow switch (FS),
TS- Flow sensing and totalizing
switch
F A LP
or
CC
e
F C LP
or
CC
p
or
e
Level (L)
LP= local panel
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
1 Level Indicators:
Sensor element types (default LG):
LG- Level glass - reflex type
external standpipe
SP- Level gauge - reflex type with
external standpipe
BB- Level indicator - bubble type
L l LC none
3 Level Controller:
displacement type
L lC LC p
2 Level Transmitter:
DS):
DS- Displacement type
DP- Differential pressure
(standard or micro-processor)
RS- DP with chemical seals
TF- Tape/float
UL- Single point Ultrasonic level
NL- Nuclear level
RD- Radar type
L l
lC
RC
R1
R2
R3
LP
or
CC
e
or
p
4 Level Switch:
Sensor element types (default (DS):
DS- Displacement level switch-fluids
PD- Paddle type level switch-solids
VS- Vibrating (tuning fork) switch
CD- Conductivity (max/min)
detection switch
CS- Capacitive type switch
Analyzers (A)
applicable section later in this chapter. Instrument Location:
LP= local panel
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
2 Analyzers:
Sensor element types (default PH):
PH- pH indicating transmitter OR-
ORP (Oxidation Reduction Potential)
(Redox) transmitter
O2- Oxygen analyzer (up to 4
samples)
BT- BTU transmitter
CS- Consistency analyzer
PL- Gas detection% LEL (incl.
electronics, rack)
HD- Gas detection H2S (incl.
electronics, rack
C2- C02 (without sample
conditioning system)
VS- Viscosity (w/o sample
CL- Color (without sample
FP- Flame point (w/o sample
CP- Cloud point
SD- Smoke density
FL- Flash point
SG- Specific gravity (liquid)
HV- Heating value (incl. sample
conditioning)
GC- Gas chromatograph (1 sample
point, 6 comp.)
HC- H2 and hydrocarbons (w/o
sample probe)
HS- H2S analyzer
H2- Hydrocarbon in water
HR- H2S/S02 ratio
SO- Sulphur in oil
A l
lC
RC
R2
R3
LP
or
CC
e
to another control loop.
A lC LP
or
CC
p
or
e
Speed (S)
LP= local panel
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
2 Speed Indicating Transmitter:
electronic,
non-contact type
S l
lC
RC
R1
R2
R3
LP
or
CC
e
4 Speed Switch: S A LP
or
CC
e
Motion (X): Axial, Radial, Vibration
LP= local panel
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
2 Motion Transmitter - non contact
type, (default AX):
Radial (RD)
X l
lC
RC
R1
R2
R3
LP
or
CC
e
4 Vibration Switch;
vibrating read type
X A LP
or
CC
e
Position (PN)
LP= local panel
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
2 Position Transmitter,
(default VP):
Variable position (VP):
On/Off positions (NF)
PN l
lC
RC
R1
R2
R3
LP
or
CC
e
or
p
4 Position Switch PN A LP
or
CC
e
Weight (W)
LP= local panel
Electrical Conductivity (C)
LP= local panel
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
2 Load Cells;
Sensing element options
(Default = 4C):
3 cell configuration (3C)
W l
lC
RC
R1
R2
R3
LP
or
CC
e
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
2 Conductivity Transmitter: C l
lC
RC
R1
R2
R3
LP
or
CC
e
Hand (Manual Activation) (H)
LP= local panel
Field Mounted Solenoid (SL)
LP= local panel
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
3 Hand Regulator:
field-mounted (pneumatic)
H lC LC p
6 Manual Controller:
panel-mounted, no input signal,
output signal only
H lC LP
or
CC
e
or
p
4 Manual switch: panel-mounted
(front of panel)
H S LP
or
CC
e
Sensor
Type
Symbol
Variable
Panel
Action
(1)
Instrument
Location
(2)
Signal
Type
(3)
6 Solenoid: Field-mounted SL none LP
or
CC
e
Instrument Hookup
Panel Action Descriptions
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the system automatically generates panel
instrumentation (combined control/operator center) required for analog
systems. The system includes the control center by default for digital systems,
but not the operator center.
Panel Action
Symbol
Definition
l Indicator:
field-mounted indicator if local to equipment (LC), or,
panel-mounted indicator (receiver type) if on local panel (LP) or in
control center (CC)
lC Indicating Controller:
field-mounted indicating controller if local to equipment (LC), or,
panel-mounted indicating controller (receiver type) if on local panel
(LP) or in
control center (CC)
RC Recording Controller (LP or CC):
panel-mounted, one pen
R1
R2
R3
Recorder (LP or CC):
panel-mounted, one pen
panel-mounted, two pens
panel-mounted, three pens
A Annunciator Point (LP or CC):
activated by a field-mounted switch
S Switch: indicating, front-of-panel mounted (LP or CC)
Cl
Jl
JR
Thermocouple-based Temperature Indicator, panel mounted (LP or
CC):
complete with back-of-panel mounted EMF converter
multi-point
Thermocouple-based Temperature Recorder, multi-point, panel
mounted (LP or CC)
Panel Option Descriptions
Fisher Control Valve Information
Panel Action
Symbol
Definition
A1 Panel alarm: one back-of-panel switch
A2 Panel alarm: two back-of-panel switches
CR Computation relay: +, -, X, /
SQ Square root function
FX Defined function of X
LR Limit regulation: high/low
ES Emergency shutdown (ESD)
BS Bias relay
Control Valve
Type
Size Range Body Type Actuator Positioner
Globe < = 4 INCHES
6 - 8 INCHES
CE
ED
585
657
3611JP
3582
Ball
all sizes V100 1052 3610J
Butterfly
all sizes 8532 1052 3610J
Control Valve Options
Fluid positioning control valves may be specified as line size or reduced size.
The default size reductions are as follows:
Type Definition
STD
GLP Globe type positioning, usually sizes up to 8 INCH [200 MM]
BAP Ball type positioning, usually medium sizes up to 12 INCH [300 MM]
BUP Butterfly type position, usually large sizes from 3 INCH [75 MM]
GLO On/off globe valve, usually small sizes
BVO On/off ball valve, usually medium sizes
BVU On/off butterfly valve, usually larger sizes
SGO On/off Slide gatte for bin discharge
SGP Positioning slide gate for bin discharge
DIV Diverter valve for solids handling
ANO On/off angle valve, sanitary, max 4 INCH [100 MM]
ANP Angle positioning, sanitary, max 4 INCH [100 MM]
DVS Diverter, sanitary only, max 4 INCH [100 MM]
TKS Tank outlet, sanitary only, max 4 INCH [100 MM]
BUP Butterfly position, sanitary, max 8 INCH [200 MM]
Line size Control valve
0.5 - 4INCH [12 - 100MM] Same as line.
6INCH [150MM] One size smaller than line.
8 - 12INCH [200 - 300MM] Two sizes smaller than line.
14 - 24INCH [350 - 600MM] Three sizes smaller than line.
> 24INCH [>600MM] Four sizes smaller than line.
Standard positioning - type varies with size:
Type Size
Globe 0.5 - 4 INCH [12 - 100 MM]
Ball 6 - 12 INCH [150 - 300 MM]
Butterfly > 12 INCH [>300 MM]
Control Valve Configurations
Air Supply Piping
Feed
Drop
Remote Control Type
Transmitter Type
Symbol Description
(blank) No remote on/off control valves
H Hydraulic operated remote on/off control valves
M Motor operated remote on/off control valves
P Pneumatic operated remote on/off control valves
Type Definition
S Standard
M Microprocessor (Smart)
Overview of Instrumentation Report Details
Report Details for Analog/Electrical
Instrumentation
Report Details for Analog/Electrical
Pneumatic Instrumentation
Report Details for Digital/Electrical
Instrumentation
Report Details for Digital/Electricl
Pneumatic Instrumentation
22 Electrical (G13) 22-1
Electrical Plant Bulks
General Electrical Plant Bulks
Substation Electrical Plant Bulks
Schematic of Transmission Line
Substation Schematics
Electrical & Control Hook-Ups for Electric Motors
Power Distribution Network
Wire Sizes
US and ME Country Bases
UK, JP, and EU Country Bases
Electrical Class/Division
National Electrical Code (NEC)
International Electrical Code (IEC)
22 Electrical (G13)
22-2 22 Electrical (G13)
Electrical Plant Bulks
Electrical plant bulks are divided into two categories, general and substation
plant bulks. A description of each follows.
General Electrical Plant Bulks
General electrical plant bulks include cables, trays, grounding, lighting
and tracing.
Description Type
Material:
ARMOR- Armored multi-core cable
W-C- Single wires in conduit, includes conduit
W-NC - Single wires in conduit (less conduit)
W-TR- Single wires in tray (less tray)
M-C- Multi-core in conduit, includes conduit
M-NC- Multi-core in conduit (less conduit)
M-TR- Multi-core cable in tray (less tray)
LARM- Lead covered armored cable
Rated voltage:
600- 600 V at 60 HZ
5000- 5000 V at 60 HZ
15000- 15000 V at 60 HZ
600- 600 V at 50 HZ
3300- 3300 V at 50 HZ
1000- 11000 at 50 HZ
Cable size:
Default: US: single wires in conduit, else multi-core cable in tray
without tray. See Wire Sizes later in this chapter.
Cable placement:
Default: Project/Area Design Basis
ABOVE - Above ground cable/wire
BELOW - Buried cable/wire with trenching
NOTRN - Buried cable/wire without trenching
Conduit material:
Default: *GALV*
AL- Aluminum
1PVC- PVC plastic conduit
FRE- Fiberglass
ELEC CABLE
Electric Plant Bulks - General Electrical Plant Bulks - continued
Description Type
Electrical control cable runs (LV)
Material:
W-NC- Single wires in conduit (less conduit)
LARM - Lead covered armored cable
Length of cable run:
Default: US: multi-core cable in conduit, else multi-core cable in tray
w/o tray
Cable placement:
Number of conductors:
Range: 1 - 37
CTRL CABLE
Conduit material: Default: *GALV*
AL- Aluminum
FRE- Fiberglass
Cable Size:
*14*, 12, 10 AWG; *1.5*, 2.5, 4.0 MM2.
Rigid conduit, galvanized steel, couplings, fittings and seals
CONDUIT
Description Type
CONDUIT - continued.
Material:
Default: *GALV*
AL- Aluminum
FRE- Fiberglass
Conduit diameter:
Range: 0.5 - 6.0 INCHES [15 - 150 MM]
Number of fittings: Default: *0*
Number of conduit seals: Default: *0*
Electrical cable tray
Material:
*GALV*, FBRGL, SS, AL
Tray Width:
Range: 6 - 36 INCHES [150 - 910 MM];
Default:
*18* INCHES [*450* MM]
Number of 90 degree bends:
*0*
Tray type:
*L*, T, C, B
ELEC TRAY
Electrical tracing of existing equipment
Electrical tracing of equipment; item of equipment and its insulation
are assumed specified elsewhere in the project.
Heating cable type:
Use P, M series cable for process temperature maintenance, and A, P,
or M series cable for ambient temperature maintenance.
3A- 3 W/FT [10 W/M] Chemelex BTV2-CT cable
5P- 5 W/FT [16 W/M] Chemelex XTV2-CT cable
40M - 40 W/FT [131 W/M] 300 Volt MI cable
EQPT TRACE
Description Type
EQPT TRACE - continued.
M2 - 600V, dual conductor MI cable, 9 OHM/FT [29.5 OHM/M]
M4 - 600V, dual conductor MI cable, 4.14 OHM/FT [13.6 OHM/M]
[0.0922 OHM/M]
[0.042 OHM/M]
[0.016 OHM/M]
Distance to panel:
If the distance to the panel board is not specified, the system
defaults to the value defined for Area Electrical Specifications.
Thermostat control:
Default: *E-AMB*
E-AMB -Electric tracing/ambient temperature control
Single thermostat, control of electrical tracer based upon low
ambient temperature specified for General Area Specifications.
E-PRO- Electric tracing/process temperature control
Multiple thermostated circuits, control of electrical tracer based upon
low ambient temperature specified for General Area Specifications.
Electrical tracing of existing piping run
Electrical tracing of piping; piping is assumed specified elsewhere. This
item also provides insulation of the same size, or one size larger than
pipe diameter for pipe diameters of 8 INCHES [200 MM] or smaller.
E-trace cable category: Default: *S*, self-regulating cable. Select M
for MI tracing cable or S for self-regulating tracing cable.
Traced pipe length: The pipe being traced is not included, but must be
Traced pipe diameter: The pipe being traced is not included, but must
be specified elsewhere.
Length of tracer cable: Total length of tracer segments, default based
on pipe length and diameter.
PIPE TRACE
Description Type
PIPE TRACE - continued
Heating cable type:
Use A series to 120 DEGF[48DEGC], P series to 250 DEGF[120DEGC]
and M series to 1049DEGF [565DEGC] over low ambient temperature.
10A- 10 W/FT [33 W/M] Chemelex BTV2-CT cable 5P- 5 W/FT [16 W/
M] Chemelex XTV2-CT cable
40P- 40M W/FT [131 W/M] 300 volt MI cable
M2 - 600V, dual conductor MI cable, 9 OHM/FT [29.5 OHM/M]
[0.0922 OHM/M]
[0.016 OHM/M]
Maintenance temperature:
Process temperature to be maintained.
Default: 392 DEG F [200 DEG C] for M series cable and 220 DEG F
[105 DEG C] for self-regulating and 40M cable.
Max: 250 DEG F [120 DEG C] for self-regulating cable and 1049 DEG F
[565 DEG C] for MI cable over low ambient temperature.
Thermostat control:
Default: *E-AMB*
E-AMB -Electric tracing/ambient temperature control Single
thermostat, control of electrical tracer based upon low
E-PRO- Electric tracing/process temperature control Multiple
thermostated circuits, control of electrical tracer based upon low
Description Type
PIPE TRACE - continued
Distance to panel:
Distance -pipe to local panel, feeder run to individual tracers
determined by system.
Number of thermostats:
Default: 1 for ambient control, based on number of watts for process
maintenance.
Ground grid
A system of buried cable and rods provide a grid work for grounding
equipment, buildings and structures.
Ground cable length:
AWG (US only): 6, 2, 1/0, 2/0, 4/0; MM2: 16, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120.
Default:
*2* AWG [*35* MM2]
Ground rod types:
*STD*, EL-L, EL-S.
Includes direct-buried grid cable brazed to each ground rod. The
default rod type, STD, includes manually-driven INCH x 10 FEET
[3.05 METER] copper-clad ground rods with studs, clamps, etc. The
electrolytic rod types, EL-L (3 FEET vertical x 10 FEET horizontal [0.91
x 3.05 METER]) and EL-S (straight 10 FEET length [3.05 M]), include
pipe with weep holes, electrolytic filling material, special conductive
backfill material, and protective cover.
If the number of ground rods is not specified, 4 rods are generated for
the first 1-199 FEET [0.3-60.6 METER] of grid cable, then 1 rod for
each 200 FEET [61 METER] thereafter. For example, a 10 FEET [3.05
METER] length generates 4 rods, a 200 FEET [61 METER] length
generates 5, and 1,000 FEET [305 METER] generates 9.
Does not include trenching and backfill.
Ground Grid Diagram and Rod Types:
GRND GRID
Description Type
Area lighting: includes poles, lights and cable
Flood:
400 - 1000 W; Default: *400*
Other:
100 - 400 W; Default: *175*
Fixture type:
Default: Mercury vapor/explosion proof
FL1- Fluorescent - 1 bulb
FL2- Fluorescent - 2 bulbs
FL1E- Fluorescent - 1 bulb, explosion proof
FL2E- Fluorescent - 1 bulbs, explosion proofMVPE - Mercury vapor/
explosion proof
MVPV- Mercury vapor/vaportite
MVCE - Mercury vapor/ceiling/explosion proof
MVCV - Mercury vapor/ceiling vaportite
MVF- Mercury vapor/flood
SVPE-Sodium vapor/explosion proof
SVPV- Sodium vapor/vaportite
SVCE- Sodium vapor/ceiling/explosion proof
SVCV- Sodium vapor/ceiling/vaportite
SVF- Sodium vapor/flood
INPE- Incandescent/explosion proof
INPV- Incandescent/vaportite
INCE- Incandescent/ceiling/explosion proof
INCV- Incandescent/ceiling/vaportite
MHV- Mercury halide flood
Electrical cable length:
Cable run length from lighting panel.
Number of lights:
Default: *0*
Power per light:
Min (flood):
400 W; Max (fluorescent): 120 W;
Default: 175 W
Support type:
See illustrations on following page.
*PENDT*- Pendant support
BRAKT- Bracket support
STAND- Stand and support arm
POLE- Pole support (see height entry below)
AREA LIGHT
Description Type
AREA LIGHT - continued
Number of poles:
Default: *0*.
Pole height:
Number of general receptacles:
Low voltage (30-50 A). Default: *0*.
Number of weld receptacles:
300 A. Default: *0*.
Wiring system:
Default: *3 wire system*
2- 2 conductor system
Cable size:
Default: US: *12 AWG*, else: 2.5 MM2.
14- 14 AWG - US only
1.5- 1.5 MM2 - other bases
2.5- 2.5 MM2 - other bases
4- 4 MM2 - other bases
Cable placement:
Electrical cable type:
W-NC- Single wires in conduit (less conduit)
AREA LIGHT - continued
STAND Support Type STAND Support Type with Mast
POLE Support Type BRAKT and PENDT Support Types
Description Type
Group of anodes in deep well
A group of anodes in a deep well with connecting leads to an adjacent
junction box.
Anode capacity:
Based on five amps per anode.
Anode depth:
Depth should be based on the local soil conditions. The depth is 100
FEET [30 M] plus 7 FEET [2 M] per anode (5 amps per anode).
Well casing symbol:
Default: *NONE*
NONE- No well casing
CASED- Cased well
DEEP
ANODE
Individual galvanic anode
An individual galvanic anode for road crossings, etc.
Length per cable run: Default: *40* FEET [*12* M]
GALV
ANODE
Group of anodes in shallow surface bed
A shallow surface anode bed consisting of anodes with underground
leads to an adjacent junction box.
Type of anode:
A- Drilled hole, native backfill
B- Drilled hole, coke breeze backfill
C- Trench, coke breeze backfill
D- Trench, native backfill
Number of anodes per bed: *10*
Spacing:
Anode spacing is the center-to-center distance.
Default: *8* FEET [*2.5* M]
SURF
ANODE
Number of test stations:
Enter number of test stations per location.
POT TEST
480 V/60 HZ [415 V/50 HZ] 3 phase input
D.C. Output: 50 V/50 A or 100 V/100 A
Power pole line must be specified separately.
Anode capacity:
50:50A / 50V
150:150A / 100V
Length per cable run:
RECTIFIER
Description Type
Solar panel with storage batteries
Solar panels, adjacent storage batteries, control center, supporting
structure, fencing and cable to a junction box.
Length per cable run: Default: *500* FEET [*150* M]
SOLAR PANL
Emergency light with battery
Provides short-term, local lighting for personnel in case of an electric
power failure. Indoor, general-purpose type includes selection of light
types, 6V battery, battery-recharger, power cable with plug for local
outlet, and mounting bracket.
Light type:
HEPS, HEPR, LEPS, LEPR, STDS, STDR
Number of light bulbs:
*1*, 2
EMER LIGHT
Underground cable duct
Buried depth:
Cable duct width:
Cable duct type:
*TILE*, ENVEL, CONC, PRCST
CABLE DUCT
Lighting panelboard and distribution board
Local lighting panelboard or distribution board in substation.
Lighting panel/distr. board size: 8-36 for panelboard and 6-12 for
distribution board.
Transformer size:
transformer for panelboard, 15-75 KVA.
Default: *0*
Lighting panel/distr. board opt.:
P - Local lighting panelboard
D - Distribution board in substation
Default: D (distribution board) for UK and EU country bases and P
(panelboard) for all other country bases.
Panel/distr. board exp. proof opt.:
blank - Based on area/project electrical class and division or zone
EXPR - Explosion proof enclosure
NEXPR - Non-explosion proof enclosure
Default: based on area/project specification for electrical class and
division or zone.
PANEL BRD
Tracing panelboard for electrical heat tracing
Panelboard for electrical heat tracing circuits.
Panelboard size: 12-36
TRACE PANL
Description Type
Electrical heat tracing controller - single and multi-point
Provides control and monitoring of electrical heating cable circuits.
Single-circuit, dual-circuit and multi-circuit controllers provide
temperature control and monitors temperature, ground fault level and
controller failure.
Packaged unit is modular-rack design and contains 10 controllers in
one panel
TRACE CNTR
Single/Multi-point Controller
Tracing control points:
Default: *0*, Maximum 20
Relay type:
EMR - Electromechanical relay
SSR - Solid state relay
Default: *EMR*
Communication option:
communication module with 2-wire RS-485 communication.
blank -No RS-485 communication interface required (default)
X -RS-485 communication interface required.
Default: no RS-485 communication interface required.
Enclosure material:
blank - Fiberglass enclosure
SS - Stainless steel enclosure
Default: Fiberglass enclosure with window Packaged Controller and
Panelboard
Tracing control points:
Only 10 control points allowed
Panelboard size: *24*, 30 and 42
Relay type:
EMR - Electromechanical relay
SSR - Solid state relay
Default: *EMR*
Description
Public Address and General Alarm
Equipment cabinets:
Default: 1 cabinet per 150 devices.
Raceway length
Default: 30% of the raceway length.
Raceway width:
Default:
IP - 4 inches
Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
*L - Ladder tray
T - Trough tray
C - Trough tray with top cover
B - Trough tray with top and bottom cover
Default: Ladder tray
Cable length per device:
Distance from the cabinet to the field device.
Default: Area level Electrical specifications.
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Junction boxes:
Default: 1 each per 10 speakers/strobes combined.
Outdoor speakers:
Default: None
Indoor speakers:
Default: None
Outdoor strobes:
Default: None
Indoor strobes:
Default: None
Outdoor handsets:
Default: None
Indoor handsets:
Default: None
Acoustic hoods:
Default: Equal to the number of outside handsets.
Poles:
Default: 1 pole per 2 outdoor speakers and 1 strobes.
Description
Closed Circuit Television
Equipment cabinets:
Default: 1 cabinet per system.
Raceway length
IP - 4 inches
Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
*L - Ladder tray
T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Junction boxes:
Default: 1 junction box per camera
Cameras:
Default: 0
Monitors:
Default: 1 monitor per 4 cameras.
Poles:
Default: 1 pole per camera
Telephone System
Equipment cabinets:
Raceway length
Raceway width:
Default:
IP - 4 inches
Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
*L - Ladder tray
T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Junction boxes:
Default: 0
Outdoor phones:
Default: 0
Indoor phones:
Default: 0.
Video conference:
Default: 0

Description
Area Network System
Equipment cabinets:
Raceway length
Default: 90% of the total cable length.
Raceway width:
Default:
IP - 4 inches
Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
*L - Ladder tray
T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Plant radios:
Default: 0
Marine radios:
Default: 0
Aviation radios:
Default: 0
Antenna/towers:
Default: 1 if any of the radios is specified.
Description
Access Control System
Equipment cabinets:
Raceway length
Default: 90% of the total cable length.
Raceway width:
Default:
IP - 4 inches
Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
*L - Ladder tray
T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Junction boxes:
Default: 1 per card reader/door operator.
Workstations:
Default: 0
Card readers:
Default: 0
Controllers:
Default: 0
Door/Turnstile Operators:
Default: 0
Description
Intrusion Detection System
Equipment cabinets:
Default: 1 cabinet per project.
Raceway length
Default: 0.
Raceway width:
Default:
IP - 4 inches
Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
*L - Ladder tray
T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *B*
Junction boxes:
Default: 1 per pole
Workstations:
Default: 1 per 45 cameras
Detectors:
Default: 0
Cameras:
Default: 0
Monitors:
Default: 4 per work station
Poles:
Default: 1 per camera
Description
Meteorlogical Monitoring System
Equipment cabinets:
Default: 1 cabinet per project.
Raceway length
Default: 90% of the total cable length..
Raceway width:
Default:
IP - 4 inches
Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
*L - Ladder tray
T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Weather Station:
Default: 1 weather station per system.
Structured Cabling for Buildings
Fiber optic cable length:
Default: 0
Fiber optic cable terminations:
Default: 0
CAT5 cable length:
Default: 0
CAT5 cable terminations:
Default: 0
Substation Electrical Plant Bulks
Substation electrical plant bulks include transformers, breakers, transmission
lines and bus.
Description Type
Bus duct
Continuous Current:
Max: 3,000 A
Length default elbows:
1 per 20 FEET [6 M]
Rated voltage:
*600*- 600 V at 60 HZ.
5000- 5000 V at 60 HZ.
15000- 15000 V at 60 HZ.
600-600 V at 50 HZ.
3300- 3300 V at 50 HZ.
11000- 11000 V at 50 HZ.
Number of elbows:
Default: 1 per 20 FEET [6 M]
Termination type:
*NONE*
NONE- No terminations
TRANS- Transformer termination only
SWGR- Switchgear termination only
BOTH- Switchgear and transformer termination
BUS DUCT
Electrical transformer: 1 or 2 tap

Rated load:
Range: 10 - 100,000 KVA
Transformer type:
*DRY*, OIL
TRANSFORM
Oil circuit breakers
Rated voltage:
Range: 11 - 400 KV
Continuous Current:
Max: 5 KA [5000 A]
OIL C BRKR
Disconnect switches
Rated voltage:
Range: 4 - 230 KV
DISCNCT
SW
Overhead transmission line: cables, structures, guys, grounds
See Schematic of Project Site Transmission Line Hook-Up
Wire size: See Wire Sizes later in this chapter.
POLE LINE
Steel for substation structure SUBSTN STL
Electrical Plant Bulks - Substation Electrical Plant Bulks - continued
Description Type
Circuit breakers: main, feeder, tie-breakers
Continuous current: Max: 3,000 A
Rated voltage: through the maximum HV.
Interrupt capacity:
LV: 25 - 70 MVA; MV: 250 - 350 MVA;
HV: 500 - 1000 MVA
Circuit breaker type:
*AIR*, SF6, VAC
Breaker location:
Default: *FEED*
FEED- Feeder breaker
MAIN- Main breaker
TIE- Tie breaker
BREAKER
Floor-mounted assemblies of one or more enclosed vertical sections
principally containing combination motor control/overload protection
units (starters).
Voltage range:
LV: 0.5 - 400 HP [0.33 - 300 KW]
MV: 200 - 1000 HP [150 - 3000 KW]
MCC type: *S*, I
The MCCs described are intended for inside use (i.e., are not for
outside use local to the motors). They are unaffected by the electrical
class/zone specifications covered later in this chapter. The intelligent
MCCs provide more sophisticated electronic control and communication
to a control center. The cost for upstream items are not included (e.g.,
supply bus duct/cable; switchgear [feeder breakers, metering,
substation disconnect switch, main breaker]; and substation
transformer).
MCC
Electrical Plant Bulks - Substation Electrical Plant Bulks - continued
Description Type
Switch board
Continuous current:
600-4000 A
Rated voltage:
3-13.8 KV
Switchboard type:
VCB- Vacuum circuit breaker
VCS1- Vacuum circuit breaker 1 unit stack
Short circuit current:
*25*-40 KA
SWITCH
BRD
AC/DC Transformer
Rating:
30-300 ampere-hours
AC DC TRAN
Package transformer with panel
Rated load:
50-800 KVA
Transformer primary voltage:
3000-13800 V
Number of phases:
1 or *3*
PKG TRANSF
Power output:
5 - 1500 KVA
EM PWR SET
Uninterrupted power supply
Rated load:
2-300 KVA.
UPS type:
*STD*, MULT.
UPS
Power factor connection capacitor
Capacity:
24-2500 KVAR.
Voltage:
LV (low voltage), MV (medium voltage).
PF CORRECT
Schematic of Transmission Line
Substation
Schematics
Electrical & Control Hook-Ups
for Electric Motors
Motor Control Center
The MCCs described are intended for inside use (i.e., are not for outside use
local to the motors). They are unaffected by the electrical class/zone
specifications covered later in this chapter. The intelligent MCCs provide
more sophisticated electronic control and communication to a control center.
The cost for upstream items are not included (e.g., supply bus duct/cable;
switchgear [feeder breakers, metering, substation disconnect switch, main
breaker]; and substation transformer).
There are two types of MCC available in the system (see diagram below)
those with electric motors driven at low voltage (MCC-LV: COA 733) and those
with electric motors driven at mid-voltage (MCC-MV: COA 744). Both types of
MCCs include starters.
The MCC-LV is a 12-NEMA space cabinet; the MCC-MV is a 3-NEMA space
cabinet. This item is specified by the HP [KW] rating of the motor being
supplied- this permits the system to select an appropriately sized starter (see
table below). The resulting cost includes both the cost of the starter as well as
the cost for the fraction of the cabinet occupied by the starter.
For example, assume that you specify a 20 HP [15 KW] rating- the reported
cost for the MCC-LV is the cost of the 3-space starter plus three-twelfths of the
whole cost of the cabinet. Specifying four such items would, in effect,
completely account for the cost of one 12-space MCC-LV containing four 3-
space starters.
Motor Size
HP KW
Voltage Starter Size
(spaces)
< = 10 HP < = 7.5 KW LV 2
20 - 50 HP 15 - 37.4 KW LV 3
60 - 100 HP 44.7 - 75 KW LV 5
125 - 200 HP 95 - 150 KW LV 6
250 - 400 HP 180 - 300 KW LV 9
200 - 400 HP 150 - 300 KW MV 3
450 - 4, 000 HP 335 - 3, 1150 KW MV 3
Note: When you select the high voltage as 34.5kV (US, ME) / 33kV (UK, EU,
JP) in the general electrical specifications, then all the high voltage motors in
the project should be powered at the corresponding medium voltage, because
all the motors in the system are at the most rated for 15kV (US, ME) / 11kV
(UK, EU, JP) only.
Medium Voltage (MV) and Low Voltage (LV) Motor Control Centers (MCC):
Power Distribution Network
Wire Sizes
Wires sizes must be chosen from one of the following tables.
UK, EU, and JP Country Bases
US and ME Country Bases or AWG Wire Units
Wire Size Symbols (guage sizes)
-------------- LV -------------------------------------
------------ MV -------------------------------
--------- HV --------------------------
14 8 2 250 1000
12 6 1 350 1250
10 4 1/0 500 1500
2/0 750 1750
4/0 2000
-------- (AWG) --- ----- (KCMIL) -----
UK, EU, and JP Country Base or MM2 Wire
Units
Wire Size Symbols (MM2 sizes)
-------------- LV -------------------------------------
----------- MV -------------------------------
--------- HV --------------------------
1.5 10 35 185 500
2.5 16 50 240 630
4 25 70 300 800
6 95 400 1000
120
150
---------------------- (MM2) -------------------------
Electrical Class/Division
National Electrical Code (NEC)
+ Indicates cable type consistent with electrical class and division.
- Indicates cable type inconsistent with electrical class and division.
Electrical Class and Division Symbol Single Core
or Multi-
Core Wire
In Tray
Single Core
or Multi-
Core Wire
In Conduit
Armor-
ed
Cable
Flammable Gasses or Vapors
11 Highly inflammable gasses and/or
vapors. Hazardous atmospheres exist
continuously or can occur during course
of normal operation for this area.
Explosion-proof.
- + -
*12* Flammable liquids are handled and
processed in this area, but they are
normally confined (Default).
- + -
Combustible Dust
21 Dust is suspended in air continuously or
during course of normal operation for
this area.
- + -
22 Suspension of dust is not likely in this
area, but deposits of dust can occur and
be ignited by sparks.
- + -
Combustible Fibers or Particles
31 Locations exist in this area in which
ignitable fibers are handled or used.
- + -
32 Locations exist in this area in which
easily ignitable fibers are stored.
- + -
General Purpose
GP Non-hazardous conditions. - + -
International Electrical Code
(IEC)
+ Indicates cable type consistent with electrical class and division.
- Indicates cable type inconsistent with electrical class and division.
Electrical Zone Single Core
or Multi-
Core Wire
In Tray
Single Core
or Multi-
Core Wire
In Conduit
Armore
d Cable
Flammable Gasses or Vapors
0 Explosive gas/air mixture is constantly
present or is present for long periods.
_ + +
1 Explosive gas/air mixture is likely to
occur under normal operating
conditions.
_ + +
2 Explosive gas/air mixture is unlikely to
occur under normal operating
conditions. If it does occur, it will be of
short duration.
+ + +
GP Non-hazardous conditions + + +
23 Insulation and Fireproofing (G8) 23-1
Insulation Plant Bulks
Insulation Materials
Fireproofing Materials
Insulation Schedules - System Default Tables
Hot Insulation - Light Schedule (L): I-P Units
Hot Insulation - Medium Schedule (M): I-P Units
Hot Insulation - Heavy Schedule (H): I-P Units
Cold Insulation - 1 to 5.5 INCH Thicknesses
Cold Insulation - 6 to 10 INCH Thicknesses
Hot Insulation - Light Schedule (L): Metric Units
Hot Insulation - Medium Schedule (M): Metric Units
Hot Insulation - Heavy Schedule (H): Metric Units
Cold Insulation - 25 to 165 MM Thicknesses
Customizing Insulation Specifications
23 Insulation and
Fireproofing (G8)
23-2 23 Insulation and Fireproofing (G8)
Insulation Plant Bulks
Description Type
Fireproofing for existing surface area
General fireproofing specified as a surface area to be covered.
Material:
*MAGN*- Magnesium oxychloride
CONC- Concrete
Fire resistance rating:
Range: 2 - 4
The thickness changes according to the Firepr. Rating-Hours:
For magnesium oxychlor fireproofing:
2 hours- 9/16 INCHES [14 MM]
4 hours- 1 3/16 INCHES [30 MM]
For concrete fireproofing:
< 3 hours- 2 1/2 INCHES [64 MM]
3 hours- 3 INCHES [76 MM]
FIREP AREA
Fireproofing for existing structural steel
Material:
*MAGN*- Magnesium oxychloride
CONC- Concrete
Range: 2 - 4
The thickness changes according to the Firepr. Rating-Hours:
For magnesium oxychlor fireproofing:
For concrete fireproofing:
< 3 hours- 2 1/2 INCHES [64 MM]
3 hours- 3 INCHES [76 MM]
FIREP SSTL
General area insulation.
Insulation for existing surface area: hot, cold insulation.
General insulation specified as surface area to be covered.
Material:
*CASIL*- Calcium silicate
MWOOL- Mineral wool
FOAM- Foam glass
INSUL AREA
Insulation Plant Bulks - continued
Description Type
INSUL AREA - continued
Temperature:
Temperature for FOAM only, provides cold (default) or hot insulation.
Jacket type:
AL- Aluminum jacket
SS- Stainless steel jacket
CS- Painted carbon steel jacket
Insulation for existing piping: hot, cold
Material:
*CASIL*- Calcium silicate
MWOOL- Mineral wool
FOAM- Foam glass
Temperature:
Temperature for FOAM only, provides cold (default) or hot
insulation.
Jacket type:
AL- Aluminum jacket
SS- Stainless steel jacket
CS- Painted carbon steel jacket
INSUL PIPE
Packed bulk insulation
Material:
*PERL*- Perlite bulk insulation
VERM- Vermiculite bulk insulation
RWOOL- Rockwool bulk insulation
INSUL BULK
Cable Tray fireproofing
Range: 2 - 4
FIREP TRAY
Insulation Materials
Note that insulation is applied to equipment and piping as specified by the
user. The default, if no choice is specified, is foam glass insulation for
temperatures 50 DEG F [10 DEG C] or lower; calcium silicate insulation is
applied for higher temperatures.
Fireproofing Materials
Note that fireproofing is not applied to equipment (skirts/legs, support steel,
ladders) and various steel structures by default. The user must specify at least
the rating (thickness to use) in project level specifications and separately
specify the thickness of fireproofing on each component. The default material
is magnesium oxychloride.
Description Maximum Thickness
INCHES MM
Temperature Range
DEG F DEG C
Insulation
Symbol
Calcium silicate
12.0 300.0 51 to 1500 11 to 815 CASIL
Mineral wool 12.0 300.0 51 to 1200 11 to 645 MWOOL
Foam glass 12.0 300.0 -450 to 665 -265 to 350 FOAM
Ceramic wool 12.0 300.0 51 to 1500 11 to 815 CWOOL
Polyisocyanurate/
Plyurethane
12.0 300.0 -450 to 250 -265 to 120 PURF
Description Rating
(hours)
Thickness
INCHES MM
Fireproofing
Symbol
Magnesium
oxychloride
0 0 0 MAGN
2 14
3 22
4 30
Concrete 0 0 0 CONC
2 64
3 3 76
4 89
Pyrocrete 1 19 PYRO
2 1 25
3 32
4 38
9
16
----- -
1
4
16
----- -
1
3
16
----- -
1
1
2
---
1
1
2
---
3
4
---
1
1
4
---
1
1
2
---
Insulation Schedules - System
Default Tables
Hot Insulation - Light Schedule (L): I-P
Units
Notes: Light insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient
temperatures above 40 degrees F. Insulation for hot service would be applied
to designated surfaces of 51 degrees F or hotter.
To use the table:
1 Locate pipe diameter in left column.
2 Read across line to locate the operating temperature (degrees F).
3 Read required insulation thickness at top of column. For intermediate
temperatures, use next larger insulation thickness.
4 For large diameter pipe, equipment, or other large flat surfaces, use
thicknesses in the last line in the table.
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
Insulation Thickness - INCHES
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
Inches Temperatures - Degrees F
0.75 268 460 790 1170 1774 2000
1 150 454 780 1161 1586 1989 2000
1.5 150 411 581 1049 1410 1801 2000
2 150 305 558 869 1181 1640 1836 2000
2.5 150 253 500 848 1148 1613 1778 2000
3 150 236 441 679 949 1232 1558 1887 2000
4 150 216 389 598 848 1142 1406 1737 2000
6 150 164 306 493 709 950 1237 1520 1810 2000
8 150 162 295 475 693 914 1133 1385 1700 2000
10 150 162 90 445 628 823 1008 1268 1556 1922 2000
12 150 162 275 414 585 776 960 1236 1492 1846 2000
14 150 256 392 557 748 952 1177 1419 1775 2000
16 150 250 383 542 725 928 1147 1384 1708 2000
18 150 244 373 529 706 911 1126 1364 1646 2000
20 150 238 365 517 696 894 1109 1361 1588 2000
22 150 238 365 517 696 894 1109 1346 1534 2000
24 150 226 349 501 676 874 1090 1329 1483 2000
26 150 226 349 501 676 874 1090 1329 1436 2000
28 150 225 340 501 622 850 1032 1250 1392 1546
30 150 225 340 501 622 850 1032 1250 1392 1546
36 150 225 340 501 622 850 1032 1250 1392 2000
Hot Insulation - Medium Schedule (M): I-P
Units
Note: Notes: Medium insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient
temperatures from 20 degrees F to 40 degrees F. Insulation for hot service
would be applied to designated surfaces of 51 degrees F or hotter.
To use the table:
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5
0.75 209 305 520 758 1185 1457 1659 1911 2000
1 150 302 498 732 1051 1399 1588 1825 2000
1.5 150 231 389 665 944 1279 1557 1786 2000
2 150 228 369 565 811 1173 1444 1747 2000
2.5 150 202 332 544 777 1137 1433 1710 1941 2000
3 150 193 296 450 660 925 1240 1617 1882 2000
4 150 183 270 392 579 838 1112 1475 1801 2000
6 150 157 228 322 479 705 977 1304 1630 1953 2000
8 150 156 223 313 444 648 881 1177 1505 1869 2000
10 150 156 220 298 389 571 774 1067 1366 1788 2000
12 150 156 213 282 368 517 710 1001 1277 1716 1922 2000
14 150 203 271 354 474 670 926 1184 1653 1846 2000
16 150 200 267 346 438 625 860 1115 1587 1775 2000
18 150 197 262 340 428 585 819 1056 1530 1708 2000
20 150 194 258 334 423 548 778 1013 1476 1646 2000
22 150 194 258 334 423 522 739 963 1427 1588 2000
24 150 188 250 326 413 512 701 916 1380 1534 1797
26 150 188 250 326 413 512 676 881 1337 1483 1707
28 150 188 245 326 386 500 613 809 1297 1436 1622
30 150 188 245 326 386 500 591 778 1251 1392 1546
36 150 188 245 326 386 500 591 778 1251 1392 1546
Hot Insulation - Heavy Schedule (H): I-P
Units
Note: Heavy insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient
temperatures less than 20 degrees F. Insulation for hot service would be
applied to designated surfaces of 51 degrees F or hotter.
To use the table:
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 7 8
0.75 150 250 345 596 915 1317 1821 2000
1 150 215 302 516 808 1175 1650 2000
1.5 150 197 280 478 756 1113 1571 2000
2 150 179 260 440 705 1052 1493 2000
2.5 150 164 240 405 661 987 1420 1882 2000
3 150 220 370 617 922 1347 1764 2000
4 150 185 309 533 818 1212 1601 2000
6 150 248 459 717 1088 1450 1905 2000
8 150 195 382 629 969 1310 1738 2000
10 150 318 539 865 1176 1576 2000
12 150 258 460 766 1062 1432 1844 2000
14 150 199 388 675 949 1305 1692 2000
16 150 321 572 845 1174 1550 2000
18 150 259 512 750 1059 1416 2000
20 150 202 446 661 952 1292 2000
22 150 368 579 853 1176 1794 2000
24 150 302 503 760 1068 1594 2000
26 150 261 432 674 966 1413 2000
28 150 194 367 594 872 1243 1796
30 150 306 502 784 1092 1585
36 150 306 502 784 1092 1585
Cold Insulation - 1 to 5.5 INCH Thicknesses
Note: The hot insulation schedule adjustment (L,M, or H) does not apply to
cold insulation. Insulation for cold service would be applied to designated
surfaces of 50 degrees F or colder.
For cold insulation, joints are caulked and a vapor barrier is applied.
To use the table:
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
0.75 50 25 -10 -25 -70 -135 -225 -225 -300 -459
1 50 25 -10 -25 -70 -130 -180 -225 -300 -459
1.5 50 30 15 -15 -45 -100 -120 -185 -230 -290
2 50 30 15 -15 -45 -90 -120 -185 -225 -290
2.5 50 30 15 -10 -35 -60 -105 -135 -175 -235
3 50 30 15 -10 -35 -60 -105 -135 -175 -235
4 50 30 20 0 -30 -55 -85 -135 -160 -235
6 50 45 25 0 -25 -45 -70 -105 -125 -160
8 50 45 25 0 -15 -35 -60 -85 -115 -145
10 50 45 30 10 -10 -25 -50 -70 -105 -125
12 50 45 30 15 -5 -25 -45 -65 -105 -125
14 50 45 30 15 0 -25 -40 -55 -80 -105
16 50 45 30 20 0 -25 -35 -55 -75 -105
18 50 45 30 20 0 -25 -35 -50 -70 -105
20 50 30 20 0 -25 -35 -45 -65 -95
22 50 30 20 0 -25 -35 -45 -65 -95
24 50 30 20 0 -25 -35 -45 -65 -95
26 50 30 20 5 -10 -25 -40 -60 -75
28 50 30 20 5 -10 -25 -40 -60 -75
30 50 30 20 5 -10 -25 -40 -60 -75
36 50 30 20 10 -5 -25 -40 -55 -75
Cold Insulation - 6 to 10 INCH Thicknesses
Note: The hot insulation schedule adjustment (L,M, or H) does not apply to
surfaces of 50 degrees F or colder.
To use the table:
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
6 6.5 7 7.5 8 8.5 9 9.5 10
0.75
1
1.5 -345 -459
2 -340 -459
2.5 -290 -340 -459
3 -290 -340 -459
4 -265 -300 -459
6 -205 -240 -290 -325 -459
8 -175 -215 -225 -295 -325 -459
10 -150 -185 -225 -235 -300 -459
12 -140 -170 -205 -230 -285 -325 -459
14 -130 -160 -190 -225 -265 -305 -352 -459
16 -125 -150 -180 -210 -250 -285 -310 -459
18 -115 -145 -175 -200 -235 -275 -295 -325 -459
20 -110 -135 -165 -190 -225 -260 -290 -315 -459
22 -105 -130 -155 -180 -205 -240 -270 -300 -459
24 -105 -130 -155 -180 -205 -240 -270 -300 -459
26 -105 -120 -140 -170 -190 -225 -250 -285 -305
28 -105 -120 -140 -170 -190 -225 -250 -285 -305
30 -105 -120 -140 -170 -190 -225 -250 -285 -305
36 -105 -115 -135 -160 -175 -215 -240 -280 -300
Hot Insulation - Light Schedule (L): Metric
Units
Note: Light insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient
temperatures from above 4 degrees C. Insulation for hot service would be
applied to designated surfaces of 11 degrees C or hotter.
To use the table:
2 Read across line to locate the operating temperature (degrees C).
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
Insulation Thickness - MM
25 38 50 63 75 88 100 113 125 138 150
MM Temperatures - Degrees C
20 131 237 421 632 967 1093
25 65 234 415 627 863 1087 1093
40 65 210 305 565 765 982 1093
50 65 151 292 465 638 893 1002 1093
65 65 122 260 453 620 878 970 1093
80 65 113 227 359 509 666 847 1030 1093
100 65 102 198 314 453 616 763 947 1093
150 65 73 152 256 376 510 669 826 987 1093
200 65 72 146 246 367 490 611 751 926 1093
250 65 72 143 229 331 439 542 686 846 1050 1093
300 65 72 135 212 307 413 515 668 811 1007 1093
350 65 124 200 291 397 511 636 770 968 1093
400 65 121 195 283 385 497 619 751 931 1093
450 65 117 189 276 374 488 607 740 896 1093
500 65 114 185 269 368 478 598 738 864 1093
550 65 114 185 269 368 478 598 730 834 980
600 65 107 176 260 357 467 587 720 806 930
650 65 107 176 260 357 467 587 720 780 883
700 65 107 171 260 327 454 555 676 755 841
750 65 107 171 260 327 454 555 676 755 841
900 65 107 171 260 327 454 555 676 755 841
Hot Insulation - Medium Schedule (M):
Metric Units
Note: Medium insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient
temperatures from -6 degrees C to 4 degrees C. Insulation for hot service
would be applied to designated surfaces of 11 degrees C or hotter.
To use the table:
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
25 38 50 63 75 88 100 113 125 138 150 163
20 98 151 271 403 640 791 903 1043 1093
25 65 150 258 388 566 759 864 996 1093
40 65 110 198 351 506 692 847 974 1093
50 65 108 187 296 432 633 784 952 1093
65 65 94 166 284 413 613 778 932 1060 1093
80 65 89 146 232 348 496 671 880 1027 1093
100 65 83 132 200 303 447 600 801 982 1093
150 65 69 108 161 248 373 525 706 887 1067 1093
200 65 68 106 156 228 342 471 636 818 1020 1093
250 65 68 104 147 198 299 412 575 741 975 1093
300 65 68 100 138 186 269 376 538 691 935 1050 1093
350 65 95 132 178 245 354 496 640 900 1007 1093
400 65 93 130 174 225 329 460 601 863 968 1093
450 65 91 127 171 220 307 437 568 832 931 1093
500 65 90 125 167 217 286 414 545 802 896 1093
550 65 90 125 167 217 272 392 517 775 864 1093
600 65 86 121 163 211 266 371 491 748 834 980
650 65 86 121 163 211 266 357 471 725 806 930
700 65 86 118 163 196 260 322 431 702 780 883
750 65 86 118 163 196 260 310 414 677 755 841
900 65 86 118 163 196 260 310 414 677 755 841
Hot Insulation - Heavy Schedule (H): Metric
Units
Note: Heavy insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient
temperatures less than -6 degrees C. Insulation for hot service would be
applied to designated surfaces of 11 degrees C or hotter.
To use the table:
thicknesses in the last line in the table
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
38 50 63 75 88 100 113 125 138 150 175 200
20 65 121 173 313 490 713 993 1093
25 65 101 150 268 431 635 898 1093
40 65 91 137 247 402 600 855 1093
50 65 81 126 226 373 566 811 1093
65 65 73 115 207 349 530 771 1027 1093
80 65 104 187 325 494 730 962 1093
100 65 85 153 278 436 655 871 1093
150 65 120 237 380 586 787 1040 1093
200 65 90 194 331 520 710 947 1093
250 65 158 281 462 635 857 1093
300 65 125 237 407 572 777 1006 1093
350 65 92 197 357 509 707 922 1093
400 65 160 300 451 634 843 1093
450 65 126 266 398 570 768 1093
500 65 94 230 349 511 700 1093
550 65 186 303 456 635 978 1093
600 65 150 261 404 575 867 1093
650 65 27 222 356 518 767 1093
700 65 90 186 312 466 672 980
750 65 152 261 417 588 862
900 65 152 261 417 588 862
Note: The hot insulation schedule adjustment (L, M, or H) does not apply to
surfaces of 10 degrees C or colder.
To use the table:
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
25 38 50 63 75 88 100 113 125 138 150 163
20 10 -3 -23 -31 -56 -92 -142 -159 -184 -273
25 10 -3 -23 -31 -56 -90 -117 -159 -184 -273
40 10 -1 -9 -26 -42 -73 -84 -120 -145 -178 -209 -273
50 10 -1 -9 -26 -42 -67 -84 -120 -142 -178 -206 -273
65 10 -1 -9 -23 -37 -51 -76 -92 -114 -148 -178 -206
80 10 -1 -9 -23 -37 -51 -76 -92 -114 -148 -178 -206
100 10 -1 -6 -17 -34 -48 -64 -92 -106 -131 -164 -184
150 10 7 -3 -17 -31 -42 -56 -76 -87 -106 -131 -151
200 10 7 -3 -17 -26 -37 -51 -64 -81 -98 -114 -137
250 10 7 -1 -12 -23 -31 -45 -56 -76 -87 -101 -120
300 10 7 -1 -9 -20 -31 -42 -53 -76 -87 -95 -112
350 10 7 -1 -9 -17 -31 -39 -48 -62 -76 -89 -106
400 10 7 -1 -6 -17 -31 -37 -48 -59 -76 -87 -101
450 10 7 -1 -6 -17 -31 -37 -45 -56 -76 -81 -98
500 10 -1 -6 -17 -31 -37 -42 -53 -70 -78 -92
550 10 -1 -6 -17 -31 -37 -42 -53 -70 -76 -89
600 10 -1 -6 -17 -31 -37 -42 -53 -70 -76 -89
650 10 -1 -6 -14 -23 -31 -39 -51 -59 -76 -84
700 10 -1 -6 -14 -23 -31 -39 -51 -59 -76 -84
750 10 -1 -6 -14 -23 -31 -39 -51 -59 -76 -84
900 10 -1 -6 -12 -20 -31 -39 -48 -59 -76 -81
Cold Insulation - 178 to 254 Thicknesses
Note: The hot insulation schedule adjustment (L, M, or H) does not apply to
surfaces of 10 degrees C or colder.
To use the table:
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
175 188 200 213 225 238 250
20
25
40
50
65 -273
80 -273
100 -273
150 -178 -198 -273
200 -159 -181 -198 -273
250 -142 -148 -184 -273
300 -131 -145 -176 -198 -273
350 -123 -142 -164 -187 -198 -273
400 -117 -134 -156 -176 -189 -273
450 -114 -128 -148 -170 -181 -198 -273
500 -109 -123 -142 -162 -178 -192 -273
550 -103 -117 -131 -151 -167 -184 -273
600 -103 -117 -131 -151 -167 -184 -273
650 -95 -112 -123 -142 -156 -176 -187
700 -95 -112 -123 -142 -156 -176 -187
750 -95 -112 -123 -142 -156 -176 -187
900 -92 -106 -114 -137 -151 -173 -184
Customizing Insulation
Specifications
In order to assign an appropriate insulation thickness to a piece of equipment
or section of pipe (if thickness is not specified by the user), the system refers
to tables that relate thickness to temperature and pipe diameter. External
versions of these tables are available for customization in an ASCII format file.
This file also includes a table that lets you define how much insulation is
allocated for valves and fillings.
Template Insulation Specification Files
There are three template files (IP units, Metric units, and blank) available in
one of the following locations:
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator or Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\AspenTech\Shared
Economic Evaluation V8.0\Insulation
The files are named INSSPC_IP.DAT, INSSPC_METRIC.DAT, and
INSSPC_BLANK.DAT. The files contain identical tables, but the default
temperature and equivalent length parameters (alterable fields) are either in
IP units, Metric units, or are absent. These files are inactive; the system refers
to internal representations of the insulation tables during a project estimate if
there are no customized copies of the insulation specs file in the Administrator
or project directories.
You can copy whichever file is the most convenient as a starting point for your
customized insulation specs file(s). In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen
In-Plant Cost Estimator (while no projects are open), view the Libraries view
tab on the Palette. In the Customer External Files folder, open the
Insulation Thickness and Rules subfolder. Right-click on the template of
your choice and click Duplicate. Rename the file. It will be the starting point
for your custom insulation specs file. In other products, you must manually
copy and rename the file.
Customizing the Insulation Specs File
You can edit the newly created file by using any ASCII text editor. The editor
must not introduce non-printing characters other than a space or CR/LF, that
is, no tabs are allowed. The file format is shown on the following page.
The picture above shows the top of the file and the first insulation thickness
table. Lines which contain comments start with a #. Lines which are read in
by the system during a project run begin with a l. YOu must be sure to avoid
shifting any of the vertical pipe sysboles l while altering the fields.
The following are the only fields that may be altered:
Unit of Measurement option fields at the top of the file
Diameter Units
Section
Overall Units
Section
Temperature values within Tables 1 thru 4
Maximum diameter and A, B, C parameter values in Table 5
Unit of Measurement Basis Options
The first choice you must make when customizing an insulation specs table is
the overall unit of measurement basis. The available options are IP or
METRIC. If you choice IP units by entering IP into the space provided, the
temperature values in Tables 1 thru 4 will be read by the system as degrees
Fahrenheit. With and IP basis the parameters in Table 5 will be used to
calculate equivalent insulation in feet of pipe. Conversely, if you enter
METRIC in the units field provided, the temperatures will be read as degrees
Centigrade, and the values in Table 5 will be used to calculate equivalent
meters of pipe insulation.
You must also select a unit of measurement basis for pipe diameter. The
available options are INCH or MM. This choice does not affect Tables 1
through 4. It determines whether the maximum pipe diameters in Table 5 are
in Inches or Millimeters. The option also determines the equivalent length
equations (formed from the A, B, C parameters you provide) are calculated
using pipe diameters in Inches or Millimeters.
Customizing the Insulation Thickness Tables
There are four thickness tables in the file - three for hot insulation and one for
cold. Tables 1, 2, and 3 correspond to the Light, Medium, and Heavy schedules
from which you may choose in the Project Design Basis menu. (For example, if
you select Heavy schedule insulation when defining your project, the system
will refer to Table 3 when generating a cost estimate). Table 4 is for cold
insulation.
The tables are arranged with pipe diameter along the left hand side and
insulation thickness along the top. For a given pipe diameter (table row), each
temperature value represents the maximum temperature for which the
corresponding thickness will be used. The last row of each table (36 inch/900
MM. row) is used for both 36 inch diameter pipe and equipment insulation.
Note: You may only adjust the temperature cells in the insulation thickness
tables, not the pipe diameters or insulation thickness.
You do not have to fill Tables 1 through 4 out completely. If you leave a
temperature cell blank, but there are values given somewhere to the left and
right, or above and below, the system will interpolate linearly between the
given values to fill the blanks. (These values will be maintained internally; the
system will not fill the blank values in the external data file). Interpolation is
not possible for outer blanks that have no surrounding given values; these
spaces are filled by copying the last given value over to fill the remainder of
the table.
To avoid confusion, it is recommended that you fill out all four insulation
thickness tables according to your insulating practices even if you do not
intend on using all three schedules. If a table is left completely blank the
system will refer to the internal default tables for an estimate requiring that
schedule.
Customizing the Valve and Fitting Insulation Table
Table 5 (the valve and fitting insulation table) is shown below.
The table lets you determine how much additional insulation is allotted for
valves and fittings. Any parameters you provide for valves will apply to all
valves in the project (all valves are considered equal when calculated
insulation requirements). Likewise, the fittings correlations will be applied to
all fittings in the project (all valves are considered equal when calculated
insulation requirements). Likewise, the fittings correlations will be applied to
all fittings in the project. You can account for insulation differently for varying
pipe diameters by defining three size categories (Small, Medium, and Large).
Each range is defined by the maximum diameters you place in the fields
provided. For example, in the above picture the Medium correlations would be
used to calculate the insulation required for any valve or fitting on a section of
pipe with diameter larger than 4 inches but smaller than (and including) 12
inches.
Table 5 is designed so you can make your insulation correlation simple or
complex. The parameters A, B and C are used in the following equation to
calculate the length of pipe which would have to be insulated to account for
one valve or one fitting.
Equivalent Pipe Length = A + B * (Pipe Diameter)
c
Any of the three parameters may be set to zero to simplify the correlation. For
example, according to the picture of Table 5 above, each fitting on a section of
2-inch diameter pipe would increase the total insulation length by 4 feet. (B
and C are zero - correlation has no dependence on pipe diameter).
Enabling the Insulation Specfication File
There are two options for enabling customized insulation specs files: You can
place a copy in the system administrator directory (as the default for all
projects), or you can copy a customized file into the directory of a specific
project. When generating a cost estimate, the system will use the
specifications in the current project directory if an insulation specs file resides
there. Otherwise, the copy in the administrator directory will be used. (The
administrator copy is therefore the system default - it will be referred to for
any project that does not have its own insulation specs file).
To activate your customized file for use in a specific project in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator or Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator, right-click the Insulation
Thickness option in the Basis for Capital Cost/Customer External Files
directory on the Project Basis Tab. Click the desired file on the menu of
choices; then click OK. The file is copied into the directory for the currently
open project.
In all other cases, the file must be copied and renamed manually to the
appropriate folder. These directory locations are described below:
Administrator Directory (for use as system default):
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator: C:/Aspen
Tech/Aspen Icarus xxx/Data/PIDS
Project Directory (activation for a specific project only):
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator: Right-click/
Click desired file as described above
In order to enable a customized file in either of the above locations, you
must name the file INSSPC.DAT.
24 Paint (G6) 24-1
Introduction to Paint
Paint Plant Bulks
How Icarus Systems Paint Equipment
24 Paint (G6)
24-2 24 Paint (G6)
Introduction to Paint
Icarus systems can calculate default paint areas for piping, equipment and
steelwork. The default paint is provided for all piping, but is only provided on
equipment and steelwork if specifically requested.
Paint is provided typically for carbon steel materials only, but can be obtained
for any material if specifically requested.
Paint areas and number of coats can be modified or added for any item.
Icarus systems do not provide different grades of paint; however, costs can be
adjusted appropriately by code of account material indexing.
Paint Plant Bulks
Description Type
Paint for existing surface: printer, final coats PAINT AREA
Paint for existing piping: primer; final coats PAINT PIPE
Paint for existing structural steel: primer, final coats PAINT SSTL
24 Paint (G6) 24-3
How Icarus Systems Paint
Equipment
24-4 24 Paint (G6)
Legend:
1. HE: HEATER ELC, HEATER STM, ONE SCREW, SUC HEATER, TWO SCREW
2. HO: HAND NT, 1 SP;EED, 5 SPEED
3. Also: AT: COND CELL. FLOAT CELL & SE: WATER CYCL.
Not affected by paint specification for shop fabricated equipment
4. Method determined by specification for paint Application Method:
S (spray) or B (brush)
5. Method determined by specification for paint Application Method:
S (sandblasting) or B (wire brush)
6. Surface area is calculated by mode; you must enter the number of primer
and/or final coats.
25 Site Development (G6) 25-1
Introduction to Site Development
Demolition
Drainage
Earthwork
General
Excavation
Fencing
Landscaping
Roads-Slabs-Paving
Piling
Railroads
25 Site Development (G6)
25-2 25 Site Development (G6)
Introduction to Site
Development
Site development may be used to specify items within eight major categories:
Earthwork
Drainage
Fencing
Demolition of existing structures
Landscaping
Roads/slabs/paving
Piling
Railways
It is important to recognize the two distinctly different applications for which
the site development may be used to introduce site development information
into a project. The desired application is determined by appropriate selection
of the site development item type.
The first application is based on the use of site development work item models,
which are contained within the system. You describe the type and extent of
work to be performed, item-by-item, consistent with the scope of each work
item model. The system in turn develops material quantities and manpower
resources and their associated costs, and additionally, equipment rental and
engineering requirements.
The second application allows the introduction of quoted estimates for material
and manpower costs into a project as supplemental site development cost
items. Item models are not used. Entries of this nature are charged to codes of
account in the amounts of material and manpower you specify.
Site development items, either developed by the system through work item
models or as user-entered costs, may be specified as either project-related
items or area-related items.
Site Development Work Items
Within the eight categories of site development, numerous individual work
item models are available for selection depending on the desired type and
extent of work to be performed.
Economy of scale is very important for many site development items (e.g., you
can select from bulk excavation, structural excavation or hand structural
excavation). In addition, the system addresses a large extent of work, defined
by you in a single work item request, differently from the way it addresses
several work item requests, each of small extent. That is, work item models
re-select an appropriately configured crew, by developing man-hour
requirements and by providing the crew members with construction equipment
properly sized for the work to be performed.
Terrain, soil conditions and other project environment factors significantly
affect the quantity and type of site work required. To reflect this, site
development work items are presented to accommodate particular, well-
defined tasks. For example, instead of a single site preparation item, you are
offered individual items, such as clearing and grubbing, excavation, grading
and landscaping. This provides the ability to fine tune the project to actual
conditions.
Excavation items are assumed to be requirements in excess of the normal
excavation required for equipment and building foundations and structural
footings, since excavation for these items (when defined as part of a unit area)
are ordinarily system-determined.
Demolition
Description Type
Demolish building w/disposal, no salvage
Demolition of individual structure without salvage but including
disposal. Specify frame type (steel, concrete, masonry, wood).
Disposal includes loading and hauling waste from site. Dump charge
not included.
DEMOLITION
Demolish building w/disposal and salvage
Demolition of individual structures with separation of reusable
materials for specified frame type. Loading and hauling waste material
is included. Dump charge not included.
DISPOSAL
Explosive bldg. demol, no salvage/disposal
Demolition of structures by explosives. Does not
include salvage or disposal.
EXPL DEMOL
Gutting & disposal of building interior
Gutting building interiors and loading and hauling the
refuse for either commercial or residential structures.
Dump charge not included.
REMOVAL
Lump sum quotation - demolition
Enter Total Cost or Matl and MH.
See code of accounts (Civil only).
DEMOL
Drainage
Description Type
Catch basin, manhole
Catch basins or manholes of either brick, block, poured concrete, or
precastconcrete. Includes footing and excavation with an option of
slab tops or lightweight frames and covers. All types have 4 FEET
[1.25 M] internal diameter.
BASINS
Pump and hose for open excavations
Pumping water from open excavations. Unattended pumps except for
daily servicing. Suction line to 20 FEET [6 M] and discharge line to
100 FEET [30 M]
in length.
DEWATERING
Drainage piping
Installation of selected diameter pipe of asbestos cement, corrugated
steel, concrete, or vitrified clay with an adjustment for the
percentage of curved or radius pipe. Includes trenching, gravel bed
and compacted backfill.
DRAINS
Septic tank and drain field
No. of distrib'n = no. per tank;
Length of drain line = length per tank.
Septic tank installation. Precast concrete tanks of specified capacity
with the option of 5 outlet concrete distribution boxes. The drainfield,
including pipe, trenching, gravel and backfill, is input as total length
of drain required.
SEPTIC TNK
Foundation subdrain with perforated pipe
Installation of foundation subdrainage of selected diameter pipe of
asbestos cement, corrugated steel, porous wall concrete, or vitrified
clay with an adjustment for quantity of curved or radius pipe. All
types except concrete are perforated.
Includes trenching, gravel bed and compacted backfill.
SUBDRAIN
Sump pit
Construction of sump pits including excavation and gravel bottom.
Option of wood
lining to a depth of 4 FEET [1.25 M].
SUMP PIT
Cased water supply well with pump
Domestic water wells drilled and cased. Includes down-hole pump,
surface grouting, and utility runs, if specified. Does not include
plumbing fixtures and connections.
WATER WELL
Drainage - continued
Description Type
Wellpoints with header and pump
Single stage wellpoint system for deterring to an average 15 FEET [5
M] depth.
Includes installation, operation, equipment rental and system
removal. Two INCH [50 MM] wellpoints on 5 FEET [1.5 M] centers.
Diameter of header is proportional to length:
6 INCHES [150 MM] for 100 FEET [30 M]
8 INCHES [200 MM] for 200-500 FEET [60-150 M]
10 INCHES [250 MM] for 1000 FEET [300 M].
WELLPOINTS
9 Dewatering wells with pump
Dewatering wells; 2 INCH [50 MM] diameter bore with
steel casing.
Includes 2 INCH [50 MM] centrifugal pump per well for
a specified period.
WELLS
10 Lump sum quotation - drainage
DRAINAGE
Earthwork
General
Description Type
Test borings with engineers report
Includes field stake-out and elevations, 2.5 INCH [65 MM] auger holes
with samples of earth, drawings and professional engineers (P.E.)
report.
BORINGS
Clear brush - manual or dozer
Brush clearing by hand with saw and rake (HAND) or by dozer with ball
and chain (MACH).
BRUSH
Clearing and grubbing
Mechanized clearing and grubbing.
OptionIncludes removal of trees to
LIGHT 6 INCH [150 MM] diameter
MEDIUM 10 INCH [250 MM] diameter
HEAVY 16 INCH [400 MM] diameter
Includes on-site cutting, chipping and stump removal.
CLEAR GRUB
Dike construction including stabilizing
Construction of dikes on level grade. Includes placing of fill, soil
poisoning with polybor chlorate on grade, slopes, and top; 2 INCHES
[50 MM] of sand asphalt on top and slopes.
DIKE
Gunite slope protection
Slope protection using 3 INCH [75 MM] thickness of gunite (air-blown
mortar) to finished slopes. Includes bond beam on top, key footing at
toe and all reinforcing.
GUNITE
Pond with bedding, lining, fencing-no pipe
Specify piping with bulk yard pipe item.
Evaporation or holding pond. Includes excavation, gravel and sand
bedding, fencing and optional lining. Piping not included.
POND
Cantilevered concrete retaining wall
No embankment cut and fill included,
See excavation items.
Reinforced concrete cantilevered retaining wall. Includes excavation
and backfill for wall footings only.
RETAIN
Sprayed asphalt soil stabilization
Erosion protection and soil stabilization by spraying with asphalt.
STABILIZE
Lump sum quotation - earthwork
EARTHWORK
Excavation
Description Type
Backfill and compact excavation
Backfilling of trenches or footings. Fill material is assumed to be
stockpiled locally, with no hauling. For numerous small items, man-
hours can be adjusted by specifying the number of items in addition to
the unit cubic yards. Filling equipment may be wheeled loader/
backhoe (WH-LD), crawler loader or dozer. Compaction, if required,
may be hand rammer, manual or self-propelled vibrating drum roller.
BACKFILL
Drill and blast rock - no disposal
Drill and shoot rock in trenches, pits, or open areas; includes crawler
trackdrill, compressor, and blasting materials but no disposal of shot
rock. Rock types include gypsum, slate, limestone, sandstone and
granite.
BLASTING
Fill compaction with towed roller
Compaction of fill in layers by towed sheepsfoot roller. Options
available for watering during compaction and for rough spreading of fill
by dozer, scraper or grader. For fine grading and surface compaction,
see PAVING, BASE PREP.
COMPACT
Cut & fill with spreading no compaction
Dozer:
maximum haul 500 FEET [150 M]
Scraper:
minimum haul 100 FEET [31M]
Bulk site excavation using dozers or scrapers on a cut and fill cycle,
including spreading and rough grading but no compaction. Scraper
selection varies with volume, material and haul distance. Soil type
ROCK refers to already ripped or shot rock.
CUT FILL
Hand excavation, no backfill/shoring, etc.
Excavation by hand of trenches or pits, in sand, earth, or clay. Man-
hours will be adjusted for depth of excavation and for volume per item
(pits). If shoring is required, see SHORING. Dewatering for wet
conditions, allowance for wet conditions, disposal and/or backfill are
not included.
HAND EXCV
Truck haul-disposal or purchased fill
Material cost may be input for purchased fill or dump charge.
Hauling by dumptrucks (lorries) with option of loading from stockpiles.
Does not include excavation, spreading, or backfill. Soil type will
determine bulking factor. For purchased fill or dump charge, the user
may specify the cost (in user-defined currency at User Base Index) per
loose CY [M3].
HAULING
Excavation - continued
Description Type
Manual jackhammer work - no disposal
Breaking or trimming of rock or concrete by hand-held jackhammer,
including compressor and operating crew. Concrete may be plain or
reinforced. Rock types include gypsum, slate, limestone, sandstone
and granite. Does not include disposal.
J HAMMER
Rock excavation with tractor and ripper for hauling, Both the haul
distance and the loading equipment type must be input Rock
excavation by D9 crawler tractor with ripper attachment. In addition,
the user may specify truck loading (by crawler backhoe or wheeled
front-end leader) and hauling. Rock types are gypsum, slate,
limestone, sandstone and granite. Ripping costs may be increased
(greater fragmentation) to facilitate truck loading.
RIP ROCK
Shoring of excavations
Max shored depth:
40 FEET [12M] - sheet, HPILE;
20 FEET [6M] - close; 10 FEET [3M] - open bracing.
Installation, adjustment, accessories, removal, cleaning, rental or
owning cost and waste are included. Dewatering not included. Types
available:
Steel interlocking sheet piling, 30 PSF [145 KG/M2],
including bracing (SHEET).
Steel H piles driven on 8 FEET [2.4 M] centers, timber
planks and spacers horizontally between flanges, including
bracing (HPILE).
Solid timber sheeting supported by timber waling and
braces (CLOSE).
Single vertical planks spaced on 3 FEET [0.9 M] centers
with bracing (OPEN).
SHORING
Excavation with stockpile or disposal
The haul distance should be input if the disposal option is chosen.
Bulk site excavation using crawler loader, dragline, or crawler
backhoes. If the disposal and distance fields are not used, it will be
assumed that the excavated material is to be stockpiled within 100
FEET [30 M] of the excavation. The disposal options are:
HAUL - generates a truck-loading cycle, dumptruck, sizing, off-road
hauling the user specified distance and dumping.
SPREAD - generates (in addition to truck hauling) spreading in the
fill area by
D8 dozer and rough grading, with no compaction.
Soil type ROCK refers to already ripped or shot rock.
SITE EXCVN
Excavation - continued
Description Type
Strip and stockpile soil - no hauling
Strip and stockpile site topsoil to a specified average depth. Equipment
options include crawler loader, elevating scraper, or dozer. Truck
hauling or spreading not included. Man-hours are adjusted for area,
depth and equipment used.
STRIP SOIL
Machine excavation, no backfill/shoring, etc.
Machine excavation (with hand trimming) of basements, footings, etc.
Equipment options include: 0.75 CY [0.6 M3] wheeled loader/backhoe
(WH-LD), crawler backhoe, or crawler crane with clamshell bucket
suitable for excavations deeper
than 30 FEET [10 M]. If shoring is required, see SHORING. Soil type
ROCK refers to already ripped or shot rock. Dewatering, disposal and/
or backfilling are not included.
STRUC EXC
Ditching no backfill/shoring, etc.
Machine excavation (with hand trimming) using
wheeled loader/backhoe (WH-LD), crawler backhoe, or
trenching machine. If shoring is required, see
SHORING.
Soil type ROCK refers to already ripped or shot rock.
Dewatering, disposal, and/or backfill are not included.
TRENCH EXC
Fencing
Description Type
Barbed wire topping for fence
No. of sides = wire on one or both sides of fence;
No. of strands = no. each side
Installation of barbed wire on chain link, mesh, or security fence. Two
or three-strand galvanized or aluminum wire on either 1 or 2 sides.
BARBED
Boundary or Perimeter fencing in which the user can specify both
fence and gates has been added.
BOUNDARY
Chain link fence with concrete footing
Installation of chain link fence, including excavation and concrete for
posts on 10 FEET [3 M] centers and braced and trussed line posts at
100 FEET [30 M] centers. Galvanized or aluminum wire or vinyl-coated
steel.
CHAIN LINK
Wood fencing

Permanent wood fencing of cedar picket, redwood basket-weave, or
oak rustic rail with appropriate gates.
FENCE
WOOD
Lump sum quotation - fencing
FENCING
Free standing wall
Default one course thickness - all types;
Double may be input for brick and block.
Materials are:4 INCH [100 MM] common brick
8 INCH[200 MM] concrete block
18 INCH[450 MM] decorative random stone
8 INCH[200 MM] concrete.
FS WALL
Industrial gate for fence
Industrial gates of galvanized steel, aluminum, or vinyl-coated steel
with posts excavated and set in concrete. Barbed wire and motor
operation are optional.
Gates are assumed to be double widths if 8 FEET [2.5 M] or more.
GATES
Wire mesh fencing
Galvanized steel mesh fencing and gates with posts on 5 FEET [1.5 M]
centers.
No bracing or concrete.
MESH
Heavy duty security fencing
Heavy duty security fence, security grade, set in concrete and trussed
and braced.
SECURITY
Landscaping
Description Type
Mesh or netting erosion control

Erosion control by placing and securing either jute mesh, plastic
netting, polypropylene mesh, or tobacco netting.
EROSION
Placing peat or wood chip mulch

Placing a 2 INCH [50 MM] deep layer of either wood chips or peat moss
as mulch.
MULCH
Planting trees or shrubs

Planting either 8-10 FEET [2.5-3 M] trees or 4-5 FEET [1.2-1.5 M]
shrubs. Siting, placing, fertilizing, and watering plantings are included.
PLANTING
Fine grade, seed, lime, fertilize

Fine grading, seeding, liming, fertilization, and final watering.
SEEDING
Furnish, place sod on prepared area

Furnish, place, and water sod (1 INCH [25 MM) deep) on pregraded
area.
SODDING
Polybor chlorate soil sterilization

Sterilization of cleared areas using polybor chlorate.
STERILIZE
Furnish, place and fine grade topsoil

Furnish, place and fine-grade topsoil.
TOPSOIL
Lump sum quotation - landscaping

LANDSCAPE
Roads - Slabs - Paving
Description Type
Paving - asphalt base and wearing courses
either base or wearing course depth must be input; Material option -
sand topping.
Assumes paver for roadways or spreader for parking and other small
areas (PARK). A base course and/or a fine aggregate wearing course
thickness must be selected. A 0.75 INCH
[20 MM] sand finish may be added. Includes hauling to site, grading,
and compaction.
ASPHALT
Grade and compact base for paving

Grade and compact areas to correct elevation to plus or minus 0.1
FEET [0.03 M].
BASE PREP
Concrete paving - no base preparation
Paving with 4500 PSI [31,000 KN/M2] concrete. Preparation of
compacted subgrade and/or paving not included. Includes finishing
and curing, with optional steel
reinforcing mats. Placing by slipform machine may be specified for
concrete roadways.
CONC PAVNG
Slipformed or manual cross gutter

Six INCH [150 MM] thick concrete cross-guttering of selected width
and length.
Optional forming, pouring, finishing, and expansion joints, or
slipforming by machine for widths up to 10 FEET [3 M], if specified.
CROSS GUTT
Slipformed or manual placed curb
Concrete curb (kerb) only, 14 INCHES [350 MM] deep by 9 INCHES
[225 MM] wide overall. Optional either forming, pouring and finishing
by hand with expansion joints on 30 FEET [9 M] centers or
slipforming by machine, if specified.
CURB
Slipformed or manual curb and gutter

Monolithic concrete curbing (kerbing) and gutter. Optional forming,
pouring, and
expansion joints on 30 FEET [9 M] centers or slipform by machine, if
specified.
CURB GUTT
Concrete canal or gutter
Concrete canal or gutter with concrete cover. Inside length, Inside
width and Inside
depth must be input. If not specified, system calculates Cover
(default: 8 IN [200 MM] prefab concrete slab); Hand Excavation;
Machine Excavation; Blinding slab; Concrete;
Formwork; Rebar; Anchors and embedments. Excavation Material
(Default: EARTH); End Wall Requirement (Default: *B*, O, N);
Sealcoat or Liner area (Default: 0); and
Liner Type (Default: GM, C1, C2, * NO*) can be also specified.
The material and manhour per volume of concrete will be calculated
based on the factors used for BASIN (Type 10). If civil external file is
used, the factors from the external file will be used.
CANALGUTTR
Description Type
Roads - Slabs - Paving - continued
Description Type
Coal tar pitch emulsion (2 coats)
Application of sealcoating. Includes cleaning and preparing the existing
surface and applying two coats of coal tar pitch emulsion.
SEALCOAT
Sidewalk base and paving
Installation of concrete or asphalt sidewalks or pavements with an
option of a bank run gravel base.
SIDEWALKS
Gravel base course - no base prep
Soil cement treatment option available for subgrade.
Subpaving base course. Options include crushed stone, bank run
gravel, and macadam penetration. Soil cement treatment may also be
selected. Subgrade preparation is not included.
SUBPAVING
Resurfacing with sealant and gravel
Tar and chip. Placing sealant and binder on an existing surface and
covering with screened gravel. Includes surface cleaning and rolling
following treatment.
TAR CHIP
Parking Area
Paving, Sub Paving and Excavation. Optional Shoulder, Sidewalk,
Median, Concrete Curb, Guard Rail, Lining and compaction. Paving
material can be Asphalt, Concrete,
Concrete Block, Prefabricated concrete tile, or Stone pavers.
PARKING
Lump sum quotation - paving/roads
Enter Total Cost or Matl and MH. See code of accounts (Civil only).
PAVING
Main, secondary and minor Roads
Paving, Sub Paving, Shoulder and Excavation. Optional Sidewalk,
Median, Concrete Curb, Guard Rail, Lining and compaction. Default is
Main Road with Asphalt paving, Gravel Base course, and One side
Shoulder. The width and depth are based on the road type.
Paving options - Asphalt, Concrete, Concrete Block, Prefabricated
concrete tile, or Stone pavers. Shoulder options - Asphalt, Gravel or
Crushed stone. Sidewalk options - Asphalt, Concrete, Tiles, or Stone
pavers.
ROAD
Site Preparation for paving has been added. This includes Grubbing
and cleaning, Hand and Machine Excavation, Fill of Subgrade and
Compaction.
SITEPREP
Piling
Description Type
Drilled bell-type caisson
Open-style machine-drilled bell-caissons, including mobilization,
concrete, reinforcement, drilling equipment rental, and load testing, in
the following ground conditions:
OptionDescription
EARTH Dry, stable soils
CLAY Wet, unstable soils
ROCK Soft, weathered rock.
CAISSON
Driven pipe piles
Driving set pipe piles of selected diameter with an option of concrete
filling.
Equipment rental includes rental of drilling equipment.
PIPE
Drilled and cast-in-place concrete piles

Cast-in-place concrete piles with 4000 PSI[27.5 N/MM2] concrete.
Includes equipment setup and breakdown and load testing.
Pile Types:
POUR - Poured 12"[300MM] to 20"[500MM], capacity: 72 Tons [65
Tonne] Cast-in-place constant diameter concrete piles.
FRNK - Frank 16"[400MM] to 24"[600MM], capacity: 220 Tons[200
Tonne] Bored large size piles, enlarged base, reinforced with steel
cages.
AUGR - Auger-Cast 12"[300MM] to 24"[600MM], capacity 250
Tons[225 Tonne] Auger drilled and then grouted under pressure as
the auger is withdrawn. Rebar installed when grout is fluid.
POURED
Driven precast concrete piles

Driving precast concrete piles, either solid square shaped or,
optionally, hollow cylindrical shaped. Includes equipment rigging and
derigging, splicing, if required, and cutoff.
Capacity: 90 Tons
PRECAST
Driven Raymond step-taper piles
Driving Raymond step-taper piles. Piles furnished and
installed on a subcontract basis by Raymond
International, Inc. Testing not included.
RAYMOND
Piling - continued
Description Type
Driven steel H-PILES
Example:
heavy duty pile - 57 LB/FT [85 KG/M]
instead of 42 [62] for 10 INCH [250 MM] pile
Driving steel H-section piles of selected cross-section including
equipment rigging and derigging, points, splicing, if required, and
cutoff. Heavy duty option available (e.g., for 10 x 10 INCHES [250 MM
x 250 MM], heavy duty, 57 LB/FT
[85 KG/M] is used instead of standard 42 LB/FT [62 KG/M] for steel).
STEEL H
Driven wood piles
Driving wood piling either friction or point bearing. Includes rigging
and derigging equipment, boots, points, and splices, if required.
Creosote treated or concrete and mesh encased piles may be selected.
Cutoff included. Load testing is not included.
WOOD
Lump sum quotation - piling
Enter Total Cost or Matl MH.
PILING
Railroads
Description Type
Bumper at siding end
Installation of bumpers on a siding end. Heavy duty bumpers available
as an option.
BUMPER
Single line siding crossing
Single line siding crossing including special track mat, timber, and
crossing signal installed on level grade.
CROSSING
Single track yard siding
Installation of a single track yard siding on level ground, including
rails, hardware, timber ties and ballast. New or relay rail and rail
weight option available.
SIDING
Heavy duty siding for mining application
Heavy duty single track for mining applications. Six INCH [150 MM]
steel WF ties set in 10 INCH [250 MM] concrete bed, 9 FEET [2.7 M]
wide. Includes fasteners, plates, rebar and 100 LB/YD [50 KG/M] new
rail.
SIDING HVY
Crossing signal with barrier, etc.
Track crossing signal with road barrier and flashing light.
SIGNAL
Wheel stops on siding
Installation of wheel stops on a yard siding.
STOPS
#8 turnout, switch-hitting, etc.
Installation of #8 turnouts, including rails, plates, bars, frogs, switch-
points, timbers and ballast.
TURNOUT
Lump sum quotation - railroads
Enter Total Cost or Matl MH.
RAILROADS
26 Buildings (G6) 26-1
Introduction to Buildings
Adding a Building
Building Types and Defaults
Default Floor Heights/Levels
Building Construction Range Adjustment
Calculating Building Costs and Labor
Figure 1
Figure 2
26 Buildings (G6)
26-2 26 Buildings (G6)
Introduction to Buildings
Building data is used to incorporate a number of independent buildings and/or
their associated services into the project. Enclosed buildings are distinguished
from steel structures (areas, plant bulks) in that they are not designed to
support equipment loads. An enclosed building may house equipment, but this
does not affect the resulting building design or cost.
The cost of a building is based upon its size, type, structural style and the
requested services. The default costs and electrical load for each building type
are indicated in the Building Types and Defaults table on the following page.
You may revise the level of each service (none, L, M, H or V) and/or the cost of
that service. All costs are assumed to be direct field costs assigned to the
prime contractor, except in the case of contract jobs, in which they are
assigned to the contractor specified.
Adding a Building
A building can be added under Plant Bulks, Civil, or under Buildings. Defaults
are identical and material costs, man-hours and labor costs are calculated the
same way.
If you are using Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the underlying data for these
costs can be defined in an external file under Administrator control. See Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator Users Guide, Chapter 10, Administrative Operations,
for details.
Buildings are not designed items, but are developed as costs per surface area
(Unit Cost) items.
You can specify your building using one of three general approaches:
1 Select any Total cost adjust. value that uses some default value, then
accept the resulting unit costs.
2 Select the in Total cost adjust., then enter your unit costs for each of
the five general categories.
3 Start with method (1), above, then override selected categories (e.g., Total
super-structure cost) or elements of a category (e.g., Frame, etc.) with
your unit cost.
If you specify the unit cost for any element in a category, this suppresses all
other elements in that same category, but does not affect other categories. For
example, if you specify the unit cost for the Floor element in the Total super-
structure category, all other elements in that category are set to zero cost -- if
you want to generate a cost for the Stair element, then you must specify a unit
cost for that element.
If you specify a value for both a category and one or more elements in that
category, the costs are not additive- only the unit cost specified for the
category is used and the elements are ignored.
Costs are split between material and labor according to percentages in the
internal (system defaults) or in the external (Administrator specified) file.
The split for the internal table varies from a high of 62% to a low of 38% for
material. Building overhead and profit are separately specifiable for each
building type.
The fields Explosion Pressure, Foundation Type, and Roof Type have no effect
on the design and cost of the building; they are included for informational
purposes only.
Field Descriptions:
Gross floor area: Default: calculated from length, width, height, number of
levels, and building type.
Building type: see Building Types earlier in this chapter.
Building height: Default: determined from number of levels and
building type.
Number of levels: Default: calculated from length, width, height, area, and
building type.
Explosion gauge pressure: For control buildings only, design pressure for
explosion resistance. Default: *0.0* PSIG; MAX: 30.0 PSIG.
Electrical load: W/SF
Total cost adjustment symbol: Invokes either the built-in system values for
a Medium item (blank or M), a down-adjustment (L), an up-adjustment (H or
V), or suppresses the default costs ().
(blank)System Defaults
No System Defaults, user data only
L - Low adjustment for system defaults (range varies from 45-98% of M)
M - Medium adjustment for system defaults (the default value= 100%)
H - High adjustment for system defaults (range varies from 106-216% of M)
V - Very high adjustment for system defaults (range varies from 159-324%
of M)
Foundation type:
*NORMAL*- Spread footings.
PIERS- 10 FEET [3M] deep piers to footings.
PILES- Floors on piles
Roof type:
*FLAT*- Flat roof.
TRUSS- Truss roof.
SAW- Sawtooth roof.
Labor adjustment required: When calculating the labor hours and costs to
report, the system can take a variety of parameters into account: wage rate in
external file or in project; time and currency difference between external file
and project; user man-hour indexing and productivity adjustments. Specify in
this field which of these to take into account. If you are using an external file,
it is best to select YES.
*YES*- Adjust labor cost by system rate, productivity; use external file
wage rates.
NO- No adjustment of labor cost.
Total substructure cost: foundation cost per unit area.
Total superstructure cost: enter either total super-structure or individual
structure component cost for the following:
Exterior door and window
Exterior wall
Floor
Frame
Int door and window
Roof
Stair internal table varies from a high of 62% to a low of 38% for material.
Building overhead and profit are separately specifiable for each building type.
Total interior finish cost: enter either total internal finish cost or individual
finish component cost.
Total fitting and furniture cost: enter either total fittings, furniture cost.
Total services cost: enter either total services cost or individual service
component cost.
Overhead and Profit: enter total overhead and profit cost.
Building Types and Defaults

S
H
O
P
O
F
F
I
C
E
C
O
M
P
R
C
A
F
E
W
A
R
E
C
O
N
T
R
L
G
A
R
A
G
E
L
A
B
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
A
N
T
R
Y
E
X
I
S
T
S
H
E
L
L
W
A
G
E
Y
E
A
R
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
A
L

U
N
I
T

L
O
A
D
4
5
4
2
0
.
5
4
0
.
5
5
1
1
1
1
S
U
B
S
T
R
U
C
T
U
R
E

T
O
T
A
L
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
9
8
S
U
B
S
T
R
U
C
T
U
R
E

T
O
T
A
L
-

F
r
a
m
e
-

F
l
o
o
r
-

R
o
o
f
-

S
t
a
i
r
s
-

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

W
a
l
l
s
-

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

D
o
o
r
s

&

W
i
n
d
o
w
s
-

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

D
o
o
r
s

&

W
i
n
d
o
w
s
2
1
.
0
5
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
3
1
.
1
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
2
4
.
8
8
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
2
6
.
8
8
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
1
8
.
6
9
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
3
1
.
5
6
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
1
9
.
6
9
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
3
2
.
0
9
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
2
1
.
0
5
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
3
0
.
5
9
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
2
1
.
0
5
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
2
1
.
0
5
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
I
N
T
E
R
N
A
L

F
I
N
I
S
H

T
O
T
A
L
-

W
a
l
l

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
s
-

F
l
o
o
r

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
s
-

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
s
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
.
1
2
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
F
I
T
T
I
N
G

&

F
U
R
N
I
S
H
I
N
G

T
O
T
A
L
1
2
.
7
1
1
5
.
2
1
1
2
.
1
7
1
5
.
2
1
1
2
.
1
7
1
8
.
2
5
1
2
.
1
7
4
8
.
6
7
1
2
.
1
7
1
7
.
6
9
1
2
.
1
7
1
2
.
1
7
1
8
.
6
4
1
9
9
8
S
E
R
V
I
C
E

T
O
T
A
L
-

A
i
r

C
o
n
d
i
t
i
o
n
i
n
g
-

L
i
g
h
t
i
n
g

a
n
d

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c
a
l
-

H
e
a
t
i
n
g
/
V
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
i
o
n
-

P
l
u
m
b
i
n
g

&

F
i
x
t
u
r
e
s
-

F
i
r
e

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
-

L
i
f
t

I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
-

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
-

S
p
e
c
i
a
l

I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
-

B
u
i
l
d
e
r
s

W
o
r
k
0
.
0
0
4
.
4
0
5
.
4
7
2
.
7
8
3
.
7
9
1
.
8
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
6
.
9
5
8
.
1
1
3
.
0
0
5
.
1
0
1
.
8
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
4
.
4
0
8
.
1
1
2
.
7
8
3
.
6
7
1
.
8
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
6
.
9
5
5
.
6
8
3
.
0
0
5
.
1
0
1
.
3
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
4
.
4
0
3
.
1
9
2
.
7
8
3
.
6
7
1
.
8
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
7
.
4
1
8
.
1
1
3
.
0
0
5
.
1
0
1
.
8
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
4
.
4
0
5
.
6
8
2
.
7
8
3
.
6
7
1
.
8
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
7
.
4
1
8
.
1
1
3
.
0
0
5
.
6
0
1
.
8
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
4
.
4
0
5
.
6
8
2
.
7
8
4
.
5
1
1
.
3
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
0
.
0
0
6
.
9
5
8
.
1
1
3
.
0
0
5
.
1
0
1
.
8
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
4
.
4
0
5
.
6
8
2
.
7
8
4
.
5
1
1
.
3
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
4
.
4
0
5
.
6
8
2
.
7
8
4
.
5
1
1
.
3
7
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
2
1
.
3
3
2
0
.
7
7
2
2
.
5
9
2
1
.
6
4
2
0
.
3
1
2
1
.
3
6
2
2
.
5
9
2
2
.
5
9
1
8
.
6
4
1
8
.
6
4
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
1
9
9
8
O
V
E
R
H
E
A
D

A
N
D

P
R
O
F
I
T
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
1
9
9
8
Default floor Heights/Levels
Building Construction Range
Adjustment
Building Type Type Symbol Height per Floor or Level
FEET M
Cafeteria CAFE 12.0 3.5
Enclosed Building CLOSED 20.0 6.0
Compressor Building COMPR 20.0 6.0
Control Room CONTRL 10.0 3.0
Existing Building EXIST 20.0 6.0
Garage GARAGE 15.0 4.5
Laboratory LAB 10.0 3.0
Office Building OFFICE 10.0 3.0
Sanitary Enclosed SANTRY 20.0 6.0
Building Shell* SHELL 20.0 6.0
Shop SHOP 20.0 6.0
Warehouse WARE 20.0 6.0
Adjustment
Symbol
Construction
Type
Frame Roof Walls Floors Finishes
L Pre-Fabricated Light Steel Light Steel Transite
or metal
sheet
Concrete Minimum
M Pre-fabricated Medium
steel frame
and trusses
Concrete Concrete
walls or
good
brick
Concrete Average
H Custom
designed
Heavy
steel,
heavy
sidings
Concrete Face
brick on
concrete
block
Concrete Expensive
Calculating Building Costs and
Labor
When calculating the cost of a building, the system uses either the internal file
conditions or those specified in the external file. If the external file is used, the
system first reads in that file, then:
Converts all the costs in the external file to the currency of the project base country
location using the Currency Conversion in the external file.
Escalates these to the same time point as the cost base of the system using the
yearly cost indices by country location, by major account. A summary of these is
reported in the Release Notes for each version.
Converts these into the reporting currency units for the current project using the
Conversion Rate specified in the project.
This allows you to use an external file built using any currency and at any date
known to the system (see Chapter 33, Base Indices) in a project with any
reporting currency. For analytical purposes, you may want to Year in the
external file to be the same as the base year of your system to allow you to
trace your numbers through a complete computation.
In order to calculate the various hours and costs, the system must first adjust
all items to be at the same basis: same currency and same time point. The
costs for each element and/or category are calculated according to the
methodologies indicated in Figure 1 (How Building Costs are Calculated Using
the External File- general procedures that focus on adjusting for currency and
time differences); Figure 2 (How Building Material Costs are Calculated Using
the External File); and Figure 3 (How Building Labor Hours & Costs are
Calculated Using the External File). The following generalizations are
important:
The critical item to understand is that it is necessary for the system to move all
costs to the same currency (one of the three known to the system: USD, PS or KY)
and to the same time point (SBI is the time at which all the system-generated costs
are valid). Because of this, you must thoroughly understand the escalation
concepts used by the system (SBI, UBI and EI) and be very consistent in your use
of dates and parity rates valid at those dates.
It follows from this that it is very important for you to enter at least the UBI for
your project.
When used with systems where these escalation concepts do not apply, or if you do
not use them in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, it is important to appreciate potential
time-based discrepancies between user-entered numbers that are valid now and
those computed by the system that are valid at the base year of the system being
used.
It is usually best to let the system pick the unit costs based on your inputs and set
Labor adjust=YES.
Since the numbers in the external file are always adjusted to the year of the current
version, the final numbers reported are rarely, if ever, the same as those entered in
the external file.
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
27 Quoted Equipment and Libraries (G6) 27-1
Introduction
Quoted Equipment
User Libraries
27 Quoted Equipment and
Libraries (G6)
27-2 27 Quoted Equipment and Libraries (G6)
Introduction
There are two methods for specifying specialty items or items not included in
system:
Quoted equipment
User libraries
Quoted Equipment
Quoted equipment items can be used for unique, special, non-standard and
proprietary types of process equipment. Since quoted equipment items are
unknown to the system, an account code must be provided when entering
the quote.
If you enter a COA that is known to the system as one containing rotating
equipment (COAs 150-179 and 220-229), then the system calculates an
allowance for spares and adds it to COA 107. This does not happen if you are
using your own complete COA set in a project.
User Libraries
User libraries are meant to hold your important personalized cost data. There
are two kinds of libraries:
Unit Cost Library - Holds information related to material and labor costs
(per unit quantity) for equipment, bulks or indirects.
Equipment Model Library (EML) - Holds information related to the
process equipment. You can store cost vs. capacity data for special kinds of
process equipment.
You can add Piping and Instrumentation drawings to the EML in Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator. For instructions, see Tutorial: Assigning Default
P&IDs to User Entered Equipment on page 10-20 of the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator Users Guide.
If your library requirements are extensive, you should consider building
several libraries, placing like items in the same library. All items in a library
share the same currency basis and are converted as appropriate when added
to a project.
28 Material Selections (G10) 28-1
ASME Design Code - Plate Materials
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
ASME Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
ASME Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
ASME Design Code - Tube Materials
ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
ASME Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
BS Design Code - Plate Materials
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
BS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
BS Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
BS Design Code - Tube Materials
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - Heat Treated Steel
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
BS Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
JIS Design Code - Plate Materials
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
28 Material Selections (G10)
28-2 28 Material Selections (G10)
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
JIS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
JIS Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
JIS Design Code - Tube Materials
JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
JIS Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
DIN Design Code - Plate Materials
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
DIN Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
DIN Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
DIN Design Code - Tube Materials
DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
DIN Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
EN 13445 Design Code - Plate Materials
EN Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steels
EN Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steels
EN Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steels
EN 13445 Design Code - Tube Materials
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steels
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steels
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steels
GB 150 Design Code - Plate Materials
GB 150 Plate Materials - Carbon Steels
GB 150 Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steels
GB 150 Plate Materials - High Alloy Steels
GB 150 Design Code - Tube Materials
GB 150 Tube Materials - Carbon Steels
GB 150 Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steels
GB 150 Tube Materials - High Alloy Steels
Lining Materials
Brick: Acid-Resistant Applied Over Membrane-Lined Carbon Steel
Brick: Firebrick
Monolithic Lining
Abrasion Resistant Linings: Replaceable
Linings: Organic, Glass, Metallic
Casting Materials
Packing Materials
ASME Design Code - Plate
Materials
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
na = Material not selectable for vacuum design
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
A-36 (Structural Steel) A 36 650 343 900 482
A-283
(c)
Low and intermediate
strength carbon steel
plates of structural
quality
A 283C 650 343 900 482
A-285
(C)
plates for pressure
vessels
A 285 or
A 285 C
or CS
900 482 900 482
A-299 Carbon-manganese-
silicon steel plates for
plates for pressure
vessels
A 299 1000 537 900 482
A-455
(A)
Pressure vessel plates,
carbon steel, high
strength manganese
A 455 650 343 650 343
A-515
(70)
Carbon steel plates for
pressure vessels for
intermediate and higher
temperature service:
C-Si
A 515 1000 537 900 482
A-516
(70)
moderate and lower
temperature service -
C-Si
A 516 1000 537 900 482
A-537 Carbon steel plates for
pressure vessels for low
temperature service
C-Mn-Si
A 537 1292 700 300 148
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated
Steel
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
A-353 Nine percent nickel alloy
steel plates, double
normalized and
tempered for pressure
vessels:
9Ni
A353 250 121 900 484
A-553
(Type 1)
Eight and nine percent
nickel alloy steel plates,
quenched and
tempered, for pressure
vessels:
9Ni
A553 250 121 900 484
A-517
(A)
(B)
(E)
(F)
High strength alloy steel
plates, quenched and
vessels:
Cr-Mn-Si
Cr-Mn-Si
Cr-Mn-Si
Cr-Mn-Si
A517A
A517B
A517E
A517F
650
650
650
650
343
343
343
343
650
650
650
650
343
343
343
343
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy
Steel
- continued on next page -
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
A-202
(A)
(B)
Chromium-
manganese-silicon
alloy steel plates for
pressure vessels
A202A
A 202
or
A202B
1000
1000
537
537
900
900
482
482
A-203
(A)
(B)
(D)
(E)
Nickel alloy steel
plates for pressure
vessels:
2.5Ni
2.5Ni
3.5Ni
3.5Ni
A203A
A203B
A203D
A203E
1000
1000
1000
1000
537
537
537
537
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
A-204
(A)
(B)
(C)
Molybdenum alloy
steel plates for
pressure vessels:
C-.5Mo
C-.5Mo
C-.5Mo
A204A
A204B
A 204
or A204C
1000
1000
1000
537
537
537
900
900
900
482
482
482
A-302
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Manganese-
molybdenum and
manganese-
molybdenum-nickel
pressure vessels:
Mn-.5Mo
Mn-.5Mo
Mn-.5Mo-Ni
Mn-.5Mo-Ni
A302A
A 302
or
A302B
A302C
A302D
1000
1000
1000
1000
537
537
537
537
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel - continued
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
A-387
(2 CL 1)
(2 CL 2)
(12 CL 1)
(12 CL 2)
(11 CL 1)
(11 CL 2)
(22 CL 1)
(22 CL 2)
(21 CL 1)
(21 CL 2)
alloy steel, chromium-
molybdenum:
.5Cr-.5Mo
.5Cr-.5Mo
1Cr-.5Mo
1Cr-.5Mo
1.25Cr-.5Mo-Si
1.25Cr-.5Mo-Si
2.25Cr-1Mo
2.25Cr-1Mo
3Cr-1Mo
3Cr-1Mo
5Cr-.5Mo
5Cr-.5Mo
A387A
A387G
A387B
A387H
A387C
A387J
A387D
A387K
A387E
A387L
A387F
A387M
1000
1000
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
537
537
648
648
648
648
648
648
648
648
648
648
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
482
482
482
482
482
482
482
482
A-533
(A CL 1)
(B CL 1)
(C CL 1)
Manganese-
molybdenum and
manganese-
molybdenum-nickel
alloy steel plates,
quenched and
tempered, for
pressure vessels:
C-Mn-Mo
C-Mn-Mo-Ni
C-Mn-Mo-Ni
A533A
A533B
A533C
1000
800
800
537
426
426
650
650
650
343
343
343
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy
Steel
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
A-240 Chromium and
chromium-nickel
stainless steel plate,
sheet, and strip for
fusion-welded unfired
pressure vessels:
(304L) 18Cr - 8Ni 304L 1200 648 1200 648f
(304) 18Cr - 8Ni SS304
(or SS)
1500 815 1200 648
(316L) 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316L 850 454 800 426
(316) 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo SS316 1500 815 1200 648
(316Ti) 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo-Ti 316TI 1500 815 1200 648
(317) 18Cr - 10Ni - 3Mo SS317 1500 815 1200 648
(321) 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti SS321 1500 815 1200 648
(347) 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb SS347 1500 815 1200 648
(348) 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb SS348 1500 815 1200 648
(648) 20 Cr - 18 Ni - 6 Mo SS6MO 1382 750 1200 648
(2205) Duplex
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo S2205 600 315 650 343
(410) 13Cr SS410 1200 648 900 482
(430) 17Cr SS430 1200 648 1200 648
ASME Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
na = material not selectable for vacuum design
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
B-209
(1100)
(3003)
(5052)
(5083)
(5086)
(6061)
Aluminum-alloy sheet
and plate:
Al
Al
Al
Al
Al
Al
A1100
A3003
A5052
A5083
A5086
A6061
400
400
400
150
150
204
204
204
204
66
66
204
400
400
400
150
150
400
204
204
204
66
66
204
B-171
(464)
Copper and copper
alloys - Naval brass
CA464 400 204 350 177
B-11
(110)
Copper plates for
locomotive fireboxes
Cu CU or
CA110
400 204 150 66
B-96
(655)
Copper-silicon alloy
plate and sheet for
pressure vessels:
Cu - Zn CA655 350 176 350 176
B-152
(122)
Copper sheet, strip,
plate, and rolled bar:
Cu CA122 400 204 150 66
B-171
(715)
Copper-nickel alloy plate
and sheet for pressure
vessels:
Cu - Ni 70/30 CA715 700 371 700 371
ASME Non-Ferrous Plate Materials - continued
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
B-333
(B)
Hastelloy:
Ni - Mo HAST or
HASTB
800 426 800 426
B-575
(C-276)
Hastelloy:
Ni - Mo - Cr HASTC 1000 537 1000 537
B-409
(800)
Specification for nickel-
iron-chromium alloy
plate, sheet, and strip:
Ni - Fe - Cr I800 1500 815 800 426
B-424
(825)
Nickel-iron-chromium-
molybdenum-copper
alloy plate, sheet, and
strip:
Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo - Cu I825 1000 537 700 371
B-463
(20Cb)
Carpenter 20 alloy plate,
sheet and strip:
Cr-Ni-Fe-Mo-Cu-Cb C 20 800 426 800 426
B-168
(600)
Nickel-chromium-iron
strip,
Inconel:
Ni - Cr - Fe
INCNL
or
I600
1200 648 800 426
B-162
(200)
(201)
Nickel plate, sheet, and
strip:
Ni
Ni-Low C
NI or
NI200
NI201
600
600
1200
315
315
648
600
600
1000
315
315
537
B-127
(400)
Nickel-copper alloy
Ni - Cu
MONEL
or
M400
900 482 800 426
B-265
(1)
(2)
Titanium and titanium
alloy strip, sheet, and
plate:
Ti
Ti
TI35A
Tl
or
TI50A
600
600
600
315
315
315
600
600
600
315
315
315
ASME Design Code - Clad Plate
Materials
* See Plate Materials (ASME Code) for further material descriptions.
** Only these base materials may be used with the above list of cladding
materials.
No other combination may be selected.
Material Classification
Description*
Grade System
Material
Symbol
Vessel Base (Backing
Material)**
ASTM A-285
ASTM A-285
A-204
A-515
A-516
A-387
A-387
A-387
A-387
A-387
A-387
C
B
C
70
70
12 CL 1
12 CL 2
11 CL 1
11 CL 2
22 CL 1
22 CL 2
A285C
A204B
A204C
A 515
A 516
A387B
A387H
A387C
A387J
A387D
A387K
Cladding Material (Process
Side)
Stainless steel type 304
304L
316
316L
321
347
410
430
SS304
304L
SS316
316L
SS321
SS347
SS410
SS430
Nickel alloy 200
201
NI200
NI201
Monel 400 MONEL
Inconel 600 INCNL
Ni-Fe-Cr 800 I800
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu 825 I825
Carpenter 20 20Cb C 20
Titanium 2 Ti
Hastelloy B B HASTB
Hastelloy C C-276 HASTC
ASME Design Code - Tube
Materials
ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
MaterialSymb
ol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximu
m Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
A-179 Seamless cold-drawn
low-carbon steel heat
exchanger and
condenser tubes.
CS (seamless)
A 179
900
900
482
482
900
900
482
482
A285C
A285C
A-192 Seamless carbon steel
boiler tubes for high-
pressure service
A 192 1000 537 900 482 A 515
A-210
(A-1)
(C)
Seamless medium
carbon steel boiler and
superheater tubes
A210A
A210C
1000
1000
537
537
900
900
482
482
A515
A515
A-214 Electric-resistance-
welded carbon steel
heat exchanger and
condenser tubes
CS (welded)
A 214
1000
1000
537
537
900
900
482
482
A515
A515
A-334
(1)
(6)
Seamless carbon steel
tubes for low
temperature service
A334A
A334B
700
700
371
371
700
700
371
371
A 442
A 442
ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy
Steel
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
A-199
(T11)
(T22)
(T21)
(T5)
Seamless cold-drawn
intermediate alloy
steel heat exchanger
and condenser tubes:
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
2.5Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - .9Mo
5Cr - .5Mo
A199C
A199D
A199E
A199F
1200
1200
1200
1200
648
648
648
648
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
A387C
A387D
A387E
A387F
A-209
(T1)
(T1A)
(T1B)
Seamless carbon-
molybdenum alloy
steel boiler and
superheater tubes:
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
A 209
A209A
A209B
1000
1000
1000
537
537
537
900
900
900
482
482
482
A 204
A 204
A 204
A-213
(T2)
(T12)
(T11)
(T22)
(T21)
(T5)
Seamless ferritic and
austenitic alloy steel
boiler, superheater,
and heat exchanger
tubes:
.5Cr - .5Mo
1Cr - .5Mo
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
2.25Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - .9Mo
5Cr - .5Mo
A213A
A213B
A213C
A213D
A213E
A213F
1000
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
537
648
648
648
648
648
900
900
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
482
482
A387A
A387B
A387C
A387D
A387E
A387F
ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy
Steel
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
A-213
TP304
TP304L
TP316
TP316L
TP321
TP347
Seamless Ferritic
and austenitic alloy
steel boiler,
superheater, and
heat exchanger
tubes:
18Cr - 8Ni
18Cr - 8Ni
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
304S
(or SS)
304LS
316S
316LS
321S
347S
1500
1200
1500
850
1500
1500
815
648
815
454
815
815
1000
1200
1000
850
1000
1000
537
648
537
454
537
537
SS304
304L
SS316
316L
SS321
SS347
A-249
TP304
TP304L
TP316
TP316L
TP321
TP347
Welded austenitic
steel boiler
superheater, heat
exchanger, and
condenser tubes:
18Cr - 8Ni
18Cr - 8Ni
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
304W
304LW
316W
316LW
321W
347W
1500
1200
1500
850
1500
1500
815
648
815
454
815
815
1000
1200
1000
815
1000
1000
537
648
537
426
537
537
SS304
SS304
SS316
316L
SS321
SS347
A-268
TP410
TP410
Seamless tubes
13C
Welded tubes
13C
410S
410W
1200
1200
648
648
900
900
482
482
SS410
SS410
A-789
(S31803)
Welded duplex
austenitic steel
tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo 2205W 600 315 650 343 S2205
ASME Non-Ferrous Tube
Materials
ASTM
Spec
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
B-111
(122)
(687)
(706)
(715)
(443)
(444)
(445)
Seamless copper
and copper alloy
tubes for use in
surface condensers,
evaporators and
heat exchangers:
Cu
Cu - Al
Cu - Ni 90/10
Cu - Ni 70/30
Admiralty Brass
CA122
CA687
CA706
CA715
CA443
CA444
CA445
400
450
600
700
450
450
450
204
232
315
371
232
232
232
150
150
150
100
350
350
350
66
66
66
37
176
176
176
A285C
A285C
A285C
A285C
A285C
A285C
A285C
B-163
(200)
(201)
Seamless cold-
drawn nickel tubes
for general
corrosive service:
Ni
Ni-Low C
NI200
NI201
600
1200
315
648
600
1000
315
537
NI200
NI201
B-163
(400)
Monel
Ni - Cu MONEL 800 426 800 426 MONEL
B-163
(600)
Inconel
Ni - Cr - Fe INCNL
or
I600
1200 648 1000 537 INCNL
B-163
(800)
(825)
Incoloy
Ni - Fe - Cr
Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo -
Cu
I800
I825
1500
1000
815
537
1000
700
537
371
I800
I825
B-619
(B)
(C-276)
Hastelloy
Ni - Mo
Ni - Mo - Cr
HAST or
HASTB
HASTC
800
1000
426
537
800
800
426
426
HASTB
HASTC
B-468
(20Cb)
Carpenter 20
Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo -
Cu - Cb
C 20 800 426 800 426 C 20
B-338
(2)
Titanium
Ti TI50A 600 315 600 315 TI50A
BS Design Code - Plate
Materials
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
BS* or
ASTM
Spec
and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
A-36 (Structural steel) A 36 650 343
- -
A-283
154-
430*
strength carbon
steel plates of structural
quality
A 283C 622 327 na na
A-285
151-
400*
161-
400*
plates for pressure
vessels
A 285 or
A 285C
or CS
752 400 752 400
A-299
164-
400*
Carbon-manganese-
pressure vessels:
C - Mn - Si A 299 752 400 752 400
A-455
225-
460*
carbon steel, high
strength manganese
A 455 752 400 752 400
A-515
224-
460*
temperature service:C -
Si
A 515 752 400 725 400
A-516
224-
490*
moderate and lower
C - Si A 516 725 400 725 400
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated
Steel
BS* or
ASTM
Spec
and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
A-353
510N*
Nine percent nickel alloy
steel plates, double
normalized and
tempered for pressure
vessels:
9Ni
A 353 250 121 na na
A-553
510*
Eight and nine percent
nickel alloy steel plate,
quenched and
vessels:
9Ni A 553 250 121 na na
A-517
(A)
(B)
(E)
(F)
High strength alloy steel
plates, quenched and
vessels:
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si
A517A
A517B
A517E
A517F
650
650
650
650
343
343
343
343
650
650
650
650
343
343
343
343
BS* or
ASTM
Spec
and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
A-202
(A)
(B)
Chromium-manganese-
silicon alloy steel plates
for pressure vessels
A202A
A 202
or
A202B
1000
1000
537
537
900
900
482
482
A-203
(A)
(B)
(E)
503*
Nickel alloy steel plates
for pressure vessels:
2.5Ni
2.5Ni
3.5Ni
3.5Ni
A203A
A203B
A203E
A203D
1000
1000
1000
122
537
537
537
50
900
900
900
122
482
482
482
50
A-204
(C)
240*
261*
Molybdenum alloy steel
plates for pressure
vessels:
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
A 204
A204C
A204A
A204B
1000
752
752
537
400
400
900
752
752
482
400
400
A-302
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Manganese-
molybdenum and
manganese-
molybdenum-nickel
pressure vessels:
Mn - .5Mo
Mn - .5Mo
Mn - .5Mo - Ni
Mn - .5Mo - Ni
A302A
A 302
or
A302B
A302C
A302D
1000
1000
1000
1000
537
537
537
537
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
(continued)
BS* or
ASTM
Spec
and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
A-387
(2 CL 1)
(2 CL 2)
620*
(12 CL 2)
621*
(11 CL 2)
622-
515*
(22 CL 2)
(21 CL 1)
(21 CL 2)
(5 CL 1)
(5 CL 2)
Pressure vessel
plates, alloy steel,
chromium-
molybdenum:
.5Cr - .5Mo
.5Cr - .5Mo
1Cr - .5Mo
1Cr - .5Mo
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
2.25Cr - 1Mo
2.25Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - 1Mo
5Cr - .5Mo
5Cr - .5Mo
A387A
A387G
A387B
A387H
A387C
A387J
A387D
A387K
A387E
A387L
A387F
A387M
842
842
842
896
842
896
842
896
896
896
896
896
450
450
450
480
450
480
450
480
480
480
480
480
842
842
842
896
842
896
842
896
896
896
896
896
450
450
450
480
450
480
450
480
480
480
480
480
A-533
(A CL 1)
(B CL 1)
(C CL 1)
Manganese-
molybdenum and
manganese-
molybdenum-nickel
alloy steel plates,
quenched and
tempered, for
pressure vessels:
C - Mn - Mo
C - Mn - Mo - Ni
C - Mn - Mo - Ni
A533A
A533B
A533C
1000
800
800
537
426
426
650
650
650
343
343
343
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
BS* or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
A-240
(317)
(348)
318-S13*
Chromium and
chromium-nickel
pressure vessels:
18Cr - 10Ni - 3Mo
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
Duplex
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
SS317
SS348
S2205
1292
1292
600
700
700
315
1200
1200
650
648
648
343
(410)
(430)
304-S31*
304-S11*
316-S31*
316-S11*
320-517*
321-S31*
347-S31*
13Cr
17Cr
18Cr - 8Ni
18Cr - 8Ni
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
SS410
SS430
SS304
304L
SS316
316L
316TI
SS321
SS321
1200
1200
1292
752
1292
752
1292
1292
1292
648
648
700
400
700
400
700
700
700
900
1200
1200
752
1200
752
1200
1200
1200
482
648
648
400
648
400
648
648
648
BS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
BS* or
ASTM
Spec
and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
1470*
(1100)*
(3003)*
(5052)*
(5083)*
(5086)*
(6061)*
Aluminum-alloy sheet
and plate:
Al
Al
Al
Al
Al
Al
A1100
A3003
A5052
A5083
A5086
A6061
400
400
400
150
150
400
204
204
204
66
66
204
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
B-171
(464)
Copper and copper
alloys - Naval brass
CA464 400 204 200 93
B-11
(110)
Copper plates for
locomotive fireboxes:
Cu
CU or
CA110
400 204 150 66
B-96
(655)
Copper-silicon alloy
plate and sheet for
pressure vessels:
Cu - Zn CA655 350 176 200 93
B-152
(122)
Copper sheet, strip,
plate, and rolled bar:
Cu CA122 400 204 150 66
B-171
(715)
Copper-nickel alloy plate
and sheet for pressure
vessels:
Cu - Ni 70/30 CA715 700 371 200 93
BS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials (continued)
BS* or
ASTM
Spec
and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
B-333
(B)
Hastelloy:
Ni - Mo HAST or
HASTB
800 426 800 426
B-575
(C-276)
Hastelloy:
Ni - Mo - Cr HASTC 1000 537 800 426
B-409
(800)
iron-chromium alloy
Ni - Fe - Cr I800 1292 700 800 426
B-424
NA15*
molybdenum-copper
strip:
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu I825 500 260 400 204
B-463
(20Cb)
sheet and strip:
Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo - Cu -
Cb
C 20 800 426 800 426
B-168
(600)
Nickel-chromium-iron
strip:
Ni-Cr-Fe INCNL
or
I600
1200 648 800 426
B-162
(200)
(201)
strip:
Ni
Ni-Low C
NI or
NI200
NI201
600
600
1200
315
315
648
600
600
800
315
315
426
B-127
(400)
Nickel-copper alloy
Ni - Cu
MONEL
or
M400
900 482 800 426
B-265
(1)
(2)
Titanium and titanium
alloy strip, sheet,
Ti
Ti
TI35A
TI or
TI50A
600
600
600
315
315
315
na
600
600
na
315
315
BS Design Code - Clad Plate
Materials
* See Plate Materials (BS Code) for further material descriptions.
materials. No other combination may be selected.
Material Classification
Description
Grade System
Material
Symbol
Vessel Base (Backing Material)**
161-400 ASTM
A-285 C A285C
261 A-204 B A204B
A-204 C A204C
224-460 A-515 70 A 515
224-490 A-516 70 A 516
620 A-387 12 CL 1 A387B
620 A-387 12 CL 2 A387H
621 A-387 11 CL 1 A387C
621 A-387 11 CL 2 A387J
622-515 A-387 22 CL 1 A387D
622-515 A-387 22 CL 2 A387K
Cladding Material (Process Side)
304-S31 304 SS304
304-S11 304L 304L
316-S31 316 SS316
316-S11 316L 316L
321-S31 321 SS321
347-S31 347 SS347
410 SS410
430 SS430
Nickel alloy 200 NI200
201 NI201
Monel 400 MONEL
Inconel 600 INCNL
Ni-Fe-Cr 800 I800
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu 825 I825
Carpenter 20 20Cb C 20
Titanium 2 TI
Hastelloy B B HASTB
Hastelloy C C-276 HASTC
BS Design Code - Tube
Materials
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
BS*
or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
A-179
320*
Seamless cold-drawn
exchanger and
condenser tubes
A 179 752 400 752 400 A285C
A-192
410*
pressure service
A 192 752 400 752 400 A 515
A-210
(A-1)
(C)
Seamless medium
carbon steel boiler
and superheater
tubes
A210A
A210C
1000
1000
537
537
900
900
482
482
A 515
A 515
A-214
360*
Electric-resistance-
welded carbon steel
heat exchanger and
condenser tubes
A 214 842 450 842 450 A 515
A-334
410-LT50*
(6)
tubes for low
temperature service
A334A
A334B
700
700
371
371
700
700
371
371
A 442
A 442
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
BS*
or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
A-199
(T11)
(T22)
(T21)
(T5)
Seamless cold-drawn
intermediate alloy
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
2.5Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - .9Mo
5Cr - .5Mo
A199C
A199D
A199E
A199F
1022
1022
1022
1022
550
550
550
550
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
A387C
A387D
A387E
A387F
A-209
(T1)
245-450*
(T1B)
Seamless carbon-
molybdenum alloy
steel boiler and
superheater tubes:
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
A 209
A209A
A209B
1000
752
1000
537
400
537
900
752
900
482
400
482
A 204
A 204
A 204
A-213
(T2)
(T21)
620-460*
620-460*
622-490*
625-450*
and heat exchanger
tubes:
.5Cr - .5Mo
3Cr - .9Mo
1Cr - .5Mo
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
2.25Cr - 1Mo
5Cr - .5Mo
A213A
A213E
A213B
A213C
A213D
A213F
1000
1022
1022
1022
1022
1022
537
550
550
550
550
550
900
900
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
482
482
A387A
A387E
A387B
A387C
A387D
A387F
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
BS* or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
A-213
304-S18*
304-S14*
316-S18*
316-S14*
321-S18*
347-S18*
Seamless Ferritic
steel boiler,
superheater, and
heat exchanger
tubes:
18Cr - 8Ni
18Cr - 8Ni
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
304S
304LS
316S
316LS
321S
347S
842
752
842
842
842
842
450
400
450
450
450
450
842
752
842
800
842
842
450
400
450
426
450
450
SS304
304L
SS316
316L
SS321
SS347
A-249
304-S25*
304-S22*
316-S26*
316-S22*
321-S22*
347-S17*
Welded austenitic
steel boiler
superheater, heat
exchanger,
and condenser
tubes:
18Cr - 8Ni
18Cr - 8Ni
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
304W
304LW
316W
316LW
321W
347W
842
752
842
842
842
842
450
400
450
450
450
450
842
752
842
800
842
842
450
400
450
426
450
450
SS304
304L
SS316
316L
SS321
SS347
A-268
TP410
TP410
Seamless tubes
13 Cr
Welded tubes
13 Cr
410S
410W
752
752
400
400
752
752
400
400
SS410
SS410
A-789
(S31803)
Welded duplex
austenitic steel
tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
2205W 600 315 650 343 S2205
BS Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
BS*or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
B-111
(122)
(687)
(708)
(715)
Seamless copper and
copper alloy tubes for
use in surface
condensers,
evaporators and heat
exchangers:
Cu
Cu - Al
Cu - Ni 90/10
Cu - Ni 70/30
CA122
CA687
CA706
CA715
400
450
600
700
204
230
315
371
150
200
150
200
66
93
66
93
A285C
A285C
A285C
A285C
(443)
(444)
(445)
Admiralty Brass CA443
CA444
CA445
450
450
450
232
232
232
200
200
200
93
93
93
A285C
A285C
A285C
B-163
(200)
(201)
Seamless cold-drawn
nickel tubes for
general corrosive
service:
Ni
Ni - Low C
NI200
NI201
600
1200
315
648
600
800
315
426
NI200
NI201
B-163
(400)
Monel (Seamless)
B-163
(600)
Inconel (Welded)
Ni - Cr - Fe INCNL
or
I600
1200 648 800 426 INCNL
B-163
(800)
(825)
Incoloy
Ni - Fe - Cr (Welded)
Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo
- Cu (Seamless)
I800
I825
1292
1000
700
537
800
500
426
260
I800
I825
B-619
(B)
(C-276)
Hastelloy (Welded)
Ni - Mo
Ni - Mo - Cr
HAST or
HASTB
HASTC
800
1202
426
650
800
800
426
426
HASTB
HASTC
B-468
(20Cb)
Carpenter 20 (Welded)
Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo- Cu -
Cb
C 20 800 426 800 426 C 20
B-338
(2)
Titanium (Welded)
Ti
TI50A 600 315 600 315 TI50A
JIS Design Code - Plate
Materials
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
JIS*or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
G-3101*
SS400*
(structural steel)
A 36 650 343 - -
G-3106*
SM520C*
Low and intermediate strength
carbon steel plates of structural
quality
A 283 C 662 350 na na
G-3115*
SPV355*
Low and intermediate strength
steel plates for pressure vessels
A 285 or
A 285C or
CS
662 350 662 350
G-3115*
SPV450*
Carbon-manganese-silicon steel
plates for pressure vessels:
C - Mn - Si A 299 662 350 662 350
A-455
(A)
Pressure vessel plates, carbon
steel, high strength manganese
A 455 650 343 650 343
G-3118*
SGV480*
Carbon steel plates for pressure
vessels for intermediate and
higher temperature service
C - Si A 515 662 350 662 350
G-3126*
SLA360*
Carbon steel plates for pressure
vessels for moderate and lower
C - Si A 516 662 350 662 350
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated
Steel
JIS*or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
G-3127*
SL9N520*
Nine percent nickel alloy steel
plates, double normalized and
tempered for pressure vessels:
9Ni A 353 392 200 na na
G-3127*
SL9N590*
Eight and nine percent nickel alloy
steel plate, quenched and
tempered, for pressure vessels:
9Ni A 553 392 200 na na
A-517
(A)
(B)
(E)
(E)
High strength alloy steel plates,
quenched and tempered, for
pressure vessels:
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si
A517A
A517B
A517E
A517E
650
650
650
650
343
343
343
343
650
650
650
650
343
343
343
343
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
JIS*or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
A-202
(A)
(B)
Chromium-manganese-silicon
alloy steel plates for pressure
vessels
A202A
A 202 or
A202B
1000
1000
537
537
900
900
482
482
G-3127*
SL2N255*
(B)
SL3N255*
SL3N275*
Nickel alloy steel plates for
pressure vessels:
2.5Ni
2.5Ni
3.5Ni
3.5Ni
A203A
A203B
A203D
A203E
392
1000
392
392
200
537
200
200
392
900
122
392
200
482
50
200
G-3103*
SB450M*
SB480M*
(C)
Molybdenum alloy steel plates
for pressure vessels:
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
A204A
A204B
A204 or
A204C
1022
1022
1000
550
550
537
752
752
900
400
400
482
G-3119*
SBV1A*
SBV1B*
SBV2*
SBV2*
Manganese-molybdenum and
manganese-molybdenum-nickel
alloy steel plates for pressure
vessels:
Mn - .5Mo
Mn - .5Mo
Mn - .5Mo - Ni
Mn - .5Mo - Ni
A302A
A 302
or A302B
A302C
A302D
977
1022
1022
1022
525
550
550
550
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
G-4109*
SCMV1(A)*
SCMV1(N)*
SCMV2(A)*
SCMV2(N)*
SCMV3(A)*
SCMV3(N)*
SCMV4(A)*
SCMV4(N)*
SCMV5(A)*
SCMV5(N)*
SCMV6(A)*
SCMV6(N)*
Pressure vessel plates, alloy
steel, chromium-molybdenum:
.5Cr - .5Mo
.5Cr - .5Mo
1Cr - .5Mo
1Cr - .5Mo
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
2.25Cr - 1Mo
2.25Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - 1Mo
5Cr - .5Mo
Cr - .5Mo
A387A
A387G
A387B
A387H
A387C
A387J
A387D
A387K
A387E
A387L
A387F
A387M
1022
1022
1157
1157
1157
1157
1067
1067
1157
1157
1157
1157
550
550
625
625
625
625
575
575
625
625
625
625
900
900
842
842
896
896
896
896
896
896
896
896
482
482
450
450
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
G-3120*
SQV1A*
SQV2A*
SQV3A*
Manganese-molybdenum and
manganese-molybdenum-nickel
alloy steel plates, quenched and
C - Mn - Mo
C - Mn - Mo-Ni
C - Mn - Mo-Ni
A533A
A533B
A533C
1022
797
797
550
425
425
na
na
na
na
na
na
JIS*or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy
Steel
JIS*or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
G-4303*
G-4304*
G-4305*
SUS304L*
SUS304*
SUS316L*
SUS316*
SUS316*
SUS317*
SUS321*
SUS347*
(348)
(2205)
Chromium and chromium-nickel
stainless steel plate, sheet, and
strip for fusion-welded unfired
pressure vessels:
18Cr - 8Ni
18Cr - 8Ni
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo-Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - 3Mo
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
Duplex
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
304L
SS304
316L
SS316
SS316TI
SS317
SS321
SS347
SS348
S2205
797
1472
842
1472
1472
1472
1472
1472
1500
600
425
800
450
800
800
800
800
800
815
315
752
1200
752
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
650
400
648
400
648
648
648
648
648
648
343
SUS410*
SUS430*
13Cr
17Cr
SS410
SS430
1202
1202
650
650
900
1200
482
648
JIS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
JIS*or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
H-4000*
A1100P*
A3003P*
A5052P*
A5083P*
A5086P*
A6061P*
Aluminum-alloy sheet and plate:
Al
Al
Al
Al
Al
Al
A1100
A3003
A5052
A5083
A5086
A6061
392
392
392
150
150
392
200
200
200
66
66
200
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
H-3100*
C4640P*
Copper and copper alloys - Naval
brass
CA464 392 200 350 177
H3100*
C1100P*
Copper plates for locomotive
fireboxes:
Cu
CU or
CA110
392 200 150 66
B-96
(B55)
Copper-silicon alloy plate and
sheet for pressure vessels:
Cu - Zn
CA655 350 176 350 176
H-3100*
C1220P*
Copper sheet, strip, plate, and
rolled bar:
Cu
CA122 392 200 150 66
H-3100*
C7150P*
Copper-nickel alloy plate and
Cu - Ni 70/30
CA715 662 350 662 350
JIS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials - continued
JIS*or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
B-333
(B)
Hastelloy:
Ni - Mo HAST or
HASTB
800 426 800 426
B-575
(C-276)
Hastelloy:
Ni - Mo - Cr HASTC 1000 537 1000 537
G-4902*
NCF800*
Specification for nickel-iron-
chromium alloy plate, sheet, and
strip:
Ni - Fe - Cr
I800 1472 800 1000 537
B-424
(825)
molybdenum-copper alloy plate,
sheet, and strip:
Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo - Cu I825 1000 537 700 371
B-463
(20Cb)
Carpenter 20 alloy plate, sheet
and strip:
Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo - Cu - Cb C 20 800 426 800 426
G-4902*
NCF600*
Nickel-chromium-iron alloy plate,
sheet, and strip,
Inconel: Ni - Cr - Fe INCNL
or
I600
1202 650 1000 537
B-162
(200)
(201)
Nickel plate, sheet, and strip:
Ni
Ni-Low C
NI or
NI200
NI201
600
600
1200
315
315
648
600
600
1000
315
315
537
H-4551*
NCuP*
Nickel-copper alloy plate, sheet,
and strip:
Ni - Cu
MONEL
or
M400
932 500 800 426
H-4600*
TP28*
TP35*
Titanium and titanium alloy strip,
sheet, and plate:
Ti
Ti
TI35A
TI or
TI50A
662
662
662
350
350
350
na
600
600
na
315
315
JIS Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
* See Plate Materials (JIS Code) for further material descriptions.
materials.
No other combination may be selected.
Material Classification Description Grade System
Material
Symbol
SPV350
SB480M
SGV480
SLA360
SCMV2(A)
SCMV2(A)
SCMV3(A)
SCMV3(A)
SCMV4(A)
SCMV4(A)
ASTM A-285
A-204
A-204
A-515
A-516
A-387
A-387
A-387
A-387
A-387
A-387
C
B
C
70
70
12 CL 1
12 CL 2
11 CL 1
11 CL 2
22 CL 1
22 CL 2
A285C
A204B
A204C
A 515
A 516
A387B
A387H
A387C
A387J
A387D
A387K
Stainless steel type
SUS304
SUS304L
SUS316
SUS316L
SUS321
SUS321
SUS321
SUS430
Nickel alloy
Monel
NCUP
Inconel
NCF600
Ni-Fe-CR
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu
Carpenter 20
Titanium
Hastelloy B
Hastelloy C
304
304L
316
316L
321
347
410
430
200
201
400
600
800
825
20 CB
2
B
C-276
SS304
304L
SS316
316L
SS321
SS347
SS410
SS430
NI200
NI201
MONEL
INCNL
I800
I825
C 20
Ti
HASTB
HASTC
JIS Design Code - Tube
Materials
JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
JIS*
or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
G-3461*
STB340*
Seamless cold-drawn
exchanger and
condenser tubes
A 179 1022 550 752 400 A285C
A-192 Seamless carbon steel
pressure service
A 192 1000 537 900 482 A 515
G-3461*
STB510*
STB410*
Seamless medium
superheater tubes
A210A
A210C
1022
1022
550
550
900
900
482
482
A 515
A 515
G-3461*
STB340*
welded carbon steel
heat exchanger and
condenser tubes
A 214 1022 550 900 482 A 515
G-3464*
(1)
STBL380*
tubes for low
temperature service
A334A
A334B
700
700
371
371
700
700
371
371
A 442
A 442
JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
JIS*
or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
G-3462*
STBA23*
STBA24*
(T21)
STBA25*
G-3462*
STBA12*
STBA13*
(T1B)
Seamless cold-drawn
intermediate alloy steel
heat exchanger and
condenser tubes:
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
2.5Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - .9Mo
5Cr - .5Mo
Seamless carbon-
molybdenum alloy steel
boiler and superheater
tubes:
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
A199C
A199D
A199E
A199F
A 209
A209A
A209B
1202
1202
1200
1202
1022
1022
1000
650
650
648
650
550
550
537
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
482
482
482
A387C
A387D
A387E
A387F
A 204
A 204
A 204
G-3462*
STBA20*
STBA20*
(T11)
(T22)
(T21)
(T5)
boiler, superheater, and
heat exchanger tubes:
.5Cr - .5Mo
1Cr - .5Mo
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
2.25Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - .9Mo
5Cr - .5Mo
A213A
A213B
A213C
A213D
A213E
A213F
1022
1202
1200
1200
1200
1200
550
650
648
648
648
648
900
900
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
482
483
A387A
A387B
A387C
A387D
A387E
A387F
JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy
Steel
JIS*
or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
G-3463*
SUS304TB*
SUS304LTB*
SUS316TB*
Seamless Ferritic
steel boiler,
superheater, and
heat exchanger
tubes:
18Cr - 8Ni
18Cr - 8Ni
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
304S
304LS
316S
1472
797
1472
800
425
800
842
752
842
450
450
450
SS304
304L
SS316
SUS316LTB*
SUS321TB*
SUS347TB*
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
316LS
321S
347S
842
1472
1472
450
800
800
842
842
842
450
400
450
316L
SS321
SS347
G-3463*
SUS304TB*
SUS304LTB*
SUS316TB*
SUS316LTB*
SUS321TB*
SUS347TB*
Welded austenitic
steel boiler
superheater, heat
exchanger, and
condenser tubes:
18Cr - 8Ni
18Cr - 8Ni
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
304W
304LW
316W
316LW
321W
347W
1472
797
1472
842
1472
1472
800
425
800
450
800
800
842
752
842
842
842
842
450
400
450
450
450
450
SS304
304L
SS316
316L
SS321
SS347
A-268
TP 410
TP 410
Seamless tubes
13Cr
Welded tubes
13Cr
410S
410W
752
752
400
400
752
752
400
400
SS410
SS410
A-789
(S31803)
Welded duplex
austenitic steel
tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
2205W 600 315 650 343 S2205
JIS Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
JIS*or
ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
H-3300*
C1220T*
C6871T*
C7060T*
C7150T*
Seamless copper and
copper alloy tubes for
use in surface
condensers,
evaporators and heat
exchangers:
Cu
Cu - Al
Cu - Ni 90/10
Cu - Ni 70/30
CA122
CA687
CA706
CA715
392
392
572
662
200
200
300
350
150
150
150
700
66
66
66
371
A285C
A285C
A285C
A285C
C4430T*
(444)
(445)
Admiralty Brass CA443
CA444
CA445
437
450
450
225
232
232
350
350
350
176
176
176
A285C
A285C
A285C
B-163
(200)
(201)
Seamless cold-drawn
nickel tubes for
general corrosive
service:
Ni
Ni-Low C
NI200
NI201
600
1200
315
648
600
1000
315
537
NI200
NI201
H-4552*
NCuT*
Monel
G-4904*
NCF600TB*
Inconel
Ni - Cr - Fe INCNL
or
I600
1202 650 1000 537 INCNL
G-4904*
NCF800TB*
NCF825TB*
Incoloy
Ni - Fe - Cr
Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo - Cu
I800
I825
1472
1000
800
537
1000
700
537
371
I800
1825
B-619
(B)
(C-276)
Hastelloy
Ni - Mo
Ni - Mo - Cr
HAST or
HASTB
HASTC
800
1000
426
537
800
1000
426
537
HASTB
HASTC
B-468
(20Cb)
Carpenter 20
Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo - Cu -
Cb
C 20 800 426 800 426 C 20
H-4650*
TB35*
Titanium
Ti TI50A 662 350 600 315 TI50A
DIN Design Code - Plate
Materials
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
DIN*or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
DIN EN 10025-
91*
S235JRG1*
(structural steel) A 36 650 343 - -
DIN EN 10025-
91*
S235JRG2*
plates of structural quality
A 283C 662 350 na na
DIN 17155*
HII*
strength steel plates for
pressure vessels
A 285 or
A 285C or
CS
1022 550 896 480
DIN 17102*
St E 355*
Carbon-manganese-silicon
steel plates for pressure
vessels:
C - Mn - Si A 299 662 350 662 350
A-455
(A)
carbon steel, high strength
manganese
A 455 650 343 650 343
DIN 17155* Carbon steel plates for
19Mn5* A 515 662 350 662 350
DIN 17102*
SIE315*
moderate and lower
C - Si A 516 662 350 662 350
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated
Steel
DIN*
or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
SEW 680* Nine percent nickel alloy steel
plates, double normalized and
tempered for pressure vessels:
X8Ni9*

A 353

392 200 na na
SEW 680* Eight and nine percent nickel alloy
steel plate, quenched and
X8Ni9*
A 553 392 200 na na
A-517
(A)
(B)
(E)
(F)
High strength alloy steel plates,
quenched and tempered, for
pressure vessels:
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si
A517A
A517B
A517E
A517E
650
650
650
650
343
343
343
343
650
650
650
650
343
343
343
343
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy
Steel
DIN*or
ASTM Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
A 202
(A)
(B)
Chromium-
manganese-silicon
pressure vessels
A202A
A 202 or
A202B
1000
1000
537
537
900
900
482
482
SEW 680*
(D)
(E)
Nickel alloy steel
plates for pressure
vessels:
14Ni6*
10Ni14*
3.5Ni
3.5Ni
A203A
A203B
A203D
A203E
392
1000
392
392
200
537
200
200
392
900
122
392
200
482
50
200
DIN 17155*
(B)
(C)
Molybdenum alloy
steel plates for
pressure vessels:
15Mo3*
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
A204A
A204B
A 204 or
A204C
1022
1022
1000
550
550
537
752
752
900
400
400
482
VdTUV Wbl.376 WB35*
VdTUV Wbl.377 WB36*
VdTUV Wbl.378*
VdTUV Wbl384 WB34*
Manganese-
molybdenum and
manganese-
molybdenum-nickel
pressure vessels:
17Mn Mo V64*
15Ni Cu Mo Nb5*
12Mn Ni Mo55*
13Mn Ni Mo54*
A302A
A 302 or
A302B
A302C
A302D
977
1022
1022
1022
525
550
550
550
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
(A)
(G)
DIN 17155*
DIN 17155*
(C)
(J)
DIN 17155*
VdTUV Wbl.404*
VdTUV Wbl.007*
VdTUV Wbl.007*
(F)
(M)
Pressure vessel
plates, alloy steel,
chromium-
molybdenum:
.5Cr - .5Mo
.5Cr - .5Mo
13Cr Mo44*
13Cr Mo44*
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
10Cr Mo910*
12Cr Mo910*
12Cr Mo195*
12Cr Mo195*
5Cr - .5Mo
Cr - .5Mo
A387A
A387G
A387B
A387H
A387C
A387J
A387D
A387K
A387E
A387L
A387F
A387M
1022
1022
1157
1157
1157
1157
1067
1067
1157
1157
1157
1157
550
550
500
625
625
625
500
575
625
625
625
625
900
900
842
842
896
896
896
896
896
896
896
896
482
482
450
450
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
SEW 640*
(A)
Manganese-
molybdenum and
manganese-
molybdenum-nickel
alloy steel plates,
quenched and
tempered, for
pressure vessels:
C - Mn - Mo
20 Mn Mo Ni55*
12 Mn Ni Mo55*
A533A
A533B
A533C
1022
797
797
550
425
425
na
na
na
na
na
na
DIN*or
ASTM Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy
Steel
DIN*
or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
DIN
17440*
(348)
(2205)
Chromium and chromium-nickel
stainless steel plate, sheet, and
strip for fusion-welded unfired
pressure vessels:
X2 Cr Ni1911*
X5 Cr Ni1810*
X2 Cr Ni Mo17132*
X5 Cr Ni Mo17122*
X6 Cr Ni Mo Ti 17122*
X2 Cr Ni Mo18164*
X6 Cr Ni Ti1810*
X6 Cr Ni Nb1810*
Duplex
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
304L
SS304
316L
SS316
316TI
SS317
SS321
SS347
SS348
S2205
797
1472
842
1472
1472
1472
1472
1472
1500
600
425
800
450
800
800
800
800
800
815
315
752
1200
752
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
650
400
648
400
648
648
648
648
648
648
343
DIN
17440*
X10 Cr13*
X6 Cr17*
SS410
SS430
1202
1202
650
650
900
1200
482
648
DIN Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
DIN*or
ASTM Spec
and
(Grade)
Compostion
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
DIN 1745
A1100P*
Aluminum-alloy sheet and
plate:
Al
Al Mn Cu*
Al Mg 2.5*
Al Mg 4.5* Mn*
Al Mg 4 Mn*
Al Mg 7.5 Si Cu*
A1100
A3003
A5052
A5083
A5086
A6061
392
392
392
150
150
392
200
200
200
66
66
200
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
DIN 17660* Copper and copper alloys -
Naval brass
Cu Zn38 Sn1*
CA464 392 200 350 177
DIN 1787* Copper plates for locomotive
fireboxes:
E Cu58* or
E Cu59*
CU or
CA110
392 200 150 66
B-96
(655)
Copper-silicon alloy plate and
Cu - Zn
CA655 350 176 350 176
DIN 1787* Copper sheet, strip, plate, and
rolled bar:
SF-Cu
CA122 392 200 150 66
DIN 17664* Copper-nickel alloy plate and
Cu Ni 30 Mn1 Fe*
CA715 662 350 662 350
B-333
(B)
Hastelloy:
Ni - Mo HAST or
HASTB
800 426 800 426
B-575
(C-276)
Hastelloy:
Ni - Mo - Cr HASTC 1000 537 1000 537
DIN Non-Ferrous Plate Materials -continued
DIN*or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Compostion
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Degrees
F C
External
Pressure
Temp.
Degrees
F C
VdTUV Wbl.412*
NCF800*
iron-chromium alloy plate,
sheet, and strip:
X10 Ni Cr Al Ti 3220* I800 1472 800 1000 537
B-424
(825)
molybdenum-copper alloy
Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo - Cu I825 1000 537 700 371
B-463
(20Cb)
sheet and strip:
Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo - Cu - Cb
C 20 800 426 800 426
VdTUV Wbl.305* Nickel-chromium-iron
strip, Inconel:
Ni Cr15 Fe
INCNL
or
I600
1202 650 1000 537
B-162
(200)
(201)
strip:
Ni
Ni-Low C
NI or
NI200
NI201
600
600
1200
315
315
648
600]
600
1000
315
315
537
DIN 17750* Nickel-copper alloy plate,
sheet, and strip:
Ni Cu 30 Fe F45*
MONEL
or
M400
932 500 800 426
DIN 17860*
3.7025.10*
3.7035.10*
Titanium and titanium alloy
strip, sheet, and plate:
Ti
Ti
TI35A
TI or
TI50A
662
662
662
350
350
350
na
600
600
na
315
315
DIN Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
* See Plate Materials (German Code) for further material descriptions.
materials. No other combination may be selected.
Material Classification Description Grade System Material Symbol
DIN 17102
A-204 (B)
DIN 17155
DIN 17102
DIN 17155
DIN 17155
A-387 (C)
A-387
DIN 17155
DIN 17155
St E 355
ASTM A-204
ASTM A -204
19 Mn5
SIE 315
13Cr Mo44
13Cr Mo44
ASTM A-387
ASTM A-387
10Cr Mo 910
10Cr Mo 910
C
B
C
70
70
12 CL 1
12 CL 2
11 CL 1
11 CL 2
22 CL 1
22 CL 2
A285C
A204B
A204C
A 515
A 516
A387B
A387H
A387C
A387J
A387D
A387K
Stainless steel type
DIN 17440
X5 Cr Ni189*
X2 Cr Ni189*
X5 Cr Ni Mo1810*
X2 Cr Ni Mo1810*
X10 Cr Ni Ti189*
X10 Cr Ni Nb1810*
X10 Cr13*
X8 Cr17*
Nickel alloy
Monel
NCUP
VdTUV Wbl.305*
Ni Cr15 Fe
Ni-Fe-Cr
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu
Carpenter 20
Titanium
Hastelloy B
Hastelloy C
304
304L
316
316L
321
347
410
430
200
201
400
600
800
825
20Cb
2
B
C-276
SS304
304L
SS316
316L
SS321
SS347
SS410
SS430
NI200
NI201
MONEL
INCNL
I800
I825
C 20
Ti
HASTB
HASTC
DIN Design Code - Tube
Materials
DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
DIN*
or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal Compostion
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
DIN 2391*
St 35GBK
NBK*
Seamless cold-drawn
exchanger and
condenser tubes
A 179 1022 550 752 400 A285C
DIN 1629*
St 37.0*
pressure service
A 192 1000 537 900 482 A 515
DIN 1629*
St 44.0*
St 52.0*
Seamless medium
superheater tubes
A210A
A210C
1022
1022
550
550
900
900
482
482
A 515
A 515
DIN 2393*
St 37-2
NBK*
welded carbon steel
heat exchanger and
condenser tubes
A 214 1022 550 900 482 A 515
SEW 680*
TTSt 35N*
(B)
tubes for low
temperature service
A334A
A334B
700
700
371
371
700
700
371
371
A 442
A 442
DIN Ferrous Tube Material - Low Alloy Steel
DIN*or
ASTM Spec
and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Compostion
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
DIN 17175*
DIN 17175*
(T21)
VdTUV007*
DIN 17175*
(T1A)
(T1B)
Seamless cold-drawn
intermediate alloy
13Cr Mo44*
10Cr Mo910*
3Cr - .9Mo
12Cr Mo195G
Seamless carbon-
molybdenum alloy
steel boiler and
superheater tubes:
15 Mo3*
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
A199C
A199D
A199E
A199F
A 209
A209A
A209B
1202
1202
1200
1202
1022
1022
1000
650
650
648
650
550
550
537
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
482
482
482
A387C
A387D
A387E
A387F
A 204
A 204
A 204
(T2)
DIN17175*
DIN17175*
DIN17175*
(T21)
VdTUV007*
and heat exchanger
tubes:
.5Cr - .5Mo
13Cr Mo44*
13Cr Mo44*
10Cr Mo910*
3Cr -.9Mo
12Cr Mo195G*
A213A
A213B
A213C
A213D
A213E
A213F
1022
1202
1200
1200
1200
1200
550
650
648
648
648
648
900
900
900
900
900
900
482
482
482
482
482
482
A387A
A387B
A387C
A387D
A387E
A387F
DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy
Steel
DIN*or
ASTM Spec
and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Compostion
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
DIN 17458* Seamless Ferritic and
and heat exchanger
tubes:
X5Cr Ni1810*
X2Cr Ni1911*
X5Cr Ni Mo17122*
304S
304LS
316S
1472
797
1472
800
425
800
842
752
842
450
400
450
SS304
304L
SS316
X2Cr Ni Mo18143*
X6Cr Ni Ti1810*
X6Cr Ni Nb1810*
X10 Cr13*
316LS
321S
347S
410S
842
1472
1472
752
450
800
800
400
842
842
842
752
450
450
450
400
316L
SS321
SS347
SS410
DIN 17457* Welded austenitic
steel boiler
superheater, heat
exchanger, and
condenser tubes:
X5Cr Ni1810*
X2Cr Ni1911*
X5Cr Ni Mo17122*
X2Cr Ni Mo18143*
X6Cr Ni Ti1810*
X6 Cr Ni Nb 1810*
X10 Cr 13*
304W
304LW
316W
316LW
321W
347W
410W
1472
797
1472
842
1472
1472
752
800
425
800
450
800
800
400
842
752
842
842
842
842
752
450
400
450
450
450
450
400
SS304
304L
SS316
316L
SS321
SS347
SS410
A-789
(S31803)
Welded duplex
austenitic steel tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
2205W 600 315 650 343 S2205
DIN Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
DIN*or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade)
Description and
Nominal
Compostion
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
DIN 1787*
DIN 1785*
DIN 17664*
DIN 17664*
DIN 1785*
(444)
(445)
Seamless copper
and copper alloy
tubes for use in
surface
condensers,
evaporators and
heat exchangers:
SF Cu*
Cu Zn20 Al2*
Cu Ni10 Fe1 Mn*
Cu Ni30 Mn1 Fe*
Admiralty Brass
Cu Zn28 Sn1*
CA122
CA687
CA706
CA715
CA443
CA444
CA445
392
392
572
662
437
450
450
200
200
300
350
225
232
232
150
150
150
700
350
350
350
66
66
66
371
176
176
176
A285C
A285C
A285C
A285C
A285C
A285C
A285C
DIN 17752*
(201)
Seamless cold-
drawn nickel tubes
for general
corrosive service:
LC Ni 99F34*
Ni-Low C
NI200
NI201
600
1200
315
648
600
1000
315
537
NI200
NI201
DIN 17751* Monel
Ni Cu30 Fe F45 MONEL 887 475 752 400 MONEL
VdTUV
Wbl.305*
Inconel
Ni Cr15 Fe* INCNL
or
I600
1202 650 1000 537 INCNL
VdTUV
Wbl.412
VdTUv
Wbl.432*
Incoloy
X10 Ni Cr Al Ti
3220*
Ni Cr21 Mo*
I800
I825
1472
1000
800
537
1000
700
537
371
I800
I825
B-619
(B)
(C-276)
Hastelloy
Ni - Mo
Ni - Mo - Cr
HAST or
HASTB
HASTC
800
1000
426
537
800
1000
426
537
HASTB
HASTC
B-468
(20Cb)
Carpenter 20
Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo -
Cu - Cb
C 20 800 426 800 426 C 20
B-338
(2)
Titanium
Ti T150A 662 350 600 315 T150A
EN 13445 Design Code - Plate
Materials
EN Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
EN or
ASTM
Specific
ation
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
EN
10028-2
P235GH
1.0345
N
plates of structural
quality
A 36 752 400 752 400
EN
10028-2
P235GH
1.0345
N
plates for pressure
vessels
A 285 or
A 285 C
or CS
752 400 752 400
EN
10028-2
P235GH
1.0345
N
Carbon-manganese-
plates for pressure
vessels
A 299 752 400 752 400
EN
10028-2
P235GH
1.0345
N
carbon steel, high
strength manganese
A 455 752 400 752 400
EN
10028-3
P355NH
1.0565 n
C-Si
A 515 752 400 752 400
EN
10028-3
P355NH
1.0565
moderate and lower
temperature service -
C-Si
A 516 752 400 752 400
EN
10028-2
P235GH
1.0345
N
pressure vessels for low
temperature service
C-Mn-Si
A 537 752 400 752 400
EN Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
EN or
ASTM
Specific
ation
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
Manganese -
molybdenum and
manganese-
molybdenum-nickel
pressure vessels:
EN
10028-2
16Mo3
1.5415 N
Mn - .5Mo A302A 932 500 932 500
EN
10028-2
16Mo3
1.5415 N
Mn - .5Mo A302B 932 500 932 500
ally steel. chromium -
molybdenum:
EN
10028-6
P460QH
1.8871
QT
.5Cr - .5Mo A387A 572 300 572 300
EN
10028-6
P460QH
1.8871
QT
.5Cr - .5Mo A387G 572 300 572 300
EN
10028-2
13CrMo4
-5
1.7335
NT
.1Cr - .5Mo A387B 932 500 932 500
EN
10028-2
13CrMo4
-5
1.7335
NT
.1Cr - .5Mo A387H 932 500 932 500
EN
10028-2
10CrMo9
-10
1.7380
NT
2.25Cr - .1Mo A387D 932 500 932 500
EN
10028-2
10CrMo9
-10
1.7380
NT
2.25Cr - .1Mo A553K 932 500 932 500
EN or
ASTM
Specific
ation
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
EN Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
EN or
ASTM
Specific
ation
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
Chromium and
chromium-nickel
pressure vessels:
EN
10028-7
X2CrNi
18-10
1.4301A
T
18Cr -8Ni 340L 1022 550 1022 550
EN
10028-7
X2CrNi
18-10
1.4301A
T
18Cr -8Ni SS304 1022 550 1022 550
EN
10028-7
X5CrNiM
o 17-12-
2
1.4401
AT
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316L 1022 550 1022 550
EN
10028-7
X5CrNiM
o 17-12-
2
1.4401
AT
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo SS316 1022 550 1022 550
EN
10028-7
X6CrNiTi
18-10
1.4541
AT
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti SS321 1022 550 1022 550
EN
10028-7
X6CrNiN
b18-10
1.4550
AT
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb SS347 1022 550 1022 550
EN
10028-7
X6CrNiN
b18-10
1.4550
AT
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb SS348 1022 550 1022 550
EN
10028-7
X2CrNiM
oN22-5-
3
1.4462
AT
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
(Duplex)
S2205 482 250 482 250
EN or
ASTM
Specific
ation
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
Material
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
EN 13445 Design Code - Tube
Materials
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
EN or
ASTM
Specific
ation
Description and
Nominal Composition
System
MaterialSymb
ol
Internal
Pressure
Maximu
m Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximu
m Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
EN
10216-2
P235GH
1.0345
N
Seamless cold-drawn
exchanger and
condenser tubes.
A-179 842 450 842 450 A 516
EN
10216-2
P235GH
1.0345
N
pressure service
A-192 842 450 842 450 A 516
EN
10216-2
P235GH
1.0345
N
Seamless medium
superheater tubes
A-210 842 450 842 450 A 516
EN
10216-2
P235GH
1.0345
N
welded carbon steel
heat exchanger and
condenser tubes
A-214 752 400 752 400 A 516
EN
10216-2
P235GH
1.0345
N
tubes for low
temperature service
A-334 842 450 842 450 A 516
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
EN or
ASTM
Specific
ation
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
Seamless cold-drawn
intermediate alloy
EN
10216-2
X11CrMo
5
1.7362 I
1.25Cr - .5 Mo - Si A-199C 932 500 932 500 A387C
EN
10216-2
10CrMo9
-10
1.7380
NT or QT
3Cr-.9Mo A199E 932 500 932 500 A387E
and heat exchanger
tubes:

EN
10216-2
14MoV6-
3
1.7715
NT or QT
.5Cr - .5Mo A213A 1022 550 1022 550 A387A
EN
10216-2
13CrMo4
-5
1.7335
NT or QT
1Cr - .5Mo A213B 932 500 932 500 A387B
EN
10216-2
10CrMo9
-10
1.7380
NT or QT
2.25Cr - 1Mo A213D 932 500 932 500 A387D
EN
10216-2
X11CrMo
5
1.7362 I
5Cr - .5Mo A213F 932 500 932 500 A387F
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
EN or
ASTM
Specific
ation
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
Seamless Ferritic
steel boiler,
superheater, and
heat exchanger
tubes:
EN
10216-5
X5CrNi18
-10
1.4301
AT
18Cr - 8Ni 304S 1022 550 1022 550 SS304
EN
10216-5
X5CrNi
19-11
1.4306
AT
18Cr - 8Ni 304LS 1022 550 1022 550 304L
EN
10216-5
X5CrNiM
o17-12-2
1.4401
AT
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316S 1022 550 1022 550 SS316
EN
10216-5
X2CrNiM
o17-12-2
1.4404
AT
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316LS 1022 550 1022 550 316L
EN
10216-5
X6CrNiTi
18-10
1.4541
AT
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti 321S 1022 550 1022 550 SS321
EN
10216-5
X6CrNiNb
18-10
1.4550
AT
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb 347S 1022 550 1022 550 SS347
Welded austenitic
steel boiler
superheater, heat
exchanger, and
condenser tubes:
EN
10217-7
X5CrNi18
-10
1.4301
AT
18Cr - 8Ni 304W 1022 550 1022 550 SS304
EN
10217-7
X2CrNi19
-11
1.4306
AT
18Cr - 8Ni 304LW 1022 550 1022 550 304L
EN
10217-7
X5CrNiM
o17-12-2
1.4401
AT
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316W 1022 550 1022 550 SS316
EN
10217-7
X5CrNiM
o17-12-2
1.4404
AT
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316LW 1022 550 1022 550 316L
EN
10217-7
X6CrNiTi
18-10
1.4541
AT
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti 321W 1022 550 1022 550 SS321
EN or
ASTM
Specific
ation
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
EN
10217-7
X6CrNiNb
18-10
1.4550
AT
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb 347W 1022 550 1022 550 SS347
EN
10217-7
X2CrNiM
olN22-5-
3
1.4462
AT
Welded duplex
austenitic steel
tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo 2205W 482 250 482 250 S2205
EN or
ASTM
Specific
ation
Description and
Nominal
Composition
System
Material
Symbol
Internal
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
External
Pressure
Maximum
Temp.
F C
System
Default
Tubesheet
Material
(Plate)
GB 150 Design Code - Plate
Materials
GB 150 Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon
Steel
GB Material
Standard
GB Material
Designation
Description/
Composition/
Notes
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
GB 3274 Q235B Steel plates for
pressure vessels and
boilers
A 36 662 350 900 482
GB 6654-
1996
GB 713-
2008
16MnR
Q345R
Steel plates for
boilers
A 299 887 475 900 482
GB 6654-
1996
GB 713-
2008
16MnR
Q345R
Steel plates for
boilers
A 515 887 475 900 482
GB 6654-
1996
GB 713-
2008
16MnR
Q345R
Steel plates for
boilers
A 516 887 475 900 482
GB 3274 Q235-C Carbon and low alloy
structural steel,
rolled plates, and
strip
A283C 752 400 900 482
GB 6654-
1996
GB 713-
2008
20R
Q245R
Steel plates for
boilers
A285C 887 475 900 482
GB 6654-
1996
GB 713-
2008
20R
Q245R
Steel plates for
boilers
CS 887 475 900 482
GB 150 Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy
Steel
GB Material
Standard
GB Material
Designation
Description/
Composition/
Notes
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
GB 713-
2008
15CrMoR Steel plates for
boilers
A387H 1022 550 900 482
GB 713-
2008
14Cr1MoR Steel plates for
boilers
A387J 1022 550 900 482
GB150 Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy
Steel
GB Material
Standard
GB Material
Designation
Description/
Composition/
Notes
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
GB 713-
2008
boilers
A387B 1022 550 900 482
GB 713-
2008
boilers
A387C 1022 550 900 482
GB 713-
2008
18MnMoNbR Steel plates for
boilers
A553A 887 475 650 343
GB 6654-
1996
GB 713-
2008
13MnNiMoR
13MnNiMoNbR
Steel plates for
boilers
A553B 752 400 650 343
GB 6654-
1996
GB 713-
2008
13MnNiMoR
13MnNiMoNbR
Steel plates for
boilers
A553C 752 400 650 343
GB150 Design Code - Tube
Materials
GB150 Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon
Steel
GB Material
Standard
GB Material
Designation
Description/
Composition/
Notes
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
GB/T 8163-
2008
10 Seamless steel tubes
for liquid service
A 179 842 450 900 482
GB/T 8163-
2008
for liquid service
A 192 842 450 900 482
GB/T 8163-
2008
10 A 214 842 450 900 482
GB/T 5300-
2008
20G Seamless steel tubes
and pipes for high
pressure boilers
A210A 842 450 900 482
GB/T 5300-
2008
16Mn High-pressure
seamless steel tubes
for chemical fertilizer
equipments
A210C 887 475 900 482
GB/T 8163-
2008
and pipes for high
pressure boilers
CS 842 450 900 482
GB 6479 15MnV High-pressure
equipments
A334A 752 400 650 343
GB 6479 15MnV High-pressure
equipments
A334B 752 400 650 343
GB150 Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy
Steel
GB Material
Standard
GB Material
Designation
Description/
Composition/
Notes
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
GB/T 5310-
2008
12Cr1MoVG Seamless steel tubes
and pipes for high
pressure boilers
A199C 1067 575 900 482
GB/T 5310-
2008
12Cr2Mo Seamless steel tubes
and pipes for high
pressure boilers
A199D 1067 575 900 482
GB/T 5310-
2008
12CrMo Seamless steel tubes
and pipes for high
pressure boilers
A213A 977 525 900 482
GB/T 5310-
2008
15CrMo Seamless steel tubes
and pipes for high
pressure boilers
A213B 1022 550 900 482
GB/T 5310-
2008
12Cr1MoVG Seamless steel tubes
and pipes for high
pressure boilers
A213C 1067 575 900 482
GB/T 5310-
2008
12Cr2Mo Seamless steel tubes
and pipes for high
pressure boilers
A213D 1067 575 900 482
GB/T 5310-
2008
1Cr5Mo High-pressure
equipments
A213F 1112 600 900 482
GB150 Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy
Steel
GB Material
Standard
GB Material
Designation
Description/
Composition/
Notes
System
Material
Symbol
Internal Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
External Pressure
Maximum Temp.
F C
GB/T 12771-
2008
06Cr19Ni10 Seamless stainless
steel tubes for liquid
delivery
304S 1292 700 1000 538
GB/T 12771-
2008
022Cr19Ni10 Welded stainless
delivery
304W 1292 700 1000 538
GB/T 12771-
2008
022Cr19Ni10 Seamless stainless
delivery
304LS 797 425 800 427
GB/T 12771-
2008
022Cr19Ni10 Welded stainless
delivery
304LW 797 425 800 427
GB/T 12771-
2008
06Cr17Ni12Mo
2
Seamless stainless
delivery
316S 1292 700 1000 538
GB/T 12771-
2008
06Cr17Ni12Mo
2
Welded stainless
delivery
316W 1292 700 1000 538
GB/T 12771-
2008
022Cr17Ni12M
o2
Seamless stainless
delivery
316LS 842 450 850 454
GB/T 12771-
2008
022Cr17Ni12M
o2
Welded stainless
delivery
316LW 842 450 850 454
GB/T 12771-
2008
06Cr18Ni11Ti Seamless stainless
delivery
321S 1292 700 100 538
GB/T 12771-
2008
06Cr18Ni11Ti Welded stainless
delivery
321W 1292 700 100 538
GB/T 12771-
2008
06Cr13 Seamless stainless
delivery
410S 1112 600 900 482
GB/T 12771-
2008
06Cr13 Welded stainless
delivery
410W 1112 600 900 482
Lining Materials
Brick: Acid-Resistant Applied Over
Membrane-Lined Carbon Steel
Brick: Firebrick
Lining Material Description Inches MM System
Material
Symbol
Red shale brick 2.5
4.5
8.0
62
112
200
25RSB
45RSB
80RSB
Fireclay, 30 percent alumina 2.5
4.5
9.0
62
112
225
25AFC
45AFC
45AFC
Lining Material Description Inches MM System
Material
Symbol
Insulating firebrick 2.5
4.5
9.0
62
112
225
25IFB
45IFB
90IFB
60 percent alumina firebrick 2.5
4.5
9.0
62
112
225
25FB6
45FB6
90FB6
90 percent alumina firebrick 2.5
4.5
9.0
62
112
225
25FB9
45FB9
90FB9
Monolithic Lining
Abrasion Resistant Linings; Replaceable
Only for use with:
equipment items water cyclones and linings
plant bulk items steel fabricated plate
Lining Material Description System
Material
Symbol
Applied to surface with anchors on 12 INCH [300 MM] centers
50 percent alumina refractory gunning mix
90 percent alumina castable refractory
GUNA5
GUNA9
CASA9
Applied to bare surface
90 percent alumina castable refractory
GUN50
GUN90
CAS90
Applied over wire mesh reinforcement
Gunite
GUNIT
Material
Symbol
Replaceable ceramic liner backed with urethane elastomer for
light abrasion and light impact
CERML
medium abrasion and light impact
CERMM
heavy abrasion and light impact
CERMH
heavy abrasion and heavy impact
CERMV
Replaceable abrasion-resistant steel plate lining (1 INCH [25
MM] thick unless otherwise specified)
ABRPL
Replaceable rubber lining (1 INCH [25 MM] thick unless
otherwise specified)
REPRB
Replaceable SS304 plate lining (1 INCH [25 MM] thick unless
LS304
Replaceable SS316 plate lining (1 INCH [25 MM] thick unless
LS316
Linings: Organic, Glass, Metallic
Material
Symbol
Asphaltic Resin Lining (over Carbon Steel) ASRSN
Epoxy Resin Lining (over Carbon Steel) EPLCS
Phenolic Resin Lining (over Carbon Steel) PHRSN
Kynar Sheet Lining (over Carbon Steel)
PVDF
Teflon Sheet Lining (over Carbon Steel) TFELS
Glass Lining (over Carbon Steel) GSLCS
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Butyl Rubber Lining (over Carbon Steel) BUTYL
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Neoprene Sheet Lining (over Carbon Steel) NEPNE
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Soft Natural Rubber Sheet Lining (over Carbon Steel) NATRB
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Nitrile Rubber Lining (over Carbon Steel) NITRL
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Hypalon Rubber Lining (over Carbon Steel) HYPLN
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Ebonite Lining (over Carbon Steel) EBONT
16 PSF [80 KG/M2] Chemical Lead Lining CLEAD
Inorganic Zinc Coating applied by brush to 3 M [0.08 MM] thickness I-ZN
Flame sprayed Zinc Coating 8 MIL [0.20 MM] thickness ZNMZL
Casting Materials
Material Classification Casting Material Description System Material
Symbol
Aluminum Alloys Aluminum AL
Iron and Steel Alloys Low-Alloy Steel Grade B
Low-Alloy Steel Grade E
Low-Alloy Steel Grade C
Low-Alloy Steel
Carbon Steel
Low-Alloy Steel Grade B
Low-Alloy Steel Grade A
Low-Alloy Steel Grade B
Low-Alloy Steel Grade C
Low-Alloy Steel Grade D
Low-Alloy Steel Grade E
Carbon Steel Grade 60
Carbon Steel
Low-Alloy Steel Grade 1A
Low-Alloy Steel Grade 1B
Low-Alloy Steel Grade 1C
9 Percent Nickel Steel
Carbon Steel
Cast Iron
A203B
A203E
A 204
A 283
A 299
A 302
A387A
A387B
A387C
A387D
A387E
A 442
A 455
A 515
A 516
A533A
A533B
A533C
A 553
A285S
or CS
CI
Stainless Steel Alloys Type 304 Stainless Steel
Type 304L Stainless Steel
Type 316 Stainless Steel
Type 316L Stainless Steel
- continued next page -
SS304
or SS
304L
SS316
316L
SS321
SS347
SS410
SS430
Other Alloys
Nickel
Inconel
Monel
Titanium
Carpenter 20
NI
INCNL
MONEL
TI
C 20
Other Materials Available
Only On Pumps Where
Designated
SS304 Impeller, CS Casing
SS316 Impeller, CS Casing
Goulds Alloy 20
High Nickel Alloy
High Nickel Alloy
Cast Steel
304SF
316SF
GAL20
ISO B
ISO C
CASTS
Material Classification Casting Material Description System Material
Symbol
Packing Materials
Packing Type Size
Inches MM
Packing Material Packing Type
Symbol
Activated carbon - - Carbon ACT-C
Alumina
- - Alumina ALMNA
Berl saddles 0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
15
20
25
40
Ceramic 0.5CBS
.75CBS
1.0CBS
1.5CBS
Berl saddles 0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
15
20
25
40
Porcelain 0.5PBS
.75PBS
1.0PBS
1.5PBS
Calcium chloride
- - Calcium chloride CACL
Coke
- - Coke COKE
Crushed limestone - - Limestone LIME
Crushed stone
- - Stone STONE
Dirt (earth) - - Earth DIRT
Gravel - - Gravel GRAVEL
INTALOX saddles
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
15
25
40
50
Ceramic 0.5CIS
1.0CIS
1.5CIS
2.0CIS
INTALOX saddles 0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
15
25
40
50
Porcelain 0.5PIS
1.0PIS
1.5PIS
2.0PIS
Pall rings 0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
15
25
40
50
Polypropylene 0.5PPR
1.0PPR
1.5PPR
2.0PPR
Pall rings 0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
15
25
40
50
Stainless steel 0.5SPR
1.0SPR
1.5SPR
2.0SPR
Raschig rings 0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
15
20
25
40
50
75
Ceramic
0.5CRR
.75CRR
1.0CRR
1.5CRR
2.0CRR
3.0CRR
Raschig rings 1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
25
40
50
75
Porcelain 1.0PRR
1.5PRR
2.0PRR
3.0PRR
Raschig rings 1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
25
40
50
75
Stainless steel 1.0SRR
1.5SRR
2.0SRR
3.0SRR
Raschig rings 1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
25
40
50
75
Carbon steel 1.0FRR
1.5FRR
2.0FRR
3.0FRR
Resin - - Resin RESIN
Sand
- - Sand SAND
Silica gel
- - Silica gel S-GEL
Tellerettes H.D. 1.0 25 Polyethylene HD-P-T
Tellerettes L.D. 1.0 25 Polyethylene LD-P-T
13X Molecular Sieve 13XMS
PVC Structured Packing 68 SF/CF [223 M2/M3] 68PVC
CPVC Structured Packing 68 SF/CF [223 M2/M3] 68CPVC
Cascade rings 1.0
2.0
3.0
25
50
75
Ceramic 1.0CCR
2.0CCR
3.0CCR
Cascade rings 1.0
2.0
3.0
25
50
75
Polypropylene 1.0PCR
2.0PCR
3.0PCR
Cascade rings 1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
25
40
50
75
100
Stainless steel 1.0SCR
1.5SCR
2.0SCR
3.0SCR
4.0SCR
Steel structured
packing 45 angle
of vertical
orientation
107
76
62
35
350
250
205
115
410S Stainless steel M107YA
M76YA
M62YA
M35YA
Steel structured
packing 45 angle
of vertical
orientation
107
76
62
35
350
250
205
115
304 Stainless steel M107YB
M76YB
M62YB
M35YB
Steel structured
packing 45 angle
of vertical
orientation
107
76
62
35
350
250
205
115
316L Stainless steel
- continued on next page -
M107YC
M76YC
M62YC
M35YC
Packing Type Size
Inches MM
Symbol
Steel structured
packing 60 angle
of vertical
orientation
76
35
250
115
410S Stainless steel M76XA
M35XA
Steel structured
packing 60 angle
of vertical
orientation
76
35
250
115
304 Stainless steel M76XB
M35XB
Steel structured
packing 60 angle
of vertical
orientation
76
35
250
115
316L Stainless steel M76XC
M35XC
Packing Type Size
Inches MM
Symbol
29 Units of Measure (G6) 29-1
Introduction to Units of Measure
Units of Measure
Length
Area
Volume
Mass
Mass per Length
Mass per Volume
Pressure
Velocity
Flow Rates
Electric
Power
Viscosity
Angular
Other
Miscellaneous Useful Constants
Project Specifications and their Use of Units of Measure
Special Units of Measure
Length and Area Units
Volume Units
Mass and Unit Mass
Pressure Units
Velocity and Flow Rate Units
Power Units
Viscosity Units
29 Units of Measure (G6)
29-2 29 Units of Measure (G6)
Introduction to Units of
Measure
Icarus systems provide a choice of two sets of units of measure:
I-P (Inch-Pound)
METRIC (Metric).
The user must select the desired set indirectly (by specifying the country base
location) or directly. Once the appropriate set is selected, the user may wish to
redefine one or more variables from the base units of measure to some other
measure. The Units of Measure Data provides the means of identifying the
conversion.
The user should refer to units of measure later in this chapter for the basic
definitions of variables and their associated units of measure for I-P and
METRIC sets. Along with these definitions are conversion multipliers for
relating I-P to METRIC units. Each line bearing a two-digit Type Number is a
candidate for user redefinition. The type number is used to identify the specific
unit of measure to be redefined. The user would then provide a new name for
that unit of measure and the appropriate conversion multiplier to convert from
the base unit of measure to the desired unit of measure.
The following special units of measure are not characterized by a Type Number
and simple conversion multiplier:
Temperature - User may define temperature to be in DEG C, DEG F or
DEG K.
Process Pipe Size (diameter and thickness dimensions only) - User may
specify process pipe to be designed in INCH or MM units of measure,
independently of other linear units of measure.
Driver Power - User may specify drivers to be specified, sized, selected,
reported in HP or KW.
Notes of Caution
All user-provided numeric values for dimensions, sizes, extents, intensities,
flows, etc., are considered by the system to conform to those units of measure
selected and/or defined by the user. It is the users responsibility to be
constantly aware of the units of measure so selected throughout the entire
exercise of preparing project data for the system. The user is cautioned that
variable redefinition from system base to a user unit of measure could have
unpredictable downstream effects, for example, in selection of plates, wire,
tubing, pipe, etc. Further, the user is cautioned that each base set of units, I-P
and METRIC, has its own special set of default values; the pair of default
values are not necessarily related to one another by usual conversion
relationships; each is established by itself as a reasonable value in the base
unit of measure. Once the users set of units of measure is established, default
values are evaluated as follows:
Unit of Measure Conversion: are used to convert the base unit of measure
default value by the users numeric value to obtain the value of the revised
default value in the desired units of measure.
No Unit of Measure Conversion: the system uses the default value
as tabulated.
Example
METRIC base set selected in Project Title Data, and
Unit of measure data used to convert pressure in KPA (METRIC) to PSIG
using 0.14504 = 1/6.894757 as conversion for Type No. 18.
Turbine steam pressure METRIC default is 2000 KPA, which, converted to
PSIG, is 290.047549 PSIG. The PSIG value is used in sizing the turbine if
the user does not enter the pressure value.
Contrast this value with the I-P default value printed in the turbine table as
300 PSIG.
Another Example
The METRIC base user will have all length variables defined in terms of
millimeters, meters, etc. As a consequence, pipe sizes (diameters) and wall
thicknesses will be expected to be specified, sized, selected and reported in
MM. Should the METRIC base user desire pipe to be specified, sized, selected
and reported in MM. Should the METRIC base user desire pipe to be specified,
sized, selected and reported as INCH values, the user must enter the
designator INCH in the field labelled Pipe Size.
This note of caution is tendered for temperature and driver power a well as
pipe sizing.
Final Note of Caution
The user of this section should exercise extreme care and deliberation in
redefining units of measure. Since, once established:
All user input is expected in the defined units of measure.
Default values subject to conversions will not be in rounded numbers but
will be conversions from base default values.
Selection and design criteria may be impacted and affected by user
redefinition of units of measure.
All reporting by the system will conform to the selected units of measure.
The trail of consequences of redefinitions of the units of measure is one
especially difficult to backtrack, especially if that variable affects size
selection of materials in a non-standard way.
Units of Measure
Type
No.
Inch/Pound
Description Symbol
Conversion Metric
Description Symbol
Length
01 Inches INCHES x 25.4 = Millimeters MM
02 Feet FEET x 0.3048 = Meters M
03 Miles (statute) MILES x 1.60934 = Kilometers KM
04 Mesh MESH x 1.0000 = Mesh MESH
Area
05 Square feet SF x 0.092903 = Square
meters
M2
06 Square yards SY x 0.836127 = Square
meters
M2
Volume
07 Cubic feet CF x 0.028317 = Cubic
meters
M3
08 Cubic yards CY x 0.76455 = Cubic
meters
M3
09 US Gallons
(231 cubic
inches, no
units for UK
imperial
gallons)
GALLONS x 0.00378541 = Cubic
meters
M3
10 Barrels (42
gallons)
BARRELS x 0.1589873 = Cubic
meters
M3
11 Bags (94
pounds)
BAGS x 0.852749 = Bags (50
kilograms)
BAG-50KG
48 Board feet BDFT x 0.0023597 = Cubic
meters
M3
Mass
12 Pounds LBS x 0.45359 =Kilograms KG
13 Tons (2000
pounds)
TONS x 0.907185 = 1000
Kilograms
TON
Mass per Length
14 Pounds per
foot
LB/FT x 1.488156 = Kilograms/
meter
KG/M
15 Pounds per
yard
LB/YD x 0.496052 = Kilograms/
meter
KG/M
Mass per Volume
16 Pounds per
batch
LB/BATCH x 0.45359 = Kilograms
per batch
KG/BATCH
17 Pounds per
cubic foot
PCF x 16.01829 = Kilograms
per cubic
meter
KG/M3
Pressure
18 Pounds (force)
per square
inch, gauge
PSIG x 6.894757 = Kilopascals
(1000 newtons
per square
meter)
KPA
19 Inches of
mercury
IN HG x 3.38638 = Kilopascals
(1000 newtons
per square
meter)
KPA
20 Inches of
water
IN H2O x 249.082 = Pascals PA
21 Millimeters of
mercury
(TORR)
MM HG x 133.322 =Pascals PA
22 Pounds (force)
per square
foot (loading)
PSF x 0.0478802 = Kilonewtons
per square
meter (1
newton = 1 KG
mass under 1
meter/sec
2

acceleration)
KN/M2
Velocity
23 Feet per
minute
FPM x 18.2880 = Meters/hour M/H
24 Miles per hour MPH x 1.60934 = Kilometers/
hour
KM/H
25 Revolutions
per minute
RPM x 1.0000 = Revolutions
per minute
RPM
na Cycles per
second
HZ
(HZ is
frequently
used to refer
to local power
frequency)
x 1.0000 = Hertz HZ
Type
No.
Inch/Pound
Description Symbol
Conversion Metric
Description Symbol
Flow Rates
26 Cubic feet per
minute
CFM x 1.69901 = Cubic
meters per
hour
M3/H
27 Cubic feet per
hour
CFH x 0.028317 = Cubic
meters per
hour
M3/H
28 Cubic feet per
minute per
square foot of
surface
CFM/SF x 18.28800 = Cubic
meters per
hour per
square meter
of surface
M3/H/M2
29 Gallons per
minute
GPM x 0.063090 Litres per
second
L/S
30 Gallons per
hour
GPH x 0.003785 Cubic meters
per hour
M3/H
31 Pounds per
hour
LB/H x 0.45359 Kilograms/
hour
KG/H
32 Tons per hour
(short tons, no
unit for long
tons)
TPH x 0.907185 = Tons per
hour
TON/H
33 Tons per day TPD x 0.037799 = Tons per
hour
TON/H
Electric
34 Volts V x 1.0 = Volts V
35 Kilovolts
(1000V)
KV x 1.0 = Kilovolts KV
36 Amperes A x 1.0 = Amperes A
37 Kiloamperes
(1000A)
KA x 1.0 = Kiloamperes KA
38 Watts W x 1.0 = Watts W
39 Kilowatts
(1000W)
KW x 1.0 = Kilowatts KW
40 Kilovolt-
amperes
(1000V-A)
KVA x 1.0 = Kilovolt-
amperes
KVA
Power
na Horsepower HP x 0.74570 = Kilowatts KW
41 Tons,
refrigeration
(12000 BTU
per hour)
TONS-REF x 3.51685 = Kilowatts KW
42 BTU per hour BTU/H x 0.293071 = Watts W
Type
No.
Inch/Pound
Description Symbol
Conversion Metric
Description Symbol
Miscellaneous Useful Constants
1 Gravitational Constant:
Inch-Pound 32.174 lb-ft/lb(force)-sec2
Metric 9.80665 kg-m/kg(force)-sec2
2 Absolute temperatures:
Rankine DEG R = 459.67 + DEG F
Kelvin DEG K = 273.15 + DEG C
3 Gas Constant, R (basis: 22.4140 liters at 0 degrees C, 1 atm. for the
volume of 1 gram-mole of gas and PV=ZnRT)
R = 10.732 psia-ft3/lb-mole degrees R
R = 8.3145 KPA-m3/kg-mole degrees K
43 Millions of BTU
per hour
MMBTU/H x 0.293071 = Megawatts MEGAW
44 BTU per hour
per square
foot
BTU/H/SF x 3.15460 = Watts per
square meter
W/M2
45 BTU per pound BTU/LB x 2.32601 = Kilojoules
per kilogram
KJ/KG
Viscosity
46 Centipoise CPOISE x 1.0 = Millipascal-
seconds
MPA-S
47 Centistoke CSTOKE x 1.0 = Millimeters
squared per
second
MM2/S
Angular
na Degrees DEGREE x 1.0 = Degrees DEGREE
Other
na Fahrenheit
temperature
DEG F (F-32)/1.8 = Celsius
temperature
DEG C
na Fahrenheit
temperature
difference
DEG F x 0.55555 = Celsius
temperature
difference
DEG C
na Nominal pipe
size (diameter
and thickness)
INCH not applicable
size
Nominal pipe
size (diameter
and thickness)
MM
na Driver power HP not applicable Driver power KW
Type
No.
Inch/Pound
Description Symbol
Conversion Metric
Description Symbol
Project Specifications and their
Use of Units of Measure
Special Units of Measure
Unit of Measure Name for Temperature: F (INCH-POUND) or C or K
(METRIC)
Use to specify:
All items specifying temperature
Unit of Measure Name for pipe size: INCH (INCH-POUND) or MM (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Pipe, valves, fittings
Unit of Measure Name for driver power: HP (INCH-POUND) or KW
(METRIC)
Use to specify:
Electric motors, turbines
Length and Area Units
Unit of Measure Name for: INCHES (INCH-POUND) or MM (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Vessel components
wall/plate thickness
tube diameter
cladding thickness
Conveyor belts - width
Conveyors/vibrating - width of pan
Centrifuge bowl/basket diameter
Dryers, pan type - depth
Dust collectors, cyclone diameter
Filters, plate/frame size
Feeders, rotary - diameter
Feeders, vibrating - width
Heat exchangers, shell diameter
Mills, product, feed size
Reboilers, port area
Stacks - diameter
Towers - tray spacing
Insulation thickness
Manhole diameter
Steel, walkway width
Vibrating screens - sifter screen diameter
Unit of Measure Name for: FEET (INCH-POUND) or M (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Vessel size
span, length, height, diameter,
tube length
Fluid head- pumps
Unit of Measure Name for: MILES (INCH-POUND) or KM (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Site development
Unit of Measure Name for: MESH (INCH-POUND) or MESH (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Crushers
Filter, tubular
Unit of Measure Name for: SF (INCH-POUND) or M2 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Dryers - tray surface area
Dust collectors - cloth area
Drum dryers - peripheral area
Evaporators - heated surface area
Flakers - area
Heat exchangers
Linings
Rotary dryers
Tray drying systems, tray surface
Vibrating screen
Unit of Measure Name for: SY (INCH-POUND) or M2 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Site development
Volume Units
Unit of Measure Name for: CF (INCH-POUND) or M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Centrifuges - capacity
Filters, plate/frame capacity
Mixers
Rotary dryers, working capacity
Vertical tanks, gas holders, live bottom
Unit of Measure Name for: CY (INCH-POUND) or M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Site development
Unit of Measure Name for: GALLONS (INCH-POUND) or M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Vessel volume, liquids
Kneaders
Packings
Vertical tanks
Unit of Measure Name for: BARRELS (INCH-POUND) or M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Vertical tanks
Unit of Measure Name for: BAGS (INCH-POUND) or BAGS-50KG (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Field-mixed concrete components
Unit of Measure Name for: BD FT (INCH-POUND) or M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Foundation formwork (shuttering)
Mass and Unit Mass
Unit of Measure Name for: LBS (INCH-POUND) or KG (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Cranes
Scales
Unit of Measure Name for: TONS (INCH-POUND) or TON (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Elevators
Cranes, hoists
Unit of Measure Name for: LB/FT (INCH-POUND) or KG/M (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Steel member sizes
Pile sizes
Unit of Measure Name for: LB/YD (INCH-POUND) or KG/M (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Site development - railroad rails
Unit of Measure Name for: LB/BATCH (INCH-POUND) or KG/BATCH
(METRIC)
Use to specify:
Centrifuges, batch type
Filters
Unit of Measure Name for: PCF (INCH-POUND) or KG/M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Density of solids, fluids
Blenders
Pressure Units
Unit of Measure Name for: PSIG (INCH-POUND) or KPA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Gauge pressure
Unit of Measure Name for: IN HG (INCH-POUND) or KPA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Vacuum pumps
Unit of Measure Name for: IN H2O (INCH-POUND) or PA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Draft pressure measurement, ductwork
Dust collector, cyclone - pressure drop
Unit of Measure Name for: MM HG (INCH-POUND) or PA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Ejectors, absolute pressure
Vacuum pumps, absolute pressure
Unit of Measure Name for: PSF (INCH-POUND) or KN/M2 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Civil - soil bearing capacity
Velocity and Flow Rate Units
Unit of Measure Name for: FPM (INCH-POUND) or M/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Conveyors, belt speed
Unit of Measure Name for: MPH (INCH-POUND) or KM/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Wind velocity
Unit of Measure Name for: RPM (INCH-POUND) or RPM (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Agitators, agitated tanks
Motors
Blenders
Unit of Measure Name for: CFM (INCH-POUND) or M3/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Air, gas compressors
Air dryers
Dust collectors, washers, precipitators, cyclone
Fans
Vacuum pumps
Unit of Measure Name for: CFH (INCH-POUND) or M3/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Feeders
Unit of Measure Name for: CFM/SF (INCH-POUND) or M3/H/M2 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Dust collectors
Unit of Measure Name for: GPM (INCH-POUND) or L/S (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Centrifugal pumps
Barometric condenser - water flow rate
Filter, cartridge, tubular
Gear pumps
Positive displacement pumps
Towers, cooling
Water treatment systems
Unit of Measure Name for: GPH (INCH-POUND) or M3/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Water treatment systems
Unit of Measure Name for: LB/H (INCH-POUND) or KG/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Dryers, evaporative capacity
Drum dryers
Evaporators
Ejectors - air flow rate
Filters
Feeders
Flakers, drum type
Heat exchangers
Reactors
Rotary dryers
Tray drying systems
Towers, packed, trayed
Water treatment systems - boilers
Wiped film evaporators
Unit of Measure Name for: TPH (INCH-POUND) or TON/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Conveyors
Bucket conveyors
Crushers
Feeders
Filters
Mills
Unit of Measure Name for: TPD (INCH-POUND) or TON/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Crystallizers
Feeder, vibrating
Mills
Electrical Units
Unit of Measure Name for: V (INCH-POUND) or V (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Electrical plant bulks
Unit of Measure Name for: KV (INCH-POUND) or KV (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Unit of Measure Name for: A (INCH-POUND) or A (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Unit of Measure Name for: KA (INCH-POUND) or KA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Unit of Measure Name for: W (INCH-POUND) or W (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Unit of Measure Name for: KW (INCH-POUND) or KW (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Electric generators, portable
Heat exchangers - tank heaters
Unit of Measure Name for: KVA (INCH-POUND) or KVA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Electric generators
Electrical substation equipment
Power Units
Unit of Measure Name for: TONS-REF (INCH-POUND) or KW (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Refrigeration units
Unit of Measure Name for: BTU/H (INCH-POUND) or W (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Heat transfer rate
Unit of Measure Name for: MMBTU/H (INCH-POUND) or MEGAW (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Furnaces
Heating units
Reboilers
Unit of Measure Name for: BTU/H/SF (INCH-POUND) or W/M2 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Flarestacks
Unit of Measure Name for: BTU/LB (INCH-POUND) or KJ/KG (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Reboilers
Flarestacks
Viscosity Units
Unit of Measure Name for: CPOISE (INCH-POUND) or MPA-S (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Pumps
Agitated vessels
Unit of Measure Name for: CSTOKE (INCH-POUND) or MM2/S (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Pumps, gear
30 Field Manpower Titles and Wage Rates (G13) 30-1
US Country Base
UK Country Base
JP Country Base
EU Country Base
ME Country Base
30 Field Manpower Titles
and Wage Rates (G13)
30-2 30 Field Manpower Titles and Wage Rates (G13)
The rates in this chapter are escalated by the Construction Index value
specified by the user in the Indexing/Escalation data
US Country Base
Craft
Code
US Craft Name Unloaded
Wage Rate
($/MH)
Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator Loaded Wage
Rate ($/MH)
1
51 Laborer 17.00 37.10
52
53 *Millwright 30.50 66.60
54 Rigger 29.40 64.20
55
56 Light Vehicle Driver 19.00 41.50
57 Heavy Vehicle Driver 21.10 46.00
58
59 Oiler 28.20 61.50
60 Mechanic 28.80 62.80
61
62 Light Equipment Oper 28.20 61.50
63 Medium Equipment Oper 29.20 63.70
64 Heavy Equipment Oper 30.20 65.90
65
66 *Pipefitter 28.60 62.40
67 *Pipe Welder 31.50 68.70
68
69 Cement Finisher 25.00 54.60
70 Carpenter 24.30 53.00
71 Bricklayer 26.70 58.30
72 Ironworker - Rebar 28.20 61.50
73
74 Ironworker - Structural 26.90 58.70
75 Welder - Structural 26.90 58.70
76
77 Welder - Special 30.80 67.20
78 *Welder - Fabricator 28.20 61.50
79 *Boilermaker 27.90 60.90
80
81 *Instrument Fitter 31.30 68.30
82
83 *Electrician - Line 31.30 68.30
84 *Electrician - Wiring 29.20 63.70
85
1
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator Loaded Wage Rate excludes equipment rental.
* Principal Crafts.
** Foremans rate is 110% of the highest paid craft in the crew in which the
foreman works.
Base Construction Index Value (1Q 2012) = 2030.
86 *Sheetmetal Worker 26.70 58.30
87 Insulator 21.90 47.80
88
89 Painter 21.90 47.80
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98 Craft Helper 18.80 41.00
99 Foreman ** **
Craft
Code
US Craft Name Unloaded
Wage Rate
($/MH)
Aspen In-Plant Cost
Rate ($/MH)
1
UK Country Base
***
Craft
Code
UK Craft Name Unloaded
Wage Rate
(PS/MH)
Aspen In-Plant Cost
Rate (PS/MH)
1
51 Laborer 15.60 43.40
52
53 *Fitter/Millwright 19.70 55.00
54 Rigger 19.70 55.00
55
58
59
60 Plant Fitter 19.70 55.00
61
65
66 *Plater/Pipefitter 19.70 55.00
67 *Welder 20.80 57.90
68
70 Joiner 19.40 53.90
72 Steel Fixer 17.20 47.90
73
74 Steel Erector 19.70 55.00
76
80
82
83 *Electrical Technician 21.10 58.80
84 *Electrician 19.10 53.30
85
87 Insulator 19.70 55.00
88
1
* Principal Crafts.
foreman works.
*** Wage Rate Basis: National Agreement for the Engineering Construction
Industry, 2011-2012 Update. Rates include measured incentive bonus
appropriate to large process industry sites. Rates for civil work reflect
"comparability" with rates for engineering trades on large process industry
sites.
Base Construction Index Value (1Q 2012) = 4970
Note: PS indicates Pounds Sterling
89 Painter 17.20 47.90
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98 Craftsmans Mate 15.60 43.40
99 Foreman ** **
Craft
Code
UK Craft Name Unloaded
Wage Rate
(PS/MH)
Aspen In-Plant Cost
Rate (PS/MH)
1
JP Country Base
Craft
Code
JP Craft Name Unloaded
Wage Rate
(KY/MH)
Aspen In-Plant Cost
Rate (KY/MH)
1
51 Laborer 1.60 3.40
52
53 *Millwright 2.00 4.20
54 Rigger 2.00 4.20
55
58
59 Oiler 1.90 4.00
60 Mechanic 2.10 4.40
61
65
66 *Pipefitter 2.60 5.50
67 *Pipe Welder 2.80 5.90
68
70 Carpenter 2.30 4.80
73
74 Ironworker - Structural 2.30 4.80
76
80
82
83 *Electrician - Line 2.50 5.30
84 *Electrician - Wiring 2.50 5.30
85
87 Insulator 2.30 4.80
88
1
* Principal Crafts.
foreman works.
Base Construction Index Value (1Q 2012 = 1130).
Note: KY indicates thousand Yen.
89 Painter 2.20 4.60
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98 Craft Helper 1.70 3.60
99 Foreman ** **
Craft
Code
JP Craft Name Unloaded
Wage Rate
(KY/MH)
Aspen In-Plant Cost
Rate (KY/MH)
1
EU Country Base
Craft
Code
EU Craft Name Unloaded
Wage Rate
(EUR/MH)
Aspen In-Plant Cost
Rate (EUR/MH)
1
51 Laborer 18.40 43.60
52
53 *Millwright 23.90 56.70
54 Rigger 23.90 56.70
55
56 Driver: Light 21.30 50.50
57 Driver: Heavy 21.30 50.50
58
59 Oiler
60 Mechanic 23.90 56.70
61
62 EquipOp: Light 21.30 50.50
63 EquipOp: Medium 21.50 51.10
64 EquipOp: Heavy 23.90 56.70
65
66 *Pipefitter 23.90 56.70
67 *Pipe Welder 24.20 57.50
68
70 Carpenter 24.00 56.90
73
74 Ironworker: Struct 23.90 56.70
75 Welder: Struct 23.90 56.70
76
77 Welder: Special 24.50 58.00
78 *Welder: Fabr 24.50 58.00
80
81 *Instru.Fitter 23.90 56.70
82
83 *Electr: Line 24.00 56.90
84 *Electr: Wire 23.90 56.70
85
87 Insulator 23.90 56.70
88
1
* Principal Crafts.
foreman works.
ME Country Base
Note: SAR = Saudi Arabian Riyals
89 Painter 21.30 50.50
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98 Helper 19.50 46.40
99 Foreman ** **
Craft
Code
ME Craft Name Unloaded
Wage Rate
(SAR/MH)
Aspen In-Plant Cost
Rate (SAR/MH)
1
51 Laborer 22.00 55.10
52
53 *Millwright 28.20 70.40
54 Rigger 28.20 70.40
55
56 Driver: Light 24.00 60.00
57 Driver: Heavy 24.00 60.00
58
59 Oiler 28.20 70.40
60 Mechanic 41.60 104.10
61
62 EquipOp: Light 22.00 55.10
63 EquipOp: Medium 25.40 63.40
64 EquipOp: Heavy 29.20 72.90
65
66 *Pipefitter 28.20 70.40
Craft
Code
EU Craft Name Unloaded
Wage Rate
(EUR/MH)
Aspen In-Plant Cost
Rate (EUR/MH)
1
1
* Principal Crafts.
foreman works.
67 *Pipe Welder 41.60 104.10
68
70 Carpenter 23.30 58.20
73
74 Ironworker: Struct 25.70 64.30
75 Welder: Struct 25.70 64.30
76
77 Welder: Special 25.70 64.30
78 *Welder: Fabr 26.90 67.40
80
81 *Instru.Fitter 28.20 70.40
82
83 *Electr: Line 28.20 70.40
84 *Electr: Wire 28.20 70.40
85
87 Insulator 27.60 68.90
88
89 Painter 24.50 61.20
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98 Helper 19.00 47.50
99
Craft
Code
ME Craft Name Unloaded
Wage Rate
(SAR/MH)
Aspen In-Plant Cost
Rate (SAR/MH)
1
31 Engineering (G13) 31-1
Design and Construction Engineering Disciplines and Wage Rates
US Country Base
UK Country Base
JP Country Base
EU Country Base
ME Country Base
Engineering Expenses and Indirects
Standard Engineering Drawing Types
User-Specified Drawing Classifications
31 Engineering (G13)
31-2 31 Engineering (G13)
Design and Construction
Engineering Disciplines and
Wage Rates
US Country Base
Note: $ indicates US dollars
No. Design* Discipline $/MH No. Construction**
Discipline
$/MH
Basic Engineering: Home Office:
01 Project Engineering 62.70 01 Project Management 65.10
02 Process Engineering 56.90 02 Cost Accounting 49.40
03 Piping Design 55.60 03 Construction Dept. 36.50
04 Instrument Design 54.60 04 Planning, Scheduling 47.10
05 Mechanical Design 55.60 05 Tools, Equipment 37.00
06 Electrical Design 55.20 06 Industrial Relations 37.10
07 Civil Design 54.30 07 Subcontract Admin. 62.00
08 Piping Drafting 47.10 08 Support, Clerical 25.20
09 Instrument Drafting 49.00
Field Office:
10 Mechanical Drafting 50.30 01 Project Constrn. Supt. 54.00
11 Electrical Drafting 50.00 02 Area Superintendents 52.90
12 Civil Drafting 47.10 Field Superintendents:
13 General Drafting 39.20 03 Piping 47.90
14 Planning, Scheduling 51.70 04 Instrumentation 47.90
15 Cost Estimating 53.90 05 Electrical 47.90
16 Support, Clerical 25.20 06 Civil 47.90
Detail Engineering:
07 Mechanical 47.90
01 Project Engineering 62.70 08 QC&A, Inspection 36.20
02 Process Engineering 56.90 09 Subcontract Admin 50.70
03 Piping Design 55.60 10 Cost Engineering 46.20
04 Instrument Design 54.60 11 Field Engineering 42.20
05 Mechanical Design 55.60 12 Planning, Scheduling 47.40
06 Electrical Design 55.20 13 Safety & Medical 38.70
07 Civil Design 54.30 14 Field Accounting 39.50
08 Piping Drafting 47.10 15 Materials Control 39.30
09 Instrument Drafting 49.00 16 General Drafting 39.20
10 Mechanical Drafting 50.30 17 Support, Clerical 22.70
11 Electrical Drafting 50.00
Construction Management
(Home):
12 Civil Drafting 47.10 01 Project Management 65.10
13 General Drafting 39.20 02 Cost Accounting 49.40
14 Planning, Scheduling 51.70 03 Construction Dept. 36.50
15 Cost Estimating 53.90 04 Subcon. Admin.
(Field)
50.70
16 Support, Clerical 25.20 05 Construction Manager 62.10
17 Model Building 32.30 06 Area Managers 52.90
Procurement:
07 Subcon. Coordinator 45.60
01 Procurement 48.70 08 Field Inspector 36.20
02 Support, Clerical 25.20 09 Cost Engineering 46.20
Eng'g Management:
10 Field Engineering 42.20
01 Project Engineering 76.30 11 Planning, Scheduling 47.40
12 Safety & Medical 38.70
* These rates are the current (1Q 2012)
System base values, which are escalated
by the Design Engineering Index specified
by the user in the Indexing/Escalation
data.
Base Design Engineering Index = 1530
13 Support, Clerical 25.20
Start-up, Commissioning:
01 Commissioning Staff 62.70
02 Start-up Staff 56.90
03 Performance Testing 55.60
** These rates are the current (1Q
2012) System base values, which are
escalated by the Construction
Management Index specified by the
user in the Indexing/Escalation data.
Base Construction Management
Index = 1800
No. Design* Discipline $/MH No. Construction**
Discipline
$/MH
UK Country Base
No. Design* Discipline PS/MH No. Construction**
Discipline
PS/MH
09 Instrument Drafting 22.00 Field Office:
12 Civil Drafting 22.00 Field Superintendents
Detail Engineering:
07 Mechanical 27.20
02 Process Engineering 31.90 09 Subcontract Admin. 27.20
11 Electrical Drafting 22.00 Construction Management
(Home):
15 Cost Estimating 22.00 04 Subcon. Admin. (Field) 28.60
Procurement: 07 Subcon. Coordinator 28.30
Eng'g Management:
10 Field Engineering 26.40
System base values, which are escalated by
the Design Engineering Index specified by
the user in the Indexing/Escalation data.
2012) System base values, which
are escalated by the Construction
Index = 4860
No. Design* Discipline PS/MH No. Construction**
Discipline
PS/MH
JP Country Base
Note: KY indicates thousand Yen
No. Design* Discipline KY/MH No. Construction**
Discipline
KY/MH
Basic Engineering:
Home Office:
Detail Engineering: 07 QC&A, Inspection 4.0
01 Project Engineering 5.0 08 Mechanical 4.0
(Home):
Procurement: 07 Subcon. Coordinator 3.6
Eng'g Management: 10 Field Engineering 3.7
Note: KY indicates thousand YEN
* These rates are the current (1Q
escalated by the Design Engineering
Index specified by the user in the
Indexing/Escalation data.
Index = 1940
No. Design* Discipline KY/MH No. Construction**
Discipline
KY/MH
EU Country Base
Note: EUR indicates Euros
No. Design* Discipline EUR/MH No. Construction**
Discipline
EUR/
MH
Basic Engineering:
Home Office:
Detail Engineering: 07 Mechanical 30.90
(Home):
Procurement:
Eng'g Management: 10 Field Engineering 30.90
* These rates are the current (1Q
escalated by the Design Engineering
Index specified by the user in the
Indexing/Escalation data.
Index = 1720
No. Design* Discipline EUR/MH No. Construction**
Discipline
EUR/
MH
ME Country Base
Note: SAR indicates Saudi Arabian Rials
No. Design* Discipline SAR/
MH
No. Construction**
Discipline
SAR/
MH
09 Instrument Drafting 165.00
Field Office:
Detail Engineering:
07 Mechanical 71.50
02 Process Engineering 280.00 09 Subcontract Admin 78.00
11 Electrical Drafting 165.00
(Home):
15 Cost Estimating 210.00 04 Subcon. Admin.
(Field)
78.00
Procurement:
08 Field Inspector 71.50
01 Procurement 250.00 09 Cost Engineering 91.00
02 Support, Clerical 100.00 10 Field Engineering 162.80
Eng'g Management:
11 Planning, Scheduling 210.00
01 Project Engineering 420.00 12 Safety & Medical 71.50
System base values.
2012) System base values.
Index = 1870
No. Design* Discipline SAR/
MH
No. Construction**
Discipline
SAR/
MH
Engineering Expenses and
Indirects (Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator and Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer )
US Country Base
Phase % Eng'ng Manpower
Expense Rate ($/
MH)*
Payroll
Business
Cost Indirects
Basic Engineering 5.40 25 75
Detail Engineering 4.20 25 75
Procurement 9.60 25 75
Engineering
Management
0.00 25 75
($/MH)**
Home Office
Construction Services
3.90 25 75
Field Office Supervision 0.00 25 75
Construction
Management
0.00 25 75
Start-up,
Commissioning
0.00 25 75
UK Country Base
Expense Rate (PS/
MH)*
Payroll
Business
Cost Indirects
Engineering
Management
0.00 40 90
(PS/MH)**
Home Office
3.10 40 90
Construction
Management
0.00 40 90
Start-up,
Commissioning
0.00 40 90
Engineering Expenses and Indirects - continued
Japan Country Base
Expense Rate (KY/
MH)*
Payroll Business Cost Indirects
Engineering
Management
0.00 25 75
(KY/MH)**
Home Office
0.36 25 75
Construction
Management
0.00 25 75
Start-up,
Commissioning
0.00 25 75
*These rates are the current (1Q 2012) System base values, which are escalated by the
Design Engineering Index specified by the user in the Indexing/Escalation data.
**These rates are the current (1Q 2012) System base values, which are escalated by
the Construction Management Index specified by the user in the Indexing/Escalation
data.
EU Country Base
Expense Rate (EUR/
MH)*
Payroll Business Cost Indirects
Engineering
Management
0.00 40 90
(EUR/MH)**
Home Office
4.50 40 90
Construction
Management
0.00 40 90
Start-up,
Commissioning
0.00 40 90
*These rates are the current (1Q 2012) System base values, which are escalated by the
Design Engineering Index specified by the user in the Indexing/Escalation data.
**These rates are the current (1Q 2012) System base values, which are escalated by
the Construction Management Index specified by the user in the Indexing/Escalation
data.
Base Design Engineering Index = 1530 (US), 4750 (UK), 2060 (JP), 1850
(EU), 1620 (ME)
Base Construction Management Index = 1800 (US), 4860 (UK), 1940 (JP),
1720 (EU), 1870 (ME)
Note:
$ indicates U.S. Dollars
PS indicates Pounds Sterling
KY indicates thousand YEN
EUR indicates Euros
SAR indicates Saudi Arabian Riyals
Explanation of Expense Rate
The Expense rate is used to calculate the Basic Engineering Report's
"Overhead Items," which consist of the following:
Reproduction
Communications
Travel
Computation
ME Country Base
Expense Rate (SAR/
MH)*
Payroll
Business
Cost Indirects
Engineering
Management
0.00 25 75
(SAR/MH)**
Home Office
17.80 25 75
Construction
Management
0.00 25 75
Start-up,
Commissioning
0.00 25 75
These four line items collectively comprise engineering expenses. They result
from a fixed percentage split of this expense by phase. Multiply the Total Man-
hours for the phase by this rate to calculate the total expenses. The system
then allocates these to various categories by percentage as follows:
The amount of the expense is user-adjusted, but how it is split into these
categories is not.
Both the Payroll Burdens/Fringes and Indirects are Percentages of the Total
Engineering Cost in the Basic Engineering Report.
The relationship among the wage rates, expense rate, and cost indirect are as
follows:
Wage rates are the wages paid to a specific disciplines (see page 31-3).
The Expense rate is used to calculate the Overhead items in the Basic
Engineering Report.
Indirects are typically office expenses. Indirect office expenses include
rent, heat, electricity and other operating expenses not specifically covered
in other engineering accounts.
Basic Detail Procure Home
Reproduction 23% 30% 14% 42%
Communications 3% 4% 12% 8%
Travel 17% 12% 50% 50%
Computation 57% 54% 24% 0%
Standard Engineering Drawing
Types (Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator and Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer)
Basic
Engin -
eering
Detailed
Engineering
Drawin
g No.
Description Drawing No. Description
1 Process Flow Diagrams 1 Piping Arrangements (Plans &
Elevns.)
2 Piping & Instrument Diagrams 2 Piping Isometrics
3 Interconnecting Piping
Diagrams
3 Special Hanger/Support
Drawings
4 Utility Flow Diagrams 4 Steam Tracing Drawings
5 Utility Piping & Instrument
Dgs
6 Electrical One Line Diagrams 7 Instrument Location Drawings
7 Elec. System Distribution 8 Control Cable Schedules
8 General Equipment
Arrangements
9 Control Room/Console
Drawings
9 Other (Plot Plants, Etc.) 10 Control Systems Schematics
11 Instrument Loop Diagrams
12 Connection Diagrams/Junction
Box Drwgs
13 Electrical One Line Diagrams
14 Substation Layout Drawings
15 Electrical Schematics
16 Power Distribution Drawings
17 Circuit Scheds, Connection
Diagrams
18 Cable Tray Drawings
User-specified Drawings
Up to nine user-specified drawings (or
other tasks, such as models) may be
added to the system drawings by using
a drawing number from the range 91-
99.
Note: Only the drawing numbers
shown in this table and 91-99 are
accepted.
19 Lighting Drawings
20 Grounding Drawings
21 Electrical Tracing Drawings
23 Equipment Foundation
Drawings
24 Steelwork Foundation
Drawings
25 Area Paving Drawings
26 Misc. Concrete, Supports, Etc.
27 Underground Piping Drawings
28 Structural Steel (Plans &
Elevns.)
29 Ladders & Platforms, Misc.
Steel
30 Grating Drawings
32 Building Arrangement Plans,
Elevns.
33 Architectural Details
34 Facilities Plot Plans
35 Area Equipment Layouts
36 Site Development
38 Other Detail Drawings, Lists
Basic
Engin -
eering
Detailed
Engineering
32 Construction Equipment(G4) 32-1
Introduction to Construction Equipment Rental
Construction Equipment
32 Construction Equipment(G4)
32-2 32 Construction Equipment(G4)
Introduction to Construction
Equipment Rental
An Equipment Rental Report is prepared for project estimates when the
Construction Equipment Rental report option is selected. The report identifies
both user and system-selected rental items, durations and rental rates. This
report is deleted upon specific user entry of equipment/plant rental either as a
total cost or as a percentage of field manpower.
The user can revise the systems evaluation of equipment rental requirements
on an item-by-item basis, and by contractor, by defining Equipment Rental
Data. Options are available for specifying the applicable contractor, adding
days or additional construction equipment to the account, changing days and
rental rates or deleting construction equipment from the account This chapter
includes an indexed list of several hundred rental equipment items contained
within the system base and directly related to work items for equipment and
bulk installation.
For Prime Contractor reporting, equipment rental applies to the project in its
entirety. For contract reporting, equipment rental applies to the responsible
contract and must be provided for each contract if required.
Construction Equipment
(Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer , Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator) Rental days and monthly rates may be adjusted for
construction equipment items.
Equip
No. Equipment Class Description
Size
Metric Units I-P Units
21 AUTOMOTIVE AMBULANCE
26 AUTOMOTIVE CAR 2-DOOR SUBCOMPACT 1.3 LITER
27 AUTOMOTIVE CAR 4-DOOR COMPACT 1.6 LITER
28 AUTOMOTIVE CAR 4-DOOR STANDARD 2.0 LITER
31 AUTOMOTIVE MINIBUS BUS 10 PASSENGER
32 AUTOMOTIVE BUS 25 PASSENGER 25 PASSENGER
33 AUTOMOTIVE BUS 40 PASSENGER 40 PASSENGER
41 TRUCK PICKUP .5 TONS - 4 X 2 .50 TON - 4 X 2
42 TRUCK PICKUP .75 TONS - 4 X 2 75 TON - 4 X 2
43 TRUCK PICKUP .75 TONS - 4 X 4 .75 TON - 4 X 4
44 TRUCK PICKUP - CREW CAB .75 TONS - 4 X 4 .75 TON - 4 X 4
45 TRUCK PICKUP 1.0 TONS - 4 X 4 1 TON - 4 X 4
46 TRUCK HIGHWAY FLATBED 2 TONS - 4 X 2 2 TON - 4 X 2
51 TRUCK OFF-ROAD FLATBED 6 TONS - 6 X 6 6 TON - 6 X 6
56 TRUCK A-FRAME 4 X 4 4 X 4
57 TRUCK LUBE/GREASE
58 TRUCK FUEL/WATER 5000 GALLONS 18 M3
61 TRUCK POWERLINE, BUCKET INSULATED INSULATED
62 TRUCK CHERRY PICKER NON-INSULATED NON-
INSULATED
66 TRUCK DUMP TRUCK 6 CY 5 M3
71 TRUCK FORKLIFT 2 TONS 2 TON
72 TRUCK FORKLIFT 10 TONS 9 TON
76 EARTHMOVING WHEEL LDR. W/
BACKHOE
0.75 CY 0.6 M3
77 EARTHMOVING WHEEL LOADER CAT930 1.75 CY CAT930 1.3 M3
78 EARTHMOVING WHEEL LOADER CAT950 3.0 CY CAT950 2.3 M3
81 EARTHMOVING CRAWLER LOADER 1.0 CY 0.75 M3
82 EARTHMOVING CRAWLER LOADER CAT955 1.75 CY CAT955
83 EARTHMOVING CRAWLER LOADER CAT977 2.75 CY CAT977
84 EARTHMOVING CRAWLER LOADER 4.50 CY 3.4 M3
86 EARTHMOVING WHEEL ARTICUL
LOADER
CAT966 3.50 CY CAT966 2.5 M3
LOADER
CAT988 6.00 CY CAT988 4.5 M3
LOADER
CAT980 PIPELOAD CAT980
PIPELOAD
91 EARTHMOVING MOTOR GRADER CAT 12 CAT 12
92 EARTHMOVING MOTOR GRADER CAT 14 CAT 42
95 EARTHMOVING TRENCHER,
DITCHWITCH
12 IN X 3 FT 300 MM X 1.0 M
Equip
Size
96 EARTHMOVING TRENCHER, WHEEL 16 IN X 7 FT 6 IN 400 MM X 2.0 M
97 EARTHMOVING TRENCHER, WHEEL 28 IN X 8 FT 6 IN 700 MM X 2.5 M
98 EARTHMOVING TRENCHER, WHEEL 48 IN 1200 MM
99 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER-ELEVATING CAT613 11 CY CAT613 8 M3
100 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER-ELEVATING CAT621J 21 CY CAT621J 16 M3
101 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER-ELEVATING CAT633C 32 CY CAT633C 24 M3
102 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER,WHEEL
TRACTR
TWIN627 14-20
CY
TWIN627 11-15
M3
TRACTR
CAT631C 21-30
CY
CAT631C 16-23
M3
TRACTR
CAT651B 32-44
CY
CAT651B 24-33
M3
105 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER, TOWED CAT435F 14-18
CY
CAT435F 11-14
M3
106 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER, TOWED CAT D4 68 HP CAT D4
107 EARTHMOVING CRAWLER TRACT.
DOZER
CAT D6 120 HP CAT D6
DOZER
DOZER
DOZER
111 EARTHMOVING BACKHOE CRAWLER
HYDR
.50 CY .40 M3
HYDR
.75 CY .60 M3
HYDR
1.0 CY 75 M3
HYDR
1.5 CY 1.1 M3
HYDR
2.5 CY 1.9 M3
116 EARTHMOVING TRUCK-MTD GRADALL 5/8 CY G660 G660
117 EARTHMOVING BACKHOE, SELF-PROP .50 CY 0.4 M3
118 EARTHMOVING BACKHOE, WHEEL .75 CY W/
BREAKER
0.6 M3 W/
BREAKER
121 DRILLING ROTARY ROCK DRILL CRAWLER MTD 12
IN
CRAWLER MTD
122 DRILLING TRACK DRILL,SWG
BOOM
4.5 INCHES 115 MM
123 DRILLING TWIN ROCK DRILL SUSP. VERTICAL SUSP.
VERTICAL
124 DRILLING AUGER,FLATBED-
MOUNTD
2.5
TONS,OFFROAD
2 TON,
OFFROAD
Equip
Size
125 DRILLING DRILL QUAD,SWG
BOOM
4.5 INCHES 115 MM
126 COMPACTION ROLLER SELF-
PROPELLD
VIBR DRUM 7
TONS
VIB DRUM 6.5
TON
PROPELLD
9 WHEEL 15 TONS 9 WHEEL 14
TON
PROPELLD
SMOOTH 10
TONS
SMOOTH 9
TON
131 COMPACTION ROLLER,TOWED, 1
DRUM
SHEEPSFT 40X60
IN
SHEEPSFT 1
X1.5 M
132 COMPACTION ROLLER,TOWED, 1
DRUM
VIBRATNG 30X54
IN
VIBRG.8 X1.4 M
133 COMPACTION ROLLER, MANUAL
GUIDE
VIB DRUM 1.0
TONS
VIB DRUM 1
TON
134 COMPACTION RAMMER, HANDHELD 350-700SPM, 130 350-700SPM,
60 KG
136 TRACTOR TRUCK TRACTOR 20 TONS 4X2 18 TON 4X2
139 TRACTOR OFF-ROAD TRACTOR 20 TONS 4X4 18 TON 4X4
140 TRACTOR OFF-ROAD TRACTOR 40 TONS 6X6 36 TON 6X6
141 TRACTOR WHEEL, W/TOW
HITCH
50 HP 40 KW
142 TRACTOR WHEEL, W/TOW
HITCH
105 HP 80 KW
146 TRAILER LOWBOY, PLATFORM 15 TONS 15 TON
147 TRAILER LOWBOY, PLATFORM 25 TONs 25 TON
148 TRAILER LOWBOY, PLATFORM 40TONs 35 TON
155 TRAILER FLATBED - 4 WHEEL 6 TONS 5 TON
156 TRAILER FLATBED 15 TONS 15 TON
157 TRAILER FLATBED 30 TONS 25 TON
158 TRAILER FLOAT, OFFROAD 30 TONS 35 TON
159 TRAILER FLOAT, OFFROAD 60 TONS 55 TON
161 TRAILER DIESEL BOWSER 600 GALLONS 2.25 M3
162 TRAILER FUEL/WATER 2000 GALLONS 7.50 M3
Equip
Size
166 TRAILER MOBILE OFFICE 8 X 35 FEET 2.5 X 10 M
16
168 TRAILER X-RAY DARKROOM
169 TRAILER STORAGE VAN 8 X 28 FEET 2.5 X 8.5 M
171 TRAILER PIPE POLE 30 TONS 27 TON
172 TRAILER PIPE DOLLY/5TH
WHEEL
2 AXLE 2 AXLE
173 TRAILER CABLE REEL
176 CRANE TELESCOPIC JIB, SELF PROP. 5 TONS PROP 5 TON
181 CRANE TELESCOPIC JIB TRUCK - 15 TONS TRUCK - 14
TON
TON
TON
TON
TON
TON
TON
TON
189 CRANE TELESCOPIC JIB TRUCK - 110
TONS
TRUCK - 100
TON
190 CRANE TELESCOPIC JIB TRUCK - 200
TONS
TRUCK - 180
TON
191 CRANE FIXED JIB TRUCK - 15 TONS TRUCK - 14
TON
TON
TON
Equip
Size
TON
TON
TON
TON
198 CRANE FIXED JIB TRUCK - 120
TONS
TRUCK - 110
TON
201 CRANE FIXED JIB, CRAWLER 15 TONS
212 CRANE TOWER-HORIZ. JIB
10T
MAX
4190LB@164FT
MAX 1900KG @
50M
20T
MAX
9260LB@213FT
MAX 4200KG @
65M
40T
MAX
6500LB@247FT
MAX 2950KG @
75M
216 CRANE
ATTACHMENT
CLAMSHELL GRAB 1 CY 0.75 M3
217 CRANE
ATTACHMENT
218 CRANE
ATTACHMENT
219 CRANE
ATTACHMENT
DRAGLINE BUCKET 1 CY 0.75 M3
220 CRANE
ATTACHMENT
221 CRANE
ATTACHMENT
222 CRANE
ATTACHMENT
223 CRANE
ATTACHMENT
CONCRETE BUCKET BTM DUMP 1 CY BTM DUMP 0.75
M3
Equip
Size
224 CRANE
ATTACHMENT
CONCRETE BUCKET BTM DUMP 3 CY BTM DUMP 2.50
M3
226 GIN POLE W/HOIST 50 TONS 45 TON
231 DERRICK GUY DERRICK 250 TONS 225 TON
233 DERRICK CRAWLER GUY
DERRICK
225 TONS 200 TON
234 DERRICK CRAWLER GUY
DERRICK
400 TONS 360 TON
235 PILING PILE DRIVING
HAMMER
20 KFTLB DIESEL 27 KNM DIESEL
HAMMER
40 KFTLB DIESEL 55 KNM DIESEL
HAMMER
75 KFTLB DIESEL 100 KNM
DIESEL
238 PILING DRIVER/EXTRACTOR 70 HP VIBRO VIBRO 50 KW
239 PILING PILING FRAME, LEADS 30 FEET 10 M
240 PILING DRILLING FRAME AUGER AUGER
241 COMPRESSOR DIESEL(SLIDING
VANE)
125 CFM 210 M3/H
VANE)
250 CFM 420 M3/H
VANE)
315 CFM 540 M3/H
246 COMPRESSOR DIESEL(ROTARY
SCREW)
250 CFM 420 M3/H
SCREW)
365 CFM 620 M3/H
SCREW)
600 CFM 1000 M3/H
SCREW)
750 CFM 1250 M3/H
SCREW)
900 CFM 1500 M3/H
SCREW)
1200 CFM 2000 M3/H
Equip
Size
256 CONCRETE BATCHPLANT,
DEMOUNT.
20 CY/H 15 M3/H
257 CONCRETE CONCRETE MIXER 6 SACK .25 M3
258 CONCRETE CONCRETE MIXER 16 SACK (1 CY) .75 M3
261 CONCRETE VIBRATOR GASOLINE 2.4 HP, 2 IN HEAD 1.8 KW, 50MM
HEAD
261 CONCRETE VIBRATOR, AIR 2.5 IN HEAD 65 MM HEAD
263 CONCRETE CURB BUILDR,
SLIPFORM
75 HP, DIESEL 55 KW, DIESEL
264 CONCRETE POWER TROWEL, 4
BLADE
36 IN DIA 1 M DIA
266 CONCRETE MIXER TRUCK 6 CY 5 M3
267 CONCRETE SITE DUMPER .75 CY, DIESEL 0.5 M3, DIESEL
268 CONCRETE STATIC PUMP
269 CONCRETE TRUCK-MTD
PUMP&BOOM
60 CY/H, 4IN LINE 45 M3/H, 100
MM
270 CONCRETE CONVEYOR 16 IN X 40 FEET 400 MM X 12 M
271 CONCRETE REBAR BENDER HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC
272 CONCRETE REBAR SHEAR HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC
274 CONCRETE SLIPFORM PAVER 10-24 FEET 3-7 M WIDE
276 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
PORTABLE GASOLINE 200 AMPERES 200 AMPERES
277 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
278 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
281 WELDING
EQUIPMEN
PORTABLE DIESEL 200 AMPERES 200 AMPERES
282 WELDING
EQUIPMEN
283 WELDING
EQUIPMEN
284 WELDING
EQUIPMEN
PORTABLE DIESEL 650 A, TWIN ARC 650 A, TWIN
ARC
286 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
STATIC RECTIFIER 200 AMPERES 200 AMPERES
287 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
Equip
Size
288 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
289 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
290 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
291 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
293 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
PIPE SEMI-AUTO. CO2
294 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
PIPE AUTOMATIC SUBMERGED ARC SUBMERGED
ARC
296 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
AUTO. SUB-ARC TANK BASE PLATE BASE PLATE
297 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
AUTO. SUB-ARC TANK WALL
HORIZONTAL
WALL
HORIZONTAL
298 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
AUTO. SUB-ARC TANK WALL VERTICAL WALL VERTICAL
301 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
OXY./ACT. WELD &
CUT.
COMB. UNIT COMB. UNIT
302 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
PROPANE GAS SE T &
TRCH
PROPANE GAS SE
T & TRCH
306 WELDING
EQUIPMENT
ELECTRODE DRYING
OVN
311 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
SIDEBOOM (CAT 571) (CAT 571)
312 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
313 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
314 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
316 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CRAWLER TACK
TRACTOR
QUAD ARCS QUAD ARCS
318 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
BENDING MACHINE 6 - 20 INCHES 150 - 500 MM
319 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
Equip
Size
320 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
321 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
TAPESTER, HAND
WRAP
2 - 12 INCHES 50 - 300 MM
322 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CLEAN PRM TAPE
MACH.
8 - 16 INCHES 200 - 400 MM
323 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CLEAN PRM TAPE
MACH.
16 - 26 INCHES 400 - 650 MM
324 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CLEAN PRM TAPE
MACH.
26 - 36 INCHES 650 - 900 MM
325 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CLEAN PRM TAPE
MACH.
36 - 42 INCHES 900 - 1050 MM
326 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CLEAN PRM TAPE
MACH.
42-52 INCHES 1050 - 1300
MM
328 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
INTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
16 - 18 INCHES 400 - 450MM
329 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
INTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
20 - 22 INCHES 500 - 550MM
330 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
INTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
24 - 26 INCHES 600 - 650MM
331 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
INTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
30 - 32 INCHES 750 - 800MM
332 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
INTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
34 - 36 INCHES 850 - 900MM
333 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
INTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
40 - 42 INCHES 1000 - 1050MM
334 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
INTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
44 - 46 INCHES 1100 - 1150MM
335 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
INTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
OVER 48 INCHES OVER 1200MM
336 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
EXTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
8 - 14 INCHES 400 - 450MM
337 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
EXTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
16 - 26 INCHES 400 - 650MM
338 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
EXTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
28 - 36 INCHES 700 - 900MM
339 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
EXTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
36 - 44 INCHES 900 - 1100 MM
340 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
EXTRNL LINE-UP
CLAMP
OVER 42 INCHES OVER 1100 MM
341 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CUTTING &
BEVELLING
1 - 4 INCHES 25 - 100 MM
342 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CUTTING &
BEVELLING
6 - 20 INCHES 150 - 500 MM
343 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CUTTING &
BEVELLING
22 - 30 INCHES 550 - 750 MM
Equip
Size
344 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CUT & BEVEL, TORCH 10 - 48 INCHES 250 - 1200 MM
346 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
PIPE/CONDUIT
BENDER
0.5-2IN RATCHET UP TO 6
INCHES
347 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
HYDRAUL PIPE
BENDER
1.25-4 INCHES 30 - 100 MM
348 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
BENDER
(MECHANICAL)
2.5-6 IN DIA 65 - 150 MM
349 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
CUT & THREAD
MACHINE
UP TO 6 INCHES UP TO 150 MM
351 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
DOUBLE JOINTING
YARD
C/W RACK
CONVYRS
C/W RACK
CONVYRS
352 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
X-RAY EQUIPMENT
354 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
INDUCTION HEATER
355 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
HOLIDAY DETECTOR
356 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
ELECTRIC THREADER UP TO 2 INCHES UP TO 50 MM
358 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
BORING MACHINE ROAD BORER ROAD BORER
361 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
POTENTIOMETER12
POINT
12 POINT
362 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
STRESS RELIEVER TRIPLE RELIEVER TRIPLE
RELIEVER
363 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
POWER DIST. CENTER 10 KVA 10 KVA
364 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
BENCH SAW 10 - 12 INCHES 250 - 300 MM
364 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
PAINT PRESSURE
SPRAY
5 GAL. 8CFM 20 LITER, 15
M3/H
367 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
GUNITE 8 CY/H 6 M3/H
368 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
CABLE PULLER UNIT 5000 LBF. ELEC. E LEC.
369 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
AIR RECEIVING TANK 60 CF 2 M3
370 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
CHAIN SAW 20 INCHES 500 MM
Equip
Size
371 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
TELEPHONES &
STATION
374 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
TENSIOMETER WIRE
ROP
200000 LB CAP 90000 KG CAP
375 MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIP.
TENSIOMETER WIRE
ROP
40000 LB CAP 18000 KG CAP
376 PUMP CENTRIFUGAL 1.5 INCHES 40 MM
377 PUMP CENTRIFUGAL 2.0 INCHES 50 MM
378 PUMP INJECTION PUMP INHIBITOR INHIBITOR
379 PUMP SUBMERSIBLE,
DEWATERG
4 INCHES, 9 HP 100 MM, 7 KW
380 PUMP SUBMERSIBLE,
DEWATERG
6 INCHES, 27 HP 150 MM, 20 KW
381 PUMP HYDROSTATIC TEST 4000 PSI 27500 KPA
382 PUMP WATER FILL 4 IN, 110 GPM 100 MM, 7L/S
383 PUMP WELLPOINTS & HOSE 8 IN, PER 100 FT 200 MM, PER 30
M
384 PUMP WELLPOINT,
DIAPHRAGM
8 INCHES
SUCTION
200 MM
SUCTION
385 PUMP DIAPHRAGM 4 INCHES
SUCTION
100 MM
SUCTION
386 PNEUMATIC PORT.
TOOL
AIR WRENCH 1.25 IN DRIVE 30 MM DRIVE
387 PNEUMATIC PORT.
TOOL
JACK HAMMER 65 LBS 30 KG
388 PNEUMATIC PORT.
TOOL
SAND BLAST MACHINE 600 LBS, 7CF 275 KG, 0.2 M3
391 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
LIGHT PLANT 3000 WATT 3000 WATT
392 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
DRILL PRESS 1.5 INCHES 40 MM
395 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
DRILL 1.0 INCH 25 MM
396 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
GENERATOR SET 6 KW 6 KW
397 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
398 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
399 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
400 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
Equip
Size
401 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
402 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
404 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
SAW, CIRCULAR 6 INCHES 150 MM
406 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
ELECTRIC GRINDER 6 INCHES 150 MM
407 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
PEDESTAL GRINDER 12 INCHES 300 MM
408 ELECTRIC EQUIP/
TOOL
LATHE 9 INCHES 225 MM
411 HOIST HAND-CHAIN 1.5 TONS 1.5 TON
412 HOIST HAND-CHAIN 4.5 TONS 4 TON
413 HOIST HAND-CHAIN 10 TONS 9 TON
414 HOIST HAND-CHAIN 2.0 TONS 2 TON
416 HOIST SINGLE DRUM 22 HP 16 KW
417 HOIST DOUBLE DRUM 32 HP 24 KW
419 HOIST PORTABLE MATL.
TOWER
1.0 TONS 1 TON
419 HOIST PORTABLE MATL.
TOWER
1.0 TONS 1.0 TONS
421 ASPHALT
EQUIPMENT
PAVER/FINISHER 10 FEET WIDE 3 M WIDE
422 ASPHALT
EQUIPMENT
SPREADER TRAILER,
GAS
2000 GAL, SPRAY 7.50 M3, SPRAY
424 ASPHALT
EQUIPMENT
BITUMEN TANKER 2000 GALLON 7.50 M3
425 ASPHALT
EQUIPMENT
ASPHALT HEATER
426 SITE/OFFICE
EQUIP
TRANSIT THEODOLITE
427 SITE/OFFICE
EQUIP
PORTABLE BUILDINGS PER 1000 SF PER 100 M2
430 SITE/OFFICE
EQUIP.
SPACE HEATR, OIL,
AUTO
150 MBTU 40 KW
Equip
Size
435 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
ROLI CRADLE 4 - 12 INCHES 100 - 300MM
436 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
437 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
438 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
ROLI CRADLE 36 - 42 INCHES 900 - 1050 MM
439 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
ROLI CRADLE OVER 42 INCHES OVER 1050 MM
440 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
HOT TAP MACHINE 2 - 4 INCHES 50 - 100 MM
441 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
442 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
443 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
444 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
BUTT FUSION
MACHINE
2 - 4 INCHES 50 - 100 MM
445 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
BUTT FUSION
MACHINE
6 - 8 INCHES 150 - 200 MM
446 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
BUTT FUSION
MACHINE
10 - 18 INCHES 250 - 450 MM
447 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
BUTT FUSION
MACHINE
20 - 30 INCHES 500 - 750 MM
448 PIPING
EQUIPMENT
BUTT FUSION
MACHINE
36 - 48 INCHES 900 - 1200 MM
Equip
Size
33 Base Indices (G13) 33-1
Base Indices
33 Base Indices (G13)
33-2 33 Base Indices (G13)
Base Indices
These indices are generated by Icarus after updating the system costs
(engineering disciplines, wage rates, material costs, shop and field labor rates,
construction equipment rental rates, etc.). We run estimates on our
benchmark projects using the updated system and then use the results to
calculate the indices. Since our benchmark projects contain a variety of
component types fabricated from a variety of materials, these indices are a
composite of the individual cost adjustments that are made. These indices do
not derive from public sources and they may not accurately reflect how the
update will affect your typical projects. To evaluate this, you should run
benchmark projects and develop your own adjustments. Note: 1Q
represents first quarter, 3Q represents third quarter.
Country
Base
Base Data
for System
Costs
System Base Index by Category
General Construction Design Construction
Materials Labor Engineering Management
Labor Labor
US
Current:1Q-
2012
Prior:1Q-2011
1Q-2010
1Q-2009
1Q-2008
1Q-2007
1Q-2006
1Q-2005
1Q-2004
1Q-2003
1Q-2002
1Q-2001
1Q-2000
1Q-1999
1Q-1998
1Q-1997
1Q-1996
1Q-1995
1Q-1994
1Q-1993
1Q-1992
1Q-1991
2330
2250
2120
2040
2200
2060
1900
1840
1630
1540
1510
1520
1520
1510
1525
1500
1485
1460
1390
1370
1360
1350
2030
2000
2000
2010
1960
1890
1820
1750
1690
1630
1590
1550
1510
1460
1430
1400
1365
1340
1320
1310
1290
1270
1530
1560
1590
1620
1620
1540
1490
1480
1460
1480
1470
1450
1440
1450
1450
1450
1460
1480
1460
1450
1420
1390
1800
1800
1620
1660
1630
1540
1490
1480
1480
1460
1480
1470
1450
1440
1450
1450
1450
1460
1480
1460
1450
1420
1390
33 Base Indices (G13) 33-3
Country
Base
Base Data
for System
Costs
Labor Labor
UK Current:1Q-
2012
Prior:1Q-2011
1Q-2010
1Q-2009
1Q-2008
1Q-2007
1Q-2006
1Q-2005
1Q-2004
1Q-2003
1Q-2002
1Q-2001
1Q-2000
1Q-1999
1Q-1998
1Q-1997
1Q-1996
1Q-1995
1Q-1994
1Q-1993
1Q-1992
1Q-1991
3100
3080
2910
2910
2830
2630
2500
2420
2290
2230
2190
2140
2080
2140
2100
2050
1990
1910
1850
1780
1670
4970
4580
4370
4290
4020
3830
3670
3510
3360
3220
3120
2980
2850
2700
2550
2410
2310
2200
2160
2110
2050
1930
4750
4780
4600
4450
4420
4190
3970
3810
3670
3540
3480
3360
3210
2950
2780
2620
2470
2380
2280
2210
2140
2020
4860
4470
4270
4190
4080
3890
3790
3670
3570
3510
3410
3250
3110
3050
2880
2660
2470
2380
2280
2210
2140
2020
JP Current:1Q-
2012
Prior:1Q-2011
1Q-2010
1Q-2009
1Q-2008
1Q-2007
1Q-2006
1Q-2005
1Q-2004
1Q-2003
1Q-2002
1Q-2001
1Q-2000
1Q-1999
1Q-1998
1Q-1997
1Q-1996
1Q-1995
1Q-1994
1550
1580
1480
1500
1750
1760
1450
1410
1330
1220
1210
1230
1260
1370
1350
1255
1250
1250
1390
1130
1130
1140
1150
1150
1160
1170
1180
1200
1250
1300
1330
1350
1370
1350
1340
1350
1350
1320
2060
2030
1950
1900
1930
1960
1460
1440
1380
1370
1350
1360
1360
1360
1360
1350
1360
1390
1460
1940
1910
1830
1780
1820
1840
1470
1460
1400
1380
1370
1370
1370
1350
1350
1350
1360
1390
1460
33-4 33 Base Indices (G13)
EU Current:1Q-
2012
Prior:1Q-2011
1Q-2010
1Q-2009
1Q-2008
1Q-2007
1Q-2006
1Q-2005
1Q-2004
1Q-2003
1Q-2002
1Q-2001
2320
2280
2220
2180
2170
2030
1780
1700
1640
1580
1560
1520
1840
1920
1860
1840
1790
1720
1700
1670
1650
1630
1600
1550
1850
1880
1810
1790
1730
1660
1590
1560
1550
1530
1510
1450
1720
1790
1740
1720
1670
1600
1580
1560
1540
1520
1490
1450
ME Current:1Q-
2012
Prior:1Q-2011
1Q-2010
1Q-2009
1Q-2008
1Q-2007
2390
2380
2230
2160
2200
2060
2280
2030
1950
1930
1970
1890
1620
1620
1590
1580
1610
1540
1870
1660
1590
1580
1610
1540
Country
Base
Base Data
for System
Costs
Labor Labor
34 Code Accounts (G10) 34-1
Introduction to Code Accounts
Indirect Codes and Descriptions
Direct Codes and Descriptions
Equipment and Setting
Piping
Civil
Steel
Instrumentation
Electrical
Insulation
Paint
34 Code Accounts (G10)
34-2 34 Code Accounts (G10)
Introduction to Code Accounts
Aspen Icarus systems contain a 3-digit standard code of account set to which
costs and manhours are allocated in developing the project estimate. This is
referred to as the ICARUS code of accounts. The code of accounts form can
be used either to modify the ICARUS standard code of accounts or to create a
completely new set of accounts. The resulting user-developed code of
accounts is termed as the user code of accounts. In addition, the user may
develop two sets of code of accounts, namely, a user-reporting code of
accounts, and an user-internal code of accounts, where the reporting code of
accounts represent the level of granularity that user wishes to see in the
output reports, and the internal code of accounts refers to the allocation and
grouping of the standard ICARUS system code of accounts to a level of detail
intended for the user, for the purposes of indexing and contract scope
definition. If new codes of account are defined, account codes must be
supplied and all references to the account codes in subsequent codes must
reference the new codes of account (exceptions to this rule will be discussed
subsequently). If modifications are made to existing code of accounts, the
account code must not be specified, since the account code is implicitly defined
based on the account number that is used.
The Code of Accounts input data is composed of three types. The code of
account Definitions are used to define either a name for a new account
number or a new name for a standard ICARUS account. The code of account
allocations are used to reassign costs and manhours from one or more
standard system accounts into either another ICARUS account or a newly
defined user code of account. Costs and manhours may be assigned directly
into a current account or into a new account with a supplemental cost item.
The code of account reporting is used to further group a very detailed user-
developed code of accounts into a smaller set of accounts that can be
displayed in output reports. The users internal code of accounts must be used
on indexing and contract scope input forms, if the user code of accounts is
developed. However, for the ease of exchange of components between
multiple projects, the user may switch between the user-internal code of
accounts and ICARUS system code of account numbers by using the
appropriate switch between user/ICARUS code of accounts. However, the
users reporting code of accounts is never used in the input forms, and
displayed only the output reports. In the absence of reporting code of
accounts, output reports use the user (internal) code of accounts.
Modifying the System Code of Accounts
The ICARUS standard code of accounts may be transformed into a new code of
accounts in one or more of the following ways:
An ICARUS account name can be changed.
A new account can be created by defining it. This must be in the range
1-999 and must not already be defined as a standard account.
Costs and manhours can be reassigned from one account to another.
The account code for the modified code of accounts must not be specified and
is determined by the system (for example, PIPING account code includes all
accounts from 300 to 399).
Creating a Different Code of Accounts
A new code of accounts may be created that is different from the ICARUS
system standards code of accounts. A new code of accounts is the one in which
one or both of the following conditions are met:
Account numbers are created outside the range of the ICARUS system
code of accounts (i.e., outside the range of 1-999, e.g., 1000-99999999).
The account type (piping, civil, etc.) must be specified, thus changing the
account number range to which the account type is applied.
To develop a different code of accounts, every required code of account must
be specified, and the account type must be specified to designate its allocation
in various summary reports. This caveat applies to the indirect codes of
account, where all indirect account types P1 through PB must be specified.
Thus, these accounts, as defined, will constitute the entire code of accounts
(direct and indirect) for the estimate.
While modifying the ICARUS code of accounts, or creating a completely new
user code of accounts, the user may specify the currency symbol of
procurement. This currency symbol refers to direct material procurement cost,
and to a limited set of indirect, and allows the user to develop a multi-currency
procurement strategy. The symbols and conversion rates (in terms of a
multiplier to one of the four country basis currencies in the system) ate stored
in a central CURRENCY.DAT file. When a particular, direct material code of
account is defined as being procured in the selected currency, special
procurement output reports display the currency exposure of the given project
in terms of that selected currency, in addition to the project basis currency.
However, all other reports are always in the project currency.
Transfers from the ICARUS system standard code of accounts to the User-
internal code of accounts can be very simple or complex, depending on the
desire of breakdown. Breakdown can be very complex, by material, subtype,
size (for piping), equipment symbol and equipment type. Thus, a single code
of account can be broken into multiple codes. This transfer is performed using
the code of account allocation, together with exceptions. User-internal code of
accounts are referred to, in the user input, in the indexing and contractor
scope input. As already mentioned, the user may choose either the user-
internal code of account or the ICARUS system code of accounts on the
component forms, using the user/ICARUS switch.
Example
The allocations are one step transfers from one account to a second account.
They should not be interpreted as sequential transfers. For example, if the
following costs were calculated by the system in the designated codes of
account:
COA Cost
315 1000
417 10000
591 100000
The following resulting allocations would be reported, if no further reporting
COAs are specified:
However, allocations have been specified in a different sequence, the same
result will be reported.
Reporting Code of Accounts
Creating complex user code of accounts is important for proper indexing,
contract scope allocation, and procurement strategy. But, it may be necessary
to summarize the results in a simple form for easy understanding of results. In
other cases, the results may be summarized in to ways, one for the use of the
client, and another way for the use of the management. The reporting code of
account layer provides a method of summarizing the user-internal code of
accounts into a simpler set for reporting use. The only place that the reporting
code of accounts is used, is in reporting. The reporting COA form allows the
user to group the user-internal or ICARUS Codes of account to a more
manageable subset, for reporting purposes.
Example
The following resulting allocations would be reported:
From ICARUS
COA
To ICARUS COA Allocate to
ICARUS User
Matl COA
315 blank 4178325
417 blank 5911234
591 blank 4178325
COA Cost
315 0
4178325 1000
5911234 110000
COA Cost
3154 1000
3191 10000
3300 100000
From ICARUS
COA
To ICARUS COA Allocate to
ICARUS User
Matl COA
3100 3300 3
COA Cost
3 111000
There are several useful applications for the Code of Accounts input:
Multiple Codes of account files can created for different clients in the code
of accounts library. Each file can represent the clients COA structure.
Appropriate COA file can be selected at the project level and used.
Costs can be moved from one account group to other. For example, the
system reports electrical trenching in the electrical account, and the user
may wish to report trenching as a civil item. The system maintains fidelity
in account groups, in three distinct categories, indirects, bulks and
equipment. Codes can be transferred inside the three categories, but not
between them. This applies to both, reporting and the user-internal code
of accounts.
A special supplemental item is to be added to the estimate. The user may
wish to create a new account to maintain visibility of the
supplemental cost.
On the contrary, an entirely new set of code of accounts can be created.
This may be useful in clarifying the costs of the project to the
management, in addition to indexing and defining the contractor scope.
Use of reporting codes of account allow the separation of reporting
structure from the user-internal COA structure. More importantly, it
simplifies reporting the estimate results to the client.
Currency selection at the account definition level allows the user to develop
a procurement strategy for the project.
Output Reports
The Code of Accounts Summary reflects the user-specified account numbers
and names. The Master Summary, Contract Summaries and Area Summaries
allocate the estimated costs according to the account type (piping, civil, and so
on). It is incumbent upon the user when defining an entirely different code of
accounts to specify account types that correspond with the chosen account
number groups. An inconsistency would occur, for example, if, within a series
of account numbers for piping (P), one of the accounts were assigned an
instrumentation account type (I). This account would be grouped numerically
with the piping accounts in the Code of Accounts Summary, but it would be
summarized with instrumentation in the other summaries. This inconsistency
could be avoided by allocating this account into a numbered account in the
Instrumentation group. Then the estimated costs and man-hours for this item
would appear both in a numbered instrumentation account and in the
instrumentation summary.
In the Bulk Detail and Bulk Summary Appendices of the system output report
the user-specified account numbers are reported, but the account names are
the system names and not the user-specified names. The system account
name forms an integral part of the detailed item description. It is necessary,
therefore, to retain the system account name in these appendices for clarity
and for Aspen Icarus to provide technical support.
Field Indirects (P1) Engineering Indirects (PA)
01 -09 Titles not assigned
10 LUMP SUM CONST. INDIRECT
11 FRINGE BENEFITS
12 BURDENS
13 CONSUMABLES, SMALL TOOLS
14 MISC. (INSURANCE, ETC)
15 SCAFFOLDING
16 EQUIPMENT RENTAL
17 VENDOR REPRESENTATIVES
18 FIELD SERVICES
19 TEMP. CONST., UTILITIES
20 MOBILIZATION, DEMOBILIZE
21 CATERING, ACCOMODATION
22 TRAVEL
23 OVERTIME PREMIUM
80 LUMP SUM CONST. MGMT
81 HOME OFFICE CONST. SUPP.
82 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
Special Indirects (P2 Contractor Indirects (PB)
24 SPECIAL INDIRECT ITEM 1
26 - 49 Titles not assigned
85 FIELD CONST. SUPERVISION
86 STARTUP, COMISSIONING
Freight (P3)
G & A Overheads (P6)
50 LUMP SUM FREIGHT
51 DOMESTIC FREIGHT
52 OCEAN FREIGHT
53 AIR FREIGHT
54 MODULE FREIGHT
55 OTHER FRIEGHT
56 - 59 Tittles not assigned
90 G AND A OVERHEADS
Taxes (P4)
Contractor Fee (P7)
60 LUMP SUM TAXES, PERMITS
61 PERMITS
62 MATERIALS TAXES
63 CONSTRUCTION TAXES
64 ENGINEERING TAXES
65 OTHER TAXES
91 CONTRACT FEE
Engineering (P5)
Escalation (P8)
70 LUMP SUM ENGINEERING
71 BASIC ENGINEERING
72 DETAIL ENGINEERING
73 MATERIAL PROCUREMENT
74 SUBCONTRACT PROCUREMENT
75 ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT
97 ESCALATION
Royalty, Miscellaneous Charges (P9)
98 ROYALTY, MISC. CHARGES
Contingencies (P0)
99 CONTINGENCY
Field Indirects (P1) Engineering Indirects (PA)
Direct Codes and Descriptions
Equipment and Setting
100 EQUIPMENT AND SETTING
103 SPECIAL PLANT ITEM
104 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT ITEM
105 MISC. ITEM ALLOWANCE
106 OTHER EQUIPMENT ITEMS
107 WAREHOUSE SPARES
109 EQUIPMENT DEMOLITION
200 FLUID SEPARATION EQUIP.
201 DUST COLLECTORS
202 SCRUBBERS
203 BAG HOUSES
204 PRECIPITATORS
205 SEPARATORS
110 PROCESS VESSELS
111 TRAY TOWERS & TRAYS
112 PACKED TOWERS & PACKING
113 VERTICAL VESSELS
114 HORIZONTAL VESSELS
115 VACUUM VESSELS
116 CRYSTALLIZERS
117 EVAPORATORS
210 MATERIALS HANDLING EQUIP
211 CONVEYORS
212 FEEDERS
213 CRANES,HOISTS,ETC
214 ELEVATORS
215 SCALES
216 MAGNETS
217 CAR DUMPERS & SHAKERS
120 STORAGE VESSELS
121 ATMOSPHERIC STORAGE TANK
122 PRESSURIZED STORAGE TANK
123 SILOS
124 BINS AND HOPPERS
125 GAS HOLDERS
126 STOCK CHESTS
220 ELECTRICAL GENERATORS
221 GAS TURBINE GENERATORS
222 DIESEL GENERATORS
223 STEAM TURBINE GENERATORS
224 PORTABLE GENERATORS
130 REACTION,MIXING EQUIP.
131 REACTORS & AUTOCLAVES
132 AGITATED VESSELS
133 BLENDERS
134 MIXERS
240 BOILER PLANT EQUIPMENT
241 BOILERS
242 PACKAGE BOILER
243 ECONOMIZERS
244 PREHEATERS
150 COMPRESSORS & BLOWERS
151 CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSORS
152 RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR
153 TURBO-EXPAND. COMPRESSOR
154 FANS AND BLOWERS
250 PROCESS HEATERS
251 FURNACES,HEATERS
252 WASTE HEAT BOILERS
253 INCINERATORS
254 KILNS
255 STACKS
160 PUMPS
161 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
162 RECIPROCATING PUMPS
163 VACUUM PUMPS
164 ROTARY,GEAR PUMPS
165 VERTICAL PUMPS
166 SUMP & WELL PUMPS
167 SLURRY PUMPS
260 HEAT EXCHANGERS
261 SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS
262 REBOILERS
263 DOUBLE PIPE EXCHANGERS
264 AIR COOLERS
265 COOLING TOWERS
266 MISC. HEAT EXCHANGERS
170 DRIVERS & GEAR REDUCERS
171 ELECTRIC MOTORS
172 STEAM TURBINES
173 GAS TURBINES
174 GAS & DIESEL ENGINES
175 GEAR REDUCERS
270 LININGS
271 REFRACTORY LININGS
272 ACID BRICK LININGS
273 CAST LININGS
274 POND LININGS
275 OTHER LININGS
180 SIZE REDUCTION EQUIP
181 CRUSHERS,BREAKERS
182 MILLS
183 PULVERIZERS
184 CUTTERS,FLAKERS
185 STOCK TREATMENT
280 MISC. PACKAGE UNITS
281 REFRIGERATION UNITS
282 HVAC EQUIPMENT
283 WATER TREATING UNITS
284 INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEMS
285 MODULE SETTING
190 SOLIDS SEPARATION EQUIP.
191 SCREENS AND GRIZZLIES
192 FILTERS
193 CENTRIFUGES
194 DRYERS
195 LIQUID CYCLONES
196 FLOATATION CELLS
197 THICKENERS,CLARIFIERS
290 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
291 EJECTORS
292 PROPRIETARY EQUIPMENT
293 FLARES
Piping
300 PIPING
302 SUBCONTRACT PIPING
303 SPECIAL PLANT PIPING
304 SPECIAL EQUIP. PIPING
305 OTHER EQUIPMENT PIPE
306 PIPING SYSTEM TESTING
307 PREFAB PIPE REWORK
309 PIPING DEMOLITION
350 NON-METAL PIPE/FITTINGS
351 NON-METAL FIELD MATL
352 NON-METAL FIELD SHOP FAB
353 NONMETAL REMOTESHOP MATL
354 NONMETAL REMOTESHOP FAB
355 NON-METAL VALVES
310 CARBON STL PIPE/FITTINGS
311CS FIELD MATL
312CS FIELD SHOP FAB
313CS REMOTE SHOP MATL
314CS REMOTE SHOP FAB
315CS VALVES: FLANGED
316CS VALVES: NON-FLANGED
317CS PIPE ERECTION
357 NON-METAL PIPE ERECTION
320 STAINLESS PIPE/FITTINGS
321SS FIELD MATL
322SS FIELD SHOP FAB
323SS REMOTE SHOP MATL
324SS REMOTE SHOP FAB
325SS VALVES: FLANGED
326SS VALVES: NON-FLANGED
327SS PIPE ERECTION
360 PIPING SPECIALTIES
361 TRAPS & VACUUM BREAKERS
362 TRACING TUBING & FITTING
363 JACKET INTERCONNECTIONS
330 MISC.METAL PIPE/FITTINGS
331 MISC. METAL FIELD MATL
332 MISC.METAL FIELDSHOP FAB
333 MISC.METAL RMT SHOP MATL
334 MISC. METAL RMT SHOP FAB
335 MISC.METAL VALVE:FLANGED
336 MISC.METAL VALVE:NOFLANG
337 MISC.METAL PIPE ERECTION
365 HAND CONTROLS
366 PIPE HANGERS, SHOES ETC.
340 LINED PIPE/FITTINGS
341 LINED PIPE FIELD MATL
342 LINED FIELD SHOP FAB
343 LINED REMOTE SHOP MATL
344 LINED REMOTE SHOP FAB
345 LINED VALVES
368 MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS
369 FLOW DIVERSION PANELS
347 LINED PIPE ERECTION 370 FIREWATER, BURIED PIPE
371 FIREWATER PIPING
372 HYDRANTS,HOSE,NOZZLE,ETC
373 DELUGE SYSTEMS
374 SHOWER, EYEWASH, ETC.
376 BURIED PIPE INSTALLATION
377 PIPE TRENCH & BACKFILL
378 COAT AND WRAP PIPE
380 DUCTWORK/LAUNDERS
381 PROCESS DUCTWORK
382 HVAC DUCTWORK
383 LAUNDERS
390 PIPELINES
391 PIPELINE-MAINLINE PIPE
392 PIPELINE-VALVES,FITTINGS
393 PIPELINE-FAB. & INSTALL
394 PIPELINE-SCRAPER L/R
395 PIPELINE-DBL JOINT/COAT
396 PIPELINE-SUPPORTS
397 PIPELINE-RADIOGRAPH TEST
398 PIPELINE-MARINE WORK
399 PIPELINE-MISC. PIPING
Civil
400 CIVIL
402 SUBCONTRACT CIVIL
403 SPECIAL PLANT CIVIL
404 SPECIAL EQUIP. CIVIL
405 SCAFFOLDING
409 CIVIL DEMOLITION
450 REBAR, FORMWORK, ETC.
451 REBAR
452 FOUNDATION ACCESSORIES
453 INSTALL REBAR
454 FORMWORK MATERIALS
455 FIELD FABRICATE FORMWORK
456 INSTALL FORMWORK
457 STRIP & CLEAN FORMWORK
458 BACKFILL
410 EARTHWORK
411 CLEAR SITE
412 BULK EXCAVATION
413 ROCK EXCAVATION
414 BLASTING
415 HAULING & DUMPING
416 SITE FILL & COMPACT
417 DEWATERING
418 STABILIZATION
419 CONTAINMENT,EMBANKMENTS
460 PRECAST CONCRETE
461 PRECAST PIPERACK
462 PRECAST BEAMS & COLUMNS
420 ROADS,RAILROADS
421 GRADE,COMPACT BASE
422 ROADS
423 PAVING
424 RAILROADS
425 BOARD ROADS
470 BUILDINGS
471 SUBCONTRACT BUILDINGS
472 BLDG STRUCTURE/FINISHES
473 BUILDING FURNISHINGS
474 BUILDING ELECTRICAL
475 BUILDING PLUMBING
476 BUILDING HVAC
430 OTHER SITEWORK
431 TEST BORINGS
432 DEMOLITION & RELOCATION
433 LANDSCAPING
434 FENCING
435 RETAINING WALLS
436 PILING
437 SHORING
438 DRILLED WELLS
439 DRAINAGE
480 MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL
481 LININGS AND COATINGS
485 OFFSHORE CIVIL
440 CONCRETE
441 AGGREGATE
442 CEMENT
443 SAND
444 POURED CONCRETE
445 GROUT
446 CONCRETE POUR AND FINISH
447 EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
448 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
449 OTHER EQUIP. CONCRETE
490 PIPELINE CIVIL WORK
491 PIPELINE-ROW & SITE WORK
492 PIPELINE-ROW CROSSINGS
493 PIPELINE-DITCHING
494 PIPELINE-ANCHORS/SUPPORT
499 PIPELINE-MISC. CIVIL
Steel
500 STEEL
502 SUBCONTRACT STEEL
503 SPECIAL PLANT STEEL
504 SPECIAL EQUIP. STEEL
509 STEEL DEMOLITION
540 TOWERS AND TRUSSES
541 STEEL TOWERS
542 STEEL TRUSSES
510 EQUIPMENT STEEL
511 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STEEL
512 LADDERS
513 PLATFORMS
519 OTHER EQUIPMENT STEEL
550 STEEL PLATE ITEMS
551 FABRICATED PLATE
520 STRUCTURAL STEEL
521 STEEL STRUCTURES
522 PIPERACK STEEL
523 PIPE SUPPORTS
580 OFFSHORE STEELWORK
530 OTHER STEEL ITEMS
531 FLOORING & STAIR TREADS
532 HANDRAIL AND TOE PLATE
533 OTHER BLDG/STRUCT STEEL
534 BUILDING SIDING
535 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEM
590 OTHER STEELWORK
591 STEEL UNLOAD & HANDLING
592 THRUST ANCHORS
593 DEFLECTION ANCHORS
Instrumentation
600 INSTRUMENTATION
602 SUBCONTRCT INSTMENTATION
603 SPECIAL PLANT INSTRUMENT
604 SPECIAL EQUIP INSTRUMENT
609 INSTRUMENT DEMOLITION
640 INSTR. SUPPORT & ENCL.
641 TRAYS & SUPPORT
642 CONDUIT & FITTINGS
644 INSTRUMENT HOUSING
645 PNEU. JUNCTION BOXES
646 ELEC. JUNCTION BOXES
647 T/C JUNCTION BOXES
648 MULTIPLEX JUNCTION BOXES
649 OTHER SUPPORTS
610 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION
611 FLOW INSTRUMENTS
612 LEVEL INSTRUMENTS
613 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS
614 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS
615 ANALYZERS
616 MOTION INSTRUMENTS
617 BURNER INSTRUMENTS
618 ORIFICE PLATES
619 OTHER EQUIPMENT INSTR.
650 INSTRUMENT ELECTRICAL
651 WIRE/CABLE ETC.
653 SOLENOIDS
659 OTHER INSTR. ELECTRICAL
620 PANELS, PANEL DEVICES
621 CONTROL CENTER PANELS
622 CONTROL CTR CONNECTIONS
623 BACK OF PANEL INSTRUMENT
624 EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN BOP
625 ALARM SWITCH BOP
627 EQUIP. CONTROL PANEL
628 EQUIP. PANEL DEVICES
629 OTHER PANEL DEVICES
660 COMPUTER CONTROL
661 CONTROLLER INTERFACES
662 INDIC./RECORD INTERFACES
663 T/C INTERFACES
664 OPERATOR STATIONS
665 CABLE/DATA HIGHWAYS
666 BARRIERS & TRANSDUCERS
667 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
669 OTHER COMPUTER CONTROL
630 INSTRUMENT RUNS
631 AIR SUPPLY PIPING
632 INSTRUMENT PIPING
633 TERMINATIONS
634 PNEUMATIC TUBING
635 PNEUMATIC MULTI-TUBE
636 INSTRUMENT SIGNAL WIRING
637 MULTI-COND. INSTR. WIRE
638 T/C EXTENSION WIRING
639 T/C MULTI-COND. WIRING
670 MISC. INSTRUMENTATION
671 Q.C. EQUIPMENT
680 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS
681 CONTROL VALVES
682 SAFETY VALVES
683 RUPTURE DISCS
684 MOTOR OPERATED VALVES
685 REGULATING VALVES
686 DIVERTER VALVES
690 OTHER INSTRUMENT WORK
691 INSTRUMENT TESTING
Electrical
700 ELECTRICAL
702 SUBCONTRACT ELECTRICAL
703 SPECIAL PLANT ELECTRICAL
704 SPECIAL EQUIP ELECTRICAL
709 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITON
747 SUBSTATION STEEL
748 SWITCHRACK
749 RECTIFIERS
750 BLDG/AREA ELECTRICAL
751 BLDG/AREA LIGHTING
752 LIGHTING FIXTURES
753 RECEPTACLES/SWITCHES
754 HVAC ELECTRICAL
755 MISC. SMALL TRANSFORMERS
756 PANELBOARDS
757 WIRE/CABLE - LIGHTING
710 WIRE, CABLE, ETC.
711 WIRE/CABLE - LOW VOLTAGE
712 WIRE/CABLE -HIGH VOLTAGE
713 PILOT LIGHT
714 PUSH BUTTON STATION
715 TERMINATORS/CONNECTORS
716 JUNCTION BOXES
717 WIRE/CABLE - MV
718 WIRE/CABLE - CV
719 OTHER EQUIPMENT WIRING
758 EQUIPMENT CABINETS
760 BURIED CABLE
761 ELECTRICAL TRENCHING
762 UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCT
720 CONDUIT, TRAYS, ETC.
721 CONDUIT
722 CONDUIT FITTINGS
723 CABLE TRAYS
770 GROUNDING, CATH. PROTEC.
771 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
772 CATHODIC PROTECTION
730 OTHER ELEC. EQUIPMENT
731 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
732 CAPACITORS
733 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER - LV
734 TRANSFORMERS - MV
735 TRANSFORMERS - LV
736 SWITCHGEAR - MV
737 SWITCHGEAR - LV
738 BUS DUCT - LV
739 DISCONNECT SWITCH
780 COMMUNICATION,ALARMS,ETC
781 TELEPHONE
782 INTERCOM
783 ANNUNCIATORS
785 CLOSED CIRCUIT TV
786 RADIO SYSTEMS
787 AREA NETWORK SYSTEMS
788 METEOROLOGICAL SYSTEMS
740 MAJOR ELEC. EQUIPMENT
741 TRANSFORMERS - HV
742 SWITCHGEAR - HV
743 MCC EQUIPPED SPACE
744 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER - MV
745 BUS DUCT - MV/HV
746 TRANSMISSION LINES
790 OTHER ELECTRICAL
791 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT TSTNG
792 ELECTRICAL TRACING
794 SOLAR PANELS
795 BATTERY PACKS
796 UPS
797 EMERGENCY GENERATOR
Insulation
Paint
800 INSULATION, FIREPROOFING
802 SUBCONTRACT INSULATION
803 SPECIAL PLANT INSULATION
804 SPECIAL EQUIP INSULATION
809 INSULATION DEMOLITION
810 INSULATION
811 PIPE INSULATION
812 EQUIP INSULATION
813 MODULE INSULATION SHOP
814 MODULE INSULATION FIELD
815 PERSONNEL PROTECTION
819 OTHER EQUIP. INSULATION
820 FIREPROOFING
821 STRUCTURAL FIREPROOFING
822 SKIRT/LEG FIREPROOFING
823 CABLE TRAY FIREPROOFING
830 SPECIAL COATINGS
831 ACID TILE PAVING
900 PAINT
902 SUBCONTRACT PAINT
903 SPECIAL PLANT PAINT
904 SPECIAL EQUIP PAINT
909 PAINT DEMOLITION
910 PAINTING
911 PAINT - EQUIPMENT
912 PAINT - PIPING
913 PAINT - STRUCTURES
914 PAINT MODULE EQUIPMENT
915 PAINT MODULE PIPING
916 PAINT MODULE STRUCTURES
918 OTHER COATINGS
919 OTHER EQUIPMENT PAINT
920 SURFACE PREPARATION
921 SURFACE PREP - EQUIPMENT
922 SURFACE PREP - PIPING
923 SURFACE PREP - STEEL
35 Database Relations (G10) 35-1
Sequence Numbers of Attributes in Relations
Relationship of Database Relations
DETAILS Relation
DESIGN Relation
REMARKS Relation
PROJDATA Relation
NEWCOA Relation
EQRENT Relation
CRWSCH Relation
CSTCTRL Relation
REPGRP Relation
CNTRCT Relation
COMPONENT Relation
INDIRECTS Relation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Indirect Codes and Descriptions
QSUM Relations
STORED REPORTS Relation
STORED QUERIES Relation
K (CUSSPC)-TABLE Relation
R-Table Relation
S-Table Relation
T-Table Relation
U-Table Relation
V-Table Relation
W-Table Relation
X-Table Relation
Y-Table Relation
Z-Table Relation
Attribute Descriptions
35 Database Relations (G10)
35-2 35 Database Relations (G10)
Sequence Numbers of
Attributes in Relations
Attribute
Name Type Width
ACCOUNT INT 11 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ACTCOA INT - - - - - - 5 - 5 - - - - - -
ACTSEQ INT - - - - - - 3 - 3 - - - - - -
ACTSRT INT - - - - - - 4 - 4 - - - - - -
ACTTYP INT - - - - - - 2 - 2 - - - - - -
AMOUNT REAL - - - 5 - - - - - - - - - - -
APPTYPE INT - - - - - - - - - - - - 5 - -
AREA INT 12 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
AREAWBS TEXT 2 - - - - - - - - - - 5 - - - -
ATYPE INT - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - -
BTSEQ INT - 16 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CATLNO TEXT 20 - - - - - - - - - 6 - - - - -
CCOA INT - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - -
COADES TEXT 24 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CEAMT REAL - - - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -
CEDESC TEXT 60 - - - - - 5 - - - - - - - - -
CEFLAG TEXT 2 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
CENUM INT - - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - -
CESEQ INT 31 - - - - - 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1
CLASS INT 20 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CNTRBY INT - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CNTRNM TEXT 24 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
CNTRNO INT - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
CNTWKF INT - - - - - 3 - - - - - - - - -
COA INT 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 -
CCOAACT TEXT 2 - - - - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CCOADES TEXT 24 - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - -
COAIND INT - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2
COAMOD INT 14 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D
E
T
A
I
L
S

(
A
)
D
E
S
I
G
N

(
B
)
R
E
M
A
R
K
S

(
C
)
P
R
O
J
D
A
T
A

(
D
)
N
E
W
C
O
A

(
E
)
C
E
R
A
T
E

(
F
)
C
R
W
S
C
H

(
G
)
E
Q
R
E
N
T

(
H
)
C
S
T
C
T
R
L

(
J
)
C
U
S
S
P
C

(
K
)
R
E
P
G
R
P

(
L
)
C
N
T
R
C
T

(
M
)
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T

(
N
)
I
N
D
I
R
E
C
T
S

(
P
)
R
T
A
B
L
E

(
R
)
COMCOD TEXT 36 37 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
COMPWBS TEXT 3 35 - - - - - - - - - - 7 - - -
CONTRACT INT 13 - - - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
DAYPWK INT - - - - - - 7 - - - - - - - -
DESCR TEXT 76 - - 4 - - - - - - - - - - - -
DIAM REAL 24 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
DUPITEMS INT - - - - - - - - - - - - 4 - -
DUPQTY INT 33 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EXTRA1 INT 21 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EXTRA2 REAL 22 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EXTRA3 TEXT 4 23 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
HOURRRAT FLOAT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4
HRSPDA REAL - - - - - - 9 - - - - - - - -
ICACOA INT 32 - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 -
ICUNIT INT 36 11 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
INDDES TEXT 32 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9 -
INDAMOUNT INT - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5 -
INDHOURS INT - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4 -
ITEM TEXT 24 - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
ITEMDES TEXT 28 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ITEMCOD INT - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - -
INTREF INT 34 - - - - - - - - - - - 6 - -
IUMVAL REAL - 12 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LCODE INT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LDESC TEXT 24 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LCOST REAL 9 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LCOSTRAT FLOAT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5
LHOURS REAL 8 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LINELOOP INT 25 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LOCID TEXT 8 16 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Attribute
Name Type Width
D
E
T
A
I
L
S

(
A
)
D
E
S
I
G
N

(
B
)
R
E
M
A
R
K
S

(
C
)
P
R
O
J
D
A
T
A

(
D
)
N
E
W
C
O
A

(
E
)
C
E
R
A
T
E

(
F
)
C
R
W
S
C
H

(
G
)
E
Q
R
E
N
T

(
H
)
C
S
T
C
T
R
L

(
J
)
C
U
S
S
P
C

(
K
)
R
E
P
G
R
P

(
L
)
C
N
T
R
C
T

(
M
)
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T

(
N
)
I
N
D
I
R
E
C
T
S

(
P
)
R
T
A
B
L
E

(
R
)

Sequence Numbers of Attributes in Relations - continued
Attribute
Name Type Width
MATL TEXT 5 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MCODE INT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MCOST REAL 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MCOSTRAT FLOAT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3
MDESC TEXT - - - - - - - - - - - - -
NOITEM INT - - - - - - 10 2 6 - - - - - -
NPCT01 INT - - - - - - 11 3 7 - - - - - -
NPCT02 INT - - - - - - 12 4 - - - - - - -
NPCT03 INT - - - - - - 13 5 - - - - - - -
NPCT04 INT - - - - - - 14 6 - - - - - - -
NPCT05 INT - - - - - - 15 7 - - - - - - -
NPCT06 INT - - - - - - 16 8 - - - - - - -
NPCT07 INT - - - - - - 17 9 - - - - - - -
NPCT08 INT - - - - - - 18 10 - - - - - - -
NPCT09 INT - - - - - - 19 11 - - - - - - -
NPCT010 INT - - - - - - 20 12 - - - - - - -
NPCT011 INT - - - - - - 21 13 - - - - - - -
NPCT012 INT - - - - - - 22 14 - - - - - - -
NPCT013 INT - - - - - - - 15 - - - - - - -
NPCT014 INT - - - - - - - 16 - - - - - - -
NPCT015 INT - - - - - - - 17 - - - - - - -
ORIGIN TEXT 6 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
PARAM TEXT 32 - 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PCLASS TEXT 4 - - - - - - - - - 4 - - - - -
PCTOF INT - - - 4 - - - - - - - - - 8 -
PERCENT REAL - - - 3 - - - - - - - - - 7 -
PIPSPC TEXT 8 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - - - -
PIPTYP INT 15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PRCURC TEXT 38 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PROPNAM TEXT 36 - 13 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PROPNUM INT - 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D
E
T
A
I
L
S

(
A
)
D
E
S
I
G
N

(
B
)
R
E
M
A
R
K
S

(
C
)
P
R
O
J
D
A
T
A

(
D
)
N
E
W
C
O
A

(
E
)
C
E
R
A
T
E

(
F
)
C
R
W
S
C
H

(
G
)
E
Q
R
E
N
T

(
H
)
C
S
T
C
T
R
L

(
J
)
C
U
S
S
P
C

(
K
)
R
E
P
G
R
P

(
L
)
C
N
T
R
C
T

(
M
)
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T

(
N
)
I
N
D
I
R
E
C
T
S

(
P
)
R
T
A
B
L
E

(
R
)
QUANT REAL 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
REFID INT 28 14 5 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
REPGRP INT - - - - - - - - - - 2 - - - -
RESULT REAL - - - 6 - - - - - - - - - - -
RPGSEQ INT - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - - -
SCHAREA INT - - - - - - 6 - - - - - - - -
SCHED TEXT 4 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - - - -
SHIFTS INT - - - - - - 8 - - - - - - - -
SOURCE TEXT 2 17 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SUBAREA INT 30 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SUBTYPE INT 29 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SUMCODE INT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
TITLE TEXT 32 - - - - - - - - - - 4 - - - -
TYPSCT INT - - - - - - - - - 5 - - - - -
UNIT TEXT 8 - 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
UNITIN TEXT 8 - 9 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
UNITS TEXT 8 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
USERDES TEXT 25 26 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
USERTAG TEXT 12 27 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
VALUER REAL - 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
VALUET TEXT 12 - 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
VALUEU TEXT 12 - 8 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
WGT REAL 18 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
WUNIT TEXT 4 19 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Attribute
Name Type Width
D
E
T
A
I
L
S

(
A
)
D
E
S
I
G
N

(
B
)
R
E
M
A
R
K
S

(
C
)
P
R
O
J
D
A
T
A

(
D
)
N
E
W
C
O
A

(
E
)
C
E
R
A
T
E

(
F
)
C
R
W
S
C
H

(
G
)
E
Q
R
E
N
T

(
H
)
C
S
T
C
T
R
L

(
J
)
C
U
S
S
P
C

(
K
)
R
E
P
G
R
P

(
L
)
C
N
T
R
C
T

(
M
)
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T

(
N
)
I
N
D
I
R
E
C
T
S

(
P
)
R
T
A
B
L
E

(
R
)
Relationship of Database
Relations
DETAILS Relation
No. Column Name Type of Data Description of Data Stored under
each Column
1 COA integer Code of Account (COA)
2 ORIGIN text 6 3 characters each of Item Type + Item
Ref No. (HE 101)
3 COADES text 24 Title of cost element which is assigned
to account code
4 ITEMDES text 28 Detailed description of cost element,
material or labor
5 QUANT real Quantity
6 UNITS text 8 Unit of measure associated with
quantity
7 MCOST real Material cost for total quantity
8 LHOURS real Man-hours of field labor for total
quantity
9 LCOST real Cost of field labor for total quantity
10 MATL text 5 Material symbol (five character string)
11 ACCOUNT integer Major account for this item.
12 AREA integer Area ID/report group, assigned an
integer value of unity
13 CONTRACT integer Contract ID
14 COAMOD integer Code of account (COA) modifier
15 PIPTYP integer Class of material for piping
16 LOCID text 8 Sub-description related to ORIGIN (LINE
03, LOOP 02)
17 SOURCE text 2 Symbol used to characterize direct,
subcontract or remote shop costs
18 WGT real Weight
19 WUNIT text 4 Unit of measure associated with weight
20 CLASS integer Class
21 EXTRA1 integer Your use, for integer values, filled with 0
22 EXTRA2 real Your use, for decimal values, filled with
0.00
23 EXTRA3 text 4 Your use, for text, filled with blanks
24 DIAM real Pipe diameter, decimal (e.g., 2.0)
25 LINELOOP integer For piping - the line number (01-40)
For instrumentation - the loop number
(01-50)
26 USERDES text 25 For instrumentation - the loop number
(01-50)
For components - Item description
For Matl/Man-hour Additions - Item
description
For Pipe Bulk - Item Details - Item
description
For Instrument Bulk Items - Item
description
27 USERTAG text 12 User Tag Number or Pipe Specs if
custom pipe specs are used
28 REFID integer The 4-digit Item reference number for
the component
29 SUBTYPE integer For Equipment - cost basis
For Piping - type of valve or fitting
For Civil - type of foundation
For Instrumentation - type of loop main
component
For Insulation - type of insulation or
fireproofing
30 SUBAREA integer Subsidiary area number, within AREA
31 CESEQ integer Sequence number for records in Details
relation
32 ICACOA integer Icarus code of account for item
33 DUPQTY integer Duplicate quantity flag
34 INTREF integer Internal reference identification
35 COMPWBS text 3 Component Work Breakdown Structure
identifier
36 ICUNIT integer Internal Unit of Measure unit
37 COMCOD text 36 Commodity code for materials (Future
use)
38 PRCURC text 33 Procurement Currency
each Column
DESIGN Relation
REMARKS Relation
each Column
1 ITMCOD integer Item code.
2 AREA integer Area ID, assigned integer value of unity.
3 ORIGIN text 6 3-characters: Item Type + Item
Reference No. (HE 101).
4 PARAM text 25 Description of design element.
5 VALUET text 12 Value of design parameter, as text.
6 VALUER real Value of design parameter, decimal
value.
7 UNIT text 8 Unit of measure associated with numeric
design value
8 VALUEU text 12 Value of design parameters specified by
user as text. (For Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator only.)
9 UNITIN text 8 Unit of measure associated with VALUEU
10 PROPNUM integer Reserved for future use
11 ICUNIT integer Internal Unit of Measure identifier
12 IUMVAL real System value in internal units of
measure
13 PROPNAM text 36 System property name
14 REFID integer Integer value of 3-digit component
number
15 INDLVL integer Indicates indent level for reports
16 BTSEQ integer Sequence number for DESIGN table
each Column
1 ITMCOD integer Item code. (Two digits.)
2 AREA integer Area reference number defined by user.
(Two digits, default is 01.)
3 ORIGIN text 6 Responsible item for the data in the
record (e.g., "HE 101").
4 DESCR text 76 Description of ITEM as specified by user
(for example, PROPANE STORAGE
TANK").
5 REFID integer Integer value of 3-digit component
number
PROJDATA Relation
NEWCOA Relation
EQRENT Relation
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only
each Column
1 COA integer System code of account or user's
account code as revised (3 digits).
2 ITEM text 24 System-generated or user-defined
description for this item (e.g.,
"CONSUMABLES/SMALL TOOLS").
3 PERCENT real System-generated or user-defined
description for this item (e.g.,
"CONSUMABLES/SMALL TOOLS").
4 PCTOF integer System-calculated code representing
the portion of the project estimate to be
precentaged (1 digit)
5 AMOUNT real Lump sum value specified by user.
RESULT real The value calculated when PERCENT is
applied to PCTOF, where appropriate.
each Column
1 CCOA integer User-changed code of account
2 CCOADES text 24 User-changed code of account
description (e.g.,SPECIAL COMPANY
ITEMS").
3 CCOAACT text 2 COA category (EQ, P, C, ST, I, E, IN, PT)
each Column
1 CESEQ integer Key - relates to DETAILS relation
2 NOITEM integer Number of items in list
3 NPCT1 integer List item 1
CRWSCH Relation
CSTCTRL Relation
each Column
2 ACTTYP integer Activity level (area, project, proc.)
3 ACTSEQ integer Activity ID at component level
4 ACTSRT integer Activity ID at area level
5 ACTCOA integer Scheduling code of account
6 SCHAREA integer Display flag
7 DAYPWK integer Working days per week
8 SHIFTS integer Number of shifts per day
9 HRSPDA real Working hours per day
14 NPCT04 integer List item4
each Column
REPGRP Relation
CNTRCT Relation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only
COMPONENT Relation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only
each Column
2 ACTTYP integer Activity level (area, project, proc.)
3 ACTSEQ integer Activity ID at component level
4 ACTSRT integer Activity ID at area level
5 ACTCOA integer Scheduling code of accounts
each Column
1 ATYPE integer Report group designation (1 = report
group, 2 = sub-group)
2 REPGRP integer Report group number
3 RPGSEQ integer Report group sequence (sub-group)
4 TITLE text 32 Report group title
5 AREAWBS text 2 Area Work Breakdown Structure
identifier
6 SCHAREA integer Scheduling Area for this report group
each Column
1 CNTRNO integer Contractor number
2 CNTRBY integer Contracted by (parent contractor)
3 CNTRNM text 24 Contractor name
each Column
1 REFID integer The integer value of the 4-digit internal
reference number
2 USERDES text 25 Item description
3 USERTAG text 12 User Tag Number
INDIRECTS Relation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only
4 DUPITEMS integer Number of duplicate items
5 APPTYPE integer Component type
7 COMPWBS text 3 Component Work Breakdown Structure
identifier
8 STRUCTAG text 12 User Tag of Structure where component
is mounted
each Column
1 COA integer Code of Account (COA) (See list on
following page).
2 COADES text 24 Title of cost element which is assigned
to account code (See list on following
page).
3 CONTRACT integer Contract ID
4 INDHOURS integer Indirect hours for this account
5 INDAMOUNT integer Indirect cost for this account
6 ICACOA integer Icarus code of account for item
7 PERCENT real Percent value entered by user or
calculated by system
8 PCTOF integer System-calculated code representing
the portion of the project estimate to be
percentaged (1 digit)
9 INDDES text 32 User indirect description or SYSTEM
GENERATED
each Column
K (CUSSPC)-TABLE Relation
R-TABLE Relation
each Column
2 PIPSPC text 8 Custom piping spec
3 SCHED text 4 Pipe schedule
4 PCLASS text 4 Flange class
5 TYPSCT text 4 Type of data (1 = class, 2 = schedule,
3= thickness
6 CATLNO text 20 Item designation
7 CONTYP text 2 Type of Fitting Connection (one of the
following: (SW SC SB WW WF VC PF VS)
8 PIPTYP text 1 Pipe Type (S or W or )
9 XRAYS real Weld X-Rays
10 PDEGF real Pipe Temperature in Deg Fahrenheit
11 PPSIG real Pipe Pressure in psi
12 TRACEM text4 Tracing Type
13 NPRIMR text4 Number of Primary Paint Coats
14 NFINAL text4 Number of Final Paint Coats
15 INSMTL text5 Insulation Material
16 INSTHK text5 Insulation Thickness
each Column
1 CESEQ integer Key- relates (links) to the DETAILS
relation (A table or AprojID)
2 COAIND integer Title of cost element which is assigned
to account code (See list on following
page)
3 MCOSTRAT float Ratio of MCOST output to MCOST
system
4 HOURRRAT float Ratio of HOURS output to HOURS
system
5 LCOSTRAT float Ratio of LCOST output to LCOST system
QSUM Relations
each Column
1 ACCOUNT integer Major account for this item. A.ACCOUNT
2 CODEGROUP integer Sub-Group of Icarus cod of account for
item. Evaluated from
Xref_ICACOA.ICACOA_Group
3 ICACOA integer Icarus code of account for item.
Evaluated from P.ICACOA and A.ICACOA
4 ICACOADES text 25
Icarus Title of cost element which is
assigned to account code.
Evaluated from
Xref_ICACOA.ICACOA_Det_Desc_USA1
5 FULLDES text 50
Major account title for this item. (10)
Indirects.
Evaluated from Xref_Account.[Full
Description]
6 COA integer Code of Account (COA). P.COA, A.COA
7 COADES text 25
Title of cost element which is assigned
to account code.
Evaluated from
Xref_ICACOA.ICACOA_Det_Desc_USA1,
E.CCOADES,
8 QSUMCOA integer Icarus sub-account for this item.
Evaluated from
Xref_ICACOAInd.ICACOA_Group,
Xref_QSUMCOA_Criteria.QSUMCOA
9 QSUMCOADES text 255 Title of sub-account which assigned to
sub-account code. Evaluated from
Xref_QSumCOA.QSUMCOADES
10 ITEMDES text 30
Detailed description of cost element,
material or labor.
Evaluated from A.ITEMDES
11 COMPONENT text 40
Item Description.
Evaluated from A.ORIGIN, A.SUBAREA
12 QUANT real
Quantity.
Evaluated from A.QUANT
13 UNITS text 10 Unit of measure associated with
quantity. Evaluated from A.UNITS
14 ICUNIT integer
Internal Unit of Measure unit.
Evaluated from A.ICUNIT
15 KEYQUANT real Key Quantity Characteristic quantity
for group of items
16 KEYUNITS text 255 Key Quantity Characteristic quantity
for group of items
17 HOURS real Unit of measure associated with key
quantity
18 LCOST real Man-hours of field labor or total
quantity. Evaluated from Sum of
P.INDHOURS
19 MCOST real
Cost of field labor for total quanity.
Evaluated from A.LCOST
20 TOTCOST real
Material cost for total quantity.
Evaluated from A.MCOST
21 CLASS integer
Class.
Evaluated from A.CLASS
22 WGT real
Weight.
Evaluated from A.WGT
23 WUNIT text 255 Unit of measure associated with weight.
Evaluated from A.WUNIT
24 DIAM integer
Pipe diameter, decimal (e.g., 2.0).
Evaluated from A.DIAM
25 USERDES text 30
(01-50)
description
description
Description
Evaluated from A.USERDES
26 MATL text 10 Material Symbol (five character string).
Evaluated from A.MATL
27 PIPTYP integer Class of material for piping. A.PIPTYP
28 LOCID text 10
Sub-description related to ORIGIN (LINE
03, LOOP 02).
Evaluated from A.LOCID
29 LINELOOP integer
For piping the line number (01-40)
For instrumentation the looop number
(01-50).
Evaluated from A.LINELOOP
30 COAMOD integer Code of account (COA) modifier.
Evaluated from A.COAMOD
31 LOCATION text 255
Location Description Above Ground/
Under Ground.
Evaluated from
Xref_QSUMCOA_Criteria.LOCATION
each Column

32 SUBTYPE integer
For Equipment - cost basis
For Piping - type of valve or fitting
For Civil - type of foundation
For Instrumentation - type of loop main
component
For Insulation - type of insulation or
Fireproofing
Evaluated from A.SUBTYPE
33 SOURCE text 5
Symbol used to characterize direct, sub-
contract or remote shop costs.
Evaluated from A.SOURCE
34 REFID integer
The 4-digit Item reference number for
the component.
Evaluated from A.REFID
35 ORIGIN text 10
3 characters each of Item Type + Tem
Ref No. (HE 101).
Evaluated from A.ORIGIN
36 AREA integer
Area ID/report group, assigned an inte-
ger value of unity.
Evaluated from A.AREA
37 SUBAREA integer Subsidiary area number, within AREA.
Evaluated from A.SUBAREA
38 COMPWBS text 5
Component Work Breakdown Structure
Identifier.
Evaluated from A.COMPWBS
39 CONTRACT integer
Contract ID.
Evaluated from Table P, A.CONTRACT
40 CONTRACTOR text 30
Contractor Name.
Evaluated from M.CNTRNM
41 DUPQTY integer
Duplicate quantity flag.
Evaluated from A.DUPQTY
42 CESEQ integer
Sequence number for records in Details
Relation.
Evaluated from A.CESEQ
43 INTREF integer
Internal reference identification.
Evaluated from A.INTREF
each Column
STORED REPORTS Relation
each Column
1 ID integer Unique ID for Query Constant cross
releases
2 Name Text 100 Unique Text Name
3 TreeView1 text 255 Composite Tree (See Name - Lev below)
4 Prompt text 255 Text Description for Display
5 KbaseFlag text 50
List of Products for the Report
3 Capital Cost Report
E Process Economic Analyzer
M In-Plant Cost Estimator
6 UserGroupNo text 50
User Group Number
0: All Reports / All Disciplines
1: Process
2: Equipment / Insul / Paint
3: Piping / Insul / Paint
4: Civil / Structural / Arch / Insul / Paint
5: Management / Project Level
6: Electrical / Instrumentation / Insul /
Paint
7: Quantity Info Only
8: Unit Cost Info Only
7 ImportType text 50 Type of the Import. Use Full if you
creating a custom report inside reporter.
8 LicMgrGroupNo text 50 Reserved. Not used
9 BaseRT text 50 Reserved. Not used
10 Type text 50 Type of Report, Excel or Crystal
11 TemplName text 50 Type of Report, Excel or Crystal
12 SheetName text 50 Name of the template
13 SubQueries text 50 Sub queries to be used in the Excel
Worksheet (Excel Only)
14 PostProcedure text 50
MacroSet to be used.
MacroSet_1
MacroSet_2
MacroSet_3
MacroSet_4
15 Executable text 50 Reserved. Not used
16 Name-Lev1 text 100 Report List Tree Text Level 1
21 AutoFilter Yes/No Auto Filter Turn ON/OFF (Excel Only)
22 MultiSheetID text 128
Used for new feature where number of
reports and sheet names are deter-
mined by number of contractors/identifi-
ers in the project.
For example, for report Project
Summary by Contractor, the value in
this column is QSUM.CONTRACTOR
(TableName.Column name)
each Column
STORED QUERIES Relation
each Column
1 ID text 10
Unique ID for Query Constant cross
releases
2 Name text 255 Unique Text Name
3 Generate Yes/No Create MS Access Query from Row
4 TreeView1 text 255 Composite Tree (See Lev below)
5 Prompt text 255 Text Description for Display
(Management and UOD reports only)
6 KbaseFlag text 255
List of Products for the Report
3 Capital Cost Report
E Process Economic Analyzer
M In-Plant Cost Estimator
7 UserGroupNo text 255
User Group Number
0: All Reports / All Disciplines
1: Process
2: Equipment / Insul / Paint
3: Piping / Insul / Paint
4: Civil / Structural / Arch / Insul / Paint
5: Management / Project Level
6: Electrical / Instrumentation / Insul /
Paint
7: Quantity Info Only
8: Unit Cost Info Only
8 ImportType text 50 Type of the Import. Use Full if you are
creating a custom report inside reporter.
9 LicMgrGroupNo text 255 Reserved. Not used
10 BaseRT text 255 Reserved. Not used
11 SQLStr Memo Query stored as text
12 fStr text 255 Format String (Management and UOD
reports only)
13 Lev_1 text 255 Report List Tree Text Level 1
CERATE Relation (F-Table)
S-Table Relation
each Column
1 CEFLAG text 2
Record type (CR = craft, ER = equip-
ment rental)
2 CENUM integer
Item number (CR = 51 - 99, ER = 1 -
450)
3 CNTWKF integer Contract or work force
4 CEAMT real Rate (CR = CUR/HR, ER = CUR/Month)
5 CEDESC text 60 Description of item
6 CEDUR integer
T'otal Hours for Item for Contractor
Total Hours for Craft for Contractor
(HOURS) OR
Total Rental Duration Days for
Equipment Item for Contractor (DAYS)
7 CEAMOUNT integer
Total Indirect Cost for Item for Contrac-
tor Total Labor Cost for Craft for Con-
tractor
OR
Total Equipment Rental Cost for
Equipment Item for Contractor
8 CEALLOC integer Allocated Rental Days for Equipment
Item for Contractor (DAYS) Only for
Equipment Rental
each Column
1 CESEQ integer Sequence number for records in Details
relation
3 LINELOOP integer
For piping the line number (01-40)
For instrumentation the loop number
(01-50)
4 LTYPE c
To differentiate between branch and
main line
5 USERDES text 30
(01-50)
description
description
Description
6 LINETAG text 36
For Piping Bulk User Tag
For Pipe Bulk - Item Details Pipe Line
Tag
7 LNDESEQ integer Item reference number of the connected
equipment.
8 DIRECT text 3 Pipe Bulk - Item Details Pipe Line Flow
Direction
9 LNDESLN integer Pipe Bulk - Item Details Connected
Equipment Line Number
10 STREAM text 30 Pipe Bulk - Item Details - Stream
properties to be used for this line
11 MATL text 5 Material symbol (five character string)
12 DIAM integer Pipe diameter, decimal (e.g., 2.0)
13 LINLEN integer Pipe Length, decimal (e.g. 2.0)
14 PIPSPC text 10 Custom Pipe Spec
each Column
T-Table Relation
U-Table Relation
each Column
1 DUMMYCOL text 2 Dummy only
2 STREAM text 36 Stream Name
3 TEMP integer Temperature
4 PRESS integer Pressure
5 MWGT integer Molecular Weight
6 TOTMFLOW integer Total Mass Flow
7 LIQMFLOW integer Liquid Mass Flow
8 LIQMDEN integer Liquid Mass Density
9 LIQVISC integer Liquid Viscosity
10 LIQSTEN integer Liquid Surface Tension
11 VAPMFLOW integer Vapor Mass Flow
12 VAPMDEN integer Vapor Mass Density
13 VAPVISC integer Vapor Viscosity
14 SOLMFLOW integer Solid Mass Flow
15 SOLMDEN integer Solid Mass Density
each Column
1 ITMCOD integer Item code (Two digits)
2 AREA nteger Area ID, assigned integer value of unity.
3 ORIGIN text 10
3-characters: Item Type + Item Refer-
ence No. (HE 101).
4 PARAM text 35 Description of design element.
5 VALUET text 80 Value of design parameter, as text.
6 VALUER real
Value of design parameter, decimal
value.
7 UNIT text 10
Unit of measure associated with numeric
design value
8 VALUEU text 15
Value of design parameters specified by
user as text. (For Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost Esti-
mator only.)
9 UNITIN text 10 Unit of measure associated with VALUEU
10 PROPNUM integer Reserved for future use. It should be
more than 900000
11 ICUNIT integer Internal Unit of Measure unit.
12 VALUES real Same as VALUER
13 PROPNAM text 40 System property name
14 REFID integer
Integer value of 3-digit component
number
15 INDLVL integer Indicates indent level for reports
each Column
V-Table Relation
W-Table Relation
X-Table Relation
each Column
1 Index integer Sequence Number
2 Field1 text 80 Constains Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer related useful information.
Project Name, Capacity, Plant Location,
Brief Description, Schedule, Investment,
Project Information, Simulator
information etc.
3 Field2 text 80
Contains the data value for field1
4 Field3 text 30 Reserved.
each Column
1 Index integer Sequence Number
2 Item text 60 Item (Sales, Expenses, Operating Costs
etc.)
3 Units text 20
Units
4 Year1-Year20 real Contains cost spread over 20 years
each Column
1 Field1 integer Sequence Number
2 Field2 text 30 Area Name
3 Field3 text 30
Component Name
4 Field4 text 30 Component Type
5 Field5 text 30 Total Direct Cost
Y-Table Relation
each Column
1
SeqNo integer Sequence Number
2
Field2 text 60 ITEM. Contains useful information
about Project, Capital Cost Evaluation
Basis, Time Period, Schedule, Capital
Costs Parameters, Operating Costs
Parameters, General Investment
Parameters, Escalation, Project
Results Summary, Project Capital
Summary, Engineering Summary,
Raw Materials Costs and Product
Sales, Operating Labor and
Maintenance Costs etc.
3
Field3 text 30
Measure of Unit for the Field2
4
Field4 text 255 Value stored for Field2.
5
Field5 text 30
Design, Eng, Procurement Cost for
Project Capital Summary Manhours
for Engineering Summary
6
Field6 text 30 Construction Material (Applicable to
Project to Project Cost Summary
only)
7
Field7 text 30 Construction Manhours (Applicable
to Project to Project Cost Summary
only)
8
Field8 text 30 Construction Manpower Manhours
(Applicable to Project to Project Cost
Summary only)
9
Field9 text 30 Construction Indirects Manhours
(Applicable to Project to Project Cost
Summary only)
10
Field10 text 30 Reserved
11
Field11-Field 21 text 10 Reserved
Z-Table Relation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
each Column
1 REFID integer
The 4-digit Item reference number for
the component
2 COMPTYPE text 10 Character Component Type
3 ORIGIN text 10
3 characters each of Item Type + Item
Ref No. (HE 101)
4 FULLNAME text 60 Object name in the Object database
5 DISPNAME text 74 User specified name in GUI along with
model name
Field Indirects
Engineering
10 LUMP SUM CONST. INDIRECT
11 FRINGE BENEFITS
12 BURDENS
13 CONSUMABLES, SMALL TOOLS
14 MISC. (INSURANCE, ETC.)
15 SCAFFOLDING
16 EQUIPMENT RENTAL
17 VENDOR REPRESENTATIVES
18 FIELD SERVICES
19 TEMP. CONST., UTILITIES
20 MOBILIZATION, DEMOBILIZE
21 CATERING, ACCOMODATION
22 TRAVEL
23 OVERTIME PREMIUM
70 LUMP SUM ENGINEERING
71 BASIC ENGINEERING
72 DETAIL ENGINEERING
73 MATERIAL PROCUREMENT
74 SUBCONTRACT PROCUREMENT
75 ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT
Special Indirects Engineering Indirects
80 LUMP SUM CONST. MGMT
81 HOME OFFICE CONST. SUPP.
82 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
Freight
Contractor Indirects
50 LUMP SUM FREIGHT
51 DOMESTIC FREIGHT
52 OCEAN FREIGHT
53 AIR FREIGHT
54 MODULE FREIGHT
55 OTHER FRIEGHT
56 - 59 Tittles not assigned
85 FIELD CONST. SUPERVISION
86 STARTUP, COMISSIONING
Taxes
G & A Overheads
60 LUMP SUM TAXES, PERMITS
61 PERMITS
62 MATERIALS TAXES
63 CONSTRUCTION TAXES
64 ENGINEERING TAXES
65 OTHER TAXES
90 G AND A OVERHEADS
Contractor Fee
91 CONTRACT FEE
Escalation
97 ESCALATION
Royalty, Miscellaneous Charges
98 ROYALTY, MISC. CHARGES
Contingencies
99 CONTINGENCY
Attribute Descriptions
Attribute Description
ACCOUNT
Major account for this item, leading digit taken from system code of accounts to
characterize the account class:
ACTCOA Scheduling code of account. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
ACTSEQ Activity ID at component level. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
ACTSRT Activity ID at area level. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
ACTTYP
Activity level (area, project, proc.). For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Icarus
Project
Manager only.
AMOUNT Lump sum value specified by user for indirect costs.
Component Type Component Type
APPTYPE Equipment Equipment
0 Not applicable 58 TDS Tray drying systems
1 AC Air compressors 60 TW Towers
3 AD Air dryers 62 VP Vacuum pumps
4 AT Agitated tanks 63 VS Vibrating screens
6 BL Blenders 64 VT Vertical tanks
7 C Condensers 65 WFE Wiped film evaporators
8 CTW Cooling towers 66 WTS Water treatment systems
9 CE Cranes 68 MOT Motors
10 CO Conveyors 69 RB Reboilers
11 CP Centrifugal pumps 70 FU Furnaces
12 CR Crushers 71 TUR Turbines
13 CRY Crystallizers 72 AG Agitators
14 CT Centrifuges 73 LIN Linings
15 DDT Double diameter towers 74 PAK Packings
16 D Dryers
Account Description
0 Other, indirects
1 Equipment, Code of Account (COA) 100 - 199
2 Equipment, Code of Account (COA) 200 - 299
3 Piping
4 Civil
5 Steel
6 Instrumentation
7 Electrical
8 Insulation
9 Paint
Attribute Descriptions - continued
APPTYPE 17 DC Dust collectors Known Cost
18 DD Drum dryers 76 Cost known equipment
19 E Evaluators 77 Cost known bulks
20 EG Electrical generators
21 EJ Ejectors Plant Bulks and Buildings
22 EL Elevators 80 Buildings
24 F Filters 81 PIP Piping
26 FE Feeders 82 CIV Civil
27 FL Flakers 83 STL Steelwork
28 FLR Flares 84 INS Instrumentation
29 FN Fans 85 ELC Electrical general
32 GC Gas compressors 86 INL Insulation
34 GP Gear pumps 87 PNT Paint
36 HE Heat exchangers 88 ELC Electrical substation
37 HO Hoists
38 HT Horizontal tanks Site Development
39 HU Heating units 91 DEMOL Demolition
42 K Kneaders 92 DRAINS Drainage
43 M Mills 93 EARTH Earthwork general
44 MX Mixers 94 FENCE Fencing
45 P Pumps 95 LANDSP Landscaping
48 R Reactors 96 PAVING Paving
49 RD Rotary dryers 97 PILING Piling
50 RU Refrigeration units 98 RAILRD Railroads
52 S Scales 99 EARTH Earthwork excavation
53 ST Stock treatment
54 SE Separation equipment Library Items
55 STK Stacks 100 Library items
56 STB Steam boiler 101 Equipment model library
57 T Thickeners
AREA Area reference number defined by user. Default is 01. Reference
number 00 refers to project data in the C relation.
ATYPE Report group designation (1 = report group, 2 = sub group).
AREAWBS Area level Work Breakdown Structure -- 2 characters.
BTSEQ Unique sequence number to define the order of records in the DESIGN
table for design reports.
CATLNO Item designation. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant
Cost Estimator only.
CATLNO Item designation. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant
CCOA User-changed code of account.

CCOAACT COA category (EQ, P, C, ST, I, E, IN, PT).
CCOADES User-changed code of account description (text, 24 characters).
CEAMT Rate (CR = CUR/HR, ER = CUR/Month). For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator
only.
CEDESC Description of item.
CEFLAG Record type (CR = craft, ER = equipment rental). For Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator only.
CENUM Item number (CR = 51 - 99, ER = 1 - 450). For Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator only.
CESEQ Sequence number for records in Details relation. For Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator and
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
CLASS
Class as defined below:
CNTRBY Contracted by (parent contractor). For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only.
CNTRNM Contractor name. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only.
CNTRNO Contractor number. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only.
CNTWKF Contract or work force. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
COA System code of account or users account code as revised. For Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator, COA is 3-digits. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
COA is 4-digits.
COADES System code of account description or user's description as revised (text,
24 characters).
Class Description
0 Other
01 Site Development
10 Process Equipment
20 Bulk Items
30 Area components, testing
31 Buildings
40 Area Site Development
50 Unit Substation
60 Main Substations
70 Control (CTL) Centers
80 OPS Centers
90 Project Items (rotating equipment, spare parts,
transmission lines, testing).
COAMOD Code of account (COA) modifier
COAMOD COA Range Description
0 1 - 999 Default if not shown below
Equipment
0 100 - 299 Direct Hire
1 100 - 299 Subcontract Equipment
Piping
0 300 - 399 Above Ground Piping
1 300 - 399 Underground Piping
2 300 - 399 Chemical Sewer
Civil - Site Development
1 422 - 423 Site Development Paving (Roads)
2 422 - 423 Site Development Paving (Other)
Civil - Concrete
1 400 - 459 Small blocks: <3 CY[< 2.3 M3]
2 400 - 459 Medium blocks:3-10 CY[2.3-7.65 M3]
3 400 - 459 Large blocks:10-25 CY[7.65-19.1 M3]
4 400 - 459 Mass pours: 25-50CY[19.2-38.2 M3]
5 400 - 459 Mass pours:50-100 CY[38.2-76.5 M3]
6 400 - 459 Mass pours: >100CY[>76.5 M3]
7 400 - 459 Piling
8 400 - 459 Conduit Envelopes
9 400 - 459 Elevated slabs
Steel
1 500 - 599 Extra light:<12 LB/FT[< 18 KG/M]
2 500 - 599 Light:12-< 20 LB/FT[ 18-< 30 KG/M]
3 500 - 599 Medium20-< 40 LB/FT[ 30-< 60 KG/M]
4 500 - 599 Heavy40-80 LB/FT[ 60-122 KG/M]
5 500 - 599 Extra Heavy> 80 LB/FT[>122 KG/M]
6 500 - 599 Stairs and Ladders
7 500 - 599 Ladders
9 500 - 599 Misc. (Fab. Plate)
Instrumentation
1 641 Pneumatic Instrument Cable Tray
2 641 Electronic Instrument Cable Tray
Electrical
0 700 - 799 Above Ground Electrical.
1 700 - 799 Underground Electrical.
0 811 Pipe Insulation
1 811 Duct Insulation
0 912 Paint Pipe
1 912 Paint Duct
0 922 Surface Prep Pipe
1 922 Surface Prep Duct
COAIND Title of cost element which is assigned to account code.
COMCOD Commodity code to uniquely identify materials used in the Icarus
Evaluation Engine (IEE). The Commodity Code COMCOD is a 30
Character code. Each major bulk type has an individual a coding
sequence. Currently only piping has a coding sequence defined.
For Piping:
To decode use the following column breakdown:
Column: 1 2 3
123456789012345678901234567890
AMMMMMUDDDDPEECFFFFFGWRSSS####
COMPWBS Component level Work Breakdown Structure -- 3 characters.

Column Position Description
A 1 Account Code Indicator - 3=Piping
M 2-6 Pipe material code
U 7 Units of measure Indicator - I/P(I) or Metric(M)
D 8-11 Diameter in units indicated
P 12 Material Type indicator - Pipe (P), Valve (V) or
Fitting (F)
E 13-14 Subtype extension (e.g. Trim on Valve, Flange
type, etc) (Currently Not Used)
C 15 Class/Schedule Indicator - Schedule (S), Flange
Class (F), Din designation (D) or Thickness (T)
F 16-20 Class/Schedule designation as indicated in above
units
G 21 Location - Above Ground (A)/Underground
Code(U)
W 22 Pipe Fabrication - Welded(W)/Seamless(S)
R 23 Fabrication Type - Remote Shop(R)/Field Shop(F)
S 24-26 ICARUS Subtype(See Subtype attribute)
# 27-30 Reserved for future use
CONTRACT Reference number of contractor assigned to purchase/install this item. For
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the default is one. For all other systems, the
default
is zero.
DAYPWK Working days per week. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
DESCR Description of item as specified by user (text, 76 characters).
DIAM Pipe diameter, decimal (for example, 2.0).
DUPITEMS Number of duplicate items.
DUPQTY Duplicate quantity flag. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator only.
0 = standard (unique quantity field)
1 = QUANT field of this record duplicated elsewhere.
EXTRA1 Integer. Not assigned. This is a spare attribute for the user to allocate
values asnecessary. The system will initialize to integer zero. The attribute
name can be changed and values calculated as a function of other numeric
data.
EXTRA2 Real. Not assigned but initialized to a real number of the value 0.0.
EXTRA3 Text. Not assigned but initialized to a value of four blank characters (
").
HOURRAT Ratio of HOURS output to HOURS system.
HRSPDA Working hours per day. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
ICACOA Icarus code of account for item. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and
ICUNIT Icarus Internal Units of Measure identifier.
Unit
No.
I/P
Description
Conversion
I/P Metric
Metric
Description
Notes
1 INCHES 2.5400E+01 MM
2 FEET 3.0480E-01 M
3 MILES 1.6093E+00 KM
4 MESH 1.0000E+00 MESH
5 FT 3.0480E-01 M
6 SF 9.2903E-02 M2
7 SY 8.3613E-01 M2
8 SQ IN 6.4516E+02 MM2
9 IN THK 2.5400E+01 MM THK
10 IN DIAM 2.5400E+01 MM DIAM Piping Diameters
11 CF 2.8317E-02 M3
12 CY 7.6455E-01 M3
13 GALLONS 3.7854E-03 M3
14 BARRELS 1.5899E-01 M3
15 BD FT 2.3597E-03 M3
16 BAGS 8.5275E-01 BAG-50KG
17 cur/CY cur/M3 Currency Units/Unit
Volume
18 cur cur Currency Units
19 cur/LB cur/KG Currency/Unit Weight
20 LB 4.5359E-01 KG
21 LBS 4.5359E-01 KG
22 TONS 9.0718E-01 TONNE
23 LB/FT 1.4882E+00 KG/M
25 LB/YD 4.9605E-01 KG/M
26 cur/SF cur/M2 Currency/Unit Area
27 LB/BATCH 4.5359E-01 KG/BATCH
28 LB/MMBTU 7.5066E+00 KG/MW-HR
29 PCF 1.6018E+01 KG/M3
30 W/SF 1.0753E+01 W/M2
31 PSIG 6.8948E+00 KPA Vessel pressure
32 PSI 6.8947E-03 PA
33 IN H2O 2.4908E+02 PA
35 IN HG 3.3864E+00 KPA
36 MM HG 1.3332E+02 PA
37 PSF 4.7880E-02 KN/M2
38 LBF 4.4482E+00 N
39 FT-LB 1.3558E+00 N-M
40 IN/S 2.5400E+00 CM/S
41 FPM 1.8288E+01 M/H
42 RPM 1.0000E+00 RPM Motor RPM
43 MPH 1.6093E+00 KM/H
44 HERTZ 1.0000E+00 HERTZ Country Based
45 RPM 1.0000E+00 RPM
46 CFH 2.8317E-02 M3/H
47 CFM 1.6990E+00 M3/H
48 MINUTE 1.0000E+00 MINUTE
49 TPD/SF 4.0689E-01 TPH/M2
50 GPM 6.3090E-02 L/S
51 GPH 3.7854E-03 M3/H
52 LB/H 4.5359E-01 KG/H
53 TPH 9.0718E-01 TONNE/H
54 TPD 3.7799E-02 TONNE/H
55 CFM/SF 1.8288E+01 M3/H/M2
56 V 1.0000E+00 V
ICUNIT Icarus Internal Units of Measure identifier. (Continued)
57 W 1.0000E+00 W
58 A 1.0000E+00 A
59 KV 1.0000E+00 KV
60 KW 1.0000E+00 KW
61 KA 1.0000E+00 KA
62 KVA 1.0000E+00 KVA
63 HP 7.4570E-01 HP Motor Power
64 MVA 1.0000E+00 MVA
65 OHM-IN 2.5400E+00 OHM-CM
66 DEG F 1.0000E+00 DEG C Temperature
67 DEG F 5.5556E-01 DEG C Temperature
Difference
68 FC 1.0764E+01 LUX Lighting
69 TONS-REF 3.5169E+00 KW Tons of Refrigeration
70 GPM/SF 6.7909E-01 L/S/M2
71 BTU/H/SF 3.1546E+00 W/M2
72 BTU/H 2.9307E-01 W
73 BTU/LB 2.3260E+00 KJ/KG
74 MMBTU/H 2.9307E-01 MEGAW
75 BTU/CF 3.7250E+01 KJ/M3
76 CPOISE 1.0000E+00 MPA-S
77 CSTOKE 1.0000E+00 MM2/S
78 BTU/LB/F 4.1868E+00 KJ/KG/K
79 DEGREE 1.0000E+00 DEGREE Slope
80 PERCENT 1.0000E+00 PERCENT
81 GAUGE 1.0000E+00 GAUGE Duct, HEX tubing
82 PAIR 1.0000E+00 PAIR Instrumentation
83 BWG 1.0000E+00 BWG HEX tubing
84 LOOP(S) 1.0000E+00 LOOP(S) Instrumentation
85 COATS 1.0000E+00 COATS Paint
86 wire size wire size Electrical
87 MCM 1.0000E+00 MCM Electrical
88 AWG 1.0000E+00 AWG Electrical
89 CUTS 1.0000E+00 CUTS Piping
90 SECTION 1.0000E+00 SECTION
91 CLASS 1.0000E+00 CLASS Electrical
92 SPACES 1.0000E+00 SPACES Electrical
93 CIRCUITS 1.0000E+00 CIRCUITS Electrical
94 CIRCUITS 1.0000E+00 CIRCUITS Compressors
95 STAGES 1.0000E+00 STAGES
96 FLOORS 1.0000E+00 FLOORS
97 EACH 1.0000E+00 EACH
98 BAYS 1.0000E+00 BAYS Buildings, Air Coolers
99 1.0000E+00 Blank Units
101 IN 2.5400E+01 MM
102 IN DIA 2.5400E+01 MM DIA
103 IN LG 2.5400E+01 MM LG
104 IN THK 2.5400E+01 MM THK
105 IN DP 2.5400E+01 MM DP
106 IN WD 2.5400E+01 MM WD
107 IN SZ 2.5400E+01 MM SZ
108 IN HT 2.5400E+01 MM HT
109 IN WL 2.5400E+01 MM WL
111 FT 3.0480E-01 M
112 FT DIA 3.0480E-01 M DIA
113 FT LG 3.0480E-01 M LG
114 FT DP 3.0480E-01 M DP
115 FT WD 3.0480E-01 M WD
116 FT HT 3.0480E-01 M HT
117 FT MHOLE 3.0480E-01 M MHOLE
118 HOURS 1.0000E+00 HOURS
119 WEEKS 1.0000E+00 HOURS
INDAMOUNT Indirect cost for this account.
INDDES Indirects description. Either user-supplied or SYSTEM GENERATED.
INDHOURS Indirect hours for this account.
INTREF Internal reference identification.
ITEM System-generated or user-defined description for this item
(text, 24 characters)
ITEMDES System-generated or user-defined description for this item
(text, 28 characters).
ITMCOD Item code:
ITMCOD Description
DESIGN
0 Other
10 For equipment design data brief
11* For equipment design data full (10 is a subset of 11 with
the provision that it must be a design item)
19 For driver power only (where applicable).
20 For brief plant bulk, area bulk and area site development
items
21* For plant bulk items full
30* For project site development items
40 For library items
96 Custom pipe specs
97 Project or area data sheets
98 For design and project estimate basis
REMARKS Equipment Items:
10 For user's description
11 For equipment symbol
12 For first 2 lines of remarks
13 For user's tag number
Plant Bulk Items:
23 For first 2 lines of remarks
Project Site Development:
IUMVAL System value in internal Units of Measure. Does not apply when
ICUNIT is 0 or 99 and may be incorrect for items containing costs.
LCOST Field manpower cost for this item.
LCOSTRAT Ratio of LCOST output to LCOST system.
LHOURS Field man-hours associated with this item.
LINELOOP Piping line number (01 - 40) or instrument loop number (01 - 50).
O if not applicable.
LCODE Not assigned. Used in cost tracking programs to identify a category of
labor costs.
LDESC Not assigned. Used in cost tracking programs to describe a category of
labor costs
ITMCOD Item code:
LOCID Identifier to help qualify the part associated with this item (text, 8
characters).
Examples:
Piping
Line 1 PLT AIR
DRAINS
Instrumentation
LOOP 1 UNIV
AIR SUP LOCAL
Civil
TYPE 15
Electrical
MOTOR PUSHB
FEEDER
MATL System material symbol characteristic of the material of construction
for this item (text, 5 characters; e.g., "SS304").
MCODE Not assigned. Used in cost tracking programs to identify a category of
material costs
MCOST Material cost for this item.
MCOSTRAT Ratio of MCOST output to MCOST system.
MDESC Not assigned. Used in cost tracking programs to describe a category of
material costs.
NOITEM Number of items in list.
NPCTnn List item for number nn. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
The CRWSCH relation includes nn for 1 to 12.
The EQRENT relation incudes nn for 1 to 15.
The CSTCTRL relation includes nn for 1.
ORIGIN Responsible item for the data in this record (text, 6 characters).
Example:
CP 100 GRADE PIP001 USS110 (unit substation)
DDT222 PAD CIV001 MSS001(main)
BLD001 OPEN STL001 CTL 60
AREA EXOPEN INS001 SUBSTN (project testing - all substations)
UT HDR MILBLD ELC001 UT STN
INL001
PNT001
PARAM Parameter description (text, 32 characters).
PCLASS Flange class. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator only.
PCTOF A system-allocated code representing the portion of the project
estimate to be percentaged, as follows. For IPM only. (In other
systems, PCTOF is reserved for future use.
PCTOF Description
1 Direct materials plus direct field labor costs
2 Direct material costs
3 Direct field labor cost
4 Direct material plus labor, and construction indirect costs
5 All project costs
6 Unit Cost Library Item(s) Booked to COA 1-48
7 Unit Cost Library Item(s) Booked to COA 49-98
8 Unit Cost Library Item(s) Booked to COA 99
PERCENT Percentage value specified by the user.
PIPSPC Custom piping spec. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator only.
PIPTYP Class of material for piping.
PIPTYP Piping Material
0 Pipe labor
1 Carbon steel
2 Stainless steel
3 Titanium
5 Aluminum
6 Monel/Inconel
7 Copper
8 Hastelloy
9 Lined pipe, miscellaneous pipe
PRCURC Procurement Currency symbol for alternate material sources.
PROPNAM System Property Name
PROPNUM Property number used to describe the field description
QUANT Quantity, used in conjunction with "UNITS" attribute.
REFID For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator and COST
3-digit component
number.
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator 4-digit internal reference number.
REPGRP Report group number.
RESULT The value calculated when PERCENT is applied to the values,
represented by PCTOF, where appropriate.
RPGSEQ Report group sequence (sub-group).
SCHAREA In Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator: Display flag
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator: For concurrent scheduling within the
project used for reporting and schedule tracking.
SCHED Pipe schedule. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant
SHIFTS Number of shifts per day. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.

SOURCE Symbol used to characterize direct, subcontract or remote shop costs
(text, 2 characters):
SOURCE Description
RS Remote shop
IT User input total direct cost
lM User input direct material costs
lL User input direct manpower cost
IS User input total subcontract cost
SS User input direct costs, system-prepared subcontract cost
ST User input subcontract total cost
SM User input subcontract material cost
SL User input subcontract manpower cost.
STRUCTAG Indicates structure to which the component is assigned.
SUBAREA Subsidiary area number, within AREA. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and
SUBTYPE For Equipment cost basis
0 System calculated
1 User specified
2 Remote shop paint
For Piping type of valve or fitting
0 Other
2 Remote shop paint
80 Steam tracing
98 Tubing
99 Pipe
101 90 DEG elbow
102 Flange
103 Reducer (to next lower size)
104 Tee
105 Blind
106 Union (also Couplings)
107 Spectacle blind
108 Strainer
109 Threadolet
110 Expansion joint
111 Transition joint
112 WYE for HDPE only
113 Steam trap
120 Clamp
121 45 DEG elbow
122 Ferrule
SUBTYPE -
continued
For Piping type of valve or fitting - continued
123 Cross
124 Eccentric reducer
125 Hose adapter
126 Pipe adapter
127 Swivel joint
128 Caps
129 Screwable Plugs
130 Weldolet
131 Sockolet
201 Globe valve
202 Ball valve
203 Butterfly valve
204 Gate valve
205 Knife gate valve
206 Plug valve
207 Angle valve
208 Check valve
311 Rotameter
314 Meterrun
332 Vortex flow meter
333 Mag meter
334 Mass flow meter
390 Orifice flange-union
391 Orifice plate
401 Control valve GLO
402 On/off ball valve
403 Control valve BUO
411 Control valve GLP
412 Control valve BAP
413 Control valve BUP
421 Control valve ANO
422 Control valve ANP
423 Control valve DVS
424 Control valve TKS
431 Control valve (no reducers)
432 Control valve
433 3-way valve
434 Regulating valve
481 Slide gate on/off
482 Slide gate positioning
483 Diverter valve
501 TSV
502 Relief valve
503 Rupture disk
801 Victaulic coupl.
SUBTYPE -
continued
For Piping type of valve or fitting - continued
802 Insul. flange
899 Vent/drain
900 Gaskets
950 Bolts
951 Pre-fab pipe supports
952 Tubing elbow
953 Tubing reducer
954 Tubing tee
955 Tubing union
956 Tubing ball valve
SUBTYPE -
continued
For Piping - Field Labor Subtype
STRESS RELIEF
FIELD ERECTION
MISC FIELD FABRICATION
CUT PIPE
BEVEL PIPE
WELD PIPE
PIPE TESTING
ERECT VALVES
BOLT-UP CONNECTIONS
FIELD X-RAY
Bend Pipe
threadolets
weldolets
JUMPER CONNECTIONS
SWAGE AND WELD JACKET
Shop Handling Small Pipe
Cut & Thread Pipe

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
SUBTYPE -
continued
For Ducting type of fittings and/or Duct type
701 Round Duct
702 Round duct and stiffeners
703 Elbows
704 Tees
706 Dampers
707 Access doors
708 Flexible connections
709 Duct hangers
711 Spiral duct
712 Spiral duct and stiffeners
713 Elbows
714 Tees
715 Reducers
716 Dampers
717 Access doors
719 Duct Hangers
721 Square duct
722 Square duct and stiffeners
723 Elbows
724 Tees
725 Reducers
726 Dampers
727 Access doors
729 Duct Hangers
SUBTYPE -
continued
For Ducting - Field Labor Handle and Erect Duct
Round Duct
Spiral Duct
Square Duct

31
32
33
SUBTYPE -
Continued
For Civil type of foundation
0 Other
1 OCT+PROJ
2 OCTAGONL
3 PAVING
4 MASSPOUR
5S M BLOCK
6 LG BLOCK
7 PILECAP
8 CONDUIT
9 RING
10 BASIN
11 EL SLAB
12 COLM/BM
13 WALL
14 GRAD BM
15 PIER
16 FOOTING
17 BOX
18 SLAB GRD
30 Rectangular - Above grade and below grade concrete tanks, and tile
chests
31 Cylindrical - Above grade and below grade concrete tanks, and tile
chests
50 User defined excavation in Bulk Adjustment Civil entry
71 SHEET PILING
72 HPILE
80 User defined piles in Bulk Adjustment Civil entry or in Site Design.
81 RAYMOND
82 WOOD
83 PIPE
84 PRECAST
85 POURED
86 STEEL-H
87 CAISSON
SUBTYPE -
Continued
For Civil type of foundation
For Civil Miscellaneous
30 Rectangular - Above grade and below grade concrete tanks, and tile
chests
31 Cylindrical - Above grade and below grade concrete tanks, and tile
chests
50 User defined excavation in Bulk Adjustment Civil entry
Subtype Piling
88 FRANKI
89 AUGUR
90 Rigging and dismantling pile driving/drilling equipment
For Steel
2 Remote shop paint
11 Remote shop CONC Fireproof
12 Remote shop MAGN Fireproof
13 Remote shop Pyrocrete FPR
For Electrical
Type of wire/cable and cable termination
Where xx = position of the wire size in the Wire Sizes table. For
example:
Wire size 14 AWG is in Position 1 on the Wire Sizes table for US Country
Base; therefore, a low voltage (LV) 14 AWG wire would be expressed as
101.
Wire size 35 MM2 is in Position 8 on the Wire Sizes table for UK, JP,
and EU Country Bases; therefore, a medium voltage (MV) 35MM2 wire
would be expressed as 208. Note that the position of the wire size on
the table is determined by counting down, not across.1xx Low voltage
(LV) cable/wire2xx Medium voltage (MV) cable/wire3xx High
voltage (HV) cable/wire4xx Control voltage (CV) cable/wire5xx
Lighting (LT) cable/wire
Type of wire/cable and cable termination
100 LV conduit
200 MV conduit
300 HV conduit
400 CV conduit
500 LT conduit
551 Low Voltage Feeder Cable - Lighting
552 Low Voltage Feeder Cable - Electrical Tracing
SUBTYPE -
Continued
For Electrical (continued)
Type of termination
611 LV termination
612 MV termination
613 HV termination
614 CV termination
615 LT termination
Communication and Alarm Systems
651 CCTV System Cabinets
652 Telephone System Cabinets
653 Area Network System Cabinets
654 Radio System Cabinets
655 Access Control System Cabinets
656 Intrusion Detection System Cabinets
657 Meteorological Monitoring System Cabinets
658 7C 16 AWG cable/12 pair 7C 1.25 mm2 cable
659 4 pair phone cable
660 12 pair 18 AWG cable/12 pair .8 mm2 cable
661 3C 14 AWG cable/3C 1.5 mm2 cable
662 24 fiber armor cable
663 24 fiber armor terminations
664 25 pr OSP CAT5 armor cable
665 25 pr OSP CAT5 armor terminations
Cathode Protection
701 Bonding Station
702 Pipeline Cathodic Protection
703 Install Anode
704 Coke Breeze Backfill
705 Anode Bed Watering Pipe
706 Galvanic Anodes
707 Install Surface Casing
708 Anode Support Pipe
709 Termin Junction Box
710 Transformer/Rectifier
711 Solar Panels
712 Solar Panel Connection
713 Underground Cable
714 Potential Measure Test Station
Tracing
800 Electrical tracing
801 Self-Regulating Heating Cable
811 Mineral Insulated Alloy
821 Tracing Panelboard
825 Heating Cable
831 Tracing Controller
SUBTYPE -
Continued
For Instrumentation type of main loop component construction -
continued
110 PI Gauge
111 PI Gauge
112 PI Draft
120 PIT
121 PT W/ Seal
130 PIC Local
140 PS Switch
160 DPI Gauge
170 DPIT
171 DPT W/ Seal
190 DPS Switch
200 Testwell
210 TE/TC
211 TI Dial
230 TT/TC
231 TIT/FILL
232 TT/RTD
233 TT Wet Bulb
234 TT Surface
250 TIC Local
270 TS Switch
310 FI Gauge
311 FI ROT
312 FI DP Cell
313 FQI
314 FI Meterrun
330 FIT DP Cell
331 FIT W/O SEN
332 FIT Vortex
333 FIT Magnet.
334 FIT Mass FL
335 FIT Ultras
336 FIT Turbine
350 FIC Local
360 FS Switch
361 FQIS
390 Orifice Flange
391 Orifice Plate
410 LI Gauge
411 LI Gauge
412 LI Bubbler
430 LIT DP
SUBTYPE -
Continued
continued
431 LIT Tape FL.
432 LIT DISP
433 LIT Ultras.
434 LIT Nuclear
435 LIT Radar
450 LC DISP
460 LS Wet
461 LS Dry
462 LS Vibrating
463 LS Cond.
464 LS CAP.
510 AT (PH)
511 AT (ORP)
512 AT (O2)
513 AET BTU
514 Density Inst.
515 Consistency
516 AT%LEL
517 AT H2S DET.
518 AT CO2
519 AT VIST.
520 AT Color
521 AT Flame
522 AT Cloud
523 AT Smoke
524 AT Flash
525 AT Gravity
526 AT Heating
527 AT GC.
528 AT H2&HC
529 AT H2S PHY.
530 AT HC
531 AT H2S/SO2
532 AT Sulphur
600 CT Conduct.
620 W LD 4 Cell
621 W LD 3 Cell
622 W LD 6 Cell
640 SIT
650 SS
660 XE Axial
661 XE Radial
SUBTYPE -
Continued
continued
670 XS VIB
680 PNT Variable
681 PNT ON/OFF
690 PNS
691 EL Position
700 HIC Local
701 HIC
710 HSW
720 BS Infrared
740 Solenoid
999 CV CNTRL VLV
For Insulation type of insulation or fireproofing
0 Other
1 CASIL (Hot insulation)
2 MWOOL
3 FOAM (Hot insulation)
4 FOAM (Cold insulation)
5 CWOOL
6 PURIF (Cold insulation)
7 PURIF (Hot insulation)
8 CASIL (Cold insulation)
11 CONC Fireproof
12 MAGN Fireproof
13 Pyrocrete FPR
For Piping: Pipeline
Note: For Cathodic Protection Subtypes, see Electrical
601 Haul pipe to R-O-W
602 Stringing pipe on R-O-W
603 Launcher
604 Receiver
605 Main road/RR crossing
606 Minor/Dirt road crossing
607 Clearing and Grading
608 Clean up R-O-W
609 R-O-W blasting
610 Build BERM through marsh
611 Build BERM on trench
613 Concrete Anchor, Weld Plate
614 Haul Concrete Pipe Support
615 String, Set Pipe Support
616 Ditch Blasting
SUBTYPE -
Continued
617 Ditch, Sand & Softsoil
618 Ditch, Rocky Soil
619 Ditch, Weathered Shale
620 Ditch, Weathered Rock
621 Ditch, Hard Rock
622 Rework after Blasting
623 Rock Ditch By Hand
624 Ditch Trimming
625 Haul, Place Sand
626 Haul Piles
627 String Piles
628 Drive Support Piles
629 Drive Thrust Anchor
630 Drive Deflection Anchor
631 Drilled Piles
632 Concrete Fill, Drilled Piles
633 Cut Off Piles
634 Anode Trench
635 Surface Bed Vertical Anode
636 Anode Surface Casing
637 Drill Cased Anode Well
638 Drill Uncased Anode Well
639 Cement Plug
643 Access Roads to R-O-W
644 Concrete Valve Boxes
651 Double Joint
652 FBE External Coat
653 Internal Coating
654 Coating Inspection
655 Line Up & Connect Pipe
656 Tie-in Connection
657 Line Up & Weld
658 Tie-in Welds
659 X-Ray Field Inspection
660 Epxoy Shrink Sleeves
661 Hydrotest
662 Aerial KM Markers
663 KM Markers
664 Warning Signs
665 Pipeline Vents
666 Pipeline Drains
667 Place Pipe in Support
668 Lower In, Backfill, Clean
669 Haul Ring Girder
670 String Ring Girder
SUBTYPE -
Continued
671 Dress & Grind Pile Head
672 Weld Pipe Pile Cap Plate
673 Weld Tee
674 Weld Ring Girder
675 Place Pipe In Support
676 Install Insulation & Bolt Down
677 Guide Bars for Tee
678 Welding
679 Miscellaneous Drains
680 Relief Line
681 Steel Support Shoes
690 Steelwork Thrust Anchor
691 Steelwork Deflection Anchor
692 Solar Panel Steel
699 Pipeline Instruments
SUMCODE Not assigned. Used in cost tracking programs to group costs into cost
centers.
TITLE Report group title.
TYPSCT Type of data (1 = schedule, 2 = class). For Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
UNIT Unit of measure associated with numeric design value.
UNITIN Unit of measure associated with user specified design value.
UNITS Units of measure associated with QUANT (ity) (text, 8 characters; for
example, FEET, CY, M3).
USERDES User specified description for component, installation material/man-
hour additions, installation pipe or installation instrumentation.
USERTAG Equipment component user tag or pipe specs if custom pipe specs are
used.
VALUER The value of the design parameter (PARAM) as a real number (useful in
calculations). For parameter (PARAM) "ITEM TYPE", VALUER contains
the number of items.
VALUET Value of design parameters, as text.
VALUEU Value of design parameter specified by user as text.
WGT Weight of this item.
WUNIT Unit of measure associated with item weight (WGT) attribute (text, 4
characters; for example, "LBS ", "KG ").
36 Icarus Technology (G10) 36-1
Introduction to Areas
Area Specifications
Report Groups
Icarus Systems are Based on Craft Labor
Project Schedule
Equipment Fabricate/Ship Items
Barchart Report Format
Equipment Procurement Schematic
Process Control
Overview of System Input Specifications for Power Distribution
Power Distribution
Mode of Supply and Distribution
Power Distribution Components
Redundancy
Usage Instructions
Reporting of Results
Project Definition
Workforce
Construction Overhead - Prime Contractor Basis
Contracts: Description/Scope
36 Icarus Technology (G10)
36-2 36 Icarus Technology (G10)
Introduction to Areas
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, areas
can be defined as a way to describe the construction methodology that prevails
for that section of the project. Specifications are defined for each area. These
specifications include mechanical design specifications for each of the major
accounts along with dimensions and indexing.
Reasons for Areas
Areas are defined for the following reasons:
Cost accounting: Project components arranged into areas are easier to
review. Many of the cost reports are arranged by area.
Site conditions: Different sections of the plant site may contain different
site conditions. The user can define these site conditions, such as soil type,
instrumentation type, electrical class and division, or area type (on-grade,
in-steel, and so on.), in the area specifications. As a result, the site
conditions will impact the area bulk quantities, costs, and man-hours
developed for an area.
Contractor assignments: As contractors and contractors scope of work
(CONSETs) are defined, areas are then assigned to the defined scope of
work. Areas can affect the flexibility of assigning work to contractors. For
example, if different contractors are responsible for above grade and below
grade piping, each of these can be defined in separate areas and assigned
to the appropriate contractors. Without these being defined in separate
areas, it would be impossible to assign above grade and below grade pipe
to different contractors.
Process control and power distribution: Once the user defines the major
process control and power distribution elements in the estimate, the user
must assign areas to defined control centers and unit substations. For
example, the total instrumentation developed for an area would be used
to size that areas Control Center. Details of process control and power
distribution are developed and reported in the last area sections of the
Detailed Bulk report and Area Bulk section of the Equipment List report for
the last area. It is suggested that users define one last area as an
OFFSITES/PROCESS & POWER area to separate the numerous details
developed for Process Control and Power Distribution from all other detail.
Importing: When defining areas, keep in mind that whole areas and their
components can be imported into other projects with matching country
base, currency and units of measure. Checklist areas can be created as a
way to prevent from forgetting typical project components in a new project
estimate. An example of this would be a steelwork Checklist Area that
would include all typical sitework items. Once imported into a project,
sitework items that are not needed in a project would be deleted and
design specifications for the different sitework components would be
revised.
Area Types
There are several different area types to select from. Each area type has its
own set of default area bulks that will be developed. The different area types
that may be defined are:
On-Grade (with or without concrete pad). This is the default area type. By
default the system develops the following bulks for an on-grade area:
Perimeter lights every 50 feet.
Lights are supplied from 1 or more area panelboards, supplied from a
disconnect switch in the MCC for this area.
A ground grid the length of the perimeter.
A concrete pad will be developed based on the dimensions of the area if
the PAD option is selected.
Open-Steel (OPEN)
The following area bulks will be developed for an OPEN type area:
A multi-level, open-steel structure developed based on the dimensions
of the area.
One in-steel level for every 15 feet [4.5 M] of height.
75% of each level is floor grating for steel structure and concrete slab
for concrete structure, with perimeter toe-plate and handrail.
Pendant lights supplied from a local panelboard developed just to
supply the lights in the structure.
Structural members are sized for both dead and live loads based on the
weight of equipment hung in the structure. See section below for
information on hanging equipment. Note: Equipment items that are
hung lose their foundations and support steel is provided to tie the
item into the structure.
Bracing is provided according to wind and seismic requirements.
Open-Structure (OPEN)
Open structure type can be steel, pre-cast concrete, or cast-in-place
concrete. Steel is the default structure type.
The following area bulks will be developed for an OPEN type area:
A multi-level, open-steel structure developed based on the dimensions
of the area.
One in-steel level for every 15 feet [4.5 M] of height.
75% of each level is floor grating for steel structure and concrete slab
for concrete structure, with perimeter toe-plate and handrail.
Pendant lights supplied from a local panelboard developed just to
supply the lights in the structure.
Structural members are sized for both dead and live loads based on the
weight of equipment hung in the structure. See section below for
information on hanging equipment. Note: Equipment items that are
hung lose their foundations and support steel is provided to tie the
item into the structure.
Bracing is provided according to wind and seismic requirements.
Existing Open-Steel (EX-OPEN)
The following area bulks are developed for an EX-OPEN type area:
All bulks that were developed for the OPEN type area will be developed
except for the OPEN STEEL STRUCTURE as it is assumed to exist.
Support steel is provided.
Logic for Hanging Equipment
See also: Chapter 20: Steel - Logic for Hanging Equipment in Steel Structures
Module
These area bulks are developed for a MODULE type area:
A SKID (flat base structural model) module is developed by default or
the user can select from the following module types:
- Cylindrical 1-bay cold box
- Rectangular, 1-bay cold box fully enclosed
- Rectangular, 1-bay cold box 3 sides enclosed
- Truckable* (See details below.)
- Bargeable* (See details below)
- Module lighting
Ground grid
* Truckable Module - TRMD
Equipment Loaded Automatically Loaded when Skirt/
Leg is set to 0
Shell & Tube Heat
Exchanger
Yes
Horizontal Tank Yes
Thermosiphon reboiler Yes
Other reboilers No
Agitated Tank Yes
Double-Diam. Tower Yes
Packed Tower Yes
Trayed Tower Yes
Vertical Tank Yes
All Others (pumps, and so
on)
No or N/A No or N/A
The truckable module is designed as a one bay braced frame structure and
the user can specify the number of levels. The user can add up to four
truckable modules within the area and up to two modules can be stacked.
Use the Structure Tag TRMD-1 to TRMD-4 for specifying the module to
which the equipment is loaded. If no Structure Tag is specified, equipment
weight is distributed among the modules. One dimension can be up to 80ft
(24m) [Length, Width, or Height] and the other two dimensions up to 25ft
(7.6m).
You can specify an allowance for temporary bracing used during shipping.
The default is 10% of the steel weight.
* Bargeable Module - Bargeable Module - BRGM
Bargeable process module is designed as a braced frame structure.
Dimensions can be up to 200ft(60.8m) [Length] x 200ft(60.8m)[Width] x
100ft(30.4m) [Height]. You can add up to four modules within an area and
up to two modules can be stacked similar to Truckable. Use structure tag
BRGM-1 to BRGM-4 for specifying the module to which the equipment is
loaded. If no structure tag is specified, equipment weight is distributed
among the modules. The transportation cost varies significantly from one
project to another, so you should enter the transportation cost from
module shop to site.
You can specify:
the shipping season (Default: Summer)
the shipping route
transverse, longitudinal and vertical acceleration values
an allowance for temporary bracing used during shipping. The default is
5% of the steel weight
These specifications work in conjunction with each other:
When a BRGM module type is selected, the selected season, route, and module
height (the tallest module of the four governs) enable calculation of the
shipping acceleration fields. Thus, based on these selections, acceleration
values are automatically calculated.
Note: The shipping accelerations determined by the system are good for
initial estimates when no information or data is available. To fine tune the
estimate using more accurate acceleration coefficients, it is recommended that
a naval architect be consulted to determine the particular barge type, season,
shipping route, and module height. You can input the shipping accelerations
provided by the naval architect into the acceleration fields to override the
defaults provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
* Piperack (see details) - Piperack Module - PRMD
A plant bulk piperack is required to specify the piperack module dimensions
and details. Specify only one piperack in one piperack module area.
Equipments, Structures, and Buildings are not allowed on the piperack
module except Air cooler.
Floor
The following area bulks are developed for a FLOOR type area:
Pendant lights
Figure A.1: How Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator Hangs Equipment in an OPEN or
EX-OPEN Area
Default Area Bulks
There are area bulks that are automatically generated for an area. These area
bulks are developed to meet the requirements of the area and can be
suppressed in the Area Specifications for that area. If you execute a project
level estimate, you can review these area bulks in the Area Bulks section of
the Equipment List report.
Equipment Automatic Set Skirt/Leg = 0
Shell & Tube Exchanger Yes
Horizontal Tank Yes
Thermosiphon Reboiler Yes
Other Reboilers No
Agitated Tank Yes
Double-Diameter Tower Yes
Packed Tower Yes
Trayed Tower Yes
Vertical Tank Yes
All others (pumps, etc.) No or N/A No or N/A
Figure A.2: Summary of Area Bulks
Automatically Developed for Each Area
Area Specifications
For each defined area, the user may enter specifications that will affect designs
and quantities of bulks in an area. While most of the area specifications are
design specifications that will override design specifications entered at the
project level, the most significant area specifications are those that will affect
lengths of pipe, electrical cable, and instrument signal wiring or tubing. These
length specifications include:
Area Dimensions
Defined in Area Type Definition, Area Dimensions are used as a default to
develop lengths for all of the following system developed items:
- Piping.
- Electrical cable/wiring.
- Instrument signal wiring /tubing.
Note: Area dimensions do not have any effect on user-added bulks, such as
yard pipe, cable runs, signal wire runs, and so on.
The user can enter area length (L), width (W), and height (H). Only area types
OPEN or EX-OPEN will recognize and use the height dimension.
One example of how the system uses Area Dimension is the determination of
pipe lengths. If an area dimension of 30 X 30 is entered, the system will take
(L+W) of the area to determine the default final cut-off lengths of pipe, so in
the above example, (L+W)= (30+30) = (60) = 30. The default final
cut-off length of pipe in this area would be 30. Any line of pipe that had an
original length of less than 30 would be unaffected by this 30 x 30
area dimension.
Area Dimensions are used in a similar way to determine cable and signal
wiring lengths in an area unless the user overrides this calculation with
specific entries.
The area dimensions are also used to size and/or quantify area pads, modules,
open steel structures, grounding, area lighting, concrete pads, etc.
Pipe Envelope
Defined in Area Pipe Specifications, Pipe Envelope takes precedence over
Area Dimensions in calculating pipe lengths in an area. Just as Area
Dimensions did in the above example, Pipe Envelope defines the final cut-
off length of pipe for all system developed piping in an area. The user
Area Bulks On-grade Pad Area Types
Open Ex-open Module Floor
Area Lighting & Grounding X X X X X X
Equipment Grounding X X X X X
Concrete Pad X
Open Steel Structure X X
Module Structure
can make entries for Pipe Envelope length, width, and height as well as%
Adjustment and Maximum Pipe Length.
The following is an example of how the system will use this information to
calculate pipe length:
1 The standard length is calculated using the line length equation.
2 The standard length is multiplied by area pipe spec for% adjustment.
3 The final cutoff length is calculated:
a) EQPIPELEN + 0.5 * HT
- EQPIPELEN=0.5*(Area Pipe Envelope L+W+H)
- if not set, then EQPIPELEN=0.5*(Area L+W+H)
b)Then area spec for Maximum Pipe Length is applied.
Electrical cable run lengths
Defined in Area Electrical Specifications, there are distance specifications
available that will be used to calculate lengths for all system developed
electrical cable in an area. These specifications include Distance to MCC
and Distance to Panel.
Instrument signal wiring or tubing lengths
Defined in Area Instrumentation Specifications, there are distance
specifications available that will be used to calculate lengths for all system
developed signal wiring or tubing lengths in an area. These include
Distance from Junction Box (JB) to Control Center (CC).
Report Groups
All defined areas are assigned to defined Report Groups in the Area Tree
diagram. Report groups are a way to group areas together for reporting in
various Report Group summary reports. For example, if you had a process
area where some components were on-grade and some were in-steel, you
could define two separate areas: an ON-GRADE area and an OPEN-STEEL area.
These two areas are separate to ensure that the appropriate bulks are
developed, but can be assigned to the same REPORT GROUP so costs and
man-hours can be summarized together in REPORT GROUP summary reports.
Icarus Systems are Based on Craft Labor
All country base locations are based on a division of labor along craft lines.
Each craft performs only those work items assigned to it pipefitters only
perform pipefitting operations; welders only perform welding operations; etc.
In Icarus systems, work items can be reassigned to a craft to reflect
site conditions.
This strict default division of labor is a necessary starting point if you are to be
able to change the work rules. It is only because hours are initially booked to
the correct crafts that you can subsequently book them to different crafts and
thereby change the division of labor appropriate for any contractor. This is
done by creating a new workforce and then reassigning the labor hours away
from the default crafts to the new workforce crafts.
For example, a skid fabrication shop might be represented as follows:
1 Create a new workforce to be used by the skid fabricator. This workforce is
initially an exact copy of the systems default workforce. Change (or add)
the craft names in the new workforce to reflect those present in the skid
fabrication workforce. For example, change laborer to day-laborer, add
a new craft called mechanical, etc.
2 Change the division of labor. Reassign labor hours booked to the default
crafts in the workforce to the newly-defined crafts. For example, reassign
100% of the labor hours booked to riggers and pipefitters to the new
mechanical craft.
3 Enter the wage rate and productivity for each craft in the new workforce.
4 Link (assign) the new workforce to the skid contractor. Any work assigned
to this contractor is performed using the new workforce.
Using this method, up to nine distinct construction workforces for each
project can be created. This permits the simulation of an extremely
complicated mix of contractors having diverse work rules.
Project Schedule
A project schedule is developed based on the estimate scope of work for a
project estimate. This schedule includes dates and durations for design
engineering, procurement, delivery of material and equipment, site
development and construction. The construction schedule is integrated with
the cost estimate to provide the basis for estimation of schedule-dependent
costs such as equipment rental requirements, field supervision and
construction management.
The schedule information may be reported in three different ways:
1 The total construction duration will be shown on the Project Data Sheet,
and, if applicable, the construction durations for each contract will also be
shown on the Contract Data Sheet.
2 If the Schedule report option is specified, the system generates two
histogram reports, the Project Cash Flow Summary and Project Manpower
Schedule (which displays the manpower resources required for each week
of the construction schedule). Manpower should also be provided for any
contracts refined.
3 The Project Schedule Data may be used to develop barchart reports in
addition to the histograms for greater schedule detail.
The Project Schedule Data, with an entry for the date to start engineering, is
required to generate the barchart reports. These standard barcharts
are produced:
General Schedule - Provides a balanced view of all phases of the project
schedule.
Engineering Schedule - Focuses on details of the design phase, such as the
production of piping isometrics, and on specific procurement items,
showing only a single bar for all construction.
Construction Schedule - Shows only a single bar for the design and
procurement phases but focuses on major construction elements such as
piperack erection and piping installation.
Each barchart may also show additional bars created by the user. Also, if
contracts are used, another barchart is provided for the Contracts Schedule.
The barcharts appear within the body of the project estimate report and a
duplicate is appended to the report.
The project schedule is affected by adjustments to engineering man-hours,
field man-hours and productivity and construction workweek specified
elsewhere and any schedule modifications requested in the Project Schedule
Data. The techniques of the scheduling system are utilized in the logical
sequencing of the adjusted design and construction tasks to produce a
summary schedule. Simulation of delayed or accelerated schedules is possible
through the various adjustments available. However, the user interested in
developing a detailed schedule for rush projects, or projects using offset
prefabrication, is advised to use the scheduling system, where control of
activity logic is possible.
Regardless of whether the barchart reports are to be produced, the Project
Schedule Data may be used to adjust the schedule and therefore adjust the
cost estimate. The data provides percentage adjustment fields for design/
procurement duration, for delivery times and for construction duration.
Changes to the system default equipment fabricate/ship times, which may
increase or decrease the total construction duration, can be made in various
ways. A specific value for total construction weeks may be specified.
Equipment Fabricate/Ship
Items
In the absence of user input, the system will use the fabricate/ship times (in
weeks) shown in Table PS-2. If a percentage adjustment is specified for
deliveries, these defaults will all be adjusted accordingly. An entry for a
particular class will be used exactly as entered. A fabricate/ship time entry for
a particular piece of equipment will also be used as entered; all other
equipment of the same class will be assigned the system default value as
adjusted, or the value of the class if specified.
Equip.
Class No.
Equipment Class 1
Receive
Quotes
(weeks)
2
Receive
Vendor Data
(weeks)
3
Fabricate
and Ship
(weeks)
01 Process Vessels 3 4 14
02 Towers 4 4 26
03 Storage Vessels 3 4 33
04 Pumps 3 0 18
05 Compressors 6 8 24
Note: For field erected equipment, the schedule will be sequenced with the
field erection period included in the fabricate and ship deliver time.
1 No user adjustments available
2 User may specify a % adjustment with Project Schedule Data.
3 A % adjustment or weeks may be specified with Project Schedule Data.
The user intending to substantially reduce the default fabricate/ship times is
cautioned to specify a value for all classes or use a percentage adjustment to
deliveries, to avoid overlooking a longer delivery time for a minor piece of
equipment.
Barchart Report Format
For the user interested in restricting each barchart report to a single page to
improve the appearance of the report, the following table shows the maximum
06 Turbines 4 8 32
07 Heat Exchangers 3 4 20
08 Boilers 6 8 32
09 Furnaces 4 6 26
10 Air Coolers 4 4 18
11 Package Refrigeration 4 6 30
12 Electric Generators 4 6 22
13 Air Dryers 3 3 16
14 Conveyors 3 4 20
15 Mills; Crushers 6 6 30
16 Fans, blowers 3 2 12
17 Elevators 4 4 16
18 Motors 3 4 10
19 Dust Collectors 3 4 14
20 Filters 2 3 12
21 Centrifuges 4 6 28
22 Agitators, Mixers 3 4 12
22 Cooling Towers 4 3 26
24 Miscellaneous Equipment 4 4 16
25 Pre-Engineered Package 4 4 24
26 Packings, Linings 3 4 12
Equip.
Class No.
Equipment Class 1
Receive
Quotes
(weeks)
2
Receive
Vendor Data
(weeks)
3
Fabricate
and Ship
(weeks)
number of summary bars on each barchart (that is, report length) developed
by the system:
The user may highlight up to five classes of equipment and up to five specific
items of equipment which appears on all reports except the Contracts
Schedule. Up to five user-defined bars may be added, which appear on the
Engineering and Construction Schedules.
Since a single page report can contain only 24 summary bars, a combination of
system summary bars and user additions that exceeds 24 is printed on a
second page.
The horizontal time scale is adjusted automatically by the system to show
either six years, three years or one and a half years on one page-width
as required.
Fabricate and Ship Weeks
When defining the equipment fabricate and ship time per class, you are
specifying the number of weeks for equipment fabrication and shipping of
vendor data. These times should be entered for any equipment classes whose
anticipated fabricate and ship time differs from the system default. Refer to
Equipment Procurement Schematic for the procurement/delivery sequence.
Impacting the Project Schedule
To produce a project schedule when using Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
TM
or
COST
, an engineering start date must be specified. (Specifying a construction

start date is optional.) The system then develops a critical path method (CPM)
planning schedule based on the estimate scope of work. The estimate scope of
work is tied to the engineering and construction work items in the project.
Included in this schedule are:
Dates and durations for design engineering
Procurement
Delivery of materials and equipment
Site development
Construction.
System Summary Bars With Basic
Engineering
Without
Basic
General Schedule 24 20
Engineering Schedule 16 14
Construction Schedule 19 18
User Additions Bars Equipment
General Schedule N/A 10
Engineering Schedule 5 10
Construction Schedule 5 10
The following items have an impact on the project schedule:
Percentage adjustments for design/procurement duration, delivery times
and construction duration
Project scope
Field labor shifts, productivities, etc.
Index man-hours
Percentage adjustments to man-hours through material/man-hours
adjustments
Supplemental man-hours added through material/man-hour additions
Overrides to the systems fabrication and ship times to increase or
decrease the total construction duration by equipment class (for example,
HE - 20 weeks) or by equipment item (for example, DDT 101 - 10 weeks).
Remember that the project schedule is based on project scope. The project
schedule is more realistic if components are specified correctly and accurately.
Most importantly, keep in mind that the schedule is a preliminary conceptual
schedule. The schedule is not for execution.
Process Control
The Process Control Data may be used to specify the desired configuration and
type of control scheme:
Analog
Digital
Combinations of analog and digital control.
Overview
Two types of process control systems are discussed here:
Analog
Distributed digital control.
The user may select either type, or combinations of each type, to represent
the desired control scheme.
The process control scheme may be defined by two types of data. Control
Center data defines a group of analog or digital devices of similar types,
assigned by the user via a Control Center Reference Number, to provide
control system functions to one or more Areas for Sub-units.
Operator Center data defines a distributed digital control Operator Center; that
is, a staffed center consisting of video display and computer-controlled
indicating, recording, controlling, processing, and transmitting devices.
Operator Centers are used in conjunction with Control Centers only for digital
control schemes.
Groups of analog devices are defined only by analog types of Control Centers.
If Process Control Data is not defined by the user, the system develops one
digital Control Center and one Operator Center for the project to be estimated.
Note: The costs of Operator and Control Centers will be reported in project
estimates only, against the Instrumentation account for the last Area in the
project. Accordingly, control room specifications and other instrumentation-
related items to be reported with project process control items should be
included as part of the last Area.
Introduction
The system is designed to develop a list of quantities of materials, material
costs, and field manpower needed to install items relating to the
instrumentation and control of process equipment.
The users equipment list, as organized into Areas, is used to develop
individual items of instrumentation in the following major categories.
Sensors and transmitters
Panels and panel mounted devices - analog; front/back of panel, ESD
(emergency shut-down), annunciators, switches, etc.
Supply and signal tubing, wiring, bundles
Supports, racks, enclosures, junction boxes
High voltage instrumentation (switches, switch wire, solenoids)
Computer-controlled instruments: controllers, process interface units (high
and low entry level signals), operator stations, co-axial data cable,
redundancy, transducers, barriers, etc.
Final control elements.
The user guides the system in developing instrumentation by defining the
desired control scheme at four discrete levels which are listed here and
discussed below:
Equipment: Instrumentation Volumetric Model
Area considerations (Area, Sub-unit)
Control Center: one or more, each serving a group of areas, containing
panels, mounted instruments (if analog) or computer-controlled
instruments (if digital)
Operator Center: one or more, if required, each serving one or more
Control Centers, containing computer console operator stations for
purposes of processing:
- process information
- alarm conditions
- control signals
- records for display and printing.
Equipment-Instrumentation Volumetric
Model
Each item of equipment selected by the user is assigned a model for
instrumentation. Specific Volumetric Model drawings in the Piping and
Instrumentation Drawings illustrate piping (by line number) and
instrumentation (by loop number).
Volumetric Models for instrumentation of process equipment are assigned
based upon equipment item and type, function to be performed, and special
user requirement identified by applicable type or installation bulks.
For example, a tower would be instrumented as a distillation tower (default
application type) unless it was redefined to function as an absorber, thereby
receiving piping and instrumentation for use as an absorber.
A tank, horizontal or vertical, will be instrumented for normal process
conditions. However, the user may designate knock-out or storage application
requirements thereby revising the nature of piping and instrumentation to be
provided to the vessel.
An installation bulk feature permits the user to create an entire
instrumentation scheme for any item of equipment, or for the user to modify
the systems instrumentation Volumetric Model on a loop by loop basis -
adding a new loop, deleting a system defined loop, or appending loops to a
loop thereby providing for extremely flexible instrumentation schemes.
For each loop, you can specify a sensor, two control valves and their costs with
currency.
There is a field for Hookup option at the Project, Area and bulk level to
specify the hookup option to be used. The default is Primary hookup option.
For creating custom assemblies and choosing your own hookup parts, use
Customer External Files.
In each case, instrumentation materials, quantities, material costs, and field
man-hours to install equipment instrumentation would be reported against the
item of equipment. Material items include:
All local instrumentation, sensors, transmitters, air supplies, tubing, wiring,
control, and relief valves
Equipment panel and instrument costs for those items of equipment
designated by the system (turbine, gas compressor) or by the user to bear
local panel mounted instruments.
Area Considerations
The concept of an Area and Sub-unit are discussed in the Area section. The
Area or Sub-unit may be viewed, for present purposes, as an area or section of
the project, and includes all equipment and bulk items so contained.
For instrumentation, an Area or Sub-unit grouping of equipment items would
be characterized by a unique set of the following:
Designated Control Center
Design level - standard or full. (See Piping and Instrumentation Drawings.)
Type of instrumentation - pneumatic or electronic
Type of transmission, thermocouple extension cabling, and nature
of support
Average length of transmission line from equipment item to Control Center
Cable tray dimensions
Electrical classification to establish cabling and barrier requirements.
It is important that these area criteria affect the installed cost of each
equipment item requiring instrumentation; the design level and type of
instrumentation are most important influences on instrument selection,
quantities and costs. The remaining area criteria heavily influence the lengths
and type of signal wire cable and tubing and are not insignificant.
Instrument materials, quantities, costs and field man-hours to install and test
will be developed by the system and assigned and reported against the area.
These include field junction boxes and wire, cable and tubing runs, conduit,
cable trays serving the area and communicating with the designated
Control Center.
Control Centers
The system surveys the various items of equipment within an Area for Control
Center instrumentation requirements. More than one Area may be delegated
to a Control Center; several Control Centers may be designated by the user. If
of the digital type, such Control Centers would normally be unstaffed electronic
centers that may be grouped together for operator control using the Operator
Center concept described in the next section.
Two classes of Control Centers are defined by the following characteristics:
1 Analog Control Centers -
Electrical, panel mounted instruments based upon pneumatic, electronic,
high voltage switching.
Instruments to record or indicate the value of a variable, or develop and
transmit a control signal (pneumatic, electronic, high voltage switch signal)
to field mounted control elements.
Four types, depending upon desired extent of graphic panels:
- NONEtotally devoid of instruments, panels, etc.
- CONVconventional panel board (4.75 instruments per linear foot
[15.6 per meter])
- SEMI semi-graphics panel (3.75 instruments per linear foot [12.3 per
meter])
- FULL full graphic display (2.5 instruments per linear foot [8.2 per
meter]).
Staffed by Control Center operators.
2 Digital Control Centers -
Devices, that is, process interface units, for conversion of analog signals
(pneumatic, electronic, high voltage switching) into digital computer
signals to be utilized at the designated Operator Center.
Reconversion of computer developed digital control signals into analog
signals (pneumatic, electronic, high voltage switch signals) for
transmission to field mounted control elements.
Limited pretreatment of digital signals (arithmetic, logical, combinatorial).
Display devices appropriate to testing, maintenance functions.
Not generally staffed by operator personnel except for maintenance
and testing.
Designation of Control Center Requirements
The user may designate the desired control scheme, first at the Unit Area level
for purposes of designating area requirements and then at the Control Center
level to establish the nature of the Control Center. Areas and Control Centers
are linked together by a user assigned Control Center Reference Number; the
reference number is defined for each Control Center and referenced for each
Unit Area assigned to transmit/receive signals to/from the defined
Control Center.
Absence of User Control Center Designation
Should the user not define or refer to a Control Center for one or more Areas,
the system develops a digital Control Center for those units. This system-
developed Control Center is referred to as Control Center Reference Number
0 in SCAN and PROJect Estimate reports. Quantities, costs, and man-hours
for instrumentation items required to support those Unit Areas unreferenced
by the user will be developed and listed by the system for Control Center 0.
Operator Centers
The system is designed to evaluate, size, and develop installed costs of digital
control and data processing equipment, cabling and furnishings for
Operator Centers.
The major cost items considered are:
CRTs - though termed CRTs (cathode ray tubes) these are
microprocessors that provide supervisory, control, and data processing
functions in addition to multi-color display and keyboard entry functions.
History module - hardware and software devices for displaying or recording
the history of a variable (important for large or complex process, less so
for small process facilities).
Printers - to permit printed output of selected current or historical values of
variables; to log the operations of the center.
Engineers keyboard - for building and changing configurations or displays.
Local Control Network (LCN) - principally fiber-optic cable (redundant) and
associated microelectronics to direct data moving along the data path to
and from:
- devices in one Operator Center
- one Operator Center and another
- the Operator Center and each of its subordinate Control Centers.
Other data processing peripherals and furniture.
The user may designate the type (local or universal) and size of an Operator
Center, or alternatively permit the system to determine Operator Center
requirements.
Sizing an Operator Center is accomplished by the system by matching the list
of items with process equipment requirements. The principal sizing parameters
are the number of digital control loops and control points to be serviced by the
Operator Center. These parameters are obtained at the Operator Center level
according to the following hierarchy:
Operator Center
Control Center
Area
Equipment and piping control instrumentation.
Thus, control instrumentation requirements at the equipment level are used
first to size individual Control Centers and then to size each Operator Center
upon grouping relevant Control Center requirements.
Example
In the sketch below, a proposed project is to be provided with a combined
analog/digital control system for five areas, that is, Area 100, 200, 300, 400,
500. One section of Area 100 and all of Area 500 is to be provided with a
conventional analog control system. Further, suppose that Area 100 and 400
require individual process interface unit locations, that is, different
Control Centers.
Because Area 100 requires both digital and analog control, it is convenient to
split it into two Areas, one a Sub-unit of the other, and thereby enable the
description of one portion as digitally controlled and the other as analog
controlled.
Reference numbers need be assigned to the Unit Areas and centers. Suppose:
MAIN-100: Area No. = 01
SUB-UNIT 100: Area No. = 01
AREA-200: Area No. = 02
and for the Control Centers:
Digital, for MAIN 100: Center No. 10
Analog, for SUB-UNIT-100: Center No. 11
Digital for AREA-200: Center No. 20
Analog for AREA-500: Center No. 11
and for the Area, a reference number of 90.
The Project Control Data
The Project Control Data would be prepared as follows:
Project Control
Center No. Type
90 Operator Center
10 Digital Control Center
11 Analog Control Center
Note that additional Project Control Data may be appended to this list to
expand the control system for other yet undefined process areas. Up to five
independent Operator centers may be defined along with their subordinate
Control Centers to a combined maximum total of 20.
The Area Data for this Example
In the text below, the Unit Area Data is illustrated; the term etc. denotes all
remaining area information, that is, the complete set of area data and the
component descriptions. Area 100 is split into two sub-units, named MAIN-100
and SUB-UNIT-100:
Note: The Control Center Number is 10 for the Main Section and 11 for the
Sub-unit.
Then for the remaining units:
Area Title
Area Number
Control Center Number
etc.
MAIN-100
01
10
Area Title
Area Number
etc.
SUB-UNIT-100
01
11
Area Title
Area Number
etc.
MAIN-200
02
20
Area Title
Area Number
etc.
MAIN-300
03
20
Note: AREA-200 and AREA-300 share Control Center Number 20; SUB-UNIT-
100 and AREA-500 share analog Control Center Number 11.
Reporting of Results for this Example
PROJect estimate reports would be prepared for this example as follows:
Equipment: instrumentation local to the item would be reported in the
detailed listing of field materials and manpower for the item of equipment.
Area: junction boxes, bundle runs (and associated tray and conduit) would
be developed as an Unit Area cost for each Sub-unit; instrument testing
would be developed for each area.
Project costs: all instrumentation costs for the project would be developed
and reported against the last Unit Area in the project. Analog Control
Centers would be sized and reported independently of digital centers.
Digital Control Center Number 10 would be sized based upon the
requirements of equipment in MAIN-100. Center Number 20 would be sized
from requirements of both AREA-200 and 300; and Center Number 40
from AREA-400 requirements. The Operator Center would be developed
from group requirements, that is, those of Control Centers 10, 20, and 40.
Notes for Defining the Operator Center
The following entry field notes are helpful when defining the type of Operator
Center to serve the instrumentation requirements of subordinate digital
Control Centers. A maximum of five sets of PC OPS Data may be used.
An Operator Center is not provided in support of analog Control Centers.
Area Title
Area Number
etc.
MAIN-400
04
40
Area Title
Area Number
etc.
MAIN-500
05
11
Entry field Note
Operator center no. The Operator Center Reference Number is a unique
number assigned by the user to identify each digital
Operator Center. The reference number, from 01 to 99,
is used to identify the Operator Center in detailed
system reports.
Conset The contract set number (CONSET) identifies which
group of contractors is performing work in this
Operator Center. The CONSET number must have been
previously defined with Contract Scope Data.
CONSET must be specified for multiple contractor type
estimates. CONSET is not applicable to prime
contractor type estimates.
Configuration The configuration consists of items affecting the design
of a Universal Operator Center.
No. of operator CRT Specifies the total number of Operator CRTs (cathode
ray tube terminals) required for the Operator Center;
includes touch screen console and operator keyboard. Micro-
electronics associated with the CRTs provide supervisory and
control functions.
No. of indicating
CRT
Specifies the total number of Indicating CRTs required
for the Operator Center. Upper tier units for indicating only.
The number specified must be less than or equal to the
number of Operator CRTs and the sum of the Operator CRTs
and Indicating CRTs must be 10 or less.
History module Indicates inclusion or exclusion of the history module
for trend analysis.
Engineers
keyboard:
Indicates inclusion or exclusion of an engineering
keyboard for configuration and display building.
LCN Cable Indicates inclusion or exclusion of the Local Control
Network Cable. The Cable is a pair of fiber-optic cables
connecting up to 10 Universal Operator Centers with
their associated Control Centers.
Power supply data The Power Supply to Operator Center specifies the feeder
type and source of power for this Digital Operator Center.
Unit Substation ID A value must be specified if Power Distribution Data is
present in the project or an ERROR condition will prevail.
If Power Distribution Data is not provided, the system will
generate a MAIN and UNIT substation to serve power at the
voltage(s) required by loads in this Operator Center. The
system generated UNIT substation(s) will be assigned ID=0.
The Reference Number consists of two parts:
ID- The ID portion of the Reference Number of the stand-
alone UNIT or principle UNIT substations in the family of
UNIT substations serving power to this Operator Center.
No. - The NO. portion of the Reference Number of the
subordinate Unit substation in the family of UNIT
substations serving power to this Operator Center.
Please see Power Distribution Data for further information.
Cable type Denotes the type of power cable to be used for this
Operator Center.
Cable placement Indicates the desired method of cable placement for
this Operator Center.
Valid entries include:
ABOVE - Cable run above ground.
BELOW - Cable run below grade (not available for wire-/
cable in trays); includes trenching, sandbed and backfill;
one trench allocated for four equipment item cable runs;
cable protection type is defined by the user by General
Project Data Electrical.
Distance to MCC Specifies the distance to the motor control center
serving power to this Operator Center.
Entry field Note
Notes for Defining the Standard
Control Center
The following entry field notes are helpful when defining the standard
control center.
Entry field Note
Control center no. The Control Center Reference Number is a unique number,
from 01 to 99, assigned by the user to identify each Control
Center to serve the instrumentation requirements of the
various Area or Sub-units. This is the same reference number
used in the Area Description to identify the relationship
between the Area and Control Center.
Conset The contract set number (CONSET) identifies which group of
contractors is performing work in this Control Center. The
CONSET number must have been previously defined in
Contract Scope Data.
A Control Center Reference Number must be specified for
multiple contractor estimates. This field is not applicable for
prime contractor type estimates.
Control center type Specifies a symbol representing the types of Control Center,
devices, and general configuration.
Valid entries are:
Analog Control Center
CONV - Conventional display.
SEMI - Semi-graphics display.
FULL - Full graphics display.
NONE - Existing Control Center; costs and manpower
pertaining to all instruments, panels, and peripheral
equipment will be excluded from the estimate.
Digital Control Center
DDCTL - Distributed digital Control Center.
Distance to OPS ctr For distributed digital Control Centers only. Specifies the
distance between this Control Center and the supervisory
Operator Center. The range is 0 to 5000 FEET [0 to 1525 M]. A
redundant data digital path or highway will be developed
using this distance.
Notes for Defining the Standard Control Center - continued
Entry field Note
Design data Design allowance, as a percentage (0 to 100%) of the
number of instrumentation points, loops, devices, etc., that
are developed by the system from Volumetric Models or
from user-defined loops of instrumentation.
Note: 1.If this PC CTL Data is for an analog Control Center
(type symbol = CONV, SEMI, FULL, NONE), the only
functional design allowance is that for Spares.
If for a digital Control Center, allowances apply to each of
the five categories.
Note: 2.The design allowance will be applied on a
percentage basis, that is 100% indicates a one for one basis
(exception, 100% for recorders is a one per ten basis).
Spares(%)
If an analog Control Center, allowance for spares will be
delegated the sizing and selection of field junction boxes,
and pneumatic and cable bundle runs from the field junction
box to the Control Center.
If a digital Control Center, the spares allowance will be
delegated to junction box and tube and cable bundle
sizing and selection, as above, and additionally to
spare boards in either multifunction controllers or
process interface units for (a) controllers, (b)
recorders, and indicators, and (c) thermocouples.
Analog indicators(%) For digital Control Centers only. The design allowance for
analog indicator type instrumentation to be installed in the
Operator Center for this Control Center. The allowance will
be applied to develop additional analog indicators (TI, FI,
etc.) in Operator Center cabinetry based upon the number of
indicating loops serviced by the Control Center.
Analog recorders(%) For digital Control Centers only. The design allowance for
analog recorder type instrumentation to be installed in the
Operator Center for this Control Center. The allowance will
be applied to develop additional analog recorders in
Operator Center cabinetry based upon the number or
recording instruments serviced by the Control Center.
Redundant
control(%)
For digital Control Centers only. Indicate the percent of the
controllers determined by process specifications that require
redundancy. Multifunction - UAC units will be substituted for
the requested percentage of controllers.
Battery back-up(%) For digital Control Centers only. The design allowance for
battery operated back-up supply. The design allowance
provides battery backup for multifunction controller
cabinets only.
Notes for Defining the Standard Control Center - continued
Entry field Note
Power supply data Specifies the feeder type and source of power for this
Control Center.
Unit substation
Specifies the Reference Number of the UNIT substation serving
power to this Control Center. The Reference Number consists of
two parts, as defined by the user with Power Distribution Data.
ID-The ID portion of the Reference Number of the stand-alone
UNIT or principle UNIT substations in the family of UNIT
substations serving power to this Control Center.
No. -The No. portion of the Reference Number of the
subordinate UNIT substation in the family of UNIT substations
serving power to this Control Center.
Cable type
Denotes the type of power cable to be used for this Control
Center.
Cable placement
Indicates the desired method of cable placement for this Control
Center.
ABOVE-Cable run above ground.
BELOW-Cable run below grade (not available for wire/cable
in trays); including trenching, sandbed and backfill, one
trench allocated for four equipment item cable runs; cable
protection type is defined by the user in the General Project
Data - Electrical.
Distance to MCC
Specifies the distance to the motor control center serving power
to this Control Center
Notes for Defining the PLC
Control Center
The following entry field notes are helpful when defining the PLC
control center.
Entry field Note
Control center no. The Control Center Reference Number is a unique number, from
01 to 99, assigned by the user to identify each Control Center to
serve the instrumentation requirements of the various Unit
Areas. This is the same reference number used in the Unit Area
Description to identify the relationship between the Unit Area
and Control Center.
Conset The contract set number (CONSET) identifies which group of
contractors is performing work in this Control Center. The
CONSET number must have been previously defined in Contract
Scope Data.
A Control Center Reference Number must be specified for
multiple contractor estimates. This field is not applicable for
prime contractor type estimates.
Power supply data Specifies the feeder type and source of power for this Control
Center.
Unit substation Specifies the Reference Number of the UNIT substation serving
power to this Control Center. The Reference Number consists of
two parts, as defined by the user with Power Distribution Data.
ID - The ID portion of the Reference Number of the stand-alone
UNIT or principle UNIT substations in the family of UNIT
substations serving power to this Control Center.
No. - The No. portion of the Reference Number of the
subordinate UNIT substation in the family of UNIT substations
serving power to this Control Center.
Cable type
Denotes the type of power cable to be used for this Control
Center.
Cable placement Indicates the desired method of cable placement for this Control
Center.
ABOVE - Cable run above ground.
BELOW - Cable run below grade (not available for wire/cable in
trays); including trenching, sandbed and backfill, one trench
allocated for four equipment item cable runs; cable protection
type is defined by the user in the General Project Data -
Electrical.
Distance to MCC Specifies the distance to the motor control center serving power
to this Control Center.
Overview of System Input
Specifications for Power
Distribution
The following figure graphically displays the four levels of input specifications
for defining electrical installation bulks:
1 Project level
2 Area level
3 Component Level
4 Component Installation Level.
The electrical input specifications, which include default values that may be
overridden, take a few minutes to define for even the most detailed power
distribution network.
At the component level, process equipment, plant bulks and buildings give rise
to electrical bulks. Installation procedures are available for quoted items as
well as items from the user library of components.
Power Distribution
The Power Distribution Data specifies the configuration and size of a projects
electrical power distribution system. The user may specify the location and
size of each transmission line, main and unit substation, the degree of
redundancy, and the type and method of placement of distribution cable.
The Power Distribution Data works in conjunction with the voltage levels
defined by the user for General Project Data and Area specifications and
component requirements within the unit.
Most users define the distribution configuration (for example, which main
substation is to feed which downstream unit substation) and cable
placement. The system will then size the components based upon power
requirements to be fulfilled in each area by drivers, lighting, tracing, etc. and
then size unit and main substation components, always heading upstream, to
size the
transmission line.
Mode of Supply and Distribution
The system offers the user a choice of either a US-based or UK-based mode of
electrical power supply, distribution, and associated components. The mode is
currently determined by the users selection of the country base location. The
following table identifies the default values and principal differences between
the two bases.
Principal Differences of Electrical Power Supply Between Country Base
Location
Electrical Power Supply Items US Base UK Base
Line or feeder voltage 69 KV at 60 HZ 66 KV at 50 HZ
Main Substation
Secondary voltage
(distribution and equipment voltage)
13.8 KV 11.0 KV
Unit Substation
Secondary voltages
(distribution and equipment voltages)
4160 V
480 V
3300 V
415 V
Cable Types Wire (individual
conductors) on
tray or in
conduit, or
armored cable
Multi-core cable
on tray or in
conduit, or
armored cable
Cable Gauge AWG MM2 gauge
Power Distribution Components
Power distribution components are sized and cost estimated based on
information provided with General Project Data, (project cabling and
intermediate voltage levels), the Power Distribution Data (distribution
scheme), the Unit Area Data and the list of equipment and bulk items requiring
electrical power.
Figure PD-1 serves two purposes. The left side of the figure lists the major
power distribution components that are designed and reported by the system.
The right side is a schematic of a sample power distribution
network.
Figure PD-1: Illustration of Power Distribution Components
The individual components constituting a typical power distribution system
(detailed data instructions follow).
Primary Feeders - Transmission Lines
Electrical power for a processing facility is either generated directly by the
consumer or transmitted to the processing facility at high voltage (generally
less than 250 KV) on overhead transmission lines. Primary feeder lines run on
poles from the grid tie-in to a dead-end structure in the main substation
switchyard.
Main Substation
The main substation consists of one or more main transformers that distribute
power through switchgear to unit substations.
The main transformer reduces the voltage of the incoming power (at the
transmission line voltage) to a level at which it may be safely and economically
distributed through switchgear to:
1 Unit substation for further transformation and distribution at a lower
voltage
2 Drivers in the 11-14 KV class within the process plant.
A disconnect switch isolates each main transformer from its power supply
when necessary, while the oil circuit breaker protects against abnormal
conditions. Oil circuit breakers (O.C.B.) are generally used in high voltage
(over 10 KV) applications.
The main substation switchgear protects each unit substation from damage
due to abnormal operating conditions. The main substation switchgear
includes circuit breakers and metering devices that can detect an abnormal
condition and automatically open the current-carrying circuit in which the fault
occurs.
Cable from the main substation terminates at either unit substations or at
motors requiring power at the high voltage supplied by the main substation.
Unit Substations
Electrical equipment is normally not evenly dispersed throughout a process
facility. Heavy power users (pumps, compressors, etc.) usually are located
within well-defined boundaries. The substations serving these areas of high
load-density are called unit substations or load centers because they are
located near the center or the electrical load.
The transformer in the unit substation reduces the voltage of power supplied
by the main substation to the voltage required for the equipment served by
this substation. The power path consists of motor starters, power cable, and
control wire.
The on/off switch for the motor is connected by control wire to a set of
contacts in the motor starter, which, when closed, allows power to be sent to
the motor.
The motor starter provides a means of starting and stopping the motor and
also protects the motor from abnormal operating conditions.
When several motor starters are installed together in a common cabinet, they
become a motor control center (MCC). Each MCC is protected from abnormal
operating conditions by unit substation switchgear.
Redundancy
When designing an electrical distribution system, a decision must be made as
to the degree and type of redundancy to be built into the power distribution
system. The greater the degree of redundancy, the more reliable the system.
The additional equipment required for increased reliability will make the power
distribution system more expensive.
The system offers the user two options:
1 The simple radial system
2 The spot network system.
Both radial and spot systems are illustrated in Figure PD-2.
The following table lists the characteristics of each option.
Referring to Figure PD-2A for an illustration of a simple radial system, a single
main substation transformer is shown to distribute power to two unit
substation transformers and a 5,000 HP motor. The unit substation
transformers in turn are shown to distribute power via switchgear and MCCs
to the equipment in the appropriate Areas.
Should a unit substation or main substation transformer fail, the equipment
served by these would be inoperative.
The spot network system has 100% redundancy. It is the most expensive and
the most reliable power distribution system. Each set of switchgear is fed by
two transformers. Either transformer is capable of handling the entire electrical
load by itself. This system is commonly used in remote locations where
replacement parts and skilled power system maintenance personnel
are scarce.
Figure PD-2B is an illustration of a spot network system. Two transformers in a
single main substation are shown delivering power to two unit substations.
Each unit substation contains two transformers which in turn distribute power
via switchgear and MCCs to the process equipment classified in the
appropriate Area.
Should one transformer fail in either the main or unit substation, the
companion transformer would carry the entire load.
Characteristics Simple Radial Spot Network
Redundancy 0% 100%
Cost Less expensive More expensive
Reliability Less reliable More reliable
Typical usage:
Spare parts
Skilled maintenance
On-hand
On-hand
Scarce
Scarce
Severity of shutdown Not critical Critical
Figure PD-2B Schematic= Spot Network System
Some sections of a process plant are more critical to the continuous operation
of the plant than other sections. For example, a section of the plant which
operates in the batch mode may have sufficient surge capacity so that the rest
of the facility would continue operating until repairs were made if this section
lost power. The user may therefore want to specify some substations to be
spot network systems and others to be simple radial systems. Further, one
user might require several main substations. A general example showing
combinations of multiple systems of simple radial and spot networks is shown
in Figure PD-3.
Usage Instructions
Power Distribution Information
The Power Distribution Data provides the means of designating each
transmission LINE, MAIN, and UNIT substation and the cable between them.
The transmission line provides power to a family of MAIN and UNIT
substations.
If the MAIN substation provides service to one or more UNIT substations, each
may be described in detail using the input parameters in the Power
Distribution Data.
A unit substation may be designated to supply power to one or more areas,
and/or to supply power at reduced voltage to another UNIT substation. In the
latter case, the higher voltage UNIT substation is termed a principle UNIT
substation, providing power to one or more subordinate unit substations. The
relationship between principle and subordinates is indicated by defining a
group ID and individual member No., thus forming the unit substation
reference number.
The Substation Reference Number is important for accumulating power usage.
This reference number points to those Unit Areas to be served by the
referenced unit substation.
All equipment in an Area, except motors driven at the distribution voltage,
must be served by the referenced UNIT substation. Should a motor require
power at the distribution voltage, than a separate power line would
automatically be drawn from the MAIN substation serving that unit. Should a
motor require power at some voltage not supplied by the referenced UNIT
substation, then the system will make that voltage available by:
1 Creating a new UNIT substation that draws power from the MAIN
substation serving the referenced substation, if it is of single tap type, or
2 Drawing power form another tap from the referenced substation, if it is of
the multi-tap type.
Substation Buildings
Substation buildings are not automatically generated and must be specified
separately using the Building Data.
Non-Standard Power Networks
The user may wish to incorporate a power distribution network of special
design. Practiced users use a strategy based upon one or more system power
estimates, using the system design methods in combination with user-selected
power equipment bulk items.
Figure PD-3: Illustrative Example of Multiple Main and Unit Substations with
Radial and Spot Network Systems
Unreferenced Area Requiring Power
One UNIT substation is generated to serve those Areas for which a substation
reference number was not specified.
Absence of Power Distribution Data
If no Power Distribution Data is specified, the system generates one UNIT
substation and one MAIN substation to serve the entire facility. The
characteristics of the substations and components are determined from the
default values for the Power Distribution Data.
Reporting of Results
Project estimate reports will be prepared as follows:
1 Component: Electrical materials local to a component would be reported in
the detailed listing of field materials and manpower for the component; for
example, power and signal cable, local and remote start/stop switches,
indicator lights, electrical heat tracing, lights, masts, and grounding.
2 Area: MCC (Motor Control Centers cabinetry and starters), MCC equipped
space (empty cabinetry), area lighting, lighting and heat tracing
transformers and associated panels, switchgear and cabling, ground grid,
cable trays testing.
3 Project: UNIT and MAIN substation costs of transformers, switchgear,
cabling, transformer concrete pads, grounding, transmission LINE,
structures, testing, etc.; costs are reported against the last Unit Area in the
project data.
Power Description Data
A series of data is used to identify a unique segment of the power distribution
network. Individual types of one or more Power Distribution Data includes the
following:
Transmission LINE
MAIN substation
Stand-alone UNIT or family of UNIT substations.
The sequence of Power Distribution Data designates the top-down hierarchy of
the users power distribution network.
If no Power Distribution Data is specified, the system sizes and costs a MAIN
substation and UNIT substation to provide power to the various load centers
contained in the Unit Area descriptions. The characteristics of the substations
and electrical components are defined by the General Project - Electrical Data,
Unit Area - Electrical Data, and power requirements (power and supply
voltage). The entire power network is conditioned by the country base location
defined for the project.
Project Definition
Project Title Data is used to convey user descriptions and specifications for the
following major items:
Project title and document data.
Country base location - establishes basis for design procedures, currency,
and evaluation of costs and man-hours.
Currency data - used to enter the display costs in all reports in a currency
other than the system currency base for the country base location of
the estimate.
Units of Measure - used to select either of two system-defined base sets of
units of measure: I-P (Inch-Pound) or METRIC. See Units of Measure for
a complete definition of these and other user-defined sets of units
of measure.
Rates to be applied for evaluating costs of freight, taxes, contingencies,
fee, and special charges.
The specification of the Project Title Data should be prepared and reviewed
carefully. Special consideration should be given to this data since it controls
the content and numeric values of the entire project.
Country Base
Table T-1 illustrates the differences in style upon selection of the country
base. The differences are summarized in this table according to the hierarchy
of the system; the tabulation does not imply relative importance of each item.
Designation of the country base location is mandatory, as the country base
defines the style of engineering, materials selection and costs, and
construction manpower and costs. Specifically, the country base
location defines:
Base monetary unit (which may be redefined)
Base set of units of measure (which may be redefined)
Base indices for system costs of material, construction, design engineering,
and construction management, important for purposes of escalating
an estimate
Base construction manpower pool: crafts, productivity, wage rates, crew
mix, work week, and shift work (which may be adjusted to suit the actual
manpower pool)
Base of engineering: disciplines, wage rates, and expenses (which may be
adjusted to reflect the rates, productivities, etc. for the proposed scope
of engineering)
Base of design codes and installation standards and practices, for example,
vessel design, electrical power distribution (which may be selected or
adjusted).
Currency Base
The user-designated country base location implies a base monetary unit, for
example, Dollars for US, Pounds Sterling for UK, Thousand Yen for JP, Euros
for EU, and Saudi Arabian Riyals for Saudi Arabia. You can define a currency
unit for the estimate and provide a conversion for the estimate currency
relative to the base monetary unit. Once the currency base is defined by the
user, all user-entered costs, such as freight rates, ready-mix cost, wage rates,
lump sum costs, and equipment or bulk costs, are expected to be in the user-
defined currency units. The system uses the user-defined currency and
conversion value to convert system-developed costs from the system
monetary base to the user-defined currency.
Table T-1: System Default Values Affected by Selection of Country Base
Primary Effect of Selected Country Base
Item Description US Base UK Base JP Base EU Base ME Base
Base monetary
Unit
US Dollars Pounds Sterling Thousand Yen Euros Saudi Arabian
Riyals
Base Units of
Measure
I-P METRIC METRIC METRIC I-P
Units of Measure revise I-P variable revise METRIC
variable
revise METRIC
variable
revise METRIC
variable
revise I-P variable
System Base
Indices
US indices UK indices JP indices EU indices ME indices
Electrical Feeder
Line Voltage
(and entire mode
of distribution)
34.5KV (60HZ) 33KV (50HZ) 33KV (50HZ) 33KV (50HZ) 115KV (60HZ)
Pressure Vessel
Design Code
(materials and
temperature/
stress
relationships)
ASME (Section
VIII, Division 1)
BS5500 JIS DIN ASME (Section VIII,
Division 1)
Depth of
Concrete
Footings
48 INCHES [1200
MM]
36 INCHES [1000
MM]
36 INCHES [1000
MM]
36 INCHES [1000
MM]
30 INCHES (750
MM)
Structural Steel
Shapes (INCH-
POUND/METRIC)
Note 1: See
Below
AISC
AISC
AISC
BSI
AISC
BSI
AISC
Euronorm
I-P: AISC
METRIC: Euronorm
Manpower pool;
base of crafts,
crew mix,
productivity,
wage rates
Houston/Gulf
Coast
100,000 MHR
Union
1 shift
40 hr. week
Northwest UK
100,000 MHR
Site or Natl
Agreement
1 Shift
40 hr. week
Bonus
Tokyo, Japan
100,000 MHR
Union
1 shift
40 hr. week
Rotterdam,
Netherlands
100,000 MHR
Site
Agreement
1 shift
40 hr. week
Dhahran, Saudi
Arabia
100,000 MHR
Site Agreement
1 shift
40 hr. week
Project
Schedule:
duration
Adjusted US
MHRS
Adjusted UK
MHRS
Adjusted JP MHRS Adjusted EU MHRS Adjusted ME MHRS
Equipment
Rental/Plant
rental rates
US rates and
selection
UK rates and
selection
JP rates and
selection
EU rates and
selection
ME rates and
selection
Engineering
Department:
base of
disciplines, wage
rates,
productivity ,
and expenses
US Base UK Base JP Base EU Base ME Base
Cost Reporting: Currency and System
Base Indices
Costs developed by the system without assistance of user-entered rates,
costs, and so on, are evaluated at the reported values of the System Base
Indices for the designated country base. See Indexing/Escalation Data.
Cost Reporting: Currency and Escalation
Costs provided by the user in the form of a cost, cost per unit, etc., are
presumed to be in the user-defined currency and valued at a point in time
reflected by the user-specified values for the User Base Indices.
System-developed costs will be elevated from the system base to the user
base condition by index ratio and further escalated by escalation indices.
Prime
Contractors:
construction
overheads
From adjusted US
MHRS or user
entry US indirect
rates
From adjusted UK
MHRS or user
entry Uk indirect
rates
From adjusted JP
MHRS or user
entry JP indirect
rates
From adjusted EU
MHRS or user
entry EU indirect
rates
From adjusted ME
MHRS or user entry
ME indirect rates
Contract Fee
Structure: based
on costs reduced
to base time
Costs reduced to
$, US indirect
rates
Costs reduced to
, UK indirect
rates
Costs reduced to
Thous , JP
indirect rates
Costs reduced to
, EU indirect
rates
Costs reduced to
SAR, ME indirect
rates
Power
Distribution
MAIN
distribution
voltage UNIT
voltage Wire
types
60 HZ
13.8 KV
4160V
wire (trayed or in
conduit) or
armored US wire
gauge
50 HZ
11KV
3300 V
multi-core cable
(trayed or in
conduit) or
armored gauge in
MM2)
50 HZ
11KV
3300 V
multi-core cable
(trayed or in
conduit) or
armored gauge in
MM2)
50 HZ
11KV
3300 V
multi-core cable
(trayed or in
conduit) or
armored gauge in
MM2)
60 HZ
13.8 KV
Process
equipment
US cost models,
US base costs
UK cost models,
UK base costs
JP cost models, JP
base costs
EU cost models,
EU base costs
ME cost models, ME
base costs
Bulks: piping,
civil, steel,
instrumentation,
electrical,
insulation, paint
US cost modes,
US type
descriptions, US
base costs
UK costs modes,
UK type
descriptions, UK
base costs
JP cost modes, JP
type descriptions,
JP base costs
EU cost modes, EU
type descriptions,
EU base costs
ME cost modes, ME
type descriptions,
ME base costs
User-specified
supplemental
cost
none none none none none
Note 1: If GB150 Equipment Design is selected:
I-P: AISC
METRIC: Chinese Structural Shapes per GB/T 11263
Primary Effect of Selected Country Base
Item Description US Base UK Base JP Base EU Base ME Base
Units of Measure
The country base location, once designated by the user, implies a base set of
units of measure, for example, I-P for US, METRIC for UK, EU, JP, and ME. You
can reverse this choice, or create a hybrid unit of measure, by defining the
variable to be revised, the label for the new unit of measure, and the
conversion from old to new unit of measure. However, such redefinition could
have unpredictable downstream effects; for example, in selection of plates,
wire, tubing, pipe, and so on.
Again, all user input is expected to be in the defined set of units of measure
and all reporting by the system conforms to the established set of units
of measure.
Workforce
Two of the most significant variables that account for construction cost
differences from one location to another are the productivity of field manpower
and the wage rates that prevail for each geographic area.
The system recognizes four country base locations US, UK, JP, EU, and ME.
Upon selecting a country base location, the user obtains a base set of crafts,
wage rates, crew mixes, production rates, and so on, for field manpower
consistent with the selected country base location.
The Workforce Data can be used to change the system base wage rates,
workweek, and productivities. This input can, therefore, be an effective tool in
helping the user examine the effects of local field manpower on prospective
plant sites. In addition, modifications may be made to the system craft and
crew mixes.
Multiple Workforces
In a prime contractor estimate, the system is limited to one set of wage rates,
workweek and productivities (that is, one workforce) per estimate. In a
contracts case, however, the user may define up to nine different construction
workforces (CWF) in one project. This is accomplished by developing multiple
sets of wage rates and productivities with each set identified by a workforce
reference number. This reference number is used in the Contract Definition
Data to indicate which workforce is assigned to each contractor.
Wage Rates/Productivity
There are two types of wage rate and productivity data:
General data applicable to all crafts in the workforce
Specific data by craft.
The general data may be used to globally set the wage rates and productivities
of all crafts, either as a percentage of some reference base or as a fixed rate.
The reference base may be either the system base rates or the rates of a
previously defined workforce. These globally assigned rates may then be
modified for individual crafts by entering specific rate data for those crafts.
Example 1:
Suppose workforce 1 is to be assigned wage rates that are 110% of the
system base rates and a productivity of 80% of the system base (the symbol
B signifies the system base).
Then the general data would be coded as follows:
CWF = 1
(ALL CRAFTS -% OF BASE)
BASE = B
WAGE RATE% = 110
PROD.% = 80
Example 2:
Suppose workforce 2 is to be assigned wage rates that are 105% of the rates of
workforce 1 and a productivity equal to the system base (100%). Then a second set
of general data would be added as follows:
CWF = 2
(ALL CRAFTS -% OF BASE)
BASE = 1
WAGE RATE% = 105
PROD.% = 125
This would result in wage rates that are 110 x 105/100 = 115.5% of the
system base and a productivity that is 80 x 125/100 = 100% of the system
base. Obviously, the same result could have been obtained for workforce 2
by using the system base B as the referenced base, a WAGE RATE% equal
to 115.5 and a PROD.% equal to 100.
Example 3:
Suppose in workforce 2 Craft X (where X is the craft code) is to have a rate
of $17.70 per hour and a productivity of 75%. Then specific craft data would
be added for workforce 2 with the follow data:
CWF = 2
(CRAFT WAGE RATES/PRODUCTIVITIES)
CRAFT CODE = X
WAGE RATE COST/MH =17.50
PROD.%= 75
Example 4:
Suppose workforce 3 is to be assigned a fixed wage rate and productivity for
all crafts of $12.00 per hour and 90%, respectively. Then a third set of general
data would be coded as follows:
CWF=3
(ALL CRAFTS - FIXED RATES)
WAGE RATE COST/MH=12.00
PROD.%=90
Again, exceptions could be made to the fixed rates for workforce 3 by
entering specific data for individual crafts.
Unless the user had adjusted indirects, the wage rate used in the estimate
should be the actual unloaded cost (in the user-defined currency) per man-
hour for the craft, and should not include any fringe or burdens. Fringe
benefits, burdens, and other related construction overhead accounts are
itemized and determined separately by the system.
Data is available for deleting indirect costs from the estimate. This may be
used if the wage rates are to be considered all-inclusive rates, and separate
calculation of indirect costs is unnecessary.
The wage rates for two general crafts are itemized separately. These are craft
code 98 (Helper) and craft code 99 (Foreman). These two crafts are accorded
special treatment because they appear in most crews, and their wage rates
and productivities are typically related to the crew in which they appear. Their
wage rates may be specified as either fixed rates or crew dependent rates.
Their productivities, however, are determined by the system and are a function
of the crew productivity.
The user may enter one or more craft wage rates. Omitted rates are calculated
by the system based upon a set of system default values as tabulated
elsewhere in the Icarus Reference. The ultimate value used by the system is
determined by:
The degree to which the user has provided craft rates
The user-specified value of the Escalation and User Base Indices for
Construction in the Indexing/Escalation Data.
For instance, if a user has not submitted any Workforce Data, then the values
for wage rates for all crafts are based upon the system Base Wage Rates,
subject to:
Elevation to the user base of construction (UBI/SBI)
Escalation (EI/UBI).
If, however, the user has specified one or more craft wage rates, those rates
are taken by the system as valued at the User Base Index and subject to
escalation.
Example 5:
To illustrate escalation, suppose the user entered a craft rate of 12.00 per hour
and construction indices of 1248 for escalation and 1200 for the base (see
Indexing/Escalation Data). The system considers the user rate at the users
base index for ACCUM reporting and for SPREAD reporting will figure an
escalated rate of 12.00 x (1248/1200) = 12.48.
It should be noted that productivity is expressed as a percentage value; that
is, 100 implies a base productivity. A value of 50 implies a less effective
workforce, thereby doubling the system-calculated base man-hours. A value of
150 implies a more effective work force, thereby obtaining man-hours at two
thirds (100/150) of the system-calculated base man-hours. For a more
detailed description of the base or norm productivity for each craft, refer to the
discussion of productivity provided later in this section.
Crew Mix Modifications
The system crew mixes may be modified using Crew Mix Data. This data
enables the transfer of man-hours from one craft to another. By manipulating
crafts in this manner, a project may be modelled as an open or a closed shop
or some variation of the two. All or a portion of the man-hours in one craft may
be transferred to one or more other crafts. Man-hours may be deleted from
the estimate by transferring them out of a craft and by not indicating a second
craft to which they are assigned. A useful example of this procedure is the
removal of crane operators from the estimate if the rental rates for cranes
include operators.
Man-hours are transferred between crafts by indicating FROM which craft the
man-hours are removed and TO which craft they are added. The man-hours
that will be transferred are only those initially assigned to the craft by the
system and not those previously assigned to the craft by the user through
other Crew Mix Data.
Crafts 98 and 99 (Helper and Foreman) may be assigned man-hours from any
other craft, but their man-hours may not be assigned to any other single craft.
If their man-hours are reassigned, they will be allotted to the principal crafts in
each crew. The principal crafts are indicated elsewhere in the Icarus
Reference. The reason for this special condition is that these two crafts are
composite crafts that appear in most crews, and to allow their assignment to
any single other craft would distort the consistency of many crews. For
example, if man-hours were transferred from Foreman to Pipefitters, then
Pipefitters would appear incorrectly in every crew which had contained
a Foreman.
If multiple workforces are used, each workforce may be structured differently
by providing the appropriate man-hour transfers. If a workforce is defined as
having wage rates and productivities at some percentage of a previously
defined workforce, it will also use the same crew mix modifications as that
workforce. This may be changed, however, by coding new crew mix
modifications for the second workforce.
Craft Names
The name of any system base craft may be replaced by entering the craft code
and the desired name. The system base craft codes and craft names are listed
elsewhere in the Icarus Reference. In addition, a new craft may be created by
specifying a name for one of the blank craft codes. If, however, a new craft is
created, it must be assigned a wage rate and productivity and it must be
assigned some man-hours from another craft. Only one set of craft names may
be defined per estimate (that is, craft names may not be changed from one
workforce to another). It is not, however, necessary for all crafts to be used by
all workforces.
Reports
Wage rates and productivity values, as adjusted, develop man-hours and
manpower costs, craft by craft. Craft man-hours and costs are reported
against tasks performed in various system reports and summarized for the
project in the Field Manpower Summary.
Productivity Concepts
This section is devoted to a discussion of:
How the system utilizes a user-specified productivity value
The variables affecting productivity and their numeric evaluation.
The user may enter an all-crafts productivity figure and specific craft
productivity. The all-crafts productivity value, set at 100% by the system in
the absence of a user entry, will be used to establish the productivity for any
and all user-omitted craft productivities. The all-crafts productivity will not be
applied in any manner to user-specified craft productivity
User-entered craft productivities should be considered as efficiencies, and
man-hours developed by the system to perform a specific task by that craft
will be adjusted accordingly.
Example 6:
Suppose at the systems base, six hours of Craft A are required to set a vessel.
If the productivity of Craft A were entered as 50%, then the adjusted system
value would be (100/50) x 6 = 12 hours. Thus Craft A is 50% efficient
compared to the systems base. Similarly, a craft productivity of 200% relative
to the systems base will indicate doubly effective craftsmen and thus half the
base man-hours.
A time-proven and extremely useful method of quantifying a complex subject
such as field productivity is as follows:
Establish a standard set of key variables and base conditions for each
variable
Evaluate, for each variable, the deviations expected for the actual
conditions from the base conditions
Combine the identified individual deviations, thereby forming an overall
productivity relative to the base conditions.
The five key productivity variables (PV) and their associated system-base
definitions are:
PV1:
Source of Manpower Pool, sometimes identical to location of
construction site.
US Base - Houston/Gulf Coast, time period 1972-1973.
UK Base - Northwest UK, 1979.
JP Base - Japan.
Evaluation of deviation for other sources - area data sources.
PV2:
Size of Project, as measured by total direct and subcontract field man-
hours.
Base - Medium-size, 100,000 man-hours of field manpower.
Evaluation of deviation for other project sizes - change in productivity
vs man-hours shown in Figure W-1.
Figure W-1: Job Size Adjustment (PV2)
PV3:
Mode of Manpower; closed or open shop.
US Base - Closed shop.
UK Base - Site or national agreement.
JP Base - Closed shop.
ME Base - Site agreement.
Evaluation of deviation - determined by construction site location and local
conditions, effect of site/national manpower agreements for the particular
project.
PV4:
Length of Work Week:
Base - 40-hour work week.
Evaluation of deviation - automatically evaluated by system based upon
user work week input on general Workforce Data, specifically through
relationships shown in Figure W-2. The system value may be offset by
creating a value of PV4 sufficient to adjust the system value to the users
desired value.
Figure W-2: Productivity Versus Work Week (PV4) - First Shift
PV5:
All Other Effects, such as general economy, work to be performed, kind
of manpower, quality of supervision, job conditions, weather, and so on.
Base - Reasonably average conditions, all other productivity variables
at their base value. Evaluations of deviations - Table W-1 and the
following associated discussion for this productivity variable.
Table W- 1: Productivity Element Table (PV5)
Productivity Element
Low
Productivity (%)
Average High
50 85 100 115 140
1 General Economy
Local business trend
Construction volume
Unemployment
Prosperous
Stimulated
High
Low
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Hard times
Depressed
Low
High
2 Amount of work
Site complexity
Manual Operations
Mechanized operations
Extensive
Dense
Extensive
LImited
Average
Average
Average
Average
Limited
Sparse
Limited
Extensive
3 Field Manpower Pool
Training
Wages
Supply
Poor
Poor
Low
Scarce
Average
Average
Average
Normal
Good
Good
High
Surplus
The overall productivity per craft or for all crafts is developed from the product
of the individual deviations and final conversion to a percentage figure:
Overall Productivity = PV1 x PV2 x PV3 x PV4 x PV5
In the reference charts and tables mentioned, productivity variables are each
identified as a percentage deviation from the system base of 100% for
that variable.
In developing the overall productivity, each deviation should be reduced to a
fraction by division by 100, and the final resulting figure appropriately rounded
to a significant value and then converted to a percentage for entry in the data.
Productivity Variable: Other Effects - PV3
The Productivity Element Table (Table W-1) enables you to determine
productivity for proposed plant facilities over a wide range of working
conditions and local restrictions. Productivity deviation is classified into three
basic ranges: low, average and high. The low end of the range indicates an
efficiency of 50% to 85%; average is indicated by an efficiency of 85% to
115%; and the high end of the range is indicated by an efficiency of 115% to
140%. These percentages are based on the amount of work a typical
construction worker can be expected to perform under a given set of
conditions. Given ideal circumstances, a field crew may achieve an
approximation of 140% efficiency. In actual estimating, you should not count
on this high degree of productivity unless the operations in the project are
highly mechanized. In manual-operations such as bricklaying, pipe fitting, and
insulating, for example, the scheduling of high-range productivity may mean
4 Field Manpower Supervision
Training
Wages
Supply
Poor
Poor
Low
Scarce
Average
Average
Average
Normal
Good
Good
High
Surplus
5 Job Conditions
Management
Materials and site
Required workmanship
Length of operation
Poor
Poor
Unfavorable
First Rate
Short
Average
Average
Average
Regular
Average
Good
Good
Favorable
Passable
Long
6 Weather
Precipitation
Cold
Heat
Bad
Much
Bitter
Oppressive
Fair
Some
Moderate
Moderate
Good
Occasional
Occasional
Occasional
7 Construction Equipment
Applicability
Condition
Maintenance and repairs
Poor
Poor
Poor
Slow
Normal
Normal
Fair
Average
Good
Good
Good
Quick
8 Delays
Job Flexibility
Equipment delivery
Expediting
Numerous
Poor
Slow
Poor
Some
Average
Normal
Average
Minimum
Good
Prompt
Good
Productivity Element
Low
Productivity (%)
Average High
that the contractor will have to push field crews for maximum production
during the entire course of the projects.
In general, the productivity represented by this class of variables is a function
of two major factors: the present national economy and the specific local
conditions under which the work is to be accomplished for the project. The first
major factor (present economy) directly affects the productivity of the
individual construction worker. In good times, when construction jobs are
plentiful and manpower is scarce, productivity usually decreases, resulting in
increasing field costs. In normal times, average productivity and costs are the
rules. During depressions, recessions or slumps in the economy, manpower
becomes plentiful and more productive; consequently, field costs decline. The
Productivity Element Table (Table W-1) has been assembled to reflect variables
of major impact.
The second major factor (local conditions) affecting productivity relates more
directly to the project. It consists of the many variables that influence
construction activity, such as the character of the job site, volume of work to
be performed, quantity of available manpower, and other such unusual
conditions as dense or sparse plot plans, etc. Each of these variables is listed
in the Productivity Element Table. You should review these variables, keeping
in mind both the existing and foreseeable conditions that will affect the
proposed construction project. At the same time, you must make an
evaluation of the contractor as a productive unit to determine potential
performance under a given set of circumstances. A reasonable approach to
obtain a composite value of Productivity Variable 5 (PV5) is the averaging of
the eight major categories of individual elements in Table W-1.
Example 7:
After studying a proposed project, a user arrived at the following values for
individual categories of productivity:
The average value for productivity is the total divided by eight:
Productivity Variable (PV5) = 765/8 = 99.6%.
Example 8:
Consider Example 7 to be extended to a revamp. Suppose the revamp requires
twice the man-hours of a normal grassroots project. Then, a large revamp
project (assume a 90% Job Size Productivity, Figure W-1) would be figured at
a compounded effect: Productivity per Productivity Element Table x Job Size
Productivity x Revamp Productivity =.956 x.9 x.5 = 0.43 (43% productivity).
Item Productivity
Element Category
Deviation,%
1 General economy 9
2 Amount of work 100
3 Manpower 75
4 Manpower supervision 100
5 Job conditions 110
6 Weather 90
7 Construction equipment 110
8 Delays 100
Total 765
Example 9:
Should but a small portion of the project be subject to revamp, that portion
may be described as one or more Areas or Sub-areas. In this example, the
man-hours would be adjusted by 200% values for the appropriate accounts
using code of account indexing within the area. The workforce productivities
would, of course, be entered free of the revamp effect.
Work Item Concept
The work item concept, Figure W-3 relates manpower to materials installation
requirements. The user may recall the role of the Volumetric Model to generate
a bill of material types and quantities. The role of the Work Item Model is to
develop crew requirements to accomplish the task of installing each item in the
bill of materials. Thus the Work Item Model, when applied to a particular task
such as placing ribber (Figure W-4), must develop a crew mix and man-hours
for each craft.
Figure W-3: Typical Civil Tasks and Work Items
Adjustment for Craft Productivity
The system contains several hundred Work Item Models with base manpower
requirements established for the particular country base location. A user-
entered craft productivity would be used to adjust the base man-hours
developed by the Work Item Models.
Adjustment for the Effective Hour
In the Work Item Models, when man-hours are assigned to crafts,
consideration is made as to the reality of work spread over a day rather than
over a short time-measured duration. Thus system-base man-hours are actual
hours, based on a 42-minute hour, reflecting the time required to initiate the
complete task. Should the project be managed under a different working time,
the productivity should be adjusted as in Figure W-5.
Figure W-5: Productivity Versus Working Minutes Per Hour
Adjustments for Work Week
The duration of the actual work week and number of shifts to be employed
during construction may be defined in the Workforce Data. Should the users
schedule deviate from the 40-hour, 1-shift basis for Work Item Models, the
system makes an automatic adjustment to the Work Item-developed man-
hours for each craft by the relationship illustrated in Figure W-6.
Figure W-6: Job Duration Versus Work Week
Engineering
The project scope is analyzed by the systems engineering model to determine
man-hours and costs for design engineering, procurement and construction
supervision. The system-calculated values for engineering may be adjusted by
using the Engineering Data. This data allows input modifications/adjustments
at two levels:
An entire phase of engineering
A particular discipline within a phase.
The systems engineering model may be modified by specifying total man-
hours and cost or by specifying a proportional adjustment to system-
calculated man-hours.
The Engineering Drawings Data may be used to modify the Basic and Detail
Engineering phases by specifying adjustments to the number and type of
drawings produced. This data may also be used to add a lump sum of
engineering hours for special drawings or specific tasks, such as small scale
models, which are not provided by the system.
Definitions of the task and work products considered for each engineering
phase are presented in Table EN-1.
Prime Contractor Engineering
The systems Prime Contractors engineering account includes four major
categories or phases:
Basic engineering
Detail engineering
Procurement
Home office construction services.
Field supervision and project start-up are affiliated with engineering activities
and are discussed later; these are, however, considered to be construction
overhead items and are reported as contributions to the systems construction
overhead account.
Because of the turnkey nature of the Prime Contractor mode, the Engineering
Management and Construction Management phases are inappropriate, and
these phases are excluded from Prime Contractor estimates.
Contracts - Assignment of Engineering
By use of the Contracts Description and Scope Data, each phase of
engineering may be assigned to a different contract or to the owner. Moreover,
each phase may be split between multiple engineering contracts according to
unit area. In addition, the Contracts feature allows two optional phases of
supervision to be assigned:
Engineering Management
Engineering Workforce (EWF)
When contracts have been specified, the user may create multiple engineering
workforces (EWF). The system uses the concept of an Engineering Work Force
(EWF) in order to allow the user the flexibility of specifying different
adjustments (for example, hourly rates), for different engineering contractors.
Each contract can be cross-referenced to a particular EWF (see Contract
Description). An EWF is, in effect, a description of a work force resulting from a
combination of user-specified and system default values for hourly rates,
productivity, and indirect costs. Up to 9 EWF sets may be created. An EWF set
will not be used by the system unless it is referenced by a contract that has
been assigned an engineering scope of work.
It is not necessary to define multiple engineering workforces for the contracts
mode; however, if used, the EWF numbers must be referenced by all
engineering contracts.
The EWF serves no purpose for estimates in the Prime Contractor mode (since
only one work force is possible).
Phase Adjustments
The user may specify both the total man-hours and cost for an entire phase,
however, if one is specified, the other is also required. When these totals have
been specified for a phase, any subsidiary data for that phase will not be used
by the system.
A percentage adjustment to an entire phase should be considered as an
adjustment to the scope of the estimate, rather than a productivity
adjustment. The change will be reflected in the quantity of work performed, for
example, the drawing count and other tasks listed in Table EN-1, with a
corresponding change in man-hours.
An adjustment by phase is convenient way to allow for project complexity, (see
Table EN-2), but an adjustment by discipline, which does not affect the
drawing count, may be preferable.
The user may set the appropriate profile for payroll burdens, indirects, and
expenses. If contracts are specified, this information could also be provided as
part of the Contract Description.
Only one Engineering by Phase set of data is used per phase and EWF
combination. If global (that is, phase = *) Engineering by Phase Data are
used, however, additional Engineering by Phase data may be subsequently
added to adjust individual phases separately.
Discipline Adjustments
Adjustments by discipline will not affect the number of drawings in the
estimate and should appropriately be considered as productivity or
complexity adjustments.
The user may combine phase and discipline percentage adjustments, thereby
changing both the number of drawings and the man-hours. In this case, the
overall effect is a compounding of the adjustments, since new productivity is
calculated based on the new scope of work.
Engineering Reports
If the Engineering report option is selected in the Project Title Data, detailed
reports will be provided for each phase calculated. If a total cost is specified for
any phase, that total will appear on a summary report, and the detailed report
normally prepared for that phase will not be provided.
Table EN-1: Engineering Accounts - Tasks and Work Products
BASIC ENGINEERING: Includes engineering and drafting for the following items:
Project and Process Scope Definition
Process Flow Diagram
Heat and Material Balances
Equipment Process Data Sheets and Requisitions
Long-Lead Equipment Purchase/Commitment
Equipment Lists
Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
Control System Vendor Selection
Interconnecting Piping Diagrams
Utility Process Flow Diagrams
Utility Balance
Utility Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
Electrical One-Line Diagram
Electrical System Distribution
Equipment Specifications
Job Specifications
Overall Facilities Plot Plans
Site Location Plot Plans
Area Equipment Arrangements
Fire Protection and Safety Systems
Environmental Data
Building and Enclosure Requirements
Comparative Economic Evaluations
Documentation
Early Scheduling
DETAIL ENGINEERING - Includes engineering and drafting for the following items
Equipment
Review Vendor Design
Piping
Piping Arrangements
Piping Isometrics
Pipe Support
Steam Tracing Drawings
Piping Text Schedules
Table EN-1: Engineering Accounts - Tasks and Work Products - continued
Instrumentation
Instrumentation Location Drawings
Cable Schedules
Instrumentation Schematics & Connection Diagrams
Instrument Loop Diagrams
Control Room/Console Design
Electrical
One-Line Diagrams
Electrical Schematics
Substation Layout Drawings
Power Distribution
Lighting
Tracing
Civil
Equipment Foundation Drawings
Steelwork Foundation Drawings
Area Paving Drawings
Misc. Concrete, Supports, Etc.
Underground Piping Drawings
Structural Steel Plans and Elevations
Ladder and Platform Details
Grating Drawings
Buildings and Enclosures
Building Arrangement Plans and Elevations
Architectural Details
General Facility Requirements
Facility Plot Plans
Area Equipment Layouts
Site Preparation Plans, Details
Other Job Requirements
Cost Estimation
Planning and Scheduling
Material Takeoffs
Equipment, Line Lists
Project Operations and Start-up Manual
PROCUREMENT - Includes all in-country purchasing, inspection, and expediting.
International purchasing and shipping administration costs are not included.
Requisitioning and technical review are included in Basic or Detail Engineering.
Table EN-1: Engineering Accounts - Tasks and Work Products - continued
ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT - Client liaison and design coordination for projects with
multiple design contractors.
HOME OFFICE CONSTRUCTION SERVICES - Includes costs for construction
department, cost control, construction planning and scheduling, industrial relations
and administration, subcontract administration, construction cost engineering, and
drafting.
FIELD OFFICE CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION - Includes costs for project
superintendent, site engineers, subcontract coordination, planning and scheduling,
safety and medical, field engineering, field drafting, and construction accounting.
CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT - An independent, client- appointed, organization
responsible for overall construction budget and schedule monitoring, inspection for
contract and specifications compliance, subcontract coordination.
SUPPORT PERSONNEL - Includes costs for secretarial, clerical, administrative, and
accounting support in each engineering category.
INDIRECTS - Includes rent, heat, electricity, and other operating expenses not
specifically covered in other accounts in each engineering category.
PAYROLL BURDENS - Includes the following:
For US country base - mandatory contributions to vacations, holidays, workmens
compensation, social security, and unemployment insurance in each engineering
category.
For UK country base - mandatory contributions for National Insurance, pensions in
each engineering category.
ENGINEERING AND MISCELLANEOUS EXPENSES - Includes cost of reproduction,
communication (telephone, telex, and postage), travel, and computer services in each
engineering category.
PROJECT START-UP - Includes the construction contractor's support of plant start-up,
instrument calibration, and plant commissioning. Does not include the Owner's costs.
MECHANICAL COMPLETION: The point in time when instrument testing, electrical
testing and piping system testing are all complete for all construction areas.
Landscaping, insulation and painting may still be unfinished.
Prime Contractor Engineering
If the Engineering report option is not selected, only an Engineering Summary
report is provided, illustrating total hours and costs for Basic, Detail,
Procurement, and Home Office Construction Services. Field Office Supervision
and Start-up are summarized on the Construction Overhead Cost report.
Contracts Engineering
Detailed reports are included with the reports for each contract, where
applicable, when the Engineering report option is selected.
The Engineering Summary for each contract is part of the Contract Data Sheet.
Construction Management will not be developed by the system unless assigned
to a specific contractor (see Contract Scope - Engineering Data). The system-
calculated man-hours would then be based on the scope of work for all
construction contracts to be managed.
Engineering Management will not be developed by the system unless assigned
to a specific contractor (see Contract Scope - Engineering Data) and all man-
hours are specified in the Engineering Data. The system will not develop man-
hours for Engineering Management.
Table EN-2: Plant Complexity - Guidelines for Adjusting Basic and Detail
Engineering Man-hours
Suggested Percent
Adjustment to Engineering
Man-hours
Basic Detail Typical Facility Type
48 60 Storage Facilities
Gas/Oil Separation Facilities
60 70 Mining Facilities
Ore Processing Facilities
84 90 Basic Chemical Manufacturing
Ambient Temperature and Pressure Processes
100 100 Typical Petrochemical/Refinery Facilities
Municipal Sewage Treatment Facilities
Industrial Wastewater Treatment Facilities
120 125 Organic Chemical Manufacturing
Vacuum Processes
Cryogenic Processes
High Pressure/High Temperature Processes
140 150 Coal Gasification/Liquification Facilities
Specialized Polymer Production Facilities
160 175 Pharmaceutical Facilities
Speciality Food Processing Facilities
200 200 Coal Gasification/Liquification Pilot Facilities
High Temperature/High Pressure Pilot Facilities
The Engineering Organization
Engineering costs may be affected not only by the scope of the project and its
complexity, but also by the size and nature of the engineering organization
assigned to execute the design and procurement phases of the project.
As engineering man-hours, costs, and calendar time comprise a large
proportion of the total project effort, it is important to consider the nature of
the organization(s) assigned to perform the various phases of engineering.
The system evaluates engineering man-hours and costs based upon the users
project scope definitions, as if performed in-country by a large national or
international engineering organization for a large-scale project. An expanded
discussion of project types and guidelines for adjusting from a large-scale
project/large contractor basis to the users project requirements
follows.
Adjustments to Engineering Costs
Engineering costs may be affected not only by project size and complexity (see
Table EN-2), but also by the size of the engineering organization executing the
design and procurement phases of the project. In order to illustrate the effect
of organization size, three guideline categories are defined:
Small - 100 to 400 employees, performing smaller, local projects to less
than US $50 [PS25] million total installed cost (TIC).
Medium - 300 to 750 employees, performing fairly large national projects
of $50-500 [PS25-250] million TIC.
Large - over 600 employees, performing large and very large national or
international projects of greater than $50 [PS 25] million TIC. (The system
basis is in-country design and procurement by a large engineering
contractor.)
For the purpose of estimating, the three categories generally are defined with
the following characteristics:
Small organizations, under normal marketing conditions, pay slightly less in
salaries, offer slightly less in fringe benefits, and yet have higher productivity
for a number of reasons. Work volume is typically steadier, staff turn-over
lower, and time management more effective than in larger design groups
because problems are less likely to be obscured by the volume of work and the
number of people involved. Staff are productive since their work is highly
visible, projects are rarely very complex and the effects of changes are
minimized because of ease of communication within the group. However,
working conditions and limited equipment/systems may be a drawback. Such
organizations tend to use less specialists in scheduling and estimating; instead
the project manager may develop his own barcharts, while project engineers
may handle all estimating except for take-off. Overhead costs are reduced by
lower real estate and office equipment expenses. While ideally structured for a
certain project size and complexity, small organizations will usually be unable
to quickly staff larger, fast-tracked projects or meet the technical needs of
complex projects. It should be noted, however, that many larger organizations
currently maintain a specialized small projects group, with the benefits of
economy and flexibility.
Medium-sized, national engineering companies are generally very close to the
large organizations in terms of adjustments to engineering cost estimation,
except in the areas of overhead costs for maintaining under-utilized office
space and key staff, and productivity advantages derived from low staff turn-
over and centralized engineering offices. Productivities may further improve if
the company tends to specialize in certain kinds of work. Salaries will be the
same or slightly less than paid by the largest companies.
Large organizations are accustomed to maintaining excess capacity in terms of
offices and staff in order to be responsive to the clients needs on large
projects, and this naturally carries a price reflected in overhead costs.
Productivity will generally be dependent upon project size, time constraints
and project definition. The largest projects also often cause unusually high
project management and procurement costs due to complex contracting
procedures and exacting approval cycles. Note that the system does not
currently allow for worldwide procurement of equipment or materials, nor for
overseas expediting and ocean freight.
Evaluation of these effects for each project is a matter of estimating
judgement. Different engineering organizations can be characterized, phase-
by-phase, as illustrated in the following table. The use of engineering
adjustments is strongly recommended, since few other elements of a project
comprise as large a proportion of the total project costs as does engineering.
The following table demonstrates how the appropriate adjustments for
different sizes of engineering organizations may be represented to the system.
Adjustment to:
Size of Organization Phase Discipline Adjustment Item Adjustment
Range
** Operation Costs **
Small
(on local projects)
All na
na
na
% rates
% indirects
% expenses
85-95
55-65
0 (incl.)
Medium
(on national projects)
All
Basic
Detail
na
na
na
na
% rates
% indirects
% expenses
% expenses
90-100
65-75
6-8
6-8
Large (for worldwide
procurement)
Procurement na % expenses 50-100

General Instructions: SPAN* Users Only
Since only four activity groups have been reserved for each account in the
SPAN* network, no more than four user-specified drawing types should be
added to any one major account (piping, civil, etc.). User drawings in excess of
four per account will not be passed from the estimate into the network.
*SPAN is a Proprietary Mark of Icarus Corporation.
Adjustment to:
Size of Organization Phase Discipline Adjustment Item Adjustment
Range
**Man Hours**
Small
(on local projects)
Basic
Detail
Procurement
Home Office
Field Office
All
01
14
15
All
01
14
15
01
All
03
04
07
All
13
15
16
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
85-90
95-100
0
50
80-85
95-105
0
50
90-95
50-70
0
0
0
60-80
0
0
0
Medium (on national
projects)
Basic
Detail
Procurement
Home Office
Field Office
All
All
01
All
All
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
% manhours
90-100
85-95
95-100
85095
85-100
Large (for worldwide
procurement)
Procurement All % manhours 150-200
Construction Overhead - Prime
Contractor Basis
The information in this section applies only to estimates prepared on a prime
contractor reporting basis. If the project estimate require contracts based on
reporting, the procedures of this section are bypassed.
Construction overhead includes field manpower fringe benefits, associated
burdens, small tools, temporary facilities, field services, construction
equipment rental and miscellaneous overhead expenses. The construction
overhead data can be used to adjust any of the values within the construction
overhead accounts. The user may adjust each account by specifying the cost in
the user-defined currency units or as a percentage of the direct field
manpower cost. Note that the user-defined costs are presumed to be
referenced to a time frame denoted by the User Base Construction Index.
Costs are subject to escalation.
The following table includes a description of the overhead accounts.
Description of OVerhead Accounts
Project Costs
Engineering General and Administrative overhead costs for engineering (basic,
detail, procurement, engineering management, home office
construction services and construction management) performed
under this contract, as a percent or lump sum of engineering
discipline costs, payroll burdens and other indirects and
expenses. The fee for engineering performed under this contract,
as a percentage of engineering and G&A costs.
Construction General and Administrative overhead costs for construction
performed under this contact, as a Overhead & Feespercentage or
lump sum of construction costs (direct field manpower,
construction equipment rental, field supervision and other
indirects). The fee for construction performed under this
contract, as a percentage or lump sum of construction and
G&A costs.
Contingency The contingency for materials purchased under this contract, as a
percentage of cost of materials, G&A and fee.
Indirects:
Fringe Benefits Prime contractors contribution to vacations, holidays, sick leave,
retirement, health insurance, etc.
Burdens
US Country Base
UK Country Base
Prime contractors mandatory contributions for Federal Social
Security (FICA), Federal Unemployment Insurance (FUI),
Workmens Compensation and State Unemployment
Insurance (SUI).
Prime contractors mandatory contributions for
National Insurance.
Consumables/
Small Tools
Includes small tools and consumable materials.
Miscellaneous
(Insurance,
Safety, etc.)
Includes job cleanup costs, watchmen, construction equipment
servicing and handling, public liability, public damage, automobile
and all-risk insurance, warehousing and nonproductive
field manpower.
Contracts: Description/Scope
The contracts feature provides the user with the means of:
Describing the desired owner-contractor relationships and scopes of effort
to prevail during the course of the proposed project.
Obtaining detailed estimates of the cost-to-construct for the project, the
owner and each contractor in turn, with each estimate reflecting the tiered
nature of contracts, scope of effort, and individual contractors costs of
doing business.
In this section, the term owner is used to identify the one or Number 01
contract at the top of the tier of contracts. The owner, whether operating
company or contractor, is the focal point for payment of all contract costs
relative to the project. An operating company preparing an estimate of the
cost-to-construct might designate itself as the owner for purposes of
evaluating bid package proposals and the total cost of the project. Or, a
contractor might designate itself the owner when preparing a client bid.
Organizations providing services directly to another organization are termed
contractors, or, if indirectly through another contractor, are termed
subcontractors.
Prime Contractor Basis: Default Condition
(Contracts Not Defined)
In the absence of contract descriptions the system will revert to its standard
reporting method. That is, all costs and cost structures will be on a Prime
Contractor basis. Engineering, materials, and construction will be charged to
the Prime Contractor and reported in a single summary report.
Scaffolding
Includes all scaffolding, except as required for assembly and/or
field erection by vendor.
Vendor
Representatives
Includes travel and subsistence as well as average rates for
vendor field representatives.
Field Services
Includes medical, first aid, transportation, weld tests and
welding supplies.
Construction
Rental
Equipment
Construction rental equipment costs.
Temporary
Construction and
Utilities
Cost of temporary sanitary and shelter facilities, roadways,
rigging, utilities and fencing.
Mobilization/
Demobilization
Cost of construction equipment handling and transport to and
from jobsite.
Catering/
Accommodations
Includes all catering and accommodations for all field personnel
at site.
Travel Includes all travel and subsistence when required.
Description of OVerhead Accounts
Within the Prime Contractor basis of reporting, subcontracting is limited to
individual bulk accounts for designated Unit Areas and site development, all
under nonadjustable cost structures. The contracts feature of this section
relieves these constraints.
Contract Definition - Description and Scope
Two sets of contract information must be assembled. The Contract Description
Data and the Contract Scope Data provide the means of assembling
this information.
Contract Description
The contract description must be provided for each contract and is assembled
in the Contract Description Data. The contract description includes:
Characteristic name or title, for reporting purposes
Reference number of contract, to identify the contract and chain of
responsibility
To whom responsible, via contract reference number
Contract overheads to be applied (G&A, fee, contingency) for -
- engineering
- materials
- construction
Charge for handling subcontracts
Field indirects, in lieu of the Indirect Data, see Construction Overhead -
Prime Contractor Basis Data Equipment rental
Definition of the engineering workforce (EWF) to be used for each
engineering contract. Adjustments to wages, man-hours and overheads for
the desired EWF are made using Engineering Data.
Definition of the construction workforce (CWF) to be used for each
contract. Adjustments to wages, productivity and crafts for the desired
CWF are made in the Workforce Data.
The second set of contract information is entered in the Contract Scope Data.
Contract Scope Data describes the scope of each contract for:
has of engineering, which may be allocated to areas (Unit Areas):
- basic engineering
- detail engineering and procurement
- engineering management (optional)
- construction management (optional)
- start up.
Materials and/or construction (installation) within defined areas (Unit
Areas) and covering or excluding items or tasks in the following categories
as defined by the code of accounts:
- equipment
- piping
- civil
- steel
- instrumentation
- electrical
- insulation
- paint.
Contracts - Concepts
By the very nature of contracts and this contracts feature, costs of
engineering, materials, and construction are assigned to that contact bearing
the scope responsibility. Contract Scope Data forms a contract set (CONSET)
and is used to assign scope responsibilities. The function of the CONSET is to
define a framework of contract responsibilities for engineering, materials, and
construction. This framework may be detailed down to the phase level for
engineering, and to the code of account (COA) level for materials and
construction. The CONSET number which identifies this framework may then
be indicated in the following project areas to designate responsibility:
Unit areas
Power Distribution items
Process Control Centers or Operator Centers
Site Development items (project-level only).
Multiple CONSETS would be required only where different frameworks of
responsibility exist; for instance, varying by area or groups of areas.
The responsibilities of a contract for materials purchasing and construction are
defined first for each major account, that is, equipment, piping, etc., then by
COA exception. Materials contract responsibilities are for payment for
materials, but not procurement. The responsible purchasing contractor is
defined for each major account. Construction contract responsibilities include
field manpower, equipment rental, field supervision, and home office
construction services. The responsible construction contractor is identified for
each major account.
Contract exceptions are defined for materials and construction by identifying
the contract (contract number) responsibility by the code of account (COA).
Owner-contract-subcontract responsibilities are identified by the system based
upon the users assignment of contract numbers. The owner is always
assigned contract reference number 01. Contractors directly responsible to
the owner would be assigned contract numbers such as 02, 03, etc. To
identify the chain of responsibility, a contracted-by reference number is
required. Thus 02 is responsible to 01. Should a subcontractor to 02 be
desired and identified as contractor number 13, the chain would be: 13 is
responsible to 02. These reference numbers are assigned as part of the
contract description.
Contracts - Cost Elements
Table CDS-1 illustrates the principal cost elements of a contract; each will be
discussed in turn relative to the manner of evaluation and adjustment.
na = not applicable
(1) = Subcontract costs are allocated to each contractor based on the contract
hierarchy established.
Overheads, fee, and contingency are added to the direct costs to develop the
contract total for each category.
Contract costs are then charged to the responsible contract higher in the chain
as a subcontract with attendant handling charge.
Contract Engineering and Procurement
Each phase of contract engineering:
Basic
Detail (with procurement)
Engineering management
Start-up
is considered assignable to an individual contract. Work efforts within a phase
may be split among several contracts. A contract may cover one or more
phases for the entire project. Contracts must be assigned for basic, detail, and
Table CDS-1: Cost Components of Contract Elements
Class Expenditures
Construction
Data Type Design Engg @
Procurement
Materials Manpower Indirects All
Subcontracts
Engineering Basic, Detail,
Procurement
Mgt, Construction
Mgt.
G@A, Fee,
Contingency
na na Start-up
G@A, Fee,
Contingency
na
Purchasing na
G@A, Fee,
Contingency
Equipment
and bulks
na Freight,
Taxes
G@A, Fee,
Contingency
na
(1)
Installation Home Office
Construction
Services
G@A, Fee,
Contingency
na
G@A, Fee,
Contingency
Manpower
to Install
Field
Indirects,
Field
Supervision
G@A, Fee,
Contingency
na
(1)
start-up. If construction management is not assigned, construction
management will not be included in the estimate. If engineering management
is not assigned and the required man-hours and cost have not been specified
by the user, engineering management will not be included in the estimate.
Note that the procurement effort for materials and equipment is not assigned
by the user, but follows the detail engineering assignment automatically. The
procurement effort for subcontracts is automatically assigned to the
responsible contract.
Similarly, home office construction services and field office supervision are not
assigned by the user, but follow the construction assignment. However, these
costs are adjustable by the user via Engineering Data.
Discipline man-hours are evaluated by the system using engineering models
for equipment, unit bulk items, area and project bulks, and site development
for the above categories in the same manner as for Prime Contractor reporting
(construction management excluded). For contract engineering, the system
uses the Engineering Data to define the engineering workforce (EWF). An
engineering contract is cross-referenced to an EWF, and discipline and phase
adjustments are made in the Engineering Data.
Engineering discipline costs (product of man-hours x wage rate for each
discipline) are combined with user-specified or system default values for
payroll burdens, office indirects, and miscellaneous expenses. The contract
total is evaluated upon considering G&A, fee, and contingency as described
later in this section as Contract Overheads.
Materials
A materials contract consists of payment for materials, subcontracts, freight,
and taxes. General and administrative costs (G&A), fee and contingency
specific to each contract are combined with these material costs to form the
contract total.
The system generates material types, quantities, and costs based upon
Equipment Models and Volumetric Models. Material costs are established by
the system through the appropriate country base of costs, adjusted for
escalation and indexing and any other material adjustments, and converted to
the users country base.
Each contract assigned the responsibility for materials is charged with
payment for those materials.
The total material cost is reported in the contract summary as the cost of
materials, including freight and taxes, for construction. Detail reports identify
the contract responsibility for materials.
Construction Contracts
A construction contract consists of the following classes of expenditure:
Construction:
- direct field manpower
- field supervision
- G&A, fee, contingency.
Construction Supervision:
- home office construction services
- field supervision
- G&A, fee, contingency.
Each of these classes is described in detail below. G&A, fee and contingency
are covered below under Contract Overheads.
Construction - Direct Field Manpower
The system develops crew mix, man-hours and construction equipment
requirements from Work Item Models for equipment, unit and area bulks, and
site development. These values and user-entered man-hours are combined
with the appropriate craft wage rates to obtain manpower costs.
Construction - Field-erected Vessels
A special contracts feature may be used to change the way the system reports
manpower for field-erected storage vessels.
The system will normally include the cost of field-erection (materials and
manpower) as part of the purchased equipment cost of a field-erected storage
tank. The user may then only adjust the overall equipment cost, but will not
have the opportunity to adjust manpower (such as wages, productivity,
burdens). In fact, the manpower would be considered to be the equipment
vendors manpower and not subject to adjustments pertinent to the materials
contractor.
However, if the user includes an installation assignment to designate a specific
contract for code of account 121 (or the equivalent new COA, the system will
then consider all field-erected storage vessels (within the area specified), as
being installed by direct manpower and consequently the particular designated
contract adjustments for manpower will be observed. Note that this must be
done specifically for the indicated COA only, not as part of a range.
In the absence of an installation assignment designating a contract for this
specific code of account, the costs for field-erection vessels would be charged
as a material cost to the contract responsible for equipment purchase.
Construction - Field Indirects
An equipment rental estimate is developed for each construction contract
based upon rental items developed from Work Item Models. In determining
equipment rental rates and rental durations, the system uses a contract
duration based upon the users defined schedule or a system-developed
schedule. The value for contract equipment rental is adjustable in terms of
rental rates. Should the user wish to enter a lump sum cost or take equipment
rental as a fraction of manpower costs, the user-specified value will prevail
over the system-calculated figures.
Other field indirect costs such as fringe benefits, burdens, travel, consumable,
scaffolding, field services, temporary construction and utilities, and
miscellaneous items may be specified relative to direct field manpower.
Costs of vendor representatives, mobilization/demobilization, catering and
accommodation, and any special items may be specified as lump sum costs.
Should a single value for field indirect costs be entered, this value will prevail
for field indirects over any other user-specified or system-developed field
indirect category value.
Construction - Field Supervision
Field supervision is estimated for each construction contract based upon the
direct field manpower requirements and contract duration in the same manner
as for Prime Contractor reporting. Payroll burdens, indirects, and
miscellaneous expenses are evaluated and added to the supervision cost, thus
arriving at the total cost for field supervision - classed as a construction field
indirect cost.
Construction - Home Office Construction Services
Home office construction services cost is estimated in the same manner as
field supervision. Man-hour requirements (tied to contract duration and field
requirements) are combined with appropriate discipline rates to develop direct
discipline costs. The payroll burdens, indirects, and miscellaneous expenses
are added to develop the total cost. Associated costs for G&A, fee, and
contingency are applied as described below.
Contract Overheads
The overheads:
General and administrative costs (G&A)
Fee
Contingency
are part of the users contract description or are evaluated through system
default procedures. These overheads are applied and reported against costs in
the following categories:
Design (engineering and procurement, including home office construction
services)
Materials
Construction.
General and administrative costs are evaluated as a percentage of direct and
indirect costs.
Contract fee percentages are calculated by the system as a function of the
total cost of the scope of effort: directs, indirects, and G&A. Figure CDS-1 and
the example below illustrate the method used by the system to develop a fee.
The fee is determined by the phase (engineering, materials, construction) and
extent (total cost) of each phase. The total cost of directs, indirects, and G&A
is reduced by the Escalation Index to a graph base. The fee percentage
obtained from Figure CDS-1 using this reduced cost is applied to the phase
total cost.
For example, suppose (1) a US country base is chosen and all costs are in US
Dollars, (2) the System Base Index for all costs is set and tabulated (see
Indexing/Escalation Data) at 1200, (3) the user has indicated a requirement
for 21% escalation from the base by entering 1.21 x 1200 = 1452, and (4) the
system has arrived at an escalated total cost for construction directs, indirects,
and G&A of $290,400. The system would develop a reduced total cost of
$290,400/(1452) = 200. Applying this value to Figure CDS-1, the curve for
construction would be used to obtain the fee percentage (11.1% for
construction) applied to the $290,400 figure. The user of another country base
location and currency would use the appropriate country base scale and
currency conversion to use Figure CDS-1; the system would perform these
conversions automatically.
Contingency may be adjusted by the user on a contract basis or on a project
basis.
A fee for handling other contracts is determined by the percentage of the value
of contracts handled.
The above individual fee categories are disregarded should the user enter a
single lump sum fee for the contract.
Contracts - Impact Upon Other User Input
The use of the contracts feature has a significant impact on other user input.
The interrelationships between contract definitions and other system data are
described in each section of this document so affected.
Figure CDS-1: System Calculated Fee Percentage to be Applied to Total Cost of
Directs, Indirects, and Overheads for Engineering (Curve E), Materials (Curve
M), and Construction (Curve C).
Note: Use the appropriate country base location scale and Escalation Index
and should apply the appropriate currency conversion to enter this chart. The
system will perform this calculation in normal fashion.
37 Reserved (G7) 37-1
Reserved for future use
37 Reserved (G7)
37-2 37 Reserved (G7)
38 Glossary (G5) 38-1
A
AACE
American Association of Cost Engineers.
ABC
Tracking costs on an activity-by-activity basis. Tracking costs this way
provides the ability to identify tasks which are on track and are beginning to
run
over budget.
Accelerated depreciation
Depreciation methods that allow the company to depreciate and write-off the
cost of assets at a rate faster than the write-off under the straight line
method.
Account
A major account series, e.g., piping 300-399.
Acid-test ratio
See Quick ratio.
Action button
An action that may be performed represented by a button on a menu.
Activity
An individual task needed for the completion of a project. It is the smallest
discrete block of time and the resources are typically handled by project
management software. It is a single task which needs to be done in a project.
Multiple activities are related to each other by identifying their immediate
predecessors. Solitary activities, which have no predecessors or successors,
are allowed.
38 Glossary (G5)
38-2 38 Glossary (G5)
Activity duration
Specifies the length of time (hours, days, weeks, months) that it takes to
complete an activity. This information is optional in the data entry of an
activity. Work flow (predecessor relationships) can be defined before durations
are assigned. Activities with zero durations are considered milestones
or hammocks.
Actual dates
Actual dates are entered as the project progresses. These are the dates that
activities really started and finished as opposed to planned or estimated dates.
Addendum
A change or graphic instrument issued before the date bids are opened. An
addendum may interpret and/or modify the bidding documents by making
additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections.
AFC
Approved for construction.
AFD
Approved for design.
AFE
Authorized for expenditures.
Allocate
To book the costs under one COA to another COA.
Allowances
Additional resources included in estimates to cover the cost of known but
undefined requirements for any individual activity, work item or account.
Alternate
A request from the owner for the cost of adding or deleting an item or work
element from the basic bid. The cost of adding an item is usually known as
additive alternate, while the cost of deleting an item is known as
deductive alternate.
Amortization
See Loan amortization and Full loan amortization.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute.
API
American Petroleum Institute.
Apply
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, includes the entered information in the
project specifications.
Apply & Close
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, includes the entered information in the
project specifications and closes the entry window.
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
ICARUS state-of-the-art, integrated, ready-to-use, computer aided design,
estimating, and scheduling system for evaluating major process plants and
mills worldwide. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator is available on both a UNIX
workstation and a PC running Microsoft Windows NT.
Asset structure
The particular mix of possessions a corporation holds. These are divided into
those to be held for a short time (current assets) and those to be held for a
long time (fixed assets). In a dynamic corporation this mix is continuously
changing. It is the job of the financial manager to keep this mix at the most
desirable combination.
Average collection period
An efficiency ratio. A measure of how long it takes the company on the
average to collect on a credit sale = receivables X 360/net sales. It should be
approximately the same length as the credit terms of the company.
Average rate of return (ARR)
A non-discounted capital budgeting technique. This is the ratio of average net
income to average investment.
B
Balance sheet
A record of the companys assets, liabilities and equity as of a certain date.
Balloon
Symbol for field instrument in a P&ID.
Balloon payment
A very large payment due at the maturity of a loan arrangement, which has
not fully amortized the loan.
Baseline schedule
A fixed project schedule. It is the standard by which project performance is
measured. The current schedule is copied into the baseline schedule which
remains frozen until it is reset. Resetting the baseline is done when the scope
of the project has been changed significantly. At that point, the original or
current baseline becomes invalid and should not be compared with the
current schedule.
Basic engineering
Engineering required to bring the Phase I design to the AFD level. Basic
engineering is the initial stage of projects where process flow diagrams (Puffs)
are created to arrange process operations, functionality and the necessary
equipment list. This is accomplished by taking the results of the process
analysis (from a simulator) of a general design to define process conditions,
requirements, functionality and equipment for the specified process. The basic
process design is then created. At this stage, design conditions are defined
based on process conditions and operations and models of actual equipment
are mapped out.
Benefit-cost ratio (BCR)
A discounted cash flow capital budgeting technique; also called the profitability
index. This is the ratio of the present value of the future cash inflows of a
project to the initial investment.
Bid documents
The advertisement for bids, instructions to bidders, information available to
bidders, bid form with all attachments and proposed contract documents
(including all addenda issued before the receipt of bids).
Bond
A corporate promissory note issued to an investor.
Bond covenants
The terms and provisions of a debt issue contained in the indenture. These
include the interest rate, maturity date, call price, protections and
other specifics.
Bond indenture
The contract in a debt issue that outlines all the covenants.
Bond refunding
The procedure of recalling an existing bond issue and replacing it with another.
This is usually done to take advantage of changes in market interest rates.
Book value
For a company, the book value is total net worth.
Book value per share
The total net worth divided by the number of shares outstanding.
Break-even analysis
A planning procedure that analyzes the relationships between costs, revenues
and volume and uses these relationships to project profits at various levels
of sales.
Break-even budget
The amount of the budget at which the company has exhausted all internally
generated equity and must begin to use externally generated equity.
Break-even point
That point in the level of production or sales at which total revenues equal
total costs.
BS5500
British Standards.
Clear
Erases entries currently selected or displayed in active window.
Click
To press and release the left mouse button.
Close
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, makes no changes to the project
specifications simply closes the entry window.
Closed-end mortgage bond
A mortgage bond issue that prevents the company from issuing additional
senior debt by pledging the same assets.
CM
Construction manager/management.
COD
A credit term that means Cash on Delivery and specifies that goods must be
paid for in full upon delivery.
Code of account (COA)
A specific cost code (e.g., 315 CS VALVES: FLANGED.)
Coincident indicator
An economic indicator that changes concurrently with changes in the
general economy.
Collateral
An asset used as security to guarantee payment of the principal and interest
on a loan.
Collection costs
Clerical and administrative costs involved with granting credit and managing
accounts receivable.
Commercial paper
Short-term promissory notes issued only by very financially secure
corporations. It is generally safe and very liquid. It has very short maturities
and very high denominations. It has yields higher than treasury bills. It usually
can be either placed directly or through commercial paper dealers.
Common equity
That portion of the balance sheet accounts composed of common stock, capital
in excess of par and retained earnings. Also called net worth and
stockholders equity.
Comparative analysis
An analysis of the overall performance of a company that compares the ratios
of a given company with ratios of other companies in the same industry.
Compensating balance
A credit arrangement restriction that requires a borrower to keep a specified
percentage of the outstanding balance of a certain loan in a checking account
with the bank.
Components
The pieces of the process plant (or mill) that when linked together complete a
process. ICARUS components are categorized into process equipment, plant
bulks, site development, buildings, quoted equipment, unit cost libraries and
equipment model libraries.
Composition
A voluntary financial agreement whereby creditors accept partial payment on
debts owed them as full payment.
Conglomerate merger
A merger between two companies whose businesses are not directly related.
Construction overhead and fees
See Overhead
Consumable
The cost of small tools, fixings, consumable material other than
welding supplies.
Consumer survey method for forecasting
A survey method of sales forecasting in which consumers are asked to reveal
their purchasing intentions.
Contingency
An amount added to the estimate to allow for changes that will likely be
required. This may be derived either through statistical analysis of past-project
costs or by applying experience gained on similar projects. Contingency
usually does not include changes in scope or unforeseeable major events such
as strikes or natural disasters.
Contract documents
The contract forms, general and special conditions, drawings, specifications
and addenda describing the project scope and contract terms.
Control
The process of comparing actual performance with planned performance,
analyzing the differences and taking the appropriate corrective action.
Control process
A procedure to determine whether or not actual performance is in keeping with
planned or budgeted performance.
Conversion premium
The difference between a convertible bonds issue price and its conversion
value at issue time.
Convertible security
A convertible bond or preferred stock that allows the holder to convert the
security into a specified number of shares of common during a specified
time period.
Copy & change
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, copies an existing component (with any
associated bulks) and displays the copy for modifications.
Cost
The amount a contract item is known or estimated to cost the contractor.
Cost index
A number that relates the cost of an item at a specific time to the
corresponding cost at some arbitrarily specified time in the past. A cost index
is useful in taking known past costs for an item and relating them to
the present.
Cost modeling
Taking basic process data (such as capacity of tanks, flow rates of pumps and
areas of heat exchange) and applying them to industry standard design
procedures and codes (ASME, API, TEMA, NEMA, BS5500, JIS and DIN). Cost
modeling also includes developing a mechanical design and simulating the
fabrication and manufacturing of equipment to determine a total equipment
cost and man-hours for installation.
Cost of capital
Cost incurred by utilizing various forms of financing for capital projects. It is
the minimum return required from a project in order for that project to be
acceptable into the capital budget.
Coupon rate
The published rate of a bond. It is equal to the annual interest amount divided
by the face value = I/F.
Covenants
See Bond covenants.
Create
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, creates a new project for entering
specifications.
Credit discount
A credit term that specifies the percentage discount which may be taken if the
invoice is paid within a specified number of days.
Credit period
A credit term that specifies the number of days a client can take to pay an
invoice without being considered delinquent.
Credit period only
A credit term that specifies that no discount will be given, but the bill is due
within a specified time period.
Credit policy
Policy for management decisions on credit standards, limits and specific terms.
Critical activity
A critical activity has zero or negative float. This activity has no allowance for
work slippage. It must be finished on time or the entire project will fall behind
schedule. (Non-critical activities have float or slack time and are not in the
critical path. Super-critical activities have negative float.)
Critical path
There may be several paths within one project. The critical path is the path
(sequence) of activities which represent the longest total time required to
complete the project. A delay in any activity in the critical path causes a delay
in the completion of the project. There may be more than one critical path
depending on durations and work flow logic.
CS
Carbon steel, specifically A285C plate, A106, pipe
< 2, A 53 pipe > = 2, A299 castings.
Current ratio
A liquidity ratio. The ratio of total current assets to total current liability equals
CA/CL. It indicates the amount of money in CA for each unit of CL and is a
measure of liquidity.
Current yield
The return a bond is presently producing, which is equal to the annual interest
rate divided by its current market value.
D
Database
A collection of data that can be used to produce additional information.
Debenture
A bond that is backed only by the earning power of the company and no
specific assets. Debenture holders are general creditors of the company.
Decision engineering
An engineering of decisions. Decision engineering allows you to develop a
series of process strategies based on information developed from ICARUS
systems. The best strategy is then identified from the series of strategies.
Considering the best strategy, a decision can then be made which then
becomes your tactic on which to act.
Decision point
A point on a decision tree over which management has control.
Decision tree
A graphic method of risk analysis that shows the magnitude of expected net
cash flows, their associated probabilities, and the interrelationships between
the various outcomes.
Deferred call provision
A restricted call provision that does not permit a bond to be called before a
specified amount of time passes after the initial issue.
Definitive: -5 to +15 percent estimate
(as defined by AACE)
This type of estimate is developed from very defined engineering data
including plot plans and elevations, piping and instrumentation diagrams, one-
line electrical diagrams, equipment data sheets and quotations, structural
sketches, soil data and sketches of major foundations, building sketches and a
complete set of specifications.
Degree of financial leverage
Quantification of financial leverage that measures the fractional change in net
income due to a fractional change in operating income.
Degree of operating leverage
The fractional change in earnings before interest and taxes for each fractional
change in sales.
Delete
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, removes the specified item from the project.
Delphi method for forecasting
A qualitative sales forecast method in which several experts give their own
opinions, listen to the opinions of the others, give individual opinions again and
continue through this process until they reach a consensus. This consensus
then constitutes the sales forecast.
Demand-diversity factor
The ratio of the actual power demand of an electrical system to the sum of the
nameplate ratings of each piece of equipment within that electrical system.
This ratio will always be less than unity for three reasons. First, motors are
manufactured in standard sizes so the actual power used will always be less
than the nameplate rating of the motor. Second, electrical equipment is
normally brought with some excess capacity; and third, not all equipment
operates at the same time.
Demobilization
See Mobilization/Demobilization.
Design basis
A set of specifications defining the country base, units of measure and
currency used in a project.
Detailed engineering
Defining specific equipment needs, areas, capacities, plot plans, utility
systems and tracks based on process engineering specifications and designs
defined during the Basic engineering phase. Pads and Oasis are created during
the detailed engineering phase. In addition, equipment is defined in relation to
the process flow during this phase.
DH (Direct hire)
Practice by some general contractors of hiring craftsmen directly from the local
labor pools rather than subcontracting the work.
Dialog box
A window that either requests or provides information.
DIN
Dutch-Industrie-Normen.
Direct costs
Costs that can be directly attributed to a particular item of work or activity.
Direct field cost (DFC)
Permanent equipment and materials and the construction contractors labor to
install them.
Discount period
A credit term that specifies the number of days during which the credit
discount can be taken.
Discount rate
The interest rate used to discount a future amount of money back to the
present. It is equal to the opportunity cost rate.
Display
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, shows the selected P&ID.
Distributable
A cost item that is spread over other cost items rather than managed as a
separate account.
Distribution of assets
Both the payment of dividends by the corporation to its stockholders and the
distribution of the liquidation proceeds to the creditors and the stockholders.
Dividend declaration date
The date upon which the board of directors met and declared the dividend.
Dividend payment date
The date upon which the dividend checks are mailed to the stockholders.
Dividend payout ratio
A measure of the percentage of earnings that are paid out in dividends. It can
be calculated by dividing dividends per share by earnings per share or by
dividing total dividends by net income.
Dividend policy
The established course of action management maintains in terms of that
portion of retained earnings paid out in dividends.
Dividend yield
A measure of the dividend return to investors for their investment in the
company. It is calculated by dividing dividends per share by the price of a
share of common stock.
Dividends
That portion of retained earnings which is paid to the stockholders.
Duration
Length of time needed to complete an activity. The time length can be
determined by user input or resource usage. Activities with no duration are
called milestones which act as markers. Estimating durations for future
activities is difficult. It is recommended that the largest duration possible be
used to account for possible delays.
E
E-P-C (Engineering, procurement and construction)
Consolidation of the responsibility for those activities under a single
contract(or).
Engineering-Designing the plant or facility, calculating all the sizes,
dimensions, quantities and how and when the plant is to be assembled.
Procurement-Purchasing material quantities and setting contracts with
engineering firms.
Construction-Actually building the plant or facility based on engineering
specifications.
Early finish
The earliest calculated date on which an activity can end. It is based on the
activitys Early start which depends on the finish of predecessor activities and
the activitys duration.
Early start
The earliest calculated date on which an activity can begin. It is dependent on
when all predecessor activities finish.
Earned surplus
Also called retained earnings the accumulated annual earnings of
a corporation.
Earnings per share
The amount of earnings available for each share of common stock. It is
calculated by dividing the net income by the number of common
shares outstanding.
Economic forecast
Projection of those factors that indicate the general condition of the
national economy.
Economic indicator
The factor within the national economy that can be used to identify a particular
trend in the general economy.
Economic order quantity
The appropriate number of units that should be ordered to efficiently balance
holding and reorder costs.
Efficiency
The ability of a corporation to most effectively use its assets to produce sales
in a particular sales period.
Efficiency ratios
Ratios drawn with items concerning the companys asset base and sales. They
are useful in evaluating the ability of management to generate sales using
the assets.
Elapsed time
Total number of calendar days needed to complete an activity. This provides a
realistic view of an activitys length.
Engineering Expense rate
Used to calculate the Basic Engineering Report's "Overhead Items," which
collectively comprise engineering expenses. See Chapter 31 for
more information.
EOM
A credit term that means End of Month and indicates that the credit period
begins on the first of the following month.
Equity
See Common equity.
Equity ratios
Ratios generated using items of interest to stockholders that give the
stockholder an indication of how desirable the company is for investment.
Equivalent dividend return
This is a theoretical evaluation of the return the investor would be receiving if
the returns on the convertible bonds were thought of as dividends for each
share that could be realized by conversion. It allows for comparison of the
return on the bond and the current return on the common stock of
the company.
Escalation
Provision for an increase in the cost of equipment, material, labor, etc., over
the costs specified in the contract, due to continuing price-level change
over time.
EWF
Engineering workforce.
Exercise price
The price for which one share of common stock can be purchased through the
exercise of warrants.
Exit
Leaves the program.
Expected return
The mathematically anticipated return of a project, obtained by multiplying
each possible outcome by the associated probability of that outcome and
summing all the resulting values.
Exponential smoothing
A quantitative sales forecasting method in which past sales data and past sales
forecasts are used to forecast sales.
Export
Copies data from the current project into a format that can be read by another
application, such as a spreadsheet program.
Extension
A voluntary financial agreement whereby the repayment period for debt
is extended.
F
Factored estimating
Making estimates based on multiple factors. Equipment items are on-site as
are completed costs, equipment schedules and plotting schedules from earlier
projects. These numbers are then adjusted with multipliers from current
equipment and man-hour costs. Factored estimating is a method of generating
the cost of related items without designs. ICARUS systems are not based on
factored estimating.
Fast tracking
Overlapping of project activities normally executed in a consecutive manner.
Field costs
Indirect costs of engineering and construction associated with the projects
field site rather than with the home office.
Field services
An indirect cost including medical, first aid, transport, welder tests and
welding supplies.
Field warehouse receipt
Short-term financing instrument used with pledged inventories whereby the
goods are transferred to a specified warehouse on the borrowers property.
The goods cannot be released without the lenders authorization. This is done
in cases when it is impractical to move the inventory.
Financial forecasting
Projection of future revenues and costs.
Financial lease
A lease that cannot be canceled until the lessee has paid an entire fixed
amount of money over a specified period in order that the lessor gets back all
costs plus a reasonable return. It generally does not include repair and
maintenance service.
Financial leverage
The operationalization of financial risk that can be measured to show the
influence of differing forms of financing on net income as operating
income changes.
Financial ratios
Ratios drawn between items from the balance sheet and income statements
that provide indications of a companys strengths and weaknesses.
Financial risk
The risk inherent in using a particular form of funding for the asset base of
a corporation.
Financial statements
The financial records of a corporation some of which are used as internal
controls and some of which are published for various external parties.
Financial structure
The particular combination of common equity, preferred stock and short- and
long-term liabilities maintained by a company.
Finish float
The amount of excess time an activity has at its finish before a successor
activity must start. This is the difference between the start date of the
predecessor and the finish date of the current activity, using the early or late
schedule. (Early and late dates are not mixed.) This may be referred to as
slack time. All floats are calculated when a project has its schedule computed.
Finish-to-finish lag
The minimum amount of time that must pass between the finish of one activity
and the finish of its successor(s). If the predecessors finish is delayed, the
successor activity may have to be slowed or halted to allow the specified time
period to pass. All lags are calculated when a project has its schedule
computed. Finish-to-finish lags are often used with start-to-start lags.
Finish-to-start lag
The minimum amount of time that must pass between the finish of one activity
and the start of its successor(s). The default finish-to-start lag is zero. If the
predecessors finish is delayed, the successor activitys start will have to be
delayed. All lags are calculated when a project has its schedule computed. In
most cases, finish-to-start lags are not used with other lag types.
Finishing activity
The last activity that must be completed before a project can be considered
finished. This activity is not a predecessor to any other activity it has
no successors.
Fixed costs
Costs that do not vary over the production or sales range.
Flg.
Flanged.
Float
The amount of time that an activity can slip past its duration without delaying
the rest of the project. The calculation depends on the float type (start float,
finish float, positive float and negative float.) All float is calculated when a
project has its schedule computed.
Floating lien
A loan arrangement used when accounts receivable and inventories are used
as collateral. With this there is a general loan against the accounts on the
goods without any records being kept on specific ones.
Free float
The excess time available before the start of the following activity, assuming
that both activities start on their early start date. Free float can be thought of
as the amount of time an activity can expand without affecting the following
activity. If the current activity takes longer to complete than its projected
duration and free float combined, the following activity will be unable to begin
by its earliest start date.
Fringe benefits (FB)
Contractual adders to the base labor rate: medical and pension plans,
vacation, travel pay, holidays, etc.
Full loan amortization
A type of loan amortization procedure under which periodic payments are
made until all of the principal of the loan and all interest due are paid in full.
Funded debt
Debt with a maturity of more than 1 year. It includes bonds, debentures, term
loans and mortgages.
Funded debt to net working capital
The leverage ratio, which gives an indication of the companys ability to retire
its debt by using its liquid assets = funded debt/NWC.
Funds forecast
The projection of any additional financing that may be necessary to achieve
and support projected sales.
G
G & A
General and administrative costs. Includes head office (corporate) expenses,
such as rental, heating and air conditioning (HVAC), maintenance, and
allocated costs (e.g., accounting).
Gantt (bar) chart
A graphic display of activity durations. It is also referred to as a bar chart.
Activities are listed with other tabular information on the side with time
intervals over the bars. Activity durations are shown in the form of
horizontal bars.
GC
General contractor.
General conditions
A specific portion of the contract documents. They state the responsibilities
and relationships of all parties to the contract, as well as any conditions
applicable to the contract.
GMP
Guaranteed maximum price.
Go Back
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, retraces your steps one level.
Grassroots
Constructing an entirely new facility from pre-basic, through basic, through
detailed engineering through construction on an undeveloped site.
H
Hammocks
A hammock groups activities, milestones, or other hammocks for reporting.
Most project management software calculates the duration of a hammock from
the early and late dates of the activities to which they are linked.
Hedging approach
In the hedging approach to working capital financing, the portion of current
assets that fluctuates is financed with current liabilities, and the portion that is
in effect fixed is financed through permanent financing.
Help
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, accesses the online help system.
Histogram
A graphic display of resource usage over a period of time. It allows the
detection of overused or under-used resources. The resource usage is
displayed in bars.
Historical average cost of capital
The cost associated with the companys existing financing.
Historical cost estimating
Using old specifications and estimates from similar, earlier and already built
projects, and then adding some form of index to these past numbers to
determine costs for a current project.
Host
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator (on a UNIX workstation), the computer that
is in charge of the operation of a group of computers linked in a network.
HP
Horsepower.
HVAC
Heating, ventilating and air conditioning.
I
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (IPE)
ICARUS powerful PC-based software package designed for the automatic
preparation of detailed process facility designs, estimates and engineering and
construction schedules from your process simulation results.
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator (IPM)
ICARUS easy-to-use, fully-integrated, PC-based design, estimating,
scheduling, cost tracking and reporting system for in-plant and mill projects.
Icon
A graphical representation of an application or document.
Import
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, copies specified information from an existing
project into the current project.
Income bonds
A debt instrument that requires interest payments only when the corporation
has positive earnings. It is often used for reorganizations.
Income statement
A record of a companys recorded earnings and expenses for a given
time period.
Incremental average cost of capital
The cost associated with using or generating new funds.
Indenture
See Bond indenture.
Indirect costs
All costs that do not become a final part of the installation. Indirect costs are
temporary construction costs and contractor overheads, burdens, fees, project
freight, design engineering, project management, taxes, insurance, cleanup
and contingency.
Industry forecast
Projection of revenue and cost trends for a particular industry.
Industry ratios
Ratios generated for an entire industry by calculating the ratios for each
corporation in that industry.
Inflation
An economic situation in which the costs of goods and services increase and
the relative worth of a given amount of money decreases.
Info
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, lists information about the current backup or
retrieval.
Input-output model
A causal sales forecasting method in which interindustry transactions are used
to set up a purchaser-seller matrix, which in turn is used to establish
sales trends.
Installation bulks
Items that are directly associated with the component being defined and that
are used to complete the installation of the item. Refer to the users guide for
details on the twelve types of installation bulks summarized below:
1 Material/man-hour% adjustment - specifies percentage adjustments to
system developed material costs and man-hours.
2 Material/man-hour additions - adds lump sum material costs and/or man-
hours to a specified code of account.
3 Piping - General Specs - defines the rules for developing all of the
components installation piping, which carry liquids, gasses and/or solids
between successive equipment items in the process stream.
4 Piping - Detail Items - specifies individual runs of piping and associated
fittings, tracing, paint and insulation.
5 Duct - for applicable components, specifies individual runs of ducting and
associated fittings and insulation. Up to five duct lines may be specified for
each component.
6 Civil - specifies additional bulk excavation and up to three different
foundation types/sizes. Includes the excavation, erection of formwork,
installation of reinforcing steel and pouring of concrete for foundations to
support equipment.
7 Steel - specifies ladders, stairs, platforms, and up to three different steel
items (e.g., structural elements such as the pipe rack and open
steel structures).
8 Instrumentation - specifies individual instrumentation loops (or parts of
loops) with associated sensors, transmitters and signal cabling. Up to 50
loops may be defined for each component.
9 Electrical - specifies local equipment wiring and up to three different types
of loads. Electrical equipment and cable carries power from a main plant
substation to a unit area substation and, in turn, to each equipment item
requiring electricity.
10 Insulation - specifies insulation and fireproofing for component and
installation bulk steel. For components, the insulation type, jacket type,
thickness, and area can be specified. For component and steel fireproofing,
type, rating and area can be specified.
11 Paint - specifies paint preparation and painting of component and
installation bulk steel.
12 Nozzel - for applicable components, replaces the system-standard nozzle
schedule for vessels and towers. Up to 12 sets of nozzles may be specified,
including diameter, quantity, and location (e.g., shell or jacket).
Intermediate term loan
A loan that is repaid within 1 to 10 years. These loans are usually acquired
through banks, insurance companies and pension funds.
Internal rate of return (IRR)
A discounted cash flow capital budgeting technique. The internal rate of return
is that discount rate which equates the present value of future cash inflows
with the initial investment. It is calculated using a trial and error procedure.
Intrinsic value
The underlying true value of a company as determined by its management of
assets and liabilities and by the risks taken on, and the returns given its
shareholders. It is also in part determined by the individual investors attitudes
toward risk and return. For an actively traded stock, given sufficient
information availability, the intrinsic value is equal to the market value.
Inventory holding costs
The inventory costs that arise from the fact of actually having the inventory.
Included in the holding costs are costs of storing, handling, insuring and
auditing the inventory, and also the costs of taxes, obsolescence, theft,
physical damage and capital investment.
Inventory reorder costs
The inventory costs incurred when inventory stocks must be replaced. These
include the costs of processing, telephoning, typing and receiving orders and
mailing and stationery and invoice costs.
Inventory shortage costs
The inventory costs incurred when a company runs out of inventory. Included
in this are the costs of lost sales, ill will and special orders.
Inventory turnover
An efficiency ratio. A measure of how many times the inventory is sold or
turned over in a sales period = net sales/inventory. It indicates how well the
size of the inventory has been managed.
ISO (Isometric drawing)
A very detailed piping and engineering drawing which includes very specific
equipment items like valves, fittings, elbows, nuts and bolts, etc. Can also
refer to three-dimensional computer drawings which display this piping and
engineering detail as it will appear when fully constructed.
Issued stock
The common stock of a corporation that has actually been sold to an investor.
Item
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, a capsule-shaped element of a tree diagram
representing project specifications.
Item run
The process of having Aspen Capital Cost Estimator prepare a design and
estimate at the component level for all or selected components in a project.
J
JIS
Japanese Industrial Standard.
Jury of executive opinion method for forecasting
A qualitative method of sales of forecasting in which a group of executives
estimate sales and then have these estimates averaged to give the forecast.
K
KV
Kilovolts
KVA
Kilovolts-amperes
KW
Kilowatts
L
Labor burden
Taxes and insurance costs based on labor payroll that the employer is legally
required to pay on behalf of or for the benefits of laborers. (In the U.S., these
include federal old age benefits, federal unemployment insurance tax, state
unemployment tax and workers compensation.)
Labor cost
The base salary, plus all fringe benefit costs and labor burdens associated with
labor, that can be definitely assigned to one item of work, product, area or
account.
Lag
The time delay between the start or finish of an activity and the start or finish
of its successor(s).
Lagging indicator
An economic indicator the changes in which follow the changes in the general
economy during a known period of time.
Late finish
The latest dates by which an activity can finish to avoid causing delays in
a project.
Late start
The latest dates by which an activity can start to avoid causing delays in
a project.
Leading indicator
An economic indicator the changes in which precede concomitant changes in
the general economy in a known amount of time.
Lease
A legal contract whereby a lessee is able to obtain the use of certain assets
without having to actually purchase these assets. The assets remain the
property of a lessor who receives a series of payments for the use of
the assets.
Lease capitalization
The evaluation of a lease arrangement that uses the present value of future
lease payments as the value for lease obligations to be shown as liabilities and
an equal value to be shown as net leased assets on the balance sheet of the
lessee. This is done by capitalizing the lease payments at an appropriate lease
capitalization rate. If this rate is applied to the lease payments after the first
payment is made, it results in a net capitalized value. If it is done before the
first payment is made, a gross capitalized value results.
Lease capitalization rate
See Capitalization rate for leases.
Leverage
The amount of debt financing used by a corporation. A general measure is the
ratio of total debts to total assets.
Leverage ratios
The ratios generated using items dealing with the companys indebtedness,
which monitor the companys ability to meet its financial obligations.
Library
A set of user-defined specifications that may be added into a project when
requested.
Lien
A legally recognized pledge against specific physical property.
Line of credit
An arrangement between a bank and a client company that allows the client to
borrow up to a maximum amount of cash at its own discretion within a set
amount of time. Designed to get the company through periods of short-term
seasonal needs, a line of credit also allows the company the flexibility of
determining the timing and size of amounts outstanding at any one time. The
account generally must be paid up each year.
Link
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, a connection between an item in one tree
diagram with an item in another tree diagram.
Liquidation value
The residual proceeds from selling off the companys assets and paying off the
companys liabilities.
Liquidity
The nearness of a certain asset to cash, the ease with which it can be
converted into cash and the amount of cash realized at conversion.
Liquidity ratios
The ratios using current assets and current liabilities that measure a
companys ability to pay its short-term liabilities.
LJ
Lap joint.
Loaded labor rate
Base labor plus PAC's, fringe benefits and other subcontractors costs, including
overhead and project.
Loan amortization
The procedure of paying off a loan by making a series of equal payments
at regular intervals. These payments include both interest and
principal repayment.
Lock-box system
A method of improving funds collections, based upon having funds mailed to
post office boxes. These funds are then collected several times a day by
representatives of the companys local banks and deposited into the banks.
The companys market is divided into regions and the post offices and banks
are chosen for each region.
Log
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, lists prior backups for selecting files to
retrieve.
M
Main substation
A substation which feeds power at the distribution voltage to either a unit
substation or directly to a motor driven at the distribution voltage.
Maintenance lease
A type of financial lease under which the lessor pays maintenance and
insurance costs.
Making a market
The act of maintaining an inventory of unlisted stocks and selling them as
orders for them are received.
Marginal average cost of capital
The weighted average cost associated with raising the last dollar of a
hypothetical new budget.
Marginal cost of capital
The minimum rate of return expected by the companys suppliers of capital.
Mark text
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, to select text by dragging the mouse pointer
over the selected text while holding down the left mouse button.
Mark-up
As variously used in construction estimating, such percentage applications as
general overhead, profit, and other indirect costs. When mark-up is applied to
the bottom of a bid sheet for a particular item, system or other construction
price, any or all of the above items (or more) may be included, depending on
local practice.
Market extension merger
A horizontal merger by which the geographical market of the merging
companies is extended.
Market value
The value established in the market place by supply and demand and
market transactions.
Maturity value of a bond
The value of a bond if held until the maturity date and then redeemed. It is
usually the same as the face value and remains constant over the life of
the bond.
MCC
Motor control center.
MCC equipped space
Motor control center equipment, i.e., cabinetry and back-plane wiring,
exclusive of starter gear; unfilled MCC space available for rearrangement
or expansions.
Mechanical engineering
Primarily concerned with the function, use, design and fabrication of
equipment. The designing, testing, building and operating of machinery are
also of importance. Mechanical engineering focuses on two areas: machinery
and thermodynamics (heat and energy management based on laws of
conversion of matter and energy).
Micro-scheduling
The scheduling of activities with durations less than one day (in hours or
fractional days.)
Milestones
An activity with zero duration (usually marking the end of a period.)
Minimum market value
For a convertible bond at any given point in time, this is the higher of the pure
bond value or the conversion value.
Miscellaneous indirect costs
Job cleanup costs, watchmen, equipment servicing (insurance and safety),
public liability, damage, automobile and all-risk insurance, warehousing and
nonproductive field labor.
Mobilization/Demobilization
An indirect cost including transportation cost of equipment, offices, etc. to and
from the construction site.
Mortgage bond
A bond that is backed by the pledge of specific assets of the company. If the
company is liquidated, proceeds from the liquidation of these assets are used
to satisfy these bondholders claims. They are considered the most secure type
of bond although they do not guarantee perfect safety. They can be either
senior or junior mortgage bonds, the senior having priority over all other
creditors of the company, the junior coming next.
Mouse
A device connected to the computer, that when moved, moves the cursor on
the monitor screen. In addition, the buttons on the mouse enable the user to
select text and objects.
Moving averages
A quantitative sales forecasting method in which an arithmetic average over
some predetermined number of sales periods is used to determine trends.
MPS
Master project schedule.
Multi-project analysis
Used to analyze the impact and interaction of activities and resources whose
progress affects the progress of a group of projects or for projects with shared
resources or both. Multi-project analysis can also be used for composite
reporting on projects having no dependencies or resources in common.
N
Negative float
Indicates activities must start before their predecessors finish in order to meet
a target finish date. All float is calculated when a project has its schedule
computed. Negative float occurs when the difference between the late dates
and the early dates (start or finish) or any activity are negative. In this
situation, the late dates are earlier then the early dates. This can happen when
constraints (activity target dates or a project target finish date) are added to
a project.
Negatively correlated projects
Projects whose net cash flow patterns are inversely related.
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturing Association.
Net cash flows
The difference between cash inflows and outflows.
Net present value (NPV)
A discounted cash flow capital budgeting technique: NPV is the difference
between the present value of the future net cash flows of a project and the
initial investment.
Net working capital (NWC)
The difference between current assets and current liabilities: CA - CL = NWC.
It can be thought of as the companys conscious commitment in CA to
generate sales.
Net working capital turnover
An efficiency ratio. A measure of how well management generates sales
utilizing current assets = net sales/net working capital.
Net worth
Total stockholders equity or total assets minus total liabilities.
Net worth turnover
An efficiency ratio. A measure of how well management utilizes stockholders
equity to generate sales = net sales/net worth.
Network
A group of computers connected together.
Network analysis
The process of identifying early and late start and finish dates for
project activities.
Network diagram
A graphic representation of activity sequence and relationships. Activity boxes
are connected together with one-way arrow to indicate precedence. The first
activity is placed on the left side of the diagram with the last activity on the
right side. Activity boxes are usually placed at different levels (not in a single
row) to accommodate activities that are done simultaneously.
O
Offsets
Items located external to the facility battery limits, including cooling towers
and boilers.
OH
Overhead.
OK
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, specifies that you wish to continue with the
current activity.
Open-end mortgage bond
A mortgage bond issue that does not limit the ability of the company to sell
additional senior mortgage bonds by pledging the same assets.
Operating lease
Also called service lease a lease that allows the lessee to terminate the
lease at his convenience. The payments under an operating lease usually
include service and maintenance charges.
Operating leverage
A measure of the effect of changes in sales level on changes in earnings before
interest and taxes. The magnitude of the effect is determined by the portion of
sales revenue that has to be used to cover fixed costs.
Operational unit area
Any physical or geographical area of the facility, either inside or external to the
battery limits.
Opportunity cost
The cost incurred by foregoing the opportunity to take advantage of the next
best alternative.
Option menu
Within a dialog box or entry form, a listing of all allowable entries/options.
Order of magnitude: -30 to +50 percent estimate
(as defined by AACE) This type of estimate is made without any detailed
engineering data. The estimate is often developed using cost-capacity curves,
scale-up or -down factors or ratio estimating techniques.
Organizational goal
The aim or end product that the corporation as a whole works to achieve. All of
the decisions made within the corporation should be made in terms of
this aim.
Organized exchange
An organized capital market complete with physical facilities, governing boards
and membership regulations and requirements.
Orifice union
Special set of flanges designed to hold an orifice plate.
Origin
The identity of a direct cost component (such as a pump), consisting of a 3-
character symbol and a number from 100 to 999 (e.g., CP 100 for Centrifugal
Pump numbered 100). This identity is also used to label all installation bulks
attached to the pump.
OSHA
U.S. Occupational Safety and Heath Administration.
OT
Overtime.
Overhead
A cost or expense inherent in performing an operation, i.e., engineering,
construction, operating, or manufacturing, that cannot be charged to or
identified with a part of the work, product, or asset and which, therefore, must
either be allocated on some arbitrary basis believed to be equitable, or
handled as a business expense independent of the volume of production.
P
P&ID
Piping and instrumentation diagram. Basics of detailed engineering. P&IDs are
detailed drawings of a specific process to be built. P&IDs do not list specific
items, such as inessential valves, fittings and elbows.
PAC's
Payroll added costs: Social Security, workers' compensation, insurance,
federal and state taxes.
Paid-in capital
See Paid-in surplus.
Paid-in surplus
Also called paid-in capital, excess over par, and capital in excess of par the
difference between the par value of a share of stock and the amount the
company realized on the initial issue of that share.
Par value
An arbitrary value assigned to each share of common stock. It is used for
accounting purposes only and has no influence on either the issue price or the
market price of a share of stock.
Parallel activities
Two or more activities that can be done at the same time. This allows a project
to be completed faster than if the activities were arranged serially in a
straight line.
Path
A series of connected activities. Refer to Critical path for information on critical
and non-critical paths.
Payback method (PM)
A non-discounted capital budgeting technique. This method calculates the
length of time necessary to recover initial investment. Most calculations of
payback assume that the cash inflows occur uniformly.
PC
Any personal computer (such as an IBM PC or compatible) using MS-DOS, OS/
2, Windows, Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95, Windows NT Workstation,
or Windows NT Server operating systems.
Percent-of-sales method for forecasting
A funds forecasting method in which it is assumed that a change in sales will
require a determined change in the assets of the company, which in turn need
to be funded in some way.
Perpetual bond
A bond with no maturity date.
Perpetual warrants
Warrants with no expiration date.
PFD
Process flow diagram. Process configuration with heat and material balances.
Phase 0
Preliminary process design.
Phase I
Firm process design.
Phase II
Detailed engineering design, procurement and project control.
Plant bulk
An item (piping, civil, steel, instrumentation, electrical, insulation and/or
paint) which is needed to properly install a project component or operate
a facility
Plant start-up
Includes man-hours spent by the contractors discipline representatives
(specialists, foremen, superintendents, etc.), after mechanical completion of
the project, to perform the following tasks:
1 Support the testing and calibration of field instruments, electrical
measuring devices, etc.
2 Assist the owner with starting the plant and address any technical issues.
3 Consult with the owner on adjustments during the commissioning process.
Items not included in this contractor cost are such things as conferring with
the DCS vendor, developing control software, temporary utilities (e.g., more
steam required for start-up than thereafter), initial catalyst charges, changes
to the project scope or exchanging items, and any of the owners calibration or
commissioning staff.
PLC
Programmed logic controller.
Plot plan
A geographic (sky-view) plan for a future site. This is sometimes
called dimensioning.
PM/PE
Project manager/engineer.
PO
Purchase order.
Portfolio effect
The reduction in portfolio risk realized by diversification into negatively
correlated projects.
Portfolio risk
The total risk incurred by holding a portfolio of assets.
Positive float
The amount of time that an activitys start can be delayed without affecting
the project completion date. An activity with positive float is not on the critical
path and is called a non-critical activity.
Power factor
The ratio of KW/KVA for an electrical system.
Precautionary motive
A motive for holding cash reserves that stems from managements desire to be
able to handle any extraordinary and unexpected cash outflows.
Precedence notation
A means of describing project work flow. It is sometimes called activity-on-
node notation. Each activity is assigned a unique identifier. Work flow direction
is indicated by showing each of the activitys predecessors and their lag
relationships. Graphically, precedence networks are represented by using
descriptive boxes and connecting arrows to denote the flow of work.
Predecessor
An activity that must be completed (or partially completed) before a specified
activity can begin. The combination of all predecessors and successors
relationships among the project activities forms a network. This network can
be analyzed to determine the critical path and other project
scheduling implications.
Preferred stock
A type of equity that has certain priorities over common stock. It is generally
characterized by fixed dividend payments, which are payable before
common stock
dividends and claims on the liquidation value of the company that are
subordinate to all creditor claims but prior to common stockholder claims.
Preprocessor
A set of one or more ICUE commands stored in a file which can be opened,
edited, saved and run. Preprocessors are helpful when you access the estimate
results database and run the same ICUE commands.
Present value
The mechanism whereby future costs and benefits can be made comparable to
present costs and benefits.
Price
The amount of money asked or given for a product. The chief function of price
is to ration the existing supply among prospective buyers. Price incorporates
direct and indirect costs, general overhead, profit and contingency.
Primary KV
Voltage in KV of the incoming power to a substation.
Primary market
That segment of the capital market which deals with new issues of securities
and the movement of funds from investors to issuing companies.
Prime rate
The lowest interest rate applicable to business loans.
Privilege level
For Windows NT, one of three settings (User, Administrator, or Guest)
assigned to each user account. The privilege level a user account has
determines the actions that the user can perform on the network.
Pro forma financial statements
Projections of possible future statements developed by taking existing
statements and changing them according to the effects of assumed financial
transactions. This is most often done with income statements, balance sheets
and funds statements.
Process engineering
Performing and determining process needs prior to Basic engineering and
Detailed engineering. Process engineering, usually performed by chemical
engineers, includes defining process streams using the data from
process simulators.
Process equipment
Equipment for handling liquids, gasses and solids.
Process fluid
A gas or liquid raw material, intermediate project or chemical (e.g., a solvent)
used in the manufacture of the product.
Product extension
A horizontal merger by which the product line of the merger companies
is extended.
Productivity
A relative measure of labor efficiency, either good or bad, when compared to
an established base or norm as determined from an area of great experience.
Alternatively, productivity is defined as the reciprocal of the labor factor.
Profit margin
A profitability ratio. A measure of how well management has controlled costs
while successfully marketing the companys products = net profits/net sales. It
shows how many cents of profit are realized out of each sales dollar.
Profitability
The ability of a corporation to show a surplus of income over expenses in a
particular sales period. This is usually measured in dollars of total profit to
sales for the period.
Profitability ratios
Ratios that measure how effective management has been in generating a
return utilizing the assets of the company.
Program evaluation and review technique (PERT)
A project management technique for determining how much time a project
needs before it completed. Each activity is assigned a best, worst and most
probable completion time estimate. These estimates are used to determine the
average completion time. The average times are used to figure the critical
path and the standard deviation of completion times for the entire project.
Project
A collection of general specifications and component design specifications
which describe a facility for an ICARUS system to designate/estimate.
Project database
The design and cost information stored in multiple SQL files for a
specific project.
Project estimate
The process of designing and costing the direct cost components and the
indirect costs in the project scope and creating database files.
Project manager
In owner/operator plants, someone who is responsible for design decisions and
reviewing processes, their viability and sometimes their completion. In
contractor companies, someone who is responsible for detailed design
decisions (integrating PFD, P&ID and ISO specifications) to complete a
projects construction.
Project run
The process of having an ICARUS system prepare a design and estimate at the
project level for the entire project.
Promissory note
An IOU that establishes tangible proof of debt.
Proxy
An arrangement that allows common stockholders of a corporation to assign
their voting rights over to someone else for one particular
stockholders meeting.
Q
QA/QC
Quality assurance and control.
Queue
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, lists active print jobs.
Quick ratio
The liquidity ratio. Ratio of total current assets less inventories to total current
liabilities = (CA - Inv)/CL. Also called the acid-test ratio.
Quit
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, terminates an activity.
R
Rapid growth stocks
Stocks for which the dividends are expected to grow at a rapid rate for a few
years and then level to a normal, constant growth rate.
Recession
A situation in which the economy of a given area worsens.
Red herring
A preliminary prospectus on a new securities issue sent out by the
underwriters. It includes a history of the company, the intended use of the
funds, up-to-date certified financial statements and a statement on risks. It is
used to provide information, generate interest and help set the final selling
price of the new securities.
Refit
Changing an existing facility by adding something left out, overhauling worn
out components or adding or subtracting from the current capacities of
existing components.
Registered bond
A bond that belongs to a specific investor whose name is recorded with the
company. This bondholder receives interest payments automatically.
Regression analysis
A causal sales forecasting method in which sales are defined as a function of a
number of independent variables. Changes in these independent variables are
then used to determine a model that will forecast future sales levels.
Regression analysis can also be used to forecast the need for funding.
Remote Shop Fab
Contains vendor costs for labor, overhead and profit, which is typically
reported from the vendor in weight.
Remote Shop Mat
Contains material cost (excluding freight, taxes, and duties, which should be
specified as project indirects).
Reorganization
Under bankruptcy proceedings, this is the formal restructuring of the debtor
companys financial structure. It involves discharging the debt, making
managerial and operational changes and acquiring new working capital.
Rescheduling
Recalculating the start and finish dates of all uncompleted activities based on
progress as of a specified date.
Residual assets
Any assets that remain after assets have been liquidated to pay off creditors.
Residual theory of dividends
A dividend policy which maintains that retained earnings should first be
applied to any financing needs of the corporation. Any retained earnings not
needed internally can be paid out as dividends.
Resource
Anything that is assigned to an activity or needed to complete an activity. This
may include equipment, people, buildings, etc.
Resource based duration
Provides the option to determine activity duration, remaining duration and
percent complete through resource usage. The resource requiring the greatest
time to complete the specified amount of work on the activity determines
its duration.
Resource leveling
Provides the capability to adjust project schedules to minimize the peaks in
daily resource usages. This is usually done when resources are over-allocated.
Activities are moved within their available float to produce a new schedule.
Resources and projects may have leveling priorities. Some activities may not
have any rescheduling flexibility due to lack of float. Either resource-
constrained or schedule-constrained leveling may be selected.
Retrofit
See Refit.
Return on net worth
A profitability ratio. A measure of the amount of profit realized through the use
of the companys equity, which represents a return to stockholders = net
profits/net worth.
Return on net working capital
A profitability ratio. A measure of the amount of profit realized through the use
of the companys current assets = net profit/NWC.
Return on total assets
A profitability ratio. A measure of the amount of profit realized through the
utilization of the companys assets = net profit/total assets.
Revamp
See Refit.
Revolving credit
A credit arrangement between a bank and a client in which the bank makes a
formal, legally binding commitment to extend credit to the client up to a
specified limit. It incurs a commitment fee in addition to the interest. Quite
often it extends for more than 1 year.
Rights offering
The method whereby stockholders who have the preemptive right are offered
the opportunity to maintain their proportionate share when new stock is
being issued.
Risk averter
A person who possesses very little utility for high risk undertakings.
Risk neutral
The state of having utility only for the expected return of a project.
Risk-adjusted discount rate
A discount rate that includes a premium to allow for the risk associated with
the net cash flows to be analyzed.
Risk-free interest rate
The return offered by investments that have no risk in them. This rate is
usually established by the rate of return offered by U.S. Treasury
debt instruments.
Risk-seeker
A person who has very high utility for high risk projects.
ROG
A credit term that means receipt of goods and indicates that the credit period
does not begin until the day the goods are received.
Run
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, produces the selected estimate type.
S
Safety stock
A quantity of inventory above the amount determined by using an EOQ model,
which will handle unanticipated demand. These levels are dependent upon lead
time to delivery, the probability distribution of demand and customer
service policies.
Sale and leaseback
A type of financial lease whereby a company sells an asset to a second
company, which in turn leases the asset back to the first company. These
assets can be either old or new. They must be sold near their appraised
market value and the lease must be fully amortized. The only real difference
between a sale and leaseback arrangement and a financial lease is that the
former usually involves assets the company is already using and the latter
usually involves assets new to the company.
Sale of assets
A business combination whereby one company purchases the assets of
another. The buying company may also assume some or all of the liabilities of
the other company.
Sales force composite method for forecasting
A Sales forecast The projection of estimated sales for a specific period for a
particular company, which serves as the basis for other forecasts made by the
company and for many of its decisions.
Salvage value
The expected value of an asset at the end of its usable life for the company.
The difference between an assets cost and its salvage value is the amount to
be depreciated over the assets usable life.
SC
Subcontract/subcontractor.
Scan
The process of checking the project scope for feasibility of design.
Scheduling
The process of determining when project activities will take place depending
on defined durations and precedent activities. Schedule constraints specify
when an activity should start or end based on duration, predecessors, external
predecessor relationships, resource availability or target dates.
Scope
The equipment and materials to be provided, and the work to be performed.
Scope is documented by the contract parameters for a project to which the
company is committed.
Seasonal dating
A credit arrangement that extends the credit period for certain seasonal goods
into their selling season.
Secondary markets
That segment of the capital markets that deals with existing securities and the
transactions that occur between investors.
Security
A means of ensuring that shared files can be accessed only by
authorized users.
Select
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, to highlight an item by clicking it with the
mouse or using key combinations. Selecting does not initiate an action.
Selling group
A group of brokerage houses and dealers who sell the new securities
to investors.
Semi variable costs
Costs that have both fixed and variable components.
Sensitivity analysis in cash budgeting
The systematic change of certain assumptions underlying the cash budget in
order to study the effects of these changes and to anticipate and control any
real life situations involving these assumptions.
Sequence
The order in which activities occur with respect to one another. This
establishes the priority and dependencies between activities. Successor and
predecessor relationships are developed in a network format. This allows those
involved in the project to visualize the work flow.
Sinking fund
A bond indenture provision that requires the company to make periodic
payments to the trustee. This fund is to be used to retire portions of the bond
issue, either by buying the bonds off the market or calling and retiring portions
of it by lottery.
Site development
Includes those actions that must be taken to convert a prospective facility site
into a reasonably flat plant area, free of major obstructions, and with
provisions for water drainage, fencing, paving and rail spurs.
Slippage
The amount of slack or float time used by the current activity due to a delayed
start. If an activity without float is delayed, the entire project will slip.
Source of funds
The inflows of funds from operations, decreases in assets and increases in
liabilities and net worth accounts.
Sources and use of funds statement
A financial statement that traces the flow of funds through the income, assets
and liabilities of a company.
Special reports
Customized reports created by the ICUE Reporter.
Speculative motive for holding cash
A motive for holding cash reserves that stems from managements desire to
take advantage of any unexpected opportunities.
SQL
Structured query language, a database sub language for querying, updating,
and managing relational databases. The basic structure of the relational model
is a table, consisting of rows and columns. Data definition includes declaring
the name of each table to be included in a database, the name and data types
of all columns of each table, constraints on the values in and among columns,
and the granting of table manipulation privileges to prospective users. Tables
can be accessed by inserting new rows, deleting or updating existing rows, or
selecting rows that satisfy a given search condition for output.
SS
Stainless steel.
Stable dollar dividend policy
A dividend policy adopted by a company to pay out a fixed dollar amount of
dividend per share annually.
Stable payout ratio policy
A dividend policy used by a company that would result in the dollar amount of
the dividend per share changing from year to year to conform to an
established ratio of earnings per share and dividends per share. This policy is
used by companies with fluctuating earnings.
Standard basis
A previously defined project which is copied to provide the starting point for a
new project.
Start float
The amount of excess time an activity has between its early start and late
start dates.
Start-to-start lag
The minimum amount of time that must pass between the start of one activity
and the start of its successor(s).
Starting activity
A starting activity has no predecessors. It does not have to wait for any other
activity to start.
Statutory consolidation
A merger in which both merging companies cease to exist as separate
companies and a brand new company is formed. Shares of the old companies
are exchanged for shares of the new. The new company assumes all the assets
or liabilities of the old companies.
Statutory merger
A merger in which one of the partners is completely taken over and ceases to
exist as a separate business. There is a tax-free exchange of shares. All of the
assets and liabilities of the acquired company are assumed by the
surviving company.
Stock dividend
The payment of dividends in stock. This increases the number of shares
outstanding, leaves unchanged the par value of the stock and capitalizes part
of the retained earnings.
Stock markets
Stock markets such as the New York Stock Exchange, the American Stock
Exchange and the Midwest Stock Exchange are examples of organized
exchanges where corporate securities are traded.
Stock right
A subscription option that exists with each share of existing stock during a
rights offering. It has a value during the rights offering but is worthless
thereafter. The existing stockholder can choose to exercise the right, sell it or
allow it to expire.
Stock split
A stock dividend that results in an increase of 25 percent or more in the
number of shares of stock outstanding. The par value of the stock is adjusted
to account for this increase in number. Retained earnings do not change.
Stockholders equity
See Total stockholders equity.
Straight run equivalent pipe
A shortcut method to approximate the material plus labor cost of insulating
pipe valves and fittings. The SREL is the length of like type, diameter and
thickness straight run pipe insulation which has an "equivalent" cost.
Straight run pipe
Pipe with no fittings/valves; just the straight pipe (no bends or turns).
Structured query language (SQL)
A database sub language for querying, updating, and managing relational
databases. The basic structure of the relational model is a table, consisting of
rows and columns. Data definition includes declaring the name of each table to
be included in a database, the name and data types of all columns of each
table, constraints on the values in and among columns, and the granting of
table manipulation privileges to prospective users. Tables can be accessed by
inserting new rows, deleting or updating existing rows, or selecting rows that
satisfy a given search condition for output.
Sub-critical activity
A sub-critical activity has a float threshold value assigned to it by the project
manager. When the activity reaches its float threshold, it is identified as being
critical. Since this type of criticality is artificial, it normally does not impact the
projects end date.
Subordinated debenture
A bond whose holders claims are subordinate or lower than the claims of all
other creditors. They tend to have rather high interest rates.
Subproject
A distinct group of activities that comprise their own project which in turn is a
part of a larger project. Subprojects can be summarized into a single activity
to hide the detail.
Subscription price
The price at which a new share of common stock can be purchased at issue.
Successor
An activity whose start or finish depends on the start or finish of a
predecessor activity.
Summary funds statement
A sources-and-use-of-funds statement that combines certain accounts into
broad categories.
Super-critical activity
An activity that is behind schedule is considered to be super-critical. It has
been delayed to a point where its float is calculated to be a negative value. The
negative float is representative of the number of units an activity is
behind schedule.
SW
Socket weld.
T
T-T
Tangent to tangent. Straight-side dimension of vessels, columns and reactors.
Take-off
Detailed quantity count of work components: cubic yards, tons, feet, etc.
Target finish activity
The users imposed finish date for an activity. A target finish date is used if
there are pre-defined commitment dates.
Target finish project
A users target finish date can be imposed on a project as a whole. A target
finish date is used if there is a pre-defined completion date.
Target start activity
An imposed starting date on an activity.
Technical insolvency
A financial state in which a company cannot pay its due and payable
financial obligations.
TEFC
Totally enclosed fan cooled. Term applied to electrical motors.
TEMA
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturing Association.
TEWAC
Totally Enclosed Water Cooled.
Temporary construction
An indirect cost including temporary shelter and sanitary facilities, utilities,
temporary power, roadways, rigging and fencing.
Tender offer
An offer made by one company directly to the stockholders of another to
purchase the shares of the second company. This is a method used in a
takeover of a company. It is usually done without the consent of the
management of the second company.
Terminal warehouse receipt
Short-term financing instrument used with pledged inventories by which the
goods are transferred to a public warehouse and released only by
authorization of the lender. It is used when there is concern that the borrower
might liquidate the inventory without paying.
TEWAC
Totally enclosed water cooled.
Text string
A set of one or more characters, including letters, numbers, symbols and
blank spaces.
Time value of money
The concept that the value of an amount of money changes over time. It
assumes that money now is preferable to the same amount later and implies
that $1 received today is worth more than $1 received later.
Times interest earned
A leverage ratio. The ratio of operating income to interest expense = OI/
interest. This measures the ability of the company to meet interest payments
with funds generated from operations.
Total assets turnover
An efficiency ratio. A measure of how well management uses the assets of the
company to generate sales = net sales/TA.
Total debt to total assets ratio
A leverage ratio. This gives an indication of the amount of debt used to finance
each dollar of total assets = TD/TA.
Total float
The excess time available for an activity to be expanded or delayed without
affecting the rest of the project assuming it begins at its earliest time.
Total stockholders equity
Also called total net worth the sum of common stock, paid-in surplus and
retained earnings less treasury stock.
Trade acceptance
A formal acknowledgment of debt that is initiated by the seller of the goods
and accepted by the buyer in order to permit shipment of the desired goods.
Trade credit
Also called accounts payable. A short-term financing source realized by
assuming a liability by buying goods on credit. Three types of trade credit
arrangements are open accounts, notes payable and trade acceptances.
Transaction loans
A short-term, 30 - 90 days, credit arrangement that allows a bank client to
borrow money for some special purpose.
Transactional motive for holding cash
A motive for holding cash that stems from managements desire to meet
operating requirements.
Treasury stock
The authorized and issued stock of a corporation that the corporation itself has
repurchased off the market. This stock is no longer outstanding.
Tree diagram
Branched graphical representation of specifications for contractors, contractor
scopes, power distribution, process control and areas.
Trend projection
A quantitative sales forecasting method in which sales trends are estimated
through the analysis of data that have been systematically gathered for some
period of time.
Trust receipt
A short-term financing instrument used in inventory pledging in which the
borrower acknowledges it holds merchandise in trust for the lender. It is used
when the goods are more easily held by the borrower and when they can be
identified by serial number.
Trustee
The overseer of a bond issue who protects the interests of the bondholders. It
is usually a bank or some other responsible financial institution.
U
Underwriting syndicate
A temporary alliance of investment brokers who jointly underwrite a particular
new issue.
Unit cost database
An electronic, computer-based version of the once encyclopedic versions of
lists of process equipment items and their associated unit costs. Means and
Richardsons and other book versions have been transferred to computer
databases. Unit cost databases are used for definitive (detailed) engineering
and estimating.
Unit substation
A substation which feed power at a voltage less than the distribution voltage
(a) electrical equipment such as motors and lights within the process facility or
(b) another unit substation for further transformation to a lower utilization
voltage. Thus for (b), the subordinate unit substation would draw power from
the serving principle unit substation.
Unsecured loan
A loan for which the bank requires no collateral.
Uses of funds
The outflow of funds used for increases in assets and decreases in liabilities
and net worth accounts.
V
Value
The perceived utility or satisfaction inherent in a product or service.
Value engineering
A practice function that is targeted at the design itself. The objective of value
engineering is to develop or design a facility or item that will yield the least life
cycle costs or provide the greatest value while satisfying all performance and
other criteria established for it.
Variable cash budget
A series of budgets developed at various levels of production or sales that
allows for immediate reaction to any shifts.
Variable costs
The costs that change directly with changes in production or sales levels.
Variable payment sinking fund
A sinking fund arrangement that requires payments only when the companys
earnings are high enough. This arrangement minimizes the possibility of
default due to a missed payment.
Vendor representatives
An indirect cost including travel, sustenances and average rates for vendor
field representatives, e.g., a compressor specialist.
Vertical merger
A merger that involves two companies in the same business at different
manufacturing and distribution levels.
W
Wage rate
The wage paid to a specific discipline.
Weighted cost of capital
Also called average cost of capital. Calculation of the cost of capital that takes
into account the proportionate weights of each component utilized.
Windows NT workstation
The portable, secure 32-bit preemptive multitasking member of Microsoft
Windows operating system family.
Work breakdown structure (WBS)
A tool for defining the hierarchical breakdown of responsibilities and work in a
project. It is developed by identifying the highest level of work in the project.
These major categories are broken down into smaller components. The
subdivision continues until the lowest required level of detail is established.
These end units of the WBS become activities in a project. Once implemented,
the WBS facilitates summary reporting at a variety of levels.
Work flow
The relationship of the activities in a project from start to finish. Work flow
takes into consideration all types of activity relationships.
Work load
The amount of work units assigned to a resource over a period of time.
Work unit
Standard unit established to value all work components in a rational and
consistent manner. (The measurement of resources.) For example, people as
a resource can be measured by the number of hours they work.
Working capital
Current assets such as cash, marketable securities, accounts receivable and
inventories. Working capital has a life of less than 1 year.
Working capital management
Managerial decisions on the amount of capital to be invested in various current
assets and how this investment is to be financed.
Y
Yield to maturity
That discount rate which makes the present value of future inflows from a
bond equal to its present market value.
Z
Zero float
Zero float is a condition where there is no excess time between activities. An
activity with zero float is considered a critical activity. If the duration of any
critical activity is increased (the activity slips), the project finish date will slip.
Zero growth stocks
Stocks for which expected dividends are considered to remain constant.
Zero-base budgeting
A planning procedure that assumes that the relevant base for all planning is
zero dollars.
Index (G6) 1
Index (G6)
Numerics
1 1, 2, 5, 2, 51, 9, 10, 14, 17, 18, 19, 20, 6, 7,
24, 25, 29, 2, 6, 8, 12, 15, 16, 27, 41, 45, 46,
10, 29, 32, 39, 43, 52, 53, 57, 61, 62, 65, 69,
1, 7, 9, 10, 12, 15, 16, 21, 24, 25, 32, 38, 44,
46, 49, 50
1 SPEED
Hoists (HO) 18
2 STAGE
Ejectors (EJ) 4
4 STAGE
Ejectors (EJ) 5
4-STAGE B
Ejectors (EJ) 5
5 SPEED
Hoists (HO) 18, 22
5-STAGE B
Ejectors (EJ) 6
A
AACE 1
ABC 1
Above-grade piping
piping plant bulks 3, 6
Absorber towers 3
Absorption towers 3
ABVGR-TANK
civil plant bulks 2
AC/DC Transformer
electrical plant bulks 21
Accelerated depreciation 1
Accelleration
seismic data 15
Accomodations
construction overhead 62
Account 1
ACID BRICK
Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN) 8
Acid-test ratio 1
Action button 1
Activated aluminas
packing 4
Activated carbon
pacing materials 72
packing 4
Activity duration 2
Actual dates 2
Addendum 2
Adsorption towers 3
AERATOR
Water Treatment Systems (WTS) 8
AFC 2
AFD 2
Agitated falling film
Evaporators (E) 4
Agitated pan batch dryer
Dryers (D) 9
Agitated Tanks (AT) 7
COND-CELL 20
FLOAT-CELL 20
general nomenclature 21
MACH-PULP 17
MIXER 8, 9
OFF-MACH 17, 18
OPEN TOP 11
Agitated thin film evaporator
Wiped Film Evaporators (WFE) 7
Agitators (AG) 7
ANCHOR 3
DIRECT 2
FIXED PROP 3
GEAR DRIVE 2
HIGH SHEAR 5
MECH-SEAL 3
PORT-PROP 3
PULP STOCK 4
SAN-FIXED 6
SAN-PORT 7
side entry 4
top entry 4
Air Compressors (AC) 8
CENTRIF-M 2
packaged unit 2, 3
RECIP-GAS 3
RECIP-MOTR 4
SINGLE 1-S 4
2 Index (G6)
SINGLE 2-S 4
AIR COOLER
Heat Exchangers (HE) 3
AIR DRYER
Dryers (AD) 8
Air Dryers (AD) 15
AIR DRYER 8
Air fan
AIR COOLER (HE) 3
Allocate 2
Allowances 2
ALMNA 72
Alternate 2
Alumina
packing materials 72
Aluminum
non-ferrous plate materials
ASME 8
DIN 44
JIS 32
Amortization 2
Analog, process control 14
ANCHOR
Agitators (AG) 3
Anion exchangers
DEMINERAL 8
SOFTENING 8
Anodes
ANSI 3
Centrifugal Pumps (CP) 2
ANSI PLAST
API 3
API 610
API 610-IL
Apply 3
Apply & Close 3
APRON
Conveyors (CO) 7
Area
insulation/fireproofing 2
Area lighting
AREA-LIGHT
electrical plant bulks 8, 9
Areas
pipe envelope 7
process control 20
types 3
unreferenced requiring power 35
ASME 3
ASPHALT
site development 12
Asphalt equipment
construction equipment 14
Asphaltic resin lining 69
ATM SUSPEN
Centrifuges (CT) 2
Atmospheric
solid/liquid storage
Vertical Tanks (VT) 36
Atmospheric tray batch dryer
Dryers (D) 9
ATM-SYSTEM
Tray Drying Systems (TDS) 14
ATTRITION
Mills (M) 7
Attrition mill
Mills (M) 7
AUTOGENOUS
Mills (M) 8
Autogenous mill
Mills (M) 8
Automotive
Average collection period 3
Average rate of return (ARR) 3
Axial
Gas Compressors (GC) 5
AXIAL FLOW
B
BACKFILL
earthwork - site development 7
Baghouse
cloth bay 6
Balance sheet 4
Ball
Fisher control valve information 23
BALL MILL
Mills (M) 8
Ball mill
Mills (M) 8
Balloon 4
Balloon payment 4
BAR
Screens (VS) 32
Barcharts
project schedule 9
BAROMETRIC
Condensers (C) 2
Base indices
country base
US 2
BASE-PREP
site development 12
Basic engineering 4
disciplines and wage rates
JP 6, 8
UK 4
US 2, 10
BASINS
drainage - site development 4
Basins, catch
Index (G6) 3
Batch
Centrifuges (CT) 2
Batch dryer
Dryers (D) 9
Tray Dring Systems (TDS) 14
Batch tray dryer
BATCH VAC
Crystallizers (CRY) 2
Batch vacuum
BATCH-AUTO
Centrifuges (CT) 2
BATCH-BOTM
Centrifuges (CT) 3
BATCH-TOP
Centrifuges (CT) 3
BEAM SCALE
Scales (S) 19
Beams
steel plant bulks 16
BELGR-TANK
civil plant bulks 3
BELT
Feeders (FE) 14
Scales (S) 19
Belt feeder
Feeders (FE) 14
BENCH
Scales (S) 19
Benefit-cost ratio (BCR) 4
Berl saddle
packing 4
Berl saddles 72
Bid documents 4
Bin activator
Feeders (FE) 14
BIN-ACTVTR
Feeders (FE) 14
BLASTING
BLENDER
Blenders (BL) 25
Blenders (BL) 8
BLENDER 25
KETTLE 25
RIBBON 32, 33, 34
ROTARY 25
ROTARYBOWL 26
BOILER
Steam Boilers (STB) 4
Bond covenants 5
Bond indenture 5
Bond refunding 5
Book value 5
Book value per share 5
BORINGS
BOT-UNLOAD
Centrifuges (CT) 3
BOX
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU) 39, 40
Boxes
Boxes, junction
instrumentation plant bulks 4
Bracing
Brackets
BRADFORD
Crushers (CR) 6
Brass
JIS 32
non-ferrous tube materials
DIN 50
JIS 38
BREAKER
Break-even analysis 5
Break-even budget 5
Break-even point 5
Bridge crane
Cranes (CE) 13
BRIDGE-CRN
Cranes (CE) 13
BRUSH
BS design code
ferrous tube materials
high alloy steel 25
low alloy steel 24
BS5500 5
Bubble cap trays 3
Bucket elevator
Conveyors (CO) 10
Buildings
demolish 3
mill, steel plant bulks 12
BUMPER
railroads - site development 17
Bundle runs - pneumatic
Burdens
Buried Depth 4
Buried pipe
BUS DUCT 19
Butterfly
Butyl rubber
lined steel pipe 59
Butyl rubber lining 69
4 Index (G6)
C
CABLE DUCT 12
Cable tray
Cable, data-highway
Caged ladders 15
steel plant bulks 6
CAISSON
piling - site development 15
Calcium chloride
Calcium silicate
insulation materials 4
CANNED
CANNED RTR
Gear Pumps (GP) 19
Carbon
Carbon steel
lining materials 69
Carpenter 20
ASME non-ferrous
tube materials 14
BS non-ferrous
plate materials 21
DIN non-ferrous
plate materials 45
tube materials 50
JIS non-ferrous
plate materials 33
tube materials 38
CARTRIDGE
Filters (F) 11
Cartridge filter
Filters (F) 11
Cascade rings 73
Cast steel
casting materials 71
Castable refractories, linings 5
Catalyst
bed reactor, packed 8, 21
Catch basin
Catering
Cation exchangers
DEMINERAL 8
Cement
lined steel pipe 59
CENT-BKT-L
Conveyors (CO) 9, 10, 11, 12
CENT-COMPR
Refrigeration Units (RU) 6
CENTRF-PRE
Dust Collectors (C) 6
CENTRIF
Fans, Blowers (FN) 12
CENTRIF-IG
CENTRIF-M
Centrifugal
filters
Centrifuges (CT) 2
Centrifugal precipitator
Dust Collectors (DC) 6
ANSI 2
ANSI PLAST 4, 17
API 610 5
API 610-IL 7
AXIAL FLOW 11
CANNED 11
CENTRIF 12
FLUME PUMP 17
GEN-SERV 13
IN LINE 13
MAG DRIVE 15
PULP STOCK 14
SAN-PUMP 15
TURBINE 14
Centrifuges (CT) 17
ATM SYSPEN 2
BATCH-AUTO 2
BATCH-BOTM 3
BATCH-TOP 3
BOT-UNLOAD 3
DISK 4
INVERTING 5
RECIP-CONV 4
SCREEN-BWL 5
SCROLL-CON 4
SOLID BOWL 4
TOP UNLOAD 3
TUBULAR 5
VIBRATORY 5
CENT-TURBO
Ceramic
CERATE Relation 10
Chain drivers
variable speed motor reducer 5
CHAIN-LINK
fencing - site development 10
Chemical lead lining 69
CHEST-CYL
CHEST-MTL
Index (G6) 5
CHEST-REC
Chests, tile
Chutes
Circuit breakers
Civil
code of accounts 12
concrete foundations 3
concrete tanks 2
structures 3
Cladding material
ASME design code 10
BS design code 22
DIN design code 46
JIS design code 34
Classified-suspension crystallizer
Clear brush
CLEAR-GRUB
Clearing
Click 5
Close 6
CLOSED-BLT
Conveyors (CO) 4
Closed-end mortgage bond 6
CLOTH BAY
Cloth bay baghouse
CM 6
CNTRCT Relation 1, 12
COAT WRAP
piping plant bulks 34
Coatings
COD 6
Code of account 6
Code of accounts
contingencies 7, 28
creating 3, 4
equipment and setting 9
modifying 2
output reports 5
summary reports 5
Coincident indicator 6
Coke
paking materials 72
Collateral 6
Collection costs 6
Columns
packed 8, 21
steel plant bulks 2, 16
tray towers 12, 24
washers 10
Commercial paper 6
Commissioning
JP 7, 9
UK 5
US 3, 11
expenses and indirects 12, 13, 14, 15
Common equity 6
COMPACT
Compaction
Comparative analysis 7
Compensating balance 7
COMPONENT Relation 1, 12
Components 7
Composition 7
COMPRESGAS
Filters (F) 16
Compressed gas filter
Filters (F) 16
Compressor
Concentrators
THICKENER
Thickeners (T) 29
CONC-PAVNG
site development 12
CONCRETE
civil plant bulks 3
Concrete
pipe, piping plant bulks 20
tanks, civil plant bulks 3
Concrete drainage
civil 5
COND-CELL
Condensers (C) 12
BAROMETRIC 2
CONDENSING
Turbines (TUR) 9
Conditioning cell
CONDUIT
CONE
Crushers (CR) 2
Cone bottom
CONE BTM
Cone roof tank (storage)
Conglomerate merger 7
Conical rotary vacuum dryer
Rotary Dryers (RD) 13
Coning 4
6 Index (G6)
CONSET (contract set number) 21, 23, 26
Construction
contracts 66
direct field manpower 67
field office 56
field supervision 69
home office 56
home office construction services 69
management 52, 56
Construction eqiupment
introduction 2
Construction equipment
asphalt equipment 14
automotive 2
compaction 5
compressor 8
concrete 9
crane 6
crane attachment 7
drilling 4
earthmoving 3
electric equipm/tool 13
hoist 14
miscellaneous equipment 12
piping equipment 10
pneumatic port. tool 13
pump 13
site/office equipment 14
trailer 5
truck 2
welding equipment 9, 10
Construction management
JP 8
US 2, 10
Construction overhead
accomodations 62
burdens 61
catering 62
construction overhead & fees 61
construction rental equipment 62
consumables 61
field services 62
fringe benefits 61
miscellaneous 61
scaffolding 62
small tools 61
vendor representatives 62
Construction overhead & fees
Construction overhead and fees 7
Construction rental equipment
Consumables 7
Consumer survey method for forecasting 7
CONTAINMNT
civil plant bulks 5
CONT-BKT-L
Conveyors (CO) 10, 11, 12
Contingencies
code of accounts 7, 28
Contingency 7
Continuous spray drying system
Dryers (D) 10
Contract documents 7
Contracts
concepts 64
construciton - home office construction
services 69
construction 66
construction - direct field manpower 67
construction - field erected vessels 67
construction - field indirects 68
cost benefits 65
description 63
engineering 57, 65
materials 66
overheads 69
prime contractor defaults 62
procurement 65
Control 8
Control centers 14, 15, 16
analog 16
default 17
defining 23, 24
digital 17
PLC 26
redundant control 24
requirements 17
spares 24
types 23
Control process 8
Control valve size
piping 6
Controllers, multifunction
Conversion premium 8
Convertible security 8
Conveyor belt scale
Scales (S) 19
Conveyor transfer tower
Conveyors (CO) 16
APRON 7
CENT-BKT-L 9, 10, 11, 12
CLOSED-BLT 4
CONT-BKT-L 10, 11, 12
OPEN BELT 2
PNEUMATIC 7
ROLLER 8
S BELTCONV 10
S VERTICAL 11
S VIBRATORY 11
sanitary
horizontal 10
vertical 11
Index (G6) 7
vibratory 11
SCREW 8
VIBRATING 8
COOLING
Cooling Towers (CTW) 2
COOLING 2
COOLING-WP 3
factory assembled 3
PACKAGED 3
COOLING-WP
Copper
ASME non-ferrous
tube materials 14
BS non-ferrous
tube materials 26
DIN non-ferrous
tube materials 50
JIS non-ferrous
tube materials 38
Copy & change 8
Cost 8
Cost index 8
Cost modeling 8
Cost of capital 8
Cost reporting
currency and escalation 39
COSTf1COST ICARUS mainframe-based es-
timating and scheduling system for evaluating
major process plants and mills. COST was
first marketed by ICARUS in 1969. 12
Counter flow trays 3
COUNT-ROT
Agitators (AG) 5
Country base
base indices
EU 2
JP 2
UK 2
US 2
project definition 37
Covenants 9
Crafts
names 43
productivity 50
wage rates 42
Crane
Crane attachment
Cranes (CE) 16
BRIDGE-CRN 13
HOIST 13
hoist trolley 13
travelling bridge crane 13
Create 9
Credit discount 9
Credit period 9
Credit period only 9
Credit policy 9
Crew mixes
workforce 42
Critical activity 9
Critical path 9
CROSS BORE
Cross gutter
site development 12
Crossflow trays 3
bubble cap 3
sieve 3
valve 3
CROSS-GUTT
site development 12
CROSSING
Crossing signal
Crude Oil Desalter 11, 12, 13
Crushed limestone
Crushed stone
Crushers (CR) 14
BRADFORD 6
CONE 2
ECCENTRIC 3
GYRATORY 3
HAMMER-MED 6
JAW 4
PULVERIZER 6
reversible hammermill 6
REV-HAMR 5
ring granulator 7
ROLL RING 7
ROTARY 4
rotary breaker 6
SAWTOOTH 5
S-IMPACT 6
single roll 4
size reduction 5
S-ROLL-HVY 5
S-ROLL-LT 4, 5
S-ROLL-MED 5
swing jaw 4
SWING-HAMR 6
CRWSCH Relation 1, 11
CRYOGENIC
Cryogenic storage tank
BATCH VAC 2
batch vacuum 2
classified-suspension 3
growth 3
MECHANICAL 2
8 Index (G6)
mechanical scraped-surface crystallizer 2
OSLO 3
scraped surface 2
CS 9
CSTCRL Relation 11
CSTCTRL Relation 1
CURB
site development 12
Curb and gutter
site development 13
Currency base
conversion 37
Current ratio 10
Current yield 10
CUSSPC Relation 12
CUT-FILL
CYCLONE
CYLINDER
Heating Units (HU) 5
Cylindrical chests
D
Database 10
Data-highway cable
DC HE TW
Single Diameter Towers (TW) 27
Debenture 10
Decision engineering 10
Decision tree 10
DEEP-ANODE
Deferred call provision 10
Definitive
-5 to +15 percent estimate 10
DEFLAKE-CN
Stock Treatment (ST) 10
DEFLAKE-DK
Deflakers
concentric conical type 9
plate type 9
Degree of financial leverage 11
Degree of operating leverage 11
Delete 11
Delivery times
process equiment procurement 10
Delphi method for forecasting 11
Demand-diversity factor 11
DEMINERAL
Demineralizers
packed towers 8, 21
Demineralizing system
Demobilization 11
DEMOL
demolition - site development 3
DEMOLITION
DERRICK
Flares (FLR) 3, 4
Design basis 11
DESIGN Relation 1, 9
Desorption towers 3
Desulferization reactors
packed 8, 21
Detail engineering 54
UK 4
US 2, 10
Detailed engineering 11
DETAILS Relation 1, 7
DEWATERING
Dewatering wells
DH (Direct hire) 12
Dialog box 12
DIAPHRAGM
Piston, Other Positive Displacement Pumps
(P) 22
Digital, process control 14
DIKE
DIKE-MEMBR
civil plant bulks 5, 7
DIRECT
Direct contact heat exchanger tower 27
Direct costs 12
Direct feld fanpower
construction 67
Direct field cost (DFC) 12
Direct steam heat module
sanitary 29
Discharge elevator
Conveyors (CO) 9
DISCNCT SW 19
Discount period 12
Discount rate 12
DISK
Centrifuges (CT) 4
Disk filter
Filters (F) 12
Display 12
DISPOSAL
Distillation towers 2
Distributable 12
Distribution of assets 12
Ditching
Index (G6) 9
Dividend declaration date 12
Dividend payment date 12
Dividend payout ratio 13
Dividend policy 13
Dividend yield 13
Dividends 13
Dollars
currency base 37
DOUBLE ATM
Drum Dryers (DD) 11
Double Diameter Towers (DDT) 12
PACKED 8
TRAYED 12
Double-arm
Kneaders (K) 28
Mixers (MX) 30
Dowtherm unit
Drain field
DRAINAGE
Drainage
civil 5
DRAINS
Drilling
DRUM
Flakers (FL) 7
Drum Dryers (DD) 15
DOUBLE ATM 11
S-COOKCOOL 11
SINGLE ATM 11
single atmospheric 11
SINGLE VAC 11
vacuum rotary 11
Drum filter
Filters (F) 13
Dryers (D) 15
agitated pan batch 9
atmospheric tray-type batch 9
continuous spray system 10
PAN 9
SPRAY 10
VAC-TRAY 9
vacuum tray-type batch 9
DUCT RD
DUCT SQ
Ductwork
piping 21
DUPLEX
(P) 21
Duration 13
CENTRF-PRE 6
CLOTH BAY 6
CYCLONE 9
ELC-H-VOLT 10
ELC-L-VOLT 10
MULT-CYCLO 10
PULSE SHKR 8
WASHERS 10
E
Early finish 13
Early start 14
Earned surplus 14
Earnings per share 14
Earth (dirt)
Earthmoving
EARTHWORK
Ebonite
lined steel pipe 59
ECCENTRIC
Crushers (CR) 3
Economic forecast 14
Economic indicator 14
Economic order quantity 14
Efficiency 14
Efficiency ratios 14
Ejectors (E) 12
Ejectors (EJ)
2 STAGE 4
4 STAGE 5
4-STAGE B 5
5-STAGE B 6
SINGLE STG 3
TWO STAGE 3
EL6 4
Elapsed time 14
ELC-H-VOLT
ELC-L-VOLT
ELEC-TRAY
Electrical
cable tray 4
circuit breakers 20
code of accounts 15
galvanic anode 11
ground grid 7
group of anodes in shallow surface bed 11
motor control center 20
potential measurement test station 11
rigid conduit 2, 3
solar panel 12
tracing (existing equipment) 4
tracing (existing piping run) 5
10 Index (G6)
transformer/rectifier 11
uninterupted power supply 21
Electrical Generators (EG) 20
PORTABLE 7
TURBO-GEN 7
Electrical Motors (MOT) 9
ENCLOSED 3
explosion proof 4
EXP-PROOF 4
OPEN 2
SYNCHRON 3
Synchronous motors 3
TEFC 3
TEWAC 4
VARY-SPEED 5
Electronic signal wire
Elevated access platforms
Elevators, Lifts (EL) 16
FREIGHT 13
PASSENGER 13
Ellipsoidal towers 5
Elliptical towers 5
EMER LIGHT 12
Emergency eyewash and shower units 40
Emergency light
EM-PWR-SET
ENCLOSED
Engineering
adjustments to costs 58
construction management 56
contracts 57
contracts assignment 52
detail 54
discipline adjustments 53
field office construction supervision 56
home office construction services 56
indirects 56
miscellanious expenses 56
organization 58
payroll burdens 57
phase adjustments 53
prime contractor 52
procurement 55
reports 54, 57
SPAN* 60
start-up 56
support personnel 56
workforce 53
Engineering management 52
JP 9
UK 5
US 3, 11
EOM 15
E-P-C (Engineering, procurement and
construction) 15
Epoxy resin lining 69
EQPT-TRACE
EQRENT Relation 1, 11
Equipment and setting
Equipment fabricate/ship times 10
Equipment model library 2
Equipment SUBTYPE 41
Equity 15
Equivalent dividend return 15
EROSION
landscaping - site development 11
Erosion control
Escalation 15
Escalation, cost reporting 39
EU country base
base indices 2
Euros 37
Evaporators (E) 15
agitated falling film 4
FALL-FILM 4
FORCED CIR 4
forced circulation 4
LONG TUBE 4
long tube rising film 4
long tube vertical 5
LONG-VERT 5
standard horizontal tube 6
STAND-HOR 6
STAND-VERT 5
EWF 15
EWF (engineering work force) 53
Excavation
machine 9
manual 7
Exchange resin
demineralizer 8
packed towers 8, 21
Packing (PAK) 7
Exercise price 15
Exit 15
Expected return 15
EXPL-DEMOL
Explosion-proof motors
Exponential smoothing 15
Export 16
EXP-PROOF
Extension 16
Extraction towers 3
Index (G6) 11
EXTRUDER
Mixers (MX) 29
Eyewash
WSHWR 40
F
Fabric filters
Fabricated plate items
FABR-PLATE
Factored estimating 16
FALL-FILM
Evaporators (E) 4
CENTRIF 12
CENT-TURBO 10
general purpose blower 13
heavy duty, low noise blower 10
PROPELLER 13
ROT-BLOWER 13
VANEAXIAL 14
Fast tracking 16
Feeders (FE) 17
BELT 14
BIN-ACTVTR 14
ROTARY 14
SACK-DUMP 16
SAN-BELT 17
SAN-FLOOR 21
SAN-SCREW 16
VIBRATING 15
WT-LOSS 15
FENCE-WOOD
FENCING
Fiber optic cables
Field costs 16
Field erected vessels
agitated open tanks
construction 67
floating roof tanks 28
gas holders 33
lifter roof tanks 29
open top tanks 29
storage tanks 28
tray towers 12, 24
Field Manpower Summary report
workforce 43
Field office
JP 6, 8
UK 4
US 2, 10
Field office construction supervision 56
Field services 16
Filter
presses
PLATE+FRAM 12
Screens (VS) 32
Filter Upstream 23
Filters
Sediment Removal 19
Filters (F) 18
CARTRIDGE 11
COMPRSGAS 16
LEAF-DRY 11
LEAF-WET 11
PLATE+FRAM 12
RECL-REEL 17
ROTY-DISK 12
ROTY-DRUM 13
SAN-PIPE 18
SAN-PRESS 19
SAN-STRAIN 22
SCROLL 14
SEWAGE 14
SPARKLER 15
TUBULAR 15
WHITEWATER 15
Fin fan coolers
AIR COOLER (HE) 3
FIN TUBE
Financial forecasting 16
Financial lease 16
Financial leverage 17
Financial ratios 17
Financial risk 17
Financial statements 17
Financial structure 17
Finish float 17
Finishing activity 18
Finish-to-finish lag 17
Finish-to-start lag 17
Finned double-pipe heat exchanger 23
Fireclay
lining materials 67
Fireproofing
insulation plant bulks 2
FIREP-SSTL
insulation plant bulks 2, 3
FITSPC.DAT file 13
Fitting specs file 13
Fixed costs 18
FIXED PROP
Agitators (AG) 3
Mixers (MX) 29
Fixed tube
FIXED-T-S
Heat Exchangers (HE) 4, 5, 6, 7
Flakers (FL) 14
12 Index (G6)
DRUM 7
Flares (FLR)
DERRICK 4
diameter of flare tip 2
emmisivity of flame 3
GUYED 5
height of flare stack 2
HORIZONTAL 8
introduction 2
SELF-SUPP 7
STORAGE 10
THRM-OX LC 9
vapor control 10
Flat roof tank (storage)
Vertical Tank (VT) 28
Flg. 18
FLO PANEL
FLOAT-CELL
FLOAT-HEAD
Heat Exchangers (HE) 8, 9, 10
Floating lien 18
Floating roof tank (storage)
Flue gas scrubbing systems
packed towers 8, 21
Fluid heat tracing
existing equipment 24
existing pipe runs 25
Fluidized bed reactors
demineralizers (WTS) 8
SPHERE 24
SPHEROID 26
WASHERS (DC) 10
FLUME PUMP
Centrifigal Pumps (CP) 17
Foam glass
Foam spray systems
FOAM 38
FORCED CIR
Evaporators (E) 4
Forced circulation
Evaporators (E) 4
Foundation subdrain
Foundations
civil plant bulks 3
Frame filters (F) 12
Free float 18
Free standing wall
FREIGHT
Freight
Freight elevator
Fringe benefits
Fringe benefits (FB) 18
Froude number
Full loan amortization 18
FULL-FRAME
Scales (S) 19
Funded debt 18
Funded debt to net working capital 19
Funds forecast 19
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU) 10
BOX 39
BOX - continued. 40
HEATER 40
PYROLYSIS 40
PYROLYSIS - continued. 41
REFORMER 41
VERTICAL 41
G
G & A 19
GALLERY
Galvanic anode
Gantt (bar) chart 19
GAS
Turbines (TUR) 10
Gas
standard equations for piping
diameters 44
Gas absorbers
demineralizer 8
packed columns 8, 21
axial 5
CENTIFG-IG 6
CENTRIF 5
inline 5
RECIP-GAS 9
RECIP-MOTR 8
GAS HOLDER
Gas turbine 9
GATES
GB 150 Design Code - Plate Materials 2
GB 150 Design Code - Plate Materials Carbon
Steels 2
GB 150 Design Code - Tube Materials 2
GB 150 Plate Materials - Carbon Steels 2
GB 150 Plate Materials - High Alloy Steels 2
GB 150 Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steels 2
GB 150 Tube Materials - Carbon Steels 2
GB 150 Tube Materials - High Alloy Steels 2
GB 150 Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steels 2
GC 19
GEAR
Index (G6) 13
Gear Pumps (GP) 19
GEAR DRIVE
Agitators (AG) 2
Gear Pumps (GP) 11
CANNED RTR 19
GEAR 19
MECH-SEAL 20
General conditions 19
General electrical
General service pumps 2
GEN-SERV
Globe
GMP 19
Go Back 19
Grading, site development
landscaping 11
roads - slabs - paving 12
Grassroots 19
GRATE
Grating
GRATE, steel plant bulks 15
Gravel
GRND-GRID
Ground grid
Grout
CONCRETE - civil plant bulks 3
Growth crystallizer
Grubbing
GUNITE
Gunite
lining materials 68
Gunite slope protection
Gunning mixes, linings 1, 5
Gutter (and curb)
site development 13
GUYED
Flares (FLR) 3, 5
GYRATORY
Crushers (CR) 3
H
HAMMER-MED
Crushers (CR) 6
Hammocks 20
Hand excavation
HAND GT
Hoists (HO) 18
Hand hoists
Hoists (HO) 18
HAND NT
Hoists (HO) 19
HAND PT
Hoists (HO) 18
HAND-EXCV
Hangers
Hastelloy
ASME 9
DIN 44
JIS 33
non-ferrous tube materials
ASME 14
DIN 50
HAULING
HD STOCK
(P) 24
HDPE PIPE 41
Head design, towers/columns 1, 6
Heat Exchanger (HE)
MULTI-P+F 27
AIR COOLER 3, 27
CORRUGATED 26, 27
CROSS BORE 24
FIN TUBE 23
FIXED-T-S 4
FIXED-T-S - continued 5, 6, 7
FLOAT-HEAD 8
FLOAT-HEAD - continued 9, 10
HEATER-ELC 22
HEATER-STM 22
HOT WATER 27
JACKETED 22, 23
MULTI-P+F 27
ONE SCREW 24
PLAT+FRAM 26
PRE-ENGR 20
PRE-ENGR - continued. 21
SHELL+TUBE 24
SPIRAL PLT 25
SUC-HEATER 25
TEMA-EXCH 14
TWO SCREW 24
U-TUBE 11, 37, 38
U-TUBE - continued 12, 13
WASTE HEAT 25
Heat tracing
HEATER
HEATER-ELC
14 Index (G6)
HEATER-STM
CYLINDER 5
dowtherm unit 5
Hedging approach 20
Help 20
Helper, crew mix 43
Hemispherical towers 5
Hemispheriod
speheroid vertical tanks 26
High alloy steel
ferrous tube materials
BS 25
High density polyethylene pipe 41
High density stock pump
(P) 24
High energy level process interface units
High pressure gas/liquid storage
HIGH SHEAR
Agitators (AG) 5
HIGH SPEED
Mixers (MX) 32
Histogram 20
Historical average cost of capital 20
Historical cost estimating 20
History module 6
HL-PIU
HOIST
Cranes (CE) 13
Hoists (HO) 18
Hoist
Hoist trolley
Cranes (CE) 13
Hoists (HO) 17
1 SPEED 18
5 SPEED 18, 22
HAND GT 18
HAND NT 19
HAND PT 18
HOIST 18
Home office
JP 6, 8
UK 4
Home office construction services 56
Honeywell TDC 2000/3000 process control
system 6
HORIZ-DRUM
Horizontal Tanks (HT) 2
HORIZONTAL
Flares (FLR) 8
Horizontal plate filters 12
HORIZ-DRUM 2
JACKETED 7
MULTI WALL 5
SAN-TANK 9
Hortonspheriod
spheroid vertical tanks 26
Host 20
HOT TAP
HOT WATER
HP 20
HUMMER
Screens (VS) 31
HVAC 20
Hydrogenation reactors
packed columns 8, 21
Hydrotreaters
CYLINDER 14
I
ICARUS Process Evaluator (IPE) 21
ICARUS Project Manager (IPM) 21
Icon 21
Immersion heaters
HEATER-ELC (HE) 22
Import 21
IN LINE
Incoloy
tube materials
ASME 14
BS 26
DIN 50
Income statement 21
Inconel
clad plate materials
ASME 10
JIS 34
tube materials
ASME 14
BS 26
DIN 50
JIS 38
Incremental average cost of capital 21
Indenture 21
INDIRECT
Indirect costs 21
INDIRECT Relation 13
INDIRECTS 1
Indirects 56
construction 68
INDIRECTS Relation 1
Industrial gate
Industry forecast 21
Industry ratios 22
Inflation 22
Index (G6) 15
Info 22
Inline
Input-output model 22
Installation bulks 22
INST-PANEL
Instrumentation
cable tray 3
fiber optic cables 9
Honeywell TDC 2000/3000 process control
system 6
Honeywell TDC3000 5
junction boxes 4
multifunction controllers 6
operator center 6
panel 2
pneumatic multi-tube bundle runs 3
signal wire 3
SUBTYPE 41, 45, 46
thermocouple wire 4
INST-TRAY
INST-WIRE
INSUL-AREA
insulation plant bulks 2
Insulation
code of accounts 16
existing piping 3
existing surface area 2
fireproofing 2
piping (existing) 3
structural steel (existing) 2
SUBTYPE 50
Intalox saddles
Intermediate term loan 23
Internal rate of return (IRR) 23
Intrinsic value 23
Inventory holding costs 23
Inventory reorder costs 23
Inventory shortage costs 23
INVERTING
Centrifuges (CT) 5
Ion exchangers
demineralizer 8
I-P (inch-pound)
units of measure 40
Iron
ISO 24
Issued stock 24
Item 24
Item run 24
Item symbols
process equipment 6
J
JACKETED
Heat Exchangers (HE) 22, 23
Jacketed rotary vacuum dryer
Jackhammer
JAC-VACUUM
JAW
Crushers (CR) 4
J-HAMMER
JIS 24
JIS design code
ferrous plate materials
low alloy steel 29
JP country base
units of measure 40
JUNC-BOX
Junction boxes
Jury of executive opinion method for
forecasting 24
K
KETTLE
Blenders (BL) 25
Reboilers (RB) 30, 31, 32, 34
Kettle reboiler
Reboilers (RB) 30
Kneaders (K) 8
STATIONARY 28
TILTING 28
VAC-TILTING 28
KV 24
KVA 25
KW 25
Kynar
lined steel pipe 59
Kynar sheet lining 69
L
Labor burden 25
Labor cost 25
LADDER
Ladders 15
caged 6, 15
Lag 25
Lagging indicator 25
LANDSCAPE
Late start 25
LAUNDER RD
16 Index (G6)
LAUNDER SQ
Launders
piping 34
LD STOCK
Screens (VS) 32
Lead
linings 6
Leading indicator 25
LEAF-DRY
Fitlers (F) 11
LEAF-WET
Filters (F) 11
Lease 26
Lease capitalization 26
Lease capitalization rate 26
Level
sensor loop descriptions 14
Leverage 26
Leverage ratios 26
Libraries
equipment model 2
unit cost 2
Library 26
Lien 26
LIFT
Lifter roof tank (storage)
Lighting
(area) electrical plant bulks 8
Limestone
Line of credit 26
Line siding crossing
Lining materials
fireclay 67
gunite 68
Linings
acid brick 5, 8
brick 1, 6, 9
castable refractories 5, 9
firebrick 9
fluorocarbon 1, 5
glass 9, 69
gunning mixes 1, 5, 8
introduction 7
Lead 1, 6
lead 6
organic 9
refractory brick 6
resin 6
rubber 6
zinc 6
Link 26
Liquid
standard equations for pipe diameters 44
Liquidation value 27
Liquidity 27
Liquidity ratios 27
Live bottom
LIVE BTM
Vertical Tanks (VT) 36, 37
LL-PIU
LNG Tank 44
Loaded labor rate 27
Loan amortization 27
Local control network (LCN) 18
Lock-box system 27
Log 27
LONG TUBE
Evaporators (E) 4
Long tube rising film
Evaporators (E) 4
Long tube vertical
Evaporators (E) 5
LONG-VERT
Evaporators (E) 5
Low alloy steel
plate materials
JIS 29
tube materials
BS 24
Low consistency stock pump
Low energy level process interface units
Lump sum quotation
site development
demolition 3
drainage 5
earthwork 6
landscaping 11
railroads 17
M
Machine excavation
MACH-PULP
MAG DRIVE
Main substation 27
power distribution 31
Maintenance lease 28
Making a market 28
Manholes
towers 5
Marginal average cost of capital 28
Marginal cost of capital 28
Mark text 28
Market extension merger 28
Market value 28
Index (G6) 17
Mark-up 28
Materials of construction
towers 6
Maturity value of a bond 28
MCC 28
ME Country Base 10
MECHANICAL
Refigeration Units (RU) 6
Vacuum Pumps (VP) 7
Mechanical
seal agitators, MECH-SEAL (AG) 3
Mechanical booster 7
Mechanical engineering 29
Mechanical oil-sealed vacuum pump 7
mechanical scraped-surface crystallizer
MECH-BOOST
Vacuum Pumps (VP) 7
MECH-SEAL
Agitators (AG) 3
Gear Pumps (GP) 20
Mercalli Number
seismic data 15
METAL TRAP
Filters (F) 17
Metalic chests
Vertical Tanks (VT) 42, 43
METRIC
units of measure 40
Micro-scheduling 29
MIKRO-PULV
Mills (M) 8
Milestones 29
Mill building
MILL-BLDG
Mills (M) 14
ATTRITION 7
attrition mill 7
AUTOGENOUS 8
autogenous mill 8
BALL MILL 8
ball mill 8
MIKRO-PULV 8
rod charger 8
ROD MILL 8
rod mill 8
ROD-CHARGR 8
ROLLER 8
roller mill 8
Mineral wool
Minimum market value 29
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous equipment
construciton equipment 12
Miscellaneous expenses 56
Miscellaneous indirect costs 29
MISC-STEEL
MIXER
Agitated Tanks (AT) 8, 9
Mixers (MX) 8
EXTRUDER 29
FIXED PROP 29
HIGH SPEED 32
MULLER EXT 29
PAN 29
PISTON HOM 34
PORT-PROP 29
SHEAR HOM 35
SIGMA 30
SPIRAL RIB 30
STATIC 30
TWO-ROLL 32
Mobilization/Demobilization 29
Molecular sieve
Monel
tube materials
ASME 14
DIN 50
JIS 38
Monolithic 8
Mortgage bond 29
Motion
axial, radial, vibration
sensor loop descriptions 17, 18, 19, 20
Mouse 29
Moving averages 30
MPS 30
MULCH
MULLER EXT
Mixers (MX) 29
MULT-CYCLO
MULTI WALL
Multifunction controllers
MULTI-P+F
Heat Exchanger (HE) 27
Multiple Diameter Trayed or Packed 15
Multiple workforces 40
Multi-project analysis 30
N
Near-atmospheric liquid storage
Negative float 30
18 Index (G6)
Negatively correlated projects 30
NEMA 30
Neoprene rubber
lined steel pipe 59
Neoprene sheet lining 69
Net cash flows 30
Net present value (NPV) 30
Net working capital (NWC) 31
Net working capital turnover 31
Net worth 31
Net worth turnover 31
Network 31
Network analysis 31
Network diagram 31
NEWCOA Relation 1, 10
Nickel
plate materials
BS 21
JIS 33
tube materials
ASME 14
BS 26
DIN 50
JIS 38
NON-COND
Turbines (TUR) 9
Non-condensing turbine 9
Non-reversible hammermill
Crushers (CR) 6
Norman-type mixer
Mixers (MX) 32
Nozzles
towers 5
Number of walkways
AIR COOLER 3
O
OFF-MACH
Agitated Tanks (AT) 17, 18
Offsites 31
OH 31
OIL C BRKR 19
OIL-WATER
Separation Equipment (SE) 28
ONE DECK
Screens (VS) 31
ONE SCREW
OPEN
OPEN BELT
Conveyors (CO) 2
Open excavations
Open structure
steel plant bulks 2
OPEN TOP
Open top tank (storage)
Open-end mortgage bond 32
Operating lease 32
Operating leverage 32
Operational unit area 32
Operator center
Operator centers 14, 15, 18
defining 21, 22
major cost items 18
OPN-STL-ST
steel plant bulks 2
Opportunity cost 32
Option menu 32
Order of magnitude
-30 to +50 percent estimate 32
Organizational goal 32
Organized exchange 32
Origin 33
OSHA 33
OSLO
OT 33
OTHER
Overhead 33
P
P&ID 33
PAC's 33
PACKAGED
PACKED
PACKING
Packing
activated aluminas 4
activated carbon 4
berl saddle 4
ACID BRICK 8
activated aluminas 4
activated carbon 4
Berl saddle 4
Intalox saddle 3
OTHER 9
PACKING 7
Pall ring 3
Raschig rings 3
ring type packing 2
Saddle type 2
Packings
tower internals 4
Paid-in capital 33
Paid-in surplus 33
Paint
Index (G6) 19
code of accounts 16
grades 2
Pall rings 72
introduction 3
packing materials 4
PAN
Dryers (D) 9
Mixers (MX) 29
Panel
solar, electrical plant bulks 12
PANEL BRD 12
Par value 34
Parallel activities 34
PASSENGER
Path 34
PAVING
site development 14
Payback method (PM) 34
Payroll burdens 57
PC 34
Percent-of-sales method for forecasting 34
Permits
Perpetual bond 34
Perpetual warrants 34
PF-CORRECT
Power factor connection capacitor 21
PFD 34
Phase 0 34
Phase I 35
Phase II 35
Piles, site development
piling 15
PILING
PIPE
Pipe
supports, steel plant bulks 10, 11
Pipe envelope
area specifications 7
Pipe rack
steel plant bulks 6
pipe routing type 13
Pipe runs
Pipe strainer, sanitary
Filters (F) 22
PIPE TRACE
PIPEDATA.SET file 13
Pipeline reactors
jackedted pipe heat exchanger (HE) 22, 23
PIPE-RACK
steel plant bulks 6
PIPE-SUPPT
steel plant bulks 10, 11
PIPE-TRACE
Piping
above-grade 3, 6
buried 3
buried concrete 20
coat and wrap 34
control valve size 6
DUCT RD 21
DUCT SQ 22, 23
ductwork 21
fluid heat tracing 25
hot tap 34
launders 34
paint 2
PIPE TRACE 25
Pipeline 50, 51, 52
process ductwork 21
tracing existing piping run 5
transfer lines 3
UTIL PIPE 19, 20
utility headers 19
well head 36
YARD PIPE 3
yard pipe runs 3
(P) 11
DIAPHRAGM 22
DUPLEX 21
HD STOCK 24
ROTARY 23
SIMPLEX 21
SLURRY 22
TRIPLEX 21
PKG-TRANSF
Plant bulk 35
PLANTING
PLAST TANK
Plastic storage tank
PLAT+FRAM
Plate
and frame filters (F) 12
and frame heat exchanger 26
and frame heat exchanger, sanitary 27
spiral heat exchanger 25
towers, tray towers 24
PLATE+FRAM
Filters (F) 12
PLATFORM
PLC 26, 35
20 Index (G6)
PLC control centers 26
Plot plan 35
Plunger pump, reciprocating
Piston, Other Positive Displacment Pumps
(P) 23
PM/PE 35
PNEUMATIC
Conveyors (CO) 7
Pneumatic portable tool
PNU-TUBING
PO 35
POLE LINE 19
POLE-LINE
Polypropylene
lined steel pipe 59
POND
Porcelain
packing materials 72, 73
PORTABLE
Portfolio effect 35
Portfolio risk 36
PORT-PROP
Agitators (AG) 3
Mixers (MX) 29
Positive float 36
POT-TEST
electrcial plant bulks 11
Pounds Sterling
currency base 37
POURED
Power distribution
country base location differences 29
default 35
main substation 31
primary feeders 31
reporting 36
transmission lines 31
unit substations 31
unreferenced area requiring power 35
usage instructions 34
Power factor 36
Power factor connection capacitor 21
Power function
Power number
PRECAST
Precast concrete piles
Precautionary motive 36
Precedence notation 36
Predecessor 36
PRE-ENGR
Heat Exchangers (HE) 20, 21
Preface iii
Preferred stock 36
Preprocessor 36
Present value 36
PRESSURE
Screens (VS) 32
Pressure
drum
vessel
Price 37
Primary KV 37
Primary market 37
Prime contractor
engineering 52, 57
Prime rate 37
Privilege level 37
Pro forma financial statements 37
Process control
area types 3
considerations 16
control centers 14, 16, 17, 23, 24
default 14
example 18, 20, 21
introduction 14
operator centers 14, 18, 21, 22
overview 14
project control data 19
reporting 21
volumetric models 15
Process ductwork
piping 21
Process engineering 37
Process equipment 37
code of accounts 8
item symbols 6
symbols 6
Process fluid 37
Process interface units
high enery level 9
low enery level 9
Procurement 55
JP 8
UK 4
US 3, 11
Product extension 37
Productivity 38
other variables 47
reporting 43
workforce 40, 42
Profit margin 38
Index (G6) 21
Profitability ratios 38
Program evaluation and review technique
(PERT) 38
PROJDATA Relation 1
PROJDATA Relations 10
Project 38
Project database 38
Project definition
country base 37
currency base 37
reporting 39
units of measure 40
Project estimate 38
Project manager 38
Project run 39
Project schedule
barcharts 9, 11
impacting 12
introduction 9
Promissory note 39
PROPELLER
Proxy 39
PULP STOCK
Agitators (AG) 4
Separation Equipment (SE) 26, 27
PULSE SHKR
Pulse type units
PULVERIZER
Crushers (CR) 6
Pumps
oil-sealed 7
water-sealed 7
PVC
PYROLYSIS
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU) 40, 41
Q
QA/QC 39
Queue 39
Quick ratio 39
Quit 39
R
Radial network
RAILROADS
Rapid growth stocks 39
Raschig rings 72
introduction 3
RAYMOND
RCON PIPE
Reactors
CYLINDER, Vertical Tanks (VT) 14
HORIZ-DRUM, Horizontal Tanks (HT) 2
jacketed horizontal vessel, JACKETED
(HT) 7
jacketed vertical vessel, JACKETED
(VT) 21
OPEN TOP
AgitatedTanks (AT) 11
packed towers 8, 21
tray towers 12, 24
Reboilers (RB) 10
KETTLE 30
KETTLE - continued 31, 32, 34
THERMOSIPH 34
U-TUBE 35, 36
Receivers
Recession 39
RECIP-CONV
Centrifuges (CT) 4
RECIP-GAS
RECIP-MOTR
(P) 24
Reciprocating
Gas Compressors (GC) 8, 9
RECL-REEL
Filters (F) 17
Rectangular chests
RECTIFIER
Rectifier
Recuperative thermal oxidizer
Flares (FLR) 9
Red herring 40
Redundancy
introduction 32
simple radial system 32
spot network system 32
REFINER
Refiners
Refit 40
REFORMER
Refrigeration Units (RU) 20
CENT-COMPR 6
22 Index (G6)
centrifugal compression 6
MECHANICAL 6
mechanical compression 6
Registered bond 40
Regression analysis 40
Relations 6
Relationship of Database 6
Relief
standard equations for pipe diameter 45
REMARKS Relation 1, 9
Remote shop
materials 40
REMOVAL
Reorganization 40
REPGRP Relation 1, 12
Report groups 8
Reporting
engineering 57
project schedule
barcharts 11
workforce 43
Rescheduling 40
Residual assets 40
Residual theory of dividends 41
Resins
demineralizer 8
Resistance temperature detector
Resource 41
Resource based duration 41
Resource leveling 41
Resurfacing
site development 14
RETAIN
Retaining wall
Retrofit 41
Return on net working capital 41
Return on net worth 41
Return on total assets 41
Revamp 41
Reverse osmosis systems
HORIZ-DRUM, Horizontal Tanks (VT) 2
Reversible hammermill
Crushers (CR) 6
REV-HAMR
Crushers (CR) 5
Revolving credit 42
Reynolds number
Ribbon blenders
SPIRAL RIB
Mixers (MX) 30
Rietz single screw
ONE SCREW (HE) 24
Rights offering 42
Ring granulator
Crushers (CR) 7
Rings
Inert 2
Intalox saddle 3
introduction 2
Pall, packing materials 3
Raschig, packing materials 3
Saddle type 2
RIP-ROCK
Risk averter 42
Risk neutral 42
Risk-adjusted discount rate 42
Risk-free interest rate 42
Risk-seeker 42
Rock excavation
Rod charger
Mills (M) 8
Rod crushers
Crushers (CR) 8
ROD MILL
Mills (M) 8
Rod mill
Mills (M) 8
ROD-CHARGR
Mills (M) 8
ROG 42
ROLL RING
Crushers (CR) 7
ROLLER
Conveyors (CO) 8
Mills (M) 8
Roller conveyor
Conveyors (CO) 9
Roller mill
Mills (M) 8
Roofing
ROTARY
Blenders (BL) 25
Crushers (CR) 4
Feeders (FE) 14
(P) 23
piston, other positive displacement pumps
(P) 23
Rotary breaker
Crushers (CR) 6
Rotary double-cone
Blenders (BL) 25
Rotary drum
Blenders (BL) 25
Rotary drum cooker-cooler
Drum Dryers (DD) 11
Index (G6) 23
Conical rotary vacuum 13
DIRECT 13
INDIRECT 13
Jacketed rotary vacuum 14
JAC-VACUUM 13
VACUUM 13
Rotary vane feeder
Feeders (FE) 14
ROTARYBOWL
Blenders (BL) 26
ROT-BLOWER
ROTY-DISK
Filters (F) 12
ROTY-DRUM
Filters (F) 13
RTABLE 1
RTABLE Relation 14, 21
RTD 9
resistance temperature detector 7
Rubber
linings 6, 9
Run 42
Runs of pipe
S
S BELTCONV
Conveyors (CO) 10
S INCLINE
Conveyors (CO) 11
S VERTICAL
Conveyors (CO) 10
S VIBRATRY
Conveyors (CO) 11
Saddle
Berl 4
Intalox 3, 4
packing 2
Safety stock 43
Sale and leaseback 43
Sale of assets 43
Sales force composite method for
forecasting 43
Sales forecast 43
Salvage value 43
Sand
SAN-FIXED
Agitators (AG) 6
Sanitary bulk bag unloader
Feeders (FE) 16
Sanitary centrifugal pump
Sanitary corrugated double pipe exchanger
Sanitary counter-rotating agitator
Agitators (AG) 5
Sanitary direct steam heat module
Sanitary dumper
Feeders (FE) 15
Sanitary filter press
Filters (F) 19
Sanitary fixed propeller/turbine mixer
Agitators (AG) 6
Sanitary floor scale
Scales (S) 21
Sanitary fluming pump
Centrifigal Pumps (CP) 17
Sanitary fluming reclaim reel
RECL-REEL 17
Sanitary highshear homogenizing agitator
Agitators (AG) 5
Sanitary horizontal conveyor
Conveyors (CO) 10
Sanitary incline conveyor
Conveyors (CO) 11
Sanitary in-line metal trap
Filters (F) 17
Sanitary kettle blender
Blenders (BL) 25
Sanitary multi-zone plate+frame exchanger
Heat Exchanger (HE) 27
Sanitary pipe filter
Filters (F)
SAN-PIPE 18
Sanitary pipe strainer
Filters (F) 22
Sanitary piston-type homogenizer
Mixers (MX) 34
Sanitary portable propeller
Agitatators (AG) 7
Sanitary process equipment
Agitators (AG)
COUNT-ROT 5
HIGH SHEAR 5
SAN-FIXED 6
SAN-PORT 7
Blenders (BL)
KETTLE 25
MSHELSTAG 27
ROTARYBOWL 26
FLUME PUMP 17
SAN-PUMP 15
Conveyors (CO)
S BELTCONV 10
S INCLINE 11
S VERTICAL 10
S VIBRATRY 11
Drum Dryers (DD)
S-COOKCOOL 11
Feeders (FE)
DUMPER 15
24 Index (G6)
SACK-DUMP 16
SAN-BELT 17
SAN-SCREW 16
Filters (F)
METAL TRAP 17
RECL-REEL 17
SAN-PIPE 18
SAN-PRESS 19
SAN-STRAIN 22
CORRUGATED 26
HOT WATER 27
MULTI-P+F 27
STM-HE-MOD 29
SAN-TANK 9
Mixers (MX)
HIGH SPEED 32
PISTON HOM 34
RIBBON 32, 33, 34
SHEAR HOM 35
(P)
AIR DIAPH 26
ROTARYLOBE 25
Scales (S)
SAN-FLOOR 21
Vertical Tanks (VT)
SAN-TANK 43
Sanitary ribbon blender
Mixers (MX) 32, 33, 34
Sanitary rotary bowl blender
Blenders (BL) 26
Sanitary screw feeder
SAN-SCREW 16
Sanitary shear pump homogenizer
SHEAR HOM 35
Sanitary vertical conveyor
Conveyors (CO) 10
Sanitary vertical cylindrical vessel
Sanitary vibratory conveyor
Conveyors (CO) 11
Sanitary, multi-shell, staggered blender
Blenders (BL) 27
SAN-PIPE
Filters (F) 18
SAN-PRESS
Filters (F) 19
SAN-PUMP
SAN-SCREW
Feeders (FE) 16
SAN-TANK
Horizontal Tanks (VT) 9
Saran
lined steel pipe 59
SAWTOOTH
Crushers (CR) 5
SC 43
SCAFFOLD
civil plant bulks 5
Scaffolding
civil labor 5
Scales (S) 17
BEAM SCALE 19
BELT 19
BENCH 19
FULL-FRAME 19
SEMI-FRAME 19
TANK SCALE 20
TRACK 20
TRUCK 20
Scan 43
Scheduling 43
S-COOKCOOL
Drum Dryers (DD) 11
Scope 44
Scraped surface crystallizer
SCRAPER LR
Screen bowl
Centrifuges (CT) 5
SCREEN-BWL
Centrifuges (CT) 5
Screens (VS) 19
BAR 32
HUMMER 31
LD STOCK 32
ONE DECK 31
PRESSURE 32
SIFTER-1 31
SIFTER-2 31
SIFTER-3 31
THREE DECK 31
TWO DECK 31
SCREW
Conveyors (CO) 8
Screw heater
one screw thermascrew 24
two screw thermascrew 24
SCROLL
Filters (F) 14
Scroll conveyor
Centrifuges (CT) 4
Scroll discharge centrifugal filter
Filters (F) 14, 16
SCROLL-CON
Centrifuges (CT) 4
SEALCOAT
site development 14
Seasonal dating 44
Secondary markets 44
Security 44
SEDIMENT 19
Index (G6) 25
Sediment Removal 19, 23
SEEDING
Seismic data 15
Select 44
SELF-SUPP
Flares (FLR) 3, 7
SEMI-FRAME
Scales (S) 19
Semivariable costs 44
Sensitivity analysis in cash budgeting 44
Sensor loop descriptions
pressure 10
OIL-WATER 28
PULP STOCK 26, 27
WATER-CYCL 27
Septic tank
SEPTIC-TNK
Sequence 44
SEWAGE
Filters (F) 14
Sewage filter
Filters (F) 14
Shaker type filters
SHEAR HOM
Mixers (MX) 35
Shell and head design
towers 6
SHELL+TUBE
SHORING
SIDEWALKS
site development 14
SIDING
Siding and roofing
SIDING-HVY
Sieve
molecular, packing materials 73
Sieve trays 3
SIFTER-1
Screens (VS) 31
SIFTER-2
Screens (VS) 31
SIFTER-3
Screens (VS) 31
SIGMA
Mixers (MX) 30
SIGNAL
Signal wire
Silencers
CYLINDER, Vertical Tanks (VT) 14, 43
Silica gel
S-IMPACT
Crushers (CR) 6
Simple radial, redundancy 32
SIMPLEX
(P) 21
SINGLE 1-S
SINGLE 2-S
SINGLE ATM
Drum Dryers (DD) 11
DC HE TW 27
PACKED 21
TRAY STACK 27
TRAYED 24
TS ADSORB 30
Single roll crushers
Crushers (CR) 4
SINGLE STG
Ejectors (EJ) 3
SINGLE VAC
Drum Dryers (DD) 11
Sinking fund 45
Site development 45
Site/office equipment
SITE-EXCVN
Skirts
towers 5
Slippage 45
SLURRY
(P) 22
Slurry
standard equations for pipe diameters 44
Small tools
Snubbers
SODDING
Softeners
demineralizers 8
packed towers 8, 21
water softening systems 8
SOFTENING
Softening treatment system
Soil
26 Index (G6)
site development
stabilization 6
sterilization 11
Solar panel
SOLAR-PANL
SOLID BOWL
Centrifuges (CT) 4
Solvent extraction towers 3
Source of funds 45
Sources and use of funds statement 45
SPAN* 60
SPARKLER
Filters (F) 15
Spary
chambers, washers (DC) 10
Special reports 45
Speculative motive for holding cash 45
SPHERE
SPHEROID
Spheroids
hemispheriod 26
hortonspheriod 26
SPHOS 40, 41
SPIRAL PLT
SPIRAL RIB
Mixers (MX) 30
Spiral ribbon mixer
SPIRAL RIB
Mixers (MX) 30
Spot network
SPRAY
Dryers (D) 10
Sprinkler system
SPRNK 3, 36
SQL 45
S-ROLL-HVY
Crushers (CR) 5
S-ROLL-LT
Crushers (CR) 4, 5
S-ROLL-MED
Crushers (CR) 5
SRSC 5
SRST 5
SS 45
STABILIZE
Stable dollar dividend policy 46
STACK
Stacks (STK) 10
Stacks (STK) 21
height calculation 2
STACK 10
thickness 4
Stainless steel
clad plate materials
BS 22
DIN 46
STAIR
Stairs
Standard basis 46
Standard horizontal tube evaporator
Evaporators (E) 6
STAND-HOR
Evaporators (E) 6
Standpipe
SPHOS 40
STAND-VERT
Evaporators (E) 5
Start float 46
Starting activity 46
Start-to-start lag 46
Start-up 56
JP 9
US 3, 11
STATIC
Mixers (MX) 30
Station
potential measurement test
STATIONARY
Kneaders (K) 28
Statutory consolidation 46
Statutory merger 46
Steam
plant, Water Treatment Systems (WTS) 8
standard equations for piping
diameters 45
BOILER 4
field erected 4
packaged boiler 4
STM BOILER 4
Steam turbine 9
Steel
boxes 16
chutes 16
columns, beams, bracing 2, 16
elevated access platforms 13
fabricated plate items 16
fireproofing for existing stuctural steel 2
gallery structure 14
grate 15
ladders 15
mill building 12
open structure 2
pipe rack 6
Index (G6) 27
siding and roofing 17
stairs 15
transfer tower 15
STEEL-H
STERILIZE
Stirred vessels
agitated open tanks
STM BOILER
Stock dividend 46
Stock markets 47
Stock pumps
high density 24
low consistency 14
Stock right 47
Stock split 47
DEFLAKE-CN 10
DEFLAKE-DK 9
REFINER 9
Stockholders_quity 47
Stone
Stoneware
STOPS
railraods - site development 17
STORAGE
Flares (FLR) 10
Stripping towers 3
STRIP-SOIL
STRUC-EXC
Structure
open, steel plant bulks 2
Structures
civil plant bulks 3
Sub-critical activity 47
SUBDRAIN
Subordinated debenture 48
SUBPAVING
site development 14
Subproject 48
Subscription price 48
Substations
power distribution
main 31
unit 31
SUBSTN STL 19
SUBTYPE
database relation attributes 45, 46, 47, 48,
49, 50, 51, 52
Successor 48
SUC-HEATER
Summary funds statement 48
Summary reports
code of accounts 5
Sump pit
SUMP-PIT
Super-critical activity 48
Support personnel 56
SURF-ANODE
SW 48
Swing jaw crusher
Crushers (CR) 4
SWING-HAMR
Crushers (CR) 6
Switch board 21
Symbol
process equipment 6
SYNCHRON
Synchronous motors 3
System base indices, cost reporting 39
T
Take-off 48
Tank containment
civil 5
TANK SCALE
Scales (S) 20
TAR-CHIP
site development 14
Target finish roject 49
Target finish ctivity 48
Target start ctivity 49
Taxes and permits
TC 7, 9
TC16 5
TEFC 49
TEFC (totally-enclosed fan-cooled)
Teflon
lined steel pipe 59
Teflon sheet lining 69
Telescoping gas holder
Tellerettes H.D. 73
TEMA 49
TEMA-EXCH
Temperature swing adsorbtion unit 30
Temporary construction 49
Tender offer 49
Terminal warehouse receipt 49
Test borings
28 Index (G6)
Test station
TEWAC 49
TEWAC (totally enclosed water cooled)
generated for API 610 pump 5
Text string 49
THCPL-WIRE
Thermascrew (Rietz) singel screw (HE) 24
Thermocouple
Thermocouple wire
THERMOSIPH
Reboilers (RB) 34
Thermosiphon reboilers
Reboilers (RB) 34
THICKENER
Thickeners (T) 29
Thickeners (T) 19
THICKENER 29
THIN FILM
This 5, 1
THREE DECK
Screens (VS) 31
THRM-OX LC
Flares (FLR) 9
Tile Chests
TILTING
Kneaders (K) 28
Time value of money 50
Times interest earned 50
Titanium
plate materials
BS 21
DIN 45
tube materials
ASME 14
DIN 50
JIS 38
Tools, small
TOP UNLOAD
Centrifuges (CT) 3
TOPSOIL
Torispherical towers 5
Total assets turnover 50
Total debt to total assets ratio 50
Total float 50
Total stockholders_quity 50
Towers
absorption 3
adsorption 3
applications 1, 2
appurtenances 6
convey transfer, steel plant bulks 15
description of 1, 5
desorption 3
distillation 2
ellipsoidal 5
elliptical 5
extraction 3
fractionator 3
functions 5
hemispherical 5
internals 1, 3
manholes 5
materials of construction 6
nozzles 5
packings 4
shell and head design 6
sieve trays 4
skirt 5
solvent extraction 3
stripping 3
torispherical 5
trays 3
TRACE CNTR 13
TRACE PANL 12
Tracing
existing equipment 4
existing piping run 5
TRACK
Scales (S) 20
Track scale
Scales (S) 20
Track yard siding
Trade acceptance 50
Trailer
Transaction loans 50
Transactional motive for holding cash 50
Transfer lines
Transfer tower
TRANSFORM 19
Transmission line
overhead - electrical plant bulks 5, 21
Transmission lines
Travelling bridge crane
Cranes (CE) 13
Tray
cable, electrical plant bulks 4
ATM-SYSTEM 14
batch tray 14
TURBO 14
turbo drying system 14
Index (G6) 29
VAC-SYSTEM 14
VACUUM 14
TRAY STACK
TRAYED
Trays
tower internals 3
Treasury stock 51
Tree diagram 51
TRENCH
civil plant bulks 5
TRENCH-EXC
Trenching
civil 5
Trend projection 51
TRIPLEX
Piston, Other Positive Displacment Pumps
(P) 21
TRNS-TOWER
TRUCK
Scales (S) 20
Truck
Truck scale
Scales (S) 20
Trust receipt 51
Trustee 51
TS ADSORB
T-T 48
Tube materials
DIN
non-ferrous 50
TUBULAR
Centrifuges (CT) 5
Filters (F) 15
Tubular
exchangers (HE) 4
Tubular fabric filters
Filters (F) 15
TURBINE
Turbines (TUR) 9
CONDENSING 9
GAS 10
NON-COND 9
non-condensing 9
steam turbine 9
TURBO
Turbo drying system
TURBOEXPANDER 10
TURBO-GEN
TURNOUT
TWO DECK
Screens (VS) 31
TWO SCREW
TWO STAGE
Ejectors (EJ) 3
TWO-ROLL
Mixers (MX) 32
U
UBC Zone
seismic data 15
UK country base
units of measure 40
Underground cable duct 12
Underwriting syndicate 51
Unit cost database 51
Unit cost library 2
Unit substation 51
Unit substations
Units of measure
Unsecured loan 52
UPS
US country base
units of measure 40
Uses of funds 52
UTIL PIPE
Piping plant bulks 19
Utility headers
piping 19, 51
Utility station drop length 19
U-TUBE
Heat Exchangers (HE) 11, 12, 13, 37, 38
Reboilers (RB) 35, 36
Reboilers (RB) - continued. 35, 36
V
VAC-SYSTEM
VAC-TILTNG
Kneaders (K) 28
VAC-TRAY
Dryers (D) 9
VACUUM
Vacuum Pumps (VP) 13
MECHANICAL 7
MECH-BOOST 7
WATER-SEAL 7
Vacuum tray batch dryer
Dryers (D) 9
Value 52
Value engineering 52
30 Index (G6)
Valve trays 3
VANEAXIAL
Vaneaxial fan
Vapor control flare
Flares (FLR) 10
Variable cash budget 52
Variable costs 52
Variable payment sinking fund 52
VARY-SPEED
Vendor representatives 52
VERTICAL
Vertical merger 52
CHEST-CYL 40
CHEST-MTL 42
CHEST-REC 38
cone bottom 34
CONE BTM 34
cone roof (storage) 29
CRYOGENIC 31
CYLINDER 14
flat roof (storage) 28
floating roof (storage) 28
GAS HOLDER 33
high pressure gas/liquid storage 24
JACKETED 21
lifter roof (storage) 29
LIVE BTM 36, 37
MULTI WALL 18
near-atmospheric liquid storage 28
open top (storage) 29
PLAST TANK 32
plastic storage 32
pressure/vacuum service 14
SAN-TANK 43
SPHERE 24
SPHEROID 26
STORAGE 28
telescoping gas holder 33
tile chests 38
WOOD TANK 33
wooden (storage) 33
Vessel base
design code
ASME 10
BS 22
JIS 34
Vessels
agitated open tanks
demineralizers (WTS) 8
pressure
sphere, Vertical Tanks (VT) 24
spheroid, Vertical Tanks (VT) 26
tray or packed towers 8, 12, 21, 24
vacuum
Vessels Multiple Diameter Trayed or Packed 15
VIBRATING
Conveyors (CO) 8
Feeders (FE) 15
Vibrating conveyor
Conveyors (CO) 8
Vibrating feeder
Feeders (FE) 15
VIBRATORY
Centrifuges (CT) 5
Volumetric belt feeder
Feeders (FE) 14
Volumetric models 15
W
Wage rates
reporting 43
workforces 40, 42
Walkways, gallery 15
Wall, free standing
WASHERS
WASTE HEAT
Water heater
Water supply well, cased
AERATOR 8
DEMINERAL 8
SOFTENING 8
WATER-CYCL
Water-only cyclones
Separation Equipment (SE) 22, 28
WATER-SEAL
Vacuum Pumps (VP) 7
Water-sealed vacuum pump 7
WATER-WELL
Weight belt
sanitary 17
Weighted cost of capital 53
Welding equipment
construction equipment 9, 10
WELL HEAD
piping plant bulks 36, 38, 40, 41
WELLPOINTS
WELLS
WFE-SYSTEM
Index (G6) 31
White water filter
Filters (F) 15
WHITEWATER
Filters (F) 15
Windows NT workstation 53
agitated thin film evaporator 7
THIN FILM 7
WFE-SYSTEM 7
Wire mesh fencing
WOOD
WOOD TANK
Work breakdown structure (WBS) 53
Work items
concept 49
Work load 53
Work unit 53
Work week adjustments
workforce 51
Workforce
craft names 43
craft productivity 50
craft wage rates 42
crew mix modifications 42
multiple workforces 40
productivity 40
productivity concepts 43
reporting 43
wage rates 40, 42
work items 49
work week adjustments 51
Working capital 53
Working capital management 53
WSHWR 40, 41
WT-LOSS
Feeders (FE) 15
Y
YARD PIPE
Yen
currency base 37
Yield to maturity 54
Z
Zero float 54
Zero growth stocks 54
Zero-base budgeting 54
Zinc
coating - lining 69
linings 6
32 Index (G6)

AspenIcarusV8 0 Ref

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

AspenIcarusV8 0 Ref

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Aspen Icarus

, an engineering start date must be specified. (Specifying a construction

S-ar putea să vă placă și